ã€ŠRise of the Vampiresã€‹


 Chapter 1: A New "Life"

    Hey there! This is my first fiction, just so you know. Well except for some essayes I did when I was in school. And you could say that this is highly and also lightly inspired by A Vamp''s Ire. The beginning is very similar, almost a complete rip of, but that is only the first and a bit of the second chapter though. After all A Vamp''s Ire only has like 2 chapters at the moment, and I already wrote two chaps.

    So yeah, please tell me what you think, review and all that. Also if you see any errors feel free to post them if you want. It''s a bit tiresome to re read the chapters several times so I might miss some.

    Also thanks for reading :)

    Chapter 1: A New ¡°Life¡±

    The forest was quite murky. I knew these paths well, I came here quite often after all. I was in the forest right next to my home, poaching. I lived in a farm. It was just my parents, brother, sister and me. We were poor, so we couldn¡¯t afford any farm hands. Life was a bit hard, but we managed.

    My father¡¯s right arm was limp, because a few years ago, when my sister was only five years old, she had decided to climb a tree. It¡¯s still a mystery to us, how she managed to get up there since the branches were too high for her to reach, but somehow she managed. This tree was quite high, six meters, and she got to the top. When my mother saw this she panicked and screamed for my father. He ran out as quickly as he could. When he saw my sister shock flashed through his eyes, and he ran up to the tree. He tried to make her climb back down, saying that he would catch her if she fell, but she was too scared and stayed up there. In the end he decided to climb up after her. After some struggle, he managed to get up to her, but when he grabbed her, a strong gust of wind blew in his face and he slipped. We heard a high pitched scream and then a thump! Father had landed right on his arm, it was shattered.

    We rushed him to the healer in the closest village as fast as we could on our measly horse carriage. It was a two hour trip, and father was grimacing in pain the entire way there. Luckily father was quite good friends with this old healer, they grew up together, so he didn¡¯t charge us anything. But even then, the damage was too big. The healer managed to stop the pain and mostly heal the fractures, but he would never be able to use his arm again. This was majorly bad news for us! I was only fifteen that year and my brother was seventeen. Luckily I was often out hunting with father, and my perceptiveness was even a bit better than his, so I was a natural hunter. My brother was also pretty good at all the farm stuff, he actually liked it. This way we managed to get by, with me going poaching from time to time, making sure not to get caught, while my brother and father did all the farm work, even thou father couldn¡¯t do as much anymore.

    This was five years prior. Now I was in the Murky Forest that I had come to call it. I didn¡¯t know its real name. I was scouring the forest for any animals. It wasn¡¯t exactly legal for me to hunt here, but it isn¡¯t like anyone was counting the animals. The few animals I killed every year wouldn¡¯t be missed. I was sure of that.

    All of a sudden I heard a rustle a few meters to my left. I quickly turned and my eyes flashed. I saw a big elk standing there, below a tall tree, drinking water from a small stream. It wasn¡¯t the biggest I had ever seen, but if I could kill it, it would certainly be the biggest I ever killed. I got excited and quickly notched an arrow and took aim.

    All of a sudden a cold flash went through my body and there was a bright light, illuminating my surroundings. Immediately after was went a current of immeasurable heat through my body, the pain was extreme, more than anything I had ever felt before. I watched as my arrow flew towards the elk and hit it in the neck, as I had lost hold of it, then I fell to my knees. The last thing I heard before my last bit of consciousness slipped away was a thundering boom. Then it hit me. I had been hit by lightning.

    As my consciousness slipped away, I could still feel that the lightning was flashing through my body, and then the lighting gripped around a small fire in the back of my mind. As this happened I completely awoke. It was as if the lighting was keeping me awake and conscious. I let out a deep scream of immeasurable pain. I could feel that the lighting had started devouring every part of my body, even my hair, to then rebuild it rapidly, thus forming a cycle of destroying and rebuilding my body. This lasted for what seemed like an eternity.

    After who knows how long the lighting finally stopped devouring my body, and instead it all gathered around that small flame in the back of my head. Then the lighting flew right into the small flame and fused with it. This caused the flame to not only grow in size, but to also turn blue and cold. The flame was now incredibly big, and equally unstable, several time bigger than my body, but it quickly shrinked in size and condensed into a much smaller flame, albeit it was still a lot larger than before. It was finally over. I was in shock. I had no idea what just happened, and my mind was spinning around. Then I finally lost consciousness and faded away.

    After an unknown amount of time I finally woke up. The very moment I opened my eyes I heard a booming sound, as fear filled my heart.

    ¡°You finally awoke, my child.¡± A deep, yet gentle voice boomed out, generating an air of absolute power that could transcend the heavens. But the voice was so gentle that it sounded like a father meeting a son that he hadn¡¯t seen in eternity.

    I looked around, but I saw nothing. There was no one around me that could generate such a voice. In fact there was not even a single soul to be seen anywhere.

    It was just me and the carcass of the elk. Then out of nowhere arrived an indistinct blurry figure, made out of a black smoke.

    ¡°I am Gebados, God of Death.¡±

    After this one sentence, my mind was spinning as if it was a wild untameable hurricane. After a long time of silence I built up the courage to ask a single question.

    ¡°What did you do to me?¡±

    My voice was silent and hoarse, while my eyes permeated with anxiety and fear.

    ¡°I made you into a vampire. Have you heard of them? Maybe you have, maybe not. Perhaps they have passed down in legend. They should, since they are the race that I spent countless millennia making. But alas they went extinct countless millennia ago.

    They would always get exterminated. But this time my fellow brother and sister Gods have allowed me to have one child. That is you. There is only one way for my race to live again, and that is you, my child.¡±

    He looked at me. There was an endless air of knowledge and wisdom around him as he stared into my soul with his dark blurry smoky eyes, with a look of seeing everything, that existence had to offer.

    ¡°You seem to thinking about why I chose you.¡±

    That sentence surprised me. That was exactly what I was thinking about. He seemed to really be all seeing. Perhaps he really was the God of Death. I continued to look at his blurry figure, waiting for him to continue.

    ¡°It¡¯s because you are a good hunter, and have a strong will. This will be crucial for your survival. Let me explain some of your newfound powers. You might have noticed that your senses have been greatly enhanced. You can hear, see and smell far better than you could before, you can even see perfectly in this darkness. You have immense strength and can run very fast. The capabilities of your body go far beyond that of a normal mortal. You will live forever, you won¡¯t ever die from old age and poisons and diseases you shall never face again. You can also spread your race with your venom, having complete control of your offspring¡¯s power. But actual reproduction is a bit harder. Originally vampires were not capable of reproducing, but I begged my sister, the Goddess of Life. In the end she allowed you to reproduce with the use of a spell.

    But all these powers come with a cost. To sustain your power and youth, you will need to feed on the life force of others.¡±

    At these words shock and fear appeared in my heart. I nervously asked

    If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.

    ¡°I am going to need eat other people to survive?¡±

    I looked at him with fear, waiting for an answer.

    ¡°No, you will only need to drink their blood, eating their flesh is unnecessary. But this isn¡¯t the only drawback. You won¡¯t be able to tolerate the sun as much. You will feel uncomfortable in the sunlight and will get sunburned easily, but it¡¯s nothing dangerous. In the past vampires would burst into flames if they came in contact with sunlight. Now, before I leave I shall point you to a village, because you will need to satiate you thirst soon, and you will have to drain several bodies of their blood since you just transformed. One last thing. I shall transfer all the information you are going to need. Now until we meet again.¡±

    Suddenly the blurry smoke body disappeared, and I felt a strong force blow me away in the direction of the nearest village.

    I landed on a branch of a tree, I was surprised at how easily I gained my balance. Then I put some power into my legs and jumped. I flew several meters up, eventually landing on another branch. Looking around I noticed that my previous position was several dozen meters away. With one jump I had moved dozens of meters. I was amazed.

    Then all of a sudden I felt a piercing hunger in my abdomen. My throat dried up as I felt a devouring thirst. My vision went red as my mind deteriorated.  I needed blood! I started jumping through the trees desperately, like some wild animal, going towards the village at full speed. I kept jumping and jumping with only blood on my mind. I needed blood, and I needed it fast! After several hours passed, I finally saw the village in front of my eyes. By this point the hunger in stomach seemed as if it could devour everything in the world. I was excited, I was hungry for blood! It was as if in my eyes the biggest, most sumptuous feast I had ever seen appeared. I felt the hunger swell up to my throat, as my thirst increased ever more.

    A big killing intent appeared in my mind. I wanted their blood! I wanted to devour the entire village! I watched as a few people were wandering in the village. It was the middle of the night, so most were asleep.

    Suddenly my body flashed as I disappeared. Suddenly I stood next to a young woman, as shock and fear appeared on her face. I grabbed her throat and lifter her of the ground. Her body felt as heavy as a small sack of potatoes. I looked her in the eyes with a devouring hunger ever apparent in them, as I opened my mouth. Suddenly my canines grew in length.

    An immeasurable hunger flashed through my eyes, as she screamed for help. I sunk my teeth into her throat, letting her blood flow through my mouth. A few seconds went past as I drained her for blood. There was not a single drop of blood left in her body, as I let go of my grip. She fell limply to the ground, dead. This was the last thing I remembered of the massacre.

    When I awoke, I could see dozens of dead bodies around. Some of them were missing their heads or other limbs. It looked as if they had been tore apart. Many other were drained of blood. There were only a few people left, five in total. One of them was a pretty looking girl. She had brown hair, and plump breasts. She was wearing a simple looking dress, but still managed to look gorgeous. The moment I saw her, I realized that I wanted her. In that moment I decided that she would become the first offspring, the first step to creating a powerful clan of vampires. The other woman was middle aged. Around her were two twin girls that appeared to be around 8 years old, while the last one was an around 12 year old boy.

    I looked around at the bloody mess. There were corpses everywhere, and the ground was littered in blood. I rushed in front of the beautiful girl and knocked her out. Afterwards I tied the others up, and threw them in two sacks.

    I flung the two sacks on my right shoulder and took the girl onto left shoulder. Then I rushed away, into the forest, looking at the bloody scene I created one last time. It was at this moment that I accepted what I had become, and decided to embrace it.

    As I was running through the forest, I was looking for a clearing or a good place to proceed with my plan. After for running around for about thirty minutes I finally found a cave. I looked at it briefly, trying to see if there was anything in there. After confirming that it was empty, I walked into it. I took my captives out of the sacks and threw them into a corner. There was a horrified expression on their faces. This cave was rather small, consisting of only one room, and was a rounded square.

    I carefully put the pretty girl into a corner. Then I started searching through my mind for the information that Gebados gave me. I looked carefully about my powers. It was true that I had immense speed and strength, but apparently there were still countless people that could kill me. But my strength would be increased as I grew older, and I could also train. I also had high affinities for magic, and had high potential for spiritual powers. My body had also become more handsome and lean. I could also charm people of the opposite gender to make them do my bidding. I could turn people into vampires, as Gebados said, I could even completely control their powers.

    There was also a spell innate to the mind of vampires. This spell was to be used during sexual intercourse, and would cause the female vampire to get pregnant. It only worked on a vampire, you couldn¡¯t use it on humans, and it was also the only method for vampires to reproduce.

    As I had spent a while going through my newfound powers, the girl finally woke up. She stared at me with an empty look in her eyes, as if she didn¡¯t know what was going on. But then suddenly that empty look was filled with fear and hate, as she had realized what situation she was in. But she didn¡¯t scream, like that first girl I drained of blood, or all the other countless people I had killed in the village.

    ¡°You¡¯re finally awake. Don¡¯t worry, you¡¯re not in danger, I won¡¯t harm you.¡±

    I said to her with a gentle tone, as to reassure her. She still had a look of fear and hate in her eyes. I continued.

    ¡°You don¡¯t need to worry. I am going to give you a gift. The gift of eternal life. Now relax.¡±

    I said to her in the same gentle tone, as I crouched down next to her and caressed her cheek. Then I gave her a kiss on her neck as my teeth sank into her flesh. I felt her tasty blood flow down my throat, as her body was being rapidly drained of blood. When there was only a small amount of blood left, I stopped. I then made some of my venom flow into her wound. Using my magical energy I configured her powers. I made her very fast, almost as fast as myself. Her strength should also be high, if she was to fight beside me. I also made her very capable of seducing men. I didn¡¯t need to make any changes to her senses or longevity, as all vampire were immortal and had very good senses.

    After making these changes I felt tired. Very tired. It was as if all the energy in body was gone. I knew what this was. In my mind there was an introduction to magic, so I knew of the existence of mana. Mana was the energy that was used to fuel magic. Not everyone had any mana, only a few were born with it, but anyone could get it through practising and training. I had to use my both my mana and my blood essence when I made a vampire, and the more powerful I made them, the more it would cost. As I had made he girl very powerful, the cost was enormous, much more so than I had expected.

    The girl was now unconscious again. I sat next to her waiting and recovering my energy, while the captives looked at me with horrified expressions. They had heard what I said, so they knew that the girl they had known for a long time would now become a monster.

    After waiting for a while the girl finally woke up.

    ¡°Welcome to the unlife.¡±

    I said with the ever same gentle tone, as I looked at her affectionately. My first family member had been born.

    End of chapter 1

 Chapter 2: Spring of Blood

    So apparently there were no paragraphs in the first chapter. But it''s fixed now. But as an apology I shall release both chapter 2 and 3 now. Oh and thanks for all the support. You have no idea how happy was to see the positive comments :)

    ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________

    Chapter 2: Spring of Blood

    I looked at the girl, waiting for her to recover. She had a look of shock on her face, but most of the fear and hate had somehow disappeared. This might have something to do with me changing her. The change would not only transform you mind and body, the fledgling would also be bound to its creator, and be ever loyal, except if verbally released from the bond.

    She opened her mouth as she was about to speak.

    ¡°Wha-what did you do to m-me?¡±

    Her voice trembled nervously as I kept looking at her affectionately. Then I spoke.

    ¡°I have turned you into a vampire, and given you eternal life, so that we can travel this road together for eternity.¡±

    I said with a serious tone.

    ¡°Y-you¡¯re a vampire? Vampires are real? I thought that vampires only existed in legends. This can¡¯t be true, can it?¡±

    She asked nervously, with fear appearing in her eyes once more. I looked her in the eyes.

    ¡°Vampires are very real. I am a vampire, as are you. But don¡¯t misunderstand. Of all the vampires in the entire world, we are the only ones. Before this day vampires hadn¡¯t existed for millennia, only on this day did we once more rise. But it is only you and me, so we must work hard to make us a standing in this world, and expand our clan. I am the progenitor, the first, the one, and you are a fledgling, one of many to come.¡±

    I said to her with a serious tone, as I carefully explained to her what she was. After I had explained to her of her newfound powers, I had finally come to the important part.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know your name. What is it?¡± I asked with curiosity.

    ¡°M-my name is Amelia.¡± She looked surprised, as she had said her name without hesitation, without even thinking about it. This was the power of the bond. She had to obey and couldn¡¯t lie to me, her master.

    ¡°Good, Amelia, you can call me Isaac. Now I have to tell you something very important. As a vampire you need to feed on the life force of other, blood namely. Since you just transformed you are going to need a big amount of blood. You won¡¯t need as much as I did, killing an entire village, though. Those people over there should be enough.¡±

    I looked her in eyes, showing my seriousness. I could see that she was shocked and hesitant from hearing that, but I knew that she would feed, even if I didn¡¯t order her.

    She looked at the woman and kids, then back at me.

    ¡°I can¡¯t kill them, I can¡¯t! I lived with these people, I¡¯ve known them for years.¡±

    She said she didn¡¯t want to kill them, but it didn¡¯t sound convincing. I wasn¡¯t worried anyway. I knew she wouldn¡¯t be able to stop herself in the end. I looked at her again and said.

    ¡°Drink. It¡¯s better if you do it now, so you won¡¯t have to face the pain of hunger later. I had to wait several hours before I got to your village, and the hunger drove me insane, and the pain was unbearable. If you don¡¯t drink now you will turn into an insane monster.¡±

    I looked her in the eyes, telling her of the consequences of not feeding.

    ¡°Alright, fine. I will kill them and drink their blood.¡±

    She looked at me one last time before she turned to the captives. The children looked at her with fear in their eyes, while the woman begged her to let them go. She walked over to the boy. She grabbed him and bit into his neck. The boy started kicking and screaming, while she drained him of blood. Soon he stopped moving and screaming. Not long after, he fell to the floor, pale as snow. The girls and woman were crying in despair.

    Amelia then grabbed one of the twin girls and bit into her neck. The remaining two tried to run away, but I quickly moved to the entrance of the cave and stopped them. They then looked towards Amelia as she dropped the little girl to the floor. She was dead. She then moved towards the other girl, quickly grabbed her and drained her of blood. Finally she moved towards the middle aged woman.

    ¡°Why, Amelia! Why did you do this! I¡¯ve known you since you were a baby, I often took care of you when your parents were away! Why did you this, why did you kill my children! You monster, you fiend!¡±

    She screamed into her face, demanding an answer with a look of betrayal and piercing sadness in her eyes, as the tears flowed down her cheeks. Amelia looked at her. Then a small smile appeared on her face.

    ¡°Why? Because I¡¯m hungry, because blood is tasty and most importantly, because Master told me to.¡±

    She smiled at her, as she bit down her neck, slowly sucking all of the blood out of her body. This time she wasn¡¯t as quick about it, relishing in the delicious flavour of the blood. After a while the woman finally fell to the floor, her face as pale as the snow that had started falling outside the cave.

    She turned to me, with a smile on her face, some blood dripping from her red lips.

    ¡°Good Amelia, I¡¯m proud of you. But you don¡¯t need to call me master, just call me Isaac, as I will call you Amelia, not servant.¡± I said to her with a smile on my face, showing my happiness in her. I really was proud of her. She didn¡¯t resist for long, and almost immediately drained them, which pleased me. She looked happy at my words. She had seemed to have accepted and adapted very quickly. I was liking her more and more. I had made a good choice.

    ¡°Now, Amelia, I spent a lot of energy and blood essence on turning you, so I need to rest for a few days. I need you to go and capture a few wild animals for me to feed on. Feel free to catch some for yourself as well if you want to. Since I made you so powerful, I really spent a lot of energy, so I probably hibernate for a few days. Also you should seal the entrance to the cave. Now go.¡±

    After this I went into a corner of the cave and lied down. Soon I felt my mind slip away.

    A few days later I woke up. I didn¡¯t feel as tired anymore, but I was very thirsty. I didn¡¯t really know how long it had been though. I looked around. There was no one here, not even the bodies of those villagers. I looked towards the entrance of the cave. There was a simple primitive looking door there now. Seems like Amelia built it. I opened the door and walked outside. What I saw when I got out quite surprised me. There was now a simple fence around the entrance. The fence was around ten meters in length. In this fenced off area, there were a few animals of different kinds. I looked around to see if Amelia was here, but I couldn¡¯t see her. I decided to take one of the animals into the cave, since I was very thirsty. I grabbed the animal and went inside, closing the door behind me.

    I quickly bit into the animal, but found that it wasn¡¯t as tasty human blood. At this moment I wondered what elven blood or even dwarf or orc blood tasted like. There weren¡¯t many orcs and dwarfs in the world, but were quite a few elves. Not as many as humans though. Dwarfs were known well for their craftsmanship, and usually lived in underground cities, while orcs were warriors and barbaric. They lived in villages in desolate plains and the like.

    Elves on the other hand were very civilized, and loved art and beauty. They were also very good at making art and craftsmanship, but dwarfs were better at craftsmanship though. They also had very long lives, some might even live for a thousand years. They also had a very low birth rate, which is the reason there aren¡¯t as many of them as there are humans. I could quite appreciate these elves. Vampires also highly valued beauty, art and craftsmanship. We¡¯re also very good at these things.

    Soon after I finished drinking, I heard the door open. In came Amelia. I looked at her with a smile on my face as I saw and exited expression appear on her face as she noticed me.

    ¡°Isaac! You¡¯re finally awake again!¡± she said with excitement in her voice.

    ¡°Good job on gathering the animals and making the fence. It¡¯s very handy. Now, how long did I sleep?¡± I asked her with curiosity. I had no idea about how long I slept for. I just knew that I was very thirsty when I woke up, and that all my mana had recovered.

    ¡°You were asleep for two weeks. Two weeks! You said it would only be a few days. I was really lonely here on my own¡±

    I was surprised. I had slept for two week? I really didn¡¯t think it would be that long.

    ¡°I really didn¡¯t think it would be that long. I¡¯m sorry Amelia. I¡¯ll make it up to you.¡± I said with a smile

    ¡°It¡¯s fine. It isn¡¯t your fault. I¡¯m the reason you spent that much energy anyways.¡± She said with an amiable smile. I was liking her more and more. I really had made a good decision. She was very nice, but would heartlessly kill any humans. She was also efficient and had gathered several animals, and even built a fence around them. I started having very positive feeling towards her. I even wanted to kiss her right there, but I controlled myself.

    This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it

    3rd person perspective.

    Meanwhile down in the village there had appeared a big group of armed men. These men were soldiers from the army of Kalderon. Kalderon is the country they were currently in. These soldiers had been sent to the village after the massacre was discovered to investigate. They had already spent five days there. In these five days they had burned the village down, and sanctified the village grounds. This was to prevent the dead from rising again. They had also investigated the massacre of course.

    Currently a big man in shining armour was sitting in a chair in front of a table in a tent. In front of him were three more soldiers. The man in the chair was the commander of this squadron, and the other three were his lieutenants. One of men spoke.

    ¡°The people here were all massacred in a brutal way. Many of them didn¡¯t even have a drop of blood in their body. A very big monster with a big stomach must have done it, and it has a big appetite for blood. I suspect that it might be an E rank monster, the Blood Lion. They love the taste of blood, even though they don¡¯t need it.¡±

    The big man in the chair looked at the men. Then he sat silent for a moment, pondering.

    ¡°Yes, it is most likely the E rank monster, Blood Lion. Considering from the scene we saw, it shouldn¡¯t be a rank D monster. There shouldn¡¯t be any D rank monsters in this forest anyway. Since it¡¯s an E rank monster, we should be able to handle it. Tell the men to ready, we set out in an hour.¡± After the commander spoke, the three lieutenant walked out to ready the men.

    An hour later there were twenty men standing in a formation. In front of them was the commander.

    ¡°Men, we need to be careful on this mission. We are facing a rank E monster, the Blood Lion. It is known to be very ferocious, and has an appetite for human blood. If you¡¯re not careful you might very well lose your life. Now, let¡¯s go!¡± the commander said, with ferocity.

    Then men walked into the forest, in the direction where they had found broken branches and other signs of the beast. They were slowly advancing forwards, looking for the Blood Lion. After they had walked for five hours, they finally arrived at a cave. When they saw this cave, they were very surprised. This is because outside the cave there was a fence going around a simple door. Inside the fence there were various animals. They were many kilometers into the forest, so there shouldn¡¯t be anyone living here. The commander carefully walked towards the fence. When he was two meters away from the fence, he stopped. He was carefully looking at his surroundings, looking for any traps, or the like. Suddenly the door opened. Out came a young man. He looked to be about twenty years old. The young man looked towards the commander and the soldiers.

    ¡°Who are you and what are you doing out here. This place is dangerous, it isn¡¯t a place for someone like you¡± the commander said to the young man. He was looking warily at him, while the young man only smiled.

    ¡°My name is Isaac, and I live out here at the moment. And you needn¡¯t worry, this place doesn¡¯t pose much danger to me.¡± The young man suddenly spoke. His sound sounded mysterious and powerful, but looking at the young man¡¯s body, he couldn¡¯t be very strong.

    ¡°Isaac, you really need to leave this place. There is a Blood Lion around here somewhere. Do you know how strong they are? They are rank E monsters. They could easily kill you, it even massacred the village five hours from here. You should come with us, I can take you to another village. This place is too dangerous.¡± The commander spoke with a serious tone. He was genuinely worried about this young man he met in the forest. He intended to make a few men escort him back to the village while they killed the Blood Lion.

    Isaac 1st person.

    I looked at man as he spoke. I wanted to laugh. He thought that some Blood Lion massacred the village? What a joke! From the information I got from Gebados, I knew that my strength should be at the stronger echelons of rank D. These men would barely be able to kill a rank E monster. For me killing them would be easy. And there was only twenty of them. If Amelia and I teamed up, we could kill them all in a few minutes. But I wanted to capture a few of them for food, so I wanted to try and get them into a cave. Recently we found another cave very close to ours. It was well hidden so we didn¡¯t see it right away. This place would do well to keep this cattle.

    ¡°Alright, that is probably for the best. But first, you must be thirsty. There is a cave over there hidden between the vines. There is water spring in there, it¡¯s quite tasty. Let me just call my wife and I will show it to you.¡±

    The commander agreed and I called for my ¡°wife¡± Amelia. This ¡°commander¡± was quite na?ve. After Amelia arrived I started walking towards the cave. I told them that it was quite big, and that everyone could fit in. I moved all the vines that covered the entrance and went in first, while Amelia waited for everyone else to get in. The moment everyone got in a malicious smile appeared on my face. I grabbed the neck of the nearest soldier, lifted him up from the ground and bit his throat, tearing it up. I held him up above my face, as I let his blood flow down into my mouth. I laughed as I saw the shocked and horrified expression on his face as he died. I dropped him and turned around. Everyone, especially the commander had a shocked and hateful expression on. I laughed out loud.

    ¡°You really thought it was some lowly E rank Blood Lion that massacred that village? No, no, no, it was no Blood Lion. Saying that it was a Blood Lion would be insulting me, as it was I that killed everyone there, and drank all of their blood. Now prepare yourself, for some of you shall die, while others shall become our food!¡± as I said this last sentence everyone realized that it was no rank E monster that massacred the village. The commander screamed.

    ¡°It¡¯s a vampire! A vampire out of the legends, everyone RUN!¡± He screamed and turned to run, but was only met by Amelia at the cave entrance. She grabbed him and threw him across the room.

    Then the bloodbath commenced.

    I grabbed a soldiers arm and flung him like a morning star after the other soldiers. He clashed into a few soldiers, who all flew unto the wall of the cave. They all died from the crash. Next I jumped in front of another soldier. I grabbed his head with one hand, and his shoulder with the other. I pulled as hard as I could, and his head snapped. His neck even got a bit torn, and dangled to side. Needlessly to say, he fell down dead. Then I used one of the vampiric powers and made my nails grow in length and turn into claws. In a flash I appeared in front of another soldier and thrusted my hand into his chest. I grabbed the heart and pulled. I now held his heart in my hand, he still wasn¡¯t dead, so before he fell, I bit into the heart and consumed the blood that was still in it. This blood tasted even better than normal human blood.

    In a flash there were only six soldiers left. One of them was the commander, while another one was one of the lieutenants. The rest were normal soldiers. Amelia was in a corner feasting on some half dead soldier.

    I turned towards my new captives and said ¡°You are the lucky ones to live for now. You will serve as our food for the next few days until we decide to leave. Don¡¯t try to escape. If you do, you die.¡±

    I turned around and walked away. Amelia finished her meal and followed me. As we got out I grabbed a big stone with my arms, and pushed it to the cave entrance, sealing it. Then I turned around and walked into our cave. Inside the cave I turned to Amelia and said

    ¡°Amelia, we are going to have to leave this place soon. Those soldiers were probably from the army Kalderon. They were most likely sent to investigate the massacre of your village. Since they have already died, they won¡¯t be returning, so the army will most likely send a team to investigate their disappearance. This team will probably be a lot stronger than they were, at least D rank, which I am. You are only at the top of E rank at the moment, so we would die too easily against them.¡± I explained to her in detail why we needed to leave. Then we decided that we would leave as soon as tomorrow.

    The next day we were standing outside the prison cave. I moved the boulder from the entrance and entered.

    ¡°We have come to feed. Prepare yourself.¡± I said as I appeared in front of the commander. I grabbed him and sank my teeth into his neck and began drinking to my heart¡¯s content. Amelia also grabbed one of the soldiers and drained him dry. Soon there were two more corpses littering the ground. I looked deep into the eyes of the lieutenant. I could hear his heart starting to beat faster.

    ¡°We are going to leave this place now, so we won¡¯t kill anymore of you. You get to live. Congratulations. If you get hungry you can eat the corpses of your fellow soldiers, if you get thirsty you can drink from the spring water.¡± They looked at me in relief and confusion. They were wondering what I meant by my words. They could eat their friends and drink the water? I walked out of the cave, Amelia at my back. When I stood outside I looked at the surviving soldiers one last time.

    Then I moved the boulder to the entrance again and sealed them inside forever. A few seconds after I could hear their muffled screams. Very little sound could escape from that cave. I only heard it because of my superior senses. I told them that I would let them live, but I never told them I would let them go. They wouldn¡¯t last long in there. The water had been polluted by the blood, and there was a corpse in it. As it rots it would poison the water. And as the bodies start rotting they won¡¯t be able to eat them. They wouldn¡¯t last longer than a week before death.

    I looked towards Amelia and nodded. Then we started running away at full speed. We were running to the opposite site of the forest, away from the village. This was a very big forest, but with our speed we could get through it in a few days. Thus we started our journey.

    End of chapter 2

 Chapter 3: A New Home

    Here''s chapter three. There are two easter eggs in this chapter. If you can find them please comment ;)

    Chapter 3: A New Home

    We travelled for five days through the forest. Since we had just become vampires our powers would increase quickly after a few weeks. The first two to three weeks were the maturing age of vampires. Amelia was a very powerful fledgling so she was already at the peak of rank E when she was born. I am the progenitor of the vampires so I am even stronger, being at the peak of rank D. The ranks are divided into four stages. They are early, middle, late and peak. Most normal vampires would be somewhere in rank F. But after the two week maturity period the vampire would gain in strength. No vampire would still be rank F after this period. The normal vampires would be somewhere in rank E. Amelia had gone from peak of rank E to middle rank D. I had gone from peak of rank D to the early stage of rank C. Since I was the progenitor I would also gain in strength a bit faster. But it was only at this maturity period that vampires would gain strength this quickly.

    We had just gotten out of the forest. About a hundred meters in front of us there was a road. We walked over to the road. It was the middle of the night, the moon hung high in the sky. It really was very uncomfortable in the daytime, so we preferred to travel at night. We decided to follow this road to see where it would take us. The two of us weren¡¯t very familiar with the geography of the country, since we had lived in a small village and farm for all our lives.

    We had followed the road for a few hours, when we noticed a building a few hundred meters in front of us. We decided to see if we could stay there for the day, since the sun was about to rise. But we didn¡¯t have any money and had basically nothing to pay with, so we hoped they would be generous. If not, we could always just kill them, and then sleep.

    We left the road and walked quickly over to the building. When we came closer we noticed that it was a farm. Since it was a farm, the people living there should be getting up about now. We walked over to the door, and knocked. Soon the door opened and in our vision appeared an old man.

    ¡°What are you two doing here at this hour?¡± the man asked curiously.

    ¡°We have been travelling for many days now, and we are getting weary, so we were wondering if we could sleep here for the day?¡± I politely asked him, hoping for the best.

    ¡°You come to ask to sleep at this hour. The sun is coming up now, can¡¯t you see?¡± he said with a neutral tone pointing to the sun. I replied

    ¡°Yes I know sir, but you see, my sister and I suffer from a rare genetic illness. It is nothing dangerous, it just makes us very uncomfortable in this sunlight, and our skin will get sunburned easily, so we hoped to get cover from the sun.¡±

    He stared at me with surprise in his eyes. Then he had an understanding expression and looked at us with pity. Must be hard to live out of the sun, he thought.

    ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then hurry up and come inside. I have a guest room where you can stay for the day. Come let me show you.¡± He said as he turned around and waved for us to follow. We followed him into the house. We arrived in a cosy kitchen with a table. Around the table there were three chairs. Right after, we came up some stairs and he stopped in front of a door. He showed us inside and said ¡°You can stay in here for the night, ehm, I mean day. If you need anything just ask.¡± Then he turned around and left. The room had a queen size bed in the middle. On the sides there were two night tables. On the other side of the room, up against the wooden walls, there was a desk, complete with a chair.

    I walked over to window and closed the blinds. Then I took my clothes off and lied down on the bed, under the blanket. I gestured for Amelia to do the same. She quickly undressed as well and went to bed. We slept until night time.

    As the sun went down we woke up.

    ¡°Isaac, I¡¯m hungry. Should we feed on the habitants of this farm?¡± Amelia asked. I looked at her for a while, then I nodded. I was starting to feel the hunger swell up as well. We didn¡¯t drink that much blood these past days. I walked out of the room, down the stairs. In the kitchen there were three people sitting. The man, a woman, and young girl, around sixteen years old.

    ¡°Ah, you two are up. Would you like to have something to eat?¡± he asked me with his kind voice, gesturing to the soup he was sipping on. I looked at him as the hunger was swelling up inside my body.

    ¡°Yes, we are feeling rather hungry, if you don¡¯t mind.¡± I said as I walked towards his daughter. I grabbed her neck and lifted her up. She screamed and her father got off his chair about shout at me, when I sank my teeth into her throat. I felt blissful as her virgin blood flowed down my throat. Her father was just standing there looking in shock, as Amelia had grabbed his wife and drained her dry. Suddenly two thumps sounded out as the two lifeless bodies fell down to the floor. I looked at him as I said

    ¡°Thanks for the meal, it was very delicious.¡±

    I formed a claw in my hand as I swiped it towards his throat. A moment later his head fell to the floor, and his body collapsed. Neither of us wanted to drink his blood, since he was old and a bit ugly. I looked around if I could find any money. I took all the money I could find, then we left.

    We kept travelling like this for two weeks, sometimes staying at farms or inns, sometimes just finding cover somewhere. We usually killed the people that gave us shelter, for their blood. After two weeks of travelling, we came upon another forest. We had decided to stay in a forest for a bit longer, since it was a bit troublesome to stay in a village or small town, since it was too noticeable when people died. We walked into the forest, and started to look for a clearing somewhere. We didn¡¯t want to live in a cave, so we had decided to build a small hut somewhere, deep in the forest. After wandering for a while we came upon a clearing that had a river flowing through it. We decided to build our hut here. We didn¡¯t have many tools, but we had taken some from the various people we killed. We chopped down a few trees and split them into two pieces. After a few hours of work we had a nice and cosy hut, complete with furniture and two beds.

    For a human it would have taken many days of hard work to build this, but for vampires it only took a few hours. This wasn¡¯t only because we had superior strength and speed, but because all vampires had an innate talent for everything craftsmanship and art. Vampires valued beauty and art highly.

    When we were finished the sun was about to come up, so went unto our new home and went to sleep. Not much had happened when we were here. We had dug a hole beneath the hut, which we decided to use as the prison for our human cattle. But we didn¡¯t have any human cattle, so I decided that we should go out of the forest and capture a few humans.

    The next day at sunset we set out at full speed. When we had arrived at the forest we hadn¡¯t wen in full speed, which is why it took so long, but now that we were going full speed it didn¡¯t take long to get out. At our current strength out speed was really fantastic.

    We arrived at the road near the forest. There weren¡¯t many travellers out night, but there was a village nearby. We rushed over to the village, and arrived there after about thirty minutes. There weren¡¯t many people outside, at this time of night. We decided to go to one of the houses at the outskirts of the village. We arrived at a house. I opened the door and walked in. I listened to the surroundings in silence, and determined that there were four people in the house. Amelia went get two of them and I went for the other two. The two I went for were sleeping in the same bed. A married couple. They were middle aged. I made sure they were knocked out cold, and threw them in a sack. I then went over to Amelia, who also just finished. We then rushed out of the village, not letting anyone see us. We had sneaked into the village, kidnapped four people, and rushed out again, unnoticed.

    Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more.

    Ever since becoming a vampire both Amelia and I had looked at humans differently. When becoming a vampire, not only the body would change. The mind would also undergo a transformation. You would get a better memory, be able to read faster, think faster. But for some vampires, you would also undergo a change of attitude. At first when I underwent the transformation I didn¡¯t want to kill anyone one, but as soon as the hunger swelled up my rationality went away. As the hunger grew stronger my mind deteriorated, to the point where I almost couldn¡¯t think anymore. My sanity had been broken. After it had broken, my mind would be rebuilt, by the blood. This caused me to have an innate indifference to humans. But only a few vampires would have to go through this. In Amelia¡¯s case, her mind was changed right away. As soon as she transformed, she already had that innate indifference to humans. But this was even rarer. Not even I could control this factor. It was all based on luck.

    After kidnapping the villagers we went back home at full speed. We had spent almost three hours on this trip. When we got home we put them into the underground cattle prison. We were in the room waiting for them to wake up.

    After standing in silence for two hours, they finally began waking up. When everyone was awake I stepped forwards.

    ¡°We have taken you away from your village. You shall now live on as cattle. You are going to exist solely for the purpose of us drinking your blood. You are going to stay in this underground prison until you die. When die you will be replaced of course.¡±

    I looked at them as I said in a serious tone. They had a look of fear on them as they looked back at me.

    ¡°Now go rest.¡± As I said this I looked them in the eyes. Then all of a sudden they fell asleep. This was one of the abilities I had as vampire. Hypnosis! Amelia didn¡¯t have this though, because at the time I embraced her, I didn¡¯t have this power. I wasn¡¯t even sure if I could give it to her even if I did have it back then. I had unlocked it after the maturing period. It seems like you would unlock more powers as you age. Maybe Amelia would also get this power one day.

    As for how I could be certain that she didn¡¯t have it, I could sense it. You see, when a vampire embraces a mortal that new turned vampire will be bound to his sire. As long as the bound exists the sire can feel everything about the subordinate. Both its location and power. Therefore the embraced one, won¡¯t be able to hide his power, until released.

    After hypnotizing we jumped out of the underground prison. There was no ladder or anything to get out with, you had jump. And this was no distance a normal mortal could jump, but around fifteen meters high. Even Amelia and I had to put some effort in to jump such a distance.

    3rd person perspective

    Thus they spent two years in our little hut. In these two years the cattle they kidnapped had long died. They wouldn¡¯t kill them as they fed, but there was still a lot of blood loss. After a few months they would die. Some also got sick, so they were killed. After a cattle died, they naturally would go out of the forest to grab some new humans. Thus they spent two years living in peace.

    But everything wasn¡¯t as peaceful outside the forest at first. The army of Kalderon had sent a rank D squadron to investigate the disappearance of a rank E squadron that was sent to investigate the massacre of a small village in the outskirts of the Kingdom of Kalderon. When they had made it to the village, they had only seen a desolate ground, littered with the ashes of the dead and burned down houses. They soon found tracks from a group of twenty men, going into the forest. They concluded that this was most likely the squadron they were looking for.

    They followed the tracks for five hours. The sight that they met caused them quite the surprise. In front of them was a cave. In front of the cave there was a fenced of area, with a few animal corpses littering the ground. It looked like they had starved to death, as there wasn¡¯t any food in this small area, and they had already eaten all the grass. In the entrance way of the cave, there was a small wooden door.

    They decided to carefully enter the cave. The inside of the cave was empty. There were only some old dried up bloodstains. It looked like someone had been killed here, but they didn¡¯t think it was the missing squadron as there wasn¡¯t enough blood.

    They exited the cave again, to look for more clues. They tried following the tracks again, only to see that it led to boulder a few meters away. The commander of the rank D squadron ordered his men to push the boulder away. With a lot of effort they managed to move it. When they moved the boulder, they noticed a cave behind it. Out of the cave came a foul, stinking smell. It caused a few soldiers to even puke. They had never smelled anything so foul before!

    After the boulder was removed they went into the cave. The sight they saw shook their hearts. There was blood everywhere. The ground was littered with twenty corpses. Some of the corpses weren¡¯t even complete, some looked like they had been eaten. At this horrifying sight more of the soldiers wanted to puke. Some ran out immediately, while the commander just stood there, in complete shock. After standing for what seemed like an eternity, they finally left. The commander ordered his mages to burn the corpses and collapse the cave. This was their final burial.

    After finishing up, they quickly left. They had no idea what could cause this. Generally a monster wasn¡¯t intelligent enough to seal prisoners up. They decided that they would hurry back to the town of Fenlai, and let the higher ups deal with it. They never wanted to think about that horrifying sight again. They just wanted to forget.

    When the Lord Commander of the city heard of the slaughter, he felt shock pierce his heart. He had never had to deal with something so gruesome. The area he presided over was generally very peaceful. There didn¡¯t exist any all-powerful monsters here. He absolutely no idea who could have done such a thing.

    In the end he had guessed that it might be some new death cult or something, or perhaps just some powerful psychopath who revelled in killing. He decided that he would sent a team of B rank knights to clear out the forest.

    Thus one month later, there appeared a small group of eight B rank knights. These knights were the elite of this outskirt area. This prefecture of the Kingdom of Kalderon was located against the ocean. It was named after its capital city, Fenlai. This team of B rank knights were the strongest force present in the prefecture, they are under the direct command of the Lord Commander of Fenlai. The Lord Commander is also the ruler of the prefecture. A prefecture is either ruled by a Lord, or a Lord Commander. If the lord is the commander of his own forces, then he is called a Lord Commander. Is someone else works under him as the commander, then he is just a Lord.

    The team of knights went directly to the cave where the missing team was found. They found nothing of interest except the corpses of the animals, and a few blood stains. After they had scoured the area, they started carefully searching the forest. They spent two months looking all around the forest, but they never found any cult, or even a monster above E rank. Thus they concluded that whatever had slaughtered the missing squadron, had long left.

    After reporting the matter back to the Lord Commander, he decided to drop the matter and instead report it to the royal capital. He had concluded that he most likely wouldn¡¯t be able to find the culprits. They might even have left the prefecture completely. Thus this matter was shoved under the carpet.

    End of chapter 3

 Chapter 4: Learning From Mistakes

    Alright chapter 4 is out. I spent quite a bit of time on this one. I quite like it.

    Beware! There is a graphic SEX scene in this chapter. It''s quite light hearted though. Tell me what you think, should I include more graphic sex scenes or should I keep it a bit more behind the scenes?

    Chapter 4: Learning From Mistakes

    We had been in our forest hut for 2 years now. I was 21 years old now. These years we had rarely gone out of the forest. We only went out to kidnap some villagers from time to time. But these years hadn¡¯t gone to waste. Both Amelia and I had spent them learning magic. I was now quite capable of using frost magic, and could also use some fire magic. I had also had great results in darkness magic. Amelia wasn¡¯t as good at darkness and frost magic as I, but they were still her main elements.

    These days I had been thinking a lot about my parents and siblings. I hadn¡¯t seen them for two years after all, so I couldn¡¯t help but be a bit worried. After all I was the only one that could hunt, so they probably didn¡¯t get much meat anymore. And they probably thought I had died. But I had decided that it was too early to go and visit them. I wanted to make them into vampires, but I also wanted a proper standing in the world first. But I would still think about them from time to time.

    3rd person, Fenlai City.

    Charles Fenlai, the Lord Commander of Fenlai prefecture, was sitting in his office, brooding. About two years ago, in a period of few weeks, after that E rank squadron had gone missing, numerous corpses had been found in a few small farms and houses along the road following the forest there. He hadn¡¯t thought too much about, until he discovered that several corpses of the missing squadron had been drained of blood. That¡¯s because the peculiar thing about the corpses in the small farms, were also drained of blood. Originally he didn¡¯t make the connection, but he soon discovered that both the farmers and soldiers were most likely killed by the same being.

    He sent investigators to see if they could find a lead. The investigators checked every farm and secluded house, but soon discovered that the killings just stopped. The last family that had been killed lived in the middle of nowhere. The investigators went back to Fenlai city and reported their findings. The Lord Commander decided, that they either just stopped killing, or had settled down somewhere nearby.

    He didn¡¯t really want to spend the manpower to find them, except if another massacre occurred, because it had been quite expensive to send out his elite knights for them to only return emptyhanded. Thus he decided to wait to see if the King wanted him to do anything. But he never even got a reply from the King. Thus this matter went into the back of his mind.

    About two years later, he was once again sitting in his office. This time he was reading a pile of reports. One particular report caught his mind. The report said that a lot of villagers had been disappearing from the villages around some forest. This particular location sounded familiar to him. He sat, pondering about, until suddenly he realized. This was the place where those farm killings occurred.

    Now he was almost certain. The monster that massacred that village and that E rank squadron, was most likely the same monster that killed all those farmers and kidnapped those villagers. Therefore he decided to finally send someone to investigate and slay the beast or cult, for now he was almost certain that they stayed in the forest that was close to all those locations.

    Thus a group of eight B rank knights departed for a certain forest.

    Isaac 1st person perspective

    These two years not only our magic had improved, our strength had also increased. I had now reached the peak of rank C, while Amelia had already entered into the early stage or rank C. One day I was out hunting animals, for their meat. As vampires we didn¡¯t need to eat normal food, but we still could eat it, so once in a while we would enjoy some savoury meat. Amelia had gotten very good at cooking too. We also had our captives. They needed food so that they wouldn¡¯t die. Even though I didn¡¯t really care about them, I still didn¡¯t want them to die early. But alas they still died rather quickly. The environment they lived, wasn¡¯t somewhere any could live. It was cold, damp and dark in the underground prison. We also often forgot to feed them, as if they were some pet we didn¡¯t care about.

    As I was running through the forest I heard a noise. I immediately stopped in my tracks and look around. I saw a big burly man standing a hundred meters away from me. What is human doing here, I thought. But anyways, he had seen me here so I couldn¡¯t let him live. I didn¡¯t want him to spread rumours that someone was living here. I immediately rushed in front of him. He seemed surprised by my speed, but he quickly calmed down. Suddenly his fist came out of nowhere at an incredible speed, and clashed with my body. I flew several dozen meters back.

    ¡®He¡¯s a B rank!¡± I thought. I quickly calmed down, and rushed away as fast as could, towards the hut. As I was running I looked behind me. He was running after me, but it seemed he was a lot slower than me. Good. Vampires specialized in speed after all.

    I rushed into the hut and looked for Amelia.

    ¡°Quick! We need to leave!¡±

    As I shouted, she all of a sudden screamed. Then she turned into a flash and disappeared. I quickly turned around, and saw a spear piercing through Amelia¡¯s abdomen as a pretty looking man stood in front of her. I was shocked and raged as I saw this. I quickly grabbed a knife, and as a flash I stabbed right in his eye, as his spear was stuck in Amelia. With my superior speed I managed to the knife into his eye, all the way, piercing through his brain. The man screamed, and then collapsed. I quickly grabbed Amelia and rushed out. Outside I pulled the spear out of her body, and looked around. There was no one around us, so I ran away as quickly as I could.

    After I had ran for a while, I saw that burly man again. It seemed like he had lost track of me, and turned in the wrong direction. He hadn¡¯t noticed me, so I took the opportunity and putting all my strength into my arm, I hurled the spear at him as hard as I could. The spear caused a shrieking sound as it pierced through the air. As the man turned around the spear had already appeared at his face. The spear clashed with his head, and pierced through it. Only the tip of the spear pierced out on the other side. What a tough man. I had put all my strength into that spear and only managed to hit him because he was unprepared. Even then, I only manged to slightly pierce through his head. He had truly tough skin. But now both the people that had seen my face were dead.

    After looking in shock for a moment, I rushed out again. I was running as quickly as could, but it still took an hour before I came out of the forest. Luckily I hadn¡¯t met any more of those men in this time period. I doubt I would be able to kill another one of them. Although I didn¡¯t even know if there were any more of them.

    Even though I had already gotten out of the forest, I didn¡¯t stop running. I looked at Amelia with anxiety. She was unconscious, but her wounds were rapidly healing, and had already closed up. I was surprised that she was knocked out from that, a vampire should be able to tolerate such a wound. That pretty man had probably done something to her.

    I had been running for two days already, and Amelia still hadn¡¯t woken up. I had no idea where I was, but I could see a road a bit ahead. I didn¡¯t go the road, but instead stayed clear of it. I started to look for a place to rest. After looking for a while I finally found a cave. I entered the cave and put Amelia down. I sat next to her and started thinking

    Who were those people? They were at least B rank. It seemed like they were targeting us. That pretty boy, probably saw me rushing into the hut at amazing speeds, so he determined that I was the one he was looking for? Why were they looking for us? Of course. They were sent by the army. Fuck! They found all those farmers I killed drained of blood. A lot of the people in the village I massacred were drained of blood as well. The same with the soldiers. They must have seen a connection with all this and the kidnapped villagers. Thus they decided that I most likely lived in the forest, so they sent a team of B rank warriors after me.

    What was I thinking? I shouldn¡¯t killed people so blatantly. Now Amelia is hurt. What am I going to do? If she dies I won¡¯t be able to forgive myself! She must live.

    I looked at Amelia carefully, checking to see if anything¡¯s wrong. I couldn¡¯t find anything out of the ordinary. After thinking a while I decided to reopen her wound. I took my knife and cut into her abdomen where a line had appeared. As I cut, blood started flowing out. Soon there was a hole in her abdomen. I grabbed the sides of the hole and spread. It was too bloody, so I couldn¡¯t see anything. Weirdly this blood didn¡¯t look as attractive as human blood, it was more as when a human sees another human¡¯s blood.

    I decided to stick my hand into the wound, to see if I could find anything. As I was searching through her abdomen, my hand suddenly came upon a chard object. I quickly grabbed it and pulled it out. This object was too hard to be anything in the human body, other than a bone. If it was bone, then it didn¡¯t matter, as it was already broken off. I looked at item in my hand. It was made of metal, and was the size of fingernail. It gave of a strange aura. From the information I had in my mind, I determined that this was an enchanted piece of metal. It was probably inserted into her body from the spear, and was most likely the cause of her coma. I put the piece of metal into my pocket, after I cleaned it for blood. Then I looked towards Amelia. Her wounds were quickly healing.

    Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    After of waiting, filled with anxiety and fear, she finally opened her eyes.

    ¡°You¡¯re awake!¡± I almost screamed. I felt relief in my heart, as the fear and anxiety faded away.

    She looked at me amiably as she said

    ¡°I saved you. I¡¯m glad you¡¯re okay. I wouldn¡¯t be able to live with myself if you ever died.¡±

    She kept looking at me with affection ever apparent in her eyes. I felt strong feelings surge up in my heart. I had spent over two years with. My feelings towards her had only grown in these years, but as she willingly sacrificed herself to save me, I felt a feeling I never felt before. Even a bonded vampire wouldn¡¯t sacrifice himself without being asked. Sometimes they would even be able to resist such a command.

    ¡°You¡¯re one to talk. You have no idea how afraid and anxious I¡¯ve been these past days. I was so afraid that you would never wakeup that I could die¡±

    I looked her deep in the eyes. Suddenly I saw tears swelling up in Amelia¡¯s eyes. She quickly hugged me.

    ¡°Thank you.¡± She said, as she kissed me on my lips. I just looked at her. I was slightly shocked. The kiss went on for a few seconds before stopping. She looked me the eyes with a smile on her face. I smiled back at her.

    We started discussing what we should do now. From now on we would be more careful when killing, and get rid of any evidence. We also needed to gain more experience in the world. And there was also one problem. Neither of us could read, since we lived in a rural area. We decided that we would go travel the road close to us, until we either find a traveller or a village.

    We had made a decision. We would become mercenaries, and take on all kind of mission, then we would make some money, and eventually we could buy some estate somewhere, and even get slave, to use as blood dolls. But this would take a lot of money.

    Thus we set out on the road. This time we didn¡¯t stop as much in the day. We would only go find cover, when it was absolutely unbearable. We travelled for a full day when we finally arrived at a village. The sun was just coming up now too. We walked into the village, as the villagers looked at us with curious eyes. Soon we found an inn. I went up to the inn keeper and asked him for directions to the nearest city. For a mortal it would take around two weeks to get there, but we should be able to make it quickly if we travel at full speed. After I asked question, we rented a room.

    In the room there was a queen size bed and a table, with two chairs. We quickly undressed and went to bed. This time Amelia was lying up against my body. She looked me the eyes, then kissed me.

    ¡°Let¡¯s do it¡± she said, with a serious tone. I could feel that she was starting to get a bit wet down there. I kissed her, as I rolled on top of her. We were in a deep kiss that lasted for several minutes. I put my hands behind her back and took off her bra. In front of me there appeared a pair perfectly shaped plump breasts. I kissed her on the breast as I took off her underwear. Soon we were both naked, as I slid my penis down to her entrance. I thrust my penis in, when I felt it meet the hymen. I put a bit of force as broke. I looked at Amelia

    ¡°Are you okay?¡± I asked with worry as my penis had entered deeper inside her.

    ¡°I¡¯m fine. It didn¡¯t hurt at all.¡± She said with an adorable smile on her face. I started thrusting my penis in and back out again, as I heard small moans in my ears. I continued thrusting, then I turned her around and put on her fours. I kept humping for from behind, enjoying her cute moans, ringing through my ears. We continued having sex for twenty minutes, until finally a white liquid flowed through her vagina, into her womb. But this white liquid wouldn¡¯t be able to make her pregnant, except if we used the reproduction spell.

    We looked tenderly at each other, not saying a word, just enjoying each other¡¯s presence. That day we had sex three more times.

    The next day we left hand in hand, and started our journey towards the city. We wanted to get to the city quickly, so we left the road and started running at full speed. We left the road because we didn¡¯t want anyone see us run this fast. We were being cautious even though people would only think that we are very strong adventurers or something. We travelled at fast speeds, and after two days we finally arrive in front of the city.

    The city was surrounded by big walls, you could only see some towers and big buildings here and there. We went to the gate. There were a few guards standing there, guarding the gate, as is their job. We walked past them without trouble, and arrived inside the city. This was the first time either of us had ever been inside a city, so we were very amazed. We looked around, the curiosity apparent in our eyes. A lot of the people in the streets looked at us funnily. We walked around the city, looking for an inn or some kind of adventuring or mercenary guild. Eventually we found an inn. I asked the innkeeper for directions, and soon after we stood in front of a very big building. We walked towards the entrance and entered.

    We came into a big hall that was luxuriously decorated. We walked up to a counter with a woman behind.

    ¡°We would like to register as mercenaries.¡± I said to the woman. She looked at me and then replied ¡°That¡¯s fine, you just need to sign these papers and take a test, then you will be given a mercenary token. Then you will be allowed to take missions according to your rank. Now please sign these papers, and follow me.¡±

    We signed the papers, even though we couldn¡¯t read what was on them. We would really need to learn how to read soon. After signing the paper the woman took us to a side room. In this room there was a crystal ball. The woman spoke

    ¡°This is a power testing ball. You just need to put your hands on it and your strength will show. Now put your hands on it.¡±

    I hesitantly put my hands on it. After I had held it for five seconds it started glowing brightly.

    ¡°The peak of rank C? At your age? That¡¯s incredible! Miss, you do it too.¡± The woman said in amazement as she looked at me respectfully. Apparently it was incredible to be this strong at my age. Amelia put her hands on it well, then after five seconds it lit brightly, but still a bit weaker than when I tried.

    ¡°Early rank C? You two sure are something. How old are you?¡± She asked curiously as she now looked at Amelia with respect too.

    ¡°I¡¯m twenty one and she¡¯s twenty.¡± I replied honestly.

    After, she took us back to the counter, where she us two silver tokens with a C engraved on it. Then she showed us to the mission table. There were a lot of missions here, but every mission was divided into ranks. You couldn¡¯t take mission higher than your rank. The only way to increase your rank was through the test ball. This no one could cheat. I looked at all the missions, looking for one that interested me. Then I found one that interested me. I couldn''t read it , but there was one part that interested me. I knew my numbers and on the mission paper it said 250 gold.

    As I saw the reward for these rank C missions I was simply shocked. Back when I lived in the farm, we would be lucky to earn 10 gold in a whole year. The currency was divided into copper, silver and gold coins. 100 copper equalled one silver and one gold equalled 100 silver. The strongest force that existed in this prefecture was only at the B rank, so a C rank adventurer would earn quite a bit compared to others. But if you went to the capital prefecture, if you were an S rank, you could easily earn several thousand gold in just one mission. Usually only around a few thousand gold could buy a pretty good house.

    I immediately decided to accept this mission, so I took it over to the reception. I handed the paper to the woman and she nicely explained the contents of the mission. We had to go and find some bandit groups hide out and wipe them out, and rescue some merchants daughter. But she also said that we should be careful, because the bandit leader was a middle rank C warrior. We then signed a paper and left.

    We went back to that inn from before and rented a room. Immediately as we came into the room we started kissing, and stripping each other down. Soon after we were having sex to celebrate us finally getting to the city, and becoming mercenaries.

    The next day, when the sun set down, we set out. We hadn¡¯t drunk anything in days, so when we saw two women and guards travelling a few kilometres out of the city, we decided to feed on them. I quickly appeared behind the guard and broke his neck. Then I grabbed his corpse and one of the women. Amelia grabbed the other one, and we disappeared in a flash. A few hundred meters away from the road, behind a big boulder, I dropped the corpse and sank my teeth into the girl¡¯s neck. We drained them of their blood, then kissed with blood still in our mouth. We burned the bodies, erasing all evidence, then immediately left.

    End of chapter 4.

 Chapter 5: Excitement

    Here comes chapter five! This one is my longest yet, I really liked it. Enjoy!

    Chapter 5: Excitement

    We had been following the road for two days, when we came to the landmark that the woman explained to us. We were supposed to follow the road to this place, and then travel off road until we came to the bandit hideout. We did this and travelled across some plains, until we arrived in front of a mountain range. In the distance, I could see walls, built from chopped down trees. I had been told that this was the base of the bandits, so we walked towards the walls. I couldn¡¯t see any one there, but I was sure that there had to be people on the other side of the walls. We climbed up to a higher vantage point, and just as I expected there were indeed three bandits there, guarding the entrance.

    We quickly sneaked over to the entrance. We agreed that Amelia would deal with one of them, and I¡¯d kill the other two. We jumped over the wall. I landed in front of one of the bandits, I grabbed his shoulder and used one of my spells on him, as he froze into an ice statue. Then I immediately threw my knife in the throat of the other bandit, and he collapsed, holding his throat, trying to stop the blood from flowing.

    When all three bandits were dead, we proceeded into the cave. On the walls of the cave there were torches, illuminating its surroundings. I decided to extinguish all the torches I saw. This would make the cave pitch black, and the bandits wouldn¡¯t be able to see in the darkness. But this was not a problem that Amelia and I would face, as our vision was even better in the darkness. We proceeded forwards. On the way we would meet a few bandits, either alone, or in pairs. We kill them in a flash, and sometimes drain their bodies of blood.

    As we were traversing trough the pathways of the cave, we eventually appeared in a bigger hall like room. In this room there were three more pathways, and these pathways had around twenty bandits guarding them. We stood outside the room, hidden in the darkness, as we looked at them. We didn¡¯t charge straight in, because we knew they were on guard. As soon as they had noticed that there wasn¡¯t even a speck of light in the entrance pathway, they knew something was wrong. They were talking between themselves, discussing what they should do. Soon they decided. One man went to the middle pathway to report to their leader. With my superior hearing I could of course clearly hear their conversation. I already knew that the middle pathway was where the leader and his lieutenants were. The pathway on the right led to the sleeping quarters of the normal bandits, while the one on the left was the prison area.

    As one of the men went into the middle pathway, three more walked towards us. They stopped outside the pathway, hesitating to walk into the darkness. But they still stepped in. In the darkness they couldn¡¯t see anything at all, so they decided to go back, but at this moment we attacked. I swung my knife at one bandit¡¯s throat, then grabbed the neck of the other one as the first one¡¯s head flew off. I broke his neck, then grabbed the decapitated head. Amelia had also decapitated the last bandits head. I looked her in the eyes and nodded. We then threw their heads into the hall. The bandits were shocked and angry as they saw their comrades¡¯ heads flying towards them, but we didn¡¯t give them time to recover, as we rushed into the hall, knife in hand.

    I appeared in front of one of the bandits and flashed my knife at his throat, while generating a spell in my free hand. Suddenly around ten ice spikes appeared in front of my hand. The icicles flew out, piercing into several bandits, killing them. Amelia was had grabbed on of bandits and thrown him into the others, killing several, then stabbed her knife through the eyes of another bandit. I used another spell, generating pure darkness. This darkness formed into a large ball, as it flew at insane speed towards the rest of the bandits. As the ball touched the bandits, it grew small until it finally disappeared. The bandits were looking in shock, as nothing had happened to them. Suddenly they started screaming in excruciating pain, as blood started flowing out of their crevices. Tentacles, made of darkness, pierced through their bodies, and they started drying up, as if they were aging at incredibly speeds. Soon the floor was filled with dry corpses, all of them filled with holes. I looked at the dead bodies with no remorse, then ventured into the middle pathway. We arrived in a cave with a throne on the middle. In the throne sat a menacing looking man, in front of him were his five lieutenants. I walked forwards as he looked at me menacingly, but I couldn¡¯t care less about him. I in return looked deep into his eyes with huge killing intent ever apparent. The man started sweating a cold sweat.

    ¡°Who are you, and what are you doing here? Why did you kill my men?¡± He asked with a deep raspy voice, filled with hate.

    ¡°I was sent by the Mercenary Association to wipe out your hideout, not leaving a single man alive, and to rescue some merchant¡¯s daughter that you kidnapped.¡± I honestly told him. I wasn¡¯t afraid of him, since I was both of superior strength and race. Generally I, as a vampire, would be able to deal with someone of similar strength easily, thanks to my superior speed, and greater endurance and regenerative abilities. It was very hard to kill a vampire. You had to completely destroy the heart, or they wouldn¡¯t die. I wasn¡¯t afraid that he would escape either. If he tried to get out of the cave, it would basically be a death trap, since he wouldn¡¯t be able to see anything.

    I could see the fear appearing on his face.

    ¡°Kill them!¡±

    He spoke two words and everyone charged.

    ¡°Amelia you kill the other ones, I will deal with the leader.¡±

    I said and charged straight through the other ones, shocking them with my speed. I appeared in front of the leader swinging my knife at his throat. He managed to get away and block in the nick of time, but he still stumbled a few steps back from my strength. He looked at me in fear, then determination and he viciously swung his axe at me. I easily stepped to the side, dodging the strike, thanks to my superior reflexes, but then in the corner of my eye, I noticed his leg swing towards me. I didn¡¯t dodge in time and was hit directly. I flew two meters back and landed on my legs. This was definitely not the strength of middle C rank. This was at least someone at the peak of rank C! I looked at him in anger, and charged at him. I threw the knife at him, then formed my hands into claws. I swiped my claws at him, he dodged the first strike, but my second hit him in the chest, drawing out his blood. He looked at me with shock. He had never seen anyone make his hands into claws. This wasn¡¯t something humans could do.

    ¡°What are you?!¡±

    He charged at me, axe in hand. He swung his axe at me again. I easily dodged, this time I was prepared for another strike so a dodged out of his reach. He swung again and I dodged again. This repeated four times, but then he put his hand behind his back and pulled out a crossbow. He quickly fired it. The bolt left the crossbow and pieced right into my chest. I grimaced in pain, as the bolt stuck out my chest. Thanks to my endurance, it didn¡¯t hurt as much as it should. If I was a human that bolt could have seriously injured me, but as vampire, it was only enough to cause a bit of pain. Now I was infuriated. It wasn¡¯t that I wasn¡¯t stronger than him, but because I was just too inexperienced in combat. If I had more experience, then he would have already died.

    I furiously at him in my rage. I insanely attacked him completely disregarding my own body. This way he had managed to strike many ¡°lethal¡± strikes on me, but I wasn¡¯t affected much. I furiously swung my claws towards his chest, but he managed to dodge to the side, but at this moment I already swung my other claw at his arm. There was a spray of blood as his arm fell to the floor. The man screamed in pain. I took the opportunity and kicked him in the leg with all my power. There was a loud crack as his leg snapped in half, the bone sticking out of the skin. I then stabbed my claw into his chest and grabbed his heart. He looked at me horrified. ¡®How could he do this, I struck several lethal blows, but they barely even fazed him¡¯ he thought.

    ¡°What are you?¡± he asked again, this time in a weak voice, as he spit up blood. I looked at him coldly, then crushed his heart. I turned around and looked towards Amelia. She had already killed three of them, so I charged behind one of them and broke his spine, then crushed his head under my foot, as he lied there, helplessly. I looked at Amelia with a smile, after she killed the last one.

    ¡°Let¡¯s go get that merchant girl and leave.¡±

    I said, then turned around and left through the pathway, hence we came. Back in the hall we turned to the pathway on the other side. We entered it, and eventually arrived in another cave. There were several cages in here, and in each of them there was a prisoner. Some of the girls were naked, looked like they had been raped. Some of them were dead. We looked around for the girl we were sent for. We had been given a picture of her, back in the city, so we knew what she looked like. Soon we arrived in another cage. In there was a girl. She looked tired and dirty. She had black hair that went down to her waist. She was wearing ragged clothes, that may have once looked good, but now they wouldn¡¯t even pass for beggar clothes.

    ¡°You there, get up. We were hired by your family to save you.¡±

    I said in an indifferent voice, as I looked at her.

    ¡°You¡¯re here to save me? What about the bandits? There are so many of them.¡±

    She replied, her fear clear in her voice.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, we already killed all of them.¡±

    I said and then grabbed the door to the cage. The door was locked, but as I put a bit of force into my hands, the lock broke and the door opened. The girl looked at me in amazement as the door opened. I wasn¡¯t payed to rescue the other people so we left after freeing the merchant girl. The army could send someone over if they wanted them rescued. When we came to the dark pathways, I told the girl to hold unto Amelia. She asked us how we could see anything in this darkness, but I just told her that we can see easily in the dark.

    After we left the cave, we travelled for a few hours before we came back to the road. From there we continued travelling back to the city. It took us a few days to get back to the city. It had been hard for us to feed these days, but we stayed at an inn once, so we managed to sneak out and have a good meal. After a few days we finally arrived in front of the city gate, once more. We entered without trouble, and walked straight to the Mercenary Association Hall.

    In the hall, I walked up to the reception desk. There was another woman there now. I showed her my token.

    ¡°We have finished a rank C mission to wipe out a bandit hideout and rescue a merchant¡¯s daughter.¡±

    I said to her. She looked at me, the respect showing in her eyes. C rank mercenaries were quite rare these days, and one as young as this was almost never seen. She flipped through some papers, then found ours. She told us to sign it, then we were given a bag of gold. Before the girl was taken away she gave me a piece of paper.

    ¡°If you ever need anything you can come to this place. This is my family home and I¡¯m sure that father would gladly help you, since you saved me. But even if you don¡¯t need anything, make sure to still come. I¡¯m sure father will want to meet you.¡±

    She said with a cute voice as her eyes sparkled. This girl looked to be around seventeen years old. She was quite pretty, but she didn¡¯t match up to Amelia. After she gave me the paper, she quickly left. But there was one thing she didn¡¯t realize. Neither I nor Amelia could read. But she was already gone.

    We didn¡¯t have any weapons or armour, so we decided that we would go and visit a blacksmith. We went back to that inn we used to stay at and asked for directions. Soon after we were in a weapons and armour shop. We purchased some light armour, we didn¡¯t need big armour since we regenerated quickly and had high endurance. We then both purchased a longsword each. Now we were armed with armour and sword. Before we only had the clothes on our back and a knife. Talking about clothes, they were the next thing on our agenda. The clothes I had been wearing had been torn up in the last battle. We asked the blacksmith about clothing stores, then left. Later we had bought several sets of clothes each. Now we only had about a hundred gold coins left. The things we bought had been very expensive. The armour and weapons were made of a very tough material, so they were naturally expensive. The clothes had also been of high calibre.

    There was now one more thing we wanted to do. We needed to learn to read, and also someone to teach us magic. I was capable of making my basic spells seem powerful, but that was only because I had a lot of mana. I could pour vast amounts of mana into them, thus making them much more powerful. For example, the ice spark spell I used would normally only make one spark, but a master mage with a lot of mana could make more sparks. The same with devouring darkness spell. I should only have been able to kill one of the bandits with it, but I had way more mana than any other novice mage. Therefore I could make my spells more powerful.

    But if I could make a mage teach me more advanced spells and tutor me that would be much more effective. Therefore we decided to find a mage and turn him into a vampire. But we didn¡¯t know where we could find one. I decided that I should try and ask that girl¡¯s father. I went back to the inn. I explained to the innkeeper that Amelia and I were both from poor rural families and couldn¡¯t read, and asked him to tell me the contents of the paper. The innkeeper complied and soon we were out again. The sun had now set so it was much more comfortable outside. After walking for a few minutes, we arrived in front of a big mansion. This merchant certainly was rich. I walked up to the door and knocked. Soon a maid opened the door.

    ¡°Do you have business here?¡± she asked.

    Unauthorized content usage: if you discover this narrative on Amazon, report the violation.

    ¡°Is the master of the house present? Tell him that I want to see him.¡± I said to the maid. The maid left and then came back again after a short while.

    ¡°Please follow me, sir and madam, the master is waiting for you.¡±

    The maid led us through a few corridors and soon we arrived in a room. In this room there was a table with a few chairs. On the table there were three wine glasses and a bottle of wine. On one end of the table there sat a respectable looking man.

    ¡°Are you two the mercenaries that save my daughter?¡± he asked.

    ¡°Yes we are.¡±

    ¡°Good, very good! Please sit down and have a glass of wine.¡±

    The man said, as the maid poured wine into the three glasses

    ¡°Now tell me. Is there anything you need? If I can help you, I will.¡± The man said. I looked at him with serious look. ¡°We need a mage. Can you help us?¡± I asked with hope in my eyes. ¡°A mage? Sure I can get you one. Does he need to be specialised in any of the elements?¡± he asked.

    ¡°Yes, he needs to excel at darkness magic, and frost magic. Is this possible?¡± I asked once more, the anticipation growing in my heart.

    ¡°Yes, it should be doable. I will immediately send someone to look. If you come back tomorrow evening, the mage should be ready.¡± He said. We kept talking for a while, then after an hour we left. On the way out we met the girl we rescued. She was excited to see me and begged to stay a while longer. But I managed to get away after telling her that I would be back tomorrow.

    The next day we were back in the mansion. In front of us was a man. He was wearing dark robes with blue patterns on it.

    ¡°I¡¯m Kato. I¡¯m looking forward to working with you in the future, Sir Isaac.¡± The mage said respectfully. I asked him some questions about his magic. He was indeed very good at darkness and frost magic. He had been considered a prodigy since he was a kid. I was very satisfied with him and decided that it would be him. I looked towards the merchant named Bogat.

    ¡°Good. He will do. Thank you for your help. I¡¯ll visit you again in the future, if you don¡¯t mind my company.¡± I said to Bogat, then the three of us left. Before we got out I was stopped by that girl. Her name was Serana. I talked to her for a while before we left. She was a nice girl, pretty smart too.

    Before we left the city I explained our ¡°mission¡± to Kato. Of course this mission was fake. After we left the city we travelled for a few hours, until we arrived at a cave. We went into the cave and set up camp there. I told Amelia and Kato to stay there, while I went out for a while. While they stayed in the cave waiting, I rushed at full speed, trying to find two persons together. After looking for a few minutes I actually managed to find a pair walking on the road. They were both men, and looked to be novice adventurers. I rushed behind them and knocked them out. I flung them over my shoulders, then ran away. I ran at full speed back to the cave. I entered the cave and threw the bodies in a corner. Kato looked at me in shock.

    ¡°Who are they? What are you doing?¡± he asked in shock.

    ¡°They are your food.¡± I said to him with a smirk on my face. Kato looked at me with a confused expression. I walked towards him and visibly extended my teeth.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, this will only hurt a bit.¡±

    I said to him as I walked in front of him. He was scared now and started charging a spell, but before he had a chance to do anything I quickly bit him. I was rapidly draining him of blood, until there was only a small amount of blood in his body. I let some of my venom flow into his body. I made it so that he would have more mana and more potential for magic than most vampires. I also made him better at spiritual stuff. Making him this mage oriented also made it so that he had a bit less strength than other vampires, but it was still more than a mortal. After configuring his powers I finally let go of him.

    We waited for an hour before he awoke once more. He looked up in confusion, not seeming to remember what happened. But then it struck him, and he looked up me with fear.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry Kato. I didn¡¯t hurt you. In fact I made you stronger. Have you ever heard of vampires?¡± I asked him with a gentle tone, as to reassure him that I wouldn¡¯t hurt him.

    ¡°Vampires? Yes I¡¯ve heard of them. Are you saying you¡¯re a vampire? That¡¯s not possible! Even the vampires in legend only existed countless millennia ago. They probably didn¡¯t exist at all!¡±

    He said with disbelief in his eyes.

    ¡°Yes we are vampires. And you are one too now. And it is true that vampires haven¡¯t existed for millennia. Until recently that is. You see, I am the first vampire, personally created by the God of Death, Gebados. Amelia here was the second, the first one that I turned, while you are the third. I am the progenitor, while you are my clansmen. Now, since you know about vampires, you probably know that we need blood. This is in fact very true. Without blood we will become very weak. And since you¡¯ve just transformed you will need to drain these two men of their blood, completely.¡±

    I looked at him with a serious tone, as I explained to him what he had to do.

    ¡°What? I have to drink their blood? Well, I¡¯ve killed before, but I don¡¯t think I can actually drink their blood.¡± He said with worry.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Since you¡¯ve become a vampire, drinking blood will be very natural, and will taste extremely good. If you can¡¯t do it, then just wait. In a while you won¡¯t even be able to stop yourself"

    I said to Kato with smile on my face. I knew too well that he won¡¯t be able to stop himself from feeding. But he did last a while though. He sat there, grimacing, for thirty minutes before he said, fuck it, and walked over to the still unconscious bodies. He grabbed one of the bodies, and was surprised at his own strength as he lifted the body of the ground. He bit into the man¡¯s neck, and a moment later he fell to the floor, completely drained of blood. Soon after the other man followed.

    I looked at Kato.

    ¡°How was it?¡± I asked with a smirk.

    ¡°It was tasty¡± he said, the surprise easily apparent on his face.

    ¡°I told you that you would get used to it immediately.¡±

    Soon after, we left. We ran back to the city as quickly as we could. We were running at Kato¡¯s fastest speed, but he was a lot slower than us. He had been at the F rank in physical strength before I turned him, so now he would be at the E rank until the maturing period ended.

    When a human becomes a vampire they will become a lot stronger than they were before. But if a human at the B rank or A rank became a vampire they wouldn¡¯t increase in strength that much. But that didn¡¯t mean it wouldn¡¯t beneficial. Humans were mortal beings. They would never be able to reach a rank beyond the A rank. But if an A rank human became a vampire, he would be able to get beyond the A rank. After the A rank you had the S rank, the SS rank, the SSS rank and finally the X rank. But there weren¡¯t many beings above the S rank in the world. The X ranks could be counted on one hand. They were the ultimate beings of this world. But the vampire had the potential to reach the X rank. The longer a vampire lives, the stronger it would become. But this needed a vast amount of time. Also, humans didn¡¯t have great regenerative abilities. If a human lost an arm he would never get it back. But if he became a vampire that arm would grow back. This of course this also counted for any crippled limbs.

    As we were rushing back to the city, I explained the details of being a vampire to Kato, like our little sun weakness, being careful when feeding and not leaving any evidence and our immortality. Like becoming stronger as we age, not getting sick and being immune to any poison. I also told him of my plans. He agreed to teach us to read and magic. Not that he had a choice. With the bound connecting us, he would never be able to refuse my orders.

    When we got back to the city, we went back to that inn we stayed at. We rented two rooms for two months. We still had about a hundred gold coins left. This was more than enough to pay for the rent. These two months were spent learning magic and to read. Vampires had an improved mind. We could think faster and learn faster. Therefore it only took us two months to master the written language. Kato also taught us some magic. These two month both our magic capabilities had increased. I was already able to do magic of the next tier, and Amelia was very close to have her breakthrough.

    Just as fighting strength was dealt into ranks, so were mages. The first rank was Beginner Mage. After that you had Acolyte Mage. Then there was the Elementary Mage. Then you had the Half Circle Magus. Then Full Circle Magus. The last one that I knew of was the Warlock. There were ranks after this, but I just didn¡¯t know of them. Magic was a very deep and broad field. But humans were also limited in magic. It was very rare for a human mage to make it all the way to Warlock. Even though humans were a weak race, they were still the primary race of the world. This is because of their population. They vastly outnumbered the other races. But the other races were still too strong, so the humans didn¡¯t dare start a war with them. There still existed beings that could be a major threat to the human race. These were the super experts that could easily wipe out entire armies with a swipe of their hands. But these super experts were very secluded and didn¡¯t partake in mortal affairs. But if the humans were to attack on of the races, then these super experts that belonged to said race would probably intervene. Thus there was an everlasting peace between the civilizations of the races.

    They might even establish trade routes and alliances with each other. The humans would import elven items in exchange for human technology. Humans were the most technologically advanced of the races. Since they weren¡¯t strong, they revelled at inventing. Using science they would make formidable formations, and devastating weapons. But some of these inventions couldn¡¯t even be used or built by humans, since they required high amounts of mana or titanic strength to build.

    One day, a messenger had arrived before me. He told me that Lord Bogat wanted to see me. He had an important matter to discuss. That evening Kato, Amelia and I went to that big magnificent mansion. Inside the mansion, we had been brought to a room. Inside this room, Bogat sat on a chair. He looked at me.

    ¡°Isaac, you¡¯re here. Good. There is something I need your help with. This is a very important matter. I needed someone capable, that I trust. I trust you Isaac. You saved my daughter, and I have had a few good chats with you. I know that there is more about you than you let on. But that isn¡¯t of importance. The point is I trust you, and I need your help. And I will pay.¡±

    He said, the seriousness very apparent in his voice. I stayed silent for a moment, thinking. I looked him into the eyes.

    ¡°Fine. If I am capable of doing it I will help you.¡± I said. I was a bit worried about his tone before. It seemed this matter was very important.

    ¡°Good. I¡¯m glad. Now let me tell you. This matter involves the lives of my family. And it is very illegal. You see, five days ago, my wife died. But it was no accident or illness. No, she was murdered! Assassinated! I was shocked and despaired from her death. But I recovered. What was important now was to avenge her. As the assassin was running away, he slipped. This mistake of his made him lose his mask. I saw his face. The next few days I did some investigating. Eventually I found the killers identity. I had him captured and tortured, to find who hired him. It didn¡¯t take long before he told us everything.

    I knew the cause of my wife¡¯s death. It was our rival, the Chong family. Our family and theirs have always been enemies, since several generations ago, when they came to the city from foreign lands. But now they dared to kill my wife! They have to pay! They need to die!

    Isaac. I want you to exterminate them. But that¡¯s not enough. I need you to terrify them. I want you to kill them one by one, leaving terror in their hearts as they know that they are being targeted. I want you to make the horrified of the thought, ¡®what if I¡¯m next?¡¯ I want you to slowly exterminate them one by one. But you can¡¯t ever be discovered. If you do, then it will be bad for both of us. The towns guard will probably be able to see our connection and put two and two together.

    Especially since this is the capital of Fenlai prefecture, Fenlai City!¡±

    I looked at him as a menacing smile began creeping up on my face. Soon I began laughing. This really exited me. To slowly, but surely exterminate a clan, sowing the seed of fear in their hearts. I looked at him once more, then I said

    ¡°I will do it. I will definitely do it.¡±

    End of chapter 5

 Chapter 6: The Seed of Fear

    Here comes chapter 6. Earlier today I was checking to see if there were any chapter. At that point I was that the text had changed to some sort of code about font size. The story was completely gone. It was like this in all of the chapters. I tried to check some other stories on here. Some were fine while other were the same as mine. I got really scared by it, but I decided to wait a while. About twenty minutes I came back and was back to normal. Did any of you guys also experience this? Do you know what it was?

    Anyways, enjoy!

    Chapter 6: The Seed of Fear

    ¡°I will do it. I will definitely do it.¡±

    I said, the excitement overflowing. I don¡¯t know why, but the thought of sowing the seed of fear, of horrifying that Cheng clan, just sounded so fun. It was the perfect mission for a vampire. The vampires were the rulers of the night. We could blend into the shadows, easily climb walls and traverse the roof tops. Killing someone without being noticed was easy for us. We could use hypnosis to lure our victim into an empty alleyway, or we could sneak into their bedroom, through the window at night, and silently kill them.

    Originally, after the maturing period I had gained the power of hypnosis. This power allowed me to control a mortals mind. But after these two years, this ability had increased in power. I could now control them from a distance. I could be looking through a window in a building, a hundred meters away, staring into the eyes of some by passer. This would compel the mortal to look in my direction, meeting my eyes. Then I could use my powers to hypnotise him, making him fall asleep on the spot, or make him go into an empty alleyway, only to meet his death.

    Recently Amelia had also gained the hypnosis ability. This confirmed my theory of vampires gaining mystical powers as they age. There was no information of this in my brain, so originally I could only guess. But now I was sure. But it seemed like I gained the powers a lot faster than other vampires, since I was the progenitor. It made sense.

    I looked at Bogat. I could see that he was relieved and glad.

    ¡°Good. Good, very good! If you can accomplish this task, I will do anything you want me to, and I mean anything. I¡¯ll even serve you, if you want me to. But you will have to complete the task fist. And you better bide you time. Don¡¯t rush, first learn their schedules, see where they like to go, and then when the target is off guard and secluded, then you strike! I have prepared you a list. On this list are the names and a picture off all the Cheng family members. Now, I wish you good luck.¡±

    I took the list off of his hands. The list was compiled into eight pages. Each page had one target on them. The name and picture was provided on the paper, as well as a description of the targets family role. It was a good thing I could read now, or it would have been a bit embarrassing.

    I looked at the first page. On this page was man named Cheng Tong. I thought it was bit weird that the family name was first, but Bogat said that it was a custom where the Cheng family came from. This Cheng Tong was in charge of the accounting of the Cheng businesses. I decided that he would be my first target

    Our group of three went over to check out his work place. It was evening now, so the only light around came from the street lights. We arrived near the building where he worked. I could see that there were still people in the building. Our bodies flashed in the darkness, and a moment later we appeared on a rooftop. We kept observing the building. After a while of observing I finally saw his face appear as he walked past a window. A moment later he exited the building. He was talking with a few people that were going in the same direction. They weren¡¯t guards or anything, just his workers.

    Since there weren¡¯t any guards following him, then that made killing him simpler. This first kill would be the easiest one, because after the first assassination the Cheng family would probably start walking around with guards. If not after the first one, then definitely after the second assassination. By then they would most likely realize they were being targeted. We followed Cheng Tong for a while. One by one his subordinates went in different directions. Now he was left completely alone.

    There wasn¡¯t anyone around here, he was completely alone. I decided that he would die here in the middle of street. I took out a knife and told Amelia and Kato to prepare to flee at full speed. I threw the knife. A moment late the knife pierced into the back of Cheng Tongs head. Thump! He fell down lifelessly, as we disappeared in flash. As we fled, we were carefully observing our surroundings making sure that no one was there.

    We soon arrived back at Bogat¡¯s mansion. We walked inn and were immediately led to the same room as before.

    ¡°Already back? Do you need anything?¡± he asked.

    ¡°Cheng Tong of the Cheng family has died. It has begun and the seed of fear has been planted.¡± I said to him coldly.

    He looked at me in shock and surprise. He was surprised that we already killed him.

    ¡°Really? No one saw you right? Tell me, how did he die?¡±

    I explained the death of Cheng Tong to him, and Bogat couldn¡¯t help but let a smile creep unto his face. Bogat said that this was a cause for celebration. He even brought his daughter, Serana, to drink. I was surprised that she knew of this, and that she didn¡¯t mind at all. She was even happy. Maybe I would bring this family into world of undead. As I thought this thought, I realized that I didn¡¯t even know their family name.

    ¡°I just realized that you never told me your family name.¡± I said, as I really wanted to know. It was a bit weird that I didn¡¯t know their last name, but I did know the last name of their mortal enemies.

    ¡°What, I haven¡¯t told you? How stupid of me. Well, let me tell you. It¡¯s Coldblood. I am Bogat Coldblood, and this is my daughter Serana Coldblood. How about you? What¡¯s your last name?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t have a last name yet to be honest. Both Amelia and I come from poor families in a rural area. I used to live on a small farm, until two years ago. Amelia lived in a nearby village.¡±

    I told him with honesty. I had started to trust him after the two months I spent in the city. These months I had often visited him for a chat. I also quite liked his personality. If someone wronged him, he would want his revenge to be a hundred times worse. His wife was killed, so the only possible response is that the killer¡¯s entire clan is exterminated. This is a philosophy I can agree with. And they even had such a last name. It would be perfect for vampires.

    ¡°You grew up in a small farm? How can someone that grew up in a farm be so powerful? I thought that you came from some warrior clan or perhaps wasn¡¯t even from Fenlai Prefecture. You¡¯re so young after all, only 21 years old, and already at the verge of breaking through to the B rank. Formidable.¡±

    We spent the night drinking and having fun. Serana even drank quite a bit. Bogat was shocked at how much Amelia, Kato and I could drink. Vampires are immune to poison, so the alcohol had no effect on us, whatsoever.

    The next day we had a meeting about how we should go about exterminating the Cheng clan. We decided that we would divide the intel gathering into three parts. Amelia and I would both observe a target each, discovering where they liked to go, when they went home and so on. Kato would in turn stay outside the Cheng family home, observing them. Vampire have heightened senses, so if we concentrate we would be able to listen to everything happened in another building. Therefore we wanted Kato to observe the Cheng family, so we always knew what was going on there. This way they wouldn¡¯t be able to sneak out of the city. If they did we would know immediately and follow them, then kill them somewhere outside the city.

    We anticipated that they would most likely try this when a certain number of their family members had died. We spent the next days observing. I decided to stalk a person named Cheng Hong. These guys really had similar names. This Cheng Hong was an inspector. He would go around the city inspecting the Cheng family businesses. If anything was wrong he would find out. I spent four weeks quietly following him around, like his own shadow. In these four week Kato brought it to our attention that the Cheng family had grieved over Cheng Tong¡¯s death and thoroughly investigated it, but in the end they didn¡¯t find out anything. There were no witnesses, and no evidence except the knife. The only thing they knew was that the knife was thrown from a rooftop.

    This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    After four weeks of stalking I had found out what Cheng Hongs schedule was. He would go to certain stores on certain days. He didn¡¯t go to the stores randomly, which was a bit weird. If he did go randomly he would be able to catch them off guard. I also found that he liked to go to a certain tavern. There he would drink his ¡°sorrows¡± away. Whatever those sorrows were. Later I found out that those sorrows were his job. Apparently he hated his job. He didn¡¯t like to have to walk all over the city every day. Especially since this city was so huge.

    There lived an astonishing amount of people in this world. In this city alone there were almost ten million citizens. And this was the smallest capital of the kingdom. In the royal capital there lived almost a hundred million people. Who knew how many there were in the entire kingdom. Since there were this many people it made it a bit easier to feed on the poor citizens that wouldn¡¯t be missed, then burn their bodies. When we fed on people in the city, we only fed on those poor beggars. No one would notice or care about them disappearing.

    Every day after work he would go to this tavern. Then he would leave around midnight, drunk.

    Amelia had also figured out what her target liked to do. Her target was a female called Cheng Miu. Cheng Miu didn¡¯t do much work, and was at home most of the time. But every Friday she would go and meet a few of her friends. They would go party or eat at a restaurant or something along those lines.

    We decided that we would kill those two at the same time. I would take care of Cheng Hong, and she would take care of Cheng Miu.

    The next night I was waiting outside the tavern that Cheng Hong liked to go to. He was currently inside drinking. I was standing on a rooftop, waiting. It was around midnight. I looked through the window of the tavern. I caught his eyes. Cheng Hong suddenly felt a strong urge to look out the window, up to the roofs, into my eyes. I used my hypnotic powers to compel him to leave. Cheng immediately left. He began walking in a random direction. Then we walked into a dark alleyway. I went into the alleyway as I released him from the hypnosis. He looked shocked. He had no idea why he all of a sudden went here. He could remember walking, he just didn¡¯t know why he came here. I stood behind him, silent as the night. I got closer to his ear as I whispered.

    ¡°It¡¯s your turn now.¡±

    He was horrified as he felt my voice go into his ear. I took out my knife and slid it across his throat. Soon his head fell to the ground, and his body collapsed. I looked out to the street to see if anyone was nearby. It was completely empty, and I also couldn¡¯t sense anyone. Perfect, I thought. I looked around for a stick or pole, or something long. I found an iron rod on the ground. How weird, I thought. Why would there be an iron rod here?

    I didn¡¯t think about it further and grabbed the rod. I walked out to the street. I stabbed the rod into the ground, then I stabbed Cheng Hongs head unto the rod. I then laid the headless body in front of the rod, and disappeared like a shadow. This all took just a moment, as I was going full speed, so that I wouldn¡¯t be noticed. It was a bit risky to do this, but it would strike fear into the hearts of the Cheng family. I was very satisfied with my work, and couldn¡¯t wait to tell Bogat about it.

    3rd person perspective, Amelia

    The sun had went down and Amelia went over to the Cheng family home, to wait for Cheng Miu to leave. Soon a group of girls arrived at the house, and Miu soon came out. The girls walked for a while until they arrived in front of a house. This house belonged to one of the girls that Miu used to hang out with. The girl wasn¡¯t present in the group before, so they must either gone to get her, or they were going to hang out here. The girls went into the house. Amelia stayed outside listening. It seemed like they had indeed gone there to hang out. The hours passed as the girls were doing their thing, and Amelia was waiting. It was around midnight now. Amelia and Isaac had decided that they would both strike at about the same time.

    At this moment, Amelia snuck up to the window to the room the girls were in. She managed to open it and went in. The girls were looking in shock, as an astonishing beauty entered the room.

    ¡°Who are you?¡± one of the girls asked in fear.

    ¡°I¡¯m here to kill you all.¡± Amelia answered, a smile of malice on her face. Amelia formed a claw and rushed in front of the girl, decapitating her. The girls screamed as they saw the head roll on the floor. Amelia smiled at the scene, then rushed in front of another girl. Another head touched the floor. There were now four girls left. Amelia made another flash, as two more heads rolled. Two remaining. She walked towards one of the girls. She stopped in front of her, then grabbed her head with one hand, the shoulder with the other. She started pulling. The girl started screaming in insufferable pain as her head slowly tore off her body. After a while of intense pain, the girls head was no longer connected to her body.

    Amelia looked at Cheng Miu, the last remaining girl.

    ¡°This is all because you killed the wife of the Coldblood family.¡± She said with evil intent in her voice. A moment later, the last head touched the floor. Then like a shadow, Amelia disappeared from the room. Soon after she could hear a scream full of grief and shock come from the house.

    The way she had killed them was gruesome. This would surely cause fear in the Cheng family, and then Isaac would surely be happy. For Amelia, Isaac was the most important thing in the world. She would do anything for him. Her killing all of Cheng Miu¡¯s friends would also make other people afraid of associating with the Cheng family. Anyone with a brain would be able connect all the deaths after all. By this point it would be ever apparent that someone was targeting them.

    Isaac, Amelia and Kato soon met. Isaac and Amelia told of their successes, and then immediately went to the Coldblood mansion. Bogat was overjoyed to hear of their deaths. He really was one sinister fellow, to actually feel happiness from their gruesome deaths. But then again, Isaac and Amelia were the cause of these deaths, so wouldn¡¯t they be even more sinister?

    The next day, there was an upheaval in the Cheng family. They were shocked and afraid. They had realized that they were being targeted, and the killer was an insane psychopath who even put the head of Cheng Hong on display in the middle of the street, and massacred Cheng Miu and her friends in her friends own house, without being discovered. They were terrified and couldn¡¯t help fear for their lives.

    They were almost completely sure that the cause of these deaths were the Coldblood family, but they didn¡¯t have any proof. They were also somehow afraid of the Coldblood family now. It was clear that the killers were very powerful and quick. When did the Coldblood family get such powerful people? The Cheng family didn¡¯t even have any C rank combatants. Their strongest guard was only at the D rank. In this weak prefecture of Fenlai, usually the powerful families didn¡¯t actually have any powerful guards. Most of the people who reached D rank would be mercenaries and wouldn¡¯t want to serve a family. Only the army had numerous C and B rank soldiers. But there wasn¡¯t even a single A rank in the entire prefecture. Not even the Lord Commander was A rank. He was only B rank. You would have to be an exceptionally strong C rank to be able to kill these people so quickly. No normal C rank would do. It would have to be someone with special abilities or someone with a rare technique.

    For the Coldblood family to have acquired a powerful C rank or B rank was unthinkable. It was impossible for them to have hired a mercenary, and there weren¡¯t any powerful assassin organization in the Fenlai Prefecture. Therefore the only possibility was for them to have powerful C rank or B rank under them.

    If this was really the case then the Cheng clan was really doomed. Because they had killed the wife of the Coldblood family. At the time, they probably didn¡¯t think this would bring about the destruction of their clan.

    End of chapter 6

 Chapter 7: Standing

    We almost have a thousand avg views now. And over 100 followers and 22 favorites. This story is growing in popularity. That makes me very happy. Thank you for your support everyone.

    Here comes the last chapter of the week, chapter 7!

    Chapter 7: Standing

    Cheng Tong, Cheng Hong and Cheng Miu. Three people. So far we had eliminated three people of the Cheng clan. We still needed to kill five more. There was the master of the Cheng family, Cheng Teng. His wife, Cheng Ming. Their two sons, Cheng Rong and Cheng Rang, and lastly their daughter Cheng Song. These five people we needed to kill, one by one, letting the seed of fear sprout into a magnificent tree of horror.

    After one more person died, it was very likely that they would decide to leave the city, not caring about their businesses. But that wouldn¡¯t help them, for Kato was always observing, stalking them, like a shadow. We decided to make our next target Cheng Ming, the wife of Cheng Teng, master of the Cheng clan. But this was a bit tricky, for she never left the mansion these days. Amelia, Kato and I had all been observing her these past weeks, but she had never once left the house. Before she would leave from time to time, but the fear of getting killed kept her inside now.

    The only way for us to kill her now, would be to infiltrate the mansion and then kill her. This wasn¡¯t too hard for us, but we would have to be careful. I knew that the Chong family had a D rank under them. This man wasn¡¯t strong enough to pose a threat to us, but if he discovered us, then that would be annoying. If anyone discovered our identities, neither the Coldblood family, nor my little group would be able to stay in the city. Therefore it was essential that we went in, killed Cheng Ming and left, without being discovered. But we also wanted to kill her in a scary way.

    We waited until midnight. All four remaining members of the Cheng clan were now sleeping. Only a few guards were away, patrolling the mansion grounds. It was time. I had Amelia and Kato stay behind, as I snuck into the mansion. Jumped over the wall and landed in a corner. I used darkness magic to become invisible in the darkness. From days of observing, I knew where the lady slept. I snuck to wall beneath her window. Covered in shadows, hidden by the night, I climbed up the wall. I appeared below the window. I snuck a look inside. They were sleeping. I didn¡¯t immediately go inside. I kept observing Cheng Teng and Cheng Ming as they slept for two hours. I had to be completely sure that they were asleep.

    After two long hours of observing and waiting, I finally opened the window, slowly. I snuck inside, silent as the wind. I walked slowly over to the sleeping Cheng Ming. I stood above her. With a contemptuous look I slowly took out a knife. I help the knife over her chest. I stabbed into her chest. The knife pierced trough her skin and entered her heart. She died. After the deed was done, I hurriedly left, leaving the knife in the heart. Just like that Cheng Ming had died, right next to her sleeping husband, not noticing a thing.

    I left the compound and met up with Amelia and Kato again. We didn¡¯t immediately leave. We waited for a while, when we all of a sudden heard a heart piercing scream come out of a certain room in a certain mansion.

    He had woken up. The blood had flowed out of her, like a spring of blood. Cheng Teng had eventually woken up from being soaked in blood, and had found her wife with a knife piercing her heart. Judgement had fallen. The Cheng family had had kill the wife of Bogat Coldblood, so therefore the Cheng family had been hunted, several members of the clan killed.

    The guards hear the scream. They immediately rushed to master bedroom. Inside they were shocked as they saw the state of Cheng Ming. Immediately after, the guards rushed all the compound, looking for the killer. After they couldn¡¯t find anyone, they expanded their search to outside the mansion grounds. But to no avail, because no matter how they searched, they never found anyone. We were still observing, hidden by the shadows. Soon all four of the remaining members of the Cheng clan had gathered. All the guards had gathered as well.

    ¡°Everyone, my wife, Cheng Ming, has died. She was stabbed with a knife, right in the heart. I was sleeping right next to her, but I didn¡¯t notice anything as the assassin killed her. We need to leave this city. This assassin is not someone we can deal with, if we stay any longer all of us will eventually die. We need to take this opportunity, as the assassin has already left. Everyone, gather your important items. We leave in fifteen minutes¡±

    Cheng Hong said with a somber voice. There was anger, sadness and despair present in his voice. Fifteen minutes later, they had gathered again. Thus they left the city, thinking that we had already left, since they couldn¡¯t find even a sign of me.

    We silently followed them in the darkness, until we were outside of the city. When we had gotten a good distance away from the city, we decided that it was time. Like a flash we appeared a dozen meters in front of them. They looked at us with shock. This speed was so shocking that they had not even seen us coming. The only one that could see us, was the D rank Guard captain, but even for him we were only a blur. Soon after Kato also appeared behind us. He was still quite a bit slower than us, even though the maturity period had long passed. He was currently at the middle D rank. Amelia had also reached the middle C rank, now being two stages beneath me.

    ¡°You really think you would be able to escape?¡± I asked with contempt, a mocking smile on my face.

    ¡°You! Are you the one who killed all my children and wife?!¡± Cheng Teng asked with fury ever apparent in his voice.

    ¡°Yes. You killed the wife of my dear friend Bogat Coldblood. The only natural response is to exterminate you clan. But first let¡¯s deal with those puny guards.¡±

    I said and gestured for Amelia and Kato to follow me and massacre the guards. Our bodies flashed and blood started flowing. Limbs were chopped of and necks broken. A moment later, thirty guards, including the D rank one, were strewn around the ground. The Cheng family was looking at us, terrified.

    ¡°Now witness, as we kill the rest of your family in front of your eyes.¡± I said menacingly as I walked towards Cheng Song. I stood before and grabbed her shirt and tore it off. Her two naked breasts appeared before, then my hands flashed, and they fell down. The girl screamed in agony as her two mountain peaks fell to the floor. I grabbed her neck and let my teeth sink into her. In but a moment, her body laid lifeless on the ground. Cheng Teng and his sons looked at me, madness in their eyes.

    ¡°Monster!¡± They screamed at me. My body flashed and I stood before Cheng Rong. I grabbed his head and shoulder, then pulled. With my monstrous strength I tore his head apart from his body. He screamed as he could feel his flesh tear from his body. A moment later another dead body decorated the ground. My body flashed once more, as I stood before Cheng Rang. I punched him in the stomach. He flew a dozens of meters back, but still survived. I didn¡¯t kill him yet on purpose. I flashed once more, then I stood before him again. I stepped on his knee. Crack! His knee shattered and Cheng Rong let out an ear shattering scream. I stepped onto his other knee. Once more he let out a scream that didn¡¯t even sound human. Then I stepped on his shoulder, completely shattering it. Now he couldn¡¯t even scream any louder. I stepped, another shoulder shattered. Now all his limbs were broken beyond repair. I placed my foot on his chest. Then I slowly put more and more force into it, until his chest started cracking. I was wrong, because when his chest caved in, Cheng Rong let out another scream so loud and horrendous that it seemed like his entire life essence was put into it. Then the life in his eyes slowly faded, as he died.

    Now there was only one man left. Cheng Teng. Cheng Teng couldn¡¯t even speak anymore, from the sorrow of watching his children get tortured to death. I slowly walked towards him. I grabbed his head with both my hands. Then I put pressure into them, and Cheng Teng started screaming. After who knows how long of heart shattering agony, his head finally exploded.

    Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on.They were all dead. We finally burned all the bodies to ashes to finish up. We were finally finished. I hadn¡¯t had so much fun ever before. Listening to their screams as I tortured them to death. Watching them as the fear grew in their heart, until the final moment where I could kill them all. This was true entertainment. It¡¯s not that I was a complete psycho though. It¡¯s not like I would go torture random people. Them I would usually kill quickly. But these people killed the wife of my ¡°dear¡± friend Bogat. I couldn¡¯t let them suffer and easy death, now could I?

    With this business finished, we returned to Fenlai City. After returning we immediately went to the Coldblood mansion. We didn¡¯t care that they were probably asleep, they should be getting up soon anyway, as the sun was rising in the sky. We entered the mansion uninhibited. The guards there had often seen us before, and didn¡¯t even dear to try and stop us.

    We sat in the room that we usually met in, waiting for Bogat to get there. An hour later he finally appeared.

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for being late, I didn¡¯t even know you were here. Now tell me, has another one of those bastards died?¡± Bogat said hopefully.

    ¡°They¡¯re all dead now. The Cheng family in no more.¡±

    I said to Bogat, and explained to him the events of the night.

    ¡°Great! This is great! They¡¯re all dead now. Not only has my wife been avenged, now I¡¯ll also be able sweep in and take their businesses. This will increase my influence here in the city exponentially. Now the Coldblood family will be the biggest influence in Fenlai City, under the government. Now tell me, is there anything you want? I¡¯ll give you anything, from money to women. I¡¯ll even give you my own daughter, if you want her!¡± He said excitedly.

    ¡°Tell me Bogat, have you ever heard of Vampires?¡± I asked.

    ¡°Vampires? Well, yes, who hasn¡¯t? Do need books on them or something?¡± he replied with a question.

    ¡°Not exactly. Do you remember that other day, when you asked me to kill the Cheng family? That day you said there is more to me than meets the eye. That is very correct, for you see, I am a vampire. The first vampire in several millennia. Now, I give to you an opportunity. The opportunity to join the ranks of immortals. Will you serve me and become a vampire? Yes, or no?¡±

    I looked at him. Both he and Serana were looking at me in shock. Then Amelia, then Kato. They now understood why we were so powerful, and why Kato had seemingly changed ever since joining us. They were vampires! The vampires from legends! The immortal vampires, ruler of the night! This was the taught that went through their heads.

    I stood waiting patiently for his answer.

    ¡°You¡¯re really vampires? Even the first in millennia? Will we really become immortal if we accept? Will we have to drink blood? What about sunlight, I have seen you out in the sun?¡±

    He asked question after question, Expectation in his eyes.

    ¡°Yes we are really vampires. Kato too. And yes I am the first, personally created by God of Death Gebados. Yes you will become immortal. You will stop aging completely. And yes. You will have to drink blood. And the sun is just a bit of an irritation.¡± I answered repeatedly, my voice becoming more serious at that last sentence.

    There was a moment of waiting.

    ¡°Alright, if Serana accepts as well, then we¡¯ll join you.¡± He said as he looked at Serana.

    Serana looked back at her father, then at me. Another moment of waiting.

    ¡°Okay, I accept.¡± She said in a small voice.

    ¡°Bring five servant slaves here. You will need to drain two of them of their blood each. The other one is for me.¡±

    I said. A moment later five girls appeared in the room. They didn¡¯t know what they were here for. They were just ordered to stand there, not making a sound. I walked over to Serana. I stroked her cheek, then kissed her neck. I let my teeth sink into her skin. The blood flowed into my mouth, until she was almost drained of blood. Then the venom flowed into her body. I made her a powerful vampire, the same as I did with Amelia when I made her. That drained half of my energy. After I was finished, Serana fell to the floor, unconscious. Bogat looked at her with worry. I told him not to worry, that it was the normal reaction. Then I walked in front of him, and let my teeth sink into his body as well. When he was almost drained, the venom flowed as well. I made him just as powerful as I did Serana and Amelia. Now I had barely any mana and blood essence left. I walked to prettiest of the slave girls, then quickly drained her of blood. The other girls screamed in horror, but were quickly subdued by Kato and Amelia. We waited for an hour before they woke up.

    ¡°Good, you¡¯re awake. Now that you have become vampires, you will need to drink blood. The first time, you need a lot of blood. You will have to drain two of these girls each.¡±

    They both nodded and walked over the girls. Serana quickly bit into one of them and drained her of blood. There was an ecstatic expression on her face. Bogat did the same and also seemed to enjoy it. Soon there were four more corpses on the floor, accompanying the first slave girl. These Coldbloods really lived up to their name, not minding to kill four innocent girls. I liked it.

    ¡°Good, you did well. Now I need you to prepare a room for me. I have to go hibernate for a while. I spent a lot of energy making you this powerful.¡± I said in a tired voice.

    It really was a good idea to help and turn Bogat and Serana. They were now the biggest business organization in Fenlai Prefecture. They owned almost all the businesses no Fenlai City now, since they were mostly dealt between the Coldblood family and Cheng family. But now Cheng family was no more, so all the businesses went to the Coldblood family. They also had numerous branches in the other cities, so they were an organization that spread all over the Fenlai prefecture. And with the wealth they now possessed, together with their immortality, it was only a matter of time before they expanded all over the kingdom. Although they wouldn¡¯t be able to control the organization openly forever, since that would cause suspicion. At least not until the vampires had been completely established, so that they wouldn¡¯t be eradicated. But this would take a long time. Now the vampires at least had a bit of a standing in the world. But it was still nowhere near enough.

    I was soon led to a secluded room with a bed in it. I immediately laid down in the bed. I was very tired now. I soon felt my consciousness fade away as I fell into a deep sleep.

    End of chapter 7.

 Chapter 8: Awakening

    Alright here''s chapter 8. The polls were vastly in favor of sex scenes, so I included one in this chapter. For those that don''t want to read it, there''s warning tag when it begins, aswell as one when it ends.

    Enjoy!

    Chapter 8: Awakening

    My eye lids felt heavy, as they slowly opened. I was in a dark room, only a few streaks of light went through the curtains. I was on a bed. I had been a sleep, but I didn¡¯t remember how I got here. I got of the bed, but a ravishing hunger made me sit down again. It was like a hunger combined with thirst. My throat was dry, and my stomach felt like a bottomless pit. It wasn¡¯t like I felt hungry and thirsty, but like the two feelings had combined, into one. It was a feeling that felt too familiar, yet I didn¡¯t know why. Then I remembered. I had spent a lot of energy embracing Serana and Bogat. I remembered going into hibernation to recover. I had done that before, but I hadn¡¯t been as famished that time. How long had I slept this time, I wondered.

    I slowly got back up, and walked to the door. I felt week, I felt hungry. I wanted to drink. Drink blood. I opened the door. Outside the room was a hallway. I looked around, but no one was around. Then a girl walked out from a corner. This was one of the slave girls, belonging to the Coldblood family. Slavery was legal, and very much used in this world. It was just a widely accepted custom, everyone used them. Even the other races, like elves, orcs and dwarfs. Especially the demon races. A vampire could also be counted as a demon race. More specifically an undead demon race.

    The girl shouted ¡°Lord!¡± and ran over to me. She knew who I was, and also knew that I had been resting in this room for a while. As I saw her a red light flashed in my eyes, as my hunger grew exponentially. I couldn¡¯t control myself, and rushed over to her. I grabbed her and bit into her throat. I was in ecstasy as her blood flowed into my mouth. The girl was in shock and screamed, as she felt her life slip away. I kept drinking her blood, revelling in the taste, as I drained her dry. Soon her life slipped away, and the body went limp. I let her go and she fell on the floor.

    A few guards ran into the corridor and saw the dead girl. They looked at me, then back at the girl. ¡°Lord!¡± they all shouted and proceeded to kneel on the floor. They had been instructed to call Isaac lord, and they were absolutely not to disobey his orders if they valued their life. I looked at them, and told them to dispose of the body and tell anyone about it. I walked out of the corridor, feeling refreshed, and started looking for Amelia, Kato, Bogat or Serana. After wandering for a while I stood outside Bogat¡¯s study. I opened the door and went in.

    Bogat was sitting in a chair, filing trough some papers. He looked up in annoyance, but when he saw me, he was shocked.

    ¡°Lord Isaac! You¡¯re awake! Good heavens, you¡¯re finally awake. We were starting to get worried here.¡± Bogat said, first in shock, then with a smile.

    ¡°How long did I sleep? And where are the other ones?¡± I asked.

    ¡°Amelia is around here somewhere, and Kato is in the city doing who knows what. As for how long you slept, it¡¯s already been four months. You were out for quite a while.¡± I looked at him surprised. I had expected that it would be longer than last time, but four months? I didn¡¯t expect that. It¡¯s probably because I made two powerful vampires at the same time. If I had only turned one of them, I would have recovered a lot quicker, like in a day or two, but since I used all of my powers, it would put a stress on my body, and I would have to sleep for a longer period.

    These powerful vampires I made would be the most powerful vampires in existence, except for me. They would be the ones I call pureblood vampires. Any vampires they turned would not be a pureblood, only the ones I made with a lot of effort. But if two pureblood were to have sex and use the reproduction spell, then that would result in another pureblood vampire. Therefore the only way to make pureblood vampires, was to reproduce, or me personally using a lot of power to make one. Purebloods would also get various powers that other vampires didn¡¯t get, as they age.

    I talked with Bogat for a while. We talked about what had happened these past four months. In these months the Coldblood Organization had expanded a lot. They now had branches in all of the cities of Fenlai prefecture. They also dealt in the black market now. Not only had they become a major power in Fenlai Prefecture, they had also started expanding outside. They had established branches in all of the surrounding prefectures, but they were only minor branches as of yet. There were three prefectures around the Fenlai prefecture. Behind Fenlai Prefecture there was the ocean.

    The three prefectures surrounding Fenlai Prefecture were Mastiff Prefecture, Claudus Prefecture and Stercore Prefecture. In the middle was the Mastiff Prefecture, on its left the Claudus Prefecture and on the right was the Stercore Prefectures. These Prefectures were all doing much better than the Fenlai Prefecture, and the Mastiff Prefecture was even right in front of the Royal Capital Prefecture area.

    After talking to Bogat, I went looking for Amelia. When I finally found her in her room, Amelia was shocked and excited.

    ¡°Isaac! You¡¯re finally awake! I missed you so much, I almost couldn¡¯t bear it anymore!¡± She said to me, as tears started flowing out of her eyes. This was the first time I had seen her cry, ever since I turned her into a vampire.

    !Warning! Sex Scene!

    I walked up to her, and hugged her tightly. I kissed her on her beautiful red lips, as my tongue embraced hers. We kept kissing as I reached for the two peaks that stuck out from her chest. I grabbed one of her breasts and started fondling it. She started moaning, ever so slightly. As I was fondling her with one hand, I caressed with the other, all the while our tongues were in a wet embrace.

    I put the hand that was fondling her breast down to her butt. I lifted her up and placed her on the bed. Soon I was atop of her, fondling her breast again, kissing her wet tongue. I started moving my hand down to her lower area. My hands went down beneath her skirt, touching her skin. Soon it met a wet crevice. My fingers entered her and started playing around. The moans that came out of her mouth started getting louder. We kept kissing, as I soaked my fingers inside her. Then with my other hand, I started undressing her. I took of her shirt, and in front of me appeared two white, smooth breasts. I moved my mouth down to her breasts and started kissing them. Then I moved my mouth to her nipple, and sucked on it. Her moans were even louder now, as I mouth was no longer muffling them.

    I pulled down her skirt, then my pants. Both naked, I laid on top of her, my member ready to enter her. I kissed her and put it inside her. I started thrusting in and out, feeling it go against her wet walls. She moaned even louder, as she felt my member inside her, pushing against her womb.

    We turned around, and she sat on top of me. She was sitting on me, with my member inside her. She started jumping up and down, as the moans resounded. She kept on doing it, while leaning down to give me a kiss, while I was fondling her breasts. She started moaning louder and louder, as she climaxed. I felt that the time was coming as well. A moment later, a white liquid flowed through her, into her womb.

    This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    !Sex Scene End!

    As we laid in bed, I looked Amelia in the eyes. I kissed her once more.

    ¡°I¡¯m going to get up now. I want to go and see the others. I haven¡¯t seen Kato and Serana since they became vampires.¡± I said in kind voice. I kissed her one last time, then got dressed and left the room. I wandered around the mansion until I arrived at the place Serana was at. I knocked on the door.

    ¡°Come in.¡± a voice resounded from the room. I opened the door and stepped inside. Inside, Serana sat in a chair reading a book. Once she looked up, she saw me. She was surprised and a happy expression appeared.

    ¡°I¡¯m back Serana.¡± I said in kind voice as I walked closer.

    ¡°Isaac! You¡¯ve awoken! Great, I really missed you.¡± I talked with Serana for a while, asking how she¡¯d been doing since she turned. She liked her new life. She liked the power, and she liked the taste of blood. She had already killed quite few young girls and boys in her feedings. Luckily they were slaves and wouldn¡¯t be missed. Bogat and Amelia had strictly forbidden her from feeding on normal people, as this would cause endless troubles.

    After we had been talking for a while, Serana started looking a bit nervous.

    ¡°Serana is there something wrong?¡± I asked

    ¡°No, no. There is nothing wrong. It¡¯s just¡­ It¡¯s just that I wanted to ask you something.¡± She nervously replied.

    ¡°Ask ahead.¡± I said with a confused look.

    ¡°It¡¯s about you and Amelia. I was just¡­ just wondering, what is your relationship? Are you friends, or are you lovers?¡± She asked with a weak voice, as a tinge of red grew on her cheeks. I looked at her amused. This was interesting.

    ¡°Yes we are lovers. Amelia was the first person that I turned. Even though I massacred her entire family and friends, she still fell in love with me. She¡¯s wonderful, isn¡¯t she? But, tell me, why do you ask?¡± I asked her with amusement. This really was amusing. Why would she ask such question? Of course there is only one reason. She must have fallen for me.

    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s nothing. I was just wondering.¡± She replied, her voice still weak and shy, the tinge of red growing ever bigger.

    Serana, 1st person perspective.

    I watched his back as he walked out the room. I asked. I really asked him! And in the end it turned out that they were lovers. They probably just slept together before he came to see me. Dammit! I love him! I want him! It was really embarrassing asking him such a question. Maybe he¡¯ll drop Amelia over me? No, that will probably never happen. We¡¯re vampires, love isn¡¯t such a short thing for us, as it is for humans. Maybe he wouldn¡¯t mind having both of us? I wouldn¡¯t mind sharing him with Amelia, or even any other girl he might like in the future. As long as I can be with him!

    Alright, I will bide my time and make him like me. If possible I want to succeed as quickly as possible, but if not I don¡¯t mind waiting even a few centuries. We¡¯re vampire after. We¡¯re eternal. He will be mine! I swear, I¡¯ll be his sooner or later! I¡¯ll become his wife. Together with Amelia. We¡¯re vampires after all, he shouldn¡¯t be bound to only one wife. Especially since he is the progenitor, the greatest being to ever exist!

    Isaac, 1st person perspective.

    As I walked away from the room, I could swear that I felt an ominous aura coming from her room. Weird. I had been asleep for four months, so my body still felt a bit stiff. I decided that I would go get Amelia and Kato, so that we could accept another mercenary mission, not that we needed the money anymore, but it was still crucial to get more combat experience. I had only been in one real fight yet. That bandit leader who managed to fight me for a bit even though he was a lot weaker than me. Even though I wasn¡¯t taking him seriously at all was a big factor in the fight.

    Killing all those soldiers before hadn¡¯t been a challenge at all, since they were all very weak, and those knights from before, I only managed to kill because of luck, and attacking them while they were off guard. So I needed to gather experience, so that I wouldn¡¯t face such embarrassment as when I fought the bandit leader.

    The next day Amelia, Kato and I went over to the Mercenary Association. That woman from before was there. She recognised Amelia and me, so she greeted us and asked where we had been for the past half year. I just told her that we had been doing some private business.

    After that was over, we went to the mission board. I looked around looking for a mission, until I found a good one.

    Mission: Exterminate 15 monsters at the peak of rank C.

    Description:

    A big group of strong Night Wolfs have gathered in the Lunar Forest. They are all at the peak of rank C and need to be exterminated. If you accept this mission you should have at least several strong C rankers. Proceed with caution!

    Reward: 2000 gold coins.

    I looked at the mission paper and was immediately excited. 15 Night wolfs, all of them at the peak of rank C. If I could gather several of them at one place and fight them all at the same time, then that would be perfect. And the reward was 2000 gold coins! That¡¯s a huge amount of money. Not that we needed it. But this mission was perfect for us. Kato had just entered the C rank a few days ago. But now it would take longer for us to gain strength. I was still at the peak of C rank and Amelia at the middle. It would probably take a few years to get to B rank. But that didn¡¯t matter since we were immortal. In two years¡¯ time, top, we should be B rank.

    While I had been sleeping, both Bogat and Serana had naturally become stronger as well. They were both at the middle of rank D.

    I grabbed the mission paper and went straight to the reception desk to claim the mission. A moment later, we exited the building, and went back to the Coldblood mansion to prepare for our next mission.

    End of chapter 8.

 Chapter 9: Night Wolf

    I noticed something really weird. I was checking how many people had read my chapters. Around 1800 had read chapter 1 I think, but over 2600 had chapter 2! Do people skip the first chapter or what? I''m really confused. If any of you guys has an answer for this mystery please tell me! I need to know.

    Anyways, enjoy!

    Chapter 9: Night Wolf

    Strength was very important in this world. Strength was what won wars, and strength was the way to power. Without strength you wouldn¡¯t be able to rule. This strength could lie in yourself, or it could lie in your friends, family or subordinates. But without strength you wouldn¡¯t see power. This was the iron rule of this world.

    The strength of a fighter was dealt into ranks. From F to A. From early to the peak. The weakest of fighters were at the F rank. If you were below F rank you would only be a normal citizen. An F rank fighter would have to be surrounded by ten armed normal people to be killed. You might think this is powerful, but it was nothing. If you faced an E rank fighter off against ten normal people, that wouldn¡¯t even be enough to scratch him. No, you would need around a hundred person army. This was the difference between the ranks. Of course there were differences between the ranks as well. Early, middle, late and peak. These are the three stages within the ranks. If you had a peak fighter of the F rank, he might be able to face off against 50 angry villagers. Similarly a peak E rank could handle 150 villagers or city dwellers.

    But a peak E rank, would still die against an early D rank, for he could handle 200 villagers, while a C rank wouldn¡¯t flinch in front of 400 villagers. This was the difference between ranks. The farther you came, the bigger the difference. Especially after C rank. A B rank fighter could handle over a thousand villagers.

    But I¡¯m only explaining this in how many villagers fighters could kill. Let¡¯s say an F rank could push a 500 kilogram boulder, then an E rank could lift it. Someone at the B rank could generally move faster than the speed of sound, only appearing as a blur in the eyes of normal people. But this was different for vampires. Vampire are stronger than mortals, even within the same rank. A very powerful vampire at the peak of rank C, would be able to fight against a peak rank B fighter. Vampires were also very fast, moving even faster than B rankers, when only at the C rank. Now you might ask, if they are this powerful, why would they be called C rank while being able to fight B rankers? The ranks are subjective. Deep in your mind you can sense what rank you are. This is also how the strength testing balls work. They dig into you mind, to see how strong you are. This way you can¡¯t cheat.

    Therefore the ranks are relative to the person. In theory someone could be at the F rank, and still be able to kill even an S rank. But this was also impossible, for the laws of nature forbid it. The difference in strength would never be too great, and it was always relative to the race. This is why all humans have a power limit. Vampires were one of the most powerful races in existence, if not the most powerful, but because of this they had weaknesses.

    Magic was similar to this, also dealt into categories. They are, Beginner Mage, Acolyte Mage, Elementary Mage, Half Circle Magus, Full Circle Magus and Warlock. These are at least the ones I knew of, there were more after this. You were dealt into these ranks based on what spells you could use. A beginner magic is the weakest and warlock magic, the strongest. A Warlock Mage could cast devastating magic that could even destroy a small city, while a Beginner Mage would only be able to kill normal people semi easily. Like the F ranked fighter, a Beginner Mage could kill around ten or so villagers. A Beginner Mage would be more likely to win against an F ranked fighter though, due to ranged attacks. Except if the fighter was a ranger or archer, or something along those lines.

    Both Amelia and I had become Acolyte Mages and C ranked fighters. Kato was a Full Circle Magus. This was an existence equal to a B ranked fighter. The Coldblood family really had to spend a lot of effort to get him to us. The fact that they knew him beforehand also helped a lot. If they hadn¡¯t met us, they might have asked him to get rid of the Cheng clan. After all he was a Full Circle Darkness Mage. Wouldn¡¯t he be perfect for assassinating them?

    We were on the road to the Lunar forest, Amelia, Kato and I. We had prepared the day before, and left. It was the middle of the night right now, which was the equivalent of midday for us. We decided to go and get a snack, so we went over to some nearby farm house. There weren¡¯t any people on the road at this time, so we thought we would indulge ourselves, and get a nice meal in a farm. We found a farm that was inhabited by a middle aged couple.

    They had three children, two daughters and a son. We entered the house silently, and went into the bedrooms and gathered them together in the living room. They all had terrified looks on their faces, as we looked at them with hungering eyes. They didn¡¯t dare to even say a word.

    Kato walked to the youngest daughter, she looked to be around 15 years old. He grabbed her by the neck and bit into her immediately.

    ¡°No, please! Don¡¯t hurt us, we¡¯ll do anything you ask of us!¡± the father of the household yelled, begging for mercy. Kato looked at him, then released his daughter, who was already dead.

    ¡°The only thing we want is your delicious blood.¡± Kato smiled at him. I walked over to his other daughter, while Amelia went for his son. We both bit onto our victim, and started sucking them dry. Soon three young corpses littered the floor. The mother was kneeling in the floor, crying, while the father just looked blankly, an empty look in his eyes. Kato walked over to the mother, while Amelia went for the Father. I didn¡¯t need one. Amelia was my lover, so I liked spoiling her, and I had become quite good friends with Kato. He also needed more blood than me, since my vampiric age was older. Me being the progenitor also helped.

    After the couple was dead, we burned them to a crisp. After that we also set fire to the house and left. We stopped a distance away, to watch the house burn. It was quite relaxing.

    We travelled for a few days, before we arrived in front of the Lunar Forest. We didn¡¯t kill any more families in those days, we only fed on a few travellers. Killing wasn¡¯t risky at all, since people would only think that they were killed by monsters. Likewise burning down the farmhouse would make people think that the farmers died in the fire.

    ¡°We¡¯re here. Kato do you know anything special about the Night Wolves?¡± I asked him.

    ¡°Nothing much. I do know that they are nocturnal, just like we are. They are also very fast, but probably not faster than you. Maybe faster than Amelia, but not likely. They are faster than me though, since I¡¯m only early rank C, and don¡¯t specialise in speed as much as you guys. So I will stay in the backlines and support with magic.¡± Kato said.

    We entered the forest. It was currently night time, so the Night Wolves should be out. The forest was very dark, it would be very hard to see anything in here, even in the day. The name was very fitting. But we were vampires, so this didn¡¯t matter. It was our best kind of environment. While we were walking we would sometime hear rustling noises, or feel a random wind blowing against us. When we looked in its direction, there would be nothing there.

    ¡°It seems the Night Wolves have found us. They¡¯re following us, but I don¡¯t think they realize that we know they are there.¡± I said to my two companions.

    We kept wandering about. I was keeping track of how many Night wolvers were there. With my senses and reflexes, I could easily keep track of them. Then I counted fifteen. They were probably going to ambush us soon, so I decided that I would strike first.

    ¡°Prepare yourself. They¡¯re all here, so we¡¯ll attack now.¡± I said to Kato and Amelia.

    Our bodies flashed as we charged at the wolves, while Kato stood back and charged a spell.

    I landed in front of a two meters tall, four meters long wolf. It looked shocked to see my speed, but I didn¡¯t give it a change to react, and swung my longsword at it. My sword went straight for its neck, and chopped right into it. In but a moment, the head of a night wolf rolled on the floor. Amelia had also managed to kill one. She was standing a few meters next me. The remaining thirteen wolves noticed the death of their brethren, and immediately reacted. The quickly surrounded us in a circle, but Kato wasn¡¯t in this circle. The wolves were cautious as they circled around us. Suddenly three wolves rushed at us. One went for Amelia, and the other two went for me. But at this moment Kato cast a spell, and it hit one the wolves charging for me. As soon as it hit, the darkness wen into the wolf, and covered its eyes, making it blind. If he wanted to he could have killed it, but I had asked Kato to go easy on them. After all this mission served as training for me and Amelia. If Kato killed them all, then it would all be a waste.

    I jumped to the side, as one of the wolves stumbled, and directly dodged the other one. I swung out with my sword, and hit the side of the healthy wolf, injuring it as a stream of blood sprayed out. Amelia had also jumped out of the way, but hadn¡¯t managed to attack back, as another wolf had charged at her. Right after the blood sprayed, two more Night Wolves attacked me, just as the blind one recovered. Thus three wolves pounced on me. I dodged to the site, towards the injured wolf, but the paw of one of the wolves scratched me, causing a deep wound. I felt a stinging pain in my side, but ignored it. I took the chance, and slashed my sword at the injured wolf, causing its head to fly.

    The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.

    Seeing another of their brother¡¯s die, enraged the Night Wolves. Twelve wolves were left. Four of these wolves charged at Amelia, while the rest attacked me. Being attacked by this many wolves at the same time was very dangerous. If I was a human I would most certainly die, but luckily I was a vampire, and also had Kato¡¯s support. Kato cast two spells, blinding two wolves, then also blinded two of Amelia¡¯s wolves. She was only at the middle of rank C, and these wolves were quite special. Their speed was almost on par with Amelia¡¯s, and there were four of them, so she was in quite a pinch. But luckily Kato blinded two of them, and helped her.

    Two my wolves were also blinded, but there were still six left. I kept dodging around while also attacking from time to time. I would slowly injure the wolves, but the wolves also hit many hits on me.

    Suddenly I saw an opening as a wolf was attacking. I decided to take the change at charged straight at him. His long, sharp claws hit me right in chest, causing a deep wound, but my sword also managed to pierce deep into his heart. The other wolves were surprised for a moment, and I took the opportunity and charged straight at the two blinded wolves, and slit their throats. Now there were only nine wolves left in total. Five of them fighting me, four of them fighting Amelia.

    The wolves were shocked at losing three brothers in an instant. I got excited and charged right at one of the wolves. But as my sword pierced into the eye of the wolf, the four other wolves reacted, and pounced on me. My sword was stuck in the skull of the now deceased wolf, as I flew four meters back. Four deep wounds appeared on my body. I stood op. The wolves looked at me with shocked expressions as I rose. That attack should have definitely have killed him, they thought. A red light appeared in my eyes, as I formed my hands into claws. I charged at one of the wolves, like a flash, much to his demise. I pierced the middle of his head with my claws, and pulled his head apart. The three other wolves charged at me. I dodged two of the wolves, but let on hit me, as I stabbed at the wolf¡¯s heart. My claw pierced into his heart as I pulled it out. I threw the heart in the face of another wolf, then pounced at it. I pointed with one finger is pierced into its eye. Then at the tip of that finger I formed an ice spike that grew up through the wolf¡¯s head. The wold naturally died on the spot. Now only two wolves were left fighting me.

    In my rage, I charged right at the horrified wolves, the red light still apparent in my eyes. I grabbed the neck of the scared wolf, then lifted him from the ground, and smashed him right into the other wolf, with all my might. The other wolf was smashed into amush of blood and bones, while the neck of the other wolf shattered.

    Amelia had also managed to kill two of her wolves, while the other ones were still blinded. She walked towards the two blind wolves, about to kill them.

    ¡°Wait! I want to try something.¡± I said with my sanity regained. I walked over to the blind wolves. With a stroke of my hand I cut into my wrist. I knelt in front of the wolf, and fed him my blood. Both Amelia and Kato were looking at me in shock.

    ¡°What are you doing?!¡± Amelia asked, scared. I looked at her with a reassuring smile.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry Amelia, Kato. Let me tell you of one of the abilities of us vampires. We can not only create vampires, we can also make ghouls. These ghouls are made through feeding mortals your own blood. After becoming a ghoul, you will get stronger and faster, but not as much as a vampire. Your life expectancy will also get longer. But I will need to feed them some of my blood from time to time, or they¡¯ll lose their gained powers. The bond will still be there though, and they won¡¯t feel a craving to my blood, except if they get addicted to it or something. I intend to make these Night Wolves onto our pet ghouls.¡± I said.

    I continued to feed them my blood. Soon I felt a bond connect us. With this bond, they would never be able to disobey me, and I¡¯d also know where they are and how strong they are. Just like the vampiric bond. Soon the two wolves stood before us. They weren¡¯t afraid or angry at all anymore. They were completely loyal. When making a ghoul, the ghoul would lose all its hate or anger towards its master. A vampire wouldn¡¯t necessarily forgive its maker. Amelia had forgiven me, because she had the rare mind change, when I made her, and had lost all her compassion for humans. As for Kato, I had never really wronged him, except for making him into a vampire, without asking him. But he still saw it as a gift, and was thankful, for he now had increased talent for magic, and would be able to reach the peak.

    ¡°Alright, my little pets. You shall be called, Iluvatar and Bane! Now, Amelia, Kato, let¡¯s ride these beasts home!¡± I said, with fervour in my eyes. I had never ridden a horse before, not to mention a Night Wolf. I was excited. So was Amelia. And Kato.

    I was the first to jump onto the Night Wolves. I decided to ride Iluvatar. Amelia and Kato quickly followed lead. Amelia joined me on Iluvatar and Kato rode Bane. I ordered the wolves to go forward. After we came out of the forest, we came to a standstill. I looked around, enjoying the sights one last time. This Lunar Forest was quite the sight. It looked mysterious and mighty, much more magnificent than that old moody forest outside my old home.

    ¡°Alright, Iluvatar, Bane, go forwards at full speed!¡± I yelled. The wolves quickly rushed forward at full speed. My blood had made them stronger, and they had made it into B rank already. Before, they were at the peak of rank C, so it was only natural that they would reach the B rank now. But if they didn¡¯t get any of my blood again for an extended time, they would lose this strength. But if they were fed my blood a few times a year, then they could even live forever.

    Now that they had been strengthened by my blood, they were even faster than me. This made them into quite good mounts. As we were rushing at full speed back home, I could feel the wind brushing against my skin. It was a quite exhilarating feeling. It wasn¡¯t the same as running yourself, since we were sitting motionless on their backs.

    We didn¡¯t go straight back home to Fenlai City. We went on a roundabout route, to enjoy our new pets a bit more. The wolves were running side by side. They weren¡¯t going full speed anymore, but in a more relaxed speed.

    ¡°Kato, this Night Wolf, Iluvatar, shall belong to me and Amelia. Bane will be yours. What do you say?¡± I asked with a smile on my face. Ever since Kato became one of my own, I had never given anything to him. He though, he had helped us a lot. He taught us magic and how to read. This would be my thanks to him. He looked at me with surprise. Then a rare smile appeared on his face. Kato was a very taciturn man. He didn¡¯t speak much, and didn¡¯t smile often. It wasn¡¯t exactly that he was cold or indifferent, he was just quiet.

    ¡°Thank you, Isaac. I will make sure to take care of Bane. But what about his blood bond? Will he follow my orders?¡± He asked.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯ll transfer my bond to you. It¡¯s possible to transfer the blood bond of a ghoul, you just need to have gained the ability. Since I¡¯m the progenitor I gained it early. After I woke up, I had this ability. You don¡¯t need it to make ghouls though. You can make those from the start, although they won¡¯t be very useful until you age a bit.¡± I said.

    I then poked my forehead with the sharp nail of my forefinger, on my forehead. A drop of blood appeared and floated above my finger, as I held it before my eyes. Suddenly the drop of blood flew into the forehead of Kato.

    ¡°The bond! I can feel it. Thank you Isaac. I owe you one.¡± He said with a smile.

    I looked at him in amusement.

    ¡°Kato you don¡¯t owe me. You taught me magic and how to read. This was to thank you, even though you technically didn¡¯t have a choice, but you did seem to do it willingly.¡± I said. He owed me? No, it was I that owed him. If he hadn¡¯t been here, then I probably wouldn¡¯t even have been able to tame these wolves. If he hadn¡¯t used his blinding spell it would have been very hard to fight all them at the same time.

    ¡°Yes I did do it willingly. After all I consider this gift you gave me a blessing. An unholy blessing. And I¡¯m very thankful for it. Ever since I became a vampire I have been able to sense magic much more clearly. Before I would have been lucky if I ever reached the level of a Warlock in two hundred years, but now, now I will probably be able to reach it just a few years. You were like a saviour that came from the heavens and granted me my biggest wish.¡± He said as his eyes turned serious and his voice became more and more resolute.

    I looked at him in surprise. I didn¡¯t expect such a speech from him. I was like a saviour from the heavens? I could only look at him in content. His words made me happy. Like when a brother thanks you for saving his life.

    End of chapter 9

 Chapter 10: Betrayal

    Here''s chapter 10. I''m sorry that it took so long, but I''ve been a bit busy lately, so it took a while. But here it is.

    Enjoy!

    Chapter 10: Betrayal

    We were traveling in the wilderness, on our Night Wolves, making sure not to stray too far away from the road, so that we wouldn¡¯t get lost. We would run up hills, venture into forests and traverse mountains, testing the traveling abilities of Iluvatar and Bane, our two Night Wolves. A few hundred kilometres away from the city, a few kilometres from the road, we came upon a place with a dangerous feeling aura. This aura seemed to come from a cave. Outside this cave there were 8 people. They seemed like adventurers, should be relatively strong. They were fully armed, some with swords and daggers, others with bows and crossbows, and then there was one that was in robes, holding a staff. He was a mage, no doubt about it.

    These adventurers caught our interest. We stopped a distance away, making sure that they didn¡¯t see us. The group of eight entered the cave. I decided to follow them in. I wouldn¡¯t kill them or anything, I just wanted to see what there was in there. But if there happened to be some amazing treasure, then I wouldn¡¯t hesitate to kill them and take the treasure.

    I told the Night Wolves to wait for us outside, then we carefully followed the adventurers. All three of us were good in darkness magic, so we used it to hide in the shadows. One of good points of vampirism is that you become extra good at darkness and ice magic, but you get a weakness to fire. You can still learn fire magic though, it¡¯s just that you take more damage from fire. Of course your own magic won¡¯t hurt you, except if you use some dangerous unstable spells.

    Shrouded in shadows, we followed. We didn¡¯t meet a single living thing in the cave. It was empty. Or so I thought. After venturing deeper into the cave, we eventually came to a door. It was a very big door, it looked very menacing.

    ¡°We¡¯re here. The tomb of Palazar.¡± A beautiful female, armed with a longsword and light armour, said. She had long blond hair, and her ears were slightly long and sharp. She must be an elf, or a half elf, I thought.

    ¡°Just as rumoured. I can¡¯t wait to see what treasures there are in here. But remember, Palazar was a feared necromancer, and placed a curse on his tomb making it a dungeon. It will always be filled with monsters until the dungeon heart is destroyed. The deeper we venture, the stronger they get. Be careful.¡± A big man with a huge sword said. His body was fully covered in plate armour. He looked like a tank.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, we know. Just how often do you think we¡¯ve discussed this? We know already.¡± A shorter, thinner man said. He had a slightly menacing look on him. On his waist he had two daggers, on his back a small crossbow that could be held in one hand.

    The group opened the door and walked in. They didn¡¯t close it behind them, which made it a lot simpler for us to follow them. We quickly followed them in, as if we were their shadow. Inside the environment was a lot different. There were tiled floors and brick walls, as if we were in a castle or fort. We had entered a corridor. It was still empty for life, you could say. Because what we met as soon as we entered was a skeleton. A single, unarmed, skeleton. It just stood there, waiting. The big man with the plate armour walked up to it, then using the flat of his sword, he crushed it.

    Our two groups quickly continued. At the end of the corridor there was another door. The adventurers entered through the door. We came into another corridor, but this one was bigger, and had many turns. There were also more skeletons in here, but these skeletons weren¡¯t unarmed. They had swords, axes and maces. But they were still made short work of in front of these adventurers. They were really quite strong. They seemed to be at the C rank, the same as us. But of course there was a difference in strength still. We were stronger, I was confident on this. But it would still be quite a fight, since they both outnumbered us, and were more skilled and experienced than Amelia and I. Kato was quite experienced though.

    We kept following them. Every time a skeleton would appear, they would easily get rid of it. Every time we got to the end of the corridor, we would be met with another door. On the other side of the door there would be a staircase. Down the stairs, we arrived in another corridor. In every corridor the skeletons would get stronger and stronger, until we came to the fifth corridor, where our adventurers had to spend quite a bit of effort to kill the skeletons. This wasn¡¯t just because the skeletons strength increased. It was also the numbers. In the beginning they would meet a few lone stragglers, but now they met groups that outnumbered them quite a bit.

    After quite a few hardships, we finally arrived at another door. But this door was bigger. Not as big as at the entrance, but still quite a bit bigger than the other ones. We arrived in a bog circular room. At the other end of the room was a big doorway. In the door way there was a huge abomination. The abomination was fat, with a huge eye in its stomach. On its face there was a helmet with two huge horns on either side. One curved upwards, while the other curved down. On its shoulders it had spiked shoulder guards. On its forearms there were some curved guards. It didn¡¯t have anything guarding its legs, except its natural spikes made from bones. But the most dangerous looking part was its claws. They were huge! Even bigger than the body of an adult man, and they were made of steel!

    But the adventurers didn¡¯t falter. Even I was a bit scared from this, so these adventures had probably seen monsters like this one before. The menacing looking one with the daggers stepped forwards.

    ¡°Alright, let¡¯s do as we planned. Liria, Aylard, you two distract it while we get behind it and deal it some critical blow!¡± He yelled. Then that half elf blondie with the longsword, and big plated guy stepped forwards.

    The menacing rogue looked at everyone else and nodded with a scary smile on his face. They ran to the sides getting behind the monster, while the other two distracted it. Only a moment after they were behind the monster, but they didn¡¯t stop, they kept running towards the exit. The rogue looked behind him.

    ¡°Hahahaha, you were too trusting! You just die here while we continue deeper into the dungeon for the treasures!¡± He yelled, as he ran out.

    Liria and Aylard had shocked looked on their faces, Liria even started tearing. But they couldn¡¯t get distracted, or they¡¯d die.

    I looked towards Amelia and Kato.

    ¡°Let¡¯s help them. They seem very skilled and I need someone to teach me swordsmanship anyways. We¡¯ll all fire a spell at the monster, aiming for its eyes, then I¡¯ll rush in and grab them. Afterwards we¡¯ll leave immediately, I don¡¯t want to fight that thing. It seems very strong. ¡± I said. All three of us fired our spells at it. Amelia and I fired ice bolts at its eyes, while Kato used on of his most powerful blinding spells. There was a mechanism that would close the door, when everyone was inside. The adventurers hadn¡¯t noticed that the door wasn¡¯t closing because we weren¡¯t inside, but now that we were it was slowly closing. I of course noticed this, so I rushed to them.

    ¡°I¡¯m here to rescue you, don¡¯t worry!¡± I said as I grabbed them. They weren¡¯t prepared so I easily grabbed them and rushed towards the closing door. Amelia and Kato were already outside again. I was going as quickly as I could and just a second after I got out the door closed. I let go of the two adventurers.

    This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source.

    ¡°Thanks for rescuing us, but who are you? Since when have you been here?¡± The big man asked, a bit suspicious.

    ¡°I¡¯m Isaac. We¡¯ve been following you since you entered this place. We saw you outside and got interested, so we decided to follow you.¡± I said

    ¡°You followed us? But we didn¡¯t notice you even once and we¡¯ve been here almost an entire day!¡± The big man said in disbelief, as the woman stood beside him in shock

    ¡°And since you were following us you must have been harbouring ill intensions, so why did you rescue us?¡± He asked again.

    ¡°We weren¡¯t harbouring any ¡®ill intentions¡¯. We just followed to see what was down here. Of course, I won¡¯t lie, if you had found some amazing treasure I would have killed you all. But I rescued you because I could use you. One question though. Why did they betray you? Won¡¯t they have to meet that thing again on the way up?¡± I said.

    ¡°They have some talismans that can transport them up to the ground again. And you could use us? For what? Joining your mercenary group or something?¡± He asked.

    ¡°Talismans huh. I have an offer for you. With this offer you will have the chance to get revenge. What do you say?¡± I asked nonchalantly.

    ¡°An offer? What kind of offer? Is it really joining your mercenary group?¡± He asked curiously. The blondie also looked at me, interested.

    ¡°Well not exactly. Have you ever heard of vampires? You see we are vampires, and I want to give you two a chance to become vampires too. Do you accept?¡± I asked.

    ¡°Vampires? Don¡¯t joke around, vampires don¡¯t exist!¡± The big man said sceptically. I was slightly annoyed at his answer, so I grew out my teeth and showed them to him.

    ¡°Vampires are real. But I can¡¯t blame you for not believing in them, after all it¡¯s only been around three years since I became one. You see I am the first vampire. Now do you accept or not?¡± I asked, as I looked at both of them. This time the girl spoke.

    ¡°I accept. I¡¯ll become a vampire. Will I have to drink blood and do I get immortal? What about the sun?¡± She asked.

    ¡°Good. And yes you have to drink blood, and you will also live forever. And the sun won¡¯t kill you, but it isn¡¯t nice either.¡± I answered. Then I looked at the big man, with a look in my eye that said, live or die?

    ¡°Fine, I¡¯ll accept you offer.¡±

    ¡°Good.¡±

    After this we spent a bit of time getting out again. When we got out again it was daytime. Liria and Aylard were shocked when they saw those wolves. They looked big and menacing. I told them that we tamed them, then they relaxed. We jumped unto the wolves and started looking for another cave. We managed to find one soon. Inside the cave I asked Kato to find and bring us six humans.

    ¡°Lilia, Aylard, was it? I¡¯m going to turn you now. It will hurt a bit, but not too much. I¡¯ll into your neck and drain you for blood. Then I will put some of my venom and blood into you. After this you will lose consciousness for an hour. By that time Kato will hopefully have come back. Are you ready?¡± I explained.

    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m ready.¡± Lilia said with a stern look.

    I walked up to her, then immediately bit into her. This woman would be my swordsmanship teacher, since she also used a single longsword. I almost completely drained her of blood, then let my venom flow into her. I made her as powerful as Amelia, Kato and the rest. She was already at the middle C rank, so now she would be at the late stage. After the two week period she might even make it to the peak stage. Then she would be the strongest one, under me.

    Now it was Aylard¡¯s turn. I quickly bit into him and drained him, then let the venom flow. I decided to make him strong as well. He was at the early stage, surprisingly weaker than Lilia. He would be stronger than Amelia soon, since he would be at the middle stage, then late after the maturing period. But this didn¡¯t mean that Amelia was a weak vampire. They just had different starting points. With time they would be almost equal. Amelia would probably make it to B stage a bit before Aylard, since she had been a vampire longer. It would take Aylard a few years to get there. Lila would probably make it before either of them though, since she would already be at the peak. She might make it soon after me.

    An hour passed, and they woke up. Kato still wasn¡¯t back, so I decided to explain them their newfound powers, and also tell them that they would have to drain two innocent humans dry, killing them. Lilia didn¡¯t like this very much, but she was an adventurer. She¡¯d killed before. As for Aylard, he didn¡¯t mind killing them much. Just the thought of drinking their blood. He was very similar to Kato in this regard.

    Soon after, Kato returned. With him were six scared persons. I quickly grabbed one of them and drained him dry in a flash. Then I grabbed another one. They were both girls. I didn¡¯t drink this one as quickly, enjoying the savour. After my show, Aylard stood up and grabbed one. Lilia also stood up and grabbed one, deciding not to fight the hunger. It had already been an hour since they woke up, so the hunger was starting to swell up. Soon there were six corpses on the floor. Amelia burned them, then we left. I had spent quite a bit of energy turning them, but this time I wouldn¡¯t need to enter a coma, as my mana capacity had increased since I turned Bogat and Serana. Amelia and Lilia joined me on Iluvatar, while Aylard joined Kato on Bane.

    We were traveling at a relaxing speed so that I could explain our situation to Lilia and Aylard. I told them about Bogat and Serana and the Coldblood Organization. I also told them about when I and Amelia became vampires. I told them to be careful when they feed and to never leave any evidence. I also told them about our bond, and how it worked. I also asked them about the adventurers that betrayed them.

    It turned out that they had been traveling together for about a year or two. I immediately felt hate towards those cowards. Even though they weren¡¯t part of my ¡°family¡± then, they were now. Anyone who hurt my friends would die. I consider those that I turn my family. In the vampire world I intend to create, they would be like the royal family. They told me that they were all registered in the Mercenary Association, and that they often stayed in Fenlai City. This would be our link to them, so that we could find and kill them. Of course I wouldn¡¯t just kill them. I would kidnap them and let Lilia and Aylard torture them as they see fit.

    End of chapter 1.

 Chapter 11: First of Many

    I''m sorry it took so long to get chapter 11 out, but I have been very busy these days, so I don''t have a lot of time.

    But anyways, enjoy!

    Chapter 11: First of Many

    Lilia and Aylard were walking through the corridors and hallways of Coldblood Mansion. It had been one year. One year since they were made into vampires and came here. They took up on the offer of immortality for the sake of revenge, but in this one year they had never gotten the chance. All they had done in this year was teaching swordsmanship and taking on some random missions from time to time. They were starting to get impatient. They were about to go ask Isaac about it.

    Even though they were getting impatient they still had a lot of respect for the man. He was the one that made them into vampires. Their maker. And recently he had entered into the B rank. That meant that he was by far the strongest now. Before when both Lilia and Isaac were at the peak of rank C the only thing Lilia could rely on was her superior skill. When it came to power, Isaac was still stronger even then. And he learned very quickly. But since Lilia became a vampire she had improved her sword skill a lot as well. It was like her natural talent had improved marginally when she was made a vampire. And in fact, it had. This was one of the benefits of vampirism.

    When they were betrayed by their ¡°friends¡± they had been hurt a lot. They had travelled together for so long. Lilia and Aylard grew up together. They were siblings. Both of them always cared a lot about their friends. This was most likely the reason they were targeted, since the traitors knew that they wouldn¡¯t agree on doing things the ¡°wrong¡± way.

    As they were walking towards Isaac¡¯s room they met Kato. Aylard had gotten pretty good friends with him, but Lilia was always so shy around him. At first she didn¡¯t know why, but sooner or later she realized that she liked him. She never was good at these things. She had always had a thing for those magic types. It¡¯s like they say. Opposites attract. Whenever she liked someone, she would always very timid in front of them. Kato of course had noticed this, but he also wasn¡¯t sure how to go about the situation. Kato was always a very taciturn guy, so he didn¡¯t have much experience with women. Even though he was in his late twenties. Almost thirty years old.

    Not that Lilia was much better. She was twenty-seven years old, two years younger than Kato. And they were both virgins. They were like made for each other. Aylard was different though. He had been with many women, but never settled for one. Probably because of his life style, always being one the road.

    They arrived in front of Isaacs¡¯s room. They looked at each other, then Aylard knocked on the door.

    ¡°Come in.¡±

    A voice resounded. They opened the door. Inside Isaac sat on a chair reading a book. He gestured for them to sit down.

    ¡°Isaac we¡¯re here to talk to you about the traitors. We¡¯ve been here a year already, but you¡¯ve never allowed us to get our revenge.¡± Aylard said as he looked at Isaac seriously

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry Aylard, you¡¯ll get your chance. But there is a slight problem. You see, they¡¯ve left the city.¡± Isaac said.

    ¡°Left? What do you mean left? They¡¯ve gone on a mission?¡± Lilia returned.

    ¡°No, they¡¯ve relocated. But don¡¯t worry I know where they are. I had Bogat assign some spies to constantly shadow them. After they left the dungeon they must have found some good treasure, so they all decided to move to Falen City. They bought a house there that they stay in after their missions.¡± Isaac told them.

    ¡°They bought a house? Really? That¡¯s a bit weird, but so be it. Then, when will we be allowed our revenge?¡± Aylard said.

    ¡°It will be a while, but as far as I know, they won¡¯t be going anywhere. We¡¯re currently saving up money to buy a piece of land somewhere. We intend to build an estate there, which will be our base of operations. When that place is up and running, I¡¯ll have them kidnapped. It¡¯s a bit too risky to bring hostages into the city here, but the estate will be hidden from society and hard to find. So please, my friends, just wait a few years. In, at most, a year we¡¯ll have enough money to build it, so it will be at most five years until it¡¯s finished. Can you wait until then?¡± Isaac said.

    ¡°Five years? My sister and I have already waited for one year, so what¡¯s five more? On that day, you promised us our revenge, so I don¡¯t doubt that we¡¯ll get it.¡± Aylard said with a smile.

    ¡°Thank you for everything, Isaac.¡± Lilia then said.

    Isaac looked at them. These people he had met in the past four years were his new family. Of course there was still his real family. But it wasn¡¯t time yet. Five years. When the estate was finished he¡¯d go back to his parents, and show them salvation. It had already been four years since he last met them. He couldn¡¯t help but miss them. But in these four years he had gotten new friends and even found love. Back when he was in the farm he didn¡¯t have many friends. Only a few guys that he met from time to time in the nearby village.

    Isaac 1st person perspective.

    They probably have kids now. What about my sister and brother. Alice is already 14. She¡¯ll be 19 when the time comes. By that time she might have gotten married. And Marcus my brother, he¡¯s 25 now. I hope he¡¯s found a wife. Then again, it¡¯d be easier if he didn¡¯t. I wonder how they¡¯re doing.

    After longing for my family for a while, I decided to get out of my room for a while. Amelia was out, doing who knows what. I left my room, and traversed to many corridors of the Coldblood Mansion. Soon I arrived in a courtyard. I sat down on a chair and enjoyed my surroundings. After sitting for a while, Serana entered the courtyard.

    ¡°Hey, Isaac. Can I sit with you?¡± She asked.

    I turned my eyes towards her. She looked a bit weird. Like she wanted to say something important, but was a bit shy to say it. I nodded to her.

    ¡°You may. Do have anything you want to talk about?¡± I asked with a tone to reassure her.

    She hesitated a bit, but then sat next to me. There was a moment of silence, as I patiently waited for her to talk. Suddenly she looked up to me.

    ¡°I¡¯ve known you for almost two years now Isaac. That time you saved my life from those disgusting scum. I admired you from that moment on, even though you abandoned all those other girls. That didn¡¯t matter, since I didn¡¯t care about them. I liked that you only did what benefits you. That fits my family¡¯s character. To be a Coldblood. To be coldblooded. Ever since then I started to l-like you.¡± She said. At the last words her voice became quiet and her cheeks blushed, but even though she basically muttered it, my ears picked it up.

    I looked at her, then said seriously,

    ¡°You know I¡¯m with Amelia, right? Yet you still confess to me here. Why?¡±

    ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter that you¡¯re with Amelia! Someone as great as you shouldn¡¯t be confined to one girl! I don¡¯t mind sharing you. In fact I want to share you! Please take both me and Amelia as you wives, and whoever else you might want in the future!¡± She said, absolutely seriously.

    She wanted to share me? She wanted me to have multiple wives? What a peculiar girl. But I didn¡¯t mind though. I had intended to marry both of them for a while, actually. Having several wives isn¡¯t that rare anyways.

    ¡°I don¡¯t mind. I quite like you anyways, so I don¡¯t mind having you as well. I¡¯ll go see Amelia, to make sure she doesn¡¯t mind either.¡± I said. Then I went in for a kiss. The kiss was a deep and long one, and Serana seemed to like it a lot. When the kiss stopped her cheeks were red as a tomato. I smiled at her, then left. I decided to return back to mine and Amelia¡¯s room. I guess this room would belong to Serana as well now.

    I went back to reading my book. A few hours later, Amelia finally came back. I looked up to her,

    ¡°Amelia, come here and sit with me.¡± I said. Amelia replied with an ¡°okay¡± and came over to sit next to me. I leaned over to her and gave her a kiss. This one wasn¡¯t a long one, but a short quick one.

    ¡°Amelia, what do you say to me marrying both you and Serana? I already talked to Serana and we shared a kiss together. She wanted for the both of you to marry me, it was her idea. She felt that I shouldn¡¯t be limited to one person. I was quite amused. Anyways, would you mind?¡± I asked with a smile.

    Amelia seemed a bit surprised, but then smiled at me. She leaned in and kissed me. This one was long and deep.

    ¡°I don¡¯t mind. In fact, I also feel that it is unfair for only me to have you, so let¡¯s get married, all three of us.¡± She happily said with a cute face.

    ¡°Good. I¡¯ll invite her into our bedroom tonight. From now one she¡¯ll sleep here as well. But for now I¡¯ll go see Bogat.¡± I said.

    I kissed Amelia one last time, then left. I went straight to Bogat¡¯s office. I knocked on the door, and was quickly invited in.

    ¡°Isaac my friend, what brings you here?¡± Bogat asked.

    ¡°I¡¯ve come to tell of some big news. Serana came up to me and confessed her love to me. So now I intend to marry both her and Amelia. Amelia and I will take up you name of Coldblood. What do you say?¡± I said.

    ¡°You¡¯re going to marry both of them? Good. Great! I¡¯ll happily accept you as my son in law, and Amelia as my daughter in law. Or would be just daughter in this case? Anyways, should we hold a ceremony? Should it be big or small?¡± Bogat asked question after question. I looked at him with a smile. I knew he would agree.

    ¡°We should hold a small ceremony. Only the important people may come. And close friends of you have any of those. This might increase our connections a bit. And try to get the higher ups of the underground as well. This way we can make valuable connections in the underworld and black market. I trust all of these things to you. Oh, and one more thing. From tonight and onwards, Serana shall sleep in mine and Amelia¡¯s room. Get someone to move her things.¡± I said. Bogat had a bit of a funny look at that last sentence, but didn¡¯t say anything about it. I then immediately left.

    Now I needed to find Serana and tell her to come to my room tonight. I intend to take her virginity tonight. If she is a virgin that is. She didn¡¯t get raped by the bandits, and surely she wouldn¡¯t do it with anyone after that, but who knows what flings she¡¯s had before? But I¡¯ll know tonight.

    I went back to the courtyard we were in before, but she wasn¡¯t there. I looked around for a while, but eventually decided to use our bond to locate her. With the bond I¡¯d always know where she is, and she¡¯d always know where I am, but it kind of took the fun out of looking for someone, so I didn¡¯t always use it. With the bond I soon found her outside her room, where her things were already being carried away. She just stood there confused when I arrived.

    ¡°Hey Isaac. Don¡¯t suppose you know why they are taking my things, do you?¡± She asked, still confused as ever. I thought she would have figured it out by now, but apparently not.

    ¡°I told Bogat to have them move your things to our room. From tonight on, you¡¯ll be sleeping with me and Amelia, so you should prepare yourself for tonight.¡± I said with a gentle, loving tone.

    ¡°Oh, and I also told Bogat about our marriage. He agreed to organize a ceremony for the three of us. Of course Amelia agreed as well. Soon the three of us will be husband and wives.¡± I continued.

    Serana looked overjoyed, and hugged me tightly, then kissed me passionately. She then looked up to me with a blush on her face.

    ¡°Does that mean we are going to have s-s-sex tonight?¡± she asked shyly. I smiled at her then nodded. Her face turned red as a tomato and she buried her face in my chest. But then I heard an almost undistinguishable sound come from her.

    This narrative has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. If you see it on Amazon, please report it.¡°I¡¯m looking forward to it¡± she said. I couldn¡¯t help but to smile. I was also looking forward to it.

    Then, I went back to my room.

    The sun was soon to rise, when Serana came into the room. She looked shy. Both Amelia and I were looking at her, with slight lust. She just looked back shyly, the redness appearing on her cheeks.

    ¡°I¡¯m here.¡± She said. Her voice was rather timid. I stood up and walked in front of her. I put my arms around her and kissed her. While my tongue penetrated into her mouth, she held me tightly. Amelia was just looking at us in silence, while I could taste the saliva of Serana. I pulled Serana towards the bed and threw her on it. I looked towards Amelia.

    ¡°Come here. Join us.¡± I said. Amelia stood up and kissed me. Then she lied down on the bed, next to Serana, and kissed her. I went on top of Serana and started groping her breasts. While she was kissing Amelia, I took off her clothes. Soon she lied naked before me.

    I pushed Amelia away from her and kissed Serana myself.

    ¡°Are you ready?¡± I asked her. She silently nodded response. I started kissing her body, while ¡°massaging¡± her lower entrance with my fingers. Soon my head arrived in front of her pussy. I let my tongue slide inside her. At that moment Serana could no longer hold back her moans. ¡°Ahh¡± she resounded. While I was doing this, Amelia kindly helped me undress, and also started kissing my body all over.

    Soon she decided to put my thing into her mouth. She had never given me oral before, but since we were three now, she had to do something. Now both Serana and I were completely naked, while Amelia still had her clothes on. I decided it was time, so I took my rod and put it outside her pussy. I looked at Serana again, and kissed her. Then I let my cock slide inside her. She couldn¡¯t keep her moans back at all. ¡°Ahh! Ah! Mmmh! Oohh!¡± Her voice resounded across the room. My thing was thrusting in and out of her repeatedly, while she was moaning louder and louder. Amelia had started to undress as well, soon we were all naked in the room. While I was fucking Serana, Amelia was kissing and licking me all over. Sometimes she would also grope or finger Serana. Since I was only having sex with Serana at the moment, I decided to do something to Amelia as well. I started massaging her entrance, and groping her breasts. Now Amelia started moaning as well, but not as loud as Serana. It truly was a room filled with love.

    I was tired of our current position so I had Serana go on all fours while I stood behind her on my knees. I thus started humping her repeatedly again. This time Amelia was standing in front of Serana. She had Serana licking her and sucking. She was a bit shy since she was giving oral sex to another girl, but she liked it. She also knew that she would be having sex with this girl countless time in the coming years, so she decided to just do it, while she ecstatic sensation of having the cock of Isaac piercing inside her. She had truly never felt so good in her life before. This went on for a while. Serana even had a few orgasms, but I didn¡¯t let her go. I just repeatedly fucked her over and over again, until finally I ejaculated inside her, as a white liquid flowed into her. It was a blessing that she couldn¡¯t get pregnant except if we purposefully used the pregnancy spell. I could cum inside her all I wanted, without worrying.

    After I was finally done with her, she fell limply on the bed.

    ¡°I¡¯m in heaven.¡± She said. ¡°Thank you Isaac, for allowing me to be your wife. I truly love you.¡± She said as she kissed me. Then Amelia snuck over to me, and pushed me on my back. She then proceeded to sit on me, as my thing was relaxing at the entrance of her pussy.

    ¡°You ready for more?¡± Amelia asked lustfully and kissed me.

    ¡°If you do all the work, then I am.¡± I replied playfully. With the vitality of a vampire, we would be able to have sex without stop for extended periods of time, so I had no problem with continuing right away.

    Amelia smiled and grabbed my cock with her hand and placed it outside her pussy. She then started jumping up and down one me, letting my cock slide in and out of her, over and over again.

    Serana was lying beside me holding me, with her leg curled around mine. She had actually fallen asleep, with my semen still leaking out of her pussy. Weirdly she able to sleep, even though Amelia¡¯s moans quite loud, and she was riding me, so my body wasn¡¯t completely still. What a weird girl.

    Amelia kept riding me, having a few orgasms her and there, until it was my turn to have one. After we were finished, Amelia got off of me, and lied beside me, on the other side. Thus the three of us went to sleep. Serana on one side, Amelia the other, all three of us naked. Today, I had my first threesome. The first of many.

    The next night, I awoke to someone knocking on the door. ¡°Come in.¡± I said, not thinking about my appearance. The door opened and in came Bogat. He was a bit surprised by the sight. He could see his daughter naked. It wasn¡¯t like we weren¡¯t covered by a blanket, but Serana had pushed most of the blanket off in her sleep. Bogat could see her private parts very well. He could also see some white liquid flowing out of her vagina. He didn¡¯t doubt that his daughter was a virgin no more. He was a bit flustered, but I noticed.

    ¡°Serana, cover yourself. Your father can see you.¡± I said. Serana looked up sleepily, but quickly noticed what I meant and covered herself like a flash. Her face reddened up to the point of looking a tomato.

    ¡°Do you need anything Bogat?¡± I asked. Bogat quickly recovered. He had been prepared to see such a scene in the future, he just didn¡¯t expect to see it the very day after he entrusted his daughter to Isaac.

    ¡°Yes, we have a guest. This man is going to be attending you wedding, and he would like to meet you. Is that alright?¡± Bogat asked. I nodded and stood up, not caring that he could see my package. I quickly dressed and followed him out. Amelia and Serana just snuggled together and went back to sleep.

    I followed Bogat into a room. In this room there was a man wearing fancy clothing. He seemed strong. Very strong. Too strong for this prefecture at the least.

    ¡°So you are Isaac? It¡¯s good to meet you. My name is Valen Shadowblade.¡± He announced. Quite a name he had. I knew immediately that he was no normal man.

    ¡°Good to meet you Sir Valen Shadowblade. I am indeed Isaac, soon to be Isaac Coldblood.¡± I said. He looked a little bit surprised for some reason.

    ¡°So you are taking their name? I assumed that the brides would be using your last name.¡± He said.

    ¡°No, I don¡¯t have a last name yet. Neither does my other fianc¨¦ Amelia. We come from humble beginnings and had to work out way up.¡± I explained to him. He had a look of understanding.

    ¡°I see. That¡¯s very commendable. To go from commoner status to a wealthy noble. I am the same. I was born as a villager, but now I am one of the strongest humans around. Isaac, I have a proposition for you. I hear that you silently massacred the Cheng family without ever being discovered for Bogat here. That¡¯s very good, Bogat is a friend of mine. If I had been in the country back then, I would probably done it instead. But enough of that. You see, I am the leader of a big assassin organization called Shadowblade. I know right? An amazing name...

    Anyways, we don¡¯t have a branch in Fenlai Prefecture at all, and there aren¡¯t that many assassin organizations here. The ones who are very weak. Even though you are only at the B rank I¡¯m told that you are actually much stronger than any other B rank. I would like to test that myself, but first the proposition. I would like you to become the leader of our Fenlai branch, the Coldblood branch. Do you accept? If you do, I¡¯ll send some subordinates over when that estate is finished. You will also be in a position of great power here in the Fenlai Prefecture. The Lord Commander will have to be polite to you. After all if what I hear about your strength is true, then you¡¯re probably even stronger than he is. Now what do you say?¡±

    What an offer. I would become the leader of an assassin branch organization. This would provide us with the power I have always wanted over this prefecture. It will also provide us with many potential vampires. This could be the start of the Coldblood vampire clan. After thinking for a while, I decided to accept.

    ¡°Sir Valen Shadowblade, I would like to accept your offer. I will gladly lead the Fenlai branch of the Shadowblade organization.¡± I announced. Valen looked at me and smiled.

    ¡°Good! Now would like to have a spar with me? I am very curious about you. Even Bogat¡¯s strength has increased greatly since meeting you. I suspect that there is more to you than meets the eye.¡± He asked me to spar. I decided to gladly accept once more. After all it was only a spar, it wouldn¡¯t be dangerous.

    ¡°Sure, let¡¯s spar.¡± I said.

    We went out into the courtyard, Bogat at our backs. We stood facing each other, while Bogat observed.

    ¡°Alright Isaac, prepare yourself. I¡¯m about to start.¡± He said. Then suddenly he flashed and appeared in front of. I managed to dodge to the side and fired a kick into his side. But my kick only went through his body, as it dispersed into the air. I looked at him confused. Where did he go? I looked around, but suddenly felt a pain in my side as I flew a few meters to the side. He was quick. I decided I had to take this seriously. There was no doubt about it. He was an A rank. My body flashed and I appeared behind him and punched his side. This time it connected, but there didn¡¯t seem to be any effect. Valen had been surprised by his speed, so he slipped up and let him hit him. Of course if this was a battle to the death this wouldn¡¯t have happened.

    Valen¡¯s body spun around, as his foot came to my face. I managed to duck beneath it, but the foot stopped in the air, and fell unto the back of my head. My face plummeted into the dirt, but I managed to recover and rolled away. Then I jumped at him again, with a kick, but the kick was a feint. As the he was about to block the kick, I grabbed his head and plunged my knee into his face. But to my despair, the body just dispersed into the air again. He was so quick that he left afterimages.

    Then all of a sudden I felt his palm touch my back, and I plummeted into the ground. Luckily vampires have inhuman endurance and vitality, so I stood right up again.

    ¡°All right this is enough. I must say, you are even more amazing than I anticipated. You are only at the early stage of rank B, but you would be able to kill an early stage rank A easily. You would also be able to fight someone at the middle stage, but you would be slightly disadvantaged. This is absolutely amazing. Even someone who has practised those mysterious immortal techniques is inferior to you.

    I am confident that no one else can fight someone an entire rank above them. No one! You¡¯re one of a kind Isaac. Perhaps only some of those monsters made by the gods can equal you. It makes me think that you might be a being made by the gods. Though you will work for me now, you will surpass me soon. At that time, I hope that you will take care of me. I wouldn¡¯t even mind the Shadowblades working for the Coldbloods at that time. But only then. Until then you work for me.¡±

    He said.

    ¡°I will gladly take care of you when that time comes Sir Valen Shadowblade. And thank you for your guidance.¡± I said. Valen just smiled at me and said,

    ¡°Please, just call me Valen. And I appreciate it. Now if you¡¯ll excuse me I have some business to take care of. Oh, and you should get up earlier. I mean the sun went down a while ago. It¡¯s night! Well if you sleep during the day I guess it¡¯s easier to assassinate at night. Well, I¡¯ll see you again at the wedding. And congratulations.¡± He said, as he left. But I should get up earlier? That¡¯s the first time someone said that to me. But he doesn¡¯t know that we are vampires, so it must be weird to him that I sleep this late.

    End of chapter 11.

 Chapter 12: Marriage

    I''m sorry it soooooo long to get this chapter out. I''ve been very busy lately so it took a while. But as an apology I present you with a really looooooooooooooong chapter. Almost three times longer than my longest chapter yet. Thats 32 pages and almost 15000 words. All chapters together that would be over 50000 words and 117 pages. I''m now eligible to apply for donations.

    The reason why this chapter is so long is because I managed to write a bit every few days, but I didn''t feel it was ready to release, then I spent several hours yesterday and today writing, and BAM! It''s 32 pages long :P

    Anyway, enjoy the chapter :)

    Chapter 12: Wedding

    After Valen left, Bogat and I went onto another room to talk. I was sitting on a chair, across the table was Bogat. We were both drinking a blood red ¡°wine¡±. Recently we had the idea of putting blood in glasses to drink, as if it was wine. Quite a good idea in my opinion. If we could just figure out a way to preserve it, then we could store wine in bottles. That would be very convenient for journeys and the like.

    ¡°Tell me a bit about Valen. How big is his organization? How strong is he? How do you know him?¡± I asked. Bogat sat still, thinking, for a while.

    ¡°Hmmm, Valen¡­ Well, his assassin organization is one of the biggest in the human world. They have branches in almost all of the kingdoms on the southern site of the continent. His influence is smaller in the rest of the continent, but he still had branches all over the continent. Naturally he doesn¡¯t have any influence in the other continent that are inhabited by non-humans.

    And for how strong he is? He¡¯s very strong. He¡¯s at the peak of the A rank. There are very few humans that are that strong, so he can be said to be at the top of the human world. Which is of course why he can even have such an organization like the Shadowblade organization. He¡¯s also told me that he trains with a special technique. This allows him be stronger than most A ranks. He even said he could handle some S ranks, but I don¡¯t know if it¡¯s true, though.

    Now, for how I met him. A few years ago, I was traveling to another city. This was about twenty years ago to be exact. While I was on the road back home, I found a collapsed man. This man was Valen, naturally. Apparently he¡¯d been on a mission or something, and been wounded and poisoned. He had an arrow sticking from his back. Or a bolt, I don¡¯t remember, but that¡¯s not important. Being the nice man I am, I naturally saved him, not thinking about the very expensive looking equipment he was wearing at all. No way was I hoping he would pay me. I took the man into my carriage. He was unconscious at the time, and it took him a while to wake up. When I found him, I was just about a day away from Fenlai City. When I got back home I had doctors tend to him. They took the bolt or arrow out of him, and gave him some medicine. Then a few days later he woke up. He was very thankful, and even gave me a reward. Then he stayed at my home for a while. That¡¯s how we became friends. He would visit me again every few years. But the weird thing is that I age over these twenty years, but he barely even changed.

    Well, that¡¯s because he was an A rank. A rankers can live for a few hundred years, and they age slowly. I was quite jealous of him in the past. But that¡¯s in the past, now I¡¯m bound to live longer than him, and get stronger. Well, maybe not. Isaac, in the future I think it would be a good idea to turn him into a vampire. But no rush, he¡¯s still only a hundred years old. Being at his strength, he should have at least two to three hundred years left.¡± Bogat said.

    I sat for a while, thinking about his words. It would probably be a good idea to turn him into a vampire someday. But not yet. Let¡¯s get to know him. Well, he is an assassin, so he is probably not a saint. We¡¯ll see.

    ¡°He sounds like a dangerous man. To his enemies that is. We should make sure to stay on his good side. At least until we are stronger than him. He said that he didn¡¯t mind working under me when I get stronger than him, but I¡¯m not sure I should trust that. He might try to kill me before that. Either that, or he really is thinking about the good of his organization. Alright, if he never tries to betray me, then I¡¯ll make him into a vampire, but if not¡­¡± I said, fading out at the last words.

    ¡°Bogat, let¡¯s gather everyone. We¡¯ll talk about our plans.¡± I said. Bogat nodded, then left the room. Moments later everyone was here. Bogat, Serana, Kato, Lilia, Aylard, Amelia and finally me. I looked over everyone present. They all looked up to me with respect. In their eyes I was like a saviour. Someone who gave them the abilities to achieve their biggest desires.

    For Bogat it would be time and power. Now he would be able make his family flourish. The relatively important Coldblood family of the capital of the smallest prefecture of one of the smallest kingdoms had become more influential, and would become the royal clan of the vampire world. Although he himself would not be the one leading it, but he did not mind, for it would be the Great Isaac who sat in the head seat.

    Kato, he had been given talent, intelligence and time. Before he had been stuck, but now he had talent to go above that of even a Warlock, something very few humans could achieve. Even if it would take him centuries or millennia, that did not matter, for he had eternal life.

    For Lilia and Aylard, it had been opportunity. Opportunity for revenge! Opportunity for power. They had been betrayed by their closest friends, to be left for dead. But in their moment of despair, they saw a flash, then they were out of the boss room. Thus, they had been given life, and the opportunity to get their revenge.

    Lastly, for Amelia and Serana, perhaps the gift bestowed on them was me, myself. Both of them had fallen madly in love with me, to the point of them not even caring if they had to share me. They even wanted to share me, thinking that their lowly selves were not worthy of my, by themselves.

    I looked upon my friends, my ¡°family¡±, and my lovers.

    ¡°Today I have gathered you together to tell you a bit about my plans. First, Lilia, Aylard, you may not know this, but in a few months Amelia, Serana and I are going to get married. This marriage will serve to bring Amelia and myself into the Coldblood family. Then after that I want the rest of you to be adopted into the family as well, becoming my siblings. Of course, Kato and Lilia, if you¡¯d rather marry into the family, then it¡¯s fine if only one of you gets adopted.¡± I said, looking at Kato and Lilia with a smirk on my face. I had been looking at them for a year now, being all fidgety around each other. I couldn¡¯t stand it anymore, so I decided to try and kick start their relationship.

    Lilia¡¯s face reddened, while there also appeared a few hints of red on Kato¡¯s face.

    ¡°W-w-w-wh-what are you talking about? M-m-me m-m-mar-marry h-him? R-really?¡± Lilia said flustered, yet a bit happy. She had gotten very embarrassed and looked like a tomato.

    ¡°M-marry?¡± Kato then continued.

    I looked at them. It was very funny. I almost couldn¡¯t hold my laughter in. It seemed like everyone else was in the same situation. They hadn¡¯t been expecting me to say that.

    ¡°We all know you like each other. But there is no need to rush into marriage like we are doing. After all we¡¯re doing this for ¡°political¡± reasons. Well also because of love I guess. But you two should consummate you relationship first, and make sure you love each other and all that stuff.¡± I said. Lilia was even more embarrassed now, but she looked towards Kato, then me, then Kato again, then once more me.

    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll confess my love for Kato right here! Kato, I love you!¡± She almost screamed. Kato looked a bit flustered now, and those hints of red were growing. He then returned her look.

    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll accept your feelings!¡± He also almost screamed. This was the first time I¡¯d heard him talk so loudly. I was surprised. I thought nothing would be able to make him raise his voice. But then again, he always was a bit shy.

    ¡°Alright then, you¡¯re now a couple, good for you. Now let¡¯s get on with the things at hand. As I said, you¡¯ll all become Coldbloods, whether it¡¯s through adoption or marriage. Now for the next matter.

    We¡¯ve been collecting money for a while now to buy a big piece of land somewhere away from society. There we will be building ourselves a castle. In five years we expect it to be done. We¡¯re buying it second hand, and we¡¯ve made a blood bond on the seller so he¡¯ll never tell anyone about the land. The building will be led by our own people, and the workers beneath them, we¡¯ll secretly hire from somewhere and have them go to the construction side. When the castle is finished, we¡¯ll either kill them, or keep them as blood dolls. And the resources we¡¯ll buy in mass, and then have our own people transport it. It will all be done in great secrecy, so hopefully no one will know about it.

    Now for the third matter at hand. This one might be the most important. Earlier today we were visited by an old friend of Bogat¡¯s. He¡¯s very strong, being at the peak of rank A. He¡¯s also the leader of a very large organization of assassins. Bogat told him of us dealing with the Cheng family. He also hinted to him about my great strength, so the man wanted me to become the leader of the Fenlai branch of the Shadowblade Organization. We¡¯ll be known as the Coldblood Branch Organization. When our stronghold is finished in five years, he¡¯ll send us some recruits. Since there aren¡¯t that many assassin organizations in Fenlai prefecture, we¡¯ll be the strongest one here. This will give me the kind of standing I¡¯ve been wanting for our little family.

    Now for the last matter. As you know, until now I¡¯ve been the only one to sire vampires, but that doesn¡¯t mean that you can¡¯t do it as well. In five years, when the castle is finished, I want all of you to make one vampire fledgling each. This fledgling will be your responsibility. You¡¯ll have teach them out ways, and how to do things. And you¡¯ll not be allowed to have the others teach them things. For example, Kato will be able to teach his fledgling magic, but won¡¯t be able to teach the sword, since he can¡¯t use it. Likewise, Lilia, you don¡¯t know any magic, so you can¡¯t teach your vampire any. This is so that you can get used to being a mentor. To these vampires you¡¯ll be their everything. At least I hope so. That¡¯s all. Any questions?¡±

    I explained to them all of my plans. Except for bringing my parents. It wasn¡¯t really necessary from them to know about that. Then Kato stepped forward to ask a question.

    ¡°So these vampires will be like our disciples or servants or something?¡± he asked.

    ¡°Exactly. They¡¯ll be entirely under your command. The others won¡¯t be allowed to order them around. Of course they¡¯ll still have to listen to my orders.¡± I said.

    Kato nodded in understanding, then stepped back. I stood still, waiting for a while, but no one asked any other questions. Then I dismissed them, and everyone went to do their own things. Lilia and Kato left together. Seemed like they had a few things to talk about. Perhaps in the bed. I gave Kato a thumbs up in my mind. Even though it was all thanks to me. He should thank me.

    Now there was nothing to do but wait. The date of the wedding hadn¡¯t been decided yet, no one had even been invited yet, except Valen. Thus one month passed.

    I was alone in a room. In front of me was a canvas. I had decided to try my hand at painting. Around the room, there were several paintings lying around. From the first painting to the last you could see magnificent progress in skill. The first one was quite ugly and not worth much, but the one after was much better. With each painting the quality increased exponentially. After having painted a few dozen paintings, my skill was already quite high. Vampires had a natural affinity for art and music, so they would learn and master these skills quicker than humans and elves alike. Even more so for me. I am the progenitor of the vampires. I wasn¡¯t made into a vampire by another, but was completely transformed into one by Gebados, the God of Death himself. This means I¡¯m the most pure vampire in existence.

    This also mean every vampire enhancement, is even more enhanced in me. I will master the arts at astonishing speeds. It¡¯s only been around two weeks since I began painting, but I¡¯ve already had progress that others would need years, or even decades to achieve. In this world I might even be the most talented artist alive. I¡¯m quite proud of this. I found that I quite enjoy painting too. It allows me to portray my feelings and thoughts in pictures. As they say, a picture is worth a thousand words. In the future I intend to start sculpting as well. I¡¯ll also make Bogat buy a piano, so that I can delve into the musical arts as well.

    As I was having my thoughts, painting, a knock resounded from the door.

    ¡°Come in.¡± I said. The door opened, and in came Bogat. He took a moment to enjoy the scenery. He was noticeably surprised. He had never seen my paintings before, and now he was overloaded by them. He could clearly see how my skill had improved.

    ¡°Oh my. You¡¯ve gotten quite good at this. And it¡¯s only been two weeks. I know of painters who have painted for years before getting to this amount of skill.¡± He said. His eyes were wide open in astonishment. You could even say he was proud. In these years, Isaac had become a bit of a son figure to him. And since he didn¡¯t have a son, he had entrusted the future of the Coldblood family to him. Isaac would be the head of the Coldblood family for eons to come.

    ¡°I¡¯m actually quite surprised myself. As vampires we naturally talented at arts, but not even I expected for my progress to be this quick. It has to do with me being the progenitor though. While you would be able to master the arts quicker than mortals, you wouldn¡¯t be on the same level as me.¡± I said. Bogat nodded in agreement. He had also been delving a bit into the arts in his free time, but his progress had not been this quick.

    ¡°As expected of our progenitor, you never cease to amaze me. Anyways, I came here to tell you about the wedding. It will take place four months from now. All the guests have been invited, but they need a bit of time to get here, so we¡¯ll wait four months.

    As for how many have been invited, it¡¯s around a hundred people. And they¡¯re all influential people, so this will serve us well to make connections and maybe even some business deals. So, four months from now you and Amelia will join the Coldblood family.¡± Bogat said. Even though his voice was neutral, there were some slipups where I could see his excitement. So much for being a coldblooded business man. But then again, it was his daughter being married, so of course he would be excited.

    ¡°Good. Thank you for all your hard work. I¡¯m looking forward for us to not only be related by blood, but name as well.¡± I said, as I continued with my painting. Right now I was painting a portrait of Amelia. But she was not alone on the picture. There was a man biting into her neck, but the man was undistinguishable since the painting was unfinished. But of course, this painting was of the moment that I turned my first love, Amelia, into a vampire.

    That day was one of the best days in my life, since it was the day I became a vampire, the day I met my first love and the day where I made her my first vampire follower, so that we could be together for all of eternity. That was already four years ago. Time flies.

    I talked with Bogat for a while until he had to go.

    Four months passed. Not much had happened these months. Amelia and I had to learn to dance, and other things needed for a marriage of high status.

    The day was finally here. I was standing inside a hall. This wasn¡¯t a church, since I felt it would be wrong to get married in the name of other gods than Gebados, but he didn¡¯t have any churches where you could get married. Instead we opted to have some government official wed us. I was standing in the spotlight. In front of me there were rows of people. Around a hundred different persons to be exact. Most of them had never seen me before, so they were surprised at my appearance. As a vampire I naturally had stunning beauty, and my aura was noble and magnificent.

    Everyone was silent, as we waited for the brides to enter the hall. Soon enough they surely came in, led by Bogat. They slowly walked up the aisle, to finally stand before me. To tell the truth, I was actually quite excited, and maybe even a bit nervous. After all I was getting married to not one, but two stunning beauties.

    The official said a few words about vows and things until he finally came to the good part. It was time to say yes or no.

    ¡°Do you, Isaac, vow to take Amelia and Serana as your lawfully wedded wives and care for and love them until death do you part?¡± the official asked. I looked into the eyes of my almost wives, then I answered.

    ¡°Yes, I do.¡± I said.

    The official then continued.

    ¡°Do you, Serana, vow to take Isaac as your lawfully wedded husband, and Amelia as your lawfully wedded wife and care for and love them until death do you part?¡±

    Serana smiled.

    ¡°I do.¡± She answered. Now the priest turned to Amelia.

    ¡°Do you, Amelia, vow to take Isaac as your lawfully wedded husband, and Serana as your lawfully wedded wife and care for them and love them until death do you part?¡± The official asked.

    ¡°I do.¡± Amelia answered.

    ¡°Good, you may now exchange rings.¡± The official finally said. The rings were carried up to us, and we then proceeded to exchange rings. There were three identical golden rings.

    The three of us were now married to each other. Yes each other. When three people marry together, all three will be married to each other. That means that Amelia and Serana were not just married to me but each other as well. So if I were to die, then they would still be married, even though I died. But if I were to marry someone else in future, they wouldn¡¯t be married to said woman, except if they joined in the ceremony and exchanged vows again.

    With this system it would be possible to have several main wives, before secondary wives and concubines.

    Now that the ceremony was finished everyone gathered in another hall. This hall was filled with tables and food. Amelia, Serana and I were sitting in the middle of the main table, the main seat. After a while of waiting, everyone was settled down.

    Bogat stood up, prepared to hold a speech.

    ¡°Thank you everyone, for coming here to this joyous occasion. Today I have accepted a new son and daughter into my Coldblood family. It was four years ago, when I first met Isaac and Amelia. Maybe some of you remember this, but my daughter was kidnapped by bandits. It was indeed Isaac that saved her from them.

    He really is an astonishing individual. Not only is he very strong, already at the B rank, but he extraordinarily gifted in the arts. All of the paintings you see in this room were painted by him¡± Bogat said. At these last words everyone was shocked, and started looking around. They could clearly see that these paintings were of very high quality. And they were all painted by Isaac? But he¡¯s so young! Marvellous, truly marvellous. These were thoughts going through the head of the guests.

    ¡°After he saved my daughter, I asked him to come visit us, so he did. We quickly became friends, and eventually I even began seeing him as a son. I never had a son you see, so it always troubled me about what would happen with my Coldblood Organization, especially after the death of my wife. But now that Isaac is here, I worry no longer.

    Therefore I hereby declare that the future heir of my family shall be Isaac Coldblood! I plan to step down soon myself, so from that day onwards the head of the Coldblood family will be Isaac.¡± Bogat said. Usually the heir of big families would be someone blood related, so it was quite a shock to hear these news. But no one complained. After all the person in question was a masterful artist, and also at the B rank, even though he was so young. He barely even looked twenty years old.

    It was clear to them that this young man might very well become an A rank. If that happened he would be the only A rank in the country. The only known one at least. That was surely a figure worthy of respect. Many guest came over to congratulate me and talk. We also talked a bit business here and there. Some organizations even offered to work under us. They were the smaller ones of course. You might ask why they would submit so easily, just because Bogat said I was strong, smart and talented. He might have lied after all. But he had made a public announcement that I was the heir to his family in front of a crowd of a hundred important and influential figures, so it was not to be taken lightly.

    But that¡¯s not all. It also has to do with my aura and mercenary identification. Since I am strong I have a strong aura me. Being a vampire also makes this aura even stronger and more noble and majestic. And a mercenary¡¯s identification cannot be faked! No matter how much you offer to pay, they will always refuse you.

    Therefore these people knew that I was talented and strong. After all strength is the most important factor of the world.

    Valen came walking over to me. As he walked a few guests gasped in surprise. It seemed like some of them knew who he was, but they just kept silent. They didn¡¯t dare tell anyone about him, but it still caused curiosity in the other guests.

    ¡°Isaac my friend, congratulations with your wedding, and congratulations to your beautiful wives as well.¡± He said.

    ¡°Thank you Valen, and thank you for coming as well.¡± I replied with a smile. Those few individuals who knew Valen were visibly surprised by him being polite to me, and us talking casually. Whenever Valen visited them for whatever reasons, they were always dead afraid of him, and he only talked to them coldly. They didn¡¯t even know that he had a side like that.

    ¡°Of course I¡¯d come, I promised right. You¡¯re also an important partner now, so I have to show my kindness by attending the weddings of my most important subordinates. You might not be my strongest subordinate right now, but one day you¡¯ll most likely be surpass me, so I have to show you my good side while I still can.¡± He said with a laugh.

    People were even more shocked now. He works for him? He¡¯ll be stronger than him in the future? This is an opportunity! Those individuals who knew of Valen rushed over to Isaac immediately after hearing this news. Some of them knew that Valen was one of the strongest humans in the world, and had various deals with him.

    ¡°Lord Isaac, congratulations on your wedding! I have a proposal for you, will you listen?¡±

    ¡°Master Isaac, I congratulate you on your wedding. I would like my organization to work under you, so that it can grow aside you and bring you more power!¡±

    ¡°Lord Isaac, congratulations on your wedding and your beautiful wives. The two of them could easily be ranked as the most beautiful women in the country! I would like my line of alchemy and magic shops to work for your Coldblood Organization! Will you let me?¡±

    One after the other, these guests came to me offering various absurd offers. They all wanted to join the Coldblood Organization. At first I was confused by this, but I soon realized that they were most likely connected to Valen and had overheard our conversation. Since they knew that I had joined his organization, and that I would surpass him in the future, they desperately wanted to join me so that they profit and become more powerful in the kingdom. Even though they would lose rights to their businesses they would still have control over them. And when I grew, they would also grow, since they were part of the organization as a whole.

    Bogat saw the commotion and hurried over. They all decided to meet later and discuss the details. These guys weren¡¯t as small as the guys who wanted to join us before, but actual big organizations, since they had deals with Valen. Small businesses didn¡¯t have that kind of privilege. Of course they weren¡¯t as big as the Coldblood Organization. But with all of them joining we still grew by a large margin. Overall, we had two folded in size, at least.

    The other big guys were dumbfounded by all this. We had suddenly overshadowed all of them in the blink of an eye. In several of the prefectures we could now be counted as the number one organization. But there were still many who were much more powerful than us, in the bigger prefectures. But it could still be said that we were number one amongst the smaller ones. And we had businesses in almost the entire kingdom now, albeit some of them were quite small.

    With this our income had increased substantially. We could afford our castle very soon now. But it would still take long to construct, so there were still at least four years left.

    Eventually the party ended and everyone left, mostly drunk. We had spent a lot of money on this wedding. We only served the best foods and the best beverages. The guests were very satisfied with our selection of wine. When everyone had left, Valen came over to us.

    ¡°I see that you benefited quite a bit from our little conversation there. All of those guys submitted to you completely. Well, they are people that I have connections to, and I am not quite as kind to them as I am to you, so they fear me a bit and they also know of my power. Since they heard that you will succeed me, they saw it as a golden opportunity to get more power. A smart decision, as you will take them to new heights.¡± Valen said, with a smirk on his face.

    ¡°You flatter me.¡± I said. But it was true. Anyone that follows me will surely reach new heights.

    ¡°It¡¯s about time that I leave. I have a lot of work to do, being the head of a large organization and all. I will see you lot again in about five years, after your castle is finished. I will bring a few assassins with me then, to work under you. They will be the force to get you started, but you will need to recruit more by yourself, but more on that then. I bid you farewells, and thanks for having me.¡± He said, as he turned around and left.

    He looked quite intimidating from the back, in the dark of the night. The moon shined on him, his long black hair fluttering in the wind. His coat was also dancing to the winds rhythm. Then all of a sudden his body fluttered and disappeared. Not even I could see him move. He was astonishingly fast. If I fought against him, I would surely die, without resistance. I made a note to myself, never to offend him, at least until I have the strength to face him.

    The next day I had everyone gather. There was a certain matter I wanted to discuss with them

    ¡°At this moment there are six vampires in the world. Only seven. That¡¯s a pitifully low number for an entire species. But it¡¯ll grow with time. For now I just want one more vampire. Not counting Bogat and Serana, we are five vampires. There is me and Serana, who are a mix of swordsmen and mages. Then there is Kato, who is a Full Circle Magus, nearing a Warlock. Then there is you Lilia, who is an expert swordswoman, and Aylard, who would be something like a knight, using two handed weapons and heavy armour.

    It¡¯s a good start for a party, but a party should also have a rogue and a priest to heal. But we don¡¯t really need a priest so much with our healing factors. And I also don¡¯t want a priest that doesn¡¯t serve under Dread Father Gebados. And there aren¡¯t many of those, since it¡¯s not very legal under the influence of the churches of life and light. So there is only a rogue left. So that¡¯s our current task at hand. Find a rogue. Someone skilled. And since he¡¯s a rogue, he shouldn¡¯t be too light hearted. Go out and find candidates, then bring me their resumes. This time I¡¯m not choosing someone at random. He¡¯ll probably be the last person I turn for quite a while.¡± I said. Everyone understood and immediately started the mission. Bogat didn¡¯t go personally, since he was busy, but he did send a few subordinates on the search. Amelia and Serana also stayed back. Kato, Lilia and Aylard went out.

    Kato and Lilia had gotten closer these days. They were often together, and I even caught them kissing from time to time, but they still didn¡¯t share a bedroom together. I had no idea whether or not they had sex yet though.

    Since everyone was working hard, except my wives who were lazy at home, I decided that I should help too, so I also went to search. Kato, Lilia and Aylard went together, but I was alone. I had heard that there was some sort of thieves¡¯ guild in the city, or something, but I knew nothing of it. Our Coldblood Organization was connected to the underground, but only the business part of it. We sometimes did business with the Guild, like fencing stolen goods, but didn¡¯t know much about them, so I decided to go find them, to see if they had any good prospects.

    I had gotten a bit famous in the city, as a new Coldblood family member. Of course the news of me being the heir of the family still hadn¡¯t spread very much, but the news of me marrying had spread months ago. I decided to wear a black cloak, to hide my identity.

    My first stop was a tavern in the city. The very same one I used stay in. I went up to the keep. I took a bag of coins out of a pocket and handed it to him.

    ¡°Do you know where I can find a gathering of skilled rogues, perhaps a guild of some kind?¡± I asked him, making my voice sound dark and gruff, as my face laid hidden in the shadows of my cloak. The tavern keep looked at me, then around him nervously. He grabbed the bag, looked in it to see a bunch of silver coins, then got closer to my face. He whispered,

    ¡°I don¡¯t personally know of the place, but I do know that there is a guild of thieves in this city. I have to pay them every month to keep my tavern safe. For a bit of money, I could perhaps remember who to talk with to find them.¡± The man whispered in my ear. I took out another bag. I opened it and showed the man the contents. Inside were about 20 gold coins. The man¡¯s eyes widened, and he grabbed the bag quickly.

    He once more got closer to my face.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know his name, but I¡¯ll write down where you can meet him. Of course you didn¡¯t hear this from me.¡± The man said, then quickly scribbled something on a piece of paper. I grabbed the paper, then left. On the paper an address was written down in poor handwriting.

    The place was in the outskirts of the town, where the poor people lived. I arrived in small building that seemed like it could be abandoned. There were broken windows and small holes in the walls, but every single window was covered by planks, not allowing anyone to see inside. I walked to the door and tried to open it, but it was locked. I decided to knock, but there was no answer. I kept knocking. Still no answer. I was persistent and kept knocking for a whole hour. The people who walked past me just looked at me with weird eyes, wondering why I kept knocking.

    Eventually the door finally opened. A good thing too, as I was about to give up. The moment the door opened a knife appeared to my throat, but I gave it no mind and walked inside, closing the door behind me.

    ¡°That took you a while¡± I said, still not caring about the knife to my throat. If I was human a slit throat would be fatal, but for a vampire it would heal in seconds.

    ¡°Who are you?! And what are you doing here?¡± The gruff man said. He was dressed in ragged clothes, fit for a beggar.

    ¡°You¡¯re with a guild of rogues right? A thieves¡¯ guild or something? Bring me to your leader.¡± I said indifferently. The man seemed to think that he had me in an advantageous position.

    ¡°How did you know that? And why would I take you to the leader? Tell me why I shouldn¡¯t kill you right here.¡± The man said with killing intent. I looked at him funnily with a smirk on my face.

    ¡°Why you should take me to you leader? Why you shouldn¡¯t kill me?¡± I asked in a mocking tone, then grabbed his neck, and broke his knife into pieces faster than he could react. I looked at him with a menacing expression.

    ¡°If you don¡¯t take me to you leader you die. If you try to kill me you die. Simple right. Now bring to that leader of yours. Don¡¯t worry, I just want to make a deal with him.¡± I said. The man was looking at me horrified. He was shocked at the speed at which I attacked. He simply couldn¡¯t see me. And he himself was an early C rank, a very strong existence. The only reason he was stuck here, doing such a crappy job, is because he broke one of the rules, and this was his punishment. Not even a peak C would be able to move so fast that he couldn¡¯t see him. This man could only be a B rank, he thought.

    ¡°Alright, fine! I¡¯ll bring to our headquarters, just don¡¯t kill me!¡± The man said hoarsely, as I was holding his throat, almost choking him. I let go and nodded.

    ¡°Show the way then.¡± I said.

    The man left, and I followed. We went further into the outskirts, then into some alleyways, until we arrived at a sever entrance. The man kneeled down to open it. Soon we found ourselves inside the severs. When we were inside, the man started walking again. We traversed down the severs, turning into different pathways multiple times. The path to the headquarters sure were complicated. Eventually we arrived at the end of a small tunnel. At the end there was only a wall. The man felt around the bricks of the wall, then pushed a few of them. A few meters behind us, another tunnel opened. A few seconds after we entered the tunnel, the hole behind us closed. It wasn¡¯t as smelly inside here, and it was more kept.

    We were inside a hallway. At the end of the hallway, there was a door. The man walked to the door and opened it. When we were inside we were met by armed men.

    ¡°Eric! What is the meaning of this? Who is that man?!¡± The guards asked angrily.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know who he is, but he forced me to take him here. Don¡¯t attack him though. He¡¯ll kill you if you do. Just get him to the leader. He wants to propose a deal or something.¡± The man, now known as Eric said.

    ¡°He¡¯ll kill us? You fought him?¡± One of the guards asked.

    ¡°Fought him? I don¡¯t think you can call that fighting, since he completely incapacitated me, faster than I could even see, even though I was holding my knife to his throat. He¡¯s at least B rank. I don¡¯t even think the boss could keep up with him, so just do as he wishes, lest you want to kill us all.¡± Eric said. He sure was a flatterer. Maybe he wanted to get on my good side

    ¡°Enough chit chat, just bring me that boss of yours.¡± I said, irritation apparent in my voice.

    ¡°Y-yes, follow me.¡± One of the guards said. Eric and I quickly followed him out. We were led through a few hallways, until we arrived in front of a door. The guard knocked on the door.

    ¡°Sir, you have a guest!¡± He said.

    ¡°A guest? Let him in.¡± A voice resounded. The guard opened the door. Inside the room were a few bookcases, and a desk. Behind the desk there was man, dressed in a black cloak and black leather armour beneath it. I looked towards Erik.

    ¡°Thank you for the help. Now, leave.¡± I said with a cold voice. Erik shivered and left. The guard followed. I walked to the desk and sat on a chair in front of it.

    ¡°Who are you, and why are you here?¡± The leader asked me.

    ¡°My name is Isaac Coldblood, I am the heir to the Coldblood family, and the de-facto leader behind the scenes. Now, who are you?¡± I said.

    ¡°You¡¯re Isaac Coldblood? I heard that Bogat Coldblood announced that you were the heir yesterday on your wedding, but I didn¡¯t know that you were already the de-facto leader. As for me, I am Eldric. I am the leader of the Rogues Guild, or the Guild for short. Now, why are you here?¡± Eldric said.

    ¡°I want to form a partnership with you. As you know our Coldblood Organization has become very powerful these days. Not just our influence but also or members. We have several people who are at strength of the B level. I myself have the fighting power of early A rank. And I will also let in on a little secret. Have you heard of the Shadowblade organization? Their leader is an old friend of my father in law, and he decided to make me the leader of the Fenlai Branch of his organization, until the day that I succeed him. If you do a bit of digging you will find this to be true, since he said it himself at my wedding, and quite a few people that know him were there. Now I offer you an allegiance. What is your answer?¡± I said. Eldric looked at me in astonishment.

    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll trust your words, but what do you want in return. Surely you aren¡¯t doing this out of good will?¡± Eldric said. I smiled at him, then said,

    ¡°Indeed, I do want something in return. I need you to gather all of your best men. They need to be at least C rank. I will be bringing one of them back with me, to work for me. Only one though, so no need to worry about losing all your men. Now get to it, I¡¯ll be waiting here.¡± I said. Eldric replied with a ¡°fine¡±, then left the room. A few moments later, he returned and led me to a hall.

    ¡°Alright these are the men. They are my best, and are very adept thieves. They could even sneak into the castle if they wanted to. But we are payed not to do that though.¡± Eldric said.

    In front of me were about fifteen men and women. They all looked very experienced, but they didn¡¯t have many scars adorning their bodies. I looked at all of them, some of them started shivering from my piercing gaze. A vampires gaze, sure was an intimidating thing. Amongst them was the man named Eric. I wondered why he would have such a shitty job, if he was one of the best.

    ¡°Alright. My name is Isaac Coldblood. You might have heard of me, as I am the heir of the Coldblood family, the biggest organization in Fenlai Prefecture, and several others. Today I have come because I need a skilled rogue to work directly under me. That¡¯s where you come in. One of you will be leaving with me today. But first I have to evaluate all of you. First, everyone that has never killed anyone raise your hands. And don¡¯t lie. If you do I¡¯ll kill you.¡± I said these words, and then two individuals raised their hands.

    ¡°Good. You two are disqualified. Go stand to the side and observe.¡± I said. Then I looked the remainders once more.

    Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.¡°Now, I¡¯ll ask again. Anyone who has never killed anyone, raise your hands.¡± This time I used my hypnosis. Begin at the B rank, I could now use my hypnosis on anyone at the C rank or over, but I wouldn¡¯t be able to it prolonger, or make the kill each other. But simple things, like making them tell the truth was possible.

    Three more people raised their hands. One man, two women. My body flashed and disappeared for a moment. Then the heads of the ones that lied the first time fell to the floor. Eldric looked at me in astonishment. He could barely even see me move. At that moment he realized, that if I wanted to kill all of them, it would be child¡¯s play.

    ¡°I warned you before that if you lie, you die. Since those two told the truth, they lived, while the other three died. If you¡¯re to work under me, it¡¯s important that you don¡¯t mind killing. But you¡¯re rogues. I didn¡¯t expect anyone here to actually never have killed anyone.¡± I said.

    ¡°We don¡¯t actually kill people that often. We do things like burglary and extortion. That kind of thing. But we do end up killing someone from time to time, but some manage to stay pure from killing.¡± Eldric explained.

    ¡°Alright. There¡¯s ten of you still left. As far as I know, all of you are pretty much at same level of talent and strength. You¡¯re all very skilled as well. Skill is more important to me, but there aren¡¯t really any differences there, so next up is if your personality is good enough. So for that I¡¯ll ask you a few questions. You there, step up. And answer truthfully, lest you want to die.¡± I said and pointed towards one of the men. The men stepped forwards nervously. He had seen how cruel I was before, so he most likely wouldn¡¯t lie.

    ¡°Let¡¯s start then. Your life is in danger. The only way you get to live is to kill four innocent civilians who have never hurt anyone, and just want to live their life in peace. There is a man and a woman and two children. They¡¯re a family. If you want to live you have to kill them. What do you do?¡± I asked the man. A man thought for a while.

    ¡°I would kill them. My own life is more important to me.¡± He answered truthfully.

    ¡°Good. You¡¯re in a position of high power in an organization, but your best friend who you owe your life for has betrayed you. Not in a light way. What do you do? Do you let him live? Do you kill him? Or perhaps imprison him?¡± I ask. Once again the man stood still, thinking, for a while.

    ¡°I¡¯d probably imprison him or let him live. Depends on how close I am to him. But I don¡¯t think I would be able to kill my best friend.¡± He said. I kept asking him question after question until I was satisfied. Then I used hypnosis to make sure he didn¡¯t lie, which of course, he didn¡¯t. Then I told another one to come forwards and question him, until everyone was questioned, except Eric, the man who led me here.

    ¡°Alright, Eric was it? I was saving you to last. Come forwards.¡± I said. Eric stepped forwards and waited for my questions.

    ¡°So Eric, you¡¯re pretty strong, so why were you out there, extorting money from small taverns?¡± I asked. Eric looked surprised. He hadn¡¯t expected me to ask this. When I questioned the other ones, the questions had been very similar. But I was quite curious about this matter.

    ¡°It¡¯s punishment. This one guy in the Guild had cheated me. I got very angry from that, so killed him. Since killing someone in the Guild is against the rules, I was punished. If I had reported it instead, he would have been imprisoned for a time instead, but I¡¯d rather have him dead, even if I have to extort people for a while.¡± Eric said. I was satisfied. After all I was a big fan of revenge. I believe that if someone wrongs you, you have to get revenge and kill the perpetrator.

    ¡°Hahaha, good. I would have done the same. Always seek revenge. That¡¯s my motto. Well, not really. Hmmmm. Alright I have a question. If you could choose to be either a werewolf, arch demon, vampire or zombie, what would you choose?¡± I said. Eric was surprised again. Another never before seen question, and such a weird one too.

    ¡°I guess I would go with a vampire. They are supposed to be very beautiful, and live forever right?¡± He said.

    ¡°A vampire, huh? Good choice. Vampires are actually my favourite creatures. Very noble and majestic. At least in the stories they are. Now another question. If you could quit this organization and instead join a powerful organization of assassins, would you do it? Of course you wouldn¡¯t be in a low position there.¡± I asked once more.

    ¡°An organization of assassins. Well, truth be told, since I don¡¯t want to die, I would probably join the assassin organization. I¡¯m actually better at killing people than I stealing, but the problem is that there aren¡¯t any strong assassin organizations in Fenlai, so I joined the Rogues Guild.¡± He said.

    ¡°Alright, good. That was the last question, go back. I¡¯ll now announce who was eliminated.¡± I pointed at the ones who didn¡¯t make it and told them to go join the observers. Eventually there were only three people left. One of them was Eric

    ¡°There are only three of you left. Since Eric was the one who led me here, and since his answers were highly compatible he will come with me.¡± I said, then waved at him to follow me out. Before I left I looked towards Eldric.

    ¡°Eldric, come visit my mansion sometime to talk the details of our deal with my father in law. I¡¯ll be taking Eric. He¡¯s no longer a part of your guild, but part of Coldblood, as one of our assassins. Later.¡± I said. Thus I left, with Eric following behind my heels.

    Soon we were back at the mansion. When I came inside I was met by one of the slave girls. I told her to go get two other girls and come into the room we would be in. The girl complied and went to get two other girls. Eric just wondered what I needed three slaves for. We arrived inside a room. I told Eric to sit down.

    ¡°Eric, do you remember how I asked you what kind of creature you would want to be, and you answered a vampire? Well I have good news for you, because I just happen to be a vampire.¡± I said with a smile on my face. Eric just looked at me weirdly.

    ¡°Hey, I¡¯m being serious! Look at my teeth! Not very human, are they? And how about this,¡± I said and cut a big gaping wound on my arm, which immediately started healing rapidly,

    ¡°What kind of human would heal this quickly? I¡¯m a vampire. My wives are too. Also my father in law and a few others. We are seven vampires in the world, total. You¡¯ll be number eight.¡± I said.

    ¡°Are you serious?! You¡¯re actually a vampire? When I answered that question I didn¡¯t actually expect you to be a vampire¡­ So you did all that because you need a new vampire? And there are only seven vampires? Why so few? How old are you? Do you drink blood?¡± Eric answered. First he sounded shocked and afraid for moment. But he quickly calmed down. But he was very curious as he bombarded me with questions. He probably realized that wasn¡¯t in danger, since of everything that transpired before. He also already said that he wanted to be a vampire, although he didn¡¯t think it would come true.

    ¡°Yes I need a new vampire. And I¡¯m only twenty three years old. I became a vampire four years ago, when Dread Father bestowed me this gift and made me progenitor of all vampires. Oh, and Dread Father is what I call the God of Death Gebados, since he is kind of my father. He did create the new me after all. And there are only seven of us since it¡¯s only been four years. And yes I do drink blood. That¡¯s what those three slave girls are for. But enough chit chat, I¡¯m going to make you a vampire now.¡± I said. Then quickly grabbed him and started draining him. While I was doing this the slave girls entered. They were shocked, but calmed down quickly. The slaves weren¡¯t unaware of the vampires. It was safe to let them know, since they were bound by the slave mark. When bound by the slave mark, a slave would never be able to go against its master. So naturally they would never be able to tell anyone about the vampires, even if they were tortured.

    When I was finished with Eric, I waved one of the girls over to me, so that I could drink her blood. I bit her neck and started drinking. I didn¡¯t drain her dry, but she was still dizzy and could barely stand when I was finished. I let her sit down. I looked over to the two other girls.

    ¡°I have made this man a vampire. When he awakens he will need to drain two bodies of blood. When he wakes up he will drain you two of blood completely. Serve him well.¡± I told the girls. I could see the fear in them. They started tearing up, but still bowed.

    ¡°Yes, master.¡± They said. Then they started taking of their clothes. Soon they were naked. I think they misunderstood what I meant by ¡®serve him well¡¯. But no matter. He would probably like it like this more anyway. The two beautiful slave stood beside Eric, waiting. All the slaves we had were very beautiful. Also quite expensive.

    After an hour of waiting, Eric finally woke up. He stood up and looked at the two girls. The girls bowed to him and said,

    ¡°Please have your way with us and drink all of our blood master.¡± As they said this tears again flowed out of their eyes. They really didn¡¯t want to die. But they couldn¡¯t disobey. It wasn¡¯t possible. The slave mark made it so that they wouldn¡¯t hesitate to die for their masters. They would fulfil any of their wishes or desires, without regret. They might not want to die, but they wouldn¡¯t regret it.

    ¡°Since you ask so nicely, I will do as you say.¡± Eric said. He grabbed the girl¡¯s breasts and started licking her neck. He took out his cock, and put it into the girl¡¯s already wet pussy, before biting into her neck.

    ¡°Thank you for allowing me one last pleasure before death master.¡± The girl said, as a smile appeared on her face. The slave mark made it so that the slaves would love sex. This way they could reward the slave with sex, instead of other things. It was more cost effective, and also gave pleasure to the master. Sex was the best reward a slave could want. This was common knowledge, so Eric fucked her knowing that it would give her some pleasure in death. He could be a nice guy sometimes. It wasn¡¯t that he was horny or anything. Not at all¡­

    The slave girl was moaning as she was being fucked and drained for blood. The bite of a vampire wasn¡¯t painful thing, in fact it brought pleasure, so combining it with sex was like heaven. But I didn¡¯t know this. But I sure did notice since the girl looked like she was in complete ecstasy.

    ¡°Hey slave girl. Does the bite of a vampire feel pleasurable?¡± I asked. The girl just kept moaning but managed to get a few words out.

    ¡°It¡¯s heaven!¡± She said.

    ¡°Your bite does indeed feel very pleasurable master. It¡¯s almost better than sex. Although we don¡¯t have the same attachment to it, since the slave mark doesn¡¯t affect it.¡± The girl I bit before said in a weak voice. I looked towards her.

    ¡°You never looked pleasurable before when I drank from you.¡± I said. Eric was finished with one of the girls now, and went to get the other one, who almost looked excited now. She wanted to know what it felt like to get bitten and have sex at the same time, even though she would die. She didn¡¯t want to die, she didn¡¯t have a choice, so she might as well enjoy her last moments.

    ¡°We thought you might get angry if we show pleasure and punish us.¡± The slave girl said, answering my question.

    ¡°So you were afraid? I don¡¯t mind you showing your pleasure. It makes it more pleasurable for us too. Go tell the other slaves that it¡¯s okay, after you recover. Oh, and what is your name? This was some good information you gave me, so I¡¯ll remember you. There¡¯s something I have been wanting to try, so come to my room later. If it works well, I might make you a vampire one day.¡± I said to the girl with a smile. She looked surprised, then a huge smile appeared on her face. She bowed deeply and said, ¡°Thank you master! My name is Alicia.¡± then left the room to inform the other slaves.

    Eric was having sex and drinking the blood of the slave girl. He didn¡¯t seem to mind that I was here. Well I didn¡¯t mind either. Even though I had a lot of information imprinted into my brain by Gebados, I still didn¡¯t know everything. This had helped me make a discovery that could make my bedtime with Amelia and Serana a bit more ¡°interesting¡±.

    I patiently sat and waited for him to finish. It didn¡¯t take long. I motioned for him to come sit.

    ¡°Enjoy yourself?¡± I asked.

    ¡°Yes, very much. I¡¯ve never had such good slaves, and I never knew blood was so tasty! And this feeling is amazing! I feel that my strength has improved. I¡¯m at the middle stage now, but I feel like I could take someone much stronger than that. Maybe even someone at the Peak of rank C. My senses have improved as well, and my vision has gotten clearer. Now I¡¯ll be able to hear the guards coming from several rooms away and see perfectly in the dark, when I¡¯m sneaking around. This will make being an assassin so much easier. It¡¯s like my body was made to be an assassin.¡± Eric said.

    ¡°It was. When I make a vampire I can control their power. I made it so that you¡¯re perfect for stealth. You have a high affinity for darkness magic now too. I¡¯ll introduce you to my friend Kato later. He¡¯s the third vampire I created, and he¡¯s based on magic. He¡¯s on the verge of becoming a Warlock. Your senses are also among the best of vampires, only inferior to me. Your talent with knives and archery has increased as well. You¡¯ll find yourself mastering your weapons even quicker. That combined with eternal life will make you one of the greatest masters this world has ever seen.¡± I said.

    ¡°What? It even increases my natural talent? And I can do darkness magic now? I always wanted to try it, but I just didn¡¯t have the talent for it.¡± Eric said. His eyes were beaming. He was very excited.

    ¡°Many things improve upon becoming a vampire. I¡¯ll explain a few things to you now, so listen well. If you ever feed on someone outside the mansion, then make sure to eliminate all evidence. Our existence must not be discovered. And sunlight is a bit unhealthy for us. It¡¯s not fatal, but it¡¯s very uncomfortable, and extended exposure seems to weaken us temporarily, so we tend to stay clear of the sun. As you know, we also need blood. If you don¡¯t drink blood you¡¯ll weaken, and eventually you¡¯ll start shrivelling up. You won¡¯t die though, just be pitifully weak. Like an old human or something. You¡¯ll also look extremely old. I¡¯ve never seen it myself though.¡± I explained to him the details of his new condition. When I was done we left the room. The other ones hadn¡¯t returned yet, but I had already made a new vampire. I wonder what they would think about that. Well, if they¡¯re good enough, we could hire them to work for us as assassins, in our new assassin organization. But that wouldn¡¯t for a few years still. I could have Eric give them some of his blood, then he can oversee them. Sounds like a good idea.

    ¡°Eric, soon my friends will return. They also went out to get some new vampire candidates, but I already turned you. If they¡¯re good enough I¡¯ll just have them work under you. You just need to give them some of your blood, then they¡¯ll be loyal to you. It will make them slightly stronger and temporarily stop them from aging. It will also form a bond between you, like the one you and I share, so they will always follow your orders. Then in around four years, when our headquarters are finished, our assassin organization will begin business and you will be our first assassins, together with the ones that are being sent to us from the main branch.¡± I told him. He looked a bit surprised. Oh right, I haven¡¯t him about the branch organization yet.

    ¡°Right, have you ever heard of the Shadowblade Organization? They¡¯re one of the strongest assassin organization in the human world. Their leader is an old friend of my father in law. He was at my wedding yesterday. He offered me to become the leader of the Fenlai Branch, so I accepted. In four years the construction of our castle will be finished. That will serve as our headquarters, and we¡¯ll also move out there then. We¡¯ll also be given a few assassins to start our little organization up.¡± I told him.

    ¡°The Shadowblades? I¡¯ve heard of them before. We¡¯re really going to be a branch of them? That¡¯s amazing.¡± He said.

    I introduced him to Bogat, Serana and Amelia, then found a room for him. Then we just waited for the rest to get back. I didn¡¯t expect for them to come back today, so I went up to my room. I had told Alicia to come to my room later tonight. I wanted to try making her a ghoul. I told Amelia and Serana about my plan. They thought it was a good idea. We still hadn¡¯t tried it on a human yet, after all. Later that night, Alicia knocked on the door.

    ¡°Master, I¡¯m here.¡± She said. I nodded and had her sit down next to me.

    ¡°Alicia, you know that we are vampires, right?¡± I asked.

    ¡°Yes master.¡± Alicia replied.

    ¡°Then you know that we need to drink you blood. But did you know you can also drink out blood? If you drink my blood you will get stronger and faster, have better senses and so on. Much like when a human gets made into a vampire, just a bit weaker. There will also from a blood bond between us as master and servant. It will make you follow all my orders, not that it makes a difference since you have the slave mark. And lastly, it will make you stop aging, as long as you regularly drink my blood. I am going to give you some of my blood now. Are you ready?¡± I said. She was surprised, then excited. With this her status would improve and she would be above all the other slaves. She eagerly nodded.

    I cut my wrist with my finger and let the blood flow. Then I had her drink it. After she drank a few mouthfuls the wound closed. I looked her in the eyes.

    ¡°How do you feel?¡± I asked her.

    ¡°I can feel a warm current going through my body. I can feel that my senses and vision are improving by the minute. It feels so good. And the blood tasted so good! I¡¯ve never had anything like it.¡± She said. Her eyes were beaming.

    ¡°Good. From now on you¡¯re going to drink my blood regularly. I want to see what effect drinking my blood will have for an extended period of time. When I feel satisfied I will reward and turn you into a vampire. If it turns out that it is dangerous to drink vampire blood for too long, then I will turn you into a vampire before you die, saving your life, so you¡¯re not in danger. When you feel that all the effects of the blood are gone, report to me. I want to know how long it lasts. After that you will drink my blood once a week. Every month we will extend the waiting period a bit, to see if there are any differences. Alright?¡± I said

    ¡°Yes master! I won¡¯t disappoint you!¡± She said and bowed.

    ¡°Good. Then as a reward, you¡¯ll no longer be just a slave, but my personal assistant. Now, let me have a bit of your blood.¡± I said, then drank some of her blood, to make up for the blood she drank.

    The next day they finally returned. They arrived with three candidates, but when they saw that I had already made a new vampire, they were a tad surprised.

    ¡°Guys, this is Eric. I¡¯m sorry that I turned him before you returned. I kind of forgot. But no matter, I like him, so I doubt I¡¯d make anyone else.¡± I said. The three candidates looked confused. They had no idea what I meant.

    ¡°It¡¯s fine. What should we do with these guys then? Just send them on their way?¡± Kato asked. I looked at the candidates and asked them a few questions.

    ¡°I think we¡¯ll employ them and put them under Eric¡¯s control. They¡¯ll be the first human assassins in our organization. Alright you three, let me start the introductions. My name is Isaac Coldblood, and I¡¯m the leader here. Now don¡¯t be too shocked and afraid, but we¡¯re vampires, and you were gathered here along with Eric here so that we could make one of you a vampire. But Eric already got that spot.¡± I told them. The three candidates were visibly afraid when I told them we were vampires, but they were also a bit sceptic.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, didn¡¯t I already say that you will work for us? Naturally we won¡¯t hurt you. As a welcome gift I will have Eric give you some of his blood to drink. This will make you a bit stronger and you will stop aging for a while. If you keep drinking his blood regularly you won¡¯t age, and will keep your new strength, but you also be bound to Eric by a blood bond. You will never be able to refuse his orders. And this is not an offer. If you don¡¯t drink it, we¡¯ll kill you, since you already know too much.¡± I told them. They seemed to believe me now, and they were also very afraid, but they managed to calm down after realizing that they weren¡¯t in any danger.

    I told Eric to give them some blood. He cut a slit in his wrist and started feeding them a bit of blood each. Soon all three of them had become the first human ghouls. I had some of the servants find a room for them. Then we gathered in another room. We spent a few hours talking and drinking, getting to know Eric, the newest addition to our family. He fit right into our group with his sinister mind. Originally Lilia and Aylard had been pretty good people, but being betrayed and also being around us had corrupted them. They were now just as sinister as the rest of us. Being made a vampire also helped at that. After all, vampires are evil creatures, made by an evil God. Some vampires will have their mind changed immediately after being made, while others change over time, but it¡¯s very rare for a vampire to keep their good nature. Not completely impossible though.

    The next day I had Kato teach Eric the basics of darkness magic. I also tried sparring with him a bit, to test his skills. He was very good with his daggers, but he could never manage to touch ne. The difference was just too big. Thus four years passed peacefully. In these four years everyone had improved. Everyone had managed to become a B rank vampire, and I myself had gotten to the middle stage. Only the middle stage. After getting into the B rank the strength gains had slowed down marginally. It took four years to go from early B to middle B. It would take even longer to get to late and peak. Probably a few decades. But since I was at the middle B stage I could now fight against middle A rankers, so I was among the stronger people in the human world. At least in the kingdom of Kalderon I should be one of the strongest. As far as I know, there should be only one late stage A ranker in Kalderon. In the Fenlai Prefecture I was naturally the strongest now.

    Both Amelia and I had become Elementary mages a few years ago too, and Kato had naturally made it to the Warlock stage. But he was still at the peak of rank C. Since he was more Mage oriented, his physical power increased a bit slower. But it wasn¡¯t only our power that had improved. Our bedtime had too. After finding out that the bite of a vampire was very comfortable, Amelia, Serana and I had started biting while having sex. It really did feel good. And since we would heal right away, we wouldn¡¯t need to worry about biting too much. It was very weird, since it didn¡¯t hurt at all. You only felt pleasure when the teeth sunk in.

    But most importantly, now that four years had passed, our castle was finally finished. We had never been there before, or seen it while it was being constructed. Except for Bogat. He had made a few trips over there to oversee the project.

    We were currently preparing to move out of the city. It would be quite the long journey, since we couldn¡¯t just rush over there. We had a lot of things to bring with us, like the slaves and guards. We couldn¡¯t fit all of these things on the Night Wolves, so we had to travel in a caravan. And there were eight of us, so fitting all of us on the Night Wolves would have been a challenge.

    We started our journey. We were travelling by night. If it had been any other caravan it would have been very weird, but all the guards and slaves knew that we were vampires. In the beginning they had feared us, but now they respected and revered us. Even though they couldn¡¯t possibly betray us, I don¡¯t think they would, even if they could.

    These four years my experiment with Alicia had shown results as well. After extended periods of drinking my blood her appearance had changed. Her eyes had become red, like that of a vampires, just lighter. Her skin had gotten paler and smoother, and her bust size had increased by a bit. I wasn¡¯t sure if this was the effect of growing older or not, but it shouldn¡¯t be. After all she was drinking my blood so she shouldn¡¯t be aging, but it might be that it didn¡¯t hinder development of her body. After all she had only been sixteen years old when we started the experiments, so she had still been at the age of developing.

    These years I had only drunk blood from her. Her drinking my blood seemed to increase the quality of her blood. It was the best I had ever tasted. Of course I was the only one allowed to drink from her. I made it clear that if anyone else drank from her, then I would punish them. I said that I would put them in confinement until we left for the castle and not let them drink any blood until then. Of course no one violated that rule. My blood had also continued to increase her strengths these years. Now she was an E rank fighter. When she began drinking she had just barely been an F rank, so it seemed drinking vampire blood had a continuous effect. I was probably going to make her into a vampire soon. Maybe one more year. I would miss drinking her blood though. It¡¯s not like we can¡¯t drink vampire blood though, but it¡¯s not as good as living blood, and it doesn¡¯t supply itself. If I drink blood from a vampire, that vampire will need to go feed because of the blood loss. He will also be weakened.

    After being on the road for a few weeks, then of the road into a forest and up some mountains and through some valleys, we finally arrived.

    The place was really hidden from society. It took months to get the caravan there. But it was worth it. Everyone was awestricken. Both we and the slaves. Only Bogat held his composure, since he had seen it before. Before us was a huge castle, built up against a mountain. The stone it was built from was dark and moody. There were numerous sharp towers piercing the skies. The lights coming out of the windows made it stand out in the dark. It really was very big. We had spent a fortune on building it. The number could even make the Lord Commander pale. But we had spent four years collecting it. The money that we gather first was only to start construction. We had continued to pour large amounts of money into it all these years. Outside the castle were hundreds of men and women. They were the construction workers and their families. There were also numerous houses outside the castle and farms and even cattle. We had built the farms to make it easier to feed them, since moving all the food here was way too much work.

    Therefore this place could also double as a village. There were around eight hundred to a thousand people here. We had sent a messenger ahead of us before to gather everyone together to meet us. Everyone was excited to finally meet the one they worked for. They had all met Bogat before, but they knew that he wasn¡¯t the boss, only the second in command or something. I walked a few steps forward, so that everyone could see me.

    ¡°My name is Isaac Coldblood, and I am the lord of this place. Everyone, you have done a wonderful job constructing this castle of mine. I¡¯m am very satisfied. But I have something to tell you.¡± I said. My voice thundered through the surroundings. Everyone could hear me, and it was quite the sight. All the workers were even more excited.

    ¡°No one will be allowed to leave this place.¡± I continued. There was a moment of silence, then uproar. They had expected to be allowed home after they were finished, but now they were told they would not be allowed? Of course they were angry.

    ¡°Silence!¡± I shouted. My voice boomed. It was even louder than before. Some people even fell to their knees, and some bled through their ears.

    ¡°As I said, you will not be allowed to leave this place. But don¡¯t worry, it¡¯s not like I¡¯ll kill you. You will make a village outside the castle. You will work and live here just like in your previous villages. The only difference is that you will be isolated from society. If you try to escape, then you will be executed. Just trying to escape is foolish. After all, if you go a few kilometres into the forest, then you¡¯ll meet monsters. It¡¯s only safe in a few kilometres radius around here, so escape is impossible. If you really want to leave to do something, then we will have a few caravans leaving the place every year. But the price for joining it is to be branded with the slave mark. But you won¡¯t necessarily live as a slave. It¡¯s just to make sure you don¡¯t tell anyone about this place, and that you don¡¯t try to escape. That¡¯s all.¡± I said. Everyone was silent. They didn¡¯t dare make an uproar again. They had realized that the man in front of them was immeasurably powerful. He could easily kill all of them if he wanted. They were just glad that they were allowed to live. It was clear that this place was a secret, so just him allowing them to live there could be considered merciful. Most of the people decided to accept that they would live there from now on.

    After that, the workers all went to their own homes to sleep. In truth staying there wasn¡¯t too bad. After all they had already stayed there for over four years. They had all lived in faraway villages before, so they didn¡¯t see outsiders often anyway.

    Isaac and his group walked over to the castle entrance, followed by a caravan of slaves, guards who also were slave and wagons. The wagons were parked outside, and everyone went inside. They came into a big hall with a big staircase and a few doors. Bogat told one of the workers to show the slaves to the servant¡¯s area, and another one to show the guards to the barracks. Then he showed everyone to their rooms.

    First they went to the room where Aylard would sleep. His room was big. There was a queen size bed in there, a desk, wardrobe, and other things decorating it. Next they went to where Kato and Lilia would live. A few years ago they started sleeping together. Their room looked very similar to Aylard¡¯s. Next was Eric. His also looked similar to the other rooms. Next it was mine, Amelia and Serana¡¯s room. Ours was bigger and also had a bigger bed. There was also a piano inside there. And a few easels. These four years I had gotten quite attached to art, and had painted many paintings, and even sculpted too, but I never had come to playing any instruments. There were also various bookshelves that contained all kinds of books. I also spent a bit of time reading. Amelia and Serana also liked reading and painting, so this room was very good for us. I thanked Bogat for leading us here, then we headed inside.

    When the door closed, I grabbed both my girls and kissed them in their mouths at the same time. Our tongues were tangling together inside our mouths, going out of one mouth, into the other. I grabbed the backs of their shirts and directly tore them off. Their breasts, still covered by their bras, dangled in front of me. Next I grabbed their skirts and tore them off. These clothes would be usable again. Now they were only in their underwear. While I started taking off my clothes, they also took off their underwear. I felt my thing rise when I saw their perfectly shaped breasts. I walked towards Amelia and grabbed her. I threw her on the bed, then jumped at her. I showed my cock right inside her, then bit into her neck. Amelia returned the bite and started sucking my blood. I sucked her blood, while she sucked mine, forming a cycle. This way we wouldn¡¯t lose any blood, but our hunger wouldn¡¯t be satisfied either.

    Serana happily walked over to us and lied beside Amelia and started playing with her breasts. She then bit into her boob and started sucking her blood. When her mouth was full, she kissed Amelia in the mouth and fed her her own blood. Serana started licking Amelia all over with her bloodied mouth, causing blood stains to appear on her body. Then she lied on top of Amelia, her breasts pressing down against hers. She looked up, into my eyes.

    ¡°Please do me to!¡± She said in an innocent voice. She pressed her but up, showing me her pussy that looked like it belonged to a teenager, even though she was twenty three years old. Not that I looked any older than her. I looked like an eighteen or nineteen year old, even though I was twenty seven. I pulled out of Amelia and thrusted inside Serana, who let out a pleasurable moan. Both Amelia and I bit into her, slowly sucking her blood. I kept fucking her and sucking her blood for a while until it was time to stop drinking from her.

    ¡°Isaac, you really drank a lot from me there. I¡¯m getting quite thirsty. Can¡¯t you let us have a taste of Alicia, just once? You never let us drink from her, but always brag about how tasty she is. Please?¡± Serana begged. She was looking at me with puppy eyes.

    ¡°Oh, fine. Only this once. And only if you let her join in on the fun. We¡¯ve never had a foursome before.¡± I said.

    ¡°Alright, but you want to have sex with her too? Are you going to marry her as well?¡± Serana asked.

    ¡°No no, I¡¯m not going to marry her. Not yet at least. But what do you think about taking her as a concubine? She¡¯s been working hard for me these years, so I think she deserves a reward. She idolizes me, so making her our concubine would be a good reward.¡± I said.

    ¡°Take her as a concubine? Sure, why not? Then we can have her join us in the bedroom a few times a week.¡± Amelia said.

    ¡°Okay, let¡¯s do it.¡± Serana said. I looked at them with a smile.

    ¡°It¡¯s settled then. Wait here, I¡¯ll go make a guard go get her.¡± I said, then walked out of the room, still naked. I looked around for a guard and found one quickly. He was surprised to see me naked.

    ¡°Hey you, you know who Alicia is, right? You know, my personal assistant. Go and bring her to my chambers.¡± I ordered him. The guard saluted, then went on his way. I returned to my room. I grabbed Serana and pulled her up on her knees. I showed my cock into her pussy and started humping her. Amelia kneeled in front of her face and made her lick her cunt. She was holding Serana¡¯s head as she went down on her.

    Soon a knock resounded from the door. ¡°Come in.¡± I said. The door opened and Alicia came in. When she saw what we were doing her face reddened, but she didn¡¯t say anything.

    ¡°Alicia, we¡¯ve decided to make you concubine.¡± I said, as I stopped fucking Serana. Alicia¡¯s eyes widened, and a smile appeared on her face.

    ¡°Concubine?! I get to be your concubine? Really?! Is it true? This is like a dream come true! I love you Master Isaac!¡± she said and ran up to us.

    ¡°Good. Now take of your clothes. You¡¯re going to have sex with us tonight.¡± She hurriedly nodded, and took off her clothes. Soon she too was naked. I grabbed her by the shoulders, kissed her, then threw her on bed beneath me. She was already pouring down there, so I put my cock into her right away. I pulled it out again, then pushed it back inside a few times.

    ¡°Alicia, we¡¯re going to suck you blood. Make sure to tell us when to stop. Don¡¯t be foolish, and tell us before we take too much.¡± I said. Her eyes beamed.

    ¡°Yes Master! Don¡¯t worry, just drink to your hearts content. I won¡¯t let you drink until I die.¡± She said. She was really excited. Three vampires were going to bite her at the same time, while the man she loved and admired the most would fuck her. She had had sex before with some of the guards, and the higher ups that rewarded her. She used to be rewarded a lot before since she was very beautiful, but since she became Isaac¡¯s personal assistant she had only had sex the guards from time to time. But now she was Isaacs and his wives concubine. Isaac had the biggest cock she had ever seen, and all three of them were vampires, so they could bite her. This was definitely going to be the best experience in her life yet.

    Isaac started fucking her, and bit into her. Amelia and Serana also digged in. Serana bit into the other side of her neck, while Amelia bit into her abdomen. Alicia was being bitten by three vampires, and had a huge throbbing cock inside of her. She couldn¡¯t hold it back and started screaming in ecstasy. She had truly never felt so good before as that huge penis was going in and out of her pussy, and her blood slowly flowed out of her, into the mouth of the vampires. She wrapped her legs around Isaac and pulled his entire cock inside her. She started to feel dizzy as her blood was being drained.

    ¡°Master, Mistresses, you need to stop drinking now. I¡¯m going to faint soon, but please don¡¯t stop fucking me until I do.¡± She said with a weak voice. She no longer had the energy to scream, but she kept moaning. We stopped drinking from her. Instead I started fucking her even harder. Amelia and Serana were groping her breasts and playing with her body. She was constantly having orgasms. Soon after, she finally fainted. But I didn¡¯t stop. I kept fucking her unconscious body. She was still smiling in pleasure. After another while, I finally came inside her. Satisfied, I pulled out. Then I turned to Serana.

    ¡°Now it¡¯s your turn. Get back on your knees.¡± I said with a smile. Serana smiled and kissed me. Then she got on her fours again, ready to be fucked like a dog. I got behind her and started humping her. After a while of pleasure, I finally came inside her. Then it was Amelia¡¯s turn.

    ¡°I¡¯m a bit tired now Amelia, so you can just ride me.¡± I said then got on my back. Amelia happily placed my cock in her pussy then sat down on me. She started going up and down on me, moaning. I started fondling her perfectly sized breasts. They were neither too small, nor too big. They were perfect. As she was riding me, she orgasmed a few times, until finally my white liquid flowed inside her. We then went to sleep.

    The three girls lied beside me. Not one of them had bothered cleaning themselves. They had blood stains on them, and some of the semen was flowing out of their vaginas.

    The next morning I woke up to Alicia looking around confused, in my arms. But then it seemed like she remembered.

    ¡°Oh right. I became your concubine and we all had sex. Then I fainted. It felt so good.¡± She said. Then she looked at her body. She noticed that a cum stain was on her vagina.

    ¡°You came inside me? Am I going to get pregnant with your baby?¡± She asked excitedly.

    ¡°No, I need to use a spell to make you pregnant. We vampires can only reproduce with the use of a spell.¡± I told her. She looked a bit disappointed.

    ¡°Oh, okay. But I¡¯m your concubine now, so I don¡¯t mind if you impregnate me.¡± She said, seriously. I just smiled at her.

    ¡°Maybe later, in a few decades. Or centuries. I don¡¯t know when I want to have children.¡± I said. Alicia was visibly disappointed. Seemed like she wanted to have my baby.

    ¡°Alicia you¡¯re my concubine now, so you¡¯re not a slave anymore. You¡¯ll be given your own room and new clothes. You¡¯ll only sleep with us when you¡¯re summoned. On those nights, we¡¯ll be having sex of course. It¡¯ll probably be a few times a week.¡± I told her. Now she was excited again. She was going to get have sex with him a few times a week? This was more than she had hoped for.

    End of chapter 12.

 Chapter 13: Family

    Here''s chapter 13. And don''t worry it''s not short Ms. LeafyEyes! Not as long as the last on though.... And as you can perhaps see from the title, this is chapter that many people have been wanting! And I enabled donations. I hope this will make things easier for me :P Please donate if you want to and can afford it :)

    Enjoy!

    Chapter 13: Family

    The next day everyone gathered in our new meeting room. The meeting room was a large room with a long table, surrounded by chairs. I sat at the end of the table, while the rest of the vampires sat around it. Behind me was Alicia. She didn¡¯t get a seat. Normally she wouldn¡¯t be at our conferences, but I wanted to tell everyone about her new status.

    ¡°Did everyone have a good rest? Well, the castle has finally been finished. Now we won¡¯t have to worry about the city guard anymore. But I speculate that our Coldblood family will become a bit mysterious now. No all of a sudden disappear from the city, and now no one will know where our base is. Anyways, as you know we will be the Coldblood branch of the Shadowblade Assassin Organization. Valen Shadowblade told me that he would send a few assassins to start us up, but the promised time isn¡¯t until another year.

    You remember Alicia right? The girl standing behind me. Four years ago I started experimenting with my blood on her, to see the effects and limits of a ghoul. The results are that giving her blood every week is best at first, then later every three to four weeks is enough. Even though she shouldn¡¯t be aging it seems that her body has developed anyways. She was sixteen when the experiments started, but she seems to have matured to an eighteen year old. It¡¯s most likely that even if you¡¯re fed vampire blood you still age to certain point. This might also be the same for vampire children. I doubt that a newborn vampire will never age.

    One more thing about Alicia, is that I took as a concubine. She is no longer a slave and is to be given new better clothes.

    Now, the next goal on out agenda. Some of you might know that I have a family. Another family than you guys. Their still human and live on a farm. The place where I grew up. I am going to get them. I have two parents and two siblings. I have decided to take Amelia, Serana and Kato with me. The rest of you will stay here. Any questions?¡± I said. Everyone was silent as they listened to my speech.

    ¡°It¡¯s been around eight years since you left your family now, right? They have probably got families of their own now. Are you going to take them with you too?¡± Bogat asked.

    ¡°Yes, I suppose so. I¡¯m don¡¯t want to separate them from their families, so I will take them with me too I guess. I just don¡¯t hope that they will choose to stay back. It won¡¯t be fun to take them against their will.¡± I said.

    ¡°There is one more thing. A few years ago I told you that you were to make your own vampires when the castle is finished. While I¡¯m gone, that will be your task. Go choose someone from the village that you like, and make them into vampires. Only one per person.¡± I said. With that the meeting was over. Immediately after we prepared to leave. We rode the Night Wolves. Even though it took a few months to get here on the caravan it wouldn¡¯t take nearly as much time when we travelled alone. If we were to go on foot it would be even quicker since we had gotten faster that the Night wolves. Except for Kato. But even though Kato wasn¡¯t as physically strong as fast as we, he was still the most dangerous vampire under me, because of magic.

    We travelled for a few weeks until we arrived close to the forest where I was reborn. We stopped for a while, and I told Kato and Serana about the place. We also visited the desolate village ruins. There were burned buildings all around and even some old dried bloodstains. It was not a place for people light of heart. After reminiscing for a while, we continued. We weren¡¯t far away now, so we took it nice and easy. After a few hours we appeared at the outskirts of the farm. We had the wolves wait a distance away. I didn¡¯t want to scare them. I could see my father and brother working in the distance. They were accompanied by a young boy. Around six or seven years old. It seemed like my brother had finally gotten himself a family.

    We started walking towards the house. Inside the house I saw the back of a woman. It was my mother. She had aged a bit, but I still knew the moment I saw her. She was making food. She hadn¡¯t noticed me, but there was another woman there. She seemed to be in her late twenties. She looked at us confused. We were wearing expensive clothes, so it was clear to her that we were rich.

    ¡°Who are you my lords?¡± The woman asked. My mother heard her and turned around to see who was there. She was surprised, since she hadn¡¯t heard anyone enter the house. The moment she saw me she froze.

    ¡°Hello mother. I¡¯m back.¡± I said. At that moment, my mother fell to her knees. The woman was also surprised and confused.

    ¡°I-I-I-Isaac? Is that you? Is that you?! Is it really you?!¡± She asked. Tears were swelling up in her eyes. I looked at her apathetically.

    ¡°It¡¯s me. I¡¯m finally back, after almost ten years. I¡¯m alive and well.¡± I said. I walked over to her and helped her sit on a chair. The young woman was just staring at me confused. And around twenty years old man had come, and he was her mother in law¡¯s son? This was very weird to her. And he had been gone for ten years? Then he would have been only ten when he left.

    ¡°Isaac, is it really you? How come you still look the same? You haven¡¯t changed a single bit. You look just like that day you disappeared. How is that possible?¡± She asked.

    ¡°It¡¯s simple. I just don¡¯t age anymore. I became a vampire you see. And I have come back to make all of you into vampires as well and bring you to my castle.¡± I told her. Mother had a look of understanding. She wasn¡¯t scared and didn¡¯t doubt me. She also didn¡¯t think it was possible for me to a fake. A mother¡¯s intuition I guess. But it was different for the young woman. She started shaking. She didn¡¯t quite believe that I was a vampire. She thought that I was a madman and was going to kill them all. She started running, but before she could get away I looked her in the eyes.

    ¡°Come here.¡± I said. She stopped in her tracks and walked to me and sat down on a chair next to me. Mother looked at me in amazement, and the woman also looked at me in amazement. She had no idea why she had done as I said.

    ¡°You don¡¯t need to be afraid. I won¡¯t hurt you. I am only going to make you a vampire and give you eternal life. Now tell me mother, who is this woman?¡± I asked. The woman seemed to believe me now. It was common knowledge that humans couldn¡¯t do hypnosis like that. They had to use special tools. Just looking in the eyes wasn¡¯t enough. Only extremely rare and powerful beings could do this. Like the ones made by the Gods. The girl stood up. She had heard about Isaac disappearing almost ten years ago, but hadn¡¯t thought about him before, since he would be only one year younger than herself. Even though his mother said Isaac all the time, it just went through her head.

    ¡°Brother in law, I am the wife of your brother, Marcus. My name is Felicia. We married about seven years ago and have a son and a daughter together.¡± She said and bowed. Then mother spoke up.

    ¡°Who are these people dear?¡± She asked. I looked at my companions with a smile.

    ¡°Those two girls are my wives, and the man over there is like my brother I guess. They¡¯re all vampires that I made, so they are a bit older than they look.¡± I said. The two women looked at them in astonishment. Those ridiculously beautiful ladies were his wives? He had two wives?

    ¡°Oh my, you have done very well for yourself. What about the one who made you into a vampire? Is he around?¡± Mother asked.

    ¡°Him? I was made into a vampire by my Dread Father as I call him. It¡¯s the God of Death, Gebados.¡± I told them. Once again their eyes widened.

    ¡°I am the first vampire you see. There are only a handful of vampire in existence, and they were all made by me. But where¡¯s sister? I don¡¯t see her around. I saw father and brother as well as a little boy outside though.¡± I said. At this moment my mother¡¯s and Felicia¡¯s eyes darkened. Something was wrong.

    ¡°Isaac, not so long ago the Lord Commander came by here. They didn¡¯t stop for long. In fact they hadn¡¯t intended to stop at all, but the Lord Commander saw your sister. She has grown into a very beautiful girl, so he was interested in her. So he took her with him. As a concubine I think. We couldn¡¯t do anything about it.¡± Mother said. A flash of anger appeared in my eyes, but I quickly calmed down. It was only the Lord Commander. I should be able to get her back.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll take her back.¡± I said calmly. When they heard fear appeared in them.

    ¡°No! Isaac you mustn¡¯t anger the Lord Commander! He¡¯ll execute you!¡± Mother said. When she said that I couldn¡¯t hold back my laughter.

    ¡°Hahahaha! He¡¯ll execute me? Mother you don¡¯t know this, but I¡¯m the strongest person in the Fenlai Prefecture. And I also have much more influence in the Kalderon Kingdom than that silly Lord Commander. It wouldn¡¯t be impossible for me to have him abdicated. I just have to tell him who I am, then I¡¯m sure he¡¯ll give me my sister. Now, Felicia go get my father and brother. And also bring those kids of yours. We¡¯re leaving this place.¡± I said. The fear in the two women seemed to calm down, and Felicia nodded, then ran out. A moment later I heard voices outside.

    ¡°What is that is so important that we have to come running here?¡±

    Two men walked inside, behind them was Felicia, holding a sleepy toddler, and a little boy. The moment that the two men saw who was sitting in front of them they froze. The younger one of the men slowly walked up to me. He examined my face then after a moment,

    ¡°Brother! It¡¯s really you Isaac! What the hell happened to you?! Who have been gone for almost a decade, then you just come back, not even changed a little bit?! You look exactly like you did when you disappeared, except for those fancy clothes?!¡± He shouted in my face.

    ¡°Relax Marcus. You see, the thing is, I am not a human anymore so I had to leave for a while.¡± I said.

    ¡°Not a human? What the hell are you talking about?¡± He asked. At this moment mother stepped in.

    ¡°He¡¯s a vampire. Like the one from the legends. He¡¯s immortal, that¡¯s why he doesn¡¯t age. It¡¯s true, I saw him hypnotize Felicia with but a look from his eyes!¡± She said. Marcus looked a bit sceptic, but father had finally unfrozen.

    ¡°Well, that does explain it.¡± Father said.

    ¡°Well, it¡¯s the truth, whether you like it or not, and you¡¯re going to become vampires too, whether you like it or not.¡± I said, my voice slightly cold, making the mortals present shiver.

    ¡°We¡¯re leaving for my castle immediately. When we¡¯re there, I¡¯ll make you into vampires.¡± I said.

    ¡°Your castle? You have a castle?¡± Marcus asked.

    ¡°Yes. Its construction just finished recently. It¡¯s quite marvelous, and it cost a huge sum of gold.¡± I said, as I left the house. Soon after Iluvatar and Bane arrived before us. They caused quite a bit of fear in my family, but I managed to calm them down. We managed to fit all of us on the wolves, then we left. We didn¡¯t travel too quickly, because if we did, then it would be dangerous for my family.

    While we were travelling I told them a bit about the other vampires, and our organization.

    ¡°Back when I married Amelia and Serana, four years ago, I changed my name to Isaac Coldblood. You are also going to have that name. In fact all of my vampires have that name, except for Lilia. She is Kato¡¯s girlfriend. She wants to wait until they get married to share the name. But anyways, I became the heir of the Coldblood family, but in reality I¡¯m already the leader. We¡¯re also joining an organization of assassins called the Shadowblades. I¡¯m going to be the leader of the Fenlai branch.¡± I told them.

    ¡°Assassins? Isn¡¯t that a bit bad? Won¡¯t you have to kill people and stuff?¡± Marcus asked. He was a bit na?ve.

    ¡°I have already kill countless people. I was the one that exterminated that village back when I disappeared. I also killed the squadron that was sent to deal with it. I also exterminated an entire family that had killed Serana¡¯s mother. All of us are cold killers. It¡¯s very fitting to our name. And when I turn you, you will have to kill two innocent slaves as well. You will have to regularly drink blood.¡± I told him. Marcus seemed a bit abhorred.

    ¡°What? I won¡¯t kill anyone! And why would you kill so many innocent people?! You used to be so kind.¡± He said. I looked at him with a fierce look.

    ¡°Trust me, you will kill people. You won¡¯t be able to stop yourself. And much like you have to drain two people dry of their blood, I had to drain an entire village. I lost control of myself and killed almost everyone there. The only survivor is Amelia. And Amelia loves me, so you have no right to be angry at me for that.¡± I said. He had angered me a little bit. My parents looked a bit shocked.

    ¡°Will we really have to kill people?¡± Marcus asked again.

    ¡°Yes.¡± I said. Marcus hesitated a bit, then said,

    ¡°Then I won¡¯t come with you. Please let me off here.¡± I looked at him disappointed.

    ¡°No. This isn¡¯t a choice I am giving you. I am going to make you into vampires, and you don¡¯t have a say in it.¡± I said calmly. This was exactly what I had feared.

    ¡°What?! You can¡¯t force us! I won¡¯t let you make my family kill anyone! You¡¯re sick! And that wench of yours is just as sick!¡± He yelled at me. Suddenly the wolves stopped and I got off of them. I grabbed Marcus by the shoulder and threw him off. Then I walked over to him, placed my foot on his shoulder. I started pressing down, until his shoulder shattered into pieces. He let out a horrifying scream. Then I took out my sword and swiped at his legs. The legs flew off. Felicia screamed as she saw it.

    ¡°If you want your legs and arm back, then you have to become a vampire.¡± I said. Then I formed a flame in my hand and cauterized his wounds, then threw him back up on the wolf, all while he was screaming in pain. I got back on my wolf.

    ¡°I am not the same person as I was back then. If you insult my wife I won¡¯t respond kindly. I won¡¯t kill you, since you¡¯re my family, but I will beat you to an inch of death.¡± I said. Then the journey resumed. There weren¡¯t many words spoken after that event. After a few weeks, we arrived back at the castle. Everyone looked in awe as they saw the magnificent sight.

    ¡°This is your castle? It¡¯s huge!¡± Father said. I nodded in reply. When we got back in the castle I ordered for fourteen slaves to be brought. We went into a private room.

    ¡°I¡¯m going to make you into vampires now.¡± I said. The first person I grabbed was Marcus.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry Marcus. It won¡¯t hurt. And your legs will grow back as well. Vampires have an amazing recovery ability. Any decapitated limbs will grow back.¡± I said. Then I bit him in the throat. Soon after he was unconscious.

    This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon.

    ¡°Is he alright?¡± Mother asked.

    ¡°Yes, don¡¯t worry. After the bite, you¡¯ll be unconscious for an hour or so, then you wake up as a vampire.¡± I said. Then I grabbed mother. A moment later she was unconscious too. Then father. Then I walked to the little boy, who was coincidentally also called Isaac, after his uncle.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry little Isaac. It won¡¯t hurt at all, in fact it will feel really good. Then when you wake up again you will be very strong. Even stronger that your dad used to be. I think. Now give me your hand.¡± I said. The boy reluctantly gave me his hand. I proceeded to bite into his wrist. The reason I didn¡¯t wait a few years to turn him, was because it was a good experiment. I wanted to know whether or not he would grow up into an adult. When I was finished I turned to Felicia.

    ¡°Felicia, I won¡¯t make your daughter into a vampire. She is too young. I¡¯m not even sure if little Isaac will ever grow up, but I¡¯m not willing to try it on little Sara. When she grown older, you can turn her yourself.¡± I said. Then I walked up to her. Amelia took the baby from her, then I sank my teeth into her throat. A moment later fourteen slave girls entered the room.

    ¡°Good you¡¯re here. These people on the floor are the family I was born into. I have just turned them into vampires. As you know, a vampire will need a large amount of blood when born, so they are going to drain all of you of their blood. But I also spent a lot of blood essence on them, so I need two of you as well. Any volunteers?¡± I said. No girl volunteered, so I just choose two at random.

    Almost an hour later, the first vampire woke up. Weirdly enough it was little Isaac.

    ¡°So you¡¯re the first one to wake up? Alright, little Isaac, what you need to do now is choose two girls from there and drink all the blood in their bodies.¡± I said. The boy looked at me confused.

    ¡°How should I do that uncle?¡± He asked. I smiled at him. He didn¡¯t say no to do it, instead he asked how. I this this is the beauty of a child¡¯s innocence. He can¡¯t see wrong from right yet. I told one of the girls to go bring another slave girl here, then I demonstrated how to drink blood. I was still a bit thirsty anyways. I would probably go into hibernation after this. After all I just made six pureblood vampires. That would have a few consequences. But as I drank the girl¡¯s blood I could feel that the fatigue grew smaller. If I drank a lot of blood, then I would probably have a shorter hibernation period. After I showed little Isaac how to do it, he quickly choose a girl. The girl kneeled in front of him. She actually looked a bit excited. There was a cute little boy going to drink her blood. The slaves didn¡¯t fear death by feeding, since it wasn¡¯t painful, and actually very pleasurable. But they still preferred to live.

    ¡°It¡¯s alright little boy, just drink all the blood in my body.¡± The slave girl said in a cute voice. It even made me smile.

    Little Isaac also smiled a big smile, then bit into her throat. Soon she was dead. When he was finished all the girls threw themselves at him, saying things like ¡°please choose me!¡± They knew that they were going to die, so they all wanted to die by the cute little boy.

    Little Isaac choose the prettiest of the girls then drained her dry. I looked at him. I was proud.

    ¡°Good job little Isaac. I¡¯m proud of you. I¡¯m sure that if your father wasn¡¯t such a weirdo that thinks killing is bad, then he would be even more proud. Listen to me, little Isaac. Even though your father says killing is bad, it isn¡¯t true. It is fine for us vampires to kill. Just do it discreetly. Whenever you feed on someone outside the castles boundaries, always make sure to get rid of the evidence. But for now that doesn¡¯t matter, because you won¡¯t be allowed out of the castle territory until you¡¯re older, okay? And if you want to go to the village make sure to tell me or your aunts first.¡± I told him. I had decided to groom him into someone who didn¡¯t view killing as bad, just like me. I would keep him away from his father as much as possible until he sees the light. Or in this case the darkness I guess.

    ¡°I understand Uncle Isaac. Little Isaac won¡¯t run away, and little Isaac doesn¡¯t think killing is bad.¡± He said in his cute voice, while nodding.

    ¡°Good.¡± I said, while petting his head. Then I walked over to little Sara.

    ¡°The same is true for you little Sara. Killing is fine. Don¡¯t listen to your father when he says not to kill. He¡¯s just a bit confused, I¡¯m sure he will see the light one day. If anyone ever annoys you Sara, then make sure to tell, so that I can kill them for you. But you¡¯re still human, so you should go down to the village often to find friends to play with.¡± I said to her.

    ¡°Okay! Little Sara will go play in village and little Sara will tell uncle if they bully little Sara!¡± She said in an even cuter voice. The slave girls were all looking at the cute little girl and cute little boy.

    ¡°You¡¯re all going to die soon, so if you want to play with the kids go ahead.¡± I said. Then the girls rushed over to the kids. After being made into a vampire little Isaac looked even cuter. If he grew his hair he could masquerade as a girl.

    Soon after, Marcus woke up. He looked at his body. His legs had grown back and he could move his arm again. He was shocked. He had been told that he would regenerate, but it hadn¡¯t quite hit him until now.

    ¡°Marcus, you¡¯re awake. Good. Now feed on two of these girls.¡± I said, this time with a kind voice. Marcus looked annoyed.

    ¡°Like hell I will.¡± He responded. I frowned.

    ¡°Suit yourself. You¡¯ll just have to go through the hell of hunger. Sooner or later you won¡¯t even be able to stop yourself.¡± I said. Then I looked at him once more.

    ¡°Until you embrace your vampirism you won¡¯t be able to see your kids. I won¡¯t allow your naivety fall upon them. And it¡¯s too dangerous to have Sara around you when you¡¯re hungry. The hunger will make you go insane and you might accidentally kill and feed on her.¡± I told him. Marcus despaired. His kids were the most important in the world to him.

    ¡°Fine, I get that I would be too dangerous when I¡¯m hungry, I don¡¯t doubt that. Since their human, but what about when I have fed. You say that I won¡¯t be able to control myself, so when the hunger becomes too much I will probably end up feeding on someone. After that I should be sane again right? Why can¡¯t I see them then?¡± He asked. I was about to answer, but was interrupted.

    ¡°Father I¡¯m not human. I¡¯m a vampire too, only sister is human. And Uncle Isaac said that I shouldn¡¯t see you until you see the light or something.¡± Little Isaac said. Marcus looked at him, then noticed the corpses in the room.

    ¡°You already killed them? But you¡¯re just a child, how could you do that? Damn you Isaac, you made him do this!¡± He said. I glared at him with my haunting eyes, causing him to shiver in fear.

    ¡°Shut your mouth! It would be bad for him not to feed. We¡¯re vampires. It¡¯s fine for us to kill. It¡¯s the same as killing animals. It¡¯s for the food. They are animals. Slaves tell him!¡± I yelled at him. The slaves responded.

    ¡°We are here to serve as your food. We don¡¯t mind being killed by a vampires bite. It¡¯s such a pleasurable way to die.¡± The slaves said. They had been brainwashed by the slave marks, so they could barely even be called human anymore, since they didn¡¯t have free will.

    ¡°Marcus, I could use the power of our blood bond to make you drink, but I won¡¯t. I will not force you to drink. I will wait until you do it either out of free will, or insanity. I won¡¯t force you. Little Isaac did it out of free will, because he knows that there is nothing wrong with it.¡± I said. Then we waited for the next one to wake. The slave girls kept playing with the kids, while Marcus sat in silence. Soon it was my mother¡¯s turn to wake up.

    ¡°Uh, where am I? Oh, right...¡± she said, tired.

    ¡°Mother. You¡¯re now a vampire. Go choose two girls from there to feed on.¡± I said. Mother looked at me hesitantly. She didn¡¯t seem to want to.

    ¡°Do I have to Isaac?¡± She asked.

    ¡°It¡¯s better if you do it now, or you will have to face the hunger, like Marcus. It will be very painful and will take your sanity away.¡± I said. She continued to hesitate. I turned to the slave girls and picked out two.

    ¡°You two, go tell my mother that it¡¯s fine to feed on you.¡± I said. The slaves walked over to mother.

    ¡°Mistress, please don¡¯t be shy. We don¡¯t mind, it¡¯s okay. Just drink our blood. We won¡¯t get hurt. It will actually feel very good. It¡¯s a very pleasurable way to die.¡± The girls said kindly. Mother was still hesitating, but after talking with the girls for a while she finally decided to do it. While she was drinking the blood, father woke up. He was surprised to see mother.

    ¡°Sylvia, you¡¯re already drinking. Well, if she already accepted it, who am I to be choosy.¡± He said. He looked towards me.

    ¡°Father, you need to choose two girls from this group to feed on.¡± I said. Father rose, then walked to the girls. He looked at all of them, but was surprised to see all the girls smiling at him. They weren¡¯t afraid at all. He reluctantly chose two girls, then drained them dry, much to their pleasure. Now only Felicia was left. She woke up soon after.

    ¡°Felicia, you¡¯re awake. Don¡¯t do like your husband and follow your sons example instead. Little Isaac was the first to wake up, and also the quickest to feed. All the slave girls threw themselves at him. He¡¯s quite popular. The four remaining girls are all playing with him, see?¡± I said.

    ¡°Is that so? I guess I have to give a good example as a mother then.¡± She said. I then turned to the slaves.

    ¡°Do any of you volunteer to be little Isaac¡¯s mother¡¯s food?¡± I asked. The girls seemed to like the idea of being the little cuties mother¡¯s food. If they couldn¡¯t be eaten by him, then his mother would have to do. All the girls ran over to Felicia.

    ¡°It seems you¡¯re popular. Well, you¡¯re almost as beautiful as Amelia and Serana, so we can¡¯t blame them¡± I said. Felicia chose two girls, who died soon after. Now there were only two girls left, but Marcus didn¡¯t want them.

    ¡°Alright you two, it seems like you get to live. As a reward, you two will now be in charge of helping Felicia take care of the kids. Follow her orders.¡± I said. The girls were very happy. If they had such a role, they would probably be safe from now on, and they also got to play with those two cuties in the future.

    ¡°Kato, you go take Marcus with you and imprison him somewhere. His hunger will grow quickly. When he¡¯s gotten completely insane, only then can you throw a few slaves to him.¡± I said. Kato ordered and grabbed Marcus. Marcus tried to fight back, but Kato was far stronger than him, so didn¡¯t stand a chance. Then Felicia looked to me.

    ¡°Do you have to imprison him?¡± She asked.

    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s too dangerous to let him loose. Especially now, just after he was made. And he will not be allowed to meet his children until he embraces his nature. If you try and sneak them to him, then I will kill you in front of him, understand? He¡¯s a bad influence to them, and as long as he doesn¡¯t feed regularly it is too dangerous to have Sara around him. He might accidentally kill her.¡± I said. I was very serious about this matter. If she really did try to let him see them, I would kill her.

    ¡°He would never hurt them!¡± She yelled back. As a response I slapped her right across the cheek, making her fall to the floor.

    ¡°Don¡¯t raise your voice against me. And he would. The hunger will drive him insane for blood. Even his own human daughter would be a meal at that time.¡± I said. Felicia stood up again, but lowered her head.

    ¡°Fine.¡± She said. I nodded in response.

    ¡°Alright everyone, let¡¯s go meet the rest.¡± I said, and left the room. Soon everyone was gathered together.

    ¡°We¡¯re back and I have turned all of them into vampires. But my brother and sister aren¡¯t present at the moment. My brother refused to feed, so he is kept in confinement, and my sister was taken as a concubine by the Lord Commander, so I will have to go meet him in a while. I want all of you to chat for a while. As for me, I¡¯m pretty tired now, as you can probably imagine, since I just made six pureblooded vampires. I will have to meet your own vampire prot¨¦g¨¦s later. Amelia, Serana and Kato still haven¡¯t made any yet, after all. See you later (gasp). Oh and send ten or twenty slaves to my room. I¡¯m going to see if it will reduce my sleeping time¡­¡± I said, then left tiredly.

    Third person perspective.

    Sylvia was looking at her son as he left. She turned to look at Amelia.

    ¡°Hey, Amelia why is he going to sleep now?¡± She asked. Amelia looked back, then smiled. Sylvia didn¡¯t know just how much energy he had spent to make them.

    ¡°When we make vampires we have to use our blood essence. Making pureblood vampires takes a lot more blood essence than normal vampire, and he is the only one that can make them with the embrace. He just made six pureblooded vampires, so he will have to enter hibernation for a time, but he is going to drain ten to twenty slaves to see if it reduces the sleeping time.¡± Amelia kindly explained. Sylvia was shocked. Ten to twenty slaves? That was a huge number, wasn¡¯t it?

    ¡°He¡¯s going to kill all of them?¡± She asked scared.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know. He¡¯s going to kill as many as he thinks he needs, I guess.¡± Amelia answered. The group spent the rest of the evening getting to know the newcomers. And these newcomers tried not to think about the slaughter being commenced in this very castle.

    In Isaac¡¯s room there were ten corpses on the floor. Every one of these corpses were awfully pale. There wasn¡¯t a single drop of blood in them. Isaac looked at the remaining girls, who didn¡¯t look very afraid, but still had a tinge of fear on their faces.

    ¡°Thank you for the meal. Now please clean up in here. I¡¯m going to sleep.¡± He said. Isaac tucked himself in bed, while the slaves started dragging the corpses out of the room. Soon there was not a single corpse in the room. Just on slave girl entered the room again.

    ¡°Master, should I turn of the lights?¡± She asked. She waited, but never received an answer. Walking over to Isaac, she saw that he was asleep. In a very deep sleep. He didn¡¯t even breathe, there was no heartbeat. But she didn¡¯t fret. For she knew that nothing was wrong, that their Master would sometimes sleep a sleep so deep, that he wouldn¡¯t wake up for who knows how long. During the last time such a period appeared, this girl had often taken care of him, so she knew what to do. She turned off the lights, left the room, and informed the guards to guard his room, for he had entered hibernation.

    End of chapter 13

 Chapter 14: Sister Developments

    Chapter 14 is a bit late. It''s like 5:18 in the morning here. I should go sleep soon. Anyways, many thanks to RagNarok</a> for proofreading and generally helping. He gave me many great ideas. Great guy.

    Anyways enjoy!

    Chapter 14: Sister¡¯s Development

    I opened my eyes to a pitch black room. Even though it was so dark in here, I could still see clearly. One of the many gifts given to me by Dread Father. I rose up from the bed. I didn¡¯t have any clothes on, so I quickly dressed myself. How long was I asleep this time? I wondered. Dressed in a black shirt and grey pants, I opened the door. I was thirsty, but it wasn¡¯t completely uncontrollable. I quickly found myself two slaves. They were surprised to see me. I waved for them to come over. I bit into the neck of one girl. I drank her blood, until her eyes wavered, then closed. I let her fall to the floor. She wasn¡¯t dead, just unconscious. The other girl soon followed. A guard walked by.

    ¡°Lord, you¡¯re awake!¡± He said.

    ¡°You, take these girls to the sleeping quarters and have someone take care of them.¡± I said. The guard took the girls, then left. I walked to where ever Bogat was. Arriving outside his door I knocked. ¡°Come in¡± he said. I opened the door and walked in.

    ¡°Ah, Isaac! You¡¯re up, good morning. Or evening rather.¡± He said. I nodded and sat down on a chair.

    ¡°How long did I sleep for?¡± I asked.

    ¡°Two months.¡± He replied.

    ¡°I see, have everyone gather in the meeting room.¡± I said. After, I left the room. Soon after everyone was in the meeting room. Except for the kids, they were playing somewhere with their maids.

    ¡°As you see, I have awoken. There are a few things I want to address. First, Bogat, tell me the status of the castle. How is the population?¡± I asked. Bogat stood up.

    ¡°The population of the castle and village is around 1500 people. There are around 1000 villagers outside in the village, and 500 inside. Of the 500 slaves inside 150 of them are guards. Another 100 of them are the maids, cleaners, cooks, gardeners and stable keepers etc. Then the around 200 slaves left are the blood dolls. There are also another 150 guards outside in the village, making sure everything is in order and that no one tries to escape, although there haven¡¯t been any escape attempts so far.¡± Bogat said.

    ¡°I see. How about your vampire prot¨¦g¨¦s? Have they been made yet?¡± I asked.

    ¡°Yes all of us have made a vampire each, except for your family.¡± Bogat reported, once again.

    ¡°Good, bring them here after the meeting is over, so that I can see them. Now onto the next matter. We don¡¯t have any craftsmen here. We need blacksmiths, tailors, enchanters and the like. Bogat I want you to go the city to get the craftsmen. Kato you¡¯re our head mage, so you are going to find us a good enchanter or two. When you bring them back, you can either make them vampires, or ghouls. We should also look into getting a few more mages. For this you should find someone promising. Maybe from the village, or something. Then you should bind them to you with your blood and train them. To motivate them you could promise them vampire blood if they do well, then in the end turn them into vampires. But first get the enchanters. Lilia and Aylard, you are in charge of training the guards. I want them to be elites. At the moment we don¡¯t even have a single C rank guard. Make them into something that inspires fear in others. Tell them if they do well, they¡¯ll become potential vampire candidates. Eric, you are to go to the village. See if you can find someone that has potential as an assassin. Then train them together with your underlings. In eight to ten months Valen will be here with our assassins. That¡¯s when we start our operations. I want them to be ready by then. Of course if you can also have your vampire underlings go through the training sometimes, if they are skilled enough. Also, Kato, how is my brother.¡± I said. Kato stood up to answer.

    ¡°Marcus has fed twice. Both times his victims died. I did as you said and had him wait until he lost his reasoning, but I must say I did feel bad for him once, so I let him feed earlier, but he actually refused. He didn¡¯t feed until he lost all control of himself, even if the girl was in there with him until he became like that. But I have noticed that there are some bad effects of him not eating. Even though the maturing period has passed, he didn¡¯t gain much strength after it. He¡¯s still a pureblood, but he might be even weaker than a normal vampire. Hopefully this will change when he starts feeding regularly.¡± Kato said. I could see that he was a bit worried. It also worried me. I would have to go see him soon.

    ¡°I see, that¡¯s not good. If he gets too weak, I¡¯m afraid we¡¯ll have to start force feeding him. But let¡¯s wait a while longer. On another note, I am going to the capital to get my sister. Maybe I should have gone before I turned you all, but she has already been there for a few months already. I¡¯m sure she could handle two more. It will be a good experience for her, in case she ever gets captured again. I leave tomorrow, and I¡¯ll be going alone. You''re dismissed¡± I said. Then everyone left to go get the new vampires. Soon seven new faces were in the room.

    ¡°So you¡¯re the new guys. We haven¡¯t met before since I¡¯ve been asleep for two months, but you all probably know who I am. Serve me well¡± I said. Then I turned around and left. Serana and Amelia followed me. We went to our room, and on the way we met Alicia and had her come too, for a chat. Then all four of us were in the bedroom.

    ¡°Are we going to have sex?¡± Amelia asked.

    ¡°No, I¡¯m still a bit drowsy from sleeping. Let¡¯s just relax, since I leave for the capital tomorrow.¡± I said.

    ¡°Yeah, you¡¯re going to get your sister from the Lord Commander. I can¡¯t wait to meet her, and have some girl on girl time. Felicia is way too boring. She is always so nervous around us. Your parents as well, it¡¯s like they¡¯re scared of us. This is because you had to go and do that to Marcus!¡± Amelia said. Serana chuckled on the side.

    ¡°Hey, he insulted you! And it¡¯s not like it was permanent damage¡­¡± I replied. Then Alicia stood up.

    ¡°Wait, you¡¯re going to pay the Lord Commander a visit to get your sister. Lord Isaac, please you have to help me. My sister was bought by the Lord Commander back when we were sold! Please, can you go get her too? Her name is Alice, she looks just like me, since we¡¯re twins.¡± She said. Her name was Alice? That¡¯s the same name as my sister¡¯s.

    ¡°My sister¡¯s name is Alice too. Alright, I¡¯ll get her as well.¡± I said. We spent the rest of the day talking and doing other stuff. I also taught Alicia how to paint. When morning came, the four of us had slept together, but we didn¡¯t have sex. We just slept for once.

    The next evening I set off on Iluvatar. Kato and Bogat weren¡¯t leaving yet, since they had to prepare some things first. Iluvatar ran at full speed for the capital and in only a few days, we arrived. The guards of the city gate were scared when they saw the giant wolf running at them, but then they relaxed as they recognised the famous Night Wolf of the Coldblood family. It was quite the mystery how they had managed to tame it so thoroughly. It had never gone against its Master¡¯s wishes. When inside the city, I headed for the Palace. Visitors were only allowed inside the castle, they could only wander outside in the public gardens. When I arrived at the entrance two guards stopped me with their spears.

    ¡°Halt! Visitors aren¡¯t allowed in the castle!¡± The guards said. I looked at them menacingly, piercing into their souls with my sharp gaze.

    ¡°Let me in and tell the Lord Commander that Isaac Coldblood is here to see him.¡± I said with a cold voice. The guards shivered in fear at my voice, and when they heard who it was they were even more afraid. They didn¡¯t dare disobey. Recently the Coldblood family had gotten very powerful in the Fenlai Prefecture. Even the Lord Commander had to be polite to them, lest he wanted to be abdicated.

    ¡°Yes Sir! Please follow me!¡± The guard said, scared. I followed the guard, and we soon arrived in front of a door. The guard knocked.

    ¡°Come in.¡± A voice resounded. The guard opened the door and we entered the room.

    ¡°Lord Commander! Lord Isaac Coldblood has come to see you!¡± the guard announced. The Lord Commander was surprised. The Coldbloods had left the city months ago.

    ¡°Lord Isaac, you have come to see me? We haven¡¯t met before, since I was unable to come to your wedding, right? My name is Charles Fenlai, lord of the Fenlai Prefecture. What is that you need?¡± He asked, very politely. The guard left and I sat myself on a chair.

    ¡°A few months ago you were traveling at the outskirts of the prefecture, right? You arrived at a farm, near a forest, where you saw a very beautiful girl. You decided to take her as a concubine right?¡± I asked. Charles was very surprised that I knew this. It was no secret that he had gotten himself a concubine, but not many people knew where she was from. The Coldbloods must be very formidable to know of this.

    ¡°Yes that¡¯s right. I saw the girl and fell for her at first sight. As a thank you to the family I started sending them some money, but when the second payment was arrived, the family was gone. It seemed like they had disappeared very suddenly. The farming tools were still on the ground. I feared that they might have been killed by a monster.¡± He said.

    ¡°You don¡¯t have to worry about that. That girl, Alice, she¡¯s my sister, and I have come to take her back. Our family has also been brought to our new home.¡± I said. Now, Charles was even more shocked.

    ¡°You¡¯re her brother? You? But doesn¡¯t that mean you¡¯re from a farming family? How the hell did you become the heir of the Coldblood family?¡± He asked.

    ¡°That¡¯s not important, but I¡¯m taking her back with me.¡± I said. Charles started getting afraid now. It didn¡¯t seem like he wanted her to leave.

    ¡°Do you really have to take her? How about you ask her first? Let me go get her.¡± He said, then rushed out before I could answer. Soon he brought back a beautiful girl. She seemed confused. Why was she being taken to see this person so suddenly? Then while she was wondering, the person turned around. She lost her breath. Tears starting swelling up in her eyes. She lost the strength in her knees, and fell to the floor.

    ¡°Brother!¡± She yelled. She started crawling over to me.

    ¡°Isaac, is it you? You aren¡¯t dead? You haven¡¯t changed, you haven¡¯t changed at all!¡± She said.

    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s me Alice. I¡¯m finally back, and I have come to bring you back to my castle. Mom and dad are there. Marcus and his family as well. We¡¯ll all be reunited at last.¡± I said. I was truly happy. I hadn¡¯t seen my sister for over eight or nine years.

    ¡°You¡¯re taking me away? Away from Charles? You can¡¯t!¡± She said. Dumbfounded. I was dumbfounded. She didn¡¯t want to go? Why?

    ¡°What? Why not?¡± I asked, confused. It didn¡¯t seem like it was a ¡°You can¡¯t or you¡¯ll die!¡± situation. More like a ¡°I don¡¯t wanna go!¡± situation.

    ¡°I love him! He¡¯s so kind and nice to me, and he doesn¡¯t have any other concubines. Only me. And most importantly¡­ There¡¯s a baby inside me. We¡¯re expecting!¡± She said with a big smile. Dumbfounded! Shocked! I was dumbfounded and shocked! I slowly turned my head towards Charles, with a look that could make it seem like the world was ending. Charles went on his knees and begged.

    ¡°Please forgive me Great Master Isaac Coldblood! I love your sister and would have married her if possible, but she is of common birth so it was not allowed. But now that she is the sister of the oh so great You, then you just have to announce that she is your sister. Then I can marry her. Please, Great Master Isaac of the Coldblood Clan, I beg you, don¡¯t take her from me!¡± Charles begged very seriously. And it¡¯s not like he¡¯s an old man, he¡¯s still in his twenties. He became the Lord Commander after his father died. That was shortly before I became a vampire. I looked at him, then my sister. She was also looking at me with begging eyes. But she was also very confused. Charles, the supposed most powerful man in the prefecture, was begging her brother to let him have her. Since when did he become so important?

    ¡°Fine. Since you actually do seem to love each other, then it¡¯s fine. But there are conditions. First condition is that she is coming back with me for a visit. I want her to meet my wives and new family. Second condition is that in ten years you have to step down, and both of you move to my castle. I¡¯m not willing to wait any longer. If you refuse to step down in ten years, then I¡¯ll kill you. Understand?¡± I said. At the last words I let my killing intent and aura flow a bit.

    ¡°Y-y-y-yes I understand! Thank you so much big brother Great Master Isaac of the Coldblood Clan!¡± He said and kowtowed over and over again. Alice looked ecstatic as well.

    ¡°There¡¯s one more thing. You should have a slave around here, also called Alice. She¡¯s the twin sister of my concubine. I want her as well.¡± I said.

    ¡°Alice you say? I will bring all the Alices in the castle, for you to see!¡± He said and rushed out. A while later more women were in the room. Some were older while some were younger. I walked up to one of the girls.

    ¡°You¡¯re Alice, right? Your sister, Alicia, is my concubine. She asked me to take you with me while I was here getting my own sister.¡± I told her. When she heard these words, she got really happy.

    ¡°Really?! Alicia is fine? Great! When do we leave?¡± She said.

    ¡°Soon.¡± I replied, then turned to Charles.

    ¡°Transfer her slave rights over to me.¡± I said. Charles replied with a ¡°yes Sir¡± which caused the Alices to be surprised. To think that the Lord Commander would call someone Sir. They were all somehow happy at seeing this, but the happiest one was Alice number two. That is Alicia¡¯s sister. She had realized that she was being taken by a very important person, and her sister was that important person¡¯s concubine. She could definitely profit from this. Her days of slavery were over!

    After her slave rights were transferred over to me, we left the city. Both Alices were very scared when Iluvatar appeared. But they managed to calm down sooner or later. We travelled as quickly as their weak mortal bodies could handle, but it was still a lot slower than on my way there. We also had to make stops to eat and sleep. A vampire could manage to stay awake for a very long time, but wasn¡¯t the case of a human. One night, while we were sleeping, we awoke to a rumbling noise. I saw a platoon of armed knights marching in our direction on their horses. They weren¡¯t sent by Charles, since they came from the other direction, so I was a bit puzzled as to what they wanted. I stood still, waiting for them to arrive. Soon the squad stopped in front of us, and one horse rode forwards. On the horse was an armed knight, but this one''s armour had many curves and on its chest there were two bulges going out. It was a woman.

    The woman got off her horse and stopped in front me, then took off her helm. In front of me appeared an extremely beautiful woman, almost rivalling my wives. Well she was still a good distance away, but still. For a human she was ridiculously beautiful, but that didn¡¯t affect me. Alicia was still more beautiful than her. But she had been tempered with by my blood. And then there was Amelia and Serana. Being surrounded by such godly beauties, this human wouldn¡¯t affect me.

    A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.

    ¡°Civilian we need your provisions for a squad, since we are running low.¡± She said in a cold voice. That was asking a bit much. We only had enough food to last two humans one or two weeks. There were more than ten knights there, so it would only last a few days.

    ¡°Why should I give you our food?¡± I asked with an even more cold voice, while showing a small smirk. The woman was a bit taken aback by the response, but immediately recovered.

    ¡°Listen here, that was an imperial order. We are royal knights from the Royal Capital of Kalderon kingdom. All of us here are B ranked, and I¡¯m even late stage, so if you refuse my orders, then I will kill you¡± said the woman. My smirk grew into a smile. Then the smile started quivering until it burst out in1to full laughter. I stood up, grabbed my sword and let the full power of my aura and killing intent blow into their faces.

    ¡°You will kill me?! COME AT ME AND I WILL SHOW YOU WHAT TRUE FEAR AND POWER IS!!!¡± I screamed into her face with a sinister smile on my face that could make hearts stop. She was shocked. That aura was terribly powerful, and she completely taken aback, but being as experiences as she was, she quickly recovered.

    ¡°Knights attack!¡± She shouted.

    ¡°Girls, run and don¡¯t look back! I¡¯ll find you when I¡¯m done.¡± I said menacingly. The girls nodded and immediately ran. Some of the knights started chasing them, but I was not about to let them, so I charged in their direction and appeared in front of them like a flash. I smiled at them, then swiped my sword at their necks. Soon three necks decorated the ground. The woman looked on in shock at my speed.

    I lifted one hand up to air and channelled some mana into it. Suddenly a ball appeared above me. A small insignificant ball, but the ball grew. It grew until it was one meter tall, two meters wide, then split into two one meter balls. The two balls grew again, doubling in size, then split into two again. It repeated like this until there were ten balls. It might have sounded like it was slow, but it only took around ten seconds. After the ten balls had appeared, they suddenly started splitting rapidly, until there were hundreds of small black balls. All of the small balls changed shape to form arrows.Then i let them fly towards them.

    The hundreds of small black arrows flew towards the group of knights at shocking speed.

    ¡°Shield yourselves!¡± The woman screamed, while covering herself with her shield. The former black balls rained on them, like a storm of arrows. After it was over corpses littered the ground. There were only three knights left. One of them was the woman. But they were injured all over. My body flashed and I appeared in front of them once more.

    ¡°Who are you?!¡± the woman asked. I smiled at her.

    ¡°I¡¯m Isaac.¡± I said with a voice so gentle and kind that it sent shivers down the spines of the three survivors. Then I put my sword down. My body flashed and I appeared before one of the knights. I transformed my hands into claws and pierced both his shoulders with a finger each. While the man was screaming I started lifting him up, causing the screams to echo even louder. The other two knights looked on in horror. I let go of him, but as he fell down, my hand flashed and I stabbed him in the middle of his throat. I then grabbed him and started draining the blood out of him. It was tasty, ridiculously tasty. This was the first time I tasted blood from a B ranker. It was as good as Alicia¡¯s blood, but it was different. It gave a different feeling to it had a different taste.

    As I was finished drinking his blood I turned away from him and walked towards the other knight. As I was walking towards the other knight I raised my hands and snapped my fingers. Suddenly the corpse of the other guy burst into flames. Suddenly there was nothing left of him, except ashes that would inevitably be blown away by the wind. The man started screaming and tried running, but I used my ice magic to make ice spurt up from the ground entrapping his feet.

    ¡°What are you?¡± the woman asked, horrified from seeing her entire squad get exterminated in a matter of seconds, just because she had tried to rob a random traveler of his food.

    ¡°Don¡¯t tell me, you haven¡¯t heard of the legends? About the monsters that roam the night drinking the blood of innocents. The monsters of eternal life, the rulers of the night?¡± I said. I continued walking towards the trapped knight.

    ¡°You¡¯re a vampire? But they don¡¯t exist!¡± She said. I ignored her and decided to ask her a question instead, as I made the ice slowly spread up the knights legs while I tasted his blood.

    ¡°This knight, he is at the middle stage of rank B, just like that other guy. But he should be strong enough to kill someone of the late stage. Why is that?¡± I asked. The woman was shocked at this question.

    ¡°How do you know that they can do that? You shouldn¡¯t have been able to estimate their strength from that massacre!¡± She said.

    ¡°I can taste it in their blood. By drinking their blood I can feel their strength.¡± I explained. The woman had a more understanding look. It¡¯s not that she fully believed that he¡¯s a vampire, but it was the only possibility she could think of.

    ¡°I see. But I won¡¯t tell you this secret.¡± She said. How annoying.

    ¡°You won¡¯t? How about this, if you tell me I¡¯ll let live in my castle. I won¡¯t kill you.¡± I said to her, hoping that she would tell me.

    ¡°No way, as much as I would like living, if I do tell you, they¡¯ll hunt me down and make me suffer a far worse fate.¡± She said. How annoying!

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry there¡¯s no way they¡¯ll find you where I live. And if they have some tracking spell on you I can easily dispose of it.¡± I said. Hopefully this would be enough.

    ¡°You can? Well, that was some very powerful magic and you specialize in darkness magic, which is the best for concealing stuff. Alright if you promise me that you¡¯ll let me live, and also let me tell my husband that I¡¯m fine, then I¡¯ll agree.¡± She said. Perfect!

    ¡°Alright, I agree. Now tell me!¡± I said, getting impatient.

    ¡°It has to do with the method we train in. Knights have to train in a special method from the beginning to become this powerful. I don¡¯t really understand it fully, but it has something to do with the light element entering our body. It also makes us more effective against undead and demon type monsters, not that it was much help against you.¡± She said.

    ¡°Good¡± I said. One word. Then I flashed again, and when my body appeared again, my sword was inserted into the woman¡¯s throat. She was looking at me in disbelief. She grabbed her throat, trying to stop the blood from flowing, but there was no use in trying. Soon her blood soaked body lost all its strength and went limp. She was dead.

    She was too na?ve, but it had been her only hope at coming out alive. So I don¡¯t blame her, I couldn¡¯t have removed that tracing spell, even if I had wanted to. After all, I was only an elementary mage. I just seemed more powerful because I put vast amounts of mana into the spells. This was something only vampires could do, since they had more mana than they knew what to do with. Even if  human mages have huge amounts of mana, they wouldn¡¯t be able to do this, since they would lack the mana control needed. Control usually increases as you increase in mage rank, but vampires had inherent talent for mana control. They would always be able to control mana very effectively. Some more than other though. Kato had way better control than any other vampire, and I also had far better control than the others. The reason being, I¡¯m the progenitor and Kato has sacrificed other properties for mana.

    After killing that woman I walked over to the frozen knight. I stood before him, rose a finger, touched him. Suddenly the ice started shattering and he turned into little ice particles, flowing in the wind. Then to finish, I set fire to all the corpses, removing all evidence.

    Then I started looking for the Alice duo, and found them quickly. They knew better than to ask any questions. But they were also very surprised. They had half expected me to die, or at least return gravely injured. After all they had heard that woman say that they were all B ranked. But no! Instead he returned only moments later, not a scratch on my body, only the blood of my enemies.

    We immediately resumed our journey, and after travelling for many days, we finally arrived at my castle. The girls were awestruck.

    ¡°This is your home?¡± My sister asked, shocked by the size of it. It even had a village.

    ¡°Why is it so remote? Seriously, we had to travel for days in a forest to get here!¡± She complained.

    ¡°It¡¯s so that no one can find it. When you return to the capital, you are never allowed to talk about this place. Not even with Charles. He¡¯ll have to wait ten years to see it. And there is something that I have to tell you when we get there.¡± I said. She looked confused. Moments later we arrived in the castle. I had everyone gather in the meeting hall, except for Marcus. I was sitting in my seat, Alice next to me. The other Alice was meeting her sister again.

    ¡°Everyone! Alice has returned! But she won¡¯t be staying.¡± I said. There was a moment of silence, but all of a sudden both mother and Felicia stood up.

    ¡°What?! She gets to leave, while we were forced to stay? Even after what you did to Marcus?!¡± Felicia complained. Instantly my eyes sharpened, and all of a sudden I was standing in front of Felicia. I grabbed her throat and lifter her up off the ground, then stabbed my hand into her abdomen and threw her to the side. Mother sat down again, while Alice looked shocked and horrified. She was about to speak up, when I returned to my seat.

    ¡°Felicia, don¡¯t speak against me again or I¡¯ll imprison you for a hundred years. And relax, there¡¯s a reason for this. It turned out that Charles, the Lord Commander, and Alice fell in love. Now Alice is pregnant, so I let her stay there. But both Charles, Alice and the child have to return here in ten years. At that time, Charles will abdicate. Only then will I turn them into vampires.¡± I said. There was a moment of silence, but then Alice spoke up.

    ¡°Vampires? You¡¯ll make us into vampires? What are you talking about?¡± She asked confused.

    ¡°Alice. Every single person in here, except for you and Sara, are vampires. All those years ago when I disappeared, it was because I became a vampire. The first vampire. Two months ago I returned to the farm to get you guys, and make you into vampires, but you weren¡¯t there, so I made the others into vampires first. Then I slept for two months. After that I went to get you, intending for you to be a vampire as well, but now that will have to wait a few years. That¡¯s also the reason as to why I haven¡¯t aged.¡± I said. She looked scared, like she had realized that she walked into a den of wolves, dressed like a juicy sheep.

    ¡°That¡¯s not true right? You¡¯re just kidding me, right?¡± She asked nervously. I started laughing.

    ¡°No, I¡¯m serious, but don¡¯t worry, we won¡¯t eat you. We have enough blood dolls around here, so we won¡¯t go hungry anytime soon.¡± I said. She seemed a bit reassured. After several people here were her blood and flesh. She trusted them. What made her worry were the others, but after realizing that they weren¡¯t eying her with hunger in their eyes, but instead curiosity, she calmed down.

    ¡°By the way, where¡¯s Marcus?¡± She asked. Here it came the question I didn¡¯t want to answer.

    ¡°Marcus is imprisoned right now. You see, he doesn¡¯t want to eat anything, and when we go without blood for too long, we lose control of our self. We lose our mind and go insane, until we can drink again, so he has to be locked up most of the time, so that he doesn¡¯t go on a rampage. He¡¯s only allowed out after he has fed, and only for a little while. It¡¯s tragic, but I don¡¯t want to force him to eat yet, but if this continues I will force him. It¡¯s very bad for him not to eat.¡± I explained. Alice seemed a bit sad to hear this, but she accepted it.

    ¡°I see. If that¡¯s the case, then it is indeed best to keep him under locks. If he were to find out that he went on a rampage and massacred a lot of people I think he would be devastated.¡± She said. Well it¡¯s good that she understands. But that¡¯s not really the main point of keeping him locked up. It¡¯s more so that he doesn¡¯t see little Isaac and Sara. And I also lied about letting him out from time to time. Ever since he entered that room, he hasn¡¯t exited it once. Not that it¡¯s a horrible room or anything.

    After the meeting was over I decided to go pay my brother a visit. I went into the castle¡¯s dungeon. There were many cells down here, but that¡¯s not where I was heading for. I continued down the dungeon until I arrived at a thick door, made out of some kind of steel. In this hallway there were many such doors. They were all made out of very strong material. We had built these cells for the sake of imprisoning vampires. I put the keys into the keyhole and opened the door. I arrived in a dark room. Seemed like the lights were off. Marcus was sitting in a chair, staring into the nothingness. When I closed the door, he suddenly pounced at me like a ferocious beast. I grabbed his neck and threw him against the wall. He slowly stood back up again.

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry brother, seems like I lost control once again¡­¡± he said. I turned on the candle that was there with fire magic. There was also a fire starter there, but I didn¡¯t bother using it. I sat down on his bed. There was only one chair in the cell.

    ¡°Marcus, why don¡¯t you just eat? You¡¯ll get used to it, and you don¡¯t have to kill your victims. In fact, with what you¡¯re doing now you¡¯re killing more than you would if you just fed regularly. Every person you feed on now gets killed, because you lose control, but if you just fed regularly you won¡¯t lose control. If this continues, then I¡¯m going to have to start force feeding you. I know I said that I wouldn¡¯t do that, but things have changed. Feeding so rarely is hurting you. You¡¯re a pureblood vampire, so you should be much stronger than a normal vampire at your level, but now you¡¯re even weaker than a normal vampire, even after feeding. You won¡¯t die, but I fear that you might enter a very long hunger induced coma or something. After I turned you all into vampires I had to sleep for two months because of all the energy I used. Something similar might happen with you if do this. It will make your body weaker and weaker until there is barely any blood essence in you. At that point you would enter a long coma to recover it. It might last years or even centuries, and I won¡¯t let that happen¡± I said. Marcus looked at me in shock. He had not expected for something like that.

    ¡°Even then, I cannot make myself willingly drink someone''s blood! I would rather enter that coma. And if you have to force feed me, then there¡¯s nothing I can do, but I won¡¯t do it willingly.¡± He said in a moody voice. I closed my eyes for a while, then left the room, not saying a single word. The last thing Marcus heard was the sound of the door locking, then the madness started looming in on him again.

    End of chapter 14.

 Chapter 15: Assassins

    Here''s chapter 15. I made a poll to see whether or not you would mind if those traitorous wenches that betrayed Lilia and Aylard get raped. If it''s accepted, then I MIGHT make stupid bitches that go against or lord and savior Isaac get raped.

    Thanks to RagNarok for PR''ing and editing again! You''re a great help!

    Chapter 15: Assassins

    The months went by, and it was almost time for the assassins to arrive. Things had been peaceful in the past few months. The guards had been trained, craftsmen recruited and we now had enchanters. Marcus still hadn¡¯t begun drinking blood willingly. His sanity was going down the drain and his body weakened. I decided that if he refused to drink any blood up until the assassins arrival, then I would start forcing him myself. My family had been a bit weary and slightly resentful of me in the beginning, but they were getting used to it, and I think they forgave me. Probably the effect of a vampire¡¯s mind change. They didn¡¯t hesitate to feed anymore. Of course little Isaac had never been a problem. He idolized me and would always come looking for me. I think he might be spending more time with me and the girls than he did his own mother. I should tell him to spend more time with his mother. Sara probably wouldn¡¯t be a problem when it¡¯s her turn. She¡¯s being raised to become a vampire after all. She¡¯s already four years old now. She was three when I went to get them. Little Isaac had also grown a bit, confirming my theory, but I still wanted to wait for Sara to get older before making her into a vampire.

    Eric¡¯s assassin group was also going well, he had recruited a few villagers that showed talent at sneaking around and began training them. He was also putting his original underlings under intense training these last few months, making sure that they are ready. The villagers would need more training though. A few months is not enough to turn a villager into an assassin. Maybe a year or two, as he was also training their minds, to make them ready to kill someone when needed. When he deemed them ready, he would have them go kill someone in the village. If they could do it without leaving any traces of evidence, then they pass. If not, they get sentenced to death for murder.

    I had also spoken to my father about his arm. I was slightly worried that such an old injury would not be healed, but my worries were unnecessary as it had healed completely.

    {Third person perspective}

    Though these months had been peaceful for everyone at the castle, the same could not be said for another place in the kingdom. In the Royal Capital of the Kingdom of Kalderon an uproar had occurred.

    A certain prince was walking through the halls, going to a certain room that no one liked to visit. The only people that visited this place were people who came here to see if someone had died. This prince¡¯s wife was in the military, she was a late B rank knight. He had gone through a lot of trouble to get to married to her. It was only allowed after her talent was discovered. That the prince was allowed to marry her, but the new princess had to stay in the military to hone her skills, so that she could one day become an important general in the kingdom. Thus, the young princess had been sent on a mission to the Fenlai Prefecture to handle a small matter.

    A few weeks after she had left, the prince had felt a link disappear. This link was the life connection the prince and princess had made. It was a simple concept but required a Warlock to do. It connected the two people¡¯s mana together so that they could sense each other. When the prince lost the connection, he became worried, so he went to the room where the soul links are kept. The soul links are small items, directly connected to the soul. Every important person in the Royal Palace has to have one. If the owner of the soul link dies, then the soul link breaks.

    The prince stood outside the room. The two guards were looking at him nervously, for it was the crown prince that stood before them.

    ¡°Open the door, quickly!¡± He said

    The guards rushed to open the door, fumbling through their key chain, even though there were only three keys on it. Soon they managed to open the door. The prince rushed in, and looked for the place his wife¡¯s soul link was kept. He stood before it despair, he felt despair and sadness overwhelm him. It was broken it was broken! The soul link was broken! His wife, the royal princes, the next queen of the Kalderon Kingdom, was dead! There was no doubt about it. The only way to disconnect from a soul link was to die. There was no other way. The only possibility was that she had died. The prince was in despair. He fell down to his knees, grabbed his chest. He let out a heart wrenching scream, full of sorrow and sadness. The scream resounded throughout the entire castle, shocking many people. In his despair, a lock of his hair turned entirely white, then the whiteness started to spread out, making white streaks appear throughout his hair. His black hair, was now black and white. He felt weak, and couldn¡¯t stand up so he ordered the guards to help him up.

    That woman had been the love of his life. He had to repeatedly go against his father¡¯s will, and almost lost his position as the crown prince for her. But now she was dead. He had to know why. He had to get revenge! After he recovered his strength he started waltzing over to the king. It felt like the longest walk he ever had. Even longer than getting to the soul link room. Soon he found himself outside the king¡¯s study, his father¡¯s study. He directly opened the door and walked in, without knocking. The king looked up, annoyed, but after seeing his son he was shocked.

    ¡°Father, she¡¯s dead! Lisa is dead! She¡¯s dead!¡± the prince screamed. The king abruptly stood up, shocked.

    ¡°What?! She¡¯s dead?! How did that happen?! She was on her way to the capital of the Fenlai Prefecture! How did she die there?! There isn¡¯t anyone stronger than B ranks there. This is bad, send out investigators there immediately!¡± The king shouted. But there wasn¡¯t anyone there to take those orders, except the prince, so they ordered a meeting.

    The death of Princess Lisa was reported, and an elite team of investigators were sent out. They were to travel at top speed to the capital of Fenlai Prefecture, taking the same route as the princess took. The main suspect in this case was the Lord Commander, Charles Fenlai. If they couldn¡¯t find evidence of someone else killing her, then they would charge him of treason. After all he was a strong man. He was the hope of Fenlai Prefecture, because he was already at the peak of rank B. He would be the only one that could kill her.

    After Lisa became a princess she had become a very important person to the kingdom, because she was on track to becoming an A ranker. She was supposed to become a pillar of support for the kingdom, but now she was dead.

    The very same day, the investigators departed. The prince fell sick from the heart break and was bedridden. He truly had loved the girl. The prince laid bedridden for weeks. The best doctors were hired to heal him. After a few months of rest, the prince finally recovered, but his hair was white as snow, and his eyes had a sinister look to them. From that day onward, the prince had become cold and heartless. The only thought on his mind was revenge.

    Meanwhile the investigators had finally arrived at Fenlai City. It was a very long journey from the Royal Capital to Fenlai City, so it took them several months. But there was no rush. They needed to investigate this as carefully as possible. They would take their time and make sure nothing escaped their eyes. They didn¡¯t notify the Lord Commander of their presence yet. They instead had a few men infiltrate the palace and look for any evidence. They also had men infiltrate all of the underground world¡¯s most important places, like the Rogue¡¯s Guild. There was also always someone looking at the town gates, using their techniques to look for anyone suspicious.

    Thus they would stay in Fenlai City for as long as it took. If they found enough evidence that supported it not being Charles, then they would go report the situation to him. If not? Then they would immediately report to the king. Then it would be the king¡¯s decision, and the investigators would leave.

    {Isaac POV}

    The day had come. Valen was riding on a horse, behind him were ten men, dressed in dark leather. I was observing them from a window. Suddenly Valen looked up to me. It slightly surprised me, but I just waved at him. He waved back. He has pretty good eyesight. I mean, we were still several kilometers apart.

    A while later, they finally arrived at the entrance.

    ¡°Isaac, you¡¯re quite something. You were looking at us out of a window, several kilometers away. Then I snuck a glance at you, and what do you do? You wave to me. From several kilometers away you could see me slightly turning my head at you and looking at that small window. I could just barely see you waving. You¡¯d make one hell of an archer!¡± Valen said, slightly excited.

    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m gifted with great sight. And hearing. And other things¡­¡± I said mysteriously. Valen just laughed at me.

    ¡°I brought you ten trained assassins. They¡¯re all C rank, so treat them well. You should also start recruiting new assassins. Maybe from that village of yours, down there. Quite a place you¡¯ve built, by the way. If you don¡¯t know where it is, then it¡¯ll be very hard to find.¡± He said.

    ¡°We already started recruiting. We have a few dozen in training, and then also some guys that Eric has trained for a few years already. Now those guys are in charge of training the recruits. They¡¯re pretty good.¡± I said, praising Eric¡¯s good work. One of those three guys had been made a vampire by Eric, back when I had them make their own. They had a little competition between them.

    ¡°That¡¯s good. But I apologize, because I won¡¯t be able to stay here any longer. Not long ago I received a report that we¡¯re being attacked by a rival organization. Nothing dangerous, but I should go check the situation. See you later.¡± Valen said, then suddenly disappeared, leaving only an afterimage. I then turned towards the new assassins.

    ¡°Welcome, assassins. My name is Isaac Coldblood, and I am the leader of this branch, known as the Coldblood branch. We¡¯re a new branch, so you guys are our first assassins, not counting the other four, and the ones in training. These servants will show you to your rooms. And for now you shouldn¡¯t wander around the castle, but stay in your rooms. I¡¯ll have Eric, our stealth expert explain to you the details and other things before you can wander around. This can be a dangerous place for the ignorant.¡± I said, with a very cold voice while staring into their eyes with my soul piercing gaze. The ten assassins nodded nervously. I scared them even more than Valen did. Well, I was a bit more monstrous than him. I went into my study, and had someone summon Eric. Moments later he arrived.

    ¡°Lord, what do you need?¡± He asked.

    ¡°Go ahead and sit down. I want to discuss a few things with you.¡± I said. Eric sat down.

    ¡°As you know, the assassins have arrived. I want you to bind them to you with blood and explain to them about us. There¡¯s also something else. I want you to go make some information gathering places in the cities. I was thinking that they could also double as orphanages. With an orphanage we could take in orphans. Then when they grow up we take the beautiful females to the castle, as blood dolls. The strong males can become our guards and the sneaky ones could become assassins. We can also have them go in the streets, pickpocketing and gathering information they hear. The staff should be trained to gather information as well. Understand?¡± I said.

    ¡°Yes. I¡¯ll go talk to Bogat about it, then we¡¯ll plan it out. I¡¯ll report to you when it¡¯s all ready.¡± Eric said in a very professional tone.

    ¡°Good.¡± I said. With all these orphanages we would have a good source of blood dolls, and also a good place to raise assassins and human guards. It¡¯s important for us to have human guards as well, in case we need to some public show of strength.

    But there was still the matter of getting contracts. No one knew about us, so people wouldn¡¯t come to us for help. I decided that I would have the Rogue¡¯s Guild help me on that matter. If I used them as the middleman, then we would be set. But there was a long distance between us and the capital. It would take too long to have someone travel between, and would also pose risk to our location.

    ¡°Eric, there is still one more thing. I need you to go meet that Guild leader. Eldric was it? You need to make a deal with him. That is, for him to help us get contracts. We¡¯ll use him as a middleman for now. Go see Bogat for money for a communications stone, then take one of your underlings with you to the capital. After the deal is done, that underling will stay back in the city and report to us the details of missions given. That¡¯s all, you¡¯re dismissed.¡± I said.

    Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.

    ¡°Yes Lord. I¡¯ll go deal with these matters right away.¡± He said, then left the room. Now that this was dealt with, it was time to go see Marcus once more, to see if he would feed. If not I would have to start forcing him. I had talked with my parents and Felicia. They had agreed that it couldn¡¯t go on any longer. But it was still not safe to let him go. He needed to accept his nature. I wouldn¡¯t let him taint his children with his naivety. I went deep into the castle¡¯s dungeons, arriving at that hallway with the heavy metal doors. I took out a key and opened one of the doors. This time the lights were on, and I wasn¡¯t attacked by him. It hadn¡¯t been too long since he last fed, so he still had moments of sanity. He looked up to, with a still rather depraved look, his face pale. I closed the door, and sat on his bed.

    ¡°Brother, are you ready to accept your nature?¡± I asked him. I didn¡¯t think that he would accept, but I would still ask him every time I visited him.

    ¡°Dream on.¡± He said in a weak voice. His body was frail and skinny, as if he hadn¡¯t eaten for months. His skin was getting slightly wrinkly and his hair was graying. It looked like he had aged many years in these past months. If he hadn¡¯t drunk any blood at all, then he¡¯d look like a 150 year old grandpa. As a vampire grew older they would be able to live without blood for longer periods, and not fall into depravity as easily, but if Marcus kept on like this, his sanity would be forever tarnished. I stood up from the bed and walked up to him. I took out a blood red bottle from my coat. I grabbed Marcus¡¯ throat and lifted him up. He suddenly became scared and looked at me with pleading eyes.

    ¡°Isaac, please don¡¯t.¡± He said in weak voice.

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry brother.¡± I said. I took the bottle and started pouring the contents into his mouth. He tried to fight back, but under my power he could barely move. After I forced the blood into him, I finally released him.

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry brother, but this is the only way. Just know that I am being kind to you. It would be simple for me to force you into drinking out of your own accord. But I won¡¯t. I won¡¯t force you to feed on anyone.¡± I said and left, closing the door behind me. This first time, I fed him myself, but in the future I would probably have someone else do it. Even a normal vampire could subdue him now.

    One year has passed since. In these two years, we had completed many contracts. We had already built a reputation as the most fearsome assassin group in the prefecture. Our assassins were very skilled, and would rarely be even seen. In the extremely rare case that one was captured, the torturers would never manage to get a single piece of information out of them. No matter what methods they used. We had even assassinated nobles, something that the other assassin groups wouldn¡¯t do, since they weren¡¯t strong enough to. But this fact wasn¡¯t known. After all they were only rumors. The only known fact was, that we exist. Some of our assassin recruits from the village were ready for work as well, but they would only take the easier missions. But they were still extremely skilled. The training that they were put through would break most people. The only reason they were still fine, was because of the reward of vampire blood.

    The orphanages had also been established. We had begun adopting children ten months ago. They were trained in information gathering and pickpocketing. Of course no one outside knew of this. They just thought that the Coldblood family was being kind with their vast amounts of money. We had also sent very skilled information gatherers and spies to manage them. These spies had discovered something interesting. The ones that handled orphanages in Fenlai City were all vampires made by Eric, so they were very skilled, since they had their heightened senses. Even a normal vampire could have senses superior to an A rank, depending on the bloodline. If they were of Eric¡¯s bloodline, which is the stealthiest and has the best senses, then a normal vampire that is a few months old has superior senses than an A rank human. And these vampires were all of Eric¡¯s bloodline. And there were five of them there.

    It had been ten months since they arrived at the city. In these ten months they had discovered something interesting. They had discovered that skilled spies were in the city. They didn¡¯t know exactly how many there were, but there was a group. At least six of them. They had been keeping an eye on them. There was someone watching the gates at all times, and they had found that one of them had infiltrated the Guild. They were sure that they didn¡¯t belong to the Lord Commander, since they were too skilled. They were probably D or C ranked in strength, but their spying skills were very good. Our vampires were all at the D rank, but they were superior in the art of stealth and spying, so they had no problem keeping an eye on them, but in a fight they weren¡¯t sure. If they were at the D rank, then it was easy game, but if they were C rank, then they might be troublesome. In maybe two years, the vampires would reach C rank. But they didn¡¯t intend to get rid of them, except if they posed a danger to us.

    One day, I was sitting in my study when someone knocked on the door. ¡°Come in¡± I told them. The one that came in was Eric.

    ¡°Lord Isaac, I have a report.¡± He said. I nodded and he sat down.

    ¡°One of our assassins was killed. But the weird thing is that he never arrived at his location. The bond connecting us was severed way before he should have arrived. He also managed to send me a message before he died. He said that he was attacked by enemy assassins. And there were several of them there, waiting in ambush. This means that they knew where he was going.¡± Eric said.

    ¡°Hmmm. This is bad. There is most probably a traitor. A traitor in the castle is out of question, so it must be at the Guild. Here¡¯s what we¡¯ll do. Have your underling investigate the Guild. Order him to do everything he can to find him, and make that Eldric guy help. When you find the culprit torture him. Take any messaging devices he may have. Make sure he talks, even if you have to use your blood. But torture him first. Also, send another assassin to the place of the mission, but use another route, that wasn¡¯t given by the Guild. And before you go, please summon Lilia and Aylard.¡± I said.

    ¡°Yes Lord.¡± Eric replied and left. A few moments later Lilia and Aylard arrived.

    ¡°I think it¡¯s about time for the revenge story to begin, don¡¯t you agree?¡± I said. When they heard me they instantly got excited.

    ¡°Really?! We¡¯re finally gonna get our revenge?!¡± They said excitedly.

    ¡°Yes. I am going to take a few guys with me and capture them. But I think that you should stay here. It¡¯s more fun if they see you while confined in the dungeon. That way they¡¯ll be more scared and shocked.¡± I said. The two siblings looked very excited, and nodded happily.

    ¡°Good. I need to go out for a stretch. I haven¡¯t left this place in too long. I think I¡¯ll take Serana and Amelia with me.¡± I said, then rose from my chair and left. I went to find Amelia and Serana who were chatting with Alicia. They had become quite good friends.

    ¡°Girls, I intend to go get those people that betrayed Lilia and Aylard. Oh, and Alicia, I think it¡¯s time that you become a vampire too. I¡¯ll turn you when we get back. After that you can turn your sister yourself.¡± I said, then left, leaving behind a happy Alicia, since her dream was finally coming true. In fact she was so happy she didn¡¯t speak. She knew that after she became a vampire she might also get to marry Isaac. Then she would be equal with Amelia and Serana, not having to call them Mistress or something.

    My wives and I left on Iluvatar. A few days later we arrived at Falen City, the city that those scums live in. We went directly to the orphanage we had in the city. All the children flocked up to us when they found out who we were. They were really thankful to us, since they now had a home and got enough food, even though they had to do slightly ¡®illegal¡¯ things. There were many cute girls that would grow into beautiful women there. They would all become blood slaves at the castle. After playing with the children, we went to meet the ¡®managers¡¯ of the place. They told us where the adventurers lived. We had already confirmed that they were at home before we left, so that wasn¡¯t a problem. The three of us left the orphanage followed by the four managers.

    Soon we arrived in front of a small mansion. I walked forwards to knock on the door. A woman opened the door, but before she could ask what I wanted I walked inside the house and grabbed the woman, holding her mouth shut. After everyone entered the house, one of the managers closed the door. I dragged the woman into the living room, then knocked her unconscious.

    ¡°All inhabitants of this house, hurry to the living room or this girl dies!¡± I shouted.

    ¡°What!?¡± I heard a returning sound. There was a bit of rumbling as everyone ran down here. Five people stood in front of me.

    ¡°Good all of you are here. Prepare yourselves for a life of pain and misery.¡± I said, then flashed and knocked everyone out. I looked towards the managers.

    ¡°You guys tie them up and put them in bags.¡± I said. The managers hurried to tie them up and put them in bags. After they finished they all grabbed a bag or two, then we left. When we arrived at the gate we were naturally stopped, since we were carrying suspiciously shaped bags.

    ¡°Stop! What¡¯s in those bags? Open them!¡± The guard ordered. I looked angrily at the guard.

    ¡°Move over, or I¡¯ll have you and your entire family executed!¡± I shouted at him. The guard just smiled at me.

    ¡°Oh really? Just open the damned bags or you¡¯ll be jailed!¡± The guard said. I was angered and grabbed the guard¡¯s neck and smashed him against the wall. The guards responded by drawing their weapons and surrounding us.

    ¡°Listen here you insects! My name is Isaac Coldblood! Maybe you have heard of me, as the most powerful man in the prefecture? If you don¡¯t scram then this man won¡¯t be the only one to die today!¡± I yelled at them. When they heard my name they were all visibly scared. While they were shivering in fear I smashed the head of the guard in my hands against the wall, shattering his head and making brain matter and blood spread all over the wall. At this moment a man wearing a different uniform came running up. He came up to me then kneeled in front of me.

    ¡°Lord Isaac, please accept our sincere apologies. The mayor of the city noticed the turmoil up here and ordered me to apologize to you and let you go about your business.¡± The man said. I let the corpse in hand fall down to the ground.

    ¡°It¡¯s fine. The main culprit has been dealt with accordingly so there is no need to worry anymore.¡± I said and started walking away. The man on his knees looked towards the mutilated corpse on the ground, making his heart waver. This was ¡®dealing with the problem accordingly¡¯? What a ruthless man, he thought. I walked over to where Iluvatar was staying and had the managers put the bags on his body. When that was done, we finally left, heading back to our castle, which still didn¡¯t have an official name. After a few days of traveling we arrived back at home again. On the back our captives had woken up a few times, but we just let them sleep again. I had the guard¡¯s strip them of their clothes, then put them in the dungeon, where they would hang in the cold, being fed only a piece of dry bread and some water every day, until they died. The next day I went to get Lilia and Aylard. We stood outside the cell where they were imprisoned.

    ¡°You two wait here. Come in when I tell you to.¡± I said. The siblings nodded, then I walked in. When I came in the six naked adventures looked at me in both anger and despair.

    ¡°Why did you do this?! What have we done to deserve this?! Please let us go?!¡± One of the women said. I smiled.

    ¡°What you did to deserve this? What didn¡¯t you do to deserve this, you fucking insects? Well, you¡¯ll know in a moment. Come in.¡± I said, as I looked to the door. Lilia and Aylard walked in the door. When the insects saw them, their eyes widened.

    ¡°Impossible! You¡¯re dead! There¡¯s no way you could have gotten away!¡± They screamed. Lilia walked forwards.

    ¡°No, Lord Isaac here saved us. He rushed into the boss chamber and grabbed us, then left the chamber in speeds unimaginable to insects like you, even faster than the closing door. Then he made us into one of his own. He made us into vampires! The most supreme beings in the world, far superior to insects like you humans. And now we¡¯re going to make sure you live a long life, full of pain and despair! Using our blood we¡¯ll make it so that you live for centuries inside this dark cell!¡± Lilia screamed into their faces.

    End of chapter 15

    <hr />

    LOL, I forgot to remove a comment left by RagNarok about my writing :P It''s gone now though.

 Chapter 16: Taking Control

    Hey there! I was wondering what I should name the castle and village, so if you have any good ideas, shoot!

    Enjoy!

    Chapter 16

    Lilia walked towards one of the men that she used to once call her friend. Once upon a time, a long time ago, she used to have a crush on this man. She stood in front of him, knife in hand and said.

    ¡°You, I won¡¯t even speak your despicable name. Did you know? Back in the day, I used to be in love with you, but now I just want to torture you, and make it so that you will never feel pleasure again!¡± She said, she then placed the knife in her hand near a certain body part that all men treasure.

    ¡°NO NO NO, DON''T!¡± The man screamed, realizing what she was planning to do. Lilia slid the knife down, causing his member to fall to the floor. The man screamed in horrific pain, as he felt the pain that no man should ever feel. Lilia walked to the next man, causing another horrifying scream, then another. The floor was decorated with three penises. The women looked on in fright and horror, as they realized that the men, who had become their loved ones, would never be able to be with them again, would never grant them children. The three men continued screaming and struggling in their chains, trying to assure themselves that their important bits were still there, but to no avail. Aylard was just looking in joy, laughing at their pains. After the screams had subsided another man walked into the room. It was Kato, he also looked joyful to see the situation. He had long since hated those insects for hurting his love.

    Lilia was happy to see him walk in as well.

    ¡°Kato is here now let me introduce him to you insects. This is Kato my lover, or fianc¨¦, and we intend to marry soon. Well we also intended to marry soon a few years ago. Well, it¡¯s not like we¡¯re short on time.¡± She said and laughed. Then she returned to her more than horrified guests. She grabbed the arm of the man she used to once like and cut a long streak all along his arm, causing the man to grimace in pain. She then started to cut to the sides from the streak, under the skin, so that the skin could be lifted up. She continued cutting with great concentration, all the while he was screaming in agonizing pain. Soon she had cut around his entire arm, making it devoid of any skin. It was done with such precision that the muscles were still intact and not visibly cut. The man had been screaming constantly throughout the procedure, without rest. Even now that she was finished he was still screaming and flailing around.

    Then she had another idea. First she grabbed a thin, long needle, then his penis. She put the penis into his own mouth and pierced the needle through his cheeks, making sure he couldn¡¯t spit out his penis.

    ¡°Hahaha, this fits you good! A man that speaks with a dick in his mouth! You were always flirting with me, trying to get in my pants. You even succeeded, but look where that got you!¡± She said, laughing her lungs out. Then Kato walked forwards.

    ¡°So, he took your virginity?¡± He asked. Lilia was a bit startled but still answered,

    ¡°Well, I hate to admit it, but he did. Even though I was so old at the time, well into my twenties¡­¡± She said slightly embarrassed. Kato walked up to the man, now referred to as Insect 1.

    ¡°I see. Then let me return you the favour for taking care of my fianc¨¦.¡± Kato said calmly. Insect 1 looked at him nervously, but couldn¡¯t say anything, since his mouth was stuffed with his dick. Kato kneeled down, then placed his hand around the area where the anus of Insect 1 was located. Then, thrusted! He pushed his entire fist into Insect 1¡¯s anus. Insect 1 screamed in pain as gusts of blood flowed out from his rear. Both Lilia, Aylard and I were laughing hysterically at the sight. That was really unexpected. It seemed like Kato held a bit of a grudge against him for taking his lovers first time. Kato pulled his fist back out, then turned to leave.

    ¡°I¡¯ll go back now, I just came here to see them. Have fun.¡± He said, then left. We were still laughing uncontrollably, while Insect 1 was grimacing and moaning in pain. He just had his anal virginity taken from him in such a gruesome manner, did not sounds very pleasant.

    ¡°Aylard, aren¡¯t you going to do something. You don¡¯t have a girlfriend, so you could rid yourself of your sexual frustrations on the girls¡­¡± Lilia said in a weird tone while winking at Aylard. Aylard stepped forwards, then pulled down his pants to reveal his important rod.

    ¡°Good idea. I haven¡¯t done it in who knows how long.¡± Aylard said then walked over to one of the girls and penetrated her. The female insect was fighting back, but didn¡¯t stand a chance, so she could only let him do her.

    ¡°Oi, I wasn¡¯t serious! Please don¡¯t fuck them in front of me! I don¡¯t want to watch my brother while he¡¯s raping helpless girls!¡± Lilia said, discontent. Aylard looked back and laughed at her.

    ¡°Then leave the room. You can come back when I¡¯m finished.¡± He said. I chuckled at them, then left the room, followed by Lilia, who didn¡¯t look too happy. Since I was finished with the insect adventurer group I went to find Eric. I wanted to see if there were any results in finding the traitor. Well I did know that there was one guy who had infiltrated the Guild, but he wasn¡¯t in a very important position, and so far those guys hadn¡¯t even took notice of us, so I didn¡¯t think it was him. But if the search didn¡¯t yield any results then it might be him.

    I arrived at Eric¡¯s office, and knocked on the door. ¡°Come in¡± he told me, so I opened the door and entered.

    ¡°Ah, Lord Isaac, it¡¯s you. Let me guess, you¡¯re here about the traitor. I was just about to go find you to report about the matter¡± he said. I sat down on the other side of his desk and said,

    ¡°Yes, I came to see you about him. Any results?¡±

    ¡°Yes we managed to find him relatively quickly and have already questioned him. It doesn¡¯t seem like it¡¯s only a single assassin group going against us, but instead almost all of them joined together. But this was to be expected since we took most of the market by storm, so they would naturally retaliate.¡± He said.

    ¡°All of them? That¡¯s good, it gives us an opportunity. Let¡¯s absorb them into our own organization. This way our number of weaker assassins will increase exponentially. We can also take the more talented assassins here to the castle for training. Do we know where their HQ¡¯s are?¡± I asked.

    ¡°Yes, it seems like all the leaders and the strongest assassins have gathered at a single place to discuss how to take care of us. What shall we do Lord?¡± He asked. I remained silent for a while, thinking about our options.

    ¡°Well, taking care of them should be easy. They probably don¡¯t have any B rankers, or at least not many. But for the sake of putting up a show, let¡¯s gather our strongest assassins and guards, then waltz into that little base of theirs. From there they¡¯ll either surrender, or die it¡¯s as simple as that. As for which vampires will go, it will be me, you, Kato and Aylard. The rest will stay back and take care of the vampires. Also tell them to take their vampire prot¨¦g¨¦s with them. We leave tomorrow, so prepare everything¡± I said. Eric stood up and replied with a ¡°Yes Sir!¡±, then I left. The next day a group was gathered outside in the main courtyard. There were ten elite assassins, gifted to us from Valen. Another fifteen elite guards were present, making it twenty five C rankers. The other smaller assassins groups might not have any C rankers, maybe only their leaders were C ranked, but we already had this many, and that wasn¡¯t even the main force. There were also four B rank vampires, one of which could even compare with a middle stage A ranker. That was me of course. The other three could compare with a normal peak stage B ranker. Other than these guys there were three more vampires that were at the D and C stages. I, the progenitor could skip a whole rank, while the pureblood could skip three stages, so if they were at the early stage, then they would compare to a normal peak stage, while a normal vampire could transcend one or two stages. So even though two of the vampires were D ranked, they could still compare with a C rank, since they were late and peak stage.

    Thus our group of 32 left the still unnamed castle and village, to journey to where those weak assassins were hiding. Surprisingly enough, they were actually very close to us, it only took two days to get there. We arrived at a castle, nowhere near as amazing as ours, but still a castle. A few armed men ran out from the castle.

    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.

    ¡°Leave or die!¡± they yelled at us. The response they got from us was our assassins fired off arrows as quick as lighting, piercing their small brains. Instantly almost all of them died. Only three of the about thirty guards were left. There were only ten assassins with us, but they had each fired off three arrows, dealing with a group of thirty in an instant. I walked forwards.

    ¡°You three insects, go get your puny leaders and bring them here. Let them know that angering us was not a good choice!¡± I yelled at them. The three guards or assassins quivered in fear, then quickly ran and stumbled away. Moments later, a large group of assassins came out of the castle. Five men walked forwards in front of all the others, side to side.

    ¡°What is the meaning of this?! You come waltzing in here and kill thirty of our assassins, surely you don¡¯t expect to leave here alive?¡± One of the five asked. I smiled at his stupidity, but alas he couldn¡¯t imagine what calamity had struck him.

    ¡°Leave here alive? Don¡¯t kid yourself, you might have the larger number, but just one of us four would be enough to eliminate all of you. But I will give you a chance to live, and will only kill half of you here, then the rest will have the choice of serving me or dying. Even though you went and plotted against us, and even killed one of our assassins, I can still be so unimaginably merciful. You should thank the gods for your luck.¡± I said.

    ¡°Preposterous! Only someone at the A rank, or border of it could do something like that!¡± he screamed his lungs out. He seemed to have realized who we were.

    ¡°Kato, kill half the people present.¡± I said in monotonous voice.

    ¡°Yes.¡± Kato replied, then lifted one of his arms up. Suddenly the skies started darkening and pillars made of an extremely dark material sprouted out from the ground, surrounding the group of mortal assassins. Suddenly the pillars formed a wall, and started contracting towards the assassins, forming a box. Half of the assassins were inside this box. ¡®Coincidentally¡¯ all of these assassins were the weakest. We wouldn¡¯t want all the assassins with potential to die on us, now would we?

    ¡°There, I have showed you mercy and only killed half of you. Anyone that subjects himself to me will live, while the rest dies. As I said this the dark box disappeared. The only thing that was left was splatters of blood and pieces of flesh. The other side was horrified by the sight, and it only took an instant for two thirds of them to already submit themselves.

    ¡°Good choice, but this offer also stands for the rest of you. Even you puny leaders. What are you waiting for? You will be allowed to continue operating at your respective bases as before, the only difference is that you work for me. We will only take a few of you with potential away to the main base.¡± I explained to them. Those leaders weren¡¯t foolish, so they submitted themselves. After the leaders submitted, the rest soon followed.

    ¡°Good, you¡¯re not complete morons.¡± I said, then turned to Eric and the rest.

    ¡°Go bind the leaders with the blood bond. And Eric, have your boy stay here to see if he can find anyone with potential, then have him bring them back. Eric you should also stay here for a while longer and explain things to them, like how we are going to do things from now on. I leave everything here in your control. Now hurry up and do the bond thing so we can leave¡± I said. After the bond was established, much to the mortals¡¯ confusion, Kato, Aylard and I left. The rest stayed behind to take care of things on this side.

    Now we had a lot more assassins, but most of them weren¡¯t very good, but hopefully we would get some good seeds out of this. Since we were travelling alone this time, it only took a couple of hours to get back home. Back home, I went to check on the prisoners. They had definitely not had a very good two days. They were missing fingers, some were missing an eye, and so on, but the most miserable was definitely Insect 1. He had both his eyes poked out, his ears were cut off, as well as his nose, and he had a very thick pole sticking out of his ass. He was miserable, and could barely scream, since his mouth was stuffed with his dick. It wasn¡¯t just his own anymore, but the other ones as well were in there. Inside his empty eye sockets, there were piles of salt, causing constant pain. The ones that did have an eye or two looked at me miserably, still a hint of hope in them. Being satisfied, I left the room again. It was time to go turn Alicia, so I went to find her. She was together with her sister in her room. When I entered the room, Alice stood up and bowed.

    ¡°Greetings Master¡± she said. Alicia also stood up excited. She was pretty sure that it was time.

    ¡°Alice go find two slave girls and bring them here.¡± I ordered. Alice immediately left to tend to my order. Even though the girls were twins, Alice still looked like an older sister. That¡¯s because Alicia had been fed my blood for years, so she hadn¡¯t aged beyond eighteen, even though they were twenty years old. They also had different eye colours now, since Alicia¡¯s had turned red, like that of a vampires, just a bit weaker, so no one would think they¡¯re twins anymore. I walked up to her and grabbed her hips.

    ¡°Let¡¯s have a bit of fun before we start.¡± I said and kissed her. She didn¡¯t refuse and eagerly kissed me back, hugging my body strongly. I tore the clothes directly off her, ruining another set of clothes. I then slid my hand down her panties, and groped her breasts, hidden by her bra, with my other hand. I let my fingers slide inside her and started massaging her insides. It only took a moment to get wet and slimy. We broke off the kiss, and Alicia took off her bra and slid down her panties in a seductive way. I took out my dick and grabbed Alicia. I lifted her up and put my rod inside her wet, tight pussy. She put her legs around me and started moaning in pleasure as I fucked her. I licked her neck then bit into her. She was thoroughly enjoying it, even going up and down by herself, as I held her. While I was draining her blood and having sex with her, Alice returned with two girls. When she saw us her entire face got red, and the slaves even a bit embarrassed too. Soon enough her body was almost empty of blood, so I let my blood essence venom flow into her, causing her to orgasm, just before she lost consciousness. But I wasn¡¯t satisfied yet, so I continued fucking her in front of her sister, but it wasn¡¯t the same when she wasn¡¯t awake.

    ¡°Alice, take off your panties, you¡¯ll have to do as substitution.¡± I said. Alice was embarrassed, but she complied, and took off her panties from under her skirt, then bent over, holding unto the edge of a chair. I walked over to her and put it straight inside her, not bothering with foreplay. Her pussy quickly got wet as she moaned from my cock. It didn¡¯t seem like she was a virgin either, as she could easily fit my large member inside. I continued humping her for a good while, until my sperm flowed inside her. She had a very ecstatic look on her face.

    ¡°Holy shit, that was good!¡± she exclaimed, ¡°Master Isaac can I be your concubine too?¡± she said unwillingly. As she realized what she said she held her mouth in shame.

    ¡°I¡¯ll think about it, but maybe it would be better to go see Aylard. I think he¡¯s getting lonely these days¡­¡± I said. I might take her as a concubine in the future if I felt like it, but it would be nice if she went with Aylard instead, since he was single. Eric was the super professional type, and didn¡¯t think about relationships much. He said he would rather wait till later, he was in no hurry, after all we¡¯re immortal. But anyways I might or might not take her as a concubine, it depended on how my feelings grew for her. I would only take someone as a concubine if I liked them romantically and a wife if I loved them. I was intending to take Alicia as a wife soon, as our love had grown. But for Alice I didn¡¯t feel much, but I might have sex with her again if I was in need of a quick release, since it was only sex. Neither Amelia, Serana nor Alicia would mind if I had sex with others, or so they said. But they did say that they wanted me to get their opinions before getting another lover, since that was another matter.

    For us vampires there was a difference between just sex and sex between lovers. Just having sex with a random person was just relieving stress, while sex with a lover was much more passionate and felt much better. But I still didn¡¯t want my wives and concubine to have sex with others, at least not without my permission. Maybe if they really felt desirous I would permit them to have a side person or two, who knows? Maybe the concubines. If I didn¡¯t they would never have the possibility to know what two or more penises at a time feels like. But it was still unlikely.

    End of chapter 16

 Chapter 17: Tragedy Strikes

    Thanks for all your poll votes guys! The name has been chosen, and the poll deleted.

    Chapter 17: Tragedy Strikes

    After an hour of waiting, Alicia woke up. She seemed to be slightly confused, not remembering why she was there. She looked around her, seeing me, her sister and the two slave girls. Soon the realization fell upon her. She looked at me.

    ¡°What do I do now?¡± She asked, even though she had seen it before and knew very well what she had to do. Maybe she just didn¡¯t want to kill the two girls. But there was no going around it. When she would eventually start feeding, she wouldn¡¯t be able to stop drinking and would enter a blood frenzy. While I technically would be able to stop her from killing them, I didn¡¯t want to. It would serve as a good initiation ceremony for new vampires, and would help them learn killing isn¡¯t so bad.

    ¡°You feed on the girls, until there is no blood in their body.¡± I said. Alicia nodded, then walked over to the girls. After a moment, there were two dead girls on the floor, and Alicia had completed her initiation into vampirism. Killing the two slaves didn¡¯t pose much of a problem for her, since she had spent years being a vampire ghoul under me, and her mentality had changed. After all she had been pretty young when I first fed her my blood, and now she is only twenty years old. Now that she was finished she looked to her sister.

    ¡°What about her?¡± She asked.

    ¡°You can turn her yourself. But you should wait a few months or years. I turned Amelia right after I myself was made into a vampire, and it completely exhausted me, so you better wait. I was thinking that maybe I should take her as a concubine as well. What do you think?¡± I asked her. Alicia was pleasantly surprised.

    ¡°If she wants to, then please do! And what about me? You said that you would marry me in the future right? Now that I am a pureblood vampire, I feel like my status shouldn¡¯t be too much below them.¡± Alicia said. Alice stood on the side lines excited. She had asked Isaac before to take her as a concubine as well, but had thought that he would refuse her, but now it seemed like her wish would come true. It first sounded like he didn¡¯t want her, but after an hour of thinking he had decided to take her as a concubine.

    AN: AKA the wish of the readers.

    ¡°Alice actually dared to ask me to take her as a concubine, so that shouldn¡¯t be a problem.¡± I said with a smile,

    ¡°And I was thinking about having our marriage in the near future, dear soon to be third wife. It¡¯s a bit weird that I have more wives than concubines, don¡¯t you think?¡± I said. Alicia jumped in happiness, and hugged me tightly. If I was a mere mortal human, then I would be crushed.

    ¡°That¡¯s great! You hear that Alice? You¡¯ll be a concubine from now on!¡± She exclaimed.

    After that time passed in peace. I married Alicia three months later, and she moved into the main bedchamber and Alice became a concubine. A few months later Alicia bolstered our vampire ranks by making Alice into a vampire. Thus two years went by.

    3rd person.

    In the city of Fenlai, in a certain dark building, hidden in the slums. There was a group of people meeting. They were wearing dark robes, their faces hidden in the shadows, concealing their identities. These were the royal investigators sent to investigate the death of the warrior princess of the Kingdom of Kalderon. They had spent several years now investigating all sorts of matters relating to this, but had not found much. But they did find something, and this something was not in the favour of Charles Fenlai, the Lord Commander.

    They had found that a few days before the death of the princess, the Lord Commander had left the city of Fenlai with a group of people. In this group all the knights were present as well as few others, including his only concubine and some unknowns. Only a few days after, Charles returned, but the unknowns weren¡¯t there. Shortly after that he had married the concubine since it was discovered that she was actually the sister of one of the most powerful men in the prefecture, Isaac Coldblood, but that wasn¡¯t important to the case. Isaac had only barely entered the B rank, so he wasn¡¯t much of a suspect. They decided that Charles had sent the concubine somewhere, most likely to her brother¡¯s place, since she didn¡¯t return with him, and had for some reason killed the princess on the way. However they didn¡¯t know why. Maybe she had insulted him, and he had killed her in anger, thinking that it wouldn¡¯t be discovered. But alas, it was discovered.

    The royal investigators decided that their investigation was over, and returned back to the capital. They had never spent so much time on a single investigation, but the crown prince had said that this case was extremely important, and that they were not to make any mistakes at all, so they decided to take their time and thoroughly investigate everything. In fact they had discovered that Charles left the city that time a long time ago, but they decided to investigate more, just in case they found something else.

    Thus they spent a long time travelling back to the royal capital, to report to the king. When the king heard, he was angry, but kept his calm. The prince however, was infuriated.

    ¡°Charles Fenlai, that dog! He dared kill my wife, I¡¯ll make sure his entire family dies! Father, this is clearly treason, we must deal with him! Let me take the Royal Knights with me and deal with him. I¡¯ll slaughter everyone in the palace, but I won¡¯t hurt the civilians of the city, don¡¯t worry.¡± The prince said. The king sat still, brooding, until he decided. Not that there was much to decide, since it was clear that this was treason to the crown, and he didn¡¯t doubt his investigators, but he had been king for two hundred years now, since he was an A ranker, so he learned to never make a hasty decision. Even though he was two hundred years old, he didn¡¯t look older than fifty. He might even be able to live another two hundred years.

    ¡°Alright, my eldest son. You shall lead the Royal Knights and take your revenge. Kill everyone in the palace. This way we will send a message to the others so they don¡¯t do anything stupid, but don¡¯t kill anyone outside the palace, so that they will know that we are fair. Now, my son, go and paint the palace red with blood!¡± the king said, his voice showing his anger at the last sentence. The prince saluted, then turned around and left. He quickly gathered fifty Royal Knights. These knights were all A rankers, even one or two of them would be enough to cleanse the palace, but the prince wouldn¡¯t let anyone get away. Everyone in the palace had to die. The guards, the soldiers, the knights, the servants, the cooks, they all had to die, and most of all, Charles Fenlai had to die!

    The armada of Royal Knights left the capital the very next day. They sped all the way to the Fenlai prefecture at full speed. With their strong horses, it only took a month. They only made a single stop on the way, and that was right before they arrived at the capital. They rested for two days, then continued. They arrived outside the city. The guards and Charles were confused, but they didn¡¯t stop them. After all they recognized the emblem of the royal family. After they were inside the city, they marched straight to the palace, where the Lord Commander stood to meet them with his knights, who only numbered ten, as well as his wife and infant son. But the moment they arrived, the slaughter commenced. The Royal Knights immediately killed everyone on sight, surrounding Charles and his knights.

    ¡°Prince Victor, what is the meaning of this?!¡± Charles shouted. The prince, known as Victor Kalderon, looked at him in disgust and fury.

    ¡°Charles Fenlai, you dare ask me this question? You killed my wife, and still dare ask me this question?!¡± He shouted back in anger and sadness, combined with his never ending fury. He couldn¡¯t hold it back anymore and charged straight at him, plunging his sword straight through his chest. Charles puked up blood as he looked at him in confusion. He wanted to ask what he meant, but he wasn¡¯t able to say a word as the blood was flowing. Soon the light in his eyes faded away. He had died. Alice, his wife screamed and ran to his side, trying to stop the bleeding, as he laid on the ground, but it was to no avail, since he was already dead.

    ¡°So you are his wife? Then that must be his son. I shall not feel satisfied until the both of you are dead, and until everyone else in this palace is dead. You shall serve as the funeral sacrifices of my late wife.¡± Victor said, as he raised his sword once more.

    ¡°No don¡¯t! You won¡¯t get away with this! My brother won¡¯t let you get¡­¡± She said, but was cut short as the sword had fallen to her throat, decapitating her. As her head rolled, the sword didn¡¯t stop, but instead fell directly to the small toddler, also taking his like. Thus the Lord Commander, his wife and child, had died.

    At this moment in a distant, dark castle, hidden several hundred miles deep in a forest, in dark room, a certain man awoke. Isaac had felt a connection in his mind sever. This was precisely the connection that was formed between him and his sister when he gave her his blood.

    ¡°nonononononono, this cannot be true. It can¡¯t! IT CAN¡¯T BE!!!!¡± He screamed his lungs out, waking up his wives. He jumped straight out the window and charged at his fastest speeds towards the capital. Even a Royal Knight at the peak of rank A would be shocked by his speed. He was enraged and was running at speeds, even he himself shouldn¡¯t be able to. In only a single day he arrived at the city. He charged straight in, causing winds that blew away the innocent bystanders, even killing some. Normally when a vampire ran, it would at most cause a slight breeze, or even no wind at all, but since he was enraged and was even running at breakneck speeds, he couldn¡¯t control it at all, so he caused a hurricane wherever he ran.

    Soon he was inside the palace. The sight, the sight appalled him, it stunned him. He saw the corpse of his sister, decapitated, lying on top of her husband. To their side was the mutilated corpse of a toddler. Even though he had only seen him once, he instantly recognized him as Wade, the child of his sister, Alice, and Charles. He looked a meter away from them where a ball of hair was. It was a head. The head of his sister.

    ¡°AHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!¡± He screamed, screamed so loudly that windows shattered and ears bled. There was not a single person in the entire city that couldn¡¯t hear it. The people that were nearby even knelt and held their heads in pain. Some even fainted. Eventually he finally stopped. The guards rushed in to see who it was.

    ¡°Who¡¯s that? What¡¯s he doing here? How didn¡¯t we see him?¡± The guards asked, but then one guard walked a step forwards.

    ¡°You don¡¯t recognize him? That¡¯s Isaac Coldblood. He was the brother of Lady Alice, then Lord Commander¡¯s wife. He must be enraged by his sister¡¯s death, but did you hear that. That scream was inhuman, it was so loud. Just what stage has he reached? It probably him that caused that sudden storm just now. That was the strength of someone that has at least reached the peak of rank A. But he¡¯s so young, as far as I know, he isn¡¯t even thirty yet! The Kingdom might have made a big enemy now. The influence of his family is great as well.¡± The guard said. The other guards nodded in understanding.

    Suddenly Isaac turned his head slowly towards them, his hair seemed to be fluttering in non-existent wind, and his glowing red eyes pierced holes into the very souls of the guards.

    ¡°Who did this?¡± He asked slowly, his voice deep and menacing, shaking their souls, making their minds clouded. The guards looked at him horrified. Just his stare and voice could make them shake in fear. Some guards even got some wet spots on their clothes.

    Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.

    ¡°L-l-l-lord I-I-Isa-sac, it was t-t-th-the R-Royal F-F-Family!¡± That one guard said, as he tried to control his fear.

    ¡°I see.¡± He replied, as he slowly stood up. Then his body blurred and he disappeared, not leaving a single trace. The guards fell to their butts in relief. Isaac had seemed like a horrifying monster.

    As soon as he left, he charged straight back home again. This time he wasn¡¯t able to go at speeds surpassing his own ability, so it took a few days. Something like that happening was extremely rare, and would only be triggered by extreme anger and sorrow, and would fade away as soon as you calmed down. Keeping such a state for a whole day, was even rarer. When he got back into the castle, the first person he met was Kato.

    ¡°Isaac! You¡¯re back! Why did you disappear all of a sudden? We tried to follow you, but you were way too fast, you disappeared in flash.¡± Kato said. He looked concerned.

    ¡°Gather everyone in the meeting hall. I¡¯ll tell you there.¡± Isaac said. Kato was surprised at the tone of his voice, which made him worry even more. He immediately went to get everyone.

    1st person, Isaac.

    I walked straight to the meeting hall. I was infuriated, and I was most of all, sorrowful. My dear sister had died. The sister I didn¡¯t see for a decade, then got reunited with, to only spend a few weeks together, had died. She was dead, completely dead. Didn¡¯t even have a head. The moment I saw her body, I had decided that whoever was responsible would die, and his entire clan would die! It was the Royal Family, so the Royal Family will die! But I have to wait, we¡¯re still not powerful enough to destroy them. The king is currently two hundred years old, and had another two hundred years left. As for his sons, they¡¯re all young and have at least three hundred years left. In that time my clan will have grown much more powerful than it is now. I¡¯ll wait, and then when the time is right, I will annihilate the Royal Family of the Kingdom of Kalderon!

    When I arrived at the meeting hall I sat down on my seat and waited. I sat there for what seemed like an eternity, while the others came one by one. No one dared to speak to me, since I seemed quite unapproachable and had a dark air about me. After a while everyone was there. They sat there, waiting for me to begin.

    ¡°My sister, Alice, is dead.¡± I said these five words, no more, no less.

    ¡°W-w-what?¡± My mother said. Her face was pale, paler than usual.

    ¡°Is what you said true?¡± My father continued.

    ¡°Yes, she died. A few days ago, I felt my connection to her disappear, so I rushed to the capital to see what happened. Everyone in the palace was dead. The floors and walls were painted red. They were all dead. I saw them. Alice, Charles and Wade, they were all dead.¡± I said. Everyone was astonished.

    ¡°Who killed her?¡± My father asked. He looked me into the eyes, there was a dead serious look in him.

    ¡°I¡¯m not completely sure. I just know that it was someone from the Royal Family, so they have to all die. So we need to strengthen our forces. It¡¯s a bit too early to get a lot of vampires, but we can train humans and strengthen a few of them with blood. We also need to improve our individual strengths. We do get naturally stronger as we age, but we can quicken it a little bit by training, and we also need to practice magic, that doesn¡¯t improve on its own, but our talent is way above that of a normal human. And things like swordsmanship and archery, we have the potential to become the most skilled in the world, since we are eternal and have heightened talents. So from today and onwards train, train, and train with one goal in mind. To destroy the Royal Clan of this petty Kingdom of Kalderon. Then in one to two hundred years, the Royal Clan will be no more. And one more thing. We still haven¡¯t chosen a name for our castle, or the surrounding village. Thus I have decided upon two names. The castle shall from now on be known as Sanguine Regis, and the village shall be Bloodmoon Village.¡± I said. When I was finished I stood up and left, without saying a single word more. Everyone else also went to do their things. From today onwards our days would be a bit busier, since we needed to increase our overall power.

    There was still one more thing I needed to do. I walked down to those deep dungeons, hidden deep beneath Sanguine Regis. Deep in the dungeons, I arrived at that hallway with the thick metal doors. I opened one of them, and was met with darkness. As I walked in, a fire started on the candle. Marcus, my brother, looked up to me. These days he hadn¡¯t had as many insane fits, but his mood was even worse.

    ¡°Brother, Alice has died.¡± I said. His eyes widened, and his face paled. He immediately sat up.

    ¡°What happened? Did she die giving birth?¡± He asked.

    ¡°Brother, it¡¯s been over a year since she gave birth. Of course that wasn¡¯t the reason.¡± I said, my mood dark. Even though it had only been a few years since he entered this room, he had lost his sense of time. This was largely attributed to his abstinence from blood.

    ¡°No brother, she was killed. She was killed by those despicable humans you value so much. They killed her? The fucking humans! The Royal Family at that! But don¡¯t worry, we¡¯ll get our revenge. We will kill all of them. Perhaps this event will at least help you see the light.¡± I said. Marcus was even more shocked now.

    ¡°She was killed? By the humans? The humans I value so much? How can that be? How can that be? How can that be? The humans killed her? It was the humans? Alice? My sister Alice? They killed my sister Alice? Who killed my sister Alice? It was the humans? The despicable humans? The fucking humans! But the humans are good. I like humans, I want to kill them! They have to die! But humans are nice, but why did I value them like that again? I want to eat them!¡± He said. He was looking at the floor, then at me, then he looked around himself, then maybe at me again. His sanity was flowing down the drain. I got slightly worried. He was quickly losing his sanity, but at least his seemed to not like humans as much anymore. I grabbed his shoulders and started shaking him.

    ¡°Marcus calm down! Relax. It will all be fine, as long as you see that humans are bugs, and their lives have no value.¡± I said. Marcus stopped his mutterings and looked at me.

    ¡°Your right. We¡¯re immortal, so we have all the time in the world. We can destroy them with time.¡± He said.

    ¡°Good. I will give you a slave to feed on in a few days, when you have calmed down completely. If you feed on her voluntarily, then I will let you leave this cell, to once again meet your wife and children. Until then.¡± I said and left him to his own devices.

    It was time to start training. Every single day I would train myself in swordsmanship, archery, hand and feet martial arts and magic. I spent ten hours every day training, dividing it up evenly. I wasn¡¯t the only one that was training this hard. Kato trained just as much, and even spent time on swordsmanship as well. The same with Lilia and Aylard. They were either training themselves or the guards and recruits. Eric also trained when he wasn¡¯t managing the assassin business. I had left most of the assassin stuff to him. Even all three of my wives trained together. My family as well. Marcus had gotten out, but his personality had changed ever since he was a human. Well, all our personalities changed, but his changed the most. He seemed to despise humans with a passion, and he was slightly insane, but it didn¡¯t bother anyone too much. Maybe only his wife a bit. As for ten year old Little Isaac, he seemed to like him more these days.

    Marcus also trained hard, just as much as me, but he was still the weakest one of us here. His strength was at the bottom of E rank. Originally he had been quite up there in the E rank, but after going through his maturing period without feeding he only weakened. No he would have to spend a few years to gain strength, but sooner or later he would recover to become a normal pureblood.

    One day I was standing in a courtyard, together with Kato. We were about to spar, and we were only allowed to use magic.

    ¡°Isaac, are you ready?¡± Kato asked with a smirk on his face. He looked confident.

    ¡°Ready when you are.¡± I replied, equally as confident, then got in a battle position. Kato followed. Since we were both ready, I decided to begin. I pointed my hand forwards and formed an ice spike and sent it flying. Kato Responded by lightly tapping the ground and a thin translucent wall of ice appeared in front of him. It was so thin that you could barely notice it. My ice spike clashed with the wall, and the ice spike completely shattered.

    ¡°So that¡¯s how it is, huh?¡± I said, still smirking. This time I put both hands up and formed another Ice spike, then another and another, until there were countless ice spikes flying towards Kato. Every single ice spike confronted the translucent ice wall, and every single ice spike shattered into countless pieces.

    ¡°It¡¯s going to take more than that to break the wall.¡± Kato said with a too confident smile on his face. I got slightly annoyed to tell the truth. I decided to use a more powerful spell. I put both my hands forwards and started channelling my mana to from another ice spike. This ice spike grew and grew in size, then started changing its shape, until it looked like a five meter long blue sword. The sword fell down towards Kato at lightning speeds, freezing the air along its way, until it clashed against his wall. This time the wall shattered, but much to my dismay, Kato pointed his finger at my sword and touched it as it fell. Suddenly the sword started cracking and shattered into many pieces, as small ice spears pierced out of the sword, only to melt in an instant.

    ¡°Alright Isaac, not it¡¯s my turn. Ready yourself.¡± Kato said. Kato clasped his hands together, and suddenly huge ice spikes started piercing up through the ground, quickly going towards me in a line. When they appeared in front of me they suddenly split apart and started surrounding me in a circle. I looked around me as the quickly surrounded me in a wall, then stopped. Just a moment after they stopped, thousands upon thousands small spikes pierced towards me in a flash. I quickly clasped my hands together and made shield around me, but it only managed to block a few of them. A few hundred still pierced through my body and coloured the ice blood red. Soon the ice disappeared and I let my shield fade away, then fell to my knees.

    I was shocked, DESPAIRED! I had lost! Lost against Kato my own vampire junior! Ah, the despair! I was on my knees, eyes wide open looking into nothingness, my mouth gaping.

    ¡°Now now, Isaac, don¡¯t be too sad. It¡¯s only natural that I won, since we only used magic. I¡¯m several ranks above you in magic, so it¡¯s only natural that I¡¯m stronger than you in that department. If we were to fight seriously, then I wouldn¡¯t stand a chance against you.¡± Kato said, trying to ease my pain. I rose up and grabbed his shoulders.

    ¡°Yes yes, that¡¯s right. It¡¯s only because you have a head start over me in magic, that¡¯s why.¡± I said, then left, still shocked to the deepest pits of my mind. On that very day, I decided that I had to improve my magic to the point where even Kato wouldn¡¯t be my match.

    Like that the vampires of the Sanguine Regis spent ten years training quietly.

    End of chapter 17.

 Chapter 18: Barca

    Chapter 18: Barca

    It has been ten years since the death of Alice Fenlai, sister of Isaac Coldblood. These years had been quiet, yet eventful. The vampires of the Coldblood Clan had spent them training hard, trying their best to increase their powers. Isaac himself had grown and trained and reached the peak stage of B rank, and entered the realm of a warlock. For mages the ranks were Beginner Mage, Acolyte Mage, Elementary Mage, Half Circle Magus, Full Circle Magus, Warlock etc¡­,but it was also divided into stages like the power ranks. They were Low, Middle and High. Isaac was a High Warlock after ten years of hard training and was only a step away from the next realm, known as the Arcanist. He had spent most of his time training magic, since magic power didn¡¯t grow on its own. Kato, his best friend, had also become a High Warlock, and he had also entered the middle stage of rank B.

    Amelia and Serana were both late B rankers, but Amelia was also a Middle Warlock, while Serana was only a Low Warlock. As for Alicia, she was at the early stage of rank B and only a High Full Circle Magus, so she was still quite a bit away from the other wives power levels. Bogat had become a late stage B ranker, and a Low Warlock. He didn¡¯t have as much time to train as everyone else, since he had to manage the clan¡¯s day to day operations. As for Lilia and Aylard, the twins, they were both late B rankers and High Full Circle Magus¡¯. They were very equal in power these days. Eric had arrived at the late stage B rank as well, and was a Middle Warlock.

    1st person, Isaac.

    It wasn¡¯t only our personal strength that had increased these years, the Coldblood Clan¡¯s trade empire had increased in power as well. As for the Fenlai Prefecture, we were in absolute control of it, even with a new Lord in power. We had also expanded our branches in all our different trades all over the kingdom. It could be said that our influence was the strongest in the Royal Capital now. Ten years ago we had begun to rapidly expand our organization. We started buying out other organizations and eliminated rival businesses. We used our assassins very well to kill the rivals who didn¡¯t submit to us. We took all the providers of raw goods under our control all over the kingdom. We also bought out all the mercenary guilds and even the rogue guilds and adventuring guilds as well. There was not a single person who didn¡¯t know the Coldblood Name. We also had our own crest now that was known by all, and is worn by our merchants and mercenaries. It was a sanguine drop of blood, embedded into a cold blue moon. We had also incorporated our orphanages into every single major city of the kingdom, and with the help of the mercenaries and rogues guild we had an all-encompassing information network. There was not much that could escape our detection, as we had eyes and ears all over the kingdom.

    As the years passed by, the economy of the Kalderon Kingdom came completely under our Clan¡¯s control. Thus the first stage of our plan had come into fruition. Influentially we were now on par with the Royal Clan. The only organization that could stand up to us was the Royal Clan. While we owned a lot of businesses in the kingdom, we didn¡¯t own all of them. The Royal Clan personally managed around fifteen percent of them, while we had eighty percent. The rest was controlled by third parties. Even though we possessed far more businesses than the Royal Family, they were still far above us in strength. Because they had the Royal Knights. There were around two hundred of them, and they were all A rankers and they trained in a special method, only known as the Light Arts and Shadow Arts, which allowed them to beat people one stage above them. Just the training you had to go through was hellish. As for us, we only had a handful of A rank equivalents. If we were to fight now, we would be decimated.

    But that matters not. We would take our time, like a spider awaiting its prey to fall into its web, and strike when the moment was right. Now there was only one assassin organization in the entire Kingdom of Kalderon, and that was the Coldblood branch of the ShadowBlades. With the help of Valen we had subjugated all the other branches, and I was now one of the major leaders in the organization, only second to Valen himself, and equal to few others. The last time I met the other leaders, which was very recently, we had a spar to test our strength. While I still couldn¡¯t win against Valen, I could fight him now without being beaten in a flash. This was not only because of me being equivalent to a normal peak A ranker, but because of my mastery with weapons was very high. As vampires we mastered weapons quickly. Ten years of me practising could be equal to over a hundred years of someone else, or even several hundreds of years.

    After we had subjugated all the other assassin organizations we tasked them with investigating the nobles of the kingdom, and then to slowly kill the nobles who were loyal supporters to the king, weakening his sphere of influence. Anyone that was potentially against the king was to be reported to me. If we found someone good, then I could use them. But it could be troublesome if our assassins and spies were discovered, or if they harboured any suspicions. So we decided to try and distract them a bit, and have them focus their attention elsewhere. So we gathered all the leaders of the mercenary guilds and rogue guilds. The fact that the Coldbloods controlled all the guilds was a bit of a secret so we could use them for this. We ordered them to have the mercenary disguise themselves as bandits and go raid the villages around the kingdom,and have them pillage, raid, raze villages to the ground, and rape the women inside. Since such large number of bandits would appear out of nowhere the kingdom would think that it might be an organized coalition of bandit clans, so they started sending out troops to try and stop them, which resulted in lots of unrest around the kingdom.

    With our information net we also discovered many bandit groups. With the allure of money and gold we put them under our employment and had them raid relentlessly. Of course there would be no proof that they were working for us. They didn¡¯t even know who they worked for, just that they were rich, and they couldn¡¯t spill the beans even if they were tortured and killed. As for the fake mercenary bandits, they weren¡¯t allowed to carry their identification cards when doing their duties, and they were sworn to secrecy as well. Whenever the army managed to capture any of them, they would commit suicide. They wouldn¡¯t be allowed to live anyway, so they would rather not become a liability to their guild. Doing as such was also common for bandits, as they were very free willed, and didn¡¯t want to live a life of slavery or be in captivity.

    Thus the attention of the Royal Family was fully dedicated to the sudden horde of bandits around the kingdom, and even caused a bit of panic in them. So the situation the kingdom was in was a very uneasy one. Few dared to travel alone on the roads, fearing for bandits.

    The vampire population had also increased a bit. There were more normal vampires now, and they were even spread around the kingdom. The total number of vampires numbered a few tens. As for our human soldier numbers, they were much higher. We had around two hundred elite guards now, though they were only at the C level, only a few were at the B level. But it was still quite strong for a low rank country. The total number of A rankers in the kingdom only numbered around two hundred. Considering how many people there were in the kingdom, that was a very small amount. The total population of the Kingdom of Kalderon numbered around two billion people. Only one in ten million would be able to become an A ranker. Compared to some of the biggest empires in the human continent, that was nothing. In the biggest empire, known as the Eternal Empire, there were several million A rankers. Just the population there was unimaginable, although the A rankers to population rate was lower there. It was way more common to be able to become an A ranker, though not completely common still. One reason for it was the sheer size of the Empire. It was thousands of times bigger than Kalderon, and Kalderon was about a hundred thousand kilometres in diameter. But then again, this world was just too big. Luckily there existed teleportation arrays in most countries, albeit not here in Kalderon. In fact it was rare for even such a ¡°small¡± country not to have them. The reason for this was because the space had to be compatible.

    It was very rare for the space not to be compatible, but Kalderon was one of those places. This was also the reason it was so low ranked. Since there wasn¡¯t enough natural energy in the air, the beings born here didn¡¯t have enough talent. This natural energy didn¡¯t affect how quick you trained, but only how talented you were born. If you were born in Kalderon, but travelled all the way to the Eternal Empire, you wouldn¡¯t strain any quicker and vice versa. This was because natural energy was unrelated to mana. The amount of mana in the air was equal everywhere, except some extremely rare places. Mana is what affects how quickly you train your body, or how quickly you learn. Natural energy is what you¡¯re made of, you could say. But talent wasn¡¯t completely decided by natural energy. It also had to do with yourself. Talent was decided by inherent talent and natural energy. Natural energy only increased the average talent, so there could still be geniuses born in a region of low natural energy that are equal to a person from a place with high natural energy. But the geniuses from the regions of high natural energy would be monsters compared to the other geniuses, since the natural energy was much higher.

    If the teleportation arrays didn¡¯t exist, then communication between countries would be almost impossible, since it would take centuries to walk such distances. This was also the reason why Kalderon was a bit secluded and peaceful. It didn¡¯t enter many wars, in fact it only had one enemy, which was the neighbouring kingdom, the Kingdom of Tabarut. Tabarut was also a region of low natural energy. In fact the region of Kalderon and the region of Tabarut were the very same region that was split between two kingdoms. These two kingdoms would often enter war with each other, and one had ended only a short time ago.

    As for how the human world was built up, it was put into several continents. All the continents, including all the humans¡¯ ones, and the other ones with more mythical races and even a mix between humans and other races, all form a huge supercontinent. In the middle of this continent there is a massive wilderness, full of magical beasts and monsters. The continents and the known kingdoms and empires all encompass the edge of the supercontinent. The stronger the kingdom or empire the closer it is to the center of the supercontinent.

    For the people of Kalderon it is common knowledge that a human cannot go above A rank, but that isn¡¯t necessarily true. It¡¯s only like that on our continent and some of the other ones on the complete outskirts of the continent. If you go deeper, where the natural energies are more abundant it will become possible for a human to surpass the A rank. But naturally you had to have been born there. Other than that there were still other ways, like getting some miraculous medicine or some treasure, but the chance of that happening was abysmal. It might not happen in a billion years. Then again, it might also happen multiple time in only a few centuries. It all depended on an individual''s luck.

    This was all information that I had learned in these ten years. While commoners wouldn¡¯t know much of this, some nobles knew it, and the Royal Clan of course knew about it. We had naturally also discovered these facts with our information network that even had infiltrated Tabarut. It¡¯s worthy to note that the Eternal Empire was from a continent deeper in, and had experts surpassing A rank.

    After some time our spies had discovered something bad. It was the reason for my sister¡¯s death. It seemed that the cause of her death might have been my fault. A few years prior to her death, back when I had finally reunited with my sister, we had been beset upon by a group of knights. At the time those knights had demanded that we give them our food supplies, and they had been very rude to me. In anger I slaughtered all of them. It seemed like the leader of that group was a princess. The princess of the crown prince, his wife. In his rage, he had spent several years trying to figure out who killed her, then in the end personally led fifty Royal Knight to the capital of Fenlai to exterminate the Lord Commander and his family. Since my sister was the wife of the Lord Commander, she naturally suffered that fate as well. When I heard that report I had been enraged, and almost went on a slaughtering spree. In the end I just charged into the forest and killed a few hundred beasts in it. In the end it made the forest safer.

    One other thing that had happened in these years, is that Bogat had stepped down as the head of the Coldblood Clan, and I had officially become the leader of the Coldblood Organization, although Bogat still did all the managing, but I would make all the important decisions.

    One day I was sitting in my study, having a rare break from all the training. From time to time I would take a day or two to rest, or spend with my family and friends. As I was reading a book, a knock resounded from the door.

    ¡°Come in.¡± I said.

    Eric opened the door and walked in, then sat opposite to me.

    ¡°Isaac, I have a report for you that might interest you.¡± He said. A while ago he had finally dropped the ¡®Lord¡¯ suffix that he used to use. We were good friends so I thought it was unnecessary to call me ¡®Lord Isaac¡¯ when we were casually talking. It would be fine when we were having official meetings, but other than that it was unnecessary.

    I gestured for him to continue.

    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.

    ¡°It¡¯s a report from our spies in the Royal Capital about potential allies. It seems that there is a certain family that might harbour ill intent towards the king. They are the Barca family, a small noble family. The head of the family, Rommel, used to lead a battalion in the army, before he retired. He¡¯s an early A ranker now. His son Frederick used to lead a battalion as well, alongside his eldest son that had joined that battalion under his father. In a battle against Tabarut, almost all of that battalion was slaughtered, including his eldest son, because of the bad decisions one of the prince¡¯s made. Since so many lives were lost in the name of the prince, the king decided he had to do something about it, so he blamed Rommel¡¯s son and had him executed. The Barca family still harbours a grudge against the king for this. Of course the king knows nothing of that. One more notable thing is that Frederick''s youngest son still lives, the only living grandson Rommel has left, joined the Royal Knight Cadets and is known as quite the prodigy. This has caused their status to be raised back to nobility.¡± Eric reported. Seemed like we found the people we were looking for.

    ¡°Very good. Alright, I¡¯ve decided. I¡¯ll personally go meet these Barcas fellows and have them help my cause. I¡¯m sure that they will be more than pleased to help. Eric you¡¯re coming with me, as well as Aylard and a few guards. Go make the preparations.¡± I ordered him. Eric immediately went to tell Aylard, then Aylard went and gathered the elite guards. These were some of our most elite guards, all at the B rank, though they only numbered ten or so, but it would be more than enough. The next day we set out, after saying our goodbyes to our loved ones. After all we would probably be gone for a few months at the least.

    The journey was a long and arduous one, at least for the guards. We only travelled at night, which was a bit hard for the humans, but they were used to a lot of night shifts in the castle anyways. After a whole six months of travelling we finally arrived in the Royal Prefecture. After another week or two, we arrived at the Royal Capital, the city of Kaldron, capital of the Kalderon kingdom. A very creative name. It was also a hotspot for alchemy, hence its name.

    Pr¡¯s Note: Kaldron as in cauldron.

    Inside the city we headed to the local Rogue¡¯s Guild, which was the biggest part of our information network these days. There, we got our hands on the location of the Barca Mansion. It was only a good hour¡¯s ride away from the Guild Headquarters. Outside the mansion I had the guards stand guard, outside the entrance, while Aylard and Eric accompanied me to the doorstep. I knocked on the door, waiting for someone to come let us in. The Barca family didn¡¯t have the brightest idea that I was coming. Someone like me, visiting a small family like theirs, was unthinkable. Soon the door was opened by an old man in a servant''s attire.

    ¡°What can I help you with Sirs?¡± The butler asked. I smiled at him.

    ¡°Hello there, my name is Isaac Coldblood. I have come to see the man known as Rommel Barca and his family.¡± I announced. The old butler was visibly shocked at the revelation.

    ¡°Yes Lord Coldblood, I¡¯ll go inform him immediately.¡± He said, then rushed away after letting us in. A moment later a middle aged man came into the entry hall.

    ¡°Are you really Lord Isaac Coldblood? My name is Rommel Barca, and I am the head of the Barca family.¡± He said.

    ¡°Mr. Barca, I am indeed Isaac Coldblood, head of the Coldblood Clan.¡± I told him confidently.

    ¡°Oh my, you look so young, you don¡¯t look a day over twenty, but you should be around forty. You must have at least reached the B rank then.¡± He said.

    ¡°What are we doing standing out here. Follow this old man into the living room.¡± He then continued. We walked through a few hallways and entered a cosy living room.

    ¡°Now, May i know why you came and paid a visit to, a lowly noble, Lord Isaac?¡± Rommel asked.

    ¡°It has come to my attention that your oldest grandson died because of the stupidity of the prince orders and your son was executed because of it having to take the blame off the prince. You must harbour quite the grudge against the king then, don¡¯t you?¡± I asked him. Rommel became slightly worried at my words.

    ¡°Rommel, maybe you have heard of an event that happened around decade ago? The crown prince led fifty Royal Knights to the capital of Fenlai Prefecture to kill the Lord Commander and his family. Maybe you have heard the rumours? The rumours that, the wife of the Lord Commander was indeed my biological sister, the sister of Isaac Coldblood?¡± I asked him with a very suggestive tone. Rommel¡¯s expression became serious.

    ¡°I have indeed heard the rumours. Could it be that it¡¯s true?¡± He asked.

    ¡°It is indeed true. Both you and I harbour unforgivable grudges against the Royal Family, but I have something you don¡¯t, while you have something I don¡¯t. For me it is power, while you are an insider. You need me, and I need you.¡± I said. There was a moment of silence, as Rommel was thinking.

    ¡°Lord Isaac, it seems you want me to join you in this vendetta, but let me ask you, are you strong enough to compete against the crown? Just how strong are you?¡± He asked. I let a smirk creep on my face. I let my aura fall upon him. Even though I¡¯m only a peak B ranker, my aura was that of a peak A ranker. He himself was an early A ranker. I let my aura fade away again as I saw the pressure it was putting on him. My aura was even scarier since it was affected by my unholy vampirism, giving hints at a very scary air.

    ¡°This, so strong! You¡¯re already at the peak rank A? You¡¯re so young, but already at this stage. Either you weren¡¯t born here, or you are one of those geniuses only seen once in a thousand years. I spent 140 years, but I have only reached the early A rank. And that aura, it was menacing. Alright, I will help you, just tell me what to do.¡± He said.

    ¡°Good. It¡¯s still much too early for us to act, but with you here, our plans will progress smoothly. Your grandson is one of the Royal Knight Cadets right? Is he at home now?¡± I asked. Rommel excitedly looked up at the mention of his grandson.

    ¡°Erwin? Yes he¡¯s at home. Albert, go bring Erwin down here.¡± He said, then told the butler to go get his grandson. Moments later Erwin came into the room.

    ¡°What do you need me for grandfather?¡± He politely asked, as he saw that they had company.

    ¡°Erwin, come, come, do you know who this is? This Isaac Coldblood, head of the Coldblood Clan! Imagine how surprised I was when he came to my doorstep. Really, he is an amazing man. He¡¯s only a year or so older than you, but he¡¯s already at the peak rank A! And that¡¯s not all. He has something very important in common with us. Remember ten years, when the crown prince marched to the capital of Fenlai prefecture with fifty Royal Knights to kill the Lord Commander. The Lord Commander''s wife, was Lord Isaac¡¯s sister, so now he wants revenge. That¡¯s why he came to us. We¡¯re going to help him get revenge for his sister, and he¡¯s going to help us get revenge for your brother and father!¡± Rommel said. Erwin looked both shocked, surprised and joyful, he looked to me.

    ¡°Is it true? You¡¯re really Lord Isaac Coldblood, and you¡¯re really going to help us?¡± He said. I looked back at him with a smile on my face.

    ¡°It¡¯s true. But it¡¯s more like you¡¯re going to help me. You¡¯re a Cadet right Erwin? Your job will be to look for talented people in the Cadets at turn them to our cause. Rommel, do you have any other ideas?¡± I asked.

    ¡°I do, but first let me ask you about your numbers. How many strong people do you have?¡± He asked back.

    ¡°We have eleven people that can rival A rankers. They¡¯re anywhere between early to late stage. We also have someone who is one the verge of becoming an Arcanist. He might have already become one, as I haven¡¯t seen him in half a year, ever since I left our castle. Valen Shadowblade, the leader of the Shadowblade Organization might also help us, in fact I¡¯m the leader of the Kalderon Branch of his organization, and the next in line to become the leader.¡± I said. When Rommel heard my last words, he was shocked.

    ¡°Valen Shadowblade?! He¡¯s a peak A ranker legend! He¡¯s comparable with a S ranker! And he¡¯s your friend? And you¡¯re even the next in line to take over the organization after him. Amazing. His Shadowblades are the strongest assassins on this human continent. Only in the other more powerful continents will you find more powerful people, like the ones in the Eternal Empire.¡± Rommel said.

    ¡°Well, you¡¯re quite informed. You even know of the other continents and their power. Well, other than our assassins, we have around twenty to thirty B rankers, and around two hundred C rankers, but these numbers will all grow. We won¡¯t try and eradicate the Royal Clan yet, we¡¯ll still wait a while, maybe a few tens of years more. By then I will have surpassed the A rank, and our numbers will have bolstered. But you said that you have some ideas. Let me hear them?¡± I said.

    ¡°You can surpass the A rank? Amazing. But yes I had a bit of an idea. My daughter-in-law, the Erwin¡¯s mother, works at the mercenary guild here, so she could talk with some of the mercenaries and find some that can help our cause.¡± He said.

    ¡°Yes that would be good. ¡®Technically I already own all the mercenary guilds in the kingdom, but I can¡¯t tell them about this matter, it¡¯s enough that I already have them acting as bandits.¡¯ Alright, you have your daughter-in-law do that.¡± I said.

    ¡°Alright. But are all those bandits really from the mercenary groups? I didn¡¯t expect that. You really have put a lot of measures in this.¡± He said.

    ¡°Yes, I even almost bought out this kingdom for the sole purpose of getting control of the economy and all the food supplies. When the times comes, I will cut the Royal family off. Even now we are still trying to buy their assets from them, so sooner or later they won¡¯t be able to sustain themselves. Then when the time comes for us to stage the coup d¡¯¨¦tat they will be royally fucked. Oh, and one more thing before I forget. I came here under the pretense of doing a business trip, so I will make a deal with your family. This will also allow you to grow. Soon you might become one of the most powerful noble families in the kingdom. That will help our cause exponentially.¡± I said.

    ¡°A business deal? That¡¯s great! You¡¯re really too kind Lord Isaac! Then with this, I would like to swear the loyalty of our family to you, our liege.¡± He said. With that our deals were over. I spent a few days with the Barca family to get to know them. I met Erwin¡¯s wife, Joan. She was also a Royal Knight Cadet, and she knew all about the grudge against the crown. She was also very talented, like Erwin. She recently entered the middle stage of rank B, while Erwin is at the late stage, only an inch away from peak of rank B. She¡¯s 37 years old, while Erwin is 39, only a year my junior.

    Like that the Barca family had become our business partner and they thus skyrocketed in status. This also made them even more valuable to the Royal Clan. In the eyes of the Royal Clan, we the Coldblood were very valuable. Through the years we had done our best to deceive them and have friendly relations, which is what helped us in buying their assets. They had trust in us. They thought we were loyal. We had even done many things for them that would make us seem loyal, but little did they know that we were scheming to destroy them. So naturally the Barca family became important in their eyes. This was perfect for my plans.

    This allowed Rommel to become more intimate with the other nobles, and allowed him to find the nobles who weren¡¯t too loyal to the crown. Thus he could slowly turn them to our side, bolstering our forces. The more nobles we had on our side, the more soldiers we had for the coup d¡¯¨¦tat. Meanwhile Erwin and Joan would be searching for potential allies amidst the Cadets, and Savanna, Erwin¡¯s mother, would pull the stronger mercenaries to our cause as she had a friendly relationship with most of them. Naturally we would hire many mercenaries, especially since we owned all the mercenary guilds, but getting the stronger ones at the A rank, would be harder. They wouldn¡¯t necessarily listen to money, but they could listen to their favorite receptionist and cook Savanna.

    After my matters were finished here I left, to go back home. Once more we travelled for six months. After we came back we had been gone for a full year.

    End of chapter 18

 Chapter 19: Palazar

    Would you look at that, two chapters in one day. Well, I technically wrote the last chapter yesterday...

    Chapter 19: Palazar

    After having been away from home for an entire year, I had finally returned home with Eric and Aylard, as well as the ten elite guards. We held a celebration and feasted and drank for an entire day. Not so much blood, but delicious foods and wines. After all, we vampires can enjoy food and wine as well, but it doesn¡¯t satisfy our hunger like blood does.

    In the days that followed, I noticed the men and women of the castle would be very sneaky around each other. The servants and guards didn¡¯t dare enter relationships, after all they were our property, but they naturally couldn¡¯t help but fall in love with each other, so they would sneak around to do their things. Therefore I decided to implement a system. If you managed to do a contribution to our society, you would be allowed to be together with your love and have children. These people wouldn¡¯t be used as food for newborn vampires, as well as their children. But if you were to have a child without permission, the child would be killed, and in some cases the offenders as well.

    As for how the contribution system would work, they would get it from tasks and missions, and they could also tell one of the vampires about the deal, then if they are lucky they could become said vampires personal guard or servant, allowing the couple to get married.

    Thus another year went by. In this year the Barca family had grown in prestige. They were now one of the major families, and they had even gotten some of the nobles on our side. Erwin and Joan had some success as well. Erwin had entered the peak stage of rank B. At this rate he might become an A rank before turning sixty. Even though he was forty now, the gap between rank B and A was huge. Spending twenty years on the gap would be very quick. Rommel was over 140 years old before he became an A rank. So Erwin was indeed very talented, rivalling the Royal Clan. For some reason almost everyone from the Royal Clan was very talented as well. For example, the crown prince entered A rank before he was sixty years old.

    Our plan was progressing smoothly. We had communicated with the Barca family through voice transmitters. Transmitters that could reach such distances were very expensive, especially in a place like this, with low natural energy. Things like voice transmitters and teleportation arrays all relied on natural energy, but voice transmitters didn¡¯t require much natural energy.

    Other than this, there wasn¡¯t much that happen in this year. But Sara, Marcus¡¯s daughter, spent a lot of time in the village these days. I was quite curious as to what she was doing down there. Maybe she had made some friends. After all I told her to make some human friends while she could, but she shouldn¡¯t be able to remember that, since she was a toddler back then. Now she¡¯s already eighteen years old. They grow up so quick. On the note of growing up quick, there¡¯s Little Isaac. After he was made a vampire, his growth didn¡¯t stop indeed. At least for a while, it didn¡¯t. When he was twelve years old, he stopped aging all of a sudden. Now he¡¯s a twenty two years old man in the body of a twelve years old boy. He¡¯s quite perplexed by it, but there is nothing I can do. Maybe in the future he¡¯ll be able to manipulate his body, who knows. We can only hope.

    Since I was curious about Sara, I decided to tail her to the village. Like a shadow I followed her down to the village one evening. She seemed to be well known down there, since a lot of people were greeting her as ¡°Princess¡± or ¡°Princess Sara¡±. Seems like she had the reputation of a princess, though that¡¯s not weird. After all she¡¯s is quite the beauty, if I do say so myself. I continued tailing her, until she arrived at a small house and entered it. Inside she was greeted by a boy, or young man. He seemed to be the same age as her, but he was alone in the house. Either his parents were out, or he just lived alone. I decided to wait and see what happens. For a while the two talked about this and that. Like life in the village, or the affairs of the castle. Then after about an hour or two, things got hotter. They started making out, and a smile crept onto my face. So this was their relationship. To think she found herself a boyfriend. That guy was quite lucky.

    I had been quite bored listening to their antics, so I decided that I would play with them a bit. You know, scare them. My body flashed and disappeared from the tree I was resting on. I appeared on a chair in the house, but the two lovebirds didn¡¯t notice me. I put the most serious looking face on that I could, and waited. Moments later my body appeared in the eyesight of the boy.

    ¡°W-who are you?!¡± he questioned, but it only took moments until Sara noticed me.

    ¡°U-U-Uncle? W-w-w-what are you doing here?¡± she exclaimed in fright and embarrassment. The couple quickly let go of each other.

    ¡°I was wondering why you spent so much time on down here. To think that you were together with a lowly commoner, and a weak one at that. He isn¡¯t even a warrior!¡± I said in the most serious tone I could muster. The boy was really scared and looked at Sara with begging eyes.

    ¡°S-S-Sara, that¡¯s your u-u-uncle? As in the Lord?¡± He asked nervously.

    ¡°Y-yes. It¡¯s my uncle, Isaac Coldblood, lord of Sanguine Regis and Bloodmoon Village.¡± She said, equally as nervous. The boy¡¯s face paled. He looked around, as if looking for help, or a way out, but in the end he flexed his muscles, then walked forwards nervously. After standing two meters away from me, he got down on his knees, and kowtowed.

    ¡°Lord, please let me be with your niece, I truly do love her!¡± He basically shouted.

    My face darkened, and just my glare could almost kill a man. Then in the heat of the moment, I burst out laughing. The two lovebirds looked up, they were confused. What was going on now? Eventually I calmed down.

    ¡°Relax kids, I was just toying with you. I don¡¯t care whom you love, as long as he isn¡¯t a coward or something. And this boy is definitely no coward, to actually stand up to me. I¡¯ve made people piss their pants just by looking at them. Very well, I approve of you boy! It¡¯s about time that I make you into a vampire as well Sara. Very well, I¡¯ll listen to your unspoken wish, and make this boy into a vampire as well. Tell me boy, what¡¯s your name?¡±

    The boy was surprised and very much shocked. He wasn¡¯t shocked at me being a vampire, since that had become common knowledge in both Sanguine Regis and Bloodmoon, after all they couldn¡¯t leave this place anyway. No, he was shocked that I accepted him. He never thought that a noble being like me would ever accept a commoner like him. But what he didn¡¯t know is that I myself, was no more than a mere commoner once. Therefore I decided to accept this courageous boy. The boy stood up nervously.

    ¡°My name is Arno, my lord. I wish to bestow my greatest thank to you, for letting me be with Sara, and for allowing me the Blessing of the Vampire.¡± He said.

    ¡°Don¡¯t mind it. Well then, I¡¯ll leave you two to your devices. Come to the castle later and find me.¡± I said, then left. This time I didn¡¯t leave like a shadow, but walked the streets like a normal person. The villagers were shocked to see me. Not all of them could recognize me, since I didn¡¯t appear down here much. Last time they saw me was three years ago, when I left for the Royal Capital. When I came back it had been the middle of the night, so they didn¡¯t get to see me.

    The next day, Sara and Arno returned to the castle, hand in hand. Her parents were surprised at the sudden development, and even a bit against it, but when they heard my decision they immediately accepted. There was no going against my wishes. It wasn¡¯t even possible. Thus I made Sara and Arno into vampires. Little Isaac was a bit unhappy that his little sister looked way older than he did. Arno was also very surprised when he met his girlfriend¡¯s older brother.

    After their maturing period was over, I decided to test their abilities. It turned out that Arno was actually quite talented, even for a pureblood vampire, so I decided that I would train him myself. After these ten years, my skill with weapons wasn¡¯t any lower than that of Lilia and Aylard. After all I spent more time training than they, they had to train the guards as well, after all. Thus I had gained my first disciple.

    I spent the next year teaching swordsmanship, archery and magic. Of course I didn¡¯t neglect my own training. Arno¡¯s skill quickly increased, but he was still way behind everyone else of course, but with time he might even surpass Lilia. He really was talented. He was probably one of those rare talented people that are born once in a millennia. Too bad that he was born as commoner. Luckily I managed to find him, so I could nurture him into a proper warrior.

    After I had spent one year training Arno, I started getting a bit bored. After all I had spent around thirteen years doing nothing, but training or traveling to and from the Royal Capital. In a spontaneous decision, I decided to leave. I would go travel somewhere for a while, and have a bit of an adventure. A vacation of sorts. The experience would be good as well, I hadn¡¯t been in many dangerous situations. I also decided to leave on my own. My dear wives were against it though, they wanted to come too, but I still decided to go alone. Thus the next day everyone stood outside the castle, bidding me farewell. Thus I left Sanguine Regis, for a while.

    As I was running at speeds several times quicker than the speed of sound, I was thinking of where to go. It was at that moment that I remembered a certain place. A place that I visited many years ago, back when I saved Lilia and Aylard. There was a dungeon there. Not much was known about that dungeon, since it was quite strong for such a desolate place as Fenlai, or even the Kingdom of Kalderon. I decided to go back there. After running at full speed for a few days, I arrived outside that familiar cave. I entered and ventured through, until I arrived at the very large door.

    I had arrived at The Tomb of Palazar. Countless people had died here, but I doubt many peak stage A rankers have been here, so it should be safe. With a gust of wind, from my wind magic, I opened the door. Inside I arrived at a long hallway, inhabited by a single, weak skeleton. With a gaze, I blew it away with my wind magic again. A skeleton like this didn¡¯t pose any danger at all. It wasn¡¯t even an F rank, it was just there for the sake of being there. Even a normal person could beat it. I walked through the hall until I arrived at the next floor.

    This floor was much more dangerous than the last one, filled with several skeletons of the F rank, but it was still nothing in front of me. As I walked past them, they were all blown to pieces by my magic. This floor was passed like a breeze. Then the next floor came, and the next, until I finally arrived at the fifth floor. This floor was filled with skeletons, all at the peak of rank F, but no matter how many there were, they were all blown obliterated in the blink of an eye. I arrived at that familiar place where the door which was bigger than the others was at. I knew that inside this room I would meet a disgusting monster, much stronger than the others, but it probably wouldn¡¯t be stronger than D rank. Even back then I would be able to beat it. The only reason I ran was because I was frightened by its appearance. After all, it was very scary looking.

    I opened the door and entered the big round hall. There was that familiar abomination, the fat body with an eye in its stomach. Its helmet shaped head, with two big horns protruding from each side. The arms with the huge claws, bigger than even my body, and lastly the legs with the natural bone spike armour.

    ¡°We meet again.¡± I said as I walked towards it. I stopped in the middle of the room, when the monster started running towards me. The monster lifted its arm and smashed it on my body causing a cloud of smoke. But to its dismay, when the smoke cloud disappeared, my body also disappeared. I floated behind his shoulder that was guarded by the shoulder guard.

    ¡°Too slow.¡± I said, then casually tapped my hand on its shoulder. In an instant the body flew down on the ground, and was crushed, splattering blood all over the room, but not a speck of blood hit my body.

    ¡°With that appearance you would think you were stronger¡­¡± I said, then casually walked out of the room, down to the next floor. In the next floor the monsters were just as strong and numerous as in the last floor, there was no difference, but in the next room, they were at the E rank. It was still no challenge though. I swept through the floors, until I arrived at the tenth floor. In this floor there were a few treasures, but they weren¡¯t worth much, so I ignored them and ventured into the next room, the boss room. In this room there was a bigger, better armed skeleton. I didn¡¯t want to spend time on it, so I flashed past it and exited the room, as the skeleton fell to pieces.

    A spent a few hours casually going through the floors, killing monsters and skeletons, and sometimes the bosses. There was a boss every fifth floor. The monsters of the dungeon didn¡¯t increase in strength as quickly as in the first five floor, so it took a lot of time to get to the stronger monsters. Eventually I made it fifty floors down. It took a really long time, as every floor was very big. Of course I could have flashed through them in an instant, but I didn¡¯t. At this boss floor things were more interesting. I finally met a boss at the same stage as me, the peak of rank B. But naturally he still wouldn¡¯t stand a chance against me, since I transcended a whole rank, and was comparable to peak A rankers. But I still decided to play a bit with it.

    The boss was in the form of a skeleton knight, wearing black plate armour, and it was almost three meters tall. I casually walked into the room, and stood at the end. The skeleton slowly looked up, meeting my eyes. It started slowly walking towards me, but quickly sped up into a run. When it was two meters in front of me, it swung its sword. In response I quickly unsheathed my sword and blocked it. The skeleton kept swinging, and I kept blocking in the nick of time. The skeleton swung faster and faster, as its confidence increased, thinking that I was only able to block. A smirk fell on my face, and I casually waved with my hand, causing the skeleton knight to get blown away, crashing into the other side of the room.

    ¡°Don¡¯t get conceited.¡± I said, as I started slowly walking towards it. The skeleton got back up on its legs, then charged back at me, restarting its flurry of swings. This time I didn¡¯t block them, but instead opted to dodge. I quickly dodged the swings, making it look like my body was in several places at once, leaving after images. The skeleton swung harder and harder, faster and faster, as its rage increased. Suddenly I grabbed its sword with my hand, stopping it in an instant. The skeleton looked despaired, then I swung my sword down on its head, cleaving it in two and channelling fire magic through the sword, burning it to ashes.

    ¡®That was fun.¡¯ I thought, as I left the boss room to continue downwards. After venturing another twenty five floors down, just the monsters were B ranked. When I arrived at floor eighty, I met my first A ranked monster, being at the middle stage. For some reason, all the bosses so far were at the same stage as the skeleton knight. This fight would be slightly harder, I wouldn¡¯t be able to beat it in one move.

    At this time I had spent two weeks in the dungeon. Luckily there were some biological monsters in here with blood. Even then, I could still last two weeks without blood, but it would be very nasty and I would weaken a bit.

    The boss of the eightieth floor was a Dread Knight. It was another being clad in entirely black armour, but I couldn¡¯t see its face or any other body part, so I wasn¡¯t sure whether it was another skeleton or not. As I entered the room, the Dread Knight didn¡¯t give me even a moment and immediately charged at me. Using its two handed bastard sword it cleaved at me, much faster than the previous bosses. I dodged to side and sent returned my own sword at him, but he managed to block it, but I didn¡¯t let it recover and sent an ice spear at him. The ice spear hit his armour, although it was crushed it still managed to send him staggering back a meter or two.

    ¡°A worthy candidate has appeared.¡± The Dread Knight said with a low raspy voice, much to my surprise. I jumped back a bit.

    ¡°You can talk?¡± I asked, easily keeping my calm.

    ¡°Yes, the bosses you meet from here are all intelligent beings with sentience. You are far stronger than you appear to be. You are only at the peak stage of rank B, but you are stronger than me. It is the duty of us guardians to protect this place and find someone worthy. Since you are so abnormal in a way that only the legendary beings can be, I have already decided your worth.¡± The Dread Knight said. This was interesting.

    ¡°So I¡¯m worthy? What then?¡± I asked.

    ¡°I shall explain to you. If you can make me admit defeat, and make all the other bosses admit defeat, then you have passed. That would mean that we deemed you worthy. The only exception to this is the last boss. Him, you must kill. After he has died, you shall receive the inheritance of Great Lord Palazar, and yourself become the Great Lord of the Tomb of Palazar.¡± The Dread Knight explained.

    ¡°I see. Then does that mean you have admitted your defeat?¡± I asked.

    ¡°It does.¡± The Dread Night said, kneeling himself in front of me.

    ¡°Good.¡± I said, then passed by the Dread Knight, passing the eightieth floor. After this boss I found that the monsters increased greatly in both strength and numbers. The monsters of this floor were all at the peak of rank B. I spent several days traversing through the long corridors and large halls, until I made it to the end of the 85th floor, arriving in front of a large door, once again. I opened the door and met the boss. This boss was a beautiful man, wearing dark light armour. He was a high demon, summoned from the demon realm. The high demon was an immortal creature, like us vampires, but they didn¡¯t have the power boost that we had. Only Demon Dukes and above have that. I walked into the room and looked the demon in the eye.

    This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it.

    ¡°I have received the approval of the Dread Knight, and thus come here, seeking your approval.¡± I announced. The demon looked very surprised to see me.

    ¡°I see. That¡¯s very good. It¡¯s been millennia since someone made it this far, and the first time someone received the approval of even one of us. Show me what you got.¡± He said with a beautiful voice that could almost rival a vampire¡¯s voice. The demon immediately charged at me, and fired a barrage of fire blasts at me. I immediately responded by making an earth wall, but the wall was melted away in mere seconds. I wouldn¡¯t be able to contend against him with magic, since I was only a High Warlock. He seemed to be at least a Middle Arcanist, and he was also a middle A ranker. This fight would be a lot tougher than before.

    The demon sent another barrage of fire blasts at me. I responded with a large water stream, immediately causing lots of steam. I charged at him with my sword, appearing in front of him in an instant. I swiped the sword, but the demon backed away and I only managed to cut a wound on torso. The demon responded by sending numerous fire blades at me. I tried to dodge, but A few managed to hit me, making a few wounds on my body, but much to the demons dismay, they healed in a matter of seconds. The demon looked on in shock.

    ¡°Holy shit! You¡¯re at the peak of rank B, but physically you¡¯re far stronger than I am, and you heal so quickly.¡± He exclaimed, but he didn¡¯t stall any longer and charged right at me again with another fire spell. He made a wall of fire around me, then sent hundreds of fire blades. I couldn¡¯t dodge easily because of the fire, so many blades hit me, one even managed to hit me in the arm. My arm was cleaved right off, which angered me quite a bit. I put huge amounts of mana into a wind spell and blew all the fires away, then charged at the demon. In an instant I appeared behind him and pierced my sword through his chest, making him spit out blood. I then focused my healing on my missing forearm, making it regenerate rapidly. In a few seconds it had regenerated. After that I pulled out my sword and grabbed his throat with my new arm.

    ¡°Do you give up?¡± I asked coldly.

    ¡°Yes, yes, I give up!¡± He shouted. I let go of my grip and let him fall to the ground.

    ¡°I deem you worthy. You regenerated your arm in seconds, that¡¯s insane! And even though you¡¯re clearly a High Warlock, the amount of mana you put into that spell was huge! You¡¯re clearly superior to me.¡± He said praisingly.

    ¡°Alright. I¡¯ll be on my way then.¡± I said, then left the stunned demon behind.

    Once more I traversed through the floors, but it got significantly harder now. I had to fight monster at the early stage of rank A, and were quite a few of them. I spent a full two months going through the next five floors, until I arrived at the next boss room. This was floor 90, so there should only be two more after this one. If the dungeon is a hundred floors deep that is. I hesitantly opened the boss door, and entered inside.

    Inside this boss room there was a woman clad in Norse armour. She calmly looked at me.

    ¡°You are the first one to ever make it here. Did you get the approval of the others?¡± She asked with a calm and serene voice.

    ¡°Yes, I did.¡± I answered.

    ¡°I see. I am the Valkyrie K¨¢ra, and I shall be thy opponent.¡± She said, then charged at me with her spear. This woman was at the late stage of rank A. She thrusted her spear towards me, trying to pierce through my head, but I quickly dodged to the side, then kicked towards her stomach, with my superior speed coupled with her being in the middle of an attack, I managed to hit her and send her flying. As she was flying I charged in front of her and punched her stomach, making her crash down to the floor. K¨¢ra quickly recovered and charged me again, this time sending a flurry of spear thrusts at me. Once more I dodged them all, and unsheathed my sword. I slashed my sword at her, but she blocked with her metal spear. I slashed again, but she blocked again. I continued slashing at her, but she would block every time. I decided to try a new tactic. I started using my superior speed to dodge around her and attack her from angles. Eventually I managed to hit her arm, making a big gaping wound. K¨¢ra backed away after she was wounded, but recovered quickly. She started attacking me in a frenzy and I could only dodge around and block. After a few exchanges I decided to fight back again, so I suddenly disappeared from her vision, and attacked her from behind, but she reacted quickly and turned around to block, but she was too slow and I managed to cut into her shoulder before she got away.

    I once again charged at her, but the moment I was in front of her, I jumped up above. There, I made a huge spear of fire and sent it at her. She managed to easily dodge the fire spear to the side of the fire spear, but to her dismay I had disappeared. She looked around her in panic, but she couldn¡¯t find me. All of a sudden a longsword pierced out of the huge fire next to her, and pierced right into her stomach. While she was still surprised I took out the sword and chopped of both her arms in quick succession, making her scream in pain. Then I held my sword to her throat, ready to slice it in two at a moment¡¯s notice. I glared her in the eyes with my soul piercing gaze.

    ¡°I give up.¡± She said with a weak voice.

    ¡°Good choice. Now go and get those arms reattached before it¡¯s too late.¡± I said, before turning around and also leaving her behind. She had been the strongest one yet, but she was still a stage beneath me, so she wasn¡¯t too much of a challenge. The next one is who I was nervous about. He or she might be a peak stage. If that¡¯s the case, then it will be a lot harder.

    Once more I traversed the halls of the Tomb of Palazar. I was glad to find that the normal monsters didn¡¯t increase in strength further, and they weren¡¯t as numerous as in the earlier floors, where there hadn¡¯t been any A rankers. I spent another four months going through the next five floors.

    Eventually it was time to face the next boss.

    The atmosphere in this room was much darker. There was a man that looked very familiar to the Dread Knight, except he had a blood red cape, and looked a bit more ornamental. It was the Dread Lord.

    ¡°Thou hath arrived, challenger. I am the Dread Lord, and I shall see if thou art worthy. I know that the others have given thee thy worthiness, but now it is my turn.¡± He said and slowly walked up to me. He had a huge sword in his hands, which he quickly swung at me, but I dodged rather easily. I continued swinging, only for me to dodge. He was also at the late stage of rank A, just like the Valkyrie. As he swung once more, I swung back and our swords clashed. We continued swinging at each other, but it was clear that I held the upper hand, as he was forced to back away. I swung twice in quick succession, first pushing his sword back, then attacking again going for the kill, but the Dread Lord responded by grabbing my sword with his hand, causing a small crack in his gloves, but he had hold of my sword. I responded by swinging my body and nimbly kicking him in the head making his body go flying.

    I charged back at him, as he laid on the floor and chopped my sword at his arm full power. His arm was directly chopped off, but my own sword couldn¡¯t handle it shattered.

    ¡°Well, shit!¡± I exclaimed as I looked at my shattered sword. But it mattered not. I transformed my hands into claws. My vampire claws were extremely hard and sharp, so they were an even better weapon than the sword. I charged at him full speed, at tried to pierce his chest with my claw, but he managed to block it with his sword, but then I thrusted the other claw forwards and pierced right through his armour into his chest and directly grabbed his heart. Seems like he really was a living being.

    ¡°You give up? Or do you perhaps not want your heart?¡± I asked.

    ¡°Thou hast won upon me. I surrender to the Great Thee, and shall serve thee, if thou can defeat the last enemy.¡± The Dread Lord said, as I let go of his heart. Once more I left the boss behind, as I continued on my journey. The next boss would be the last one, it seems. He will probably be at the peak stage of rank A. It would be a hard fight. But I had to get there first.

    Thus I continued down the road until I got the last floor, after another three months. This door was the biggest yet, at least a hundred meters tall. I opened it with my colossal strength, and entered the room of the last enemy, as the Dread Lord called it. This room really was different. It was huge! Far bigger than the other rooms, you could even fit a dragon in here. In the centre of this room stood the so called ¡°Last Enemy¡±.

    What stood before me was a skeleton, wearing black robes. His eye sockets were completely empty of life and he just stood there, staring into nothingness. I knew what this was. It was a failed lich. A failed lich is what happens when you try to become a lich, but die in the progress. Your carcass would be left as a mindless monster that will just stand there for eternity, only moving when another being appears near them. They will try to kill everything that comes near them.

    The room was very cold and there was ice all over. Seems like it was an Ice Lich. I carefully ventured forwards. When I got within a few tens of meters of the lich it finally reacted. It immediately sent a flurry of ice spikes at me, but I managed to dodge with ease. I charged up to it, while it sent flurry after flurry of ice spikes after, without hitting me, and eventually I arrived before it. Slashed at it with my new sword that I found on my way down here. This sword was far better than my previous one, and was even enchanted with a fire effect. Quite perfect for my current opponent. As I was about to slash at the lich, it quickly backed away, and sent a huge ice fist in my face. I flew several meters back before I managed to regain my balance. This would indeed be a hard fight, for I was fighting a High Arcanist. A High Arcanist was as strong as or sometimes even stronger than a peak stage A ranker.

    I charged at the lich again, this time ready. In a blink of an eye I was behind it. I hit the borders of its cloak before it got away and sent barrages of ice spears after me. Ice spears were much more powerful and much quicker than normal ice spikes. I dodged most of the ice spears, but a few managed to hit me. At least I managed to make the lich¡¯s cloak catch fire. Again I charged at the lich, but this time I was going in side steps, going from side to side, evading his ice spears. I arrived in front of the lich and swiped my sword at it. This time I managed to land a clean hit, sending the lich flying. I continued my charge right away, but when I was about to slash at the lich, it discharged another spell. Thousands upon thousands of ice spears pierced up from the ground. I quickly dodged, but a few of them still managed to hit me. The lich didn¡¯t rest and used another spell, making it rain with ice spears, while even more ice spears were piercing up from the ground. I was moving about in a flurry, trying to dodge the spears, but several still pierced into my body, making my blood flow.

    I decided to put a large amount of mana into a fire spell. I made a fire hurricane appear, melting the ice spears, then I charged at the lich again. I managed to creep up to it and sent a flurry of attacks at it. The lich used several spells to block and dodge, but I eventually managed to hit it a few times, making a few areas on its body catch fire. The lich sent several large ice boulders at me, while quickly escaping backwards. After it had gotten a good distance away, it raised its hands. Suddenly the air got even colder, and ice started appearing in the air. Quickly huge amounts of ice spears and ice spikes appeared, while the winds were growing stronger and stronger. I knew something was going on, so I quickly rushed at the lich, but it was too late. An ice blizzard appeared, sending hundreds and thousands of ice spears and spikes all over. I was moving in a dodging frenzy, but I couldn¡¯t dodge them all. I decided it was all or nothing, so I charged full speed forwards, dodging as many spears as possible, but many still hit me. My body was covered in blood when I finally arrived at the lich.

    I was mad now. I crazily pounded my sword at him, not caring about anything else. The lich sent several spells at me, but I just let them hit as I hit the lich. There was blood everywhere around us, but the lich was also being hurt. Eventually I managed to hit it in the arm, chopping it right off. The lich returned the gesture by sending an ice sword at me, cutting my arm of as well. I prepared to slash my sword at him, but suddenly stopped and rushed behind him. The lich wasn¡¯t prepared, so I managed to hit it right in the shoulder, decapitating the other arm. In its fury, the lich sent several full powered ice boulders at me, sending me flying.

    Both of us were heavily injured. I had lost an arm, and had suffered hundreds of wounds, and the lich had lost both arms, but the difference between us was that I had my healing factor. All my small wounds had healed already, but I didn¡¯t have the energy to rapidly heal my arm, so it was slowly healing. The lich on the other hand didn¡¯t have it so easy.

    It was time to end this. The lich started channelling its mana into a last attack, while I charged at it. I channelled huge amounts of mana into my fire sword, making huge flames. The lizard made another ice blizzard, while I chopped at him with my full power. A huge flame storm and a huge ice blizzard clashed. I kept pushing up to the lich, while the lich put all his strength into the blizzard. I continued pouring my mana into the sword, as the flame storm grew bigger. Eventually I finally stood before the Failed Ice Lich. I put the sword above my head, then using the entirety of my power, I let the storm fall upon the lich. The flames raged for a hundred meters around us, then grew smaller and smaller. Eventually the flames disappeared, leaving nothing, but ashes.

    I won. As I thought this thought, I fell to my knees, exhausted. I had spent all my energy on that last attack, and had finally managed to win. If I didn¡¯t have this sword and didn¡¯t have huge amounts and mana and extremely fine control over it, then I might not have won.

    After resting for a while, I started creeping to the end of the huge hall, to the small door at the end. After a while, I finally got there. I opened up the room, only to arrive in another room. In this room there were a few familiar figures. They were the previous guardians, the Dread Knight, the High Demon, the Valkyrie K¨¢ra, and lastly the Dread Lord.

    ¡°Congratulations on your victory, Master.¡± The four guardians said

    ¡°Inside this next room is the inheritance of the previous Master. We will wait for Master out here, so take your time.¡± The High Demon said. I nodded to them, I didn¡¯t even have the energy to talk, then walked to the door they pointed to. When I entered the room, the door closed behind me on its own. I didn¡¯t mind it and walked to the desk in front of me. On the desk there was a letter. I sat down in front of the desk and started reading the letter.

    ¡°Hello there stranger. Since you¡¯re reading this, then it means you have passed the trial of the dungeon, and defeated all the guardians, making them submit, and most of all, you have defeated me. My name is Palazar, I am the one that created this dungeon. The reason that I¡¯m writing this is because I failed at becoming a lich. I was attacked in the middle of the ritual, thus failing it. I¡¯m writing this because you are my inheritor. By passing the test, you have shown your worth and that you are indeed a powerful being, perhaps as powerful as me, perhaps stronger, perhaps weaker.

    The version of me that you fought was of course greatly weakened, as I was at the SSS rank. But alas, as a mortal being, I am not able to become an X ranker, thus becoming immortal. That¡¯s why I tried to become a lich, as they are immortal beings, but alas the chance of success is low, and I was even attacked. But that is all in the past. I leave you everything that I owned here in my Tomb of Palazar. And I also leave you with a request. Whether it¡¯s even possible or not, I do not know, but I wish for you to avenge me! If my enemy is still alive that is. I do not know how long it has been since I died, since I cannot see the future, but this enemy of mine should still have around seven thousand years of lifespan left.

    As for who this enemy is, it is Alazar, my own brother! I leave only this request for you. Whether you do it or not, is up to you. There is one more thing you should know. There is a spell book here, called ¡°Energy Manipulation Magic¡±. It¡¯s a very rare kind of magic, and you won¡¯t be able to leave this place until you learn it. I won¡¯t ask you to master it, since that would take millennia, only learn the basics. That is the final test for becoming my inheritor. How long it takes is up to you.¡±

    ¡®I won¡¯t be able to leave before learning the Energy Manipulation Magic? That¡¯s bad. I need to destroy the Royal Clan, but if this takes too long then that will be impossible.¡¯ Oh well, there was only one thing I could do, and that was to start reading, but before that I needed to rest for a while. I looked around the place and conveniently found a bedroom and crept into bed.

    Like that I slept for a whole two months until I woke up again. As soon as I woke, I started looking for that book, then sat down at the desk, and started reading.

    End of chapter 19

 Chapter 20: Beginning of a Calamity

    Chapter 20: Beginning of a Calamity

    In an old, dark room, hidden in the shadows of the depth, there was an old man. This old man looked older than time itself. His face was riddled with wrinkles and was dried up. His body was skin and bones, he looked like he had lived for centuries. In front of this old man, there was a book. The old man was reading the book, turning the pages, but no matter how often he turned the page, he would never get to the end, the two sides of the book would always remain at the same thickness.

    Eventually, as the man had sat there for ages gone, he finally closed the book and rose from his seat. The old man struggled to move, but he grabbed an old black cane. Using the cane, he slowly walked up to the door. When he got there, he tried to open the door, but to no avail. Then a flash of light appeared from his hand, and the door opened. He stepped out the door, and arrived in a room he hadn¡¯t seen for years. Before him stood four people. One was a tall man, clad in black armour. He was a Dread Knight. Then there was a noble looking man, with a face of such beauty that even a man could fall for him. He was a High Demon. Then there was the beautiful female, clad in Nordic armour, looking valiant. She was the Valkyrie K¨¢ra. Lastly there was another black armoured man, but this one was even taller and wore ornamental armour and a blood red cape. He was the Dread Lord.

    ¡°Finally, I finished. How long has it been?¡± the old man said in a low gravelly voice, almost so low that you couldn¡¯t hear it. The four people looked at the old man in surprise.

    ¡°Master, it¡¯s only been thirteen years, but you aged so much! How is that possible?¡± The High Demon asked.

    ¡°I¡¯m a vampire. I require blood or I will shrivel up.¡± The old vampire said, Isaac said. Now the four guardians looked even more shocked.

    ¡°A vampire?! But they went extinct several million years ago!¡± The same High Demon said. He clearly knew of the demise of the vampires.

    ¡°They did, but I¡¯m the new vampire progenitor. I was made by Gebados a few decades ago. But enough of that, I need blood! I shall rest in my bed, you people go and get me some blood bags. A lot of blood bags.¡± Isaac said, as he turned around and slowly waltzed to the bed and laid down. It had been thirteen years. It took him thirteen years to only learn of the basics of Energy Manipulation Magic. But it truly was a powerful magic. With it he could both manipulate the natural energies as well as mana freely. Both its utility use and its defensive and offensive uses were abnormal. He could make pure mana shields and pure mana offensive spells, like mana arrows or bolts, which were clearly much more powerful than just ice or earth or fire bolts, since it was made of pure mana concentration. Naturally it was hard to learn. Even the genius Isaac took thirteen years. If it was a mortal genius, then a hundred years would not be enough. If it was an average man, then a thousand years would be far from enough, for just the basics. It was truly one of the most complicated magics in existence.

    Luckily for Isaac, there had been a very high amount of mana in the study room that had accumulated from various treasures over time, so he hadn¡¯t become too malnutritioned, since the Energy Manipulation could allow him to absorb the mana and use it as life force, but it required huge amounts of mana, and wasn¡¯t as good as blood, since the body still dried up, but you don¡¯t grow too weak, and wouldn¡¯t permanently lose strength. As soon as he drank his fill of delicious blood, he would get all his strength back. Thanks to that, he was still at the peak and wasn¡¯t very far from breaking through. And thanks to him training in Energy Manipulation for thirteen years, without break, he had finally become a Low Arcanist. That was the mark of him mastering the basics.

    1st person, Isaac.

    After who knows how long, the four guardians finally returned. They had a group of very frightened people. There were at least thirty of them.

    ¡°Master, we have returned with food.¡± They said, causing panic in the minds of the blood bags. I slowly rose from my seat, then flashed and rushed right into my first victim and drained him dry in an instant. I quickly moved from person to person, draining them of their blood, and rejuvenating my vitality. In a few moments, I had drained all of them dry. I stood there, in the corpse infested room, covered by blood, surrounded by dead people. I had never had such a good meal before.

    ¡°I¡¯ve never been this thirsty before. Let¡¯s get out of here.¡± I said, and had the four guardians followed me. When we got outside the room, I turned around to talk to my new minions.

    ¡°You four are my minions now right? Tell me your names.¡± I said. The first to respond was the talkative High Demon.

    ¡°Lord, my name is Carlahahn, the High Demon.¡± The High Demon said, then bowed. Next the Valkyrie stepped forwards.

    ¡°As you know, I am Valkyrie K¨¢ra, your loyal warrior.¡± She said, then bowed as well. Next the Dread Knight stepped up.

    ¡°I bear no name.¡± The Dread Knight said, then kneeled. Then it was the Dread Lord¡¯s turn.

    ¡°I am the Dread Lord Itrux, and we four are the remaining Guardians of Palazar.¡± Itrux said, then bowed.

    ¡°Don¡¯t call yourselves the Guardians of Palazar anymore. Palazar is dead, now you¡¯re under me. As for me, I am Isaac Coldblood, the first of the vampires, the chosen of the God of Death and Darkness, Gebados.¡± I said,

    causing much admiration in the eyes of my underlings.

    ¡°You were chosen by the God of Death? Amazing!¡± The High Demon Carlahahn said. I ignored his antics and turned around and exited the hidden room of Palazar and entered that huge hall again. The marks of that battle all those years ago were still there. Now there was only the matter of getting back up. Luckily there was a teleportation system in the dungeon that could be used with Energy Manipulation. I would also be able to make my own small scale teleportation arrays now, even here in Kalderon, since energy manipulation could allow me to gather the natural energies in one place, but it required a lot of time and patience. It wasn¡¯t something that could be done at the flick of a finger. Just one array would take a few months to make, but when I mastered it a bit more, it would get quicker. Of course if I was to make one anywhere else, other than in a region of abysmally low natural energy density, then it would be a lot quicker.

    I went over to the small array, and had everyone stand on it, then I activated it using my Magical Manipulation Magic. There was a bright light, and then we suddenly appeared at the entrance of the dungeon. It had been almost fourteen years since I was last here. I didn¡¯t postpone my leaving, and immediately rushed out of the cave. I wanted to get home quickly, after all this vacation of mine had been much longer than planned. Thus the five of us rushed back in the direction of Sanguine Regis and Bloodmoon Village.

    Fourteen years. After fourteen years, I finally stood before the grand entrance of Sanguine Regis. I stood before the entrance guards, but they just stared at me in shock, unbelievable shock.

    ¡°The Lord has returned!¡± They shouted and immediately knelt in front of me. I ignored their prayers and continued walking into the castle, where an upheaval had already started, from the shout of the guards. People were running out through the doors, to see what it all was about. Some people dropped everything in their hands, while others looked on in confusion, not having any idea about who I was. The ones who recognised me all got down on their knees, confusing the others even more.

    ¡°You infidels! Get down on your knees, don¡¯t you realize? The Great Lord of the Coldblood as he stands before you!¡± One of the guards yelled at the ignorant ones. They immediately exclaimed in shock, they then kowtowed in my honour. They were the ones that had only arrived at the castle in the past fourteen years, so they didn¡¯t recognise me. Only a moment after the servants and guards announced my return the room was stormed by all the pure blooded vampires. Since they had super hearing, they all heard it, and rushed over here. They all stood still, watching me and my guardians, tears appearing in some of their eyes, especially my wives¡¯.

    ¡°Isaac!¡± They exclaimed. ¡°Where have you been? You disappeared for fourteen years! We didn¡¯t even know whether you were alive or dead. We couldn¡¯t even feel our blood connection.¡± Amelia, the second vampire, said, as tears swelled in her eyes, then she ran up to me and hugged me. Serana and Alicia also rushed up to me and hugged me with all their might.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I wasn¡¯t in too much danger. There was only one occasion where I could have lost my life. As for where I¡¯ve been and why you couldn¡¯t feel me, do you remember the Tomb of Palazar, where we found Lilia and Aylard?¡± I asked the group, reassuring them that I was fine.

    ¡°The Tomb of Palazar? You were there?¡± Aylard exclaimed in surprise. He definitely remembered that place, as it was where his new life had spawned, and where those he used treasured like brothers and sisters had betrayed them and left them for dead.

    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.

    ¡°Indeed I was. I decided to explore the place, so I ventured all the way down to the bottom, and it was one hell of a journey. The last few floors were all filled with A rank monsters, and the last boss was a failed lich that was a High Arcanist. I almost died fighting it. I suffered thousands of wounds. If it weren¡¯t for the fact that my vampiric healing factor is so great, and that I found an enchanted fire sword, then I wouldn¡¯t have won. You see the lich was an Ice Lich, so my fire sword worked very well against it, even though fire is also my weak element. Good thing we have resistance against ice, so that helped. But anyways, the Tomb of Palazar served as a test to find an inheritor for the long dead SSS ranked Palazar. The test was to first receive the approval of these four fellows behind me, then defeat the failed lich of Palazar. After that I got access to his treasures, but there was still one more test. That was to master the basics of Magic Manipulation Magic. I wouldn¡¯t be able to leave the Palazar¡¯s old study room until I learned it, so I spent thirteen years learning. I also spent almost an entire year to get to the bottom of the dungeon. The floors were all very big and complicated, and they were riddled with monsters, so every floor took a while.¡± I said, explaining the events of my fourteen year journey to the others. Everyone stood in silence, listening to me.

    ¡°So that¡¯s how it is. Both fortunate, yet also unfortunate.¡± Bogat said.

    ¡°Indeed. Now, tell me what has happened here these last years. How goes the plan against the Royal Clan?¡± I asked.

    ¡°Let¡¯s go to the meeting room first.¡± Bogat said, then led all of us there. Moments later we arrived at the meeting room. I sat down on the head seat, Bogat sat next to me.

    ¡°It¡¯s been fourteen years since you left. Quite a few things have happened since then. It seems that there were quite a few nobles that were against the throne for various reasons. After all, the king was never a just man, so he has done many injustices against the noble families. Currently about two fifths of the nobles are on our side, so we possess a good force, but I doubt that anyone else will decide to join us, except if they are the kind of person who joins the winning side. There might be a few of them. Luckily for us, we have some of the officers of the Royal Knights on our side. As for Erwin, he has convinced a few of the Cadets as well, further bolstering our forces. On another note, Erwin has reached the peak stage of rank B, and will probably have a breakthrough in a few years. He might manage it before he turns sixty. He¡¯s fifty five now, by the way. He really is a talented young man.

    Our Coldblood clan also possesses the vast majority of the economy now. We have taken almost all enterprises of the Royal Clan now, and there is even an alliance between us now. After all the negotiations and deceiving we¡¯ve done, he truly trusts us. We even ¡®helped¡¯ him reduce the number of assassinations and bandit attacks that were happening, so we truly entered his trust circle. This will be a major help when we strike. And Savanna, the mother of Erwin, has also managed to get a few A ranked mercenaries on our side, but they aren¡¯t many, since after all, they are too rare. Overall, we are in the final stages of preparations. We could even strike now if we wanted to, but it¡¯s better to wait a bit longer, until Erwin reaches A rank maybe.¡± Bogat reported.

    ¡°Good thing that you didn¡¯t stop everything when I disappeared, and it makes me happy to know that we can strike soon. And with my return our strength has been bolstered by a bit as well. I reached the rank of a Low Arcanist when I was learning the Magic Manipulation Magic, and the four people who followed me here are the four guardians of the Tomb of Palazar. There are two middle stage A rankers and two late stage A rankers, so they are quite strong.¡± I said. Our overall strength had increased a bit with these guys. When I finished talking, Kato stepped up to talk.

    ¡°That¡¯s good, but our strength here has also improved a bit. Let me give you a report of our improvement. Your disciple Arno has already reached the late stage of rank B, while your parents, Amelia, Serana, Bogat, Lilia, Aylard, and Eric have all reached the late stage of rank B. I have also become a Low Arcanist a few years ago, so we have a few equivalents of the middle stage A rank. With my mana control, I might also be able to fight someone at the peak stage of rank A, and would probably be able to hold off a High Arcanist for a while. We also have about a hundred B ranked humans in the castle now.¡± Kato reported.

    ¡°That¡¯s good. With this strength, coupled together with all our allies and the mercenaries, as well as Rommel¡¯s old battalion, we could win. The time is drawing near. In a few years, when both Erwin and I have reached rank A, we will strike. At that time, I should be the strongest person in Kalderon, and we¡¯ll also have Valen, who is equivalent to an S ranker, like I¡¯ll be.¡±

    After our meeting was over, a village wide festival was organized, to celebrate my return. The festival lasted a whole week. In this week, the villagers were allowed to come inside the castle, and many other festivities were organized. It was the first festival ever of the Bloodmoon village and Sanguine Regis. The festival was dubbed as the Bloodmoon Festival, and would be held every year, much to the joy of the villagers. These festivities would also allow the floor guardians to get acquainted with the others, but they still felt slightly out of place, after all they were the only non-vampires in the inner circle of our Coldblood Clan. But at least Carlahahn didn¡¯t feel too bad, after all High Demons and Vampires were pretty familiar creatures. High Demons also valued everything of beauty, and they were also highly deceptive creatures, but they were still slightly inferior to the pure blooded vampires. Most High Demons were on par with a normal vampire, being able to defeat someone one stage higher than they, but they weren¡¯t like that from birth.

    Demons consume souls, and as they consume enough souls, they¡¯ll evolve as a demon. After a young High Demon absorbed enough souls, they would become an adult High Demon, then they could beat someone one stage higher than themselves. Then, when they absorbed enough souls again, they would evolve to become the next stage of a Demon, the Demon Lord. A demon Lord would be somewhere between a normal vampire and a pureblood vampire, transcending two stages.

    Thus another five years passed, as we prepared slowly for the upcoming fight. We were all training quietly, while I was also training my dear disciple Arno, who had missed me dearly. He had improved quite a bit since I saw him last, being a late B ranker, and a Middle Warlock. In the five years that passed, I also improved, naturally. I had finally transcended the B rank, and become an early A ranker. There was a very clear difference in strength now. I was the equivalent of an S ranker now, perhaps the first of the Kingdom of Kalderon, maybe even the first of our continent. After all it was impossible to become an S ranker in this continent, and even more so in Kalderon and Tabarut. There really was a huge difference in strength. If I had fought the failed Lich Palazar now, I would have won easily. If there were ten of them, then I might lose, but if there was only one, then I would win in an instant. I felt like I could take on the world. Of course I knew that that would be impossible. I would only be able to handle a small kingdom like Kalderon. But I could also feel that the next stage was ages away. It would take longer than ever to improve now. But I could still be considered a genius amongst geniuses, since I reached the A rank before the age of sixty. Even in the bigger continents, this would be rare. After all the natural energies would only affect how quickly you would train to a certain extent. After that it only controlled how far you could go.

    Erwin had also reached the A rank recently, at the age of sixty, but he wouldn¡¯t able to ever reach the S rank, even though he reached A rank so quickly. The world was truly an unfair place.

    In these five years I had also ordered the others to go test themselves in my new dungeon. I set it as a requirement that all pure blooded vampires were to make it a few floors into the A ranked floors. The normal vampires were to get to the B ranked floors. I also had my elite guards and elite assassins go there. They were also required to get to the B ranked floors. This would serve as perfect battle training so they can build up combat experience, allowing them to fight against both warriors, as well as mages.

    Thus, the time for us to act, had finally come. We had all our forces gather outside the castle, only leaving a few to regulate the village. Then, after a few days of preparation we set off. Amongst us there were all the pure blooded vampires, every one of which could match an A ranker, and all the normal vampire, which could all match a B ranker, and over a hundred B ranking humans, and around a thousand soldiers under the B rank. There were also all of the elite assassins, and many non-elite assassins. We had about a hundred B ranker assassins as well. Thus we set out to the Royal Capital with our small army. Meanwhile, Valen Shadowblade was traveling to the same place with his own band of elite assassins, which had a few A rankers as well, and Rommel was preparing his own old battalion, and the allied Cadets were training harder than ever, setting the graduated Erwin as an example. The Royal Knights on our side were also preparing, and the mercenaries were gathering, under the command of the A ranked mercenaries.

    Thus, one year later, calamity would fall upon the Royal Family, but they were of course completely ignorant of this, and were comfortably relaxing in the comfort of their Royal Palace.

    End of chapter 20

 Chapter 21: Demise of the King and Prince

    This chapter ended up being a bit late. It took a lot longer to write, since I fell ill, and apparently RagNarok fell asleep yesterday, which is why it''s only released today, but at least it''s pretty long...

    Well, anyway, enjoy!

    Chapter 21: Demise of the King and Prince

    PR¡¯s note (Rag): It¡¯s my fault you guys are getting this chapter today instead of yesterday which was when the Author sent it to me, sorry for the delay it wasn¡¯t the Author¡¯s fault. Yesterday after coming home tired i took a small nap which led into some deep sleep and i didn¡¯t wake up until the next day which is why this is late T_T.

    Our small army, numbering at just above a thousand men, was slowly traveling to the Royal Prefecture. After one whole year, we had finally arrived relatively close to the Capital, but we didn¡¯t go any further, after all, we had to be secretive. Valen and his band of assassins had also arrived at our appointed meeting place. With him, he had about sixty A ranked elite assassins. These were the best of the best, at the very top of the organization.

    ¡°Isaac, you have arrived. We arrived here about a week ago, of course we were traveling at much quicker speeds, since we don¡¯t have an entire army to drag with us.¡± Valen said, happy that we were finally here.

    ¡°Valen my friend, it is good to see you again. It¡¯s been about twenty years already. Alas, if I hadn¡¯t been stuck in that tomb for so long, I would have seen you long ago.¡± I said, also quite happy to see him again.

    ¡°Indeed it is! Now tell me Isaac, how is your strength these days?¡± Valen asked. The deal between us had been that I would work under him until I became stronger than him. It wouldn¡¯t make much sense for me to work for someone weaker than me after all, so we decided that we would switch roles when the time came, that I would be his heir of the Shadowblades, so to say.

    ¡°I¡¯m afraid I¡¯ve already reached the A rank, both in magic and strength. This means that I¡¯m your equal now, and even in skill I shouldn¡¯t be behind you, after all I learn very quickly, and also spent about a year of constant fighting in that dungeon.¡± I bragged about myself, causing Valen to start laughing.

    ¡°Indeed, it is so. Later we should have a good spar, after this coup d¡¯¨¦tat business is done. Anyways, what is the first order of business?¡± Valen asked. I looked around to see our forces. There was a small horde of people here, all willing to fight with their lives on the line for us. There were about seventy A rankers, counting my own people and Valens people, then around two hundred B rankers, and a thousand soldiers of lower ranks. But this was only part of our forces. Amongst the Royal Knights we controlled around two fifths of them, since we had gotten a few captains with us, and Erwin had even been directly promoted to captain because of his potential and status. Therefore we had about eighty A rankers from the Royal Knights, making it a total of 150 A rankers, so we already outnumbered them by fifty. After that we had ten mercenary A rankers, further bolstering our numbers to 160 A rankers. We also had two S rankers, who were Valen and I. Rommel¡¯s old battalion numbered at 10,000 soldiers, and of the nobles that were left in the kingdom, almost half of them were with us, and a few of these nobles had their own battalions. Our total number of battalions was eighty, which numbered around a total of about one million troops. The royal clan¡¯s army numbered at around two million. Of course this was just the army stationed in the city, but the armies in other places wouldn¡¯t be able to get here in time.

    But the difference in sizes didn¡¯t matter too much in this circumstance, since we had the strongest force, the 160 A rankers, while the Royal Clan had about 130 A rankers, and we even had two S rankers. Therefore the larger force would serve as a distraction by laying siege upon the city, while our 160 A rankers infiltrate the city, which would be very easy, after there wasn¡¯t an ongoing war going on between us, so we could waltz right in. Thus it was about time for us to begin, since our army was currently arriving. There was a huge mass of people marching in our direction, numbering at a baffling one million men. On the head of this group, various nobles were ridging, most notably, the Barca family.

    ¡°Lord Isaac, our army is here and ready, you just need to give the order.¡± Rommel reported.

    ¡°Good. Here, have this voice transmitter. When I message you, you start marching to the capital. I will lead a punitive force of 160 A rankers to the city first, then when we are inside, I¡¯ll message you. Tell the Royal Knights to come here, they¡¯ll come with me.¡± I said to Rommel, as he listened intensely.

    ¡°Yes Lord Isaac, immediately!¡± He said, then immediately ordered someone to gather the Royal Knights. Moments later our group of 160 left camp. We quickly travelled to the capital, which was a week¡¯s journey. When we entered the city we managed to blend in very well, since we were disguised as a caravan and weren¡¯t wearing much armour or weapons. When I got into the city, I immediately messaged Rommel, to have them start marching, while we found a place to stay. We were staying in a fairly expensive place, close to the Palace. In the meanwhile we didn¡¯t have much to do, so we just waited for the army to come. We waited for three months. In this time most of the pureblood vampires all made it to the peak stage, so now our force was even stronger, as a pureblooded vampire at the peak  stage of B rank they could fight equal to a late A ranker. Three months time later, a horn sounded. The siege of the Royal Capital had begun.

    Third person.

    In the castle, various nobles were gathered in the counsel room, together with the king and his princes. They were in a state of chaos, because they were laid siege upon. This army was half the size of theirs though, so they weren¡¯t too worried, but what worried them the most was the absence of various nobles, and even Royal Knights. They had found that around eighty Royal Knights had deserted, and that this army did indeed belong to the Kalderon faction. This was a rebellion, but they had no idea who had started it. They did have ideas though, the Barca family. The king had executed the son of the Barca¡¯s Lord, so they might hold grudges against them, but this was certainly not what worried the king the most. All transport of food and other supplies into the city had stopped. The Royal Capital had been completely boycotted from the economy, and there was certainly only one power capable of this. The Coldbloods. If the Coldblood had joined the rebellion, then it was bad news, since the Coldbloods were the most mysterious clan in the kingdom, and the Lord of the Coldblood Clan was in fact here in this very city. He had talked to him a while ago, and when he saw him, he was dumbfounded. The aura the man emitted was unfathomable, and he couldn¡¯t sense even a hint of his strength, even though his Light Arts would allow him to sense how strong someone at the same level as he was. The King was a peak stage expert, the supposed strongest in the kingdom, but he couldn¡¯t sense Isaac at all. He was afraid that he might even have entered that impossible realm that someone from this continent could never enter. But the king knew that that wasn¡¯t entirely true. It was possible to find some divine treasure that could increase his talent, but they were just too rare, so rare that one hadn¡¯t appeared in millennia.

    The king knew that this could be bad, but he didn¡¯t panic. He commanded his men to gather their troops, and prepare for a prolonged siege. And the siege was indeed prolonged, since there didn¡¯t happen much in two months, there were only minor skirmishes, but the king had of course expected this, since the opposing army had the advantage of supplies, and the Royal Clan didn¡¯t have any sources of food at all. Almost every single food provider had safely left the city, and been retrieved by the other army, so he didn¡¯t doubt that the Coldbloods were involved at all. Thus the city went hungry and many people died. The first to die were the children and old people, since they were the weakest, but after another four months many other people died. They even had to burn huge amounts of corpses, after all, there was over a hundred million people in the city. After these four months the hunger also started to severely affect the soldiers and they grew weak, some even died. Then it started, the enemy attacked.

    Apparently there had been even more traitors in the city, because the city gates had been directly opened by powerful experts, then the enemy army all stormed into the city, while the soldiers of the city all rushed to the various entrances to meet the enemy for a large scale fight. The Royal Clan still possessed superiority in numbers, but they were weak from hunger, so the fighting was very equal.

    Meanwhile in a certain hotel, a group of 160 started to move. Isaac and co. all walked directly to the entrance of the royal castle, as the eclipse of the battle was about to arrive. They were quickly making their way to the Palace, all hell was letting loose at the city gates. Over two million soldiers were fighting all over the city, blood was being splattered and limbs being decapitated. The city was a blood fest. Luckily there weren¡¯t many vampires there, or they might have been a bit tempted, but the vampires of the Coldblood Clan were naturally strong willed. When Isaac and his fighters made it to the Palace Entrance, they were naturally stopped in their tracks.

    ¡°Halt! Entrance to the Royal Palace is forbidden during these times of war!¡± The guards announced to my group of people, who they assumed were refugees from the city, trying to get to safety. But before they even managed to blink, their heads decorated the Palace grounds. The Palace Guards were naturally no match for my group of A rankers, so they didn¡¯t stand a chance. We continued through the Palace grounds until we directly entered the Palace. When we entered, we had the former Royal Guards guide us to the throne room. We decided to go there first, to see if the king was there. On our way, we killed several guards, decorating the halls of the Palace with blood.

    Eventually we arrived at the throne room, and indeed, in the throne room there was a large group of armed men. They were the remaining Royal Guards. Many of the Royal Guards exclaimed as they recognised the men that they used to call their comrades, their friends. The battle didn¡¯t start immediately, as we stood there, eyeing each other.

    Meanwhile out in the city, Erwin was riding his horse valiantly, charging through large groups of enemies, slaughtering many, while Rommel was on the ground, slaughtering equally as much. There was a clear difference between the two, as Erwin wasn¡¯t as calm, since he wasn¡¯t used to slaughter, but Rommel, he had served in the army for decades before retiring, and he had seen many wars, seen many massacres. As the two A rankers were sweeping through the enemy army, the morale of the rebellion skyrocketed, while the morale of the Royal Clan was low, both from losing so many men, and from the hunger.

    While a two sided slaughter was happening in the city, the events of the Royal Palace were at a standstill.

    ¡°Isaac Coldblood, it really was you. Were you the one who planned all this? Who else could it be¡­? Just tell me one thing. Why? Didn¡¯t we treat you well? Didn¡¯t I give you control of half my kingdom?¡± The depressed king asked, as he sat on his throne, yet not looking so high and mighty.

    ¡°Why, you ask? Let me ask you, do you remember about forty years ago, when that crown prince of yours travelled to the Fenlai Prefecture, to kill the Lord Commander?¡± I asked him back. The king, as well as the prince, both looked surprised at the question. Did this fall so far back? The king didn¡¯t know how old Isaac was, but he thought that he was at most forty years old, due to his youthful appearance. After all, even though an A ranker would live for four hundred to five hundred years, and a B ranker could live for up to two hundred years, they still aged, albeit slowly. Even though it was absurd for an A ranker to be forty years old, they couldn¡¯t help but think that it was so, since he looked to be only twenty. That would mean that he had to have reached B rank at a very young age.

    ¡°Forty years ago? I do remember, but were you even alive back then?¡± The king asked.

    ¡°Of course I was, sixty three years old. But do you know who that Lord Commander was? He was my brother-in-law. You know what that means right? The identity of his wife?¡± I barked at him, my anger clearly apparent.

    ¡°She was your sister? But-but-but¡­ but the Lord Commander killed the wife of my son, so it is only fair for his entire family to fall to the same fate!¡± He shouted at me.

    ¡°Fool! I was the one that killed her, and her petty knights! Your investigators were so incompetent that they couldn¡¯t even figure that out, so you blame it on my sister¡¯s husband?!¡± I shouted back at the king, but as I said my words, both the king and the crown prince, as well as the other princes, were all shocked. The crown prince was slightly shaking.

    ¡°You killed her? DIE!!!¡± The crown prince screamed, then charged right at me at the top speed he could muster, but he was only at the middle stage of rank A, so he couldn¡¯t be considered a threat to me, and everyone on my side knew this. Thus as the prince appeared before me, I simply grabbed his face, then threw him to the side, into a wall. As he was hanging in the wall, moaning from the pain, I channelled my mana, and formed nail formed spikes out of pure mana, then sent several dozens of them into his arms and legs, nailing him to the wall. Then I formed thick chains, also made of pure mana, and bound him with them. No matter how hard he tried, he wouldn¡¯t be able to get away, after all there were absurd amounts of mana in those chains and nails.

    ¡°You fool. You think that you on your own could even come close to match me? Even if all of your Royal Knights in here joined you, it still might not be enough to defeat me. Now, you just sit tight there, while I slaughter your entire clan. After all, you killed my sister, so you need to have the most painful death, a death that will last so long that you will forget what time even is.¡± I calmly said to the fool, as he was bound to the wall, not able to move a single muscle on his body. Everyone present was looking in shock at how easily I dealt with him. I turned back to the enemy knights.

    ¡°Let¡¯s begin.¡± I said, then my body flashed, and everyone charged into battle. Almost three hundred A rankers charged at each other. There were more A rankers here, than there should be in the entire country. This was truly a battle forever unknown to this kingdom. The battle was relatively even, but it was still visibly that the Royal Clan was at the disadvantage. We had both more men than they, we also had more late stagers, while the other side barely had any, and there was only one peak stager, the king himself. The battle went on, people were dying on both sides. Valen and I didn¡¯t participate much, we only helped when someone important was at a disadvantage, like one of the purebloods, or one of the Valen¡¯s favourite assassins. After the battle had gone on for a while, there were about 30 Royal Knight left on their side, while about a hundred people left on our side. The reason that there was such a big difference was first, because we had superior numbers, and second, we had superior quality. After seeing the situation, I decided it was time to act.

    ¡°Everyone, stop for a while.¡± I said calmly, not raising my voice, but my voice still boomed through the room, making sure that everyone heard me. Naturally everyone stopped because of the commotion.

    ¡°Royal Knights, as you can see, you are losing. We have more than three times the amount of troops than you have left, and I reckon that in five minutes there won¡¯t be anyone of you left. Therefore, I shall give you a chance. Lay down your weapons, and swear loyalty to me, and the person who I shall make king. Do this and I will allow you to live. Refuse, and I will kill you.¡± I said, turning into a menacing tone at the last words. About half of the Royal Knights put down their weapons.

    ¡°Only this many? Last chance¡­¡± I said, trying to get a few more on my side. The more A rankers, the better, right? After my word, another five put down their weapons, and went to the side.

    ¡°Fine. Kill them.¡± I command, and my one hundred troops immediately stormed the ten Royal Knights. Naturally, they didn¡¯t last long. Now the only ones left were the Royal Knights that joined us, the king and the crown prince. Everyone else was dead. I walked over to the king and dragged him to the prince. The king didn¡¯t try to fight back, he knew that his death had arrived. But alas, his time had not arrived just yet. Using the chains and nails of pure mana, I bound him.

    ¡°Your time is not yet, but it shall come soon enough.¡± I said. I used another spell and bound their mouths so that they couldn¡¯t speak. Then I turned to my troops to dispatch another order.

    ¡°Attention troops! Half of you go down into the city and help, the other go and find all the members of the Royal Clan and gather them here.¡± I ordered the troops. Everyone immediately left to tend to their orders, even the purebloods. I turned to the throne and sat down on it, Valen following from my back.

    ¡°Isaac that was some interesting magic you used. I couldn¡¯t even tell what element it was.¡± Valen curiously stated. I looked at him with a smirk.

    ¡°This magic might just be what gives me the upper hand over you. It¡¯s called Energy Manipulation Magic. It allows me to directly control the natural energies and mana. The spell I used on that insect was made from pure mana.¡± I explained to him. Valen looked at me in shock.

    ¡°Manipulate natural energies and pure mana?! Is that even possible?¡± He exclaimed.

    ¡°Of course it is. Let me show you.¡± I said, then extended my hand out and started gathering the natural energies around me. The natural energy concentration in my palm increased, only to scatter away again. Then I made a few balls of pure mana and made them float around.

    ¡°See? Although it takes a lot of effort to tamper with the natural energies, since I¡¯m still only at the beginner level, it¡¯s possible. If I spend a few months I could even make a teleportation array here in Kalderon.¡± I told him. When he heard this he was even more surprised.

    ¡°Seriously? You could make a teleportation array here, in Kalderon? That¡¯s insane!¡± He shouted to my face. It seemed like he had a hard time believing it.

    ¡°Yeah, I could, if I spend a few months to gather natural energies in one spot, then lay the formation there, then go to the other place and do the same there. But doing that would take at least one year, plus the time it takes to travel there.¡± I said.

    ¡°Isaac, you have to teach me this!¡± Valen said, excitement on his face.

    ¡°I¡¯m not sure if that¡¯s possible right now. You see, I spent thirteen years learning it, while I was trapped in the dungeon. I neither slept nor ate for those years, so with your talent, I reckon you could do the same in seventy five to a hundred years. That is to spend twenty four hours a day, seven days a week, learning it. And that¡¯s only the basics.¡± I told him.

    ¡°Seriously? That long? And you only spent thirteen years? Just how much of a genius are you?¡± Valen asked curiously.

    ¡°Well, I¡¯m only sixty three years old, yet at same strength as you, so you imagine.¡± I said. Then Valen put his hand on his chin, as if he was pondering something.

    ¡°Say, Isaac, you said that you didn¡¯t sleep or eat for thirteen years? How is that possible?¡± He asked, slightly suspicious.

    ¡°Oh, did I let that slip? Well, you¡¯re not ready to know the answer to that yet, but don¡¯t worry, you¡¯ll know soon. Just don¡¯t think about it for now.¡± I said, not willing to tell him my secret yet.

    ¡°Well, if you say so.¡± Valen said, resigned. He was very curious about that little detail, but he wouldn¡¯t push the matter. After all, Isaac was his equal these days. The two men sat and chatted for a while, waiting for the other royal members to be gathered. After a while, a few groups started coming back, with a few others in tow. Soon all the surviving members of the Royal Clan had been gathered. They were all looking up to me, a look of begging for mercy in their eyes. When they saw the state of the crown prince and the king, some of the royalty cried in sorrow. I stood up from my throne, and had all the people be put in lines, in front of the crown prince. I walked up next to the prince.

    ¡°Watch carefully now, prince.¡± I said to the prince, as I turned to my soldiers.

    ¡°When I give the signal, you are to all decapitate these insects instantaneously.¡± I ordered the troops. I turned to the king.

    ¡°This is the consequences of the actions of you and your son. The destruction of your clan, and the decapitation of all your family members.¡± I said. Then I turned back to the prisoners one last time.

    ¡°Do it.¡± I said. Hundreds of swords fell, and hundreds of heads decorated the floor. Blood sprayed all over, and the throne room became a pool of blood, as it flew ever more out of the necks of the hundreds of corpses. The king and prince tried to scream and shout, tried to get loose from their bounds, but it was to no avail. They couldn¡¯t let a single sound out of their mouths, they couldn¡¯t move a single muscle. After the mass execution was over, I led all the remaining troops down into the city, only leaving a few to keep a watch on the king and prince duo, although there was no way that they could escape either way.

    The fighting was still ongoing, but now that a hundred and twenty A rankers joined the battle, the advantage was largely tipped in our favour. Such a large groups of A rankers could easily sweep through thousands upon thousands of soldiers, but there was a huge number of participating soldiers, so the fighting was ongoing for a long time.

    The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings.

    The fighting went on for several days, as the numbers kept decreasing. Eventually the numbers on the cities side had shrunk to about a hundred thousand remaining soldiers, while our side still had almost seven hundred thousand left. The reason for it being like this was because our troops were in much better condition, and because we had a lot of A rankers to lead our troops. When I and Valen had felt bored, we had even joined the fighting as well, slaughtering a few thousands of soldiers. The troops of the city could only watch their friends get slaughtered. Eventually the enemy surrendered. The soldiers of the Royal Clan were bound and imprisoned, and the fighting ended. It had been a massive victory for our side.

    More days passed after the fighting had stopped. We were staying in the Royal Castle, debating on who should be the next king. Originally I had intended for the Barca family to be the next royal family, but they didn¡¯t want that. Instead they had wanted something else entirely.

    ¡°Lord Isaac, our family does not wish to be kings and princes. No, instead we have another request for your lordship. A request from my grandson to be precise.¡± Rommel had said.

    ¡°Is that so? Alright, say it then.¡± I responded back to him.

    ¡°Lord, our family have been in the military for generations, always leading the life of a warrior. Instead of becoming the new Royal Clan, we, the Barca family, would like to become your lordship¡¯s personal guard, in charge of protecting your well being. This is a wish that I hold very dear to my heart. I could be in charge of the ones protecting you, while my wife, Joan, could protect your wives.¡± Erwin said, earnestly. There was a spark in his eyes as he spoke his words. It really seemed to be a wish straight from his heart.

    ¡°Hmmm, I see. This is a wish that I comply with. Alright, from today on I would like to create a new order. This order shall become the very elite of our Coldblood Clan, the strongest of the strongest, our own Royal Knights if you will. They shall be the Crimson Order, personally led by Erwin Barca. Barca, you will be in charge of everything related to this order. You can take some of the Royal Guards that you trust from here, then build its strength up.¡± I announced. Thus the Crimson Order had been established, an order that would become known and feared throughout the world. The sparkle in Erwin¡¯s eyes grew even brighter.

    ¡°Thank you Lord Isaac, you won¡¯t regret it!¡± Erwin said enthusiastically. He already started making a list of what Royal Knights to take with him, in his mind.

    Thus a few days passed, and flyers were spread all over the city, informing the civilians that the conqueror of the city would make an appearance, and inform everyone of the changes that would come.

    3rd person.

    Thus, the day had come. Outside the Royal Palace all of the civilians were gathered, nearing a hundred million. Everyone was looking up to the grand balcony, waiting for their new king to make his appearance. Suddenly, a young man appeared, no older than twenty.

    ¡°Everyone, maybe some of you recognise my appearance, maybe you don¡¯t, but nevertheless, I am Isaac Coldblood, lord of the Coldblood Clan.¡± His voice boomed throughout the city, so loud that you could hear it for hundreds of kilometres, yet his voice didn¡¯t hurt a single being.

    ¡°As you probably know, we are just a business family, or at least that¡¯s what we would have you know, but in truth we are all very powerful. Now, the reason why I have captured this city, and conquered the kingdom is not because I want power, but another reason entirely. Maybe some of you remember around forty years ago, when the prince ventured out with fifty Royal Knights, just to kill the Lord Commander of the Fenlai Prefecture. That action was what led to the demise of the Royal Family. You see, the Lord Commander was married to a girl called Alice, and they had one child together. What the king didn¡¯t know is that Alice was my sister, yet she was murdered by that despicable prince. Now, let me show you what happens when you anger me.¡± I said. Suddenly a man flew out unto the balcony and appeared in the hands of Isaac. It was exactly the king. Suddenly flames started appearing all over the king, melting his flesh. Then thousands of small blue needles, made out of some sort of energy appeared, and directly pierced into the body of the king. The king was letting out his heartfelt screams as he felt every ounce of the pain. After the small blue needles had penetrated his body, a small blue glow came from him, and all his veins were glowing bright blue. Suddenly his body started swelling. He grew bigger and bigger, fatter and fatter, until his clothes couldn¡¯t hold him anymore and his melted flesh started tearing. After a while, the body gave under, and he simply exploded, spraying his splattered meat and blood for dozens of meters. He was nothing more than meat paste.

    ¡°Perhaps this might serve as a warning for anyone who intends to wrong me in the future.¡± Isaac said, in cold blood. Some of the weaker stomached people had fainted from the horrifying sight, while some screamed in fear, while others just paled in fright. Yet there were still people who didn¡¯t seem to care.

    ¡°Now that the matter is over, it is time to announce the new king. Naturally I don¡¯t intend to take over the throne. Instead this gentleman will take that role.¡± I said, as a middle aged man walked out to the balcony. This man was one of the higher ranked nobles that had helped us in our conquest. He was a capable man, both efficient in matters of war, as the affairs of politics. He should at the very least be better than the previous king, who had let his power go to his head, and made him arrogant and conceited.

    1st person, Isaac.

    Of course, the new king wouldn¡¯t be allowed to reign free. He had to swear loyalty to the Coldblood Clan, and if he were to ever betray us, then he would be swiftly killed. We had station a few assassins in the castle, to always keep watch on him. The nobles of kingdom were also made to swear loyalty to us, so even though we weren¡¯t in the throne, we still controlled the kingdom. We were the highest power in the kingdom, something that would become unbeknownst to the civilians of Kalderon.

    Thus the time for us to return home, had finally arrived. The journey home was an equally as long one, as it took us another year, but when we finally got back, we were all relieved and happy. Of course, the crown prince wasn¡¯t happy at all, since halfway through the journey he was crippled, and was forced to walk on his own like that. He wasn¡¯t fed much, several times he was about to die from hunger, dehydration, fatigue or just his injuries, but every time he was close to death he would be healed just enough so he could keep going. When we got back, he was stripped naked and thrown into the dungeons, in the cell next to Lilia and Aylard''s traitorous old friends. When we got back, he was stripped naked and thrown into the dungeons, in the cell next to the traitorous friends of Lilia and Aylard. Thus we had finally returned to the large halls of Sanguine Regis, and held a large celebration, that encompassed all of Bloodmoon Village as well. But this time it wouldn¡¯t be only us that returned. Rommel¡¯s old battalion would also come join us at a later time, after they made all their preparations and gathered all their belongings and families. Thus, two years after our own return, a huge caravan of around fifty thousand people arrived outside our forest. We had sent a group out to meet them and guide them back to the village, thus the population of Bloodmoon had risen up to over fifty thousand people. Naturally, it couldn¡¯t be called a village anymore. Therefore the town of Bloodmoon had been established. I decided to make Rommel the mayor of the town, as he would like to try a governing position again. Back before his son had been killed, the Barca family had been the lords of a small city in the Royal Prefecture, so it wasn¡¯t anything new to Rommel, therefore I decided that he would be befitting to the role. But there was something I needed to tell the Barcas first, so I had them all come to my study. Of course, this was just after we arrived back at the castle, two years before Bloodmoon became a town.

    ¡°What is it that you have us gather here for, Lord Isaac?¡± Rommel asked curiously. When they had been asked to go meet me, the mood had been very serious and no one would tell them what it was about, so they were slightly worried.

    ¡°There is something that I have held secret from you, all these years. Something about us Coldbloods. You see, we aren¡¯t human, neither are we elves or dwarfs.¡± I said with a mysterious tone. The Barca family had a slightly surprised look on them, but they were mostly confused.

    ¡°Then, if you aren¡¯t human, then what are you?¡± Erwin, the leader of the new Crimson Order, asked.

    ¡°We¡¯re vampires, the immortal beings of the legends, the rulers of the night.¡± I said. Now they were even more surprised and slightly sceptic.

    ¡°Vampires? Don¡¯t joke with us now, vampires don¡¯t exist.¡± Rommel said, slightly annoyed.

    ¡°You doubt me? Then ask yourself, how is it that I and your grandson were born in the same country, are almost the same age, only a year or two apart, but he¡¯s in the early A rank, while I rival an S ranker. How is it even possible for someone from here to become an S ranker? Sure, there are those special training methods that the Royal Knights use that allow you to transcend a rank, but what if I told you if I¡¯m only an early stage A ranker, just like Erwin. I believe that Royal Knights are able to sense the strength of others, as long as their opponent isn¡¯t stronger than they are. I¡¯ll put down my defences and allow Erwin to say how strong I am.¡± I said, then looked at Erwin. Erwin did as told, and used his powers to try and sense my strength level. His face flashed with surprise, then shock.

    ¡°Grandfather, it¡¯s true, he¡¯s only an early stage A ranker!¡± He yelled, as he made his revelation.

    ¡°You¡¯re really a vampire? But how is that possible? Didn¡¯t they go extinct ages ago?¡± Rommel asked again.

    ¡°Yes, they did, but the God of Death, Gebados, revived us by making a new progenitor, that would be me by the way, so now we are rebuilding the vampire race, but there aren¡¯t many of us yet. There are only fourteen pureblooded vampires, fifteen including me, and a few dozen normal vampires. After I turn you though, there will be eighteen pureblooded vampires, so we are growing, slowly but steadily.¡± I said. The four Barcas looked a bit taken back.

    ¡°After you turn us? Are you going to make us vampires? Aren¡¯t we going to be shunned by the sunlight? Well, it does make sense now, since we travelled mostly at night when we were on our way here¡­¡± Erwin said.

    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m going to make you into vampires, but don¡¯t worry too much about the sunlight. Pureblooded vampires can handle it, we just get a bit weakened after too much exposure, but a normal vampire can get burned by it, some might even die, but the weakness to sunlight is supposed to fade away with time, but no one has gotten that old yet, so I¡¯m not sure. But sunlight isn¡¯t all of our problems. We also need to drink blood, as you can probably imagine, and when you first get turned, you have to drain two bodies of blood dry. So you will be killing two people each today, and you won¡¯t be able to stop yourself. Do you have a problem with that? Naturally, there will be a lot of benefits if you become a vampire, like eternal life and you become more beautiful, after all, the vampire race has always been one of unimpaired beauty. But most importantly, you will naturally become stronger as you age, even if you don¡¯t train, and you will be able to surpass S rank.¡± I said.

    ¡°I personally, I don¡¯t have a problem with it. I have killed more men and women than I can count in my long life. After all, I was in the military for over a hundred years, but I can¡¯t speak for the others. All I can say is that this offer of eternal life, and strength beyond the limits of our continent appeals to me.¡± Rommel said.

    ¡°While I may not have killed as many as grandfather, I did kill my fair share of enemy troops in the recent war against the Royal Family, and I am also appealed to this offer of immortality and strength. And most importantly, I am your ever loyal personal guard of the Crimson Order, I naturally want to be of the same race as you, so I can serve you forever.¡± Erwin said. He truly was a loyal fellow.

    ¡°I can agree with that. The Barca family has always been a loyal one, maybe even too loyal.¡± Rommel said.

    ¡°I was also a cadet from the Royal Knights, even though I didn¡¯t participate much in the battle of Kaldron, I still did kill a few enemy soldiers. And my husband is accepting your offer, so I naturally will accept too, so that I can stay with him forever, and serve you and your wives forever, in the Crimson Order.¡± Joan said. Seems she was mostly persuaded by the power of love.

    ¡°Well, I have never killed anyone before, but my son and father-in-law, as well as my daughter-in-law are all accepting, so who am I to decline. I too will become one of your vampires.¡± Savanna said. They were all a loyal bunch.

    ¡°That¡¯s very good, but you seem to have misunderstood, I didn¡¯t actually give you a choice, you were going to become vampires either way, but since you all accepted out of free will, then that makes me very happy. Then let¡¯s start.¡± I said.

    I got up from my seat, then walked to the person nearest to me, which was Joan. I embraced her with a light hug, then bit into her artery and drained her blood, until there was almost not a single drop left. Then I let the vampire venom, which was composed of my blood essence, flow into her body. The progress only lasted a few moments, and she fainted to the floor.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, this is normal. She¡¯ll wake up in about an hour. By then I will have eight slaves ready for you to feed on.¡± I said, to reassure them, as I moved to the next person, Erwin. I did the same to him, and a few moments later, everyone was unconscious. I exited the room, to have someone grab a few slaves for me, then walked back in and sat on my seat, reading a book. An hour later, Erwin was the first to wake up, with a thirsty look in his eyes. He looked at me, as if asking me about what he should do. I pointed to the slaves.

    ¡°Choose two of them and drain them for their blood.¡± I said, not even looking up from my book, as the portion I was reading was quite interesting. Erwin proceeded to get up from the floor, and drained two girls of their blood. This time there were four girls and four men. The slave girl I had sent knew who was being turned, so she had also taking offerings according to gender. Soon after Erwin was finished, the others woke up, one by one. Rommel and Joan didn¡¯t hesitate much to feed on the offerings, but Savanna was a bit hesitant, after all she had never killed anyone before, but it was necessary. Killing the offerings helped get the new vampires used to killing, so I made it a rule that you were to kill the first person you fed on. Soon, all the new purebloods had finished their initiation.

    ¡°Welcome to the life of a vampire everyone.¡± I said, then explained the details of vampirism in more detail, like how to birth a child, and such. Erwin and Joan were very happy to hear that they could have a child, since they had always wanted one, but the Royal Knight Cadets weren¡¯t allowed to have children until they graduate.

    After becoming vampires, Savanna had gone from the early stage of rank B, into the middle stage. She had been at the early stage of rank B before, but she would never be able to become an A ranker, as she was already in her eighties. Now it was a whole other story though. As for Joan, she was at the late stage of B rank, but she was very close to breaking through to the peak stage, so the boost that vampirism gave her, allowed her to reach the peak stage in a blink of an eye. After the maturing stage, she might even reach A rank, or at least get very close to it. Of the vampires, other than me, Erwin, Rommel, and technically Kato, she would probably be the first to reach A rank, but that was only fitting, as she would be the second in command of the Crimson Order, directly in charge of protecting my wives, so she had to be very strong.

    As for Erwin and Rommel, they didn¡¯t get much stronger, not counting the stage transcending. They probably wouldn¡¯t even make it to the middle stage of rank A, since the differences in power were just too large, compared to the B rank. Well, Rommel might be able to do it, since he had been in the early stage much longer than Erwin, but he hadn¡¯t been training much after he reached A rank, and his talent was nowhere the level of Erwin.

    Two years later, after Rommel¡¯s old battalion arrived, as well as their families, mass expansion of the village began. After all, there was nowhere near enough housing available in the village. While the expansion was ongoing, the newcomers stayed in a large camp, locating in a clearing not too long away from the village. Trees were being chopped down, houses erected. After a few months of hard work, the village had grown in over ten times as large as before. After the housing had been built, various enterprises appeared in the city. Taverns were made, more smiths opened business, and other various businesses were made. After that, we decided to make a wall around the city, preventing any monsters from getting inside the city. In the past, a few stragglers had ventured into the village. Back then a few people died, before the monster was dealt with. A wall would naturally prevent something like that from happening again. We also held a mass registration for the newcomers. By that I mean that we had everyone written on a piece of paper, and then bound by blood. Since there were so many people, every single vampire partook in blood binding, since it would be way too much for eighteen purebloods. Even though, the procedure still took a week or so. After that they were informed of the true nature of us, and ordered to never spread this piece of information. We also reassured them that they wouldn¡¯t come to harm, and that we wouldn¡¯t force them to give us blood, after all, that¡¯s what we have our blood slaves for. A lot of people were a bit scared, but the about two thousand people who lived here before helped calm down. The fact that this village had been here for several decades already also helped them realize that there weren¡¯t any danger here, and that with such powerful overlords, they would be very safe. We might also have used the blood bond to make them accept it. Of course, they would never know that.

    Thus, the Bloodmoon village had become the Bloodmoon town, with a population of over fifty thousand people. It functioned just like a normal town did, except it was isolated. There were taverns for the people to meet and drink, there were schools for the children to learn, universities for the slightly older ones to learn, libraries to read books, doctors to treat the sick, and many others. It was even better than most cities, since we had made quite a few people with important roles come here, and the prospect of immortality was quite alluring. After all, any one of the town¡¯s people could become a vampire as well, as long as some vampire took a liking to them, or they excelled at their role. We also spent quite a bit of wealth on the town, to ensure its prosperity.

    Erwin and Joan started recruiting for their Order immediately as well. For the moment, since we weren¡¯t that many people yet, the requirement was to be at the B rank to join. Five ex-Royal Knights had come with us, and joined the Crimson Order, as well as a few B rank Cadets and other B rankers, so there were a few in it already. Then when we came back, they recruited around a hundred B rankers. Most of them were human, while some were vampires. Both humans and vampires were allowed to join the order. After they had finished recruiting B rankers, they started to look for people of lower strength, to be directly recruited as Crimson Cadets. They would be trained and groomed until they reached B rank, and later A rank. These Cadets were taken both from the castle, as well as the from Bloodmoon Town. At the moment there were three hundred of them.

    For the purpose of training them, we built the Crimson Academy, solely dedicated to training the Crimson Cadets. Every year, people would be allowed to go there and take an exam, and if they pass, then they would become a Crimson Cadet. Naturally there were a lot of people who signed up, since joining the Crimson Order would basically guarantee that they would become vampires, as we had said that anyone that joins the Order will be allowed to become a vampire if they wish, after a hundred years of service. Therefore, on the opening day of the Academy, around twenty thousand came to try their might, which was basically the entire young population, but in the end, only another two hundred Cadets were accepted. And it wasn¡¯t guaranteed that everyone would graduate either, so even fewer than that would become Knights of the Crimson Order.

    There was a hierarchy in the Crimson Order as well. Upon being accepted into the Crimson Order, you would be a Crimson Guard, therefore, the B rankers made up the Crimson Guard. After you reached A rank, you would be promoted to the Crimson Knights, becoming a Knight of the Crimson Order. Erwin would be the Lord of the Crimson Order, commanding all the forces beneath him. Above him, would be me, the only person allowed to command him, and the Crimson Order freely.

    End of Chapter 21

 Chapter 22: Eternal Suffering

    Chapter 22: Eternal Suffering

    The news that the Kingdom of Kalderon had been overthrown, naturally wasn¡¯t able to stay hidden. It didn¡¯t take long for the Kingdom of Tabarut to find out, but they didn¡¯t go into action right away. They were wary of the reports that they had gotten. They heard that the king had killed the sister of some local business man, but this business man had spent as short as forty years to gather enough forces and allies to completely overthrow the kingdom. They had also heard how the king died. They knew that the king was a peak A rank expert, but he was helpless in front of this man, completely blown to pieces. But they also knew that the man had overthrown the throne, only to give it away, but was this really the case? He was most likely still controlling everything from behind the scenes, so they were wary of him. If he really was behind the throne, then he would become a troublesome opponent. But in the end, Tabarut decided to make use of the upheaval caused by the rebellion, so they sent numerous spies into the neighbouring kingdom. These were all top of the line spies, very skilled. Using their finesse, they quickly managed to infiltrate the Royal Palace and many other places, places important to the Coldblood Clan namely. But there was one weird thing. The spies never sent any messages back, and in fact they disappeared completely.

    What Tabarut didn¡¯t know, was that the Coldbloods were vampires. They kept vampires and expert assassins in all of the important places, especially the Royal Palace. Staying hidden from a vampire is not an easy thing. Especially vampires that are trained assassins. The assassins were quickly discovered and captured, then questioned by the purebloods themselves. Naturally, in front of the purebloods, they couldn¡¯t keep a single thing hidden. Everything was quickly revealed, from the reason why they were spying, to their next plans. The spies were sent there to get information about the forces of the new Royal Family, as well as the Coldbloods. After the intelligence was finished, they intended to raise an army, and march for the Kingdom of Kalderon, where, with the element of surprise, they would swiftly attack and conquer the first city, thus getting a good head start on this upcoming war. But now, with their spies captured, their plans were already foiled. The assassins were put under extreme torture for two weeks, then the surviving assassins were sent back home, with a message.

    ¡°If you want to keep your kingdom, bow before me.¡± The message said. A simple message, but the state of the assassins would show that the Coldbloods were not to be trifled with. It wasn¡¯t that bad an offer either. The king just had to swear loyalty to Isaac, and he would be allowed to continue his reign. Naturally, it wouldn¡¯t be that easy. Isaac would probably have to make a visit to Tabarut later, but for now that could wait. The first thing on Isaac''s mind was the prince. He wanted to play with him a bit.

    1st person, Isaac.

    I was walking through the castle, going to those deep dungeons beneath. As I entered the dungeons, I kept walking through hall after hall. Over the years these rooms had seen many people. People that had betrayed us, or people that wouldn¡¯t listen to our demands and had to be ¡®persuaded¡¯. They had also been used to house criminals from Bloodmoon. After all, it wasn¡¯t a crime free place. Over the years, a few murders had happened, and theft wasn¡¯t too rare either. But only the worst of people would be down there, in deepest rooms, where light never shone, and heat never reached. Only the people who had done the worst of sins against us, against me. People like, the prince, or those traitorous insects that almost cost Lilia and Aylard their lives. I was walking through the halls, eying the many prisoners, going through the stairs, until I finally reached the deepest cells, outside the cold damp cell of the prince. I opened the door to see a skinny man, not wearing a single piece of clothing, his skin pale, slightly yellow, his hair slightly greying. He was hanging against the wall, his arms and feet bound by chains. These chains were made of extremely strong material, exported from other countries. The prince slowly lifted his head up, to see who had now come to torment his pitiful life. His eyes flashed with despair and horror as he saw who had finally come. I closed the room, completely sealing off all sources of light.

    ¡°Make your prayers and enjoy your last moments of peace, for you shall never see it again. From this day onwards, to the very end of your poor life, there shall never be a moment of peace, every moment shall be haunted, every moment you shall feel the pain I felt when I lost my sister, every moment you shall feel the pain you felt when you lost your wife.¡± I said slowly and menacingly, as I slowly walked forwards, up to him. His eyes had a look of begging.

    ¡°Please, please don¡¯t. Just, just kill me, just end it already.¡± He said weakly in an almost non-existent voice. I looked at him condescendingly.

    ¡°Not only will you not die today, I shall make sure your life is a long one, even longer than it should be possible.¡± I said, as I grabbed his head.

    Warning! Rape and NTR incoming, involving the prince and his wife. Although in this case it is all in his mind. If you don¡¯t want to read it, then just read until the dirty stuff start happening and the last six paragraphs. It¡¯s important that you read the beginning and the six last paragraphs!

    1st person, the prince.

    As he said those words, he raised his hand and placed it on my face. Suddenly I felt some sort of energy run into my body, penetrating every spot in me, covering everything. The surroundings, they¡¯re changing? He¡¯s disappearing, the demon¡¯s disappearing? What¡¯s happening? Wait, where am I? Isn¡¯t this my room? Of course it is, why wouldn¡¯t it be? Wait, why do I feel like I¡¯m not supposed to be here? Wasn¡¯t I somewhere else just before? No of course not, I just woke up. Maybe it was a dream. I turn around, and I see her, Lisa. Lisa is here, how can that be? She¡¯s dead isn¡¯t she? Wait, what am I saying? Of course she isn¡¯t, it must have been a bad dream after all. I lie on the bed, silently watching my Lisa, waiting for her to wake up. After a while, she turns around, and looks at me sleepily.

    ¡°Good morning love.¡± She says. Her smile always cheers me up, but why do I feel so happy, as if something very good has happened. Oh well, no use thinking about it.

    ¡°Good morning dear.¡± I reply to her and caress her cheek. A single tear slips out of my eye.

    ¡°What¡¯s the matter, why are you crying?¡± She asks worriedly. I just smile at her, as she wipes it away.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know, but I¡¯m just so happy right now.¡± I say to her, but just as we are about to kiss, the window breaks. A man appears before us. A scary man, a terrifying man, a man I recognise, yet have never seen. A man that looks scary and horrifying, yet looks innocent as if he would never hurt a fly. Who is this?!

    ¡°Who are you?! What are you doing here?! Guards!!¡± I shout nervously. I¡¯m nervous, extremely nervous, yet I have no idea why. Even though he might be an assassin I shouldn¡¯t be this nervous, yet I am. I stand there looking at the man, no the boy, he looks like a teenager. I continue staring at him, waiting for the guards, yet no guards come. The young man starts laughing.

    ¡°There won¡¯t be any guards coming.¡± He says in a voice so menacing that I can feel it piercing into my soul, stirring my mind, shaking my bones. My body goes cold. I grab my sword and charge at him, using the entirety of my power. I can feel that this man is strong. I mean, just his voice was able to horrify me to the bones, but I can¡¯t hesitate. I can¡¯t let any harm come to Lisa. As my sword is about to hit him in the neck, as I¡¯m feeling like there¡¯s hope, he simply lifts his finger to meet my sword. It¡¯s as if time stopped. My sword stopped on his finger, not going a single millimetre further. I feel nothing. Then I feel numbness. The impact from the strike is making my arms go numb, something that I haven¡¯t felt in decades. Then he pushes his finger slightly and I go flying into a wall, then into another, and another, and another. Flying through several rooms. He¡¯s a monster! How could anyone be that strong! As I¡¯m lying on the floor, dizzy from my injuries, I can hazily see Lisa running to me, and some figure slowly walking in my direction.

    The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement.

    ¡°Are you alright? Are you hurt?¡± Lisa frantically asks me.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll be fine. It wasn¡¯t a fatal attack, after all, all he did was send me flying, I¡¯m not injured.¡± I said to reassure, but if only the truth was so. I can barely stand, I can barely see, my vision blurry, my hearing hazy. As I regain all my sight and hearing, I can see that he¡¯s already here, then not. He disappeared. Where did he go? I hear a scream, from my side. I quickly look to see what happened. The man held her by the neck, grabbing her shirt, directly tearing it off her body, exposing her chest. I scream in fright as I gather all my strength and charge at him once again, yet no weapon in hand. As I¡¯m about to arrive beside him, all I see is a flash of his arm, and I¡¯m against a wall again, yet this time it¡¯s in the same room. I try to stand back up again, yet weirdly I can¡¯t feel my legs and arms. As I look to see what¡¯s going on, I can¡¯t help but let out a horrible scream of pure pain. They¡¯re gone! My arms, my legs! They¡¯re gone! As I scream in pain I can feel the pain in my limbs that I don¡¯t have very clearly, the so called phantom pain. I gather my senses and manage to calm down. I need to save Lisa! I look back up again, to see that the young man is now grabbing her underwear, tearing it off, exposing her private parts. Then he unbuckles his pants, and takes out his thing, about to put it into the screaming girl.

    ¡°NO, NO, NO STOP!!!!! STOP, DON¡¯T!!!¡± I scream, hoping to stop him, but to no use. He has already put it in, and is already pounding her with no mercy, not going easy on her at all. All Lisa can do is scream in pain and sorrow. But as I am watching it I see that she is getting wetter down there, as the man is fondling her and fucking her. What, why is she getting wet? I can still hear her begging him to stop, but her face is getting redder. What is going on? I continue watching them, only to see her get wetter and wetter, redder and redder. Then she climaxed. She came! She¡¯s actually having an orgasm.

    ¡°OH GOD, THIS FEELS AMAZING!!!¡± She screamed. I feel a crack appearing in my heart.

    ¡°Wait, I didn¡¯t mean that!¡± She then screamed. Then the man smirked, and continued fucking her. NO STOP IT!! I want to scream, but I can¡¯t. I can¡¯t speak anymore.

    ¡°Lisa, that felt good right? If you agree to come with me and be my wife, then I¡¯ll have sex with you as much as you want.¡± The man said. I¡¯m horrified. What if she agrees?

    ¡°What? Really? Nonono, what am I saying? Of course I won¡¯t!¡± she screamed. Of course she won¡¯t she loves me after all. But that was no use, the man just continued fucking her, letting his rod go in and out of her constantly. She was wetter than ever, and it was clear that she didn¡¯t dislike it.

    Her face is becoming more and more distorted by pleasure, I need to do something! But I can¡¯t, I can¡¯t, I can¡¯t! Someone help! Who am I kidding, no one¡¯s come yet, they¡¯ve all abandoned us! Maybe they have us to him. Maybe they gave Lisa to him, and allowed him to kill me. Would they do that? But they did!

    I look back up at them. Another crack. She¡¯s smiling, she¡¯s actually smiling. Then she screamed. A scream of pure pleasure. I could see the sperm leaking out of her, there was an absurd amount.

    ¡°My offer still stands you know.¡± The man said with a menacing smile on his face. Lisa looked at him, not saying anything for a while, then,

    ¡°Really¡± She said.

    ¡°All you need to do is kiss me, then ride me, all while looking into the eyes of your husband.¡± The man said. Surely she won¡¯t do it right. Surely she won¡¯t abandon me as well. Then she jumped up and wrapped her arms around the man, and deeply kissed him. She kissed him deeply, while guiding him to the floor. Then the man is on the floor, and Lisa on top of him. She grabs his thing and guides it inside her, then starts going up and down, as she looks me into the eyes with a smile on her face.

    ¡°Ahh, look my prince, ahhh, I¡¯m having sex with someone else, and, ahh, he¡¯s so much better than you. Ahhh! This is so good! I can¡¯t wait to marry him, then have sex with him every day!¡± Lisa said, as she gladly and willingly rode on top of his cock, all the while looking me straight into the eyes, not even a hint of regret in her eyes.

    ¡°By the way prince, actually I was pregnant with your child.¡± Lisa said again. Now I couldn¡¯t hold any tears back, as I let them fall freely. Then for a moment Lisa is looking away from me, to the mysterious man.

    ¡°Lord, if the child is a boy, ahhh, then you can kill him or do whatever you want to, but if it¡¯s a girl, then you should, ahhhhhh, then you should wait until she grows up, ahhhh, then you could marry her as well, if she¡¯s beautiful.¡± Lisa said. I wanted to scream no, but I couldn¡¯t.

    ¡°That¡¯s a great idea Lisa. If it¡¯s a boy, then I¡¯ll kill him, but if it¡¯s girl, and she grown up to be beautiful, then I¡¯ll have her join you as my wife, and have a lot of sex with her as well. But if she¡¯s ugly, then I¡¯ll kill her.¡± The man said. Lisa seemed happy.

    ¡°Great! Ahhhh! Your thing is so big, I love it, and I¡¯m sure my daughter will as well. If it¡¯s a boy or an ugly girl, then, ahhhh, then you just kill them. Ahhhhh!¡± Lisa said. Then they kept fucking in silence, while Lisa was looking me in the eyes, without rest. After a few orgasms on Lisa¡¯s side, the man finally came inside her again. The man finally let the girl get off. I¡¯m relieved, but I know that it¡¯s no use, they¡¯ll be doing it again and again and again. The man stood up, the raised his hand, and a sword appeared. The man looks at Lisa.

    ¡°Use this to kill your husband.¡± He said. Lisa smiled and grabbed.

    ¡°Gladly.¡± She replied. With the sword in hand, she slowly walks up to my mutilated corpse. I can see large amounts of semen leaking out of her pussy, as she walks. She¡¯s still wet as well. She stands before me and is raising her sword. Then it falls, and I feel it connect with my throat, tearing through it. The next thing I see, is my body, as I roll on the floor. Then I see Lisa and the young man having sex again, before everything fades to black.

    I open my eyes. What I see is my room. Why am I in my room, wasn¡¯t I just killed. Wait, what am I talking about? Killed? I¡¯m clearly very alive, what am I babbling about. Must¡¯ve been a dream. I turn around, and I see my dear wife, Lisa. A tear escapes my eye, for some reason I feel very happy, as if I regained something I lost. I wonder why? Must be that dream, even though I can¡¯t remember anything from it. Weird. I watch my wife in silence, waiting for her to wake up. Then she turns around, and I see a sleepy looking face.

    ¡°Good morning love.¡± She says with a smile.

    ¡°Good morning dear.¡± I say as I caress her hair, but then another tear slips out from my eye.

    ¡°What¡¯s the matter, why are you crying?¡± Lisa asks, worried, but I just smile at her.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know, but I¡¯m just so happy right now.¡± I say to her, reassuring her that everything is fine, everything is perfect. We lean closer in, but as we are about to kiss, I hear the sound of shattering glass, the sound of a window being broken.

    End of chapter 22.

 Chapter 23: Tabarut

    Alright, chapter 23 is here! Now I have officially written over 100000 words! Nice, ain''t it?

    Anyway''s enjoy the chapter!

    Chapter 23: Tabarut

    The prince had a dismayed expression on his face. His eyes were wide open, his mouth gaping, some saliva seeping out of his mouth. His face was even paler than before. I had been watching him for two hours already. Most of the time he would be screaming, sometimes uttering intangible words, but right now it was quiet. Everyone once in awhile he would calm down. This was the moment when the nightmare started over again, while he was lying in bed. The first time, I had been inside his mind, and done everything myself. After that, I had set the nightmare to repeat, over and over again, not even stopping once. Every time it started over again, he would forget everything, but his body, and the furthest reach in his mind, still remembered. It was already physically showing on him. His hair had started to gray before, but now there were already patches of white in his hair. He also looked slightly older than he did before. The dreams wouldn¡¯t be the exact same every time, sometimes there were little differences, like the princess being killed, or something like that. Since I was satisfied for now, I turned around, closed the door, and left the pitiful prince on his own, in his dark, cold, damp cell, where light never reached.

    Thus the following weeks passed. The captured spies had been tortured and sent back to Tabarut with the message. They had been given a few days of kindness, so that they could fully recover. After all, the healthier they were, the quicker they would get back to deliver my message. Of course, sending it by transmission was possible, but I wanted them to tell the king personally instead. That would bring more impact. Thus the spies went on their journey back to the Royal Capital of Tabarut. The king had been informed that they would return, and that they would bring him a message when they got back. They also said that it was better not to do anything rash until then. Naturally, the king knew that they had been captured already, so he also knew that their plans might very well be revealed, even though the spies were trained not to ever reveal anything, but since they were still alive, they might very well have told everything. This frightened the king. What kind of people were these Coldbloods? Even these top spies were captured in a matter of days, and most likely revealed everything. The king decided to put his plans on hold for now, until the spies returned.

    In the meanwhile, I decided to make getting to and back from the Royal Capital a bit easier. I would make a portal to the Royal Capital, using my Energy Manipulation Magic. I also decided that I would teach this magic to Kato and some others, at least the portal part. Teaching them everything would take far too much time. Even I spent as much as thirteen years learning the basics, so Kato wouldn¡¯t take any shorter, maybe a bit longer. Everyone else would take much longer, naturally. But teaching the portal magic should not take too long. Thus I started my work. Making a portal didn¡¯t require my constant attention, as long as no one touched it while I was gone, it would be fine, so I spent a few hours every day making the portal, and the rest I spend teaching Kato and a few others. I took five months to finish the first portal, but I wasn¡¯t finished teaching them the portal magic yet, me and my new temporary disciples all travelled to the Royal Capital. Arno was with us as well, since I was teaching him as well, after all, he was my actual disciple, so I couldn¡¯t not teach him. We were traveling quickly, since we were all vampires, so it took almost two months to get there.

    In the Royal Palace, we were given rooms to stay in, then we had another room constructed in the deepest, most hidden away corner of the Palace. This is where the portal would be. When the king found out what I was doing, he was simply shocked. He thought I was crazy, to be making a portal here in Kalderon, but I explained him about my magic, and how it could gather and increase natural energy. When he saw how my portal looked, he also understood a bit better, since he had been outside the kingdom before, and had seen the portals before. Mine looked very different from them, since my method was better and much harder to make. The new king was naturally very impressed, so he left me to my devices, excited to see the finished product. He was also very excited to visit Sanguine Regis. He was a very important person to us, and knew of our true nature, so he was allowed to visit, and would have to, from time to time, since he had to attend in the meetings we had. He had also been promised to become a vampire when he steps down from the throne. Whether or not he did a very good job as king, would determine whether or not he becomes a Pureblood.

    I continued my work, making the portal, and teaching the others. It took another five months to make the second portal, and at this time I was almost finished teaching the others. Since I was personally teaching them, it wouldn¡¯t take as long as them reading the book, since I perfectly understood the concepts. Kato had basically learned the portal magic already, but the others were still lacking. I gave Kato a copy of the portal section of the book, so that he could personally refine his skills a bit. After another two months, I finished teaching them. Altogether, it took one year to teach them it. Thus, it was time to venture into Tabarut. A few of the new portal mages would come with me, to further expand our new network of portals. Using the new portal, I had the few Crimson Knights come with me, then we ventured into Tabarut.

    Traveling from the Royal Capital of Kalderon, to the Royal Capital of Tabarut, was quite a long journey, but with the minimum speed of a B rank Vampire, it took around four months to get there. Since there were normal vampires with us, and I didn¡¯t want to stop every morning, I used darkness magic to constantly cloak them during the day, but it was very tiring to constantly do it, so stopped to rest during some of the daytime hours. After four months, we arrived outside a huge city, just as majestic as the Royal Capital of Kalderon, Kaldron. This was the city of Taurus. The name was derived from an age old legend of a hero and his Minotaur friend. Apparently they fought some great evil here, but the Minotaur died, so the hero named the city in honour of his race, and the kingdom in the honour of his name, Tabarut. Therefore the symbol of the city was a great Minotaur. By the way, according to legend, this hero managed to reach the S rank, but died, as he never made it any further. An S ranker could live for over a thousand years, while an SS ranker could live for as much as five thousand to ten thousand years, depending on the person. An SSS ranker could live for up to a hundred thousand years, but such long lived people were truly rare. The only way to achieve immortality, was to reach the rank of X, or the Realm of Immortals, Immortal Realm, etc.

    My group entered the city, and waltzed right towards the palace. When we were about to enter, we stopped of course.

    ¡°Halt! Entrance into the Royal Palace is forbidden to commoners!¡± The guards yelled. He called me a commoner. I had to personally stop my guards from killing him, since in their eyes, a sin such as calling me a commoner could only be punishable by death.

    ¡°I advise that you watch your tongue, or I might not be able to stop my men. But anyway, let me enter, the king has an audience with me.¡± I said nonchalantly with a calm smile on my face. The guard had a funny look on his face. He could see that the people behind were dangerous, and he could see that I was dangerous, so he didn¡¯t say anything stupid. The only reason he said that, was because he was careless and hadn¡¯t really looked at our group.

    ¡°Normally you would say that you have an audience with the king, not that the king has an audience with you, but I¡¯ll send a messenger. What¡¯s your name Sir?¡± The guard asked.

    ¡°No no, this time the king has an audience with me, and My name is Isaac Coldblood.¡± I said. Now the guard truly had a shocked expression on his face. After we ¡®conquered¡¯ the Kalderon Kingdom, we had started expanding into Tabarut, and the other surrounding kingdoms. Things were going slow in the other kingdoms, but in Tabarut things were going nice and quickly. We already had a good foothold in the kingdom. But that wasn¡¯t the only reason why I was famous. After the events of the battle of Kaldron, my name had spread like wildfire. People even knew about me in the surrounding kingdoms, which helped us expand as well. The man who lost his sister to the Royal Family, then spent forty years taking over the economical side of the kingdom, then took almost half the nobles in the kingdom on his side, then completely overthrew the Kingdom, and most importantly, the first person to reach S rank in this continent in who knows how many years. After what I did to the king, everyone assumed that I was an S ranker, since it was common knowledge that the king was at the peak stage of rank A, and being able to easily kill such an expert could only mean that I was an S ranker, or equivalent. Whether I had achieved that stage, or was a practitioner of a special training method was unknown.

    After the guard heard my name, he hurried to inform the king. Only moments later, a group of Royal Knights rushed to our location. They all bowed to me.

    ¡°Lord Coldblood, please follow us to meet with the king.¡± One of the Knights said. I nodded, and my group followed the Royal Knights. Soon after, we arrived in a study. Behind a desk sat a middle aged man, with a noble air about him.

    ¡°You must be Lord Isaac. Please have a seat. Knights, you can leave now.¡± The king said. I sat down opposite him, then looked to my group.

    ¡°You can leave as well.¡± I said, then my Crimson Knights followed the Royal Knights.

    ¡°Are those your personal bodyguards? They all have a very strong air about them.¡± The king said. I nodded.

    ¡°Yes, they¡¯re the Crimson Knights from the Crimson Order that I founded after the war with the previous king of Kalderon. Anyways, you can probably imagine why I am here, right?¡± I said. The king had a slightly nervous look about him. He couldn¡¯t sense how strong I was at all, so he didn¡¯t doubt that I was an S ranker.

    ¡°Yes, I received your message from my spies, but this, this is a bit hard.¡± He said.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you¡¯ll still be allowed to rule your kingdom, you just have to become a part of the Coldblood clan. Just imagine it as joining a larger alliance, or empire. Of course, there will be benefits for you as well.¡± I said. The king looked slightly interested at these benefits.

    ¡°Benefits you say? What kind of benefits?¡± The king asked.

    ¡°First, you¡¯ll get to know some of my secrets, and I won¡¯t kill you and your family to take over the kingdom. Other than that, I possess a very rare and powerful magic. This magic allows me to gather natural energy in one place, and lock it there. Then I can make a portal. I also taught this magic to a few others, and I have two of them with me here. If you agree to my offer, then I will have them stay here for ten years. In these ten years they will make any portals you ask them to, but beware, making a portal here takes a long time, so the amount is limited. Now what do you say? Accept and receive many benefits, refuse and die. Let me warn you one more time, if you refuse, then I kill everyone in this Palace right here and now. Trust me, I am more than capable.¡± I said, my voice turning dark and menacing at the last words. The king¡¯s expression was dark and menacing, while he sat there and thought. After a while, he finally replied.

    ¡°Fine, we will join you. From now on, the Kingdom of Tabarut serves under Lord Isaac Coldblood.¡± The king announced.

    ¡°Good. But remember to keep that under the blanket. Now, I promised to tell you a few secrets, and a few secrets you shall know. First, I am a vampire, as is every one of the Coldbloods. I know this is hard to believe, but yes, they were extinct, but they aren¡¯t anymore.¡± I said. The king was surprised.

    ¡°What? You¡¯re a vampire?¡± he said, shocked. In response, I flashed my teeth, showing him my fangs.

    ¡°God! Please don¡¯t hurt me!¡± The king yelled. Using magic I had already sealed all the sound in here, so luckily no one could hear us.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t hurt you. I¡¯ve been talking to you all this time without hurting you right?¡± I said, slightly annoyed at his reaction. Like seriously, what the hell was that!

    ¡°Ah, I¡¯m sorry. I had a nightmare about vampires last night, so I got a bit afraid. Seems like it was a premonition. So you¡¯re all vampires, huh?¡± The king said. I almost fell out of my chair, laughing.

    ¡°Yes, we¡¯re vampire, and when you step down from the throne, you will be allowed to become a vampire as well. Whether you become a Pureblood, or a normal vampire is dependent on your performance as king. By the way, a Pureblood Vampire is much stronger than just a normal one.¡± I said.

    ¡°I¡¯ll be allowed to become a vampire? That means eternal life, right? That doesn¡¯t sound too bad.¡± The king said. Seems like he was interested in becoming a vampire. Then he would surely work hard for us.

    ¡°Yes, we vampires are immortal, and we can also reach S rank and beyond. And that isn¡¯t everything. A normal vampire can transcend one to two stages in strength, while a Pureblood can transcend three. As the Progenitor of all Vampires, I can transcend and entire rank. That¡¯s why I¡¯m as strong as an S ranker, even though I¡¯m actually only at the early A rank.¡± I informed him. There was an excited look on his face.

    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.

    ¡°Amazing! I¡¯ll make sure to work hard!¡± The king said.

    ¡°Good. Now, I need you to drink some of my blood. This will make you bound to me by the Blood Bond, and will also make you a first stage Vampire Ghoul. Don¡¯t worry, nothing will change about you, except you won¡¯t be able to deny my orders, and you will also become slightly stronger for a few weeks, but that will fade away if you don¡¯t continue drinking my blood.¡± I said. I had decided to divide Vampire Ghouls into stages. A first stage Ghoul is when it has only drunk vampire blood a few times, while a second stage Ghoul is when the Ghoul¡¯s appearance starts to change, like becoming paler and getting slightly red eyes. The third stage, is where Alicia was at. That¡¯s when you stop aging, and the ghoul is very pale and has very red eyes, only a bit paler than a vampires eyes. I don¡¯t know what comes after that, since I haven¡¯t experimented that far yet.

    I proceeded to give the king a bit of my blood, then after that, we had them build a room, hidden away in the deepest, most hidden away corner of the Palace, so that we could begin constructing our portal. I helped the others make the portal, so that it could be finished faster, and after only two months, it was finally finished. I left the two portal mages here, then went back home with the Crimson Knights, through the portal. When we got home, I sent all the portal mages, who had been polishing their skills, to make portals in all the major cities, and connect them to our portal room in the castle. Two other portal mages were given to the king of Kalderon, so that he could make his own portals that could be used publicly. Our portals would be hidden in our various bases, of course. Kato, who had been diligently studying the art of portal making, would also start teaching his own disciples, so that they could make portals as well. Thus, the construction of our portal network had begun.

    In the coming days, the king of Tabarut did many things, in an attempt to please me. He sent many beautiful ladies to be my concubines, gifted some of his Royal Knights, gave me exotic slaves and even gave me some money. I saw no reason to refuse the concubines, since I only had one, Alice, so a few others wouldn¡¯t hurt. I now had twelve concubines, including Alice, so there was always quite a few to choose from that could accompany me and my wives at night. The Royal Knights were also welcome, since we lacked A rankers in the Crimson Order, and the slaves were nice too. There were a few elves, some orcs, beastmen of various kinds, like cat people, dog people, and there was even a lizard person. There were also two of each gender of each species. The ones of the same species were ordered to mate, so that we could get more. Not all of them wanted to, but we forced them, and since there were only two of each kind, most managed to fall in love, and got married. There was this one couple though, they really hated each other, but they agreed to have a few children together, if they just didn¡¯t have to live together and get married. Being the kind overlord I am, I allowed it. But it really took a bit of hassle to get them to have sex, since the guy couldn¡¯t even get it standing in front of that girl. We managed to find some medicine for that, but even then it took an hour before the guy came, and the girl never got wet. They were Koala People, by the way.

    After that ordeal was over, I offered the girl to be my concubine, since I just couldn¡¯t get my eyes off her, she was just too cute. Even making those two have sex was a compromise on my part, but I just really wanted more Koala People. Naturally the girl agreed to be my concubine, even though she was very confused by first being forced by one guy to have sex with another guy, then to have the first guy make her his concubine, after she had sex with the other guy. But she didn¡¯t complain, since I was a good looking guy, as well as the Lord of the castle. Thus, a few days later, I took the girl to meet my wives.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry Natalia, they are very nice, and especially so, to someone as cute as you.¡± I said to reassure her. There came a blush on her face from the complement. Even though she had been used for sex a few times before, she wasn¡¯t used to being complimented.

    ¡°Before we go in, let me ask you, how used are you to sex? Before wasn¡¯t your first time, since there was no blood and you were dry as sandpaper, so have you had it often, or not? If you¡¯re not used to it, then I¡¯ll be gentler with you in bed.¡± I said. Her face got really red, and she started fidgeting around.

    ¡°W-well, since I¡¯m only seventeen years old, and was enslaved just a year ago, I haven¡¯t had it much. Before was only my fourth time, and the first time someone came inside me. It didn¡¯t feel good before either, but with him, it was even worse than normal.¡± The girl said. She looked really adorable as she spoke. Even though she was Koala Girl, she didn¡¯t look that much like a Koala. She had the ears, and her head was slightly round, making her look even cuter, but most Koala people had a natural cuteness. Her hair was grey and reached to her shoulders. She had a slim waistline and her breast were slightly small, yet not too small, their shape was clearly visible under her revealing clothing. The slaves all wore revealing clothing, especially the female ones.

    Natalia wore a short brown dress that covered half her breast, and didn¡¯t go all around her thighs, revealing her thighs and part of her butt. The dress divided into the front part and the lower part, slightly above her waist, around the navel, so everything on the sides from there, was visible. A slight breeze would be enough to make her entire butt visible. Not all slave clothes were the same though. Some wore only a bra and panties, while some wore more. It all depended on what they were given.

    ¡°Sex didn¡¯t feel good? That¡¯s weird, the slave mark is supposed to make you crave for sex. Maybe there was a defect in the spell. But it doesn¡¯t matter. Normally sex only feels good when you want it, and when it is with someone you like, so as long as you like me, and you aren¡¯t against having sex, then it will feel good. Don¡¯t worry, you¡¯ll get used to it.¡± I said. Her face brightened a bit, which made me happy. I quite liked her. She was so adorable and shy, and kind as well. She was a wife candidate.

    ¡°I don¡¯t mind having sex if it¡¯s with you. But you¡¯re so kind and wise, you don¡¯t sound like someone that¡¯s around twenty years old. I know you¡¯re a vampire, and that you don¡¯t age, so just how old are you?¡± She asked, slightly nervous. She was scared that she might be going over line, but she wanted to know.

    ¡°Heh, I¡¯m actually sixty four years old.¡± I said, an awkward smile on my face.

    ¡°S-sixty four? I¡¯m seventeen and I fell for a sixty four year old man?¡± She said. I couldn¡¯t help but laugh a bit.

    ¡°Natalia, age is meaningless when you¡¯re a vampire, and I¡¯m going to make you a vampire soon, when you turn eighteen or twenty maybe, but the point is, we¡¯re never going to look old, and I still feel quite young. Time is different for vampires. In the future I might get a concubine that is a thousand years younger than me. You get it? In a thousand years, it will be as if you¡¯re only slightly younger than I am.¡± I said.

    ¡°Yeah, you¡¯re right. But let¡¯s go meet those wives of yours. I feel so honoured that I get to personally introduced to them, by you.¡± She said with a cute smile.

    ¡°Well, that¡¯s because I intend to make you my wife in the future, but for now let¡¯s go meet them, and have a fun night.¡± I said, as I opened the door. Inside were Amelia, Serana and Alicia. Serana and Alicia were chatting about who knows what, while Amelia was reading a book. Normally she would find some place where she could be in peace while reading, but I had informed them that I would introduce Natalia to them, so they were all gathered here.

    ¡°Everyone, this is Natalia, my newest concubine, and future wife candidate. She¡¯s really cute right? Natalia, this is Amelia and Serana, my first wives, and Alicia, my second wife.¡± I introduced them. They all looked happy to see her, but Serana was really excited and jumped up of her seat and hugged Natalia.

    ¡°Oh my God, you¡¯re so cute! I can¡¯t wait to see you naked, and I can¡¯t wait to see how you look like a vampire! Isaac, you have to make her a vampire soon!¡± Serana said very excitedly, while she was already tearing the clothes off of Natalia, who was panicking.

    ¡°I was planning to wait until she¡¯s eighteen or twenty.¡± I said. Serana fiercely turned her head around.

    ¡°What!? No, you have to make her a vampire right away, while she¡¯s still cute and innocent! If you don¡¯t, I won¡¯t forgive you!¡± She said with an angry look.

    ¡°Alright, fine, I¡¯ll turn her today, just calm down.¡± I said. As I said my words, Serana turned happy again, and jumped on me and kissed me. She always was the naughtiest one.

    ¡°Great! Since she¡¯s the newest, you should hurry and fuck her first, then after we¡¯re all finished, you turn her.¡± Serana said. The others also looked excited, and already started undressing themselves. Weirdly Serana was the last one to get naked, except me. I sighed at their eagerness, then walked to the nervous, panicking Natalia.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry Natalia, it won¡¯t hurt.¡± I said. She calmed down, then smiled at me.

    ¡°I know.¡± She said. Then she bowed down, and leaned on a chair. I grabbed her behind, and placed my thing outside her pussy. I let it slide into her already wet pussy. As it slid inside, she moaned. It was a long and passionate moan, from her first orgasm.

    ¡°Oh my God, this is amazing!¡± She exclaimed. I laughed, and kissed her.

    ¡°See, you came just from me putting it in.¡± I said. She looked at me with that adorable smile.

    ¡°Yeah, it was amazing. Please continue Master Isaac, I want more.¡± She said excitedly. I complied and starting repeatedly thrusting in and out. As my cock was sliding in and out, she was moaning uncontrollably. Then, to further her pleasure, I bit into her neck. She had never been bitten by a vampire before, much less had sex with one, so when I bit in her, she came multiple times over.

    ¡°Holy shit, you bit me, but it felt so good!¡± She screamed. As I had sex with her, I continued to drink her blood. Her breasts were bouncing as I pounded her from behind. I continued to fuck her, until I was about to come, but when I told her, she immediately got on her knees, and put my cock in her mouth, and let it flow inside her mouth. Her small mouth couldn¡¯t hold all of my sperm, so her face and breasts got completely covered in it.

    ¡°If I¡¯m pregnant, then I don¡¯t want the baby to get covered in sperm.¡± She said. When the other girls heard her, they were shocked, and looked at me confused.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, it¡¯s not mine. You know how I ordered those exotic slaves to have kids together? She was no exception, it¡¯s just that she and the Koala Boy really hate each other, so they agreed to have one baby, as long as they don¡¯t have to live together and get married. So they had sex, and then she became my concubine. By the way, I forgot to tell you Natalia, but you did indeed become pregnant. I can sense it, and if you guys try, you¡¯ll sense it as well. ¡°I explained to them.

    ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then are you sure that it¡¯s a good idea to make her a vampire?¡± Amelia asked.

    ¡°Actually, it¡¯s a very good idea. This way, we can find out what happens if a girl is pregnant when she gets made into a vampire.¡± I said.

    After that conversation was over, we continued the sex. I came inside all three of my wives, then I drained Natalia and made her into a vampire. After she fell unconscious, I ordered someone to get two slaves, then we continued having sex. When the slaves arrived, Serana made them join us, thus I came inside them as well. When Natalia woke up, we were still having sex, and I was fucking one of the slaves, who were thoroughly enjoying this. After I came inside the slave girl again, I had her follow me to where Natalia was sitting, watching us.

    ¡°Natalia, you need to drain this girl, and that one as well, of their blood completely.¡± I said. Natalia looked at me slightly shocked.

    ¡°Do you mean, I have to kill them?¡± She asked slightly scared, as she stood up.

    ¡°Yes, you have to kill them.¡± I said.

    ¡°But I don¡¯t want to!¡± She said. I leaned in, and kissed her.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, they don¡¯t mind. You have to drink people¡¯s blood now, or you¡¯ll shrivel up, until you become a raisin.¡± I said, as I wiped some semen away from her mouth. She looked at me.

    ¡°Do I really have to?¡± She asked again. I nodded. Then she looked at the slave. Natalia started crying, as she revealed her fangs, and slowly let them sink into the girl. The naked slave just smiled and hugged her, while she felt her life being drained away, until finally, she lost her strength and let go of Natalia, then fell to the floor. Natalia¡¯s mouth was covered in blood and sperm, while she walked to the next slave. She fell in a similar manner. Thus, Natalia the Pureblood had been born.

    End of chapter 23

 Chapter 24: Novo; the Grand Plan

    Here''s chapter 24. In this chapter, there will be a bit of focus on Little Isaac. He might seem like a bit of a retard at times, but just keep an open mind, and bite it in ya! In the next chapter he''ll be explained a bit further.

    btw, if you have any better names for the High Vampire, then please, do tell.

    Chapter 24: Novo; the Grand Plan

    Natalia had become a vampire, but she had a bit of trouble settling in, since she was new to all this vampire stuff. She wasn¡¯t keen on the idea of drinking blood, but she got used to it though, and had settled nicely into the life of a vampire. After a few months, we also married. She was the one that had spent the shortest time as a concubine, but since she was already a Pureblood Vampire, I thought that keeping her as a concubine was a waste. She also wasn¡¯t getting any thinner. Her belly was growing, so at least we knew that the baby inside her was alive. What kind of state it would be in was a mystery though. Even though the child wasn¡¯t mine, I would still raise it as my own. After all, technically my blood would flow through its veins, since when I turned Natalia, my blood was infused to her, which made us of the same bloodline. Bloodlines was a thing in vampires. The characteristics of a vampire would come from its bloodline, and those bloodlines were of course, all created by me, the progenitor. Someone ¡®born¡¯ from Eric would be a very stealthy, shadowy vampire, specialising in stealth, while someone ¡®born¡¯ from Kato, would be a magically inclined vampire.

    But I had no idea what would happen to the child if a pregnant woman became a vampire. It was unlikely that it would remain human or demi-human, but becoming a half vampire was much more unlikely, since it shouldn¡¯t be possible. But the vampire blood of the mother would likely change the child into a vampire as well, especially since it was recently conceived at the time of the embrace. So I was fairly sure that it would become a vampire, but whether or not it would a Pureblood or not, was truly unknown.

    Anyways, Natalia and I had married, and a great feast was held in the castle and town, and thus Natalia became, Natalia Coldblood, my third wife.(Rag:Amelia and Serana count as the first wives, Alicia counts as the second  wife, so Natalia is third wife) At this time, her stomach was bulging slightly, since it had been 3 months, but you couldn¡¯t notice it, except if you paid careful attention, which I might have. In fact I might have been carefully observing her, using my magic to carefully examine her, and making sure that she was eating well, or in this case, drinking. She did eat normal food as well in the beginning, to make sure that the baby wouldn¡¯t die of hunger, but recently I had her stop. I had found that the baby had started getting nutrients from blood as well, which had indeed confirmed that it was no longer demi-human. All of us were happy from that, since it being a vampire was the best outcome, naturally. Of course the father didn¡¯t know anything. In fact he didn¡¯t know whether she was pregnant or not, since they hadn¡¯t seen each other, since that night. Thus the time passed, and it had been one full year since our wedding, but this year had been filled with confusion. It had been fifteen months since Natalia got pregnant, yet the child still wasn¡¯t born. In fact her belly hadn¡¯t grown to full size yet. In the end we concluded that, since the child was a vampire, it would take longer to grow. We just didn¡¯t know how long.

    Even though there had been a bit of confusion, things had went well in the outside world. The kingdoms of Kalderon and Tabarut had officially announced that they were entering an alliance, which made a whole lot of people happy. Since these two countries were at peace, it meant that there would be no more wars. Those two kingdoms were the only ones interested in each other, since the other kingdoms didn¡¯t care about such poor region, so the only wars that were fought here, were between them, and there were many of them. But since they had entered an unprecedented alliance, which had never been seen before, it meant that there would be no more wars. This meant that there would be far less casualties in the army. People were puzzled by the reason of this alliance though. The two kingdoms had been at war for millennia, yet now they suddenly enter an alliance. There were two popular theories. One was, that since there had been a new Royal Family crowned, and that the king of Tabarut had also ascended to the throne only a few years ago, they had put their differences behind them, and seen the bigger picture.

    Naturally there were a few nobles that disagreed to this alliance, on both sides. But they were all paid a visit by one of our ¡®representatives¡¯ that would try and ¡®persuade¡¯ them. None of them were ever seen again. After that ordeal, another year passed. It had now been twenty seven months, yet the child was still not born, but it seemed like it was close now. Her belly had swollen quite a lot, and she looked like she was in the final stages of pregnancy. The biological father had naturally found that she was pregnant, since he had seen her a few times, around the castle, but he had no idea that it was his, after all, it had been over two years now. He thought that it was unrelated to him, and belonged to me. That was just as I wanted it as well, since I did think of it as my own.

    In the next year, another major thing had happened in the outside world, which of course, happened because of my orders. The kingdoms of Tabarut and Kalderon combined. Well, even though I say they combined, they were still two kingdoms, but they were part of the same power. Think of it as one large kingdom, or empire, that had two states. These two states were each individually ruled by their own kings, but between the kingdoms, there was a council. The council was formed of all the kings, though there were only two right now, and a few other important people. To the public, the kings were the highest power in the counsel, but in reality, I was the highest power. This counsel was formed to better control the two kingdoms, and the heart of the counsel was placed right here, deep in the forests of Fenlai Prefecture, in Sanguine Regis. It was quite optimal, since both the Royal Palaces were connected here by my portals, so it was easy to hold meetings. Of course the public had no idea where the counsel was, or even who the members were. Even though it was revealed to the public that the two kings were the rulers, there were many that suspected that there was a higher power at play. After all, that these kingdoms all of a sudden combined into one big power was just too suspicious. And naturally, everyone knew of the Coldblood Clan. They had singlehandedly changed the Royal Family, and overthrown the kingdom, so many believed that the true rulers of these kingdoms were most likely the Coldblood Organization. But we didn¡¯t mind this, since it wasn¡¯t that important to keep us secret. As long as we stayed in the shadows, our fame would eventually fade away.

    Eventually, after another few months, the time had finally come. A servant had rushed into my office to inform me that my wife was in labour. I was shocked and happy to hear it, and immediately had the servant take me to her. It had been a long time coming, so now that she was finally giving birth, I felt relieved. When I arrived in the room, my other wives were already there, as well as the best doctors we had.

    ¡°Isaac, you¡¯re here! The time¡¯s finally come, our child will be born. Even though it¡¯s not biologically related to you, I hope you will treat it well.¡± Natalia said.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry Natalia, it may not have been born from my seed, but my blood still very much flows through its veins.¡± I said. Natalia smiled at me and nodded.

    ¡°That¡¯s true, after all, when you made me what I am, we became related by blood.¡± She said. After that, there was just mindless chatter, until it was finally time for the child to come out. It took a few hours altogether, but with the help of the doctors, the child was safely born. It was a boy. My first child that wasn¡¯t really my child, had been a boy. I was sure he would grow up into a good man! At least a good man in vampire standards. As for whether he was normal vampire or Pureblood, or something else entirely, you could say it was the third option. He was a vampire, but he was neither normal nor Pureblood, he was something in between. He seemed to be stronger than a normal vampire, yet weaker than a Pureblood. This was the state that a normal vampire would become when it lived for a very long time, or perhaps drank my blood. I hadn¡¯t chosen a name for that kind of vampire yet, but for now, I would call it a High Vampire, but it was subject to change.

    As the step-father of the child, I was allowed to hold it first after it was born. I had never held a newborn before, so this was a new experience.

    ¡°Hey there, little one. I am your father.¡± I said, while playing with him. The child didn¡¯t cry, but laughed. It was also able to open it eyes and see right away, since it was much stronger than a human baby. After I had held it for a while, I gave him to his mother, who had to feed him. The child didn¡¯t have any teeth yet, so he couldn¡¯t exactly feed on his own, so instead, the mother would breastfeed him. Naturally, there wasn¡¯t any milk going out of her breasts, but instead blood. Luckily, the child didn¡¯t need much. A child that was born a vampire, didn¡¯t have to drink as much at birth, as someone who was made a vampire. But Natalia still got a bit thirsty, so she was given the wrist of a slave to suck on.

    Like that, time passed on happily in Sanguine Regis, while in the outside world, the two kingdoms were doing well. Many ¡®loose ends¡¯ had been dealt with, and now there wasn¡¯t anyone against the alliance anymore. We were preparing for a building¡¯s construction to finish. I opened a new academy in the town of Bloodmoon. This one didn¡¯t have anything to do with the Crimson Order, but instead it was for a new corps I made. They were called Novo Corps. They were to be trained in Energy Manipulation Magic, and as I was the only ¡®expert¡¯ on the subject, I was the head teacher. Kato and the others, whom I had trained relentlessly for an entire year, were also teachers. The teachers were also given a copy on the other parts, and I would help them learn that as well, but for now, we only thought the part that was manipulation the natural energies, to condense them and keep them in one place. Later on, when my teachers were well versed in all the other parts, we would start teaching the other parts as well. If you could graduate from this academy, then you would be put in the Novo Corps.

    The reason I had made this corps was a majestic one. Everyone that graduated into the Novo Corps, would become a vampire, and receive eternal life, and even better talent. After that they would polish their skills in peace, while the Novo Corps grew bigger and bigger, until there was a large number of mages in it. Eventually it would become a huge corps, full of A ranked mages, specialising in Energy Manipulation, one of the most powerful magics in the world. Of course, it would take a very long time for them to get to that stage, but that is where the vampires came in. After a certain time in the academy, when they had made enough progress, they would be made into vampires, making them learn even quicker, and since everyone in the Novo Corps was a vampire, that meant that they would all live for ever, meaning that there would be no decline in their number.

    Naturally after a long enough time, there would a lot of them. Then, when the numbers were large enough, they would spread all over the kingdom of Kalderon and Tabarut, covering the entire region of low natural energy. Then they would make a colossal magic circle, with the goal of increasing the natural energies of this place. If successful, then the natural energy levels would sky rocket, even far above that of the neighbouring kingdoms, giving us a large edge over them.

    With this, S rankers would become possible in our kingdoms, while it would still be impossible for the others. Then after a few centuries, when the strength of Kingdoms of Kalderon and Tabarut had grown enough, we would conquer all the other kingdoms in this continent, forming an empire. Of course, the other kingdoms would probably find out that the natural energies increased here, and wage war against us, but by that time, the strength of the Coldblood Clan should have grown by a lot. We should be able to hold them off for a few centuries. I would also look into a way to conceal the growth of natural energy. If that was possible, then the other kingdoms might not find out about it, and even if some did find out, my clan should have infiltrated all the other kingdoms by then, so assassinating a few people would be easy.

    So there were two possibilities for this war. Either it would be a very long one, lasting for a few centuries, or it would be a raging hurricane, but only last for a short while.

    Thus ten years passed by. By this time, people were finally graduating into the Novo Corps. There were still very few members, but there would be a steady income of members. Kato was also getting closer to mastering the basics of Energy Manipulation. In another ten to twenty years, he would have mastered it. The reason it took so much longer for him, even though his magical talent is almost on par with me, is because he didn¡¯t have as much time as I did, when I learned it. Back then, I spent almost every hour of every day learning it, while Kato still had to teach, but he still used all his free time. The Crimson Order had also grown. It didn¡¯t have that many A rankers, the only new ones were the ones sent by Tabarut, but the Crimson Guard had grown in size.

    Natalia¡¯s little boy had grown to be a ten year old child. His name was Alexander, named after my late sister. I was slightly worried that he¡¯d end up as Little Isaac and stop growing soon, but since he was born a vampire, he would most likely age until he became a young man. The kid was a very cheery and happy one, yet he had no qualms against killing and drinking from people, but he preferred to drink from kids his own age, so we had gotten a few kids up here. They weren¡¯t actually slaves, but friends that he had made down in the town. He used to go down there a lot, even to the point of sneaking out. It wasn¡¯t that he didn¡¯t like it in the castle, he was just adventurous. Down in the town he had made a few friends, of both genders. Eventually he had asked me if they could come to the castle. He said that he would rather have someone his age, and someone he knows, to drink from. In the end I gave in, and paid a visit to the families of their friends. I told them that the little boy that their kids played with was my son, which they were extremely shocked and surprised over, even scared, but I told them to relax. I offered them jobs in the castle, so that the kids could live with my son, and give him blood. They had known that the child was a vampire before, since a few normal vampires had already had children, and they knew that the children had given him blood before, so they weren¡¯t against it, and gladly accepted the offer to live in the castle.

    As I so often was, I was sitting in my office, a book in hand. This book was the Book of Energy Manipulation. Someone knocked on the door. ¡°Come in I said.¡± The door opened, and in came a boy. The boy looked like he was ten or eleven years old, but the truth was so different. ¡°Good evening Little Isaac.¡± I said, as I gestured for him to sit. Little Isaac sat opposite me.

    ¡°Uncle, will you please stop calling me little Isaac?¡± He said with his immature voice, sounding no different from a child.

    ¡°It sounds weird to just call you Isaac, after all my name is Isaac as well. Anyway, what do you need, nephew?¡± I asked him. He looked a bit nervous.

    ¡°As you know, even though I look like I do, I¡¯m still fifty six years old. And in all this time, ever since I came here, I never left. I didn¡¯t come with to the war, all those years ago, since I thought it would be a bit awkward, being a child in the battlefield and all. But now I want to leave, just for a while. I want to go wander around for a while.¡± He said.

    ¡°You want to leave? Where are you going to go?¡± I asked.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know, just somewhere. I won¡¯t leave the kingdom though, or at most, I will go to Tabarut. As long as I¡¯m in the kingdoms, I will be easily able to get back home.¡± He said.

    Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.

    ¡°Well, alright. You¡¯re a grown man, and you¡¯re also very strong. You¡¯re at the late B rank, which is equivalent to a middle A ranker, and you¡¯re also a High Warlock. You should be able to protect yourself. Just don¡¯t get into too many dangerous situations, okay?¡± I said. I wouldn¡¯t deny him, but I was slightly worried. Even though he was a grown man, his mind was still quite childlike. He was highly intelligent like a grown man, but his childlike body didn¡¯t allow him to completely grow up. He would often play with Alexander and his friends, but sometimes he was a very serious person. Basically, he could function as a full grown person, but he could also let his child side loose. You could say that he was a very mature child.

    ¡°Thank you uncle. I will go say goodbye to the others then I¡¯ll leave immediately. I don¡¯t know how long I¡¯ll be gone. It could be a few months, or even a few decades or centuries. Depends on how much fun I have. Goodbye!¡± He said, then ran out like a child. That¡¯s what I meant by his childlike. He behaved very much like a child, which was quite cute, even though he was basically an old man, but not really. Even thinking of him as a grown up, was hard.

    The next day, he left. I gave him Iluvatar to ride on, even though he was much faster than the Night Wolf, but the wolf could help keep annoying bandits away, and was also more comfortable to travel on. Thus he left on his own adventure.

    A few days later, I was walking through the hallways of Novo Academy, on my way to teach a class. The class I was teaching was filled with the most talented individuals in the school. They were under a lot of pressure, since everyone expected them to ace their graduation, especially since it was the esteemed me that taught them. I opened the door to the classroom, and sat at my desk. Everyone was sitting on their seats quietly. I grabbed a sheet of paper from a drawer under the table, then stood back up, to take the attendance. Everyone was there.

    People in this special class didn¡¯t ever dare skip school except if they really were sick, since whenever someone was missing, I would suddenly disappear from the classroom quicker than the students eyes could perceive. Moments later I would appear in the room of the missing student, to see what reason he had for skipping. If he wasn¡¯t sick, then I would drag him back to the classroom, and give him some sort of punishment. This had happened a few times before, but now no one ever skipped, except if they were sick, or somehow managed to oversleep.

    ¡°Alright class. You¡¯re all close to be ready to graduate, so today we are going to make portals. I remember when I made my first set of portals, linking the Sanguine Regis and the Royal Palace. It took about a year to do, but you will only be making small scale portals that only travel a few meters, so it won¡¯t take very long. A few hours at most. This is what you will be doing for the rest of the year, until the exams. Now, let¡¯s go out into the courtyards.¡± I said.

    ¡°Yes Lord Teacher!¡± They all replied. Whenever they spoke to me, they would call me Lord Teacher for some reason. I don¡¯t even know why, since I never made them call me that, but it was probably because I was the lord of this place. Thus, the class went outside. The students all knew how to make the circles, and how to gather mana and natural energy, so I told them to begin, and that I would be back in an hour. If they had any trouble they could ask me then. After that I went to another class. There were several special classes, like the other one. They were divided by years. The special class people were all at around the same level of talent, and would become vampires pretty soon. The previous class were all vampires, and this one as well. That other class was year three, while this one was year two. Only the special class would be able to graduate this quickly, and had only been formed four years ago. Normal classes used a lot more time. They were ten years, so far. After all, we were only in the tenth year of the academy so far. But most people managed to graduate after ten years, while special classes used up to three years. Most special class students were turned on their first year, which further improved their learning, so they were around the same level as when I taught the teachers.

    I estimated that in another ten years, we might have over a thousand members in the Nova Corps. In another hundred years, it should be a lot bigger, and by that time, most of the teachers should have mastered the basic level of Magical Energy Manipulation. Then we would divide the Nova Academy into several courses. You would be able to learn portal magic and battle magic, and several others, like making barriers and enchanting. Magical Energy Manipulation was the best enchanting magic in the world, and one of the best battle magics and defence magics, or so the book said. Even though there were courses, everyone had to be able to manipulate mana and natural energy, since that was what this magic was based on, and was requirement for all the other divisions of magic in it. So everyone would still be able to help in my grand scheme of increasing the natural energy levels of Kalderon and Tabarut.

    Of course, even though I spent a lot of time teaching, I wasn¡¯t neglecting my own training. I wasn¡¯t doing any physical training, since it wasn¡¯t necessary, but I was getting closer to the next level in Energy Manipulation Magic. I reckoned that I would need another ten to twenty years though, but I could feel I was getting very close to becoming a Middle Arcanist, and apparently, Kato was getting close too. The other Purebloods were very close to the peak A rank level as well.

    1st person, Little Isaac.

    I was riding on Iluvatar. This wasn¡¯t my first time riding him, but I was still exceedingly excited. That¡¯s because I was about to leave! Leave the castle, leave the town, leave the forest! I had never gone this far away from before. A few moments ago, I had surpassed the furthest I ever went, and now I¡¯m finally allowed to go wherever I want. Which is weird, considering that I¡¯m fifty six years old, but I have to body of a child, so you can¡¯t see it. Sitting on Iluvatar, I¡¯m slowly waltzing out of the forest. Well, I say slowly, but Iluvatar is running at the speed of sound, but it¡¯s just that I can run much faster than that. As a vampire, my speed is one of my best qualities. While I was sitting on Iluvatar, I decided to take nap, since we were going at such a relaxing speed, so I covered myself with a blanket, and went to sleep.

    When I woke up, we were out of the forest. I wonder how long I slept for. Anyways, now I decided that I should go to a city, but there was only one problem. I had no idea where any cities were. But then I remembered! Uncle used to live in a city somewhere, and he still had Iluvatar and Bane back then, so I crawled to the head of the big doggy.

    ¡°Hey Ilu, do you remember where any cities are?¡± I asked him. The bid doggy let his tongue fall out, as he nodded in fervour.

    ¡°Good! Then take me there already!¡± I said enthusiastically. The Night Wolf started running again. On our way, we arrived at some village. I told Ilu to stop, since I wanted to check the place out. The villagers were all horrified, when a huge Night Wolf appeared in their village. Apparently Iluvatar was much bigger than normal Night Wolves. It had something to do with him being fed vampire blood, and being older than most Night Wolves. He was like an Elder Night Wolf, which apparently was a thing. Villagers were running around screaming, which wasn¡¯t quite my intention. Who would have known that Ilu would scare people? I was never scared of him, but now that I think about it, I heard that Night Wolves are supposed to be very dangerous monsters or something. Maybe that¡¯s why. Anyways, I stood up on the wolf and shouted,

    ¡°Hey, don¡¯t worry, this is just my pet doggy, Ilu!¡± and jumped down. Some of the villagers stopped and looked at me in amazement when they heard me. Ilu also sat down obediently behind me.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, he doesn¡¯t bite. Except if I tell him to.¡± I said. An old looking villager walked up to me. He looked to be in his late fifties or maybe early sixties, well around my age. I actually got a bit jealous when I saw him, since he had a grown body, while I was stuck as a little kid. Well, I didn¡¯t want his body though, I would prefer a younger body.

    ¡°Young Lord, may you tell me who you are?¡± The old man said. They were all looking at me nervously. Who had ever seen a little boy riding on a Night Wolf? It was just a little bit suspicious.

    ¡°My name is Isaac, and I¡¯m on an adventure!¡± I said, a big grin on my face. Quite a few villagers smiled, and some laughed. Apparently I looked and sounded just a bit too innocent.

    ¡°Is that so? Where do you hail young Lord?¡± The same old villager asked.

    ¡°I come from Sanguine Regis, but I was born in a small farm somewhere. My Uncle apparently disappeared once, and then when he came back he was super powerful and rich.¡± I said, an equally as big grin on my face. Uncle Isaac always was my biggest Idol, even now that I am so old!

    ¡°Sanguine Regis? I¡¯ve never heard of that. Is it a village somewhere?¡± he asked.

    ¡°No, it¡¯s my Uncle¡¯s castle. It¡¯s in a forest somewhere.¡± I said. The villagers seemed very impressed by my background. Born in a small farm, now live in a castle. And uncle that disappeared, then came back as a very powerful and rich man. Wasn¡¯t this every villagers dream?

    ¡°A castle huh? I was once allowed in the Palace in Fenlai, but that was only for a moment. Anyways, you don¡¯t seem to have any food on you. You must be hungry. Would you like to stay with my family for the night?¡± The village elder said. He didn¡¯t dare to be even slightly disrespectful to him, since not only did he have a huge Night Wolf, which he could only assume was an Elder Night Wolf, but didn¡¯t doubt that there was an elite squad of guardians guarding him somewhere. After all, who would allow a small child to go on an adventure all on his own. What the elder didn¡¯t know was that this small child was exceedingly powerful, as well as a fifty six year old man.

    ¡°Sure, I wouldn¡¯t mind a meal. I haven¡¯t had villager food for years, so it would be nostalgic.¡± I said, then followed the elder to his house. Iluvatar had to wait outside, after all, he couldn¡¯t even fit inside the house. Moments after I arrived inside the house, the elder¡¯s wife started making dinner, while the elder rushed upstairs for some reason. Only moments later, he came back down, with some girl in tow. The girl bowed.

    ¡°Hello, my name is Katy.¡± She introduced herself politely. I smiled at her and introduced myself as well.

    ¡°Hi, I¡¯m Isaac.¡± I said. The girl was cute, and she seemed to be around twelve years old. Maybe I would have a small drink from her. Of course, I wouldn¡¯t kill her, since these people were so nice. I preferred to drink from people that looked physically similar to me, which would be between ten and fourteen year olds. I just didn¡¯t feel attracted to grownups, and truth be told, I don¡¯t feel like I¡¯m a real adult. Sure my intelligence is the same as a grown vampire, and I can be serious, but my personality is still quite like a child. I think it¡¯s some sort of after effect from being made into a vampire at such an early age, like it inhibits mental development in some way.

    ¡°Oh right, we haven¡¯t introduced ourselves yet!¡± The elder said.

    ¡°My name is Coyle, and my wife is named Lucy.¡± Coyle said.

    ¡°Nice to meet you Coyle and Lucy, and thank you for your hospitality. Actually, the reason for my trip away from home, is because I would like to see the outside world. I barely even remember anything from my days in the farm, so I was wondering if you would mind if I stay here for a while, to experience village life.¡± I asked them, hopeful.

    ¡°I¡¯ll even do any work you might need.¡± I added in. Coyle actually looked at me excitedly.

    ¡°Of course you can stay! But we don¡¯t have any extra rooms, so would you mind staying in the same room as Katy? We¡¯ll get a mattress in there.¡± He said. Katy was surprised that she had to share her room, but she didn¡¯t seem to mind.

    ¡°That¡¯s great! I don¡¯t mind sharing a room, I used to do that all the time with my sister, and I still do from time to time, when she isn¡¯t with her boyfriend. Her boyfriend is a cool guy though. He¡¯s the personal disciple of my uncle, and even teaches at one of his academies. But since I plan to stay here for a while, I should tell you something about me. Just please promise me that no matter how scary, or how dangerous, or even stupid it sounds, you have to keep calm and believe me.¡± I said. They looked a bit nervous now, but they still agreed.

    ¡°Okay, thank you. And don¡¯t worry, it isn¡¯t dangerous. You see, I¡¯m actually a vampire, a Pureblood Vampire.¡± I said.

    ¡°What, a vampire? Oh you kids¡­¡± Coyle said.

    ¡°No seriously, it¡¯s true. That uncle of mine, he¡¯s the progenitor of all vampires, and he became one almost sixty years ago. That¡¯s why you still think that vampires are extinct. And if you still don¡¯t believe me, then maybe you¡¯ll believe me now.¡± I said, then showed them both my claws and suddenly disappeared. A moment later I came back into the house, a deer in my hands.

    ¡°Just now, I ran to the nearby forest, went a few kilometres in, then killed this tri-horned deer, which is an E ranked monster. My true strength is equal to a middle stage A ranker.¡± I said. The family now looked at me in horror, almost about to scream.

    ¡°No, please don¡¯t worry! I won¡¯t hurt anyone here, so please don¡¯t worry. I¡¯ll just drink some of Katy¡¯s blood from time to time, and I won¡¯t actually hurt her. The bite of a vampire feels very good, so she won¡¯t mind after she tried it once.¡± I said, scared that they would shun me. They managed to calm down from my convincing, and maybe a tiny little bit help from hypnosis. I didn¡¯t actually hypnotize them, just helped them calm down.

    ¡°Alright, we¡¯ll trust you as long as you don¡¯t hurt anyone, and you¡¯re only allowed to drink from Katy, and only when she¡¯s willing, okay?¡± Coyle said. I nodded enthusiastically.

    ¡°Yes, I promise. Oh and more thing. I¡¯m actually a lot older than I look like, being fifty six year old, believe it or not. But please don¡¯t think I¡¯m a creepy pedophile or something, because mentally I¡¯m still kind of a child. Uncle turned me into a vampire when I was six years old, and when I turned twelve, I stopped aging. My brain didn¡¯t develop in the normal way either. I kept getting more intelligent, and more than capable of being serious and can have responsibilities, but I¡¯m still a child, and I like to play and stuff. So just think of me like a more mature child. Oh, and never call me Little Isaac. I hate that nickname.¡± I said.

    ¡°You¡¯re really that old? You¡¯ve almost lived as long as me then.¡± He said. After our conversation, we ate dinner. They were still a bit wary around me, but I was sure that they would calm down sooner or later. After dinner, Katy showed me around the village, and we played with the other children. The village was quite big, so there were a lot of people here. Thus, my vacation in a village had begun!

    End of chapter 24.

 Chapter 25: Leaving the Village

    Chapter 25: Leaving the Village

    As he ever so often was, Isaac sat in his office, letting the brush flow on the canvas. Suddenly a knock resounded through the room, coming from the door. ¡°Come in.¡± Isaac said, emotionlessly. He was focusing on his painting, so he didn¡¯t care much about who had come. The man who came in was a shadowy figure. He was one of the Master Assassins.

    ¡°Lord Isaac, one of the assassins that were sent to follow your nephew, has come back with a report.

    Apparently, Little Isaac has decided to stay with a small family of four in a village, and has told them of his true nature.¡± The assassin reported. Isaac was slightly perplexed. Why would he stay with a small family in a village, and even tell them his true nature? Well, it shouldn¡¯t matter too much. Even though Little Isaac is very much still a child, he is still capable of being serious and upholding his responsibilities. It should be fine.

    ¡°Why would he do that? Probably can¡¯t be bothered to hide it. Anyways, for now just keep an eye on him and the family, but if they let anything slip, then you slaughter the village. Well, that¡¯s probably what Little Isaac would do as well, if they tell anyone. He might still be a bit of a child, even after all this time, but he isn¡¯t stupid. But just in case that he doesn¡¯t do it, then you¡¯re the fall back. Just make sure that the news of vampires never leaves that village.¡± Isaac said. The assassin saluted and replied with a ¡°Yes Lord Isaac.¡±

    After the assassin left, Isaac returned to his painting. This painting was of the ten year old Alexander. By now, Isaac was extremely skilled at painting. The painting seemed so realistic, as if the boy himself was standing there, on the canvas. Isaac was very passionate about art, in fact, most vampires were. There was a countless number of paintings and sculptures in Sanguine Regis, all made by vampires. In the warehouses, there were even more. Many of these paintings were shipped off and sold at auctions, or just in stores and shops.

    1st person, Little Isaac.

    After Katy had finished showing me around the village, we returned to their home. In the memories of my childhood, there were slight memories of similar scenes, but they were all hazy. After all, I was made into a vampire at the age of six. In the home of the Dunler family; that was their name by the way, we returned to the table. Lucy had made a pot of tea, so we were about to have us a little snack. While we were drinking tea, my face got serious for a bit.

    ¡°By the way, you now you can¡¯t ever tell anyone that I¡¯m a vampire right? If you do, then if I don¡¯t kill everyone in the village, then Uncle will surely have sent someone. In fact, I¡¯m sure that he will know that I told you very soon, and he probably sent a few assassins to tail me. Don¡¯t worry though, they are only there to keep an eye on me. They might drink the blood of some of the villagers though, if they are vampires." I said. The Dunler family got very worried for a moment, but they calmed down pretty quick, since they just had to not tell anyone about me. Not that they could, since I had hypnotized them. If they tried to tell on me, they wouldn¡¯t even be able to speak. The only reason I even told them about me is because I can¡¯t be bothered to hide the fact that I¡¯m a vampire. It¡¯s much easier if they just know, and then I have a good source of food as well.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I promise that we won¡¯t tell anyone.¡± Coyle said, very seriously.

    ¡°That¡¯s good. So far I kinda like you guys! You were nice to me and offered me a place to stay. By the way, I have no idea how long I¡¯ll be here, but it might be a few days, or even a few years. Is that okay with you guys? Of course, if you ever need anything, like money, then you can ask me. I have a bit of money on me.¡± I said. I was quite excited to try out the village life. Almost my entire life, I had lived in that castle, in seclusion. Sometimes I would go to the village, or later town, but I didn¡¯t quite fit in there. I find it a bit weird that Alex doesn¡¯t mind at all. Maybe it¡¯s because he was born as a vampire, so it¡¯s different. But here, there is no huge castle, and they don¡¯t know what I am. Except for the Dunlers.

    After we finished the tea, it was quite late, at least in their standards, so we went to bed. Or at least Katy and I did. They really did treat me like a child, that they were babysitting or something. Of course that was under my own request. When I grew up in the castle, no one ever ordered me around, so I thought it¡¯d be fun, to try and live as a normal child for a while. Thus we were put to bed. They insisted that I should have the bed, but as the gentleman I am, I would have no such thing! I couldn¡¯t let Katy sleep on the floor. Therefore, Katy slept on the bed, while I slept on a mattress on the floor. Katy was a bit shy to be sharing her room with a boy, but she fell asleep quickly, as did I.

    The next morning, when I woke up, I felt rather thirsty. I hadn¡¯t had anything to drink for a few days, so it was about time. I crept out from under my blankets, and crawled over to Katy¡¯s bed. I lightly shook her, to wake her up. She looked at me with weary eyes.

    ¡°What is it?¡± she asked tiredly. It took her a while to realize that it was me, but when she noticed, she was slightly started for a while, but then she remembered.

    ¡°I¡¯m thirsty.¡± I said. Katy sat up on her bed.

    ¡°Then let¡¯s go down stairs and get you something.¡± She said with a smile, as if she was my big sister. Well, in this scenario, she would be the big sister, since she was thirteen years old, while my body was twelve. But she seemed to have misunderstood me.

    ¡°Not that kind of thirsty. You know, the other kind.¡± I said, as I showed her my fangs. She was startled, again, but then she remembered.

    ¡°Oh right. Is it really not gonna hurt?¡± She asked, slightly worried. I got up on the bed, and sat next to her.

    ¡°I promise, it won¡¯t hurt.¡± I said. She hesitated a bit, but then pulled down the collar on her pyjamas. I grabbed her shoulders and hugged her. Then I licked the spot on her neck, where I was going to bite. Slowly, I let my teeth touch her skin, until they penetrated her, and went inside her neck. She let a small moan out, as her blood started flowing into my mouth. She let herself fall on the bed. Then the sound of an opening door resounded. The one who opened was Lucy, the mother. When she saw us, she almost screamed, but then she remembered, and calmed down. I was about finished as well, so I stood back up.

    ¡°Good morning.¡± I said with a smile. Katy got up as well, and touched her wound, which weirdly didn¡¯t hurt at all.

    ¡°That actually felt pretty good.¡± She said. Lucy rushed over to her, to check on her.

    ¡°Are you okay?¡± She asked.

    ¡°I¡¯m fine, it didn¡¯t hurt at all, and it felt very good.¡± She said.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, it isn¡¯t dangerous. She might feel a bit light-headed though, since she lost a bit of blood. Oh, and you should probably cover the wound when you go out. It¡¯ll heal pretty soon though.¡± I said, with a smile on my face. Katy nodded in response, while still holding her wound with her hand. There was a moment of silence, but then Lucy spoke up.

    ¡°Anyways, breakfast is ready, so come on downstairs.¡± She said, breaking the silence. We got off the bed, then went downstairs, where there was already food on the table. While eating dinner, I noticed that they were still tense. Well, I can understand that. Some random kids just waltzed into their home, then says he¡¯ll stay there for a while, after telling them he¡¯s a vampire. Who wouldn¡¯t be tensed? But I was intent on doing this. While I might get to experience the exhausting life of a villager, I¡¯ll still get to do some villager work. There¡¯s no way that villager work will be able to exhaust me though.

    ¡°Tonight we¡¯re having that Tri-Horned Deer you caught, for dinner. If any of the other villagers found out, they would be so jealous. The Tri-Horned Deer is very tasty.¡± Coyle said. They were all excited to eat the Tri-Horned Deer, but it wasn¡¯t much to me. In the forest where Sanguine Regis resides, there are many monsters, and the strongest are at the B rank. Believe me, they are very tasty. After breakfast was over, I had them give me some work. They were very hesitant, but under my pressure, they had to give in. First, I cleaned the house with Katy and Lucy, which didn¡¯t take long, then Coyle took me to his workplace. He¡¯s the village chief, so he was in charge of the village. First, he had been hesitant on taking me with him, but then he remembered that I¡¯m actually fifty six years old, so I might be able to help him. And of course, I was more than capable of helping him. Living in Sanguine Regis for fifty years, I hadn¡¯t just been wandering about, doing nothing. I had my fair share of responsibilities from time to time, so I was even better than Coyle at managing things, so when the day was over, many problems had already been solved. Coyle of course, was breathless. Like that, I spent three months living with the Dunler family, but now I was starting to notice some weird behaviour in Katy. She wasn¡¯t speaking as much as she used to, and kept away from me more. It wasn¡¯t that she was on her period or something, I would be able to smell that, but it was something else. Whenever I spoke to her, she would blush, and sometimes even stammer. Yes, it was that. She had fallen for me. This all began after I stayed with them for three months, and continued from then onwards. At that time, I wasn¡¯t too interested in her, but over the nine months, she started getting cuter and cuter, and whenever we talked, I would be very happy. Her blood also seemed to taste better. Yes, it was on her fourteenth birthday that I realized, I had also fallen for her.

    One night as we were about to go sleep, I decided confess. I wasn¡¯t some ignorant coward that wouldn¡¯t realize he had fallen for someone, and wouldn¡¯t even dare confess, so I decided to do it right away. I was pretty sure that she liked me as well anyways. I crept out from my bed, and into hers. Sometimes we would sleep together, especially after I fed from her, so it wasn¡¯t too weird, she just expected that I wanted to drink, but this time, it was different. I looked her in the eyes.

    ¡°You like me right?¡± I asked her nonchalantly. Her face went red as a tomato.

    ¡°Wha-wha-what are you t-talking about?¡± She asked shocked and clearly nervous. I smiled at her then kissed her on the mouth.

    ¡°A few days ago, on your birthday, I realized that I loved you. This is the first time I¡¯ve loved anyone in my long life.¡± I said. Now her face became even redder, then she buried her face under her blanket, making some muffled sounds.

    ¡°Well?¡± I asked her. Her eyes crept from out under the blanket.

    ¡°I¡¯ve loved you for months now, dummy.¡± She said. I kissed her again, then said ¡°I know.¡± She was even more embarrassed when she heard that.

    ¡°What, really? You knew all along?¡± She nearly screamed in my face.

    ¡°Yup, but I didn¡¯t have any feeling for you back then. It¡¯s only recent that I fell in love with you. But since I love you, you know what that means right?¡± I said to her. She looked in my eyes for a while, keeping the silence, then she nodded.

    ¡°You¡¯re going to make me into a vampire right?¡± She said. I caressed her cheeks then nodded. I kissed her neck, then bit into her, draining all of her blood, until there was almost nothing left. Then I released my blood poison into her, causing her body to change. She fell unconscious on the bed. Since she was just a normal vampire, she would only need one body of blood, so I quickly exited the house, then found someone and brought them back. The person I brought seemed to be a teenage boy, around sixteen years old, maybe seventeen. I just brought the first lone person I saw. As they both were unconscious, I waited. An hour later, Katy finally opened her eyes. She was surprised to see the unconscious boy on the floor.

    ¡°You need to drink his blood and kill him.¡± I said. Katy looked at me shocked.

    ¡°I need to kill him?¡± She asked. I nodded in return. I walked over to her, then grabbed her hand.

    Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.

    ¡°It¡¯s fine, he¡¯s just a human. You¡¯re a vampire now, so it¡¯s fine. Every single vampire has to go through this, it¡¯s a rule; the law of vampires. I killed two women when I was made into a vampire, at the age of six. I haven¡¯t killed many since then, since I spent all my time in the castle though. I promise, when you¡¯ve drunk his blood and killed him, you won¡¯t regret it. Blood will be the tastiest thing you¡¯ve ever tasted.¡± I said. She was still hesitant, but she did go over to the body nonetheless.

    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll do it for you, so that we can stay together forever.¡± She said, then let her teeth sink into the flesh of the boy. Moments later, the boy was completely white in complexion; completely dead. I smiled, as I walked over to her, then kissed her, and licked any leftover blood from her mouth. Then we stood up again, and I burned the body completely, even the ashes were burnt, not leaving a single trace of the dead boy.

    Then we got back into bed, and started kissing. After a while of kissing, we started stripping down, then had sex, consummating our relationship. A few hours later, we were cuddling naked. Even though I was in the body of a twelve year old, I didn¡¯t lack anything down there. That was the only adult part of me, and luckily so.

    ¡°There¡¯s one thing you should know. You won¡¯t be able to bear the sunlight anymore. You¡¯ll have to stay in the dark, but apparently, in the future you¡¯ll be able to bear the sun again. I don¡¯t know how long though.¡± I said.

    ¡°That¡¯s fine, as long as you stay in the dark with me.¡± She said with a heart-warming smile.

    ¡°That¡¯s a given. All vampires prefer the dark, Pureblood or not. Even Pureblood vampires are uncomfortable in the light, which has been the hardest part of staying here, but now I¡¯ll get to enjoy the darkness again. I don¡¯t want to leave this place yet, so we should tell the other villagers that you got some disease, so you can¡¯t stay out in the sun.¡± I said. After that we talked for a while, then had sex once more, then went to sleep.

    The next morning, Lucy was more than surprised when she came to wake us. She could clearly see us two sleeping together, completely naked. She even saw some white liquid flowing out of Katy¡¯s lower area. She ran over to us, and shook us awake.

    ¡°Kids, please cover yourselves!¡± She shouted at us. She wanted to be angry, but she didn¡¯t dare to, and secretly, she was even happy, since if Katy married me, then it would be very good for their family. As we woke up, we slightly panicked and covered ourselves.

    ¡°Okay, before we continue, let me ask. Katy, were you willing to do this?¡± Lucy asked. Katy blushed, but then nodded.

    ¡°That¡¯s good.¡± Lucy replied, then she walked over to the window, about to open the curtains.

    ¡°Wait, stop!¡± I shouted at her, startling her.

    ¡°Katy won¡¯t be able to stay in the sun anymore. I made her into a vampire, like me, but she isn¡¯t a Pureblood like me, so she¡¯s very weak to the sun right now.¡± I said. Coyle was walking past as I said that, so he heard and immediately came inside the room. When he saw us, I think his heart might have broken, since he saw his daughter naked with a man, or boy in this case.

    ¡°D-did they?¡± he asked, his voice quivering. Lucy looked at him with a pitiful look.

    ¡°Yes, yes they did. And Katy¡¯s also a vampire now, so we have to get used to that. Wait, Isaac, since she¡¯s a vampire she won¡¯t age anymore right?¡± Lucy said, looking at Isaac.

    ¡°No, she won¡¯t, so in a few years, we¡¯ll both leave. We¡¯ll probably stay here for at most two years, before we leave. But well, I could also turn you guys, if you want to.¡± I said. Lucy and Coyle looked at each other for a while, before they smiled at each other.

    ¡°No, I think we¡¯ll stay human for now. Maybe you can have Katy come back in ten years, then she can turn us, if we want it then.¡± Coyle said. Katy looked at her parents, a bit sad.

    ¡°I¡¯ll come back in the future to personally turn you mom and dad.¡± She said. Coyle and Lucy looked caringly at their daughter, whom they now would never see grow up.

    ¡°Anyways, breakfast is ready, so get yourself cleaned and dressed. Especially down there young woman. I hope you don¡¯t get pregnant.¡± Lucy said teasingly, but before she left I said,

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about that, vampires can¡¯t get pregnant, except if they use a spell to conceive a child.¡± The parents seemed relieved as they left. Having a child at that age, was just a bit too early. After that, I got dressed, while Katy was cleaning herself down there. Moments later, we went downstairs to have our breakfast, which was now obsolete for both of us.

    A few days later, we announced to the village that Katy had gotten some rare disease, so she couldn¡¯t stay out in the sun anymore. The entire village came to give their condolences, and they were all quite surprised to see the changes in Katy¡¯s appearance. She was very pale now, as white as snow, contrasting her pitch black hair. Her body proportions had increased slightly, but she still looked like a fourteen year old girl. Even though she had become such a beauty, the mood was dark, at least for the other villagers. We were just acting as if we were mortified.

    After that, we spent our time in peace, enjoying the village life, although we were mostly up at night now, instead of the day. To the villagers, it seemed natural that I would stay up at night as well, since I was like the best friend of Katy, although, in reality we were lovers. But it was time to leave. It was starting to get weird that I hadn¡¯t aged. In their eyes, I should be about fifteen years old, yet I only looked like a twelve year old boy. The sixteen year old Katy still looked like a fourteen year old. She hadn¡¯t aged at all since she became a vampire. The thing about children being turned was still quite the mystery. It seemed like either, only Purebloods aged a little bit if they were turned as a child, or you just didn¡¯t age after you turned twelve or something.

    Anyways, we were now preparing to leave. In the eyes of the villagers, I was taking Katy with me home, where she could live an easier life, but in reality we were just leaving because we couldn¡¯t stay any longer. And we weren¡¯t going back to Sanguine Regis just yet. The Dunler family and I were standing in front of the front door. We had a few bags with us. Katy had some of her clothes and things that were important to her, and I also had some clothes, as well as souvenirs and things that I held dear. Coyle stood there sternly, while Lucy had tears in her eyes.

    ¡°Isaac, please take good care of my daughter, and also yourself. I wish you a good journey, wherever you might go.¡± Coyle said. Lucy couldn¡¯t say anything since she was crying. Katy also let a tear slip, before she hugged her mother and father goodbye.

    ¡°Coyle, Lucy, it was a pleasure staying here with you. Thank you. We will return in the future, sometime. I just hope you¡¯ll both be alive then. Well, you¡¯re only in your early sixties and Lucy, you¡¯re even younger than me. We¡¯ll be back in ten to twenty years, until then, goodbye.¡± I said, then turned around and left. I loaded all our things unto Ilu, then we left. I had Ilu go in the direction of the nearest city, which Coyle had informed me of.

    It took us a few days to get there, but eventually, we arrived in front of the city of Kalan. Kalan was one of the smaller cities in Fenlai, but it was still quite large. We left Ilu in a nearby forest, where I told him to stay until further notice. After saying goodbye to Iluvatar, we continued towards the city on foot. The forest wasn¡¯t that far away, so it only took a few hours. When we arrived at the city gates, the guards sure were surprised. It isn¡¯t often that you see children entering the city alone, especially at night.

    ¡°Hey kids, why are you here alone?¡± One guard said in a kind voice, with a worried look on his face. Using my acting skills, I managed to get a few tears to swell up.

    ¡°W-we were at-t-tacked, b-by b-b-bandits. They killed mom and dad!¡± I said, while crying. Katy also acted as if she was crying. The guards looked at each other with a worried look.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry kids. We¡¯ll report this to the higher ups, then they¡¯ll send a patrol to find those bandits. For now come with me, I¡¯ll take you to an orphanage.¡± The guards said. We followed the guards into the city, until we arrived in front of a building. The building had a sign, which said ¡°Coldblood Orphanage¡±. The guard took us inside the building, then into a room, where we met some middle aged woman. She looked at us kindly.

    ¡°What brings these two cuties here?¡± She asked. The guard sighed before answering.

    ¡°They were attacked by bandits, and their parents died, so now they have no place to stay.¡± He said. The woman smile immediately turned into a frown. She had heard such stories often before, while working in this orphanage, and frankly she didn¡¯t care about them, considering the true nature of the orphanage, but she still had to keep a public front.

    ¡°That¡¯s horrible! You can go now, I¡¯ll get them settled in right away.¡± The woman said. The guard nodded and said his goodbyes, then left. After the guard left, Katy and I stood up as well, to leave.

    ¡°Wait, where do you think you¡¯re going?¡± The woman asked, slightly startled. I turned around, then took a small object out of my pocket. It was the emblem of the Coldbloods, the one only the direct family could have, the ones with the Coldblood surname. The woman was shocked and immediately knelt, causing a lot of confusion on Katy¡¯s part. She still didn¡¯t know I was a Coldblood.

    ¡°Lord, I¡¯m sorry! I didn¡¯t know it was you.¡± The woman said, kowtowing before me, even smashing her head on the floor.

    ¡°May I ask, Great Lord, which Coldblood are you?¡± She continued. I waved for her to get back up, then sat back down.

    ¡°I¡¯m Isaac, nephew of Isaac.¡± I said.

    ¡°Ah, so you are the famed Isaac Jn. I should have known from your appearance. May I ask, what brings you here?¡± The woman asked. Katy was still looking at us with gaping eyes.

    ¡°Nothing much, just travelling. I might stay here for a while, but don¡¯t tell anyone I was here, later.¡± I said, then left with Katy in tow. When we got out, Katy stopped.

    ¡°What the hell! You were from the Coldblood family this entire time? Why didn¡¯t you tell me! I knew your family was powerful, but the Coldbloods? They are like the biggest power in the entire kingdom!¡± Katy shouted at my face.

    ¡°Relax. The reason I didn¡¯t tell you, is because I was waiting for this moment. I wanted it to be shocking! And actually, we Coldbloods are in complete control of both Kalderon and Tabarut. We were the ones that instigated that alliance.¡± I said, a big smirk on my face, as I bragged at the accomplishments of Uncle, as if they were my own, even though I barely even did anything in that regard. After we left the orphanage behind, we went to an inn, and a cheap one at that, since I didn¡¯t have any money. I gave all the money I had on me to Katy¡¯s parents, and I didn¡¯t want to ask the orphanage for money. I thought it would be more fun to earn it on my own. Thus, we were allowed to stay in a room in a small cheap inn, in exchange for working. The innkeeper really was a kind man, and he didn¡¯t mind the idea of cheap employees, so he gladly took us in. He also gave us three meals every day. Thus, we stayed at that inn for a week, but we quickly got tired of it, so we decided to try a different line of work. We paid a quick visit to the Rogue¡¯s Guild, to find out where the nearest assassin stronghold was, then we sneaked out of the city, and rushed towards the nearest assassin¡¯s stronghold, with a new plan. We would become assassins, but we wouldn¡¯t tell them that we are really Coldbloods. That way it would be more fun.

    End of chapter 25.

 Chapter 26: The Awaited Duel

    Chapter 26: The Awaited Duel

    Luckily for us, the nearest assassin¡¯s stronghold was quite near us. It only took a few hours to get there. The stronghold was located inside an old, worn out house. Of course, such a small cabin couldn¡¯t house a faction of assassins. No, the real base was located underground. I walked up to the door, and knocked. The door was opened by an old grumpy man.

    ¡°What are two kids doing here?¡± The man said his coarse voice, looking at us curiously. I looked up to the old man.

    ¡°We heard that there is an assassin base here.¡± I said. The man moved like a shadow and grabbed me by the throat and held a knife to it. He was about to slice it, but before he could, I stopped him.

    ¡°Wait, we¡¯re here to join, not to fight.¡± I said hurriedly. The old man relaxed his grip a bit.

    ¡°Join us? Don¡¯t kid yourself, you¡¯re just kids.¡± The man said, still not letting me go.

    ¡°We¡¯re not just kids, we¡¯re vampires. We were turned when we were kids, so we still look like children.¡± I said. The assassins all knew about vampires, since they were all under the blood bond, so it was safe to tell him. The man instantly let go of me, then backed a few steps back.

    ¡°You¡¯re vampires? I¡¯ve never seen a child vampire before, no scratch that, I¡¯ve only seen a vampire once before, and it was long ago. But you came here to become an assassin? Wouldn¡¯t you go to that Sanguine Regis or whatever, where most of the vampires reside, and there is an assassin branch as well?¡± The old man asked, still a bit sceptic.

    ¡°No, we¡¯ve never been there before. We were turned outside the castle, here in the human world, and our master died a while ago. We¡¯re still young, so we came here to see if we could work. We¡¯ve only met one other vampire; our master, but before she died, she told us about Sanguine Regis, the other vampires, and also that all the assassins are ruled by the vampires.¡± I told him our story, fabricated from my elaborate plan.

    ¡°I see. Well then, come on down, and I¡¯ll bring you to the leader around here. This place is relatively small, and we don¡¯t have any vampires, so this might heighten our status.¡± The old man said, before pulling a lever, which revealed a well-hidden trapdoor. We followed the old man down the hole and arrived in a cave system that looked like a mix between a cave, and a fortress. Some areas were just the normal cave stone, while others were built out of brick and wood. The old man took us through some corridors and pathways, until he stopped in front of a door. He knocked on the door, and waited for a reply. After a voice allowed him to enter, he opened the door, and walked in, with us in tow.

    Inside the room, sat a middle aged man, behind a wooden desk. On the desk, there was pile of paper, and the room was decorated with bookcases, containing files and rarely, books. The man looked up.

    ¡°Master, there are new recruits. They¡¯re vampires, so I brought them here.¡± The old man said. The eyes of the man behind the desk widened.

    ¡°You can leave now. You two, come sit here.¡± The man said. We complied and sat opposite him, on the two chairs that were conveniently placed there.

    ¡°You¡¯re really vampires? Well, the complexion is right. If you¡¯re really vampires, then why did you come here?¡± The man asked.

    ¡°We aren¡¯t part of Sanguine Regis, or the Coldbloods. Well, we are, but we weren¡¯t made wherever that castle is. Our master made us outside, in a village. Recently, our master died, so we decided to come here to work, since we need money and a place to stay.¡± I said. The man sat with his eyes closed for a while.

    ¡°I see. Alright then, from now on you are part of our group. This is also good news for us. Even though we are in charge of all assassination going on in Fenlai Prefecture, we don¡¯t have any vampires here, even though Fenlai is where the Coldbloods originate from. I¡¯ll have two rooms prepared. By the way, how old, and how strong are you?¡± He said.

    ¡°We¡¯re not very old, we were just turned a few years ago. And with our strength combined, we should be able to handle an early B ranker. And one room is enough.¡± I said.

    ¡°I see. I¡¯ll register you as Peak C rankers, and as an early B group.¡± He said. He took out a piece of paper then started writing.

    ¡°What are your names?¡± He asked. ¡°I¡¯m Abel, and this is Katy.¡± I said. I didn¡¯t want to use my real name, so I made a fake one.

    ¡°Abel and Katy it is.¡± The man said, then continued writing. After he was finished, he put the paper into a file, then told someone to get us a room. Soon after, we were in a small room, with a single bed; big enough for two people, a desk and a wardrobe. Since it was getting late, or rather, early, we went to bed. The next day, some random guy woke us up, and told us to go see the boss. After we got dressed, we immediately went to see him.

    ¡°I have your initiation missions ready. There are two people that need to be killed, one for each of you. They¡¯re both in the same city, which is the one nearby here. You probably came from there, so finding the way back shouldn¡¯t be a problem. All the details you need to know are in these files.¡± He said, then handed us two files. Inside, there was a detailed description of the man I needed to kill. He was a nobleman and had apparently wronged somebody, so he was marked for death. He lived in a large mansion in the city, and had some business there, unrelated to the Coldbloods, so killing him was no big deal. After we read the files, we set off for the city, once more.

    1st person, Isaac; Sanguine Regis.

    I had just been told of the latest actions of Little Isaac. Apparently that kid joined the assassins group in charge of Fenlai, with that new girlfriend of his. I wonder how that¡¯ll be. Well, he shouldn¡¯t get in any danger, since he¡¯s much stronger than anyone else there. Even finding someone capable of killing him in this kingdom is hard. His strength should be comparable with someone at the A rank middle stage. Well, if he does get into any danger, then we have those life slips we made. They work just like the ones the Royal Family uses to see if everyone is still alive, just with more features added. Everyone important to the Coldbloods has one bound to them, so if they die, their life slip will break. If they¡¯re heavily injured, then it will crack, and it is able to tell what state they are in. If they are healthy and fine, then it¡¯s green, but if they start fighting, then it turns orange. If the fight is not in their favour, and their life is threatened, then it turns red. If they¡¯re asleep, then it turns blue. Quite handy. We have all the life slips gathered in the Anima Hall. There is constant surveillance there, checking the state of the life slips. If the slips turn red, then we will be notified immediately, via voice transmission. It¡¯s also able to tell the location, so we¡¯ll be able to send someone over there using portals. Only thing is, we can only get teleport to the closest portal point. The person dispatched to help has to rush to the location of the one in danger. If the target is too far away from the closest portal point, and they are important enough, then I, or some other peak expert can go.

    Anyways, for now I didn¡¯t have time to think about Little Isaac, or the life slips, for there was a very important event incoming. It was time for Valen and me to have our duel. We were out in a very open area, surrounded by thousands of people. Everyone important was there, and even a lot of the townspeople came out to see the duel. Valen also brought all the important people of the organization with him, to bear witness. If I won this duel, then I would be their new leader.

    ¡°Isaac, the time has finally come. I brought all the leaders of my Shadowblade Organization with me here, to bear witness to this event. In the coming duel, should you, Isaac Coldblood win, then you shall be the new leader of our organization. But, if I win, then you have to serve me for the next one hundred years! Do you accept these terms?¡± Valen announced in a booming voice. Everyone present could hear him, even though many didn¡¯t even know what this was about. They just knew that it was something important, and that two of the strongest people on the continent were about to fight. I looked at him, and the large crowd surrounding us with a smile.

    ¡°I most certainly do!¡± I said, my voice just as loud and thunderous as his. Then a deathly silence reigned all around, as we stared at each other for what seemed like eternity, then finally drew our blades. The very moment our swords escaped their sheaths, we flew towards each other at frightening speeds. Our swords clashed, causing shockwaves and strong winds to spread all around our battlefield. By the time the wind reached the spectators it had mostly calmed down, but they could still clearly feel the strength of each strike. Just the first strike was enough to break down the defensive wall of a large city, like the Royal Capital. After the first strike, we kept sending barrage after barrage at each other, constantly striking, constantly blocking, constantly parrying. In just a few moments we had struck thousands of times, yet we hadn¡¯t hit each other a single time. Then I decided to mix things up a bit, and channelled some mana into my sword, causing huge flames to clash against Valen¡¯s sword. Valen had no choice but to retreat, so I also leaped backwards.

    ¡°That wasn¡¯t normal magic! Did you get an enchanted sword?¡± Valen asked. I looked at him smugly. Enchanted weaponry was very rare, and finding an enchanted weapon of such calibre was practically impossible, at least on this continent.

    ¡°I found it in the Tomb of Palazar. There¡¯s a lot of cool stuff there, you should go check it out sometime. After all, Palazar was an SSS ranked mage.¡± I said with a laugh.

    ¡°He was SSS ranked? Really?¡± Valen said, before charging at me again with a sword strike, but this time he mixed it up as well. Before the sword struck, he plummeted down to the ground, and pounded his hand on the floor. I could see that he channelled a lot of mana into the ground, and just a fraction of a second later, hundreds of shadowy hands came out of the ground trying to grasp onto me. I tried jumping up, but those arms had an insane reach and were ridiculously fast, so they still managed to grab me, and drag me back to the ground. When I was bound by his arms, he struck at me with his sword. In the nick of time, I managed to block him with my own sword, but the hands didn¡¯t disappear, and he kept striking at me. After a few strikes, he managed to hit me in the shoulder, although he just nicked it. I decided that I had had enough of those shadowy hands, so I pointed a finger at the ground, then sent channel after channel of mana into it. Then, like a shrapnel explosion, millions of small mana spikes exploded out of the ground, destroying those pesky hands. The mana spikes were strong enough to deal with the shadow arms, but it couldn¡¯t hurt Valen in the slightest.

    ¡°That magic of yours really is rather interesting. Too bad I would have to spend most of my remaining life to even hope of learning it.¡± He said with a sigh. I straightened myself and dusted off my clothes, then looked into his eyes.

    ¡°Actually, I have something that can help with that.¡± I said, before charging back at him, but I stopped a few dozen meters in front of him, then pointed my sword towards him. I started channelling mana through the sword again, but this time I led the swords magic outside, using mana manipulation. Flames started flowing out of the sword, but this time, instead of being connected to the sword, the flames disconnected and formed a huge divine flame sword, or at least it looked divine. The flame sword slashed down at Valen. The sword was enormous, and was traveling so  fast Valen couldn¡¯t flee or dodge and had to take it head on. He made various dark sword and spear like objects appear, then had them strike the flaming inferno sword, while he also struck it with his own sword. He was able to negate most of the sword¡¯s flames, but there was still a bit of damage that got through. His clothes were in pieces, and half his upper body was revealed. There were also small burn marks on his body.

    ¡°That was quite the attack. I guess it¡¯s time for me to show my worth.¡± Valen said with a smirk, then pointed his hand at me. Suddenly thousands of dark orbs were formed, in the blink of an eye, and they all flew right at me. In response, I slashed my sword at the dark orbs, throwing a wall of flames at the orbs. The flames were able to destroy most of the orbs, but a few managed to get past, but none were able to hit me. Then I noticed that Valen was gone. I immediately struck upwards as fast as i could with my sword, and felt it clash against a metal object. As soon as the swords clashed, Valen then twisted his body and threw a hard kick at me while in the air, which managed to connect on my right temple. The kick managed to send me flying a hundred meters sliding across the ground. Good thing that all the spectators were a good distance away.

    ¡°Those senses of yours truly are far and beyond normal. You didn¡¯t even look at me before you struck at me with your sword.¡± Valen said with a laugh. I stood back up and dusted off my clothes, which were a bit torn from sliding across the ground.

    ¡°My senses might be better, but you¡¯re still better in the field of experience.¡± I said back at him. Before he could respond, I charged at him, and jumped in the air. While I was in the air, I clasped my hands, and channelled some mana into them. In my hands, a rough rod shape made of mana appeared. The rod shaped into a blue shining mana spear, that was twice as long as my body, and as thick as an arm, except for the spot i was holding onto, which was like a handle. I threw the huge spear at Valen, then continued to charge at him. Valen was able to dodge the spear by a hair¡¯s breath, but when the spear struck, only half a meter next to him, it exploded. The explosion caught Valen of guard and sent him flying towards me. Using every ounce of my strength, I charged next to him, and struck him with my sword. Valen barely managed to spin around, and make my sword hit his own, sending him flying in the other direction, but also making his sword slash into his chest, wounding him.

    Stolen content warning: this tale belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences elsewhere.

    I landed back on the ground, and stood waiting for him. I didn¡¯t bother chasing, since he was flying through the air faster than I could chase. Valen eventually crashed into the ground, almost two kilometres away. It took him a few seconds until he managed to get back on his legs. When he got back up, he stood there for a while, then rushed to meet me.

    ¡°Damn it Isaac, I felt that one. I didn¡¯t expect the spear to explode, and at that magnitude!¡± He said. There was a big wound on his chest, and his clothes were bloodied. It wasn''t fatal, but it did hurt and would decrease his agility a slight bit.

    ¡°That¡¯s the thing with pure mana. Mana is an extremely unstable thing, which is why you normally use the elements to control it, but with my method I¡¯m using pure mana and nothing else, other than the Natural Energies of the earth, although they can¡¯t be used for combat, not yet at least. By using pure mana, I can do anything with it. I can make it burn like a flame, I can make it solid like earth, I can make it flow like liquid, or I can make it explode like a raging volcano.¡± I said, while showing various examples in my hand, like making small swords or making mana flames.

    ¡°That is quite the magic that¡¯s for sure. But I think it¡¯s time to end this.¡± Valen said, then got into a stance. I followed and got into a sword stance as well. Suddenly everything went dark. Valen had made hundreds of blocks, made of pure darkness. The blocks were semi solid, so I couldn¡¯t move well, and I couldn¡¯t see anything, but it only lasted for a fraction of a second, then I could see as well, but it was too late. Valen stood behind me, and I could feel his sword pierce into my back. As I saw the sword go out through my chest, I coughed up a lot of blood.

    ¡°Isaac, give up, this is my win. My sword is right next to your heart. If you move then you¡¯ll die, and if I move it, then you die.¡± He said in serious tone, stressing for me to surrender. All I could respond with was laughter, hysterical laughter.

    ¡°Give up?¡± I said, and before he could respond, I turned my body around, making the sword cut through half of my chest, including slicing my heart and lungs in half. Before he could react, I punched him with all my strength and might, enhanced by pure mana. My punch slightly pierced into his abdomen, and sent him flying in a trail of blood. He landed almost a hundred meters away from me. While he was staggering to stand up, I grabbed my shirt with my hand, and tore it off, completely revealing my upper body, and the horrible wound, which would kill any mortal man. Half my chest was cut open, from back to front. Valen looked at me in complete horror.

    ¡°Valen my friend, I¡¯m afraid it¡¯ll take a lot more than that to kill me. Now, since you showed me your ultimate attack, I shall show you one of mine, just be careful. You might die.¡± I said, as I walked slowly towards the horrified man. No one should be able to survive something like that. Even an SS ranker would eventually die from such a mortal wound. Even a SSS ranker would be heavily wounded.

    The red in my eyes was shining a scarlet red, as I slowly walked towards Valen. Then I stopped. As I looked Valen in the eyes i saw a horrified mortal, I sheathed my sword. I raised my hand in Valen¡¯s direction, then opened my palm. On the top of my palm, an orb of pure, blue mana appeared. I moved my hand back behind the orb, then with the flick of my fingers i shot the orb. The orb flew at unimaginable speeds, but it wasn¡¯t going towards Valen, it was going to his side. The orb stopped over a hundred metres next to Valen, then started expanding. Valen panicked and tried to run away as fast as he could, but the orb was expanding too quickly. His arm was caught by the orb before it stopped expanding, like an unstoppable explosion. Valen screamed in pain, and fell to his knees, grabbing his arm. The armed had been burned severely, being charred black at some places. If Valen had been caught in that attack, he might not die immediately, but he would be injured beyond recognition and would perish later on. While he was holding his arm, screaming, I started walking up to him. I held my sword up to his throat right under his chin and said.

    ¡°So, do you admit your defeat?¡± I asked him, nonchalantly. Valen looked up at me that horrified expression still present in his eyes.

    ¡°What are you?¡± He asked, his voice almost quivering.

    ¡°First you admit your defeat, then I¡¯ll tell you.¡± I responded to him. Valen looked down in defeat, then got back on his feet. He looked at me once again, then showed a defeated expression.

    ¡°Fine, I admit it¡¯s your win. If I¡¯d been fully caught in that attack, I¡¯d been done for. Good thing you aimed away from me.¡± Valen said, still a bit moody.

    ¡°Good. If you hadn¡¯t given up, I might have had to use my special progenitor attacks. You see, I¡¯m actually the progenitor of all vampires, and many of the people here are vampires.¡± I said. Valen just stared at me in a blank expression.

    ¡°You¡¯re what?¡± He said in disbelief. He thought he might have misheard. Vampires? Since when did they exist?

    ¡°I¡¯m the vampire progenitor. You know, like the king of all vampires, the first one, the one who created all the others? Remember before, when I said I had something that could help you learn that Energy Manipulation Magic? I was referring to vampires. If I make you a vampire, you will become immortal, and also get increased talent, and you¡¯ll be able to surpass the bounds of S rank. If you want to, I¡¯ll make you into a vampire, but not yet. If I turn you now, you¡¯ll become too strong, although you won¡¯t actually be able to hurt me in any way¡± I explained to him. Valen listened to me with wide eyes. This was all news to him. He knew vampires existed at one point, since there were a few history books mentioning them, like most people, but he never thought that they would still be around.

    ¡°Actually, that explains why you haven¡¯t aged even a little bit since I first met you. And as for this offer, I think I¡¯ll take you up on it, just don¡¯t make me wait too long. I only have a bit over two hundred years of lifespan left.¡± He said, slightly worried. He knew what being a vampire would most likely bring with it, like a weakness to the sun, and having to drink blood, but for a man like him, immortality was just too eye catching, as well as the ability to reach further ranks.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. If it takes too long, you can drink some vampire blood regularly. That will prolong your life by quite a bit.¡± I said. After we finished our talk, we had a healer tend to Valens arm. The damage would leave a permanent scar all across his lowed arm, but there wasn¡¯t any permanent damage, other than that. Thus I became the new leader of the Shadowblade Organization, which was renamed the Coldblood Organization.

    1st person, Little Isaac.

    We had finally arrived back at the city. We were going to split apart, to deal with our targets. I told Katy to be careful, and take her time, and use her vampire abilities to her fullest. Katy then went in one direction, while I went the other. After a short walk, I arrived outside a large mansion. I walked straight in, right past the guards. The guards didn¡¯t even notice me, since I was using my hypnosis on them. Using hypnosis, I waltzed through the mansion, looking for that ugly noble. After a while, I arrived inside a room, which contained a man that fit the description I was given. I sat on a chair opposite him, staring at him for a while, pondering how I should kill him. Then an idea struck me! Why kill him myself, when I could have someone else do it? Thus I revealed my presence to the man, who was immediately shocked.

    ¡°How did you get in here?!¡± He said, as he stood up, about to call the guards. Before he could do anything, I made him calm down. I looked him straight into his eyes, my eyes shining with an unstoppable persuasive power.

    ¡°I have a task for you. I want you to try and rape me, with all your power. Kill anyone that tries to stop you.¡± I said, with a big grin on my face. The noble immediately stood up and tore off his pants, including underwear, then tried to grab me, but before he could, I jumped out the window. The man furiously chased me out into the streets. There were a few people walking there, but no guards were present.

    ¡°Help!¡± I screamed as loudly as I could. Well it was nowhere near as loudly as I could, but it was as loud as a twelve year old could. The people present all looked at me, then saw a half-naked man chasing me. Three men and a woman immediately came to my help, but before they could do anything, the noble took out a short sword, and struck them all down, killing them. The men tried to fight back, but they didn¡¯t have any weapons, and they were just normal civilians. The noble was an E ranked warrior, so he easily killed them. After my ¡®saviours¡¯ were dead, the noble grabbed me. Even though I was far stronger than him, I acted as if I couldn¡¯t fight back, since I was supposed to be a twelve year old child. The noble tried to take off my pants, while I was kicking around, and screaming. Only a moment later, a group of guards came from around a corner, as they had heard the screams.

    ¡°Stop right there!¡± The guards shouted at the man, as they surrounded him. The noble looked around him, anger very present in his expression.

    ¡°Do you know who I am?!¡± The noble spat at them, while waving his short sword around. The guards looked at him in disgust.

    ¡°We do, but even a noble like you can¡¯t escape the law. Murder of four people, attempted rape on a child, and resisting arrest with a weapon, this all gives us authority to kill you on the spot!¡± One of the guards spat back at him, then the guards all charged at him with their spears. Even though the noble was an E ranker, he didn¡¯t stand a chance against six guards. All six of the spears pierced his body, spilling his blood. He immediately lost his strength and let me go. I fell to the ground, pretending to be weak. The noble wasn¡¯t dead yet, but there were six spears lodged in his body, so it only took a few seconds before he fell limp to the ground. The guards immediately rushed over to me.

    ¡°Are you okay? Did he do anything to you?¡± One of the guards said, as he pulled my pants back up, and dried my tears. I looked up at the guard, letting out even more tears.

    ¡°N-no, he never got that far¡­¡± I said with a weak voice, then started crying. The guards looked at me pitifully.

    ¡°Where do you live? I¡¯ll take you back home.¡± The guard said, as he lifted me up to my feet. I looked at him again.

    ¡°It¡¯s fine, I live close to here.¡± I said weakly. ¡°Alright then. It¡¯s safe now, since the bad guy is dead. Go along then, such a place isn¡¯t appropriate for a child.¡± The guard said. I nodded, then thanked them and ran along. When I got out of sight, my I jumped up to the rooms in a flash, hurrying over to where Katy was. By the time I got ever there, Katy jumped out of a window, then jumped up to the roofs. I jumped over to her roof and appeared right in front of her.

    ¡°AHHH!¡± She screamed as I appeared. I couldn¡¯t help but laugh at her. ¡°Oh, it¡¯s you. You scared the shit out of me!¡± She screamed at me. I still couldn¡¯t stop laughing.

    ¡°So, hehe, how did it go?¡± I asked, still laughing a bit. Katy looked at me, annoyed. ¡°It went good. Luckily the guy was a pervert, so he took me into his bedroom, but before he ever got to taste my body, I killed him. It was pretty hard though. This was the first time I killed someone, except from when you made me into a vampire, so I hesitated a bit. Luckily I was much stronger than him, and could easily hold him down. The hypnosis also helped¡± She said. For some reason, Kay had gotten her hypnosis early, and it was more powerful than normal, just like mine was. It was probably because of my bloodline. After we were finished, we left the city for the assassin stronghold.

    3rd person.

    Meanwhile, in a forest hidden in the wilderness that separated one half of this continent with the other, there was a large serpentine monster, sitting on a rock. This serpent creature had two arms and legs, and looked like a lizard. It was a Lesser Land Drake. This Drake was the ruler of this part of the wilderness, which was bordering the four kingdoms of the southern half of the continent. Suddenly a lion with wings landed in front of the drake. It was a lesser flying lion, one of the rare magical creatures that were on this continent.

    ¡°Lord, it has reached my ears that the war between the two kingdoms of Tabarut and Kalderon have stopped fighting and entered an alliance. Tabarut also hasn¡¯t acquired the Dragon Gem yet.¡± The lion said. The drake opened two of the three slits on its head, revealing two deep yellow eyes that gave a menacing glow. The third slit, located on his forehead, opened last, revealing a hole shaped like a jewel.

    ¡°They betrayed their promise to obtain the gem!?¡± The drake said in a deep, menacing voice, which thundered through the heavens shaking the mountains and land around the Drake. The Drake stood up and revealed a heavy, menacing aura, even stronger than the one Valen and Isaac released. The aura of someone infinitely close the middle stage of rank S.

    End of chapter 26.

 Chapter 27: The End or The Beginning?

    RagNarok(Pr): Sorry guys for the late chapter. Two weeks ago on the 12th when Lord Martin sent the chapter to me so i can edit it, I told him we should either split the chapter into two different chapters or make a longer one. Not knowing Lord Martin would be extremely busy that following week and he had to study for the exams he would have the beginning of this week. The good news is the chapter is finally finished :D. Hope you enjoy

    Chapter 27: The End or The Beginning?

    The oversized lizard stared deep into the Flying Lion¡¯s eyes, making the hair on its back rise. The lion was worried for its life, maybe the Drake would put the blame on him for some reason. The Drake opened its mouth to speak,

    ¡°This is bad. If I don¡¯t get that gem soon, I¡¯m afraid it will be too late. Listen here! Send someone over to the two neighbouring kingdoms and tell them to wage war against the other two. If they can defeat those two small kingdoms, and get me my jewel, then I shall reward them with riches. Hurry!¡± The drake shouted out orders, less than patient. A very long time ago, so long that the Drake didn¡¯t even remember exactly how long, he had made a deal with Tabarut¡¯s royal family.

    Many years ago, when the Drake was just a baby, it had woken up in this very forest, on this very mountain, it had awoken. It neither knew where it was, or why; it didn¡¯t even know what it was! It had been left there all alone, with only one message in its mind; ¡°On peak of the Kalderon throne, there it lies. The Dragon¡¯s Gem, only with that jewel shall your origin be revealed. Seek it and reclaim it, then join us once more!¡± Those words were deeply imbedded into his mind. Ever since that day, he had trained like no other. Eventually, he became the strongest creature in this wilderness, being the only creature at the S rank. But as the King of the Beasts, he couldn¡¯t venture into the human territories to seek his legacy, lest the humans band together and destroy everything in these forests he holds so dear to him.

    Thus, the Drake sought out the Tabarut kingdom and struck a deal. ¡°Wage war against Kalderon, and reclaim my jewel, and I shall reward you with treasures beyond imagination!¡± But this was so long ago, the years measured in the thousands. What the Drake didn¡¯t know, was that the promise was long forgotten. Stories of a Drake in these lands? Such a thing was unthinkable, since Drakes were only found much deeper inside this massive world. Therefore, the descendants of Tabarut had dismissed it as a fairy tale, and it had long been forgotten. But the damage was done, and war waged on, and an undisputable feud between the two kingdoms began. The war lasted for thousands of years, yet the Drake knew nothing. Unluckily for him, time was running out. He was reaching the end of his lifetime, and if he didn¡¯t get the Dragon Gem, he would see no hope of prolonging it.

    But if he ever got the Gem, his limits shall be lifted, his legacy revealed. The moment the Gem enters his body, he would instantly enter the middle stage of S rank, shedding the shells known as the lesser Drake. Then he would be able to reach SS rank in a few centuries, prolonging his life.

    But now the war had ended, and the two kingdoms had joined forces. Any chance of him recovering the Dragon Gem was gone. But all hope was not yet lost. Therefore human slaves were immediately sent to the two other kingdoms, with promise of riches. The two kingdoms accepted heartily, immediately readying their armies. The continent which these kingdoms are on, is but a tiny peninsula of the huge supercontinent that is the true world. Towards the end of this peninsula, there is a large wilderness, separating these four kingdoms from the rest of the world. These four kingdoms are located in a line, parallel to the wilderness. The two kingdoms in the middle are Kalderon and Tabarut, and the other two, slightly stronger kingdoms are the Kingdom of Graywich and the Kingdom of Vasaal. These two kingdoms were stronger than Kalderon and Tabarut, but only by a bit. If they were to wage war, they would have large casualties. Partly because of this reason, they never showed interest in fighting their neighbouring kingdoms, and since there was too much distance between Graywich and Vasaal, they never waged war against each other.

    The other reason they didn¡¯t show interest in Kalderon and Tabarut, was because the region was too poor. They wouldn¡¯t get much out of it, but now it was different. Now they were promised riches and treasures to conquer those lands, and reclaim the Dragon Gem. The two kingdoms immediately made a call to arms, then, using their best voice transmission technology available, they started planning an invasion.

    Only a few months later, the armies marched. The Kingdom of Graywich marched for Kalderon, while Vasaal went for Tabarut. Under the element of surprise, the armies managed to quickly conquer the bordering cities, with minimal casualties, but after that, the Royal Families quickly discovered the actions of their neighbours. The Kings of Kalderon and Tabarut immediately organized their armies and sped for their borders. The two opposing armies then met close to the border in an empty field. Thus, the two Kings met. The king of Kalderon wanted to know what the meaning of this was. Kalderon and Graywich had never been enemies, in fact they had quite positive relations. But no matter what, the opposing king wouldn¡¯t tell him what was going on. The king could only go back to his armies. On the side of Tabarut, the same thing conspired, but no results. Thus, the armies advanced, and the fighting began.

    Meanwhile in Sanguine Regis. Isaac was walking through the halls, minding his own, when he met one of the men from the intelligence department.

    ¡°Oh, Lord Isaac, I was just about to go find you. I have major news for you!¡± the man said. Isaac looked at him wearily. It was not that often that the intelligence department came with ¡®major news¡¯. It was definitely something big, and something big usually meant something bad.

    ¡°Well, what is it?¡± Isaac said impatiently. The man immediately straightened his back and reported,

    ¡°War has broken out! The Kingdoms of Graywich and Vasaal have waged war against the alliance! The armies of the opposing kingdoms are currently fighting in the fields by the borders.¡± The man said with a worried look. Thinking about this matter, Isaac turned around and looked out the window, looking in the direction of the border to Graywich.

    ¡°Hmm, well this doesn¡¯t have much to do with us. For now, we¡¯ll let the humans handle their affairs themselves. We can consider it a test to see the worth of both Kalderon and Tabarut¡¯s leadership . Anyways, dispatch a few elite men to spy and keep watch on the fighting, both here and in Tabarut. If either kingdom is losing, then report back to me, or if anything major happens. Every once in awhile, you can also send some vampires to help both fronts. It¡¯s good to stretch your legs once in awhile, and fighting against an army is a good experience. Also have this reported to the other Purebloods and anyone important in general.¡± Isaac ordered the man.

    ¡°Yes sir! Then excuse me, I¡¯ll go attend to it immediately.¡± The man said, then hurriedly left to go dispatch his spies. Then, since that matter was dealt with, Isaac continued his walk through the numerous halls of Sanguine Regis. He made a quick visit down to the deepest pits of the dungeon, to visit that prince. He had already forgotten his name, or maybe he just never cared to remember. The prince was still very alive, but he had aged. He looked like an old man, he had a long, white beard, and was as skinny as a skeleton. After toying with him for a while, Isaac left the dungeon.

    Sometime later, at the Council. Around a round table, numerous men and women sat, discussing the war. It had already been awhile since the war started, and they had already lost a total of three cities. One of them belonged to Kalderon, while the other two belonged to Tabarut. In the middle of discussion, one of the nobles stood up. He had a pale look to him, and was visibly wounded. He had participated in one of the recent fights, where Kalderon¡¯s side lost. Luckily he had managed to escape before death.

    ¡°Why aren¡¯t we asking them, the Coldbloods to help us?! If we just use them, then this fight wouldn¡¯t last long, after all, everyone one of them is abnormally strong!¡± The young noble said, the anxiety clearly apparent. With his recent near death experience, he was anxious. The king of Kalderon looked at him pitifully, as if he looked upon a child who had yet to see the world.

    ¡°Yes, if we did ask them, then the war would end quickly. But can we ask them?! They know very well that this war is going on, and they know very well that we could very well lose, yet they do nothing! Yet they are on our side! Then, why do you think they are doing nothing?¡± The king asked the young noble. The noble looked at the king, astonished.

    ¡°I, I don¡¯t¡­¡± The noble said, but before he could finish, the king spoke once more. ¡°They are testing us! They are seeing how long we can hold out, then when we are about to lose, that¡¯s when they¡¯ll strike!¡± The king said. Many of the nobles nodded in agreement, and the young noble just sat down in defeat.

    ¡°Anyways, we need to deal with the matters at hand. The reports show that the armies are marching from the city of Carto. We will meet them in Hallow¡¯s Path, where we will swiftly defeat them! Lord Callahan, Lord Arnold, Lord Hannibal, you three shall march with your armies. Lord Callahan, you shall be the commander of this operation! The reports say that there are about five hundred thousand troops!¡± The king of Kalderon said, then looked at the other king next to him. He nodded, then rose, after the other sat down.

    ¡°Now for the Tabarut side. Reports say that the Vasaal forces are heading towards the city of Durlak. We shall meet them one hundred fifty kilometres north of the city. They don¡¯t realize that we have portals available, so we shall use them to our advantage. Lord Musaali, Lord Alexander and Lady Arteshbod, you three shall head to meet the enemy. Lady Arteshbod, you are in charge. The army is of similar size to the one invading Kalderon.¡± The Tabarut king said. The three Lords and Lady all agreed. No one was against Lady Arteshbod leading the army, since she was renowned as the greatest general in the kingdom, and a great warrior. The meeting went on for another few hours, where they discussed tactics.

    During the past months, there had already been several big fights between the opposing forces. Thousands of soldiers had died in them, fighting for the wellbeing of their fellow countrymen. Now, one such battle was about to take place. In the Commander''s Tent, the three Lords, Callahan, Arnold and Hannibal were standing before the tactical table.

    ¡°Alright, here¡¯s what we¡¯ll do. In the front, we¡¯ll have four battalions of infantry, ready to meet the enemy. Because of the terrain here, we¡¯ll be able to hide a large force a good hundred meters away from the clashing point. There, we¡¯ll have one battalion of elite cavalry. Lord Arnold, you¡¯ll lead them, and charge when I give the go, to flank their left side. On the right flank, we¡¯ll have two battalions of infantry, as well as the other cavalry force. The archers will be placed on the hills, behind the frontline infantry, and directly below them will be the mage force. Lord Hannibal, you are in command of the archers and mages.¡± Lord Callahan said. Lord Callahan was very pressured, since this was his first major battle in decades, but he couldn¡¯t let it get to him. He had to win, if he didn¡¯t, then he died. Thus, the deployments began. A few hours later, the battle finally began. Two huge forces of over half a million each, clashed on the battlefield. The battle lasted for several days, resulting in a huge number of casualties. As the battle began, the Elite Cavalry Force had been signaled and charged into the enemy¡¯s left flank, killing thousands of unprepared troops. The right flank had also had a success, managing to kill a large portion of the opposing army, but there had been many casualties. After the success of the Elite Cavalry, they had prepared to charge once more, but unfortunately, they fell into a trap, and were bombarded by arrows and magic alike. Unfortunately, Lord Arnold perished in battle, but not before killing as many as he could.

    After the battle ended, there was nothing but death, corpses as far as the eye could see with puddles of accumulated blood all around the hills of corpses. The sound of cawing crows, and vultures could be heard. This time, due to more experience, as well as the element of surprise and tactical advantage in terrain, the Kalderon forces had won. The enemy¡¯s army had been routed, but around four hundred thousand soldiers died and another one hundred thousand were wounded in this battle alone. Kalderon had around six hundred fifty thousand soldiers going in, while the Graywich army had five hundred thousand, most of which had been either killed, taken captive or routed.

    Meanwhile in Tabarut, their battle was just about to begin. They didn¡¯t have much of an advantage in terrain on their battlefield, except a bit of higher grounds, so they could only try and overwhelm the enemy. They had managed to gather an army of eight hundred thousand troops to meet the enemies five hundred thousand. With such difference in size, they should be able to win, but there were no absolutes, so they practiced the most extreme of cautions.  The fight was about to begin. They had stationed several battalions on the frontlines, while having an Elite Cavalry battalion on each flank, accompanied by Elite Horse Archers. The normal archers, as well as mages, were stationed behind the main army, on higher grounds. Half of the mages were preparing a large scale meteor shower spell, but as soon as they finished casting it, they would have no mana left, and have no choice, but to leave the battlefield.

    Thus, when the enemy army arrived, and the meteor shower was finally cast. Immediately, tens of thousands of troops died from the meteors, and the four flanking battalions charged, as well as the frontline infantry and spearmen. The battle lasted for a couple of days. In the end, Tabarut had won, thanks to the element of surprise as well as a much larger army. The battle had been a relative easy win, since the meteor shower had caused chaos in the enemy lines, and the casualties of tabarut only amounted to around one hundred thousand dead and around fifty thousand wounded. But this was with luck on their side and almost twice as many troops. In future battles to come, there would be many more lives lost, and sometimes an entire army would be annihilated, but this time it had been a complete victory for both Kalderon and Tabarut.

    As the years passed, many battles were fought, and many were lost. Usually, every other fight would result in a loss, but that didn¡¯t mean the total annihilation of the army. Most of the times when an army lost, the commander would issue a retreat, sparing his soldiers. Sometimes, the army would also choose to surrender, if retreat was impossible, and defeat was imminent. Slaying surrendered foes was a war crime, and would result in execution, so the surrendering army would always be spared, but they would have to suffer a life of slavery. Actually, when the enemy army surrendered would be the best result, after all, these were times of war. A lot of people were being conscripted into the army, and the workforce was low. In such times, slaves were much needed to tend the farms, to ensure food for the army; for the kingdom.

    It was the eighth year into the war. The forces of Graywich were marching towards the city of Tarlick, with a force of five million soldiers. Tarlick only had one million soldiers stationed, with no hope of reinforcement, since the enemy army already surrounded the city, but this was a siege. In the case of a siege, the invading army would need to far outnumber the city to even stand a hope of winning. Sadly for the city, the portal was malfunctioning, so they couldn¡¯t even teleport more soldiers in, or out.

    The siege lasted for two months, without any major fighting. This was because they wanted to starve the people in the city, but the enemy couldn¡¯t wait any longer. They had received a report of a huge force marching towards them from the south. Thus the battle of Tarlick began. The enemy army began treading forwards with their siege weaponry. The incoming army was actually not the only reason why they began the battle just now. They had been constructing a battering ram and other siege equipment, with various magical enchantments on them. This battering ram would be able to pulverise the city gate. The only problem was that it was extremely heavy, and ridiculously expensive. Such an item was a onetime luxury. Pushing it to the gate, would take a very large number of soldiers, and they would be extremely vulnerable. They began pushing the huge battering ram, with an astonishing number of a thousand soldiers pushing it, but after only pushing it about a hundred meters, most of the soldiers died from the archers and mages barrage of arrows and spells. The next group immediately charged to the battering ram, to continue the charge, but after only ten meters, they lay dead. They had to push it for about a kilometre, so there was a long distance still to push. But eventually, they managed to do it, but not without casualties. In the end, over two hundred thousand troops died just by trying to push it. Every soldier that arrived at the battering ram would die, but even more that tried to get there would die, since the distance was long.

    1st person, Citizen #20781

    There it is. A huge number of soldiers were standing in front of the city gate. Behind the sound of the battering ram crashing against the gates, there was the sound of death. Countless people outside were dying. Around me were several other people, some I knew, some I didn¡¯t. Then, there it is. The last crash, then the sound as the gates are blown to smithereens made all the civilians panick. The enemy soldiers are storming into the city, killing the troops guarding the gates. They are massively outnumbered at the moment, so the city guard is being slaughtered before my very eyes.

    Oh shit, they are coming for us! ¡°Run!¡± I shout, as I turn around, and start running. Everyone around me follows suit, with me in the front. But then I stepped on a rock, and slip, falling to the ground. I hurriedly get back up, but then I see it. My daughter, I can see my daughter not so far away, but, but¡­ She¡¯s being raped, they¡¯re raping her! I start running towards her, screaming for them to stop. The enemy troops turn around to look at me, then they look back at my daughter. He throws her away, then swings his sword at her neck. Her head goes flying, as she stares me in the eyes. I scream, and start running at the soldier, mindlessly. Suddenly I feel a sharp pain in my shoulder! I look down, and see and arrow sticking out. The blood is pouring uncontrollably. Then again, the sharp pain. This time, there¡¯s another arrow, sticking out through my chest. By this point I¡¯m already soaked in blood, and my mind is going hazy.

    ¡°AAAHHHH!¡± I scream in pain, yet I don¡¯t stop, and continue running at the guard, who¡¯s just laughing at me. Then I feel another flash of pain, just for a moment, before everything starts fading to black, as I feel blood flowing down from my forehead¡­

    3rd person.

    The enemy soldiers stormed into the city, and killed anyone they came upon, be it soldier or citizen. After the gates were open, it didn¡¯t take long to take the city, since they outnumbered the city greatly, but there were still heavy casualties. Just by storming towards the city charging for the gates, over a million soldiers had died. In total Graywich lost around two and a half million soldiers taking this city.

    The war lasted for many years. Kalderon and Tabarut lost many men, and a few cities. The war was very taxing, but it was also extremely hard for the other side. They lost just as many men or more than Kalderon and Tabarut, and the allied side even managed to retake a few cities. But there were many problems faced during a war. Food was ever so scarce, since many farms were destroyed, many farmers were killed in the battle. Weaponry was also a very necessary supply, which was becoming increasingly hard to come by. Thousands of tons of iron and steel were used to forge the weapons, and it was very expensive, and several mines were bled dry. The two sides could only hope they would last, although so far, the war was going in the invading armies favour.

    1st person, Isaac.

    Thus twenty years passed. In these twenty years, the kingdoms had been fighting constantly. They were in a constant stalemate, neither kingdom being able to advance on the other. Even though Graywich and Vasaal were the stronger ones, Kalderon and Tabarut were far more experienced in war. Those two kingdoms had been in constant war for thousands of years, and if that wasn¡¯t enough, they were located in the middle, right where the most beasts came from the wilderness to the north. The monsters of the wilderness didn¡¯t go to the eastern and western side much, so they didn¡¯t get nearly as many beasts to deal with. Therefore, the soldiers of Kalderon and Tabarut had far more experience in battle, and could deal with the opposing army. It seemed as if this war could go on for several hundred more years, neither side getting the advantage.

    In these twenty years, our strength had improved marginally. Both Kato and I had reached the Middle Arcanist level, and Kato had mastered the basics of Energy Manipulation. A few others had learned it as well, so now we were finally teaching the rest of the Energy Manipulation Magic in the Academy as well. Most of the Purebloods had reached the Peak B rank as well, so now we had thirteen late A ranker equivalents, and with Erwin and Rommel, we had two peak A rankers. In the Crimson Order, there were about thirty A rankers now as well.

    3rd person, Wilderness.

    The lesser Drake was sitting on his normal stone throne. He was getting impatient. It had already been nearly twenty years since the war started, yet no progress had been made. After thinking about the matter for a while, he made his decision. He let out a thunderous roar, summoning his generals. Only moments later, four beasts arrived. One was the Flying Lion from before. Three of these beasts were at the peak A level, while one of them was at the early S rank. The Drake looked at these creatures.

    ¡°Send word to the humans that they are to gather their armies for one large push, and gather as many beasts as you can find in this forest. You have one year to amass an army of beasts!¡± The Drake ordered. The beast generals replied with a ¡°Yes Lord!¡± then immediately got started. Human slaves were sent with a message for the invading kingdoms, while the beast generals amassed an army.

    In the human world, the kings of Vasaal and Grawich had received the message to amass all their troops and began the largest advance since the war began. Kalderon and Tabarut could only respond by doing the same. Thus the four sides fought viciously for one whole year, still in a stalemate, but things were looking dark for Kalderon and Tabarut.

    Meanwhile in Sanguine Regis, one of the Master Spies was rushing to Isaac¡¯s office. He didn¡¯t even knock, and immediately went right inside. Isaac looked at him in anger, about to punish him, but the Master Spy started talking before he got a chance.

    ¡°Lord, this is bad!¡± he shouted at Isaac, panic clearly evident on his face. ¡°The beasts are descending the mountains! Huge hordes of beasts are descending from the wilderness to the north.¡± The Master Spy reported. Isaac had a worried look on his face, as he listened to the report. He sat still for a while, to think about his course of actions.

    1st person, Isaac.

    ¡°Alright, listen well. Send messengers to Tabarut and Kalderon to send the strongest fighters they can spare, then gather all of the Crimson Order and the Novo Mages that can fight. Do it with due haste! I need them all gathered before the day is over!¡± I ordered him. The Master Spy immediately went to work, and sent messengers to the two kingdoms, then hurriedly gathered all our fighting forces. Only a few hours later, our fighting force was gathered outside the castle. Then we all teleported to the closest portal to where we would meet the beast horde. Getting all our forces out took a while, so only the next day, we were finally where we were planning to meet them. Our forces consisted of over seventy thousand B rankers, and fifty A rankers.

    According to the reports of the Master Spy, there were four worrying individuals in the beast army. There were three Peak A rankers, and one who seemed even stronger. He was probably the leader of the group.

    Apparently, he was a Flame Lion. Flame Lions are relatives to Flying Lions. They can¡¯t fly, but they can spit out flames, and also cover themselves in it. I wasn¡¯t worried about these guys at all, since we had eleven late A rankers, two peak A rankers and one S ranker, being me. The most worrying part was their numbers. I could already see the huge horde of beasts, and they saw us as well. The horde divided into three groups. Two of them went in opposite directions probably towards Kalderon and Tabarut¡¯s frontline against the invading armies, and one stopped in their tracks. The group that stopped to meet us numbered around three hundred thousand, but their individual strength varied. We had no troops under the B rank, while they did. Most of the strong beasts had been sent to the other sides, so the remaining ones were generally at the D rank and C ranks, while some were B rankers, and around 50 A ranker beasts.

    This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    The beasts front line started charging towards us, but I ordered my troops to stay put, and advanced on my own. When I was a good distance away from them, I stopped. As I stood there, waiting for their charge, I raised a single hand. Out of my fingertips, a small amount of blood appeared. The blood started flying towards the enemy army. Suddenly, huge amounts of blood started flowing out of the charging beasts, making huge cyclones appear. The huge amounts of blood inside the cyclones began rotating so fast they began cutting everything into pieces, killing everything they could reach, dismembering tens of thousands of beasts. In only a moment, almost seventy thousand beasts had died.

    After it was over, I could feel a deep stare on me, coming from deep within the beast horde. I immediately shifted my view towards the heavy stare. What I saw shocked me. A huge lizard was looking at me, a Drake. But the one who was truly shocked was the Drake. He was using magical means to observe me, but I was still able to notice him, and even look him in the eyes.

    As the blood cyclones dispersed, the remaining beast horde started their charge. Yet most of the beasts felt fear while they charged as all around where their seventy thousand comrades were just moments before was now the scene of carnage, where thousands of unrecognisable corpses were everywhere with their limbs gone and half of their bodies seemed like they were eaten. Immediately, I ordered my men to charge the frightened beasts. We also had our mages cast a large scale spell over the battlefield, causing the sky to stay dark as long as the mages could supply it mana. Our sixty thousand B rankers charged at the two hundred thirty thousand beasts. Many on our side were vampires, so a few of them could equal an early A ranker, which gave us an advantage. Our people were also far more skilled and intelligent than those mindless beasts, so using tactics and barrages from the mages, we were able to handle them. The fighting went on for what felt like a whole day. Even though there weren¡¯t as many B rankers as there were weaker beasts, they still numbered in the thousands. While the two forces were fighting, the A rankers all stood in the back observing. After the weaker forces fell into a stalemate, the beast generals ordered the A rankers to go help.

    In response, I ordered the Crimson Knights to move to the front, as well as the few A rankers who were sent to us. This time, the fighting also went on for a whole day. Even though we were outnumbered, since the Purebloods didn¡¯t join the fight, we still had the advantage. Those beasts were mostly early A rank, and some middle A rank, but our Crimson Knights were all vampires, and many of them were middle and late staged, so some of them even equalled a peak stage A ranker. After another full day of fighting, most of the beasts had fallen and the few survivors routed towards the position the four strong beasts and the drake were at. Most of the casualties on our side weren¡¯t from Crimson Knights, since killing a vampire is no easy thing to do. Some were incapacitated and lost a few limbs, but those type of wounds would heal given a few days and some blood. So most of those who fell were B rankers and those who were still human.

    Now, the beast generals were clearly panicking. There were only four of them, while there were thirteen Purebloods on our side. They were well aware that we were the strongest ones, since we didn¡¯t participate in the fight so far. They also saw my might before. Even if they all banded together, they wouldn¡¯t be able to kill seventy thousand beasts in one attack. But as our sides were readying ourselves for the final fight, a loud roar rang out. In front of the four beast generals, there appeared the Drake. The drake stood there proudly on its four legs, giving a majestic aura. It didn¡¯t have any wings, meaning it was a Land Drake. I looked back to my group.

    ¡°I will deal with the Land Drake. Erwin, Rommel and Kato, you guys group up and deal with that Flame Lion that seems to be as strong as an S early stage ranker halfway to middle stage. It will be a hard fight, but if you work together, and coupled with your vampire strengths, you should be able to do it. Don¡¯t be afraid to sacrifice an arm or leg if necessary, after all, it will grow back. The rest of you, deal with the three peak A stage beasts. And one last thing. Be careful.¡± I said, then immediately turned around. It was around four o¡¯clock in the afternoon, even though the sky was dark. We started marching towards our enemies, while they did the same. When we were about fifty meters away from each other, we stopped.

    3rd person, battle against the Flame Lion.

    Kato, Erwin and Rommel stood opposite to the Flame Lion. The Lion stared at them in a majestic manner that seemed like he was a being far above them.

    ¡°Do the three of you really think you stand a chance against me, Three A rankers close to or at middle stage, don¡¯t make me laugh, Hahaha...?¡± The Flame Lion roared at them. Erwin didn¡¯t even listen as he began entering his fighting stance and looked dead serious, as he charged at the Lion, holding his sword high in the air. Rommel followed, and flanked the Flame Lion from the side, while Kato stood in the back and readied a spell. Soon, two heavy sword slashes shot out from the swords and struck at the Lion, while a large energy slash cleaved at him from the front. The Flame Lion jumped back, while breathing a wave of fire at the energy slash. The energy slash was easily dissipated, but they didn¡¯t stop. Erwin and Rommel charged right back at him, and Kato readied and fired another spell. This time, they attacked repeatedly, not allowing the Lion time to rest, and Kato threw several quick spells at him. They managed to get a few hits in, slightly wounding the Lion. Suddenly, the Lion let out a furious roar, jumped a dozen meters back. Suddenly its body started blazing with flames. Erwin and Rommel looked at each other. If the body was covered in flames, it would be much harder for them to fight, since fire is their weak element. They both backed away to where Kato was standing.

    ¡°Do your thing!¡± Rommel said. Kato nodded, then pointed his hands at them, and channelled his mana as he cast two spells. Soon, a small translucent, blue layer appeared around both of them.

    ¡°This will keep the heat from the fire at bay, but it won¡¯t protect you from physical attacks. If it did, then it would break way too soon.¡± Kato said. Erwin and Rommel nodded and said ¡°thanks,¡± then charged back at the Lion. While the two were having their melee fight with the Lion, Kato started preparing his spell. He began gathering all the mana around him, as well as the element of water. Even though using pure mana would give far more destructive power, sometimes using the elements would be better, like when fighting a magical monster of the fire element. Using water magic against such a monster would do a lot of damage.

    After Kato was finished preparing his spell, it suddenly started raining. But the rain wasn¡¯t falling everywhere, it was gathering at one point, in front of Kato. All the rain water started forming into a huge ball of water. When the ball had grown to almost a hundred meters in size, it started compressing and shrinking, until it was much smaller, and swirling around in a constant motion. When he was finished, he finally sent the ball flying towards the Flame Lion. The water ball flew at insane speeds, and it only took a moment to reach them. Erwin and Rommel immediately backed away, just before the ball hit the Flame Lion. As it hit, the water ball also exploded, cutting the body of the Lion. As the water disappeared, the body of the Lion appeared again. It wasn¡¯t dead, but there were a lot of small and large wounds all over his body.

    The Flame Lion roared furiously and the fire around him burned even hotter, then he set his sights on Rommel, who was the nearest one to him. Rommel was shocked and was caught off guard by the insane charge and speed at which flame lion was traveling at. The lion shot it¡¯s left paw towards Rommel¡¯s chest while his sword instinctively traveled to meet and block it, though unsuccessful it managed to block most of the damage, but the lion¡¯s mouth had also shot forward and was able to bite his left side. The flame lion managed to rip off most of Rommel¡¯s left shoulder and arm off, then hit him once again with it¡¯s tail as it spun around. Everything had happened in the span of seconds since his initial charge. As Rommel was flying through the air and while off balance he tumbled twenty meters across the ground, the Flame Lion started laughing like a maniac.

    ¡°HAHAHAHA, I KILLED HIM! You bastards wounded my body, so now I will kill all of you one by one!¡± He yelled out his lungs, but when he saw Rommel, he immediately quieted down. Rommel was standing back up from the ground. Rommel immediately charged towards one of the weaker monsters closest to him, like a crazed animal, he then drained it of it¡¯s blood. Immediately, Rommel started healing. His wounds on his chest healed after only a moment after he was done, and from his left shoulder down his left arm began healing at a visible pace. It wasn¡¯t as fast as Isaac could heal, but being an A ranked Pureblood, his healing speed was very quick.

    ¡°WHAT IS THIS?!¡± The Flame Lion roared. Rommel slowly walked back towards the fight with the lion.

    ¡°Erwin, let¡¯s finish this.¡± He said. ¡°Yes father.¡± Erwin replied as he too started walking slowly towards the Flame Lion. ¡°So we are doing that, are we?¡± Kato said, then also started walking.

    Suddenly, all three of them cut a wound on their hands. Blood started flowing out of them, while blood was flowed out of all the various corpses around them as well. Only a few moments later, three huge Blood Cyclones appeared. Then, the three Blood Cyclones started moving towards each other. In only moment, the three huge Blood Cyclones had combined, into one Colossal Blood Cyclone. The Blood Cyclone was surrounding the Flame Lion that was slightly panicked now. The Flame Lion tried to turn tail, and run out of the area of the Blood Cyclone, but when he touched the boundary of the Cyclone, his paw was torn to bits. The Lion let out a roar, then turned around to meet his enemies. But what he met was millions upon millions of various beasts and monsters, and even some humanoids, but they were all blood red, and tightly packed together. Suddenly the various blood beasts started charging towards the Flame Lion. He responded by sending waves after wave of flames at them, but he whenever he killed one, another would appear. Then, when they finally managed to arrive before him, they started surrounding him and began munching on him. The millions of blood monsters were all trying to tear him apart, and the weakest of them had the strength of a late B ranker. Even a monster with the strength of an early S ranker wouldn¡¯t stand a chance against millions of A rankers. It didn¡¯t take long before the Flame Lion was torn to pieces.

    After the Colossal Blood Cyclone disappeared, Kato, Erwin and Rommel appeared where the center of the Cyclone was. They looked at each other, then started laughing, right before they collapsed on the ground, unconscious from the over exertion of mana and blood essence.

    1st person, Isaac.

    The Drake looked at me, while I looked at him. Then it began, All the purebloods and all the remaining generals and the drake charged at each other. I unsheathed my sword, and unleashed an energy slash. The slash was made out of pure mana, and unleashed like a wave at the enemy. The Drake was slightly surprised at the attack and nearly wasn¡¯t able to dodge, after all, he had never seen such magic before. Before the Drake could react again, I unleashed another sword wave at him, but this time he again dodged to the side and opened his mouth, unleashing a furious wave of fire. This was exactly the reason why I chose to use the energy wave, instead of the powerful flame attack of my sword.

    Being a Drake, he was naturally resistant to fire. Even though it wasn¡¯t complete immunity, fire would still do very little damage against him. As I rolled away from the fire, the Drake instead pounced at me. Using his mouth, he tried to bite one of my arms off, but I jumped to the side, then unleashed a kick on its underside, causing the Drake to stumble back a bit. Taking advantage of his mishap, I charged right at him with my sword. But right as I was about to hit, the Drake disappeared. Like a flash, he had jumped far up above me. Using his leverage of height, he spawned a large fireball from his mouth, and flung it at me. I dashed to the side, avoiding the fireball, but as the fireball hit, a few dozen meters away from me, it resulted in a huge explosion. The explosion radius reached me, and sent me flying, while the Drake was only just now landing back on the ground. As a Land Drake, it didn¡¯t have any wings, so it naturally couldn¡¯t fly, so it would eventually have to fall back down to the ground.

    ¡°So you want to play with explosions, huh?¡± I asked. ¡°I can roll with that.¡± As I was getting back up, I looked at the Drake with a smirk. The Drake looked at me confused. Suddenly two large bones stuck out from my back. Following the bones, a lot of blood flew out, forming a wing shape. After enough blood had come out to cover the bones, and shape two large wings, it started solidifying. In an instant, two large dark red wings filled with crimson looking feathers had sprouted out of my back. This was an ability I had gained not very long ago. It allowed me to make two large crimson wings, which in turn allowed me to fly.

    Using my new wings, I soared into the sky, while the Drake looked at me in astonishment.

    ¡°What are you?! Humans don¡¯t have wings!¡± the Drake furiously shouted. The Drake had been fighting under the pretence that we were humans, but now that he knew otherwise, a small sprout of worry seeded in his mind.

    ¡°Well, I¡¯m not a human, that¡¯s for sure.¡± I said, as I materialized three small blue orbs. Using my fingers, I flicked them at him. As the Drake saw the incoming orbs, he immediately fled at full speeds. As soon as the orbs hit the ground, they started expanding rapidly like an explosion, annihilating everything in their path. Even with the Drake¡¯s abnormal speed, it couldn¡¯t outrun the orbs, and was injured. Luckily the scales of a Drake is very tough, so it wasn¡¯t injured too badly. The Drake, now furious, started making dozens of huge fireballs, and sent them towards me in the sky. I managed to dodge each of them, but as they flew past me, they immediately began detonated, sending me flying in all directions, one after the other. Before I could collect myself, the Drake jumped into the air, trying to bite me. Luckily it missed by just a foot, but then it sent another fire wave at me, burning me. My clothes and skin were badly burned, but I healed fast.

    As I floated in the air, I formed a fist with my right hand. Around the fist, a formless energy appeared. After a fraction of a second, I punched my fist in the Drake¡¯s direction, sending the formless energy right at him. The energy travelled extremely fast, and wrapped around the Drake in an instant. Suddenly the Drake felt an immense pressure on his back which sent him flying down and smashing into the ground heavily he then couldn''t get up as he still felt this pressure.

    ¡°What is this?! It¡¯s so heavy!¡± The Drake furiously shouted. The spell I used could be used to increase gravity. Depending on how much mana i used on the attack, would dictate how much heavier the target would feel. Before the Drake could straighten himself, I flew at him at full speed. With my sword, I landed a heavy attack on the back of his neck, but because the scales were too hard, I only managed to pierce slightly into the flesh.

    Suddenly, a huge field of flames appeared around me, as the Drake roared in anger.

    ¡°You managed to pierce my scales. Good job, but now I have to get serious.¡± The Drake said. Suddenly the Drake disappeared even faster than before. The very instant after he disappeared, I felt myself flying in another direction. The Drake had smacked me with his right paw, he then furiously charged at me again. Suddenly the Drake jumped forward, and appeared right next to me, and bit me. My arm was torn off instantly, but as the bite stopped my momentum, I was able to kick myself upwards, into the skies.

    ¡°Hah, just give up, you¡¯ve been heavily injured!¡± The Drake said degradingly.

    ¡°Says who?¡± I said, as my arm started regenerating. The Drake stared at me in astonishment, as my arm was growing back.

    ¡°You really aren¡¯t human! This battle might be a bit trickier than I thought¡­¡± The drake said. But he wasn¡¯t the only one shocked. Even though this drake was at the peak stage of early S rank his strength was that of a Middle stage S ranker! It seemed like he was able to transcend a stage. As it was now, it would be hard for me to win. The only thing I could do was wait for night time.

    Thus we fought for hours on end. I would mostly stay at a range, attacking using magic, since Land Drakes were mostly renowned for their physical strength and not their ranged attacks. They had few magical abilities, but they were far better at using their immense strength. Thus the time I had been waiting for finally arrived. The sun was setting. As I saw the beautiful scenery of the sun setting, even though it was so dark, I couldn¡¯t help but start laughing. While I was laughing, I slowly descended back down onto the earth, while the Drake was staring at me in surprise.

    ¡°Hahahaha, you should have ended this fight when you had the chance!¡± I said, then turned around to look at the moon as the night had come.

    ¡°Ego Dominus noctis tenebris princeps. Ruler of the Night!¡± I chanted, as the shadows started wrapping themselves around me, absorbing into me. Now I stood there as a shadow, in an ethereal form. This was the ultimate ability I had gained, only a few months ago. Once more I turned around, to face the Drake.

    ¡°What the hell is this?!¡± The Drake exclaimed, before charging right at me. In an instant, it appeared before me and tried to bit my head off, but much to his despair, his mouth just fell right through me. After the Drake fell next to me, I manifested my hand into a corporeal form and hit him with all my might, sending him flying. It wasn¡¯t enough to hurt him, but the force from the blow still managed to blow him a few dozen meters back.

    The Drake stared at me with wide eyes. He was shocked and confused. Being able to go ethereal was something beyond rare. It almost only happened in spirits. For a physical creature to be able to go into an ethereal form was something he¡¯d never even heard of before.

    ¡°What are you?¡± The Drake asked wearily, as he slowly backed away. I looked at him, the shape of a smile discerned itself on my shadowy form as i showed him my fangs.

    ¡°Didn¡¯t you listen? Ego Dominus noctis tenebris princeps. I am the Lord of the night, the ruler of the shadows. I am the Lord of Darkness! I am the progenitor, the first of all vampires!¡± I said, my eyes hinting a gleam of arrogance and pride. The Drake stared at me in shock, even shaking visibly.

    ¡°Impossible!¡± He shrieked, then turned around and started running with his tail between his legs. I could only respond by laughing, then stepped into a shadow. Immediately my body disappeared, then reappeared out of the Drake¡¯s own shadows. Using the shadows, I could teleport into any shadow, as long as it wasn¡¯t too far away. As I reappeared, my hand was lodged deep inside the drake, grabbing his heart. The Drake screamed, as I re-manifested my hand into a corporeal form. The Drake looked me in the eyes, a look of arrogance. He was ready to die, as it realized that he stood no chance against this monster.

    ¡°Before I kill you, tell me why you started this invasion.¡± I said. I was slightly curious and interested in knowing why a Land Drake was here, and why he used the humans to wage a war.

    ¡°You have defeated me, so I shall comply. Back when I was just an infant, I was left in this peninsula¡¯s wilderness to the north. I was left with only one message, reclaim the Dragon Gem. But much to my demise, the Dragon Gem was held by the Kalderon Royal Family, deeply lodged into the top of the throne. I could not leave my home, lest the human kingdoms invade and kill everything, but one day, I was so lucky as to meet the king of Tabarut. I promised him many riches and treasures if he waged war against Kalderon, and reclaimed the Dragon Gem. But now, several thousand years later, they stopped fighting for some reason. As my remaining lifespan is short, I had no choice, but to make the other two neutral kingdoms fight them, and get me my Gem. As for what the Gem is for, all I know is that it will reveal my legacy, and also allow me to shed the bounds of a Lesser Land Drake, extending my life, and allowing me to enter the middle stage of S rank.¡± The Drake told his life story. When he was finished, I made my arm ethereal again and released the Drake.

    ¡°So that¡¯s how it is. I am actually the reason why the war stopped. Using various threats and rewards, I put the two kingdoms under my control, so you could say it¡¯s my fault that you didn¡¯t get the Gem. Anyways, I have decided I will give you the gem on one condition. Swear loyalty to me, and drink my blood!¡± I said. The Drake was taken aback. He never expected to live after this, much less to get his Gem. But to swear loyalty, he didn¡¯t know if he could do that. If it was only loyalty it wasn¡¯t much, but the Drake wanted to leave this place, and finally reunite with his kin.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t ask much of you. You can leave and go wherever you need. You only need to come help if I ever need it. By drinking my blood, the Blood Bond will form between us, and I¡¯ll always know where you are.¡± I said. The Drake looked around for a while, thinking. After a short moment, he looked at me again.

    ¡°Fine, I¡¯ll accept.¡± He said. I nodded, then manifested into my corporeal form once again, and cut a small wound on my arm.

    ¡°Drink.¡± I said, holding my bleeding arm to the Drake. The Drake opened its mouth, and drank the blood. Only a moment later, I felt the Bond form between us. Then, without another word, I turned around. Using voice transmission, I instructed the king to get the Dragon Gem ready, while the Drake, went to stop his forces. The other ones had finished fighting long ago. All four beast generals had died, while our side only suffered injuries, like severed arms and the like. I slowly walked to my group. Erwin, Rommel and Kato had also fallen unconscious after beating the Flame Lion.

    ¡°Everyone, there¡¯s something I need to say.¡± I said, my voice weary and weak. Before, I had still sounded strong and majestic, but it was all an act. That attack, Ruler of the Night, was extremely taxing.

    ¡°After using that attack, I¡¯m severely exhausted, but that¡¯s not all. I can feel something, something changing inside me. I¡¯m afraid that I¡¯ll be going into some sort of hibernation soon, and it might last longer than any ever before. I won¡¯t be joining you in Sanguine Regis.¡± I said, as I turned around. As I walked away from them, I flapped my wings, and soared into the skies. I flew deep into the wilderness, deep into the mountain ranges. Sometime later, I found a cave. I entered the cave, then collapsed the entrance, with some of the mana i had left i sent a spell to cover the cave and put an illusion around this mountain to keep anyone under S rank away. I slowly started walking deeper into the cave, until I reached a small chamber. I walked to the middle of the chamber, then stood still. Finally I let go, and let whatever was going on take-over. Suddenly, several strands of blood sprang out of my body, and wrapped around me. More and more blood poured out, and started forming around me. Eventually it covered me from head and toe, forming a cocoon around me. I floated in the cocoon for a few minutes, until I finally felt the darkness take over, as I fell into a deep slumber.

    End of book 1.

    Hey there! This chapter took a lot longer than usual, since I was very busy. I had a lot of work to do, and I also had my exams. My last exam was on Monday, and I managed to pass it, so that''s nice.

    And as you see, this is indeed the end of book 1. I''ve been thinking of making another novel, also about a vampire, but this time it would be in a more normal world, not high fantasy. The world would be very similar to ours, as in normal people don''t know about magic and the supernatural, so secrecy will be more important. The MC won''t be the progenitor either, but will be turned into a vampire, so the vampire world will already exist. It will be more about him rising in the ranks of the current vampire world, instead of establishing the world. He probably won''t be as OP either, not in the beginning at least.

    Tell me what you think, should I start writing that as well? In that world there will be more chance for a more modern segment as well. It will begin in a pretty early period, perhaps something similar to the classical antiquity era, which would be the time of Greece, Ancient Carthage and the Roman Kingdom etc.

    So yeah, it will be more realistic I guess, monsters won''t be all over, but there will still be some, like werewolves, demons and ghosts, but don''t expect dragons and drakes.

    So yeah, tell me what you think, and please rate and review, it would make me very happy!

    And one last thing. I would like to give my thanks to RagNarok, for making the very first donation, of $20! It made my day, and every dollar helps. Also, if you donate and want me to say thank you on the next chapter, just message me.

 Small Request

Hey there guys! As you know, I still don''t have any cover art, so I went and made a thread in the art section of the forum.

    If any of you guys are good at the art thing, then please pay a visit to this place: Need Cover Art</a>

 Book 2, Prologue

    Prologue

    Deep in the wilderness, there was a mountain. The mountain was a very quiet one, surrounded by trees, yet not a single beast was present. Out of the mountain, from the depths deep within, a dreadful and horrendous energy seeped out. This energy prevented even the strongest beasts in the forests to go near it. Somewhere on this mountain, there was an area that looked like it had collapsed. Behind the piles of rocks that formed this area, there was a cave. The cave was shrouded in darkness, making it nigh impossible to see anything. Deep within the cave, there was a chamber. This chamber had a faint, blood red glow to it, making it the only place inside the cave with any light. There was also a blood red mist inside the chamber. In the center of the chamber was a cocoon, a blood red cocoon, fitting well into the theme of the chamber. The cocoon sat there, quiet and calm. It had been there for a very long time, standing completely still and quiet, yet inside it wasn¡¯t as calm.

    As the cocoon sat there, quietly waiting, days passed. Then months, then years. Years turned into decades, and time flowed. The cocoon sat there, undisturbed, unperturbed. But then, after countless years, something changed. The time of peace and quiet was over for this cocoon, because in this moment, it was torn! A dark grey claw pierced through the cocoon, then the rest of the hand followed, then the arm. Soon an entire, pale grey arm pierced out of the cocoon. As the arm had gotten free, it started tearing the cocoon apart, hoping to free itself from this age old prison. Soon, a tall, dark grey monster stood in the room.

    The monster was over two meters tall, and had two large, blood red wings protruding out of its back. The wings were made out of crimson feathers, and when stretched out, they were over twice as long as the monster itself. The face of the monster was humanoid, and portrayed a certain beauty to it, but its eyes were glowing a deep, blood red colour. It also had long, white hair, which reached down to its waist. On the top it¡¯s head, there were eight small horns, curving upwards to the center of it¡¯s head. Together, these eight horns formed a crown. The arms had spikes protruding out of the elbows, and had long black claws. The feet were comprised of four long black claws, as well as a dewclaw on the back of the foot.

    The monster looked around itself, while growling deeply. It started mindlessly wandering about, with an empty, almost half asleep look in its eyes, until it eventually arrived at the old entrance to the cave. It stood staring at the collapsed entrance, without a single thought going through its head. But then, after standing there for who knows how long, its eyes flashed.

    1st person, Isaac Coldblood.

    I had been wandering around this cave for what seemed like an eternity, yet I had no idea whether it was a thousand years, or just a single hour. But that wasn¡¯t important, for I had finally remembered. Remembered who I am, what I am. I stood in the darkness, as I examined this new body of mine. It was very menacing looking, but I liked it. It also felt much more natural than I ever felt before, as if my previous body had just been a shell, and I had finally found my true body.

    I turned to the old entrance, then with a wave of my arm, I cleared the path to the outside. When I got outside, I spread my wings to a circumference of around six meters. With a flap of my wings, my body soared into the skies. I tried flying around for a while, testing out my wings. I found that I was able to fly much faster than ever before, and my body was stronger. I found that I had entered the early stage of ranks S. Just how long had it been? This was in my mind, and it was making me anxious, but as I was worrying, I suddenly saw a flash, then my surroundings changed. I was a realm of darkness, pure darkness. Not even I could see anything, it was just black. But then that shadow shape I saw once very long ago appeared.

    ¡°Isaac, you¡¯ve done well. Vampires now have a real presence in the world, or at least this part of it, and its existence hasn¡¯t been revealed. Now, you might be wondering why I summoned you suddenly. It¡¯s just to tell you a few things. First, how long it¡¯s been since you fell asleep. This might come as a shock to you, but please remain calm. It has been four hundred eighty six years.¡± Gebados said. I could only stare at him in shock, as my anxieties came true. I had been worried that it might have been a very long time, worried about what could happen in those years.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry Isaac, not much has changed, and nobody important died or anything, although those kings from before were destined to become normal vampires, but it will be possible for you to change that in the future. I won¡¯t say anything, as you will discover how yourself when you gain that ability. Now for the second thing. I want you to leave this place. You should go to the other continents, since you¡¯re already the most powerful being on this peninsula. So I want you to go and experience this world. Also, I don¡¯t want you to take everyone with you. If all the powerful ones leave, then it will leave this place in a weakened position, so I will allow you to take one companion with you.¡± Gebados said. I could only take one person with me? I was slightly unwilling to do that.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you don¡¯t need to leave right away. You can spend another hundred years or so here, if you want. Now, enough chit chat. Go back to your friends and family, they¡¯ve missed you. And one last thing. This new form of yours is the true form of vampires. After living for some time, all vampires will enter the cocoon and evolve, although the amount of time is different for everyone. You waited the shortest amount of time, but you also spent the most inside it. There will also be small differences in appearance. Goodbye for now.¡± Gebados said with a smile that should be indistinguishable, since he was made of shadows. Then, my surroundings changed again. I found myself at the same place I was at before, just falling. I flapped my wings, to prevent myself from creating a crater in the wilderness, then set out towards home.

    With my newfound strength and huge wings, I flew faster than ever before. It didn¡¯t take long before I saw my castle in the distance. It looked more aged than it did before, the stone bricks were slightly darker in colour, but it was clearly bustling with activity. The old town surrounding the castle had turned into a city. It had grown far larger than before. Once more, I flapped my wings, causing a sonic boom, as I zoomed towards Sanguine Regis. I wasn¡¯t being particularly stealthy, so I was noticed by some of the stronger beings of the castle. I decided to land on a large balcony.

    It took only a moment before I was surrounded by familiar beings, but they were all staring at me in fear. One man decided to stand forwards, the ever same Erwin.

    ¡°What are you?!¡± He shouted at me. I could only smirk at their wariness.

    ¡°You don¡¯t recognise me?¡± My voice resonated. Everyone was startled, including me. My voice was gravelly and deep, very unlike my normal, crisp, yet deep voice.

    A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.

    ¡°Well, I am still in this form.¡± I said. Suddenly my body was covered in blood, while it started shrinking slightly, and my wings gradually disappeared. As the blood disappeared, my same old body appeared. I was even wearing same old, torn clothing and armour I was wearing before. As my form had appeared, everyone was taken aback. Tears appeared in some eyes, and my lovely wives were almost crying. Amongst my four wives, Amelia fell to her knees, losing all strength in her legs. It only took a moment for her to start crying.

    ¡°Five hundred years! You were gone for almost five hundred years! Where were you, we didn¡¯t even know if you were alive! Every semblance of a connection to you was lost, the magic in the life seals disappeared! We thought you died! We thought that you quietly succumbed to your injuries! I missed you! I missed you with all my heart! The only reason I¡¯m still alive is because Joan kept me alive!¡± She cried out. Her tears were running like the flood. I slowly walked to her, then knelt in front of her, as she cried in relief. I took her chin in my hand, then gently kissed her.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry my dear, there was no danger. I just evolved, shedding my old shell. That¡¯s the reason the connection was lost. But Amelia, you must promise me one thing. If I was to one day die, then you cannot kill yourself! Only after you lived such a long life that there isn¡¯t any worth to living may you die!¡± I said, a stern look on my face. Amelia looked at me for a while, as she calmed her crying, but she couldn¡¯t get herself to say yes to my request. In the end, all she did was nod.

    Then I stood back up again, and turned to look at my large family. There were a few new faces around. Apparently, Kato and Lilia had a child not too long ago. He still wasn¡¯t full grown. Little Isaac was still his young self, and beside him was that young girl he turned. So much time had passed. That little girl was over five hundred years old now. I myself was five hundred eighty six years old, this year. I was very much conscious of how much time had passed, as I had in fact never been fully asleep in my cocoon. There had always been that tint of awareness, which very much made it an unbearable hell. While I was in the cocoon, I didn¡¯t know who I was, what I was, but I did that I was. That I existed, and that I was there.

    ¡°Everyone, it has been four hundred eighty six years since I disappeared. All these years I spent in a blood cocoon, evolving from a larva, to a butterfly. That form you saw, was my true form, the form which all vampires will take after a certain amount of time. For me it was on my one hundredth year of life, but for you it will a bit longer, although you won¡¯t spend as much time in the cocoon as I did.¡± I informed everyone there.

    After we were finished on the balcony, we went to one of the living rooms. There we talked about the affairs of the last half a millennia. All of the original Purebloods had long entered the A rank, and the weakest of them were at the late stage. On this entire continent, not even deserving a real name, we were now by far the strongest power. My plans of increasing the natural energy levels in Kalderon and Tabarut had succeeded, and had expanded to the two other countries which had joined my sphere of power. The four kingdoms had also fused into one, becoming The Sorcerer Empire of Marestir. The population was around 70 billion, and covered about 1.1 billion square miles in land. It certainly was the largest power on the continent.

    Now, the next goal would be to unify the continent under one banner. This was a large task, but the Sorcerer Empire of Marestir was more than capable of it, as its military strength was already the strongest, with the help of increased natural energy. It now held largest quantities of natural energy, which hugely confused the other kingdoms and empires, and even more frightened them. The four kingdoms of Kalderon, Tabarut, Graywich and Vasaal, were known as the weakest kingdoms, with the puniest natural energy. Especially the central kingdoms of Kalderon and Tabarut, but now those four kingdoms, turned empire, had the largest amount.

    Shortly after the founding of Marestir, a few other kingdoms had marched past the wilderness to silence the fools, but they had been met with total devastation. Reports told of three four fearful beings leading a small army of crimson clad knights. According to the reports, the four generals had all been legendary beings. One was the legendary Valkyrie, two other were the horrifying Dread Lord and Dread Knight, while the other was the fearful High Demon. The native forces had been outnumbered by at least twenty to one, but the invading forces were still devastated. Of course, the four generals were present with me now as well, and were in fact the source of the reports.

    ¡°Everyone, now that we are finally together again, I want to tell you something. After I woke up, I met Dread Father once more. He told me to leave this place, in the name of experiencing the real world, and I¡¯m only allowed to take one companion with me. Of course, it¡¯s only temporary, we will all meet again. As for who that one companion is, it will the one who¡¯s been with me the longest, the first person I ever met after being reborn, the first person to love me for what I am. Amelia, you will be the one coming with me, on this journey of ours. Then, let it be known! On this day, one hundred years from now, I will leave!¡± I announced. Everyone was surprised, and unwilling. Amelia was the one who took it the best, but she was still hesitant to leave everything behind.

    ¡°Everyone, you are my family, and I know you are unwilling, but these were the direct orders of Gebados, the God of Death, Darkness and Shadows. I do not have a choice, so let¡¯s just enjoy these one hundred years we have together. And besides, I¡¯ll probably only be gone for a few centuries or a millennia. We are immortal, so time means nothing to us.¡± I said. Everyone was still unwilling, but they accepted it, and decided to enjoy the time we had left.

    ¡°Alright Isaac. You¡¯re like a brother to me, and I will miss you, as I did these last four hundred something years, but so be it. For now, come here and meet my son, the first Pureblood born vampire! His name is Emanuel, and he¡¯ll be four years old soon.¡± Kato told me. I knelt down next to the little boy and pet his head.

    ¡°Hi there little Emanuel. I¡¯m your Uncle Isaac, as well as your progenitor. So you could say I¡¯m your grandpa as well!¡± I said. Emanuel looked at me with wide eyes. He had heard the tales and legends, but he¡¯d never seen the Great Me before, so he was excited.

    ¡°My name is Emanuel, Uncle Isaac. It¡¯s great to meet you!¡± The little boy said, slightly shyly. I couldn¡¯t help, but to smile at him. He was a very cute boy. After our reunion was finished, we had a huge feast, to celebrate my return.

    End of prologue.

    And there we have it. The prologue to book 2. Did you like it? The planning for that other novel is also going forwards, so you can expect it in the near future, I hope.

    Anyways, thanks for reading, and please review and rate :)

 Book 2, Chapter 1: Valen, Pureblood

    Chapter 1: Valen, Pureblood

    After the feast was over, there were many things I wanted to learn. After all, I had been gone for almost half a millennia. Many things were bound to have changed. For example, the Sorcerer Empire of Marestir. I had never made any plans for an empire, but apparently it happened anyway. The empire was formed a few years after what was referred to as the Great War, where many women lost their husband and sons. The total casualties had been enormous, beyond count. But in the end, the Alliance had won, against all odds. How they had made the Drake surrender was a mystery to many, but there were few people from then who were even still alive, so it would be forever a mystery. The name Marestir had been chosen by the Vampire Council, just before the founding, and it had been called the Sorcerer Empire, because of the magic which allowed the natural energy levels to rise. On the entire Peninsula, there was truly no other power which deserved to be called as such.

    I also learned what happened to the Drake, whose name I never learned. Apparently after he recovered his Dragon Gem, he evolved and sprouted two wings from his back, evolving from a Land Drake to a Winged Drake. He also grew in power, to reach the middle stage. Luckily he kept his promise to me, and didn¡¯t betray me. If I had to fight him as a middle stage S ranker, then I would lose. Whether or not I could win now is unknown though. If he had reached the SS rank, then it would at the very least be a close fight, but if he hadn¡¯t reached that stage yet, then I would win easily.

    If he was a normal Drake, then I doubt he could ever reach that level though, but I doubt that he¡¯s normal, after all he evolved after getting his Dragon Gem. It is likely that he belongs to some Dragon Clan or something, and will eventually evolve into a Dragon. Dragons are very mysterious beings. Not much is known about them, so it is entirely possible that there exists some powerful Dragon Clans, which give birth to Drakes, which then have to evolve into a full fledged Dragon.

    As for the Drake himself, I could sense him. Well, I couldn¡¯t directly sense him, but his general direction. I felt that he was an extremely long distance away, so pinpointing his exact location was impossible.

    But that didn¡¯t matter. For now, I had something more important to do. I had to meet Valen, and finally turn him into a vampire. After I returned, he was immediately notified, and had returned from whatever country he was in. While I was gone, he had been in charge of all assassin operations, and would most likely continue to do so. It had been only one day since I returned, and he had already arrived, via the portals.

    ¡°Well, you took your sweet time.¡± Valen said with a slightly irritated smirk on his mouth. It took me a moment to recognise him. He had aged. Compared to the almost middle aged man from before, he now had slightly greyed hair, and a few new wrinkles. Well, it was to be expected, after all, he had lived for a few hundred years longer than his lifetime was supposed to allow. It seemed like vampire blood wouldn¡¯t make you completely immortal, just slow your aging. Valen now looked like he was in his fifties, so he probably would be able to last another few hundred years, if I hadn¡¯t returned.

    ¡°Sorry, I was stuck in a cocoon, becoming a monster.¡± I said with an awkward smile. He looked at me, and chuckled.

    ¡°No, no, no, you were already a monster before. Now you are something else, a new race altogether. Before you were just something more than human. But anyways, would you mind showing me that new form of yours.¡± Valen, said. I silently nodded to his request. Changing into my true form was a simple thing. It didn¡¯t require anything, but a thought. My body started growing in size, until I was over two meters tall. My hair grew white, and two large wings grew from my back. My claws grew to the size, where they could easily tear a bear apart.

    I stood before Valen, showing my true self. Valen looked at me with a smirk.

    ¡°Menacing.¡± He said. ¡°If my theory is correct, then it won¡¯t be long until you reach this form either. The same with Rommel and Erwin, and everyone who is about to reach rank S. When you evolve into this form, you shed your former body. It gets dissolved, and becomes the cocoon. The only thing left will be your soul, your mind. Then this new body gets shaped by your soul, and raw power. After I fought the Drake, it triggered my evolution. In that fight I used every ounce of my power, even going, as far as using a power which my body couldn¡¯t handle. That power caused me to reach a power far beyond my body¡¯s strength. Thus, using that power destroyed me from the inside, but it also triggered the evolution, which saved me. Well, I probably wouldn¡¯t have died, but my hibernation would have been much longer, since the damage wasn¡¯t just on my body, but soul as well.

    Since you are at the peak of rank A, you are at the limit of your body. After you reach rank S, it won¡¯t be long until you evolve.¡± I said with my growling voice.

    ¡°I see,¡± Valen said, then I went back into my human form, and sat on a chair. Valen sat opposite me.

    ¡°You know Isaac, back when I met you, I offered you a position in my organization, as well as the leader position when you one day managed to surpass me. But honestly, I never thought you would get to that point in my lifetime, so I was basically just making you my heir. Never would I have suspected that you reached that point while I still had around two hundred years left to live. And then you offered me immortality, even though it took you over five hundred years to ever hold your word. Now Isaac, hurry and do it! I¡¯ve grown tired of being stuck at the peak of A rank. I have lived for almost seven hundred years now, and for the last few hundred years, I haven¡¯t had the spot of strongest anymore, because all your vampires have long surpassed me. A few hundred years ago, I could have killed every single one of your vampires if I wanted to, but now I can¡¯t even fight one of them. So Isaac, please fulfil that centuries old promise of yours.¡± Valen said, impatiently. I stood up from my seat, and walked over to him. I leaned close to his head, then his neck.

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry it took so long Valen. I can kind of understand how you¡¯ve had it these last years. Although I haven¡¯t felt weak or anything, but I was lonely. These five hundred years, I was stuck in a cocoon, still awake. There was no one there, but me. I was all alone.¡± I said, as I bit into his neck. I sucked his blood, savouring the taste, until the light in his eyes started to dim. Then I stopped, and gave him the venom. It took only a moment, then he fell unconscious. After the famous one hour, he woke up again. Being the cold blooded killer he was, he had no qualms about killing two random girls, and having had over five hundred years to get used to the idea didn¡¯t hinder him either.

    ¡°What a weird feeling this is, killing someone by drinking their blood. In my lifetime I¡¯ve killed more people than I can count, but this is a first. The taste surprises me though.¡± Valen said. I nodded.

    ¡°Indeed, the taste of blood can make one go crazy. When I first became what I am, I slaughtered a whole village in my craze, and when I came to, I felt nothing. It was like the humanity in me had completely disappeared. At the time, I only thought about my own survival. Perhaps the only humane part left in me, back then, was my family. Amelia was from that village too.¡± I said. Valen looked at me weirdly.

    ¡°You slaughtered her entire village, probably including her family, then turned her into a monster, and she was okay with it? And even married you?¡± Valen said, slightly unwilling to believe it.

    ¡°I wasn¡¯t the only one to lose my humanity that night. Amelia also shed her human bonds then, and couldn¡¯t care less about some humans. Maybe she was a bit angry about her family, who knows?¡± I said. Valen nodded in understanding.

    ¡°I understand that you intend to leave this continent in a hundred years, and you¡¯re only taking Amelia with you. Why is that, and what do you intend to do?¡± Valen asked. ¡°The Dread Father ordered me to go into the real world, and garner some real experience. After all, there isn¡¯t really anyone that can match me here, but if I go out into the real world, then there¡¯ll be countless people stronger than me, once more. And Gebados said that I can only bring one person with me, most likely so that I don¡¯t have a plethora of S rankers under my command. What about you? Now that you¡¯re a vampire, you can reach S rank as well, and considering you¡¯ve been at the peak stage for over five hundred years, you could reach S rank as soon as tomorrow.¡± I said. Valen looked up for a while, thinking, then he lowered his head to meet my eyes.

    ¡°I think I might do the same as you. Go out and explore the world, see what it has to offer. After all, this world we live in is so huge that no one even knows how big it is. I¡¯ll probably leave the control of the Shadowblades to Erik, and when you leave, I¡¯ll go as well.¡± Valen said. I nodded in understanding.

    ¡°I see. Maybe we will meet in our travels, but just remember to come back here, and don¡¯t die.¡± I said with a smirk. ¡°Of course.¡± Valen replied. We kept talking for a while, and enjoyed a few glasses of Blood Wine. Blood Wine, was a special wine, developed by our mages. They used magic to preserve the blood, and used it together with various things, like grapes and other fruits, to make the Blood Wine. Only the best quality blood was used, and it went through various tests, to assure it was qualifying enough. Needlessly to say, it was extremely delicious, but rather hard to make, and had to go through a long aging process. It was also the only thing capable of giving us an alcoholic high. For the Purebloods, it was always easy to get, but for normal vampires, they could only get it for special occasions, since it was very expensive.

    After we were finished talking, I went to find Little Isaac. I wanted to meet the parents of his wife. It only took me a while, then we went to their residence together. They didn¡¯t live in the castle, but outside in the city. They said they didn¡¯t want to live in a castle, it was too different from what they were used to. In the past, all vampires used to live in the castle, but nowadays, it wasn¡¯t so. Many vampires lived in the city, and even more lived in the various other cities around the Empire. They had even spread outside, into the other kingdoms and empires on the peninsula. There wasn¡¯t a single kingdom or empire, where the Coldblood Clan didn¡¯t have some presence now. During the past centuries, our wealth had also grown to an astronomical extent. If we wanted to, we could probably buy a whole kingdom. The Coldbloods were now truly a household name. Even though it wasn¡¯t officially announced or anything, it was basically fact that we were in control of the entire Empire. This wasn¡¯t just because we were very rich and powerful, but because the Novo Corps and Crimson order wasn¡¯t a secret anymore, and it was publicly known that they belonged to the Coldbloods.

    The Novo Corps was known to be the strongest magic organization to ever exist on the continent, and the Crimson Order was the strongest fighters to ever exist on the continent. Through the rigorous training the Order went through, they even had several hundred Knights at the Peak A level, and they could even rival S rankers somehow. They were known to be even stronger than the Knights of other counties, but no one knew how it was possible. After all, just transcending one rank required rigorous training, but the Crimson Knights could even transcend two ranks.

    The reason that this was known, was because of a war that was going on with another alliance. The war wasn¡¯t a big one, and there weren¡¯t many large fights yet. But the enemy alliance had sent a group numbering one hundred Peak A rankers, which was most of the Peak A rankers the alliance even had. The reason they had sent them, was because the two sides had scheduled a fight, and the winning side would get five border cities from the loser. The rule was that they had to send their hundred strongest fighters. The enemy side gladly accepted, because they thought that the only advantage the other side had was size. The enemy alliance was quite a bit smaller the Marestir, but they were sure that their fighters would be slightly stronger individually, since they were probably more experienced. But when the fight started, they learned otherwise. The fight only lasted a few minutes, and the Alliance side was completely annihilated, while there wasn¡¯t even a single loss on Marestir¡¯s side.

    It was after that event that the true power of Marestir was revealed. The true fighting power of Marestir was far above what any of the other kingdoms possessed. Even though, one of the kingdoms had sent a force against Marestir a few years prior and had been utterly defeated. They thought that it was most likely that that force wasn¡¯t even from Marestir, but probably someone from another continent that was sightseeing or something. The reason was because they had been creatures that shouldn¡¯t exist on the Peninsula. But after they saw the power of the Crimson Knights, they were willing to believe that the Marestir Empire even possessed Demons and Valkyries. Those Knights clearly had the power of a middle stage S ranker, so magical beings wouldn¡¯t be too weird, especially after the natural energy levels rose in the empire.

    Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    After walking for a while, we arrived in a not so modest house, in the city. So much for living a simple life. Little Isaac led Katy and me to the door, and walked in. The guards didn¡¯t stop us, and just saluted. They were all human, so they didn¡¯t recognise me, but they knew who Isaac was. Moments later, we met with two elders. The man looked very old, maybe around eighty, while the woman looked to be sixty or so. In reality, they were both century old immortals though.

    ¡°What brings you here, Isaac?¡± The old man asked his child looking elder. Little Isaac stepped forwards to introduce me. ¡°My Uncle returned. I¡¯ve come to introduce you to him.¡± He said with his childlike voice, next to his slightly older looking wife. The old man looked shocked as he stared at me.

    ¡°The Lord has returned?¡± He said with a hoarse voice. ¡°My name is Isaac Coldblood, and I¡¯m the uncle of Little Isaac, as well as the Master of the Coldblood Clan. I¡¯m sure you¡¯ve heard of me, while I was gone, but let¡¯s get to know each other either way.¡± I said, introducing myself. The old couple was clearly shocked. The saw a young looking guy that couldn¡¯t be older than twenty, but they knew that he was even older than they themselves.

    ¡°Lord Isaac, my humble name is Coyle Dunler, and my wife here is Lucy Dunler. It is an honour to be the parents in laws of your nephew.¡± The old man Coyle said. He was a very humble man, showing a lot of respect, but that was only natural, as I was an existence above all others when it came to vampires. I nodded to him, then we sat down. We talked for a good hour or two, and enjoyed another bottle of Blood Wine. Coyle managed to get a bit intoxicated, but I didn¡¯t feel very much. The effect of the alcohol wasn¡¯t as strong in Purebloods, as it was in normal vampires.

    A few days later, we held a council meeting, where I truly learned of everything that happened in the past. I was informed of the small, standstill war between our Empire and the Alliance. So far, they didn¡¯t bother to expand the Empire, since they wanted me to return first. Erwin was standing up from his seat, about to inform me about the situation.

    ¡°The war between the Sorcerer Empire of Marestir, and the Alliance of the Four Kingdoms began a few decades after our Empire¡¯s founding. Not many battles were fought, but there were a few, the largest of which was the battle between two hundred peak A rankers. As you know, we won that battle. There have been a few small bouts here and there, but nothing major. The Alliance has tried to make a peace treaty between us, but we always refused.¡± Erwin reported. I sat still, thinking, for a while.

    ¡°The Alliance of Four Kingdoms shall be conquered in ten years. We¡¯ll ready our armies, and march past the wilderness and take them by force. We¡¯ll take them one by one, until none are left. But this Alliance dared to wage war upon us, so we¡¯ll set an example. Do not kill the Royal Families, instead take them prisoner. Then, when we¡¯ve conquered the four kingdoms of the Alliance, we execute all the men publicly, and make the beautiful women into slaves.¡± I said. After we conquered those four kingdoms, we would officially have stepped beyond the wilderness, into the rest of the continent. Moving the troops wasn¡¯t a big problem, since Kato had developed a mass teleportation array, which could teleport an army without problem. Such a huge teleportation array wouldn¡¯t have been possible on the first stage of Energy Manipulation Magic, but Kato had managed to get to the next stage in my absence, making him the first Sage of our peninsula.

    There was a lot of mystery behind the later magic ranks in our continent, but Kato had done some research, and found that they were commonly referred to as Sage, Grand Sage and Arch Sage. They corresponded to the S rank, SS rank and SSS rank. What came after that, he didn¡¯t know yet.

    The next ten years I spent mostly in solitude, training my magic. I only spent a little bit of time with the others. Since Kato had already made it to the second stage, I felt I needed to get there as quickly as possible. While I was trapped in the cocoon, I used what consciousness I had to practise, but I didn¡¯t get very far, since I was in a slightly dazed state. All in all, I still hadn¡¯t made it there yet after ten years, out of the basic stage, to the novice stage. In the past ten years, we had waged war against the Alliance of Four Kingdoms. The advantage had been vastly in our favour, and we had swiftly won every battle. There had only been a few rogue battles that we lost, but they were few and far in-between. Except when we lost a battle, we never once lost more than half our forces, and it was very rare for us to lose that much. The last battle had just finished, and I was on my way to the Royal Capital of the Festiz Kingdom, to meet the Royal Families. Through teleportation, it didn¡¯t take very long to get there.

    Eventually, we arrived at the plaza of the capital. In the middle of the plaza, there were a few hundred people on a stage. They were the previous royal families. Around them, there was an uncountable amount of people, waiting to see what would happen. I walked up to the platform and faced the people.

    ¡°People of the previous Kingdom of Festiz, I would like to welcome you as citizens of the Sorcerer Empire of Marestir. My name is Isaac Coldblood, the head of the Coldblood Clan, one of the founders of the Marestir Empire. You may recognise my name as the first head of the Coldbloods, who brought our family to glory, the one whom no one saw after the Great War, for almost five hundred years. You may have thought him dead, but that is not so, for I stand before you here!¡± I said, my voice thundering for miles on end.

    ¡°For the past five hundred years, I have been training quietly, and a good while ago, I reached the SS rank. Now that I have reached the SS rank, I am an absolutely unparalleled existence on our peninsula! Therefore, I hereby name this continent the Marestir Peninsula, and vow that it shall be conquered completely by my Empire in the next few hundred years!¡± I said, my voice thundering even farther, for thousands of miles. Several people even fell to their knees, as they couldn¡¯t take it. A few others fainted, while some of the weakest and sickest people died. After my speech was over, I turned around to face the previous Royal Family.

    ¡°Royal Families of the Alliance of Four Kingdoms, you have committed treason against the Empire, and dared to wage war against us. For such daring acts, there are only two possible results. The most beautiful of the females shall be taken and sold as slaves!¡± I said, loud enough so that anyone could hear. Immediately, the soldiers came and grabbed the women who had been selected, and dragged them away under their cries.

    ¡°And for the rest, it¡¯s death.¡± I said, as I stared at the remaining people. There were still quite a few women tied together with the men, not deemed pretty enough to live. I stepped off the stage, together with all the guards and anyone else who was standing there, except the perpetrators. As soon as everyone had stepped off the platform, the prisoners blew up, and splattered blood all over the stage, but luckily we made a barrier to keep it from going off the stage. The spectators were flabbergasted at the sight, and a few women even screamed. People had seen me flick my hand, and suddenly everyone exploded. This was the power of an SS ranker! He could just wave his hand and instantly kill several hundreds of people, whom most of the males were A rankers, and even some of the women.

    The very same evening, the females were sold off to whoever wanted them. We bought a few ourselves, but most of them went to other people, mostly people who had some quarrel with the previous Royal Families. People had come from all over to watch them get executed, and to buy the females. There weren¡¯t only people from the Festiz Kingdom, but from all the other countries of the Alliance and even more. After the news of my return spread, several peak experts around the continent rushed over here to check it out, unwilling to believe it.

    At this moment, a group of thirty different peak A rankers stood before me. ¡°You say that you are Lord Isaac, and even an SS ranker, right? If that¡¯s the case, then defeating us should be easy enough, right?¡± A big looking man said. I smirked at him.

    ¡°Indeed, I could kill all of you quite easily.¡± I said. The big man was a little bit taken aback. He had expected me to be a bit nervous. ¡°Well then, if that¡¯s the case, then how about you spar against all us for a bit? We¡¯ll allow anything, except killing. Although, you should know that we have all practised the special methods of the elements, so are as strong as an early S ranker. How about, just how strong are you exactly?¡± The big man asked.

    ¡°Well, there¡¯s no hurt in telling you. I¡¯m at the verge of getting to the middle stage of the SS rank.¡± I said. I didn¡¯t tell them that I was in fact only at the verge of reaching the middle stage of the S rank, but my personal power was at the SS rank, so it didn¡¯t matter.

    ¡°Almost at the middle stage? Alright, just remember, it¡¯s only a spar, we won¡¯t try to kill you, so I hope you treat us the same.¡± The big guy said. ¡°Of course.¡± I smirked at him.

    We went out and found a large courtyard. A lot of people that heard our conversation followed us, to observe. If I could defeat these thirty S rivalling experts, who had gathered from all around the continent in due haste, then I truly would be an unrivalled expert.

    The fight started, and the big guy was the first to charge. I easily avoided his attack, before I got attacked by another three. Of course, I also avoided them. A few seconds in, all of them were attacking me at the same time, while I was still effortlessly avoiding their attacks. Then some of them started throwing knifes at me, but I caught them in mid-air, and threw them back, hitting their hands. After a while of jumping around, and redirecting knifes, I suddenly stopped, alarming my ¡®opponents¡¯.

    ¡°This should be enough, right?¡± I said, made a surge of mana, blowing the thirty peak rankers away, effortlessly. They all landed about a dozen meters away from me, and stared at me, flabbergasted.

    ¡°Was that enough?¡± I asked. The big man stared at me in shock. Until now I had been dodging them completely, but hadn¡¯t attacked a single time. This didn¡¯t quite require an SS ranker, if you were skilled enough, then you could do that at the middle or late stage of rank S. But to casually blow thirty S rankers away, without effort, was something that required immense strength. You had to be far, far stronger than the opponent. Not even a peak S ranker might be able to do that, but for an SS ranker it was simple.

    ¡°I believe you, Lord Isaac.¡± The big man said. I smiled at him. ¡°Good. You show promise so you should join me. I could give all of you a good position in the Crimson Order, and give you a method to reach the S rank, so if you¡¯re interested, go to the Imperial Capital before ninety years. Someone there will lead you to our headquarters.¡± I said, before I left them behind. After the celebration was over, we once again left for home, where I would resume my training.

    End of chapter 1.

    Well, there we go. Chapter 1 is finally out. I''m sorry it took so long, but I ahd a visit from family, and my cousing stayed in my room, so I couldn''t write very well. I tried to use every opportunity I got to write, but it took kinda long. Hopefully it won''t take as long next time...

    And thanks for reading, and please rate/review :)

    or send a donation...

 Chapter 2: Sema, Kima, Vepas

    Chapter 2: Sema, Kima, Vepas

    It had been fifty years since we conquered the Alliance. In these fifty years we had also conquered several other nations. A few nations even willingly surrendered to us, not willing to fight with a power that had a single entity that could destroy them all. But many countries weren¡¯t willing to give up that easily, and fought bitterly to the end. But naturally, not a single of these countries managed to last many years. At this moment, almost half the continent belonged to us, after the fifty year crusade.

    At the moment, there weren¡¯t any wars going on, everyone was at peace. I had held a speech a while ago, saying that I wouldn¡¯t try to conquer any more land for a while now. This allowed the remaining three empires that held the other half of the continent to relax. They couldn¡¯t believe how lucky they were, because they hadn¡¯t fought a single battle with us so far.

    There were only forty years left until I would leave this place, and I didn¡¯t want to use them for war. At this moment, I was meeting with the three emperors of the remaining empires. The Emperor of Marestir was also here. To the people of Marestir, I had become much like a god, and the Coldbloods had become pretty much a religion. The ¡®religion¡¯ was called the Sanguine Church, and the Crimson Order were the holy knights. Kato, Erwin and Amelia were three of the big shots in the church. Erwin was the Sanguine Lord, the leader of the Crimson Order, Kato was Sanguine Sage, the pope of the church. Amelia was the Sanguine Mother, the first of Isaac¡¯s women, and the most powerful one as well, as she bore the first transformation. However, only a few select persons knew what that means, to bear the first transformation. It meant that she was the first person I turned, and had the most powerful vampiric blood, except for me. This had allowed her to become an S ranker very early. Only Erwin and Rommel became S rankers before her, but that was because they were turned as A rankers, and because they held a rigorous training regimen.

    Kato was the Sanguine Sage, because first, he was the first Sage of the continent, and second, because he thought it might be fun. After a few centuries of life and studying, he thought it might be fun to lead a religious order, so he signed right up, when people began treating us like a religion.

    There were various priests, of various ranks that would preach throughout the churches. When you got to certain rank in priesthood, you would be inducted into the Coldblood name, becoming a part of the Coldblood. The church also worshipped Gebados, as the God of Death, and I was treated like his ¡®un¡¯holy sun.

    The four Emperors of the Marestir Peninsula were all looking at me expectantly. The Emperor of Marestir was the first to stand to talk. ¡°Everyone, prepare yourselves to listen to his Holiness preposition.¡± He said, and sat back down. I shot a look at him, before standing up to talk myself.

    ¡°As you know, the last forty years have been spent in a crusade, where we the Marestir Empire, and the Sanguine Church have conquered about half of the continent. Your three empires are currently the only ones left, outside of our own. But I have decided to stop the crusade for now. I want the next few years to be spent in peace.¡± I said. The three emperors looked at me in surprise, but also in disbelief. It was hard for them to believe that the Great Crusade that had put the entire continent in turmoil, would stop so suddenly.

    ¡°How can we believe you? You might be setting up a trap, and when we are unprepared, you will destroy us!¡± One of the emperors said. Both I and the Emperor looked at him mockingly. The current Emperor was a Pureblood Vampire, named Artis Marestir. He was the Immortal Emperor of the Sorcerer Empire of Marestir. He had reached A rank long before I turned him, and was now close to getting to S rank. If he was to fight all three of the other emperors at the same time, he would easily win, he didn¡¯t even put them close to the same level as him.

    ¡°Why would we deceive you? We are easily able to destroy all three of you empires. We have several S rankers on our side, and you don¡¯t even have one true S ranker. You¡¯re not a threat to us, so we don¡¯t need to deceive you. And believe me, this peace isn¡¯t permanent. In a few hundred years, we will resume the crusade, but you needn¡¯t worry, for you will all be dead by then.¡± I said. ¡°I¡¯m just telling you so that it is an official peace agreement.¡± As I said these words, I released my heavy aura upon them, making them very much feel how truly powerless they were, and paling their faces.

    After our little meeting was over, Artis and I returned back home. Artis went to his Imperial Palace, and I returned to Sanguine Regis. At the castle, and in Bloodmoon City, we held a feast to celebrate the peace agreement, not that the wars had any effect on Sanguine Regis and Bloodmoon.

    Thus thirty years passed, and I had ten years left before I would leave. For the last ninety years, my wives, except Amelia, had been very depressed. The thought that I would leave them, and only take Amelia with me. The fact that I loved Amelia the most, that the others couldn¡¯t compare. Even the fact that she was the most powerful of them. It depressed them, and made them sad. It made them feel unloved and unwanted. Because of this, I wanted to leave them with one last gift before I went on my journey, so that they wouldn¡¯t be too lonely. I would gift them, Serana, Alicia and Natalia, with one child each, to accompany them for the next few centuries, until my return.

    Thus, the three of them were with me in the bed chamber. They were all naked, and excited. It wasn¡¯t that we didn¡¯t have sex often, but today it was only them, no Amelia, and they would be getting a child. I first went over to the oldest of them, my first wife, Serana. I kissed her deeply as I caressed her body, until my hand found itself massaging her breasts. One hand was caressing her cheek, while the other massaged her breasts, carefully fondling them. While we were making out, my caressing hand made its way down to her lower area, and started to fondle her vagina. She quickly started getting wet. Alicia and Natalia made their way over to us, and started kissing me all over. Natalia made her way over to my penis, and put it in her mouth.

    Serana was moaning, while I was massaging her insides with two fingers. After she had gotten wet enough, I took my penis out of Natalia¡¯s mouth, and placed it outside her pussy. I quickly thrusted it inside her, and started fucking her roughly. She moaned loudly, and it wouldn¡¯t be weird if she could be heard in many parts of the castle. She tightly hugged me, as my cock was going in and out of her, repeatedly. Alicia was massaging her boobs, while Natalia was playing with her butthole, sticking a small pinkie in her.

    When I felt that I was about to cum, I reached into my mind, finding that age old magic that hadn¡¯t even been used once. As I activated it, my cock grew a size larger, and my body started glowing lightly, especially around my groin.

    As I came, the glow gathered in my groin, then rapidly disappeared, as my sperm made its way inside Serana. As I came inside her, the glow moved to her body, and she started to grow lightly, especially around the area where her womb was. She was screaming loudly as my penis grew larger. After all the sperm had left my body, my penis went back to it¡¯s normal size.

    ¡°You are now pregnant my love, and believe me, I do love all of you.¡± I said, trying to reassure her. Serana placed her hand on her stomach, and nodded softly, a happy smile on her face.

    Then I went to Alicia. She was already thoroughly wet, so there was no need for foreplay. I grabbed her hips, and placed her on her knees. I immediately put my penis inside her, and started to thrust. Alicia didn¡¯t spare a moment, and immediately started moaning loudly. I massaged her breasts with my hands, while making out with Natalia. Using the reproduction magic was very tiring for the mother, so Serana had already fallen asleep.

    I kept fucking Alicia for a full hour, making her cum several times. I roughly pounded her behind, making her fluids spray all over. The bed sheets below us were soaking wet in her fluids. Then finally, I felt I was about to cum. Once more my body started to glow, especially around my groin, but my semen sprayed out, into her pussy, the glow followed, and covered her body, especially her stomach.

    I turned her around to face me, then deeply kissed her. ¡°You¡¯re pregnant too now love, and please, never think that I don¡¯t love you.¡± I said. Alicia also nodded with an adorable smile on her face. Then she too passed out. Then I turned to Natalia, my latest wife. Kissed her, while playing with one of her ears with one hand, and playing with her small tail with the other.

    ¡°Now it¡¯s just us two.¡± I said smilingly. Natalia nodded, and sat down, spreading her legs. ¡°Please fuck me hard.¡± She said with an adorable smile. I crawled over to her, and quickly pounded my cock inside her. She screamed loudly, not waking the others up somehow, while I fucked her like never before. I kept fucking her, until I came, then we changed position, from missionary to doggy style. Then I fucked her once more, making her moan even louder, and orgasm several times more. After another hour or so, I came inside her again. Then we changed position again, to cowgirl, having her sit on top of me. She was going up and down, while I held her hips, assisting her.

    Another hour, and a few sex positions later, I felt ready to come once more, and also felt sexually satisfied. Thus, the glow appeared once more, as I came inside. The glow followed the semen, and went to her body, glowing especially brightly around her womb.

    ¡°Now Alexander will have a sibling. Although he¡¯s already quite old.¡± I said, as I kissed her once more. ¡°Remember, I love all four of my wives, you included. If I had a choice, I would take all of you with me, but I can¡¯t. But I¡¯ll be back.¡± I said, trying to reassure her as much as I could. Tears appeared in her eyes, as she nodded. Then she looked down to her stomach, and she smiled.

    ¡°Finally I can have a child with you. I do love Alexander, but he isn¡¯t truly yours. This child will make the next years a bit brighter.¡± She said, before falling asleep.

    Then, another three years passed. It took exactly three years for a vampire to give birth, no more, no less. Thus, on the same day we had sex, three years later, it was time for my three wives to give birth. Naturally, they all gave birth at the same time, but all three children weren¡¯t born at the exact same time though. Even though, I couldn¡¯t help but be a bit worried, as my first children were born, everything went flawlessly. At the end of the day, I had gained one son, and two daughters. The three mothers were in a room together, with the children, when I came through the door, Amelia at my back. Amelia couldn¡¯t help but look with a bit of jealousy, but she knew that she would get the chance on day, but now she just had to wait.

    Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings.

    I walked over to a small bed, where the three half-siblings lied side by side. As I saw them, I couldn¡¯t utter a single word. It was a magical experience, seeing your new-born children like that. The kids looked at me, then smiled. I smiled back at them, and caressed their cheeks, and knelt down to get closer to them.

    ¡°Two girls and a boy. These three, my first children, I must say, I haven¡¯t been this happy in a while. Alright, let¡¯s name them. The boy shall be named Vepas. The girls shall be named Kima and Sema.¡± I said, as I had the happiest smile I had ever showed. It truly was a very happy day.

    The boy, Vepas, belonged to Alicia, while Kima was born from Natalia and Sema from Serana. Kima had two cute furry ears on her head, and a small puffy tail on her butt, a short gray hair. Sema had had short black hair, and red eyes, like all other vampires, while Vepas had barely any hair yet, but he was a bit puffy. I picked Sema up and looked her in the eye. Sema¡¯s response was to grab my nose, and make various baby noises. As they were vampire children, they were naturally strong and had the strength of a few month old baby, but they had yet to learn to crawl, as they were only a few minutes old. After holding her for a while, and kissing Sema, the first born on the forehead, I put her back, and grabbed Kima, the second born. She reacted similarly, by playing with my ear. I held her for a while, playing with her, then kissed her on the right cheek, and placed her back. Then I took Vepas, the youngest of them, and played with him for a while. When I was finished, I kissed him on the left cheek, and put him back.

    Then I walked over to my three wives, while Amelia played with the children. The children took a liking to her as well. ¡°How are you?¡± I asked my wives.

    ¡°We¡¯re fine, don¡¯t worry, Giving birth is relatively easy for us, compared to the average commoner. Something going wrong is almost impossible, and besides, this is already my second time.¡± Natalia, the birth giving expert said. I chuckled at her, as I responded,

    ¡°You say it¡¯s already your second time, but you¡¯re already six hundred years old, and you gave birth to Alexander when you were nineteen¡­¡± I said. Natalia frowned at me. ¡°Hey, you¡¯re not supposed to call a woman old, you know?¡± She said. I laughed at her again.

    ¡°You¡¯re a vampire, you¡¯ll never be old, you know?¡± I said. ¡°Oh right¡­¡± She responded. We spent a while chatting, and playing with the children, until morning arrived, and the kids had to sleep. When a vampire was new-born, they were very sensitive to sunlight, so they had to be kept away from it, so we went to sleep when morning came.

    As the months passed, the babies quickly learned to walk and talk. By the time they were half a year old, they could talk relatively well. Then three years passed, where I spent as much time as possible with my son and daughters, since they wouldn¡¯t be able to see me any more by the time they turned seven.

    One day, as I was sitting in my study, studying the Book of Energy Manipulation, the door suddenly opened. Inside came a small toddler girl with shoulder length hair. She quickly walked over to my desk, and climbed on top of it.

    ¡°Daddy, I¡¯m bored!¡± She exclaimed. The other two were out of town with their mothers, taking care of some business. My wives didn¡¯t just stay home all day and do nothing, they also had things they were in charge of, so from time to time, they would leave on a trip, and they would usually take their child with them.

    ¡°Hello there Sema. If you¡¯re bored, why don¡¯t we go out for a bit?¡± I asked the girl. Sema had her eyes wide open, as she nodded feverishly, then jumped off the desk, and grabbed my hand, as she stormed out the door. Moments later, we found ourselves outside in the forest. Sema was excitingly climbing the trees, and swinging from tree to tree on the vines. Then she seemed to have an idea, as she grabbed a branch, around the length of her body, and broke it off. With the branch in hand, she jumped down, and attacked me. I jokingly let her hit, only to get affected in the slightest.

    ¡°Hmm, did a mosquito land on me?¡± I said, with a puzzled look. Sema looked at me, as if it was the most amazing thing in the world. ¡°Impossible!¡± She screamed, as she accidentally dropped the stick. ¡°Papa, you¡¯re so strong!¡± She said, and jumped up to hug me. I grabbed her and held her, while petting her head, which she seemed to enjoy a lot.

    After a while of playing around, she seemed to have another idea. She ran back over to me, and started jumping around while saying,

    ¡°Hey, hey, daddy, daddy, please take me flying! I wanna fly, I wanna fly!¡± The girl excitedly screamed at me. I didn¡¯t often take them flying, since if I took one, the other two would want to come as well, at the same time. There was no taking turns, they all had to go at the same time, and taking all of them at the same time was out of the question, since holding three kids, while flying was a tad dangerous. If I accidentally dropped them, they would die! But now, only Sema was here, so it was fine.

    ¡°Fine, fine.¡± I said, as I willed my wings to appear. Sema looked on in awe, as my large, blood red wings appeared. No matter how often she saw it, she would always be amazed. When my wings had fully manifested, I grabbed Sema, and flapped my wings. Only a moment later, we were soaring through the clouds. Sema very much enjoyed flying, especially since it was quite rare for her to go flying. The kids could only go flying with me, when the other two were away. We flied around the area for about half an hour, before we went back down again. Then she spent another few hours playing around, until she so tired, she dropped. I carried her inside to her bed, before going back to my study.

    As such, the years passed happily, spending the days playing with my children, or studying the Book of Energy Manipulation. But then, the fated day arrived. The day we all had feared, the day I had to leave. At the moment, Amelia and I were alone with Sema, Kima and Vepas. They hadn¡¯t known anything about me leaving, the past seven years, so now it was time to tell them.

    ¡°Children, there is something you need to know,¡± I began. ¡°You know about to God of Death, Gebados, right?¡± I asked. The children nodded, and Vepas replied. ¡°He¡¯s the god that made you into a vampire, and is the god our church worships. He also became much like your father, after he remade you, so you could say you are a demi god.¡± Vepas said. I nodded in content, before continuing.

    ¡°Indeed. But what you don¡¯t know is, that one hundred years ago, after I woke from my evolutional slumber, after four hundred eighty six years, he gave me a new task. He wanted me to leave this continent, and only take one companion with me. That companion will be Amelia, and the day we leave is today.¡± I said. The kids looked at me in surprise and silence for a while.

    ¡°Y-you¡¯re leaving? For how long?¡± Sema asked. I looked at them for a while, a noticeably sad look in my eyes. ¡°A long time. A very, very long time¡­¡± I said. There was more silence, before I continued. ¡°Maybe a hundred years, maybe a thousand years. I don¡¯t know.¡± I said.

    The kids looked at them, then tears started appearing. Sema was the first to jump on me. ¡°No, no, please don¡¯t go! I don¡¯t want you to go, Papa!¡± She said. All three of them started crying, and all we could do was hug them, and try to comfort them. Then, about an hour later, we went out into the courtyard. Everyone was there, even Graywich, the Emperor, and Katy¡¯s parents. Every core member of the Coldblood Clan was present, but this was an event which would be kept secret. No one outside the clan was allowed to know. There were tears in a lot of eyes, especially my wives. The fact that only Amelia was allowed to come with me, was hitting them hard. Sema, Kima and Vepas were looking on blankly. This would be the hardest on them. Everyone else here had lived for hundreds of years, but they were only seven years old. The amount of time they spent with me would only be an extremely short amount of time, when I finally came back. Amelia and I looked at our friends and family.

    ¡°Everyone, it is with pain that I leave you now. If I could choose, I would rather stay, but you all know that that is impossible. I don¡¯t know how long I¡¯ll be gone, but it might be more than five hundred years this time. While I don¡¯t like leaving like this, it still allows me to try and fulfil one promise I made a few hundred years ago, after I made it out of the tomb of Palazar. That to, one, find out if the man who killed Palazar is alive, and two, to kill that man. So, I most likely won¡¯t come back before I¡¯ve done that, at the very least.

    Also, I trust you to conquer the rest of the continent, and to expand outside of it. The continent right in front of us shouldn¡¯t be too strong. With the new strength we have here, we should be able to overpower them. Just raise the natural energy levels around the entire Peninsula, then strengthen our armies for a few hundred years.

    Also, you should wait at least two hundred years before finishing off the last three empires. Now, goodbye.¡± I said, as I gave them one last look, then turned around and left, with Amelia at my side.

    End of chapter 2.

    Well, that was basically the introductory chapters of book 2. Next chapter, Isaac''s and Amelia''s adventure beyond the continent will finally begin. If you have any suggestions, or ideas that you would like them to do, then please comment, I might implement it. Anyways, thanks for reading, and please rate/review :)

 Chapter 3: Sword

    Chapter 3: Sword

    As we were travelling away from our home, we came upon a forest. This forest invoked age old memories in our minds, as it was the very forest we spent about two years in, just the two of us. Curious, we ventured into it, going through those obscure pathways that we had memorized. Eventually we came to a clearing, with a river running through it. Beside the river, there was a hut. Or at least it used to be a hut, but sadly, the passage of time had not been kind on it.

    The hut was worn down, there were holes in the wall, and parts of it were collapsed. We walked through the door, which was still partly intact. Inside, we found an old trap door, which led down into the old cave we used for our cattle. It was nice to see that at least some of our hard work was still intact. Back up in the hut, we sat down on something that might have been a table once.

    ¡°This place brings back so many memories.¡± Amelia said, sad at the sight of the state our first home is in. ¡°Back then, our lives were so simple, and we were so na?ve. We just lived here, drinking the blood of our victims. We hadn¡¯t even admitted our love, and slept in separate beds.¡± I said, looking in the eyes of my dear wife. If I had to admit it, Amelia was indeed my biggest true love. She had been with me since the day I was reborn.

    ¡°Yes, our lives were so simple, so peaceful. But then those Knights had to come and ruin everything.¡± Amelia said, looking slightly downcast. ¡°Indeed. That day, was the first day I ever felt powerless. I feared that I might lose you, but luckily it was only an enchanted item. Even to this day, I still have that small piece of metal.¡± I said, as I took out a small metal piece and showed it Amelia. The little metal looked worn out, the magic long gone.

    ¡°You still have that? Anyways, maybe it wasn¡¯t really that bad that those knights drove us away. After all, it was after that event that we confessed our love, and shared our first night together. I still remember that night. It¡¯s rare that we get to do it alone, these days. Well, I guess that we will have lots of chances from now on, unless we get any annoying followers on our travels, or something.¡± Amelia said smilingly. I leaned in towards her, and kissed her lips lovingly.

    ¡°Yeah, those Knights were the spark that started our Clan. It was after the Knights that we met Serana and Bogat. Then we destroyed that small rivaling clan. It wasn¡¯t long after that that we got married, was it?¡± I said, pulling Amelia into an embrace. Amelia leaned in, and rested her head on my chest.

    ¡°Yeah, you, me and Serana got married back then. That was the beginning of the new era in which vampires will rise once again, the rise of the Coldbloods. Before that day, I didn¡¯t even have a last name, but now I¡¯m treated as a holy symbol, above even the Emperor himself. A lot of things have happened in these past centuries, and sadly, most of them were without you.¡± Amelia said, as she sadly remembered all those years where they didn¡¯t even know if I was alive. But it was after that event that I found that Amelia probably loved me even more than the others. After all, she was the only one that fell to her knees when she saw me.

    ¡°But now I will have you all to myself, for who knows how long.¡± She said, immediately happier. I kissed her once more. ¡°Yes, but it kind of hurts to leave behind my children. I would have them earlier, but I wanted them to be with their mothers, when they need the most attentions, so that they don''t have to think about me as much. Maybe this way, Sema, Kima and Vepas will forget me sooner as well.¡± I said. Now it was my turn to look downcast. Amelia hugged me, then kissed my cheek.

    ¡°Maybe, one of these years, when we are at a place where we can have some peace for a while, we could have our own child. Then it can be just you, me and the child.¡± Amelia said, trying to better my mood. ¡°Perhaps. If we find a good place, we could settle down for a few dozen years, before continuing our journey.¡± I said.

    We continued talking about the events of the past for a while, before continuing. Before we went out of the continent, we made another detour. First we travelled towards the forest where it all began, where I first met Gebados, my Dread Father. Outside of the forest, there was a village. The village where Amelia had lived, before I killed everyone in a frenzy, and turned her. After the soldiers had burned it down, it had been barren of life for many years, but eventually, people repopulated the place. Now there was a new village here.

    We walked into the village, just looking around. There weren¡¯t any signs that a slaughter had taken place here, as the villagers were all peaceful. Now was a time of peace after all, as soldiers returned home. In fact, there was one returning right now, and I recognised him. He had achieved very large military merit, as he had saved a village of important strategic value, with only his own team. They had been vastly outnumbered, but through his brilliant tactics, they had won the battle with few casualties. As he was an avid believer in the Sanguine Church, he had been allowed to receive my blessing, and was formally inducted into the order. Now he was probably visiting, to tell his family the news.

    We hurriedly left the village, before he would see me. It would have been annoying if he had recognised me, which he most certainly would have, if he saw me. After our little visit to the village, we ventured towards the farm I was born in. When we arrived, there was indeed a farm there, but my old home was long gone. We walked into the farm, where we met a young man, who looked more than surprised to see us.

    ¡°Oh my, what brings two nobles such as you here?¡± He asked very politely. ¡°Oh, we¡¯re just sightseeing. ¡° I responded. The boy looked rather surprised, as he looked at me weirdly. ¡°Why would you come to such remote place for sightseeing?¡± He asked, confused.

    I looked at him smugly, and said, ¡°Didn¡¯t you know? This is the place where Son of the Dread Father, Isaac, was born almost seven hundred years ago.¡± I said. I was thoroughly enjoying the young man¡¯s expression, as he looked at me in shock.

    ¡°What?! Really?! How¡¯d you know that?¡± He asked, almost unwilling to believe me. ¡°You don¡¯t think I¡¯d know where I was born?¡± I said, before leaving in an instant movement, disappearing from his eyes in a flash. The boy was left behind, not knowing if he had really seen that or not.

    After this last visit of ours, we finally left to the nearest city, and quickly teleported to the border of the continent. Finally we arrived at the city closest to the border, now we would have to go the rest of the way on foot, since we didn¡¯t have any teleportation arrays that went out of the continent. It was very rare for someone to leave a continent, not just because the distance needed to be traveled was very large, but because it was very difficult. The nations on the other side didn¡¯t want people to immigrate into their lands, so there were powerful barriers, preventing people from going in. The only way to get through, was through the official checkpoint.

    After leisurely wandering towards the official checkpoint, we eventually made it there after a few days. For a normal person, the journey would take months at the very least, but we could fly very quickly with our wings, so we made it there quickly. We did walk the last part though, since we didn¡¯t want people to see our wings. It would be weird if people saw non-humans here, since there shouldn¡¯t be any, except monsters. In other continents, it wouldn¡¯t be too weird if people saw our wings, since many continents are of mixed races. They would just believe that we were some sort of avian race.

    Eventually, we arrived at the checkpoint, where there were a lot of strong looking guards, but naturally, they wouldn¡¯t stand a chance against me or Amelia. They seemed to be around the A rank in strength. We walked towards the building that was inside the barrier.

    ¡°Halt! State your business, or leave!¡± One of the guards shouted at me. I calmly walked towards him. ¡°We want passage through the barrier.¡± I said nonchalantly. The guard looked at me funnily, apparently not able to see the mountain before him.

    ¡°Refused! No thrash from this backwater continent may be allowed through!¡± The guard said mockingly. He shouldn¡¯t have said that. I released the full force of my aura, and walked towards the fool. Everyone in the vicinity suddenly froze, terrified, and looked towards me. The fool couldn¡¯t do anything, as he shook in fear. I slowly placed a finger on his forehead. Before he could utter a sound, he disintegrated into dust. The fool had only been at the early A rank, so I could have killed him without even looking at him, but I wanted to send a message.

    ¡°Listen trash! Either you allow us through, or I kill all of you, and destroy this barrier!¡± I shouted at them. The captain of the outpost immediately rushed to me. He saw my strength before, so he didn¡¯t dare dally, since he was only a peak A ranker.

    ¡°Please forgive us, my Lord! The fool didn¡¯t know you were such a powerful figure, he didn¡¯t know! Don¡¯t worry, we¡¯ll immediately let you and your wife through!¡± The guard captain said, as he rushed to the barrier entrance, and opened it.

    ¡°That¡¯s more like it. And you shouldn¡¯t call the Marestir Peninsula trash again, lest you bite your own tongue.¡± I said, before walking through the barrier, Amelia at my back. The guard captain looked at me, confused.

    ¡®Marestir Peninsula? Did they name their continent? I¡¯ve heard of the name Marestir before, it should be some power in that continent. Could it be that they overwhelmed all the others nations, and named the peninsula after them?¡¯ The guard captain thought to himself.

    When we got through the barrier, we were met with endless wilderness. This continent wasn¡¯t our final destination, as it was most likely even weaker than the current Marestir Peninsula. This was the only continent we had some information on, as it was our neighbour, so we knew its approximate power. We wanted to go a bit farther in.

    Thus, we continued our journey, to the other end of this new continent. After a while, we came upon the first city, which had been a drag to find, since we didn¡¯t know any of the locations here. We probably passed several cities on our way there, but at least we made it to a city, where they had teleportation arrays. Only, there was a slight problem. In the Marestir Peninsula, we could use the arrays for free, since we owned them, but here we had to pay a toll. It wasn¡¯t that we didn¡¯t have any money, it¡¯s just that we didn¡¯t have a lot of money. We only took what we could carry, and it would be enough for a while, but sooner or later, it would run out. But for now, we would probably be able to get through a few continents.

    Then three months passed by. Getting from continent to continent was easier here, since they weren¡¯t as prejudiced against each other, but in these three months, we only made it through three continents. We had been shocked by the sheer size of these places. Just the first continent had been several times larger than our own Marestir Peninsula, and it took quite a while to get through it. Now we were in the fourth continent, which was somewhere deeper inside the world. This place was called the Sword Continent, and was one of the stronger ones, even though it was rather far away from the center. The reason was because it was a hotspot for natural energy, and I could feel just how much denser it was, compared to Marestir.

    Now, we were at the edge of the continent, but we had no money, and had no idea where any cities were. The checkpoint had also been quite a lot stronger than at the first continent. There were several peak A rankers, but no S rankers. Even in such a place, an S ranker would be treated with respect. We were travelling through the wilderness for a while, feeding on animals, until we came upon an interesting place. It was a mountain range, but there were hundreds of buildings and palaces on the mountains, and it was walled off. It didn¡¯t quite look like a city, since it would be too hard for mortals to traverse such mountains. On the peaks of the mountains there were big palaces as well, and in the air, there were small, floating islands. It was quite a marvellous sight. Curious, we walked over to the gate of the place.

    ¡°Halt! State your business, strangers!¡± A robed youngsters said, as we came to the entrance. ¡°I¡¯m just curious what this place is.¡± I stated. The youngster looked at me funnily.

    ¡°You came here without knowing about the place? Well, this is the Eternal Sword Sect, one of the top ten sects in our Sword Continent. Surely you know now, right?¡± The youngster said, proudly.

    ¡°Eternal Sword Sect, huh? I¡¯m not actually from this continent, so I¡¯ve never heard of it. We come from a far-away continent.¡± I said, slightly amazed at the place. ¡°Would it be possible to meet the Sect Leader?¡± I asked. I wanted to check this place out, and perhaps I would find something good. Through my many years of life, I had never come upon a good physical technique, so maybe I could get something here.

    ¡°Very well, esteemed elder!¡± The youngster said. He didn¡¯t let my young looks that equalled his own fool him, as he could sense that I was in fact very powerful. The youngster led me into the sect, and up the largest mountain, until he arrived at the entrance of the largest palace.

    ¡°Who is this man, junior?¡± one of the Palace Guards asked. The youngster bowed to the middle aged man. ¡°These esteemed elders ask to meet with Sect Master!¡± The youngster announced. The Palace Guard looked at me, then nodded.

    If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.

    ¡°Very well, follow me, elder.¡± The middle aged man said, then went into the palace. We followed him, until we arrived in a large throne room. The middle aged man motioned me to wait, then bowed before the man on the throne.

    ¡°Sect Master. These two elders behind me request to meet with Sect Master!¡± The man announced. The Sect Master looked at us, then smiled, before looking back to the Palace Guard. ¡°It''s fine, you can go now.¡± He said, then the Palace Guard left. Amelia and I walked forward to meet the Sect Master.

    ¡°So, what brings you two here?¡± The Sect Master asked. ¡°Well, when I found out what this place is, I suddenly remembered something. You see, through my life, I have found a very powerful and rare magic technique, but I have never had a physical technique, or anything. So I was thinking, in exchange for your best techniques, I¡¯ll join this sect for a while. What say you?¡± I said. The Sect Master smirked

    ¡°Maybe, but first I need to know more things about you two. Here hold this thing. It¡¯s a lie detector, so if you lie I¡¯ll know.¡± He said, as he threw me a small stone with some weird markings on it. ¡°Alright, tell me your name, how powerful you are, and your age for now.¡± He said. I nodded.

    ¡°My name is Isaac Coldblood, and I have the strength of middle stage SS ranker, although I am only at the middle stage S rank. And I am 686 years old, and I reached S rank over a hundred years ago.¡± I said, then tossed the stone over to Amelia.

    ¡°SS ranker? That sure shows that you¡¯re from far away. Around here we call it a Saint, Mythical Saint, and Legendary Saint, and a mage would be a Sage, Grand Sage, and Arch Sage. But to have the power of a Mythical Saint at your age without any training techniques, that¡¯s marvellous. I¡¯m at the Legendary Sage level, and I¡¯ve lived for over fifty thousand years, and I was around three thousand years old when I reached the Mythical Saint level. I was nearing my end back then. Marvellous. You even transcend a whole level. I¡¯ll gladly accept you into my sect! Now how about you girl?¡± The Sect Master said, and looked at Amelia.

    ¡°My name is Amelia Coldblood, and I¡¯m Isaac¡¯s wife. I¡¯m at the early S rank, or early Saint, and I¡¯m 685 years old. I have the strength of a peak S ranker though.¡± She said. The Sect Master nodded, satisfied.

    ¡°Good. Isaac, with your strength you are amongst the five strongest in the sect, excluding me, so you have the rank of Third Supreme Elder, right off the bat. But you won¡¯t have the full authority of a Supreme Elder quite yet, since I can¡¯t fully trust you. And you Amelia, you shall have the rank of a Martial Elder. Alright, I¡¯ll now have someone take you to the Skill Pavilion, where you can choose a technique. Since you have managed to reach your level of strength without ever using any techniques, you should be able to master such a technique in ten or twenty years, so I shall give you twenty years to practise your chosen skills. But first, you need to take the oath. It ensures that you won¡¯t betray us, but it won¡¯t force you into obeying us. Shed your blood, and swear loyalty in the name of the True Gods. By doing this you will have completed the oath.¡± The Sect Master said. I pondered for a while, but then just went with it.

    The Dread Father was one of the True Gods, and his group was one with the most power in the Divine Plane, or so the writings went. Apparently he was married to the Goddess of Nature, and the Goddess of Life was his sister. The three of them, especially Life and Death were very powerful, so if need be, he might be able to destroy this oath. So both Amelia and I cut our hands, and shed our blood.

    ¡°I swear loyalty to the Sword Sect, in the name of the True Gods.¡± We both said. Doing such an oath was very normal in big organizations and schools, but for vampires it was unnecessary, since we had the Blood Bond. The Sect Master nodded in satisfaction.

    ¡°Alright, you can go with Guardian Peng now.¡± Sect Master said, then we followed this Guardian Peng. Peng had an elderly appearance, and was at the peak S rank, so he was as strong as Amelia.

    ¡°I must say, this is most surprising. For two such experts like you to come here suddenly. You never belonged to any sect before? Well probably not, if you never trained any physical techniques.¡± The elderly man said.

    ¡°No, we were never part of a sect, although we do come from a pretty large clan, from a certain continent far away from here. Our clan is pretty special, and we have several special abilities that you won¡¯t see in any humans.¡± I said, telling a bit about our abilities, but not revealing our true identities. ¡°We can also live for a very long time, and we all are very talented. For example, even those of the weakest blood can transcend a stage in strength, and I can transcend an entire rank.¡± I explained.

    Peng looked very surprised from our power. ¡°Is there anyone who can transcend even more than you?¡± He asked. I shook my head. ¡°No, I¡¯m the most powerful in our clan, and I¡¯m also the leader, but, well I guess there is no use in hiding it. Our Patron is one of the True Gods, and since I¡¯m his son, he sent me on a journey.¡± I said. Now Peng was even more surprised, although he had already figured I had some unimaginable background. He looked at me with wide eyes.

    ¡°You¡¯re a Demi-God?!¡± he practically shouted at me. I nodded. ¡°I guess so, but I¡¯m not the kind that was directly born from his seed. I was born as a normal mortal, but the True God remade my body entirely, and announced me as his son. I was nineteen years old when it happened.¡± I said. Peng kept looking at me in amazement. He had never seen a true Demi-God before. In all the stages of strength, there was one called ¡®Demi-God¡¯ but it wasn¡¯t a true Demi-God, not one born from a God. That was just the stage right before you could transcend into Godhood, and there were a few in the world. But only a few, you might be able to count them on one hand, so rare they were. Most of these Demi-Gods were born from Gods as well, but there was a tale about the ¡®Human Demi-God¡¯. Whether it was true or not, was unknown.

    ¡°Which God is your father then?¡± He asked. I shook my head again. ¡°For now it¡¯s better if I don¡¯t say. If I see fit, I¡¯ll tell you another day.¡± I said. Peng didn¡¯t dare ask further and said, ¡°Yes, Supreme Elder.¡± Peng had been in the Sect for a very long time, and had earned the rank of Guardian, but it was just that. A Guardian couldn¡¯t stand up to a Supreme Elder at all, since they were all SS rankers, and I was the third strongest of them. He might even be able to beat the second strongest too, depending on how strong he was. If he was at the late stage, it was possible, after all he beat the Land Drake, who was one stage above him. If I used my recovery abilities, and used the ¡®Ruler of the Night¡¯ ability, then I could win against someone one stage above me. Using that ability now, wouldn¡¯t give as big of a backlash anymore either, although it was still dangerous.

    After a bit of a walk, we arrived at another tall palace. Inside the palace, there were hundreds of bookshelves.

    ¡°This is the Skill Pavilion, although we¡¯re only on the first floor. You are going to the top floor, where not even I¡¯m allowed, and Elder Amelia is going three floors below that, where I¡¯ll give her my guidance.¡± Guardian Peng said. I nodded.

    ¡°Good, neither Amelia, nor I have ever seen any of these techniques, so I¡¯m sure she could use the help. Our continent was actually a very weak one, before our clan came into existence. We managed to raise the natural energy levels to where they were bigger than the continent on front of us, using an ancient magic I found in an ancient tomb, but there weren¡¯t any real techniques there.¡± I said, making Peng amazed once again. He knew there were magics capable of raising the natural energy levels in places, but these places were usually very small. Isaac had just casually mention drastically raising the natural energy level on an entire continent. Not even the Sect Master could do this, but to be fair, there had been thousands upon thousands of mages involved in it, and Isaac wasn¡¯t even there, although he had instigated the thing.

    Peng was speechless, as they walked up to the top of the tower. Eventually, I made it to the top of the tower, while Amelia and Peng were on the floors below. On this floor, there was a drastically smaller amount of books and manuals. I grabbed one, named ¡®Path to Eternal Light¡¯, but I put it away from now, and looked through the other manuals. There were a few techniques, like, ¡®Dragon Slayer Technique¡¯, ¡®Titan Wave Sword¡¯, ¡®Way of the Shao¡¯ and ¡®Two Way Sword Spirit¡¯, but none of those interested me. Instead there was one manual that caught my eye. Its name was, ¡®Way of the Chaos God¡¯. It was a physical technique in the truest way, as it would give colossal strength, but it was extremely hard to master. Almost everyone who tried it, would end up killing themselves, as it required you to train your body in such a way that would destroy it, therefore, the starting requirements were already so high that almost no one could train it. But I could. After all, my body was already quite strong, and I had my regenerative abilities, so I was sure I could do it. So with my mind set in stone, I exited the room with the manual.

    Back down, Amelia had already chosen her technique, ¡®Heavenly Blossom¡¯. It was a good technique, and would make you very quick, but it had nothing against the few techniques that were one floor above.

    ¡°What did you choose?¡± Peng asked. ¡°I choose the ¡®Way of the Chaos God¡¯ technique.¡± I answered. Peng nodded. ¡°Sounds powerful indeed, but I only know of one or two techniques up there, so I haven¡¯t heard of it before.¡± Peng said. After we were finished here, we exited the Skill Pavilion, and went back to meet the Sect Master.

    ¡°So, tell me, what did you choose?¡± he asked. ¡°I decided on the ¡®Heavenly Blossom¡¯ technique.¡± Amelia said. ¡°I chose the ¡®Way of the Chaos God¡¯.¡± I continued. Sect Master looked at me with wide eyes. ¡°You chose the ¡®Way of the Chaos God¡¯ Technique? Are you insane, you¡¯ll kill yourself!¡± He shouted at me. I only laughed at him.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I know full well of the dangers of this skill, after all, it is well documented in the manual. But worry not, the people of my clan are gifted with superhuman regenerative abilities. Even if you cut off my head, I won¡¯t die.¡± I said with a smirk. It was honestly quite fun to brag about my powers. Even an SSS ranker wouldn¡¯t have this good regenerative abilities. If the Sect Master lost an arm, then it would be gone for good, except if a healer was nearby to heal it quickly. Only immortals could regenerate limbs.

    ¡°That¡¯s quite amazing. Just what clan are you from?¡± Sect Master asked. ¡°The Coldblood Clan, but our powers only came from when I joined the clan. You can ask Guardian Peng to explain it to you, since we talked about it before.¡± I said. The Sect Master nodded.

    ¡°Very well, I¡¯ll talk with him later. I¡¯m looking forward to see the results of your training, since I¡¯ve never seen someone that could train it successfully. They all died. You can go now, I¡¯ll have someone show you to your home. Since Isaac is a Supreme Elder, he gets to live on one of the floating islands, and naturally, Amelia can stay with you there, since she¡¯s your wife. These floating islands are quite amazing, and were gifted to us by an Immortal, because I helped him a long time ago. There is a teleportation array on all of the islands, so you can get up and down.¡± Sect master said.

    ¡°Oh, by the way, my name is Assiel. Now, go.¡± Assiel said. Obediently, we left the palace. We were immediately led by some youngster, to our new home. We went down the mountain, then close to center of the sect, into a building with various teleportation arrays. The youngster led us unto one of the arrays, then we arrived on one of the floating islands. On the floating island, there were various buildings. In the center of the island, there was a large palace, and the other smaller buildings were homes to the servants, who would serve us. The youngster led us to the front door of the palace.

    ¡°This is your new home, Supreme Elder. If you need anything, you can ask the servants.¡± The youngster said, while bowing. Then he left the way he came. After he was gone, we went and explored our new home. It was very big, and had a lot of rooms. There were various training rooms, which all had various training tools, and there were a few kitchens, a few bathrooms, a few living rooms, a dining room, and a lot of bedrooms. After we had our fun, we both started reading the manuals, and began our new training.

    End of Chapter 3.

    Here''s chapter 3, which starts a whole new chapter in my story. Isaac has now joined the Sword Sect, as the third Supreme Elder. What new adventures will he face? What kind of dangers will he face in his room for the next ten years, while he trains? To find out, tune in next time!

    Anyways, next chapter Isaac will do some training, and the next arc will probably begin, so look forward to that.

    Also, this chapter was a bit late, since I had go run after sheep on some steep as hell mountains. I was planning to finish the chapter after I got home from that, but then my sister forced me to go to a music festival with her. Without going home and showering, so yeah, I went to music festival, smelling like sheep, and having sheep poo on my pants. But at least it''s apparently normal to wear wool sweaters and dirty clothes on music festivals in my country... So yeah...

    Anyways, thanks for reading, and please rate and review, it makes me happy.

 The Ramblings of an Author and his Sidekick Proofreader I

    Attention!

    Do not take this chapter seriously! This is a non-canon piece of comedy! It is derived from the many weird ramblings between me, the author, and my sidekick proofreader/editor! Anything you read here, is not to be taken seriously! It''s just a joke! Enjoy!

    The ramblings of an Author and his Sidekick Proofreader

    The Anime: The Novel

    Episode 1: DREAMS

    I''ve finished my closed door training after 10 years in isolation in these lonely mountains. I fear the truth for my leave of absence from the sect will be discovered by my wife. The reason for my closed door training in the mountains for the past 10 years has been a lie.  I couldn''t even look at my wife amelia as I have suffered the embarrassment of a lifetime. So I decided to leave the sect for 10 years and go into isolation so I could cleanse my mind of this embarrassment.

    My story thus far has been of great achievements accomplished by a farmer boy who was turned a vampire by his new Father Gebados. I rose in power slaughtered a village, met the love of my life Amelia and went on to establish my own clan. We rose in power and took over a kingdom, not long after we conquered the neighboring kingdom and soon after I fought the strongest opponent i have ever fought thus far. As I fell into a long slumber the Clan I established went on to conquer the two other neighboring kingdoms and established an empire. They then began conquering other kingdoms and I awoke after 480+ years. For the next one hundred years I lived in peace and our empire kept growing until I decided to give peace to those last 3 empires out of pity. I went on to establish a religion and was held as a Holy symbol in the hearts of all those believers. Soon me and my first wife and soul mate Amelia traveled through many continents and joined this Sword Sect.

    That is where the moment which ruined all my past achievements happened. After finishing my training with the new technique I was able to master the first step in just a few minutes. I did destroy half the room but it was rather easy learning this technique. I then met with a rude peasant and an elder who doesn''t know a DemiGod when he stands before him. I disciplined them then went down to the main sect palace. I couldn''t seem to find the sect master. So i asked a passer by who was apparently the 4th Supreme Elder, whose title I had taken as the 3rd Supreme Elder. He seemed a bit angry at seeing who i was but still answered politely. I asked if he could take me to where the sect master was and he agreed. We walked for a bit then we arrived a spot in which we had to travel upwards, but we had to follow sect rules and couldn''t use any form of skill or ability to fly up. We could only rely on our power as a Mythical saint and use our energy to travel up.

    This is where I met my first obstacle that i could never break through as I was now, and I would end up embarrassed for all of eternity. I told the 4th Supreme Elder I couldn''t do it, and I had to pull out my wings. He rejected it and said we could only use our energy. Long story short I had to be carried princess style up to the floating Library to meet the sect leader Assiel. I told the 4th elder to never speak of this again, or I would kill him. I couldn''t let my #1 fan Amelia, my wife to know of this. So I chose to tell Assiel I needed a 10 year closed door training and I had to leave and he should inform my wife of this leave. I would proceed to try and cool off my mind for the next ten years to try and rid my subconscious from ever remembering this again. After completing my 10 year isolation is when I finally felt it was time to go back. I went outside to stretch my legs and feel out my strength as i hadn¡¯t been able to control my strength since I had mastered the first stage of the Chaos god technique back at the palace.

    I didn¡¯t even mean to kill that elder I just hadn¡¯t tested my newly gained strength and somehow his weak neck snapped as I tried to intimidate him and those around. I began destroying everything around me, as I tested my strength, as I hadn¡¯t done so before.

    After some time a stranger had approached me and asked why I had been destroying things like a madman. ¡°Sorry, I didn¡¯t notice what I was doing as I am testing my strength after a closed training session¡± I said. He asked if we could spar and i agreed. After the spar he told me why he had come to this mountain range which was to look for some herbs for his wife. I tagged along and wanted to help him find this herb. A few weeks passed and we finally found it, but it seemed like something was off, as this flower was in the middle of an opening, in this field that seemed deserted.The flower stood lonely, in the middle. As Ley went over to try and harvest the flower, we were suddenly surrounded. Around us, there were countless beasts and demons. We had been on a walk, my friend Ley, and I, when we were suddenly ambushed. Portals from Demon Realm had opened, and demons and beasts were swarming in like rats. We had been caught unaware, and almost faced injury. Already, we were completely surrounded by the monsters, no end in sight. I looked to my friend Ley.

    ¡°It seems we¡¯re in for it now.¡± I said with a smirk on my face. Ley looked back at me, his eyes meeting mine.

    ¡°Indeed, Isaac. Ready yourself!¡± he shouted at me, as the horde began its charge. There were monsters all strengths. From F rank to B rank in the billions, A ranks in the millions. There were countless S rankers, and hundreds of SS rankers. The frontlines were made of the weakest kin, so every attack we made, killed thousands upon thousands.

    If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement.

    I waved my sword down, and made a path through the vermin, then I saw an S ranker. Quickly, I charged after him. I grabbed his head, and turned him on fire with magic, then threw him like a catapult. The result was explosion, killing a million monsters and demons. I formed a blue ball in my hand, and hurled it towards a large group of them. The ball flew at great speeds, and lunged right into one monster. Then it expanded, and eliminated everything in its path, killing several millions monsters and demons.

    Suddenly, I felt an energy coming towards me, and I turned, just in time to block an attack. My enemy was a SS rank, at the middle stage. Quickly, I attacked him with my sword, again and again, until his guard broke. Then in a swift motion, I impaled his head, killing him instantly.

    Like that, we fought, Ley and I. We fought for hours, killing billions upon billions of monsters and demons. There were mountains of corpses everywhere. This place would be known as the Mountains of Death from that day onwards. There were only two opponents left. Two peak Mythical Saints. One was an Arch Demon, while the other was a huge Minotaur. Once more, I looked my companion in the eye.

    ¡°Are you ready?¡± I asked. He nodded in response. Then, in a flash of motion, we charged at our opponents. I slashed my sword at the Arch Demon, making an energy wave. The wave directly clashed with the Arch Demon.

    We exchanged blow after blow, trying to get the upper hand. We kept fighting, for what felt like hours, but no one could get the upper hand. But then the moment came, the moment were the odds would be turned! The sun finally set, and I could finally use my ultimate attack! I a swift motion, I jumped backwards.

    ¡°Witness, the Ruler of the Night!¡± I shouted, as mist began gathering around me, and my corporeal form began disappearing. I looked my opponent in the eye, then smiled, as I disappeared. Not even an instant later, I appeared from his shadow, and slashed my sword at him. The Arch Demon only barely managed to react, as I hit him, and jumped away, before he had to bid farewells with his arm. In a moment in rage, he charged right back at me, and slashed his sword. I opened my arms, and warmly welcomed the attack, only to have it go right through me.

    The Arch Demon was visibly shocked, as he quickly jumped back, but I was too fast, as I teleported again, to pierce my sword right through his heart. The Arch Demon died in a single instant, as my corporeal form returned.

    ¡°Agh!¡± I spit out blood, and fell to my knee. Ley was just about finished with his opponent as well. He had a large wound on his shoulder, looked like he had been hit by an axe. Ley reached out his hand, and I took it, and slowly got back up.

    ¡°We did it.¡± He said, as he turned around. He turned his head back to me. ¡°Then Isaac, I must bid my farewells.¡± He said, then floated up in the air, and started flying into the horizon.

    I could only stand there, as I saw his beautiful form disappear in the horizon. Suddenly, I felt a single tear fall from my eye, as I fell to my knees. The tears started pouring, as I pounded my fist on the ground, made of corpses.

    ¡°I, I can¡¯t fly!¡± I shouted to the heavens! I couldn¡¯t fly without wings! I was but a lowly Saint, incapable of flight without wings! Slowly, I calmed down, and stood back up, and looked in Ley¡¯s direction one last time, before turning around. I formed my wings, and, depressed, I flew back towards the Sword Sect, with a downcast aura.

    Servant¡¯s POV.

    As I was walking past the Supreme Elder¡¯s room, I could hear some strange noises. I got closer to the door, and rested my ear on it, to inspect further. On closer inspection, I determined that it sounded like whimper. Then I noticed something that could be words. I calmed my heart, and put all my effort to listening.

    ¡°I can¡¯t fly¡­¡± It sounded like.

    End.

    Hey guys, Proofreader(RagNarok) here, After not being able to do my job of proofreading the 4th Chapter, I got so off track with a certain exchange that happened between Ley and Isaac in Chapter 4 which i found hilarious and commented to the Martin. Lord Martin then suggested to start a side story which is filled with our ramblings we get into while discussing a chapter.

    Yup, as RagNarok said, and as the title suggests, we decided to start a series on our random ramblings. We both wrote it, about half each, so RagNarok can now finally call himself an author! Everyone, a round of applause for RagNarok!

    Also, chapter four will come soon, since RagNarok is currently proofreading, albeit, veeeery slowly.

    Plase rate and review, and thanks for reading!

 Chapter 4: Demon

    Chapter 4: Demon

    I sat alone in a room, reading through the manual. After I finished studying the first section, I rose from my chair, and sat down in the center of the room. I began circulating my energy flow in the manner documented in the manual. When I managed to make it circulate steadily, I rapidly shifted it, and began sharpening it. Immediately, I felt an intense pain in spread from my left shoulder outwards. That was how you trained the first stage of the ¡®Way of the Chaos God¡¯. Except, you had to do it a thousand times faster, which meant that you would tear all the muscles in your body.

    I readied myself for the pain, and started once more, this time much faster. I closed my eyes once again, and began circulating my energy faster and faster until it felt like a hurricane was inside me. It felt like my body was lit ablaze from the inside, and simultaneously being torn apart, while drenched in acid. I could only hold on for a split second, before I stopped, and luckily so.

    The room around me was a mess, the furniture was in splinters, and the walls torn down. Training in this manner apparently made the energy around me also go crazy. I tried to stand up, but couldn¡¯t due to the intense pain and damage i did to my body. I laid still for a minute or two, waiting for my body to heal enough to walk. Then I walked over to Amelia, who was a few rooms next to me. I looked inside, only to see her completely silent, and in trance. Apparently, she hadn¡¯t noticed my little incident.

    I didn¡¯t want to disturb her any further, so I exited the palace, and walked to the teleportation array. As I walked out of the teleportation building, I bumped into some kid. The kid looked at me, seemingly furious.

    ¡°What the hell, look where you¡¯re going!¡± He yelled at me. I raised my eyebrows at the unexpected reaction. ¡°Or you could look where you¡¯re going, peasant¡± I barked back. The kid looked at me, exasperated.

    ¡°Hey, watch your attitude, or I¡¯ll cripple you for life!¡± The kid replied, apparently not even knowing the monster standing in front of him. I almost couldn¡¯t even hold back my laughter, as I grabbed him by the collar.

    ¡°You will cripple me?¡± I asked. Now the kid was slightly terrified, but to his luck, some elder arrived just then.

    ¡°Hey, what are you doing!? Put young master Pong down, immediately¡± the elder said. I eyed him funnily, then dropped the kid. ¡°Good, now follow me so I can discipline you¡± the elder continued.

    ¡°What, why the hell should I follow you?¡± I said. The elder stopped in his tracks, then turned around. ¡°What did you say? Tell me your name and rank, before I kill you!¡± He spat at me. Alright, now I had enough of him, so I slowly released my aura.

    ¡°You ask who I am? Very well, I shall tell you! My name is Isaac Coldblood, I am the newly recruited THIRD SUPREME ELDER!¡± I shouted at him, as I flicked my hand at him, causing him to fly in the opposite direction. His body crashed into a building, then another and another, until he stopped a good fifty meters away. My body flickered, and I appeared once again before him. All the bystanders near by quickly rushed over.

    ¡°He¡¯s the new Supreme Elder?¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s the new Supreme Elder I¡¯ve heard about?¡±

    ¡°Holy shit, it¡¯s the new Supreme Elder! He¡¯s so fierce!¡±

    I heard several people realize that I was the newly appointed third Supreme Elder. I turned my gaze to the elder from before as he looked back at me in terror. I grabbed his neck with my hand, then held him to eye level.

    ¡°If there is such a thing as the afterlife, maybe be a bit more careful about who you offend.¡± I said, as I crushed his neck severing it, and his head fell to the ground, alongside his body.

    ¡°Holy shit, he just killed a Saint Martial Elder with a single squeeze of his hand!¡± Someone announced. I looked around at the various disciples around.

    ¡°Well, this is as good a time as any. My name is Isaac Coldblood, and I¡¯m the new third Supreme Elder. I directly became the third Elder, so you can probably guess my approximate power level. You won¡¯t see me much the next ten years, since I¡¯m going into closed door training, as I¡¯ve yet to learn any techniques. That should do well enough for introductions. Oh, and one more thing.¡± I said, as I flared a bit of my power. ¡°I do not take insults lightly.¡± I continued, then flickered away.

    A single instant later, I appeared next to the Sect Master, Assiel. He wasn¡¯t in the same room as before, but was now reading through some files.

    ¡°Hello there Isaac. It¡¯s good to see you, but please knock next time¡± he said. I smiled, as I walked closer to him. ¡°I now understand why so many people have died using this training method. Even using the first stage fully, would kill just about anyone and completely destroy their body. Even at half strength, it would be enough to kill most people. But that¡¯s not why I¡¯m here. Apparently it¡¯s quite chaotic to train, as it completely destroyed the room I was in, so I¡¯ll be going out somewhere, to train.¡± I said.

    ¡°Is that so? I must say, if that¡¯s the case, I¡¯m impressed. You say that it would destroy the body of most people, yet her you are, not a scratch on your body. That regenerative ability of yours must be quite something.¡± He marvelled. Having such an ability was the dream of all warriors, as if the lost a limb, it would never come back until they reached immortality. But then again, I was already immortal.

    ¡°Indeed, it is very powerful. I once had half my chest blown away, but I could still continued to battle afterwards. It¡¯s saved my life more than once. Anyways, tell my wife that I¡¯ll be gone for ten years, whenever she comes back out. Oh, and I killed some Saint rank Elder before i came here¡± I said, then left, before he could say anything.

    Out of the Sect, I ventured deep into the wilderness. Eventually, I found a mountain range, where I carved myself a nice little cave, about a hundred meters deep. I made sure to completely seal off the cave, and place a few barriers around it, so that I wouldn¡¯t be disturbed.

    After I sat down, I began circulating my energy, in that unpredictable and rapid way. This time, I managed to hold out a few seconds longer, but i had to lie back down and heal once again. Then I tried again, for as long as I could hold.

    Like that, I would switch between circulating for as long as I could, then resting until fully healed, which usually took a minute or more, while I could only train for a few seconds.

    After every time, I could hold out a second or two longer, thus my training time grew longer and longer. Eventually, ten years passed. After sitting in the cave for ten years, without leaving once, I could now hold the first position for as long as I wanted without even feeling it. My strength had risen by huge amounts, as I had now reached the peak of rank S, or the peak of the Saint level.

    But my body looked rather different than before. I had wrinkled up a bit, since I hadn¡¯t drunk any blood in ten years. It was nowhere near like how it was after I got out of the Tomb of Palazar, after all, I was a lot older now, so I could last much longer. Now I basically looked like a middle aged person. As I stood back up, I felt all my bones shift into peace. I flexed my left arm out, which caused another new cave on the left wall. Then I flexed my right arm out, which made another new cave, on the right wall.

    ¡°I need to learn to control this strength before I go back.¡± I thought aloud. Then I punched casually at the front wall of my little cave, causing a hundred meter long tunnel to appear, showing me daylight once more. I flickered, and appeared outside the cave. Then I started punching at trees and rocks, trying to destroy them as lightly as possible, but sadly they were all pulverized. I continued to try and train my control, until the area around me had become barren. At that moment, some stranger appeared before me, with a curious look.

    ¡°What are you doing?¡± He asked. I looked at him, then at the devastation around me, then back at him. ¡°Oh shit, I didn¡¯t realized I caused such destruction. I just came out of a ten year closed door training, and my strength has increased drastically, so now I need better control.¡± I said. The stranger looked quite surprised.

    ¡°You increased that much in strength, in only ten years?¡± He asked. I nodded. ¡°Before, I had the strength of a middle Mythical Saint, without ever training any techniques, since I come from a backwater continent, but now I joined the Sword Sect, and got their ¡®Way of the Chaos God¡¯. It¡¯s very hard to train, and almost everyone that trains it dies, but due to my special properties, I can train it very well. Since it¡¯s like that, I gained a lot of strength these ten years.¡± I explained. The stranger nodded.

    ¡°That sounds plausible, but you must be quite talented, to get access to that technique. I¡¯ve heard of it before, though I don¡¯t know the details. We don¡¯t have it at our sect, after all. Anyways, if you need to better your control, I don¡¯t mind sparring with you a bit, after all, we¡¯re at the same level.¡± He said. A happy smile appeared on my face.

    ¡°Really? That would be great, but remember, I can¡¯t hold back right now, and my physical strength is most likely much higher than your own, so be careful.¡± I said. The man nodded.

    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll remember.¡± He said, then got into a battle stance. Then I lashed at him, and struck my fist at him. The power of my fist caused him to fly back, crashing through several trees.

    ¡°Holy shit, you didn¡¯t joke when you said you were strong!¡± He yelled. ¡°Are you alright?!¡± I yelled back, quite surprised at my own strength. ¡°I¡¯m fine, I just need to be more careful. I can take a few more of those, so don¡¯t worry.¡± He replied. I nodded in understanding, then rushed back at him. I launched a kick, which he managed to dodge, then he returned a punch to my face. The punch didn¡¯t connect, so I punched back, only to meet a shadow. I quickly looked around, but then I felt his shin connect with my face, which made me stagger a bit back.

    ¡°Are you kidding me? That was a full power kick!¡± The stranger complained. I only chuckled at him, as I kicked back. Like that, we fought for a while, until I could control my strength better and better. Eventually, I felt like I had full control over my strength again, which is when I truly began to dominate him.

    ¡°You¡¯re very strong. We¡¯re both at the peak Mythical Saints, yet I don¡¯t stand a chance against you. Amongst Mythical Saints, you¡¯re probably invincible.¡± The stranger said, a bit downcast.

    ¡°Anyways, my name is Ley, and I¡¯m from the Lin Sect. Our two sects have friendly relations, so we might meet again. But then again, most sects are on friendly relations with the Sword Sect, since you¡¯re the powerhouse of this continent. And with you there, you¡¯ll be even more formidable. You might become the third Legendary Saint of our continent.¡± Ley said, as he flew away. Well, at least there was still one thing he had on me. He could fly without the use of wings

    (Pr - Rag: Isaac suddenly felt a small tear slide down his right cheek as he saw ley fly away. Check out Side Chapter for more info).

    When you reached the SS, or Mythical Saint level, you would gain the ability to fly. Since I was technically only at the Saint level, I couldn¡¯t fly without my wings. But if I used my wings, I could fly faster than any Mythical Saint, so there¡¯s that.

    Thus, I manifested my blood red wings, and flew back towards the Sword Sect. The flight was a short one, as I was flying quickly, and I didn¡¯t go that far away in the first place. A while later, I soared above the Sword Sect, and set course for the Sect Master. People were surprised as they saw me fly inside the Palace. Luckily for me, I didn¡¯t have to look for him, as he was in his ¡®throne room¡¯

    ¡°Isaac, you¡¯re back. And since when did you have wings?¡± He asked, as I removed my wings. ¡°It¡¯s a special ability of my race.¡± I replied. ¡°Your race? You¡¯re not human? Well, most Demi-Gods aren¡¯t. Oh, and I had no idea you were a Demi-God when you left. I feel like I hit it big with you!¡± The Sect Master said enthusiastically.

    ¡°Anyways, how did this closed door training session go? Oh, and your wife came out a while ago. She¡¯s taking care of a mission, so you can¡¯t see her yet.¡± Assiel said.

    ¡°It went well. I have mastered the first stage of it, and reached the peak of the Saint level, making me as strong as a Mythical Saint. Also, I sparred with some guy from the Lin Sect on the way here. He was at the same stage, a peak Mythical Saint, but after I got control of my strength, I could defeat him relatively easily. So I¡¯m stronger than most Mythical Saints, due to my physical strength and speed, but I¡¯m still not at the Legendary Saint level.¡± I reported. Assiel nodded in satisfaction.

    ¡°That¡¯s very good, a lot more than I expected. That makes you one of the only two peak Mythical Saints. Therefore you shall be promoted to the second Supreme Elder. It sounds like you¡¯re stronger than Supreme Elder Garmond, but unless you beat him, or surpass his rank, and break through to the Legendary Saint level, I can¡¯t easily promote you.¡± He said.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, it''s fine. I won¡¯t be here forever, so I won¡¯t take his position.¡± I said. ¡°Right, you said that. How long do you think you¡¯ll stay with the Sect? Although, even when you leave, you¡¯ll still be part of the Sect, so you should come back and visit from time to time.¡± He said, as if I was already leaving. I stared at the floor for a while, as I was thinking.

    ¡°Well, I left my entire family and friends back home, except my first wife, so I don¡¯t want to stay away too long. I¡¯ve already decided that I won¡¯t stay away for more than a thousand years, no matter what. So I think I¡¯ll spend between a hundred and two hundred years here. In that time I will support the Sword Sect, and help it when in need¡± I said. Assiel nodded again, in satisfaction.

    ¡°Good, good. But I actually have a mission for you. I told you before that you needed to gain my trust, and there¡¯s a mission where I could really use you right now. You see, we are not very good friends with the Demon Sect, and we¡¯re at the verge of war. The Demon Sect is a secretive group, and no one knows where they¡¯re based, but we received a piece of news recently. We sent a group of Elite Disciples on a mission, to find and kill a group Demon Disciples. Our disciples should be stronger, but that¡¯s not what worries me. The report we got is that one of the elite elders of the Demon Sect might be following them. Apparently one of his personal disciples is in the group.

    I don¡¯t really want you to join our disciples, just tail them from the shadows. In case that elder arrives, then I want you to interfere, although when you do, is up to you. Just make sure no one dies, or at least only a few casualties happen. Also, if it turns out our disciples are weaker than their disciple, try and save them.

    Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.Now, you should hurry and go, since they left a few days ago already. I saw you fly before, so I trust you¡¯ll make it quickly. Here¡¯s a map of where they¡¯re supposed to ambush them, and their route.¡± He said, as he gave me a map.

    ¡°Alright, I won¡¯t disappoint you.¡± I said as I turned around and left. ¡°I¡¯m sure you won¡¯t.¡± Assiel said, after I had left. As I left the palace, some disciples looked at me in amazement, as they recognized me. Ten years ago, when I killed that foolish insect, a lot of people saw me, and you would never forget something like that, except if you yourself rose above even that.

    I looked at the map, then flew in the direction it showed. It was quite far, so it took a long time, even at full speed. Only the next day, did I arrive at the meeting point. Indeed, the disciples were arriving at that very moment, as well. What a coincidence.

    I flew to a mountain range close by, where I could observe them carefully. With my eyesight, I could even see their eye colours, even though I was several kilometres away. Thus, I waited for a few days, without anything happening. An ambush was a game of waiting. I didn¡¯t know exactly when they were supposed to pass this place, just that it should be within the month, so all we could do was wait. It was quite boring, sitting alone up on the mountain, watching some youngsters.

    Eventually though, on the fifteenth day, they finally arrived. In the distance, I saw Demon Disciples arriving. There was even an actual demon amongst them, but he wasn¡¯t a High Demon like Carlahahn, the High Demon from the Tomb of Palazar.

    I wasn¡¯t sure whether our disciples had seen them yet, but it didn¡¯t seem so, after all, I could see much farther than they could. Eventually though, it seemed like they noticed, and got themselves ready. They talked between themselves, then hid from sight. A few minutes later, they attacked. There were twelve disciples on our side, and eight on their side, so we outnumbered them.

    They immediately managed to kill three Demon Disciples in the ambush, but after that, the remaining five reacted, and fought back. But they were greatly outnumbered, so the odds were largely in our favour. They fought fiercely, as they all had at least two opponents each. Two of our disciples were fighting one of theirs, until they both managed to pierce his body. But then, much to their surprise, his body disappeared in an after image. Suddenly, one of our disciple saw a sword in front of his eyes, as it had pierced through his throat.

    He tried to scream, but his vocal cords had been cut, and he fell down lifeless. But at that moment, another disciple jumped in, to help, and managed to pierce through the shoulder of the Demon Disciple. Meanwhile, the real Demon was fighting against three disciples. He was wielding two swords, and was skilfully using them, to keep the three opponents at bay. In split second mistake, he managed to slash open the abdomen of one of the disciples, but at the cost of his arm. His arm fell to the ground, but he had one less opponent, as the other one fell to the ground as well. He wasn¡¯t dead, but his abdomen was slashed open, and his internal organs were hanging out of it.

    He laid on the floor, as he slowly bled out. Then all of a sudden, the fighting stopped, as a heavy aura fell upon everyone on the battlefield. A pale man, with long blood red hair appeared behind the demon man.

    ¡°You people dare to ambush my disciples group? Then you must be begging for death, right?¡± He said, as he was about to kill the wounded youngster, with his sword.

    ¡®That¡¯s my que, I guess.¡¯ I thought, as my body flickered. In an instant, I appeared beside the Elder from the Demon Sect, and grabbed his wrist, stopping it before he killed the disciple.

    ¡°I would appreciate it if you didn¡¯t kill my sect¡¯s disciples.¡± I said calmly, and monotonously. The pale man looked at me in shock. ¡°So fast!¡± He thought aloud. I let go of his arm, as he jumped backwards.

    ¡°Who are you?! I don¡¯t recognise you, and I would know of someone that strong in the Sword Sect!¡± He yelled at me. ¡°Calm you temper. I am Isaac Coldblood, second Supreme Elder of the Sword Sect.¡± I said. Now he was even more shocked, and began showing signs of fear.

    ¡°The second Supreme Elder? They sent the second Supreme Elder here? The new Supreme Elder?¡± I questioned. I nodded. ¡°Yes, it¡¯s a bit overkill if you ask me. But now that I¡¯m here, I can¡¯t let you leave alive, so prepare yourself.¡± I said, as I began slowly walking in his direction. He immediately turned around to run, since flying would be too slow, but just as he turned, I appeared before him again, and grabbed his neck. I put my other hand on the top of his head.

    ¡°I¡¯ve seen demons before, but you certainly aren¡¯t one. It¡¯s weird that you call yourself the Demon Sect, when you¡¯re not demons. Well, that kid over there is a Demon, but he accepted a human like you as his master? If a real demon found out, he would kill him, as well as you. But, since that¡¯s not going to happen, you will have to deal with me.¡± I said, as I ripped his head off from his body. Then as his body fell to the floor, I moved over to the little Demon, and cut his head off, in one smooth motion.

    Then, when the master and disciple duo were both headless, I raised a hand, and formed a few mana balls, and killed the rest of the Demon Disciples. Then I turned to look at the Sword Disciples.

    ¡°The mission is over, you can return now.¡± I said, before flickering away. A while later, I was finally back home at the Sect, only to find everything in turmoil. I quickly found a Martial Elder near me.

    ¡°What the hell is going on here?¡± I questioned. ¡°The Sect Master was poisoned! The Masters of the Ping Sect and the Pong Sect came here, and challenged the Sect Master! While the Pong Sect Master was fighting our Sect Master, the Ping Sect Master sneakily poisoned Sect Master! They managed to heavily wound him, in his weakened state, before escaping. He is currently resting in the palace. I don¡¯t know his current status, though.¡± He explained.

    ¡°How long ago was this?¡± I quickly questioned. ¡°Four days ago!¡± He quickly replied. Then I hurried over to the palace, and found him. There were various healers and doctors outside his room. They looked at me questionably.

    ¡°Who are you? The Sect Master needs rest, and is not to be disturbed!¡± One of the doctors said. ¡°I¡¯m second Supreme Elder, Isaac. How is his current condition?¡± I said. They were surprised as they realized who had arrived.

    ¡°Second Supreme Elder? I heard you¡¯re even stronger than first Supreme Elder, it¡¯s an honour!¡± One of the guardians said. ¡°His physical condition is stabilized, and he will heal with time, but the poison is another matter. It directly affects his energy and soul, and there is no cure. If we can¡¯t do anything about it, he will eventually die, although I don¡¯t know how long it will take. Until that time, he will grow weaker and weaker.¡± He explained. I thought for a while, about what he said, while everyone looked at me impatiently.

    ¡°Take me to him. I might be able to do something.¡± I said. The doctors looked doubtful, but took me to him none the less. Inside, I saw the Sect Master, unconscious. He had paled a lot, and looked a lot weaker than the magnificent being I saw before. I walked up to him, and placed my hand above his chest.

    Then I used Energy Manipulation Magic on him. I had managed to get it to the second stage, as well as becoming a Sage, so the magic had even more uses now. I could probe into people, and inspect their energy, and manipulate it. Inside, I looked around for a while, until I finally found the most concentrated point of poison. It was spreading onto his energy pool and was slowly making it leak out, he would die. But there was a problem. The core of the poison was connected to his soul. If I forcefully removed it, his soul would break, resulting in his death, and if there was an afterlife, he wouldn¡¯t even go there.

    For now, I sealed the poison core, so that it could do nothing, then I removed all the poison from his energy veins, until there was nothing left. Finally, I opened my eyes, and looked at everyone present.

    ¡°It¡¯s done. The poison has been completely removed from his energy veins, but there was one problem. The poison core is located in his soul, so if I remove it, he dies. The only thing I could do, was seal it away. The poison won¡¯t harm him, but he can never remove it, except if he becomes an Immortal. But he won¡¯t wake up yet. His soul was damaged, and now it needs to heal. Before it is fully healed, he won¡¯t wake up. It might take a years, or even decades.¡± I said. I everyone looked at me with shock, before they all bowed to me.

    ¡°Thank you Supreme Elder, for saving the Sect Master!¡± They all exclaimed. ¡°It¡¯s nothing, for now we have worse matters on our hand. This move was clearly for the sake of weakening us, so we need to prepare. We¡¯ll most likely be attacked by the enemy very soon.¡± I said, and as on cue, and explosion sounded. Without wasting a second, I sped outside, only to see chaos. We were being attacked from all sides, by thousands of fighters. It seemed like we were being attacked by several sects, not only the Ping and Pong Sects. Immediately I looked around, to find the strongest from our side. On top of one of the mountain peaks, I saw four persons, three males, and one woman. With a flicker of my body, I appeared on the same mountain. The four looked at me.

    ¡°Second Supreme Elder, you¡¯re back. Good timing.¡± The female of the group said. ¡°I¡¯m Nana, the third Supreme Elder.¡± She said. I nodded in response. ¡°I saw the Sect Master just now. He was afflicted with a soul and energy poison. I managed to seal it away, and remove all the loose poison, but I can¡¯t remove it from his soul, so all I could do, was seal it away. He will still be unconscious until his soul is healed again, which might be years, or even decades.¡± I said. They were also surprised that I healed him.

    ¡°You managed to heal him!¡± One of the Supreme Elders said. ¡°Yes, but that¡¯s not much use for us now.¡± I replied. The Elders all nodded. ¡°For now we need to take care of this coming calamity.¡± Nana said. ¡°Well, we still might make it through. The only Legendary Saints in our continent, belonging to a sect, was our Sect Master and the the Demon Master, so they only have peak Mythical Saints.¡± One of the Supreme Elders said. ¡°Isaac and Garmond are both peak Mythical Saints as well.¡±

    ¡°Indeed. With my strength, I should be invincible in the Mythical Saint level. As long as they don¡¯t have any Legendary Saints, I can take care of them.¡± I said, which once more caused some surprise. ¡°It¡¯s true. I sparred with Elder Ley, from the Lin Sect. He¡¯s a peak Mythical Saint as well, and I was much stronger than him.¡± I said.

    ¡°You fought Ley?¡± Garmond asked, seemingly impressed. ¡°Indeed. But enough talking, our disciples are dying. Let¡¯s put a stop to this!¡± I said. The others all nodded, as we flickered down, right into the center of the conflict. As we appeared, with our auras hammering everyone weaker down, the fighting stopped.

    ¡°You dare attack our Sword Sect, and still expect to live!¡± Garmond roared at everyone. Immediately, several new figures appeared, some behind us, some facing us. The ones who were opposite us, outnumbered us quite a bit, even after the other Martial Elders arrived.

    Out of the group of enemies, five mean appeared. ¡°We are the Sect Masters of the, Ping, Pong, Gale, Long and Balance Sects! If you surrender, we shall allow you to live, at the cost of Assiel¡¯s life!¡± One of them said. I looked towards Garmond.

    ¡°Garmond, you take one of them, I¡¯ll take the rest. You need to hurry and kill him, then join me. I may be strong, but I¡¯m not sure I can take four peak Mythical Saints. You others, keep everyone away from us, so they don¡¯t sneak attack. I won¡¯t have time to be careful of the weak ones.¡± I said, as I started walking towards the Sect Masters.

    ¡°How pitiful it is that you four Sect Master will have to gang up on me, one Supreme Elder, yet still lose. Just shows how much below us you are.¡± I said, as I walked towards them. They were visibly taunted by my words, as all five of them prepared to attack me, but before they could, Garmond took the attention of one of them. While they were still off guard, I gave them a full power kick, before I unsheathed my sword. The kick made one of them fly back, straight into the walls. The Sect Masters looked at me.

    ¡°Strong!¡± They said, but they quickly calmed, and attacked again, this time, more carefully. I swiped my sword at them, but they dodged, then attacked back. They couldn¡¯t hit me though, while they were near misses most of the time.

    ¡°You call yourselves Sect Masters?¡± I taunted with a smirk. One of them got annoyed, and charged at me. I dodged his attack, and swiped my sword at him, but just when he was about to block, I changed to a kick, which directly connected on his neck. He went flying, but I wasn¡¯t finished. I charged up to him, and swiped my sword right at him. He managed to see the sword coming, and shifted his body to the side, so that I only hit his side. The man hit the ground then quickly got up, and staggered back.

    ¡°Who are you!?¡± They shouted at me. ¡°Me? I¡¯m Isaac, the second Supreme Elder, the strongest of the Five Supreme Elders. If you want to beat me at the Mythical Saint level, dream on!¡± I said, as I charged at them again. I slashed my sword at the same wounded Sect Master, and at that moment, the fifth Sect Master died, by the hands of Garmond. Garmond didn¡¯t rest for a single moment, and quickly charged over to my side, at the exact moment that my sword connected with the flesh of the Sect Master. The Sect Master managed to rush away from there, before I disconnected his head, but not without a big wound on his torso.

    The four remaining Sect Masters looked at us in fear. If there were four Sect Masters, they realized they might be able to beat me, at the cost of one or two lives, but if they only were three, then they didn¡¯t stand a chance.

    ¡°RETREAT!!!¡± They shouted, so that everyone could hear, just before they all fled, tails between their legs. We didn¡¯t bother chasing them, since they were using a special escaping method.

    ¡°Well, that¡¯s that.¡± I said. Garmond, the first Supreme Elder looked at me. ¡°No, I¡¯m afraid this is only the beginning. I¡¯m afraid they might have been instigated by the Demon Sect. Other than our own Sect, they are the only other Sect to possess a Legendary Saint, at the same level as our Sect Master. If they attack, I¡¯m afraid there¡¯s not much we can do.¡± He explained. As we watched the enemy Sects flee, I could feel the tension in the air.

    End of chapter 4.

    Hey there! Today is a special treat, where you get both a chapter, as well as a amazing side story. I hope you read it, as RagNarok and I had a lot of fun writing it.

    Thanks for reading, and please rate and review!

    Later!

 Announcement!

    I have an important announcement to make! A while ago I revealed that I was planning a new novel. And now, the time has finally come! I have released the prologue of my new novel, named, Hunters of the Night!

    Here''s the link:

    Hunters of the Night</a>

    Stolen novel; please report.

    I hope you will take a moment out of your time, an read it. I plan to write another chapter of HotN today, and then if I have time, I''ll do RotV as well. Take care!

 Chapter 5: Alliances

    Chapter 5: Alliances

    We stood still for a few minutes, making sure that the sects truly left. After they had all left, I turned to the other Supreme Elders. Garmond was still staring out into nothingness, but the others also turned to me.

    ¡°Now that they have left, tell me, just how did the Sect Master manage to get poisoned?¡± I asked. He¡¯s a peak Legendary Saint, while the Ping and Pong brothers were only peak Mythical Saints. The distance between two such beings, would be astronomical. There should be no way in hell that they could poison the Sect Master, except if it was through food, but even then, he should be able to sense the poison in the food, before he swallowed it.

    But by the sound of it, they had poisoned him in the middle of the fight. It was really bugging my mind.

    ¡°Those brothers were very sly. This poison works in several stages. Except if you are a legendary saint, the first stage won¡¯t do much. It is designed to weaken you, but it won¡¯t weaken you more than to the Mythical Saint level, no matter what. The second stage, is where it spreads out into the veins, and then the third, and last stage, it starts corrupting your soul. After that, you won¡¯t have much time left to live,¡± one of the Supreme Elders said.

    ¡°While the other brother was fighting, the Ping Sect Master put the poison on his own neck, and several other areas. It was a big gamble, but then he attacked Sect Master Assiel. Assiel grabbed Ping by the neck, and the poison is so potent that you will be affected, if you only touch it. Thus, Ping had managed to poison the Sect Master, but at the price of suffering the poison himself.

    We don¡¯t know if they have a cure or not, but they most likely did, or they would not have played such a risky gamble. Unfortunately, we do not know of any said cure. Since Ping was at the peak of the Mythical Saint level, he didn¡¯t get weakened, so the two Sect Masters ganged up on Assiel, and thus managed to beat him down. As soon as we arrived, they quickly managed to flee the scene.¡± The female Supreme Elder explained. I nodded. They had truly gone to great lengths to do this, even risking their own lives, but in the end it paid off for them. After they finished explaining what happened, we went into one of the palaces, where several Elders were gathered. There were five seats prepared at the end of the large table, while all the Elders sat around it.

    Garmond, the first Supreme Elder, was the first to rise, and speak.

    ¡°Someone report the casualties!¡± He ordered. The Martial Elder in charge of keeping count of disciples, rose.

    ¡°As the battle was short lived, there were not many casualties. About five hundred Disciples died, as well as twenty three Martial Elders. The numbers on the enemy side, were a bit higher,¡± he reported. Garmond nodded.

    ¡°Alright. Our current situation is quite tight. It seems the Demon Sect has rallied against us, by gathering sects. It is certain that they have at least five powerful sects on their side, but it is highly likely that the Ping and Pong Sects are with them as well, as they were responsible for poisoning the Sect Master. If there are eight sects against us, where one is just as strong as us, with a peak Legendary Saint, we are highly outnumbered. But there is still hope. The Demon Master has not been seen for four hundred years, since Sect Masters and his last battle. The Demon Master was very heavily wounded, so he might still be recovering.

    Supreme Elder Isaac reported that he stabilized Sect Masters condition, and it will take up to a few dozen years until he wakes up again. If we can hold out until then, everything should work itself out.

    Thus, for now we need more allies. This Sect war, will undoubtedly turn into a war spanning the entire continent, and it will affect other clans, so it will turn into two sides. The sects that are with us, and the sects that are with the Demon Sect.

    So we will go to as many sects as possible, and have them join us. As you know, there are five sects which we have always been close to. The Fen Sect, the Lai Sect, the Lin Sect, the Vu Sect and the Death Sect. We, the five Supreme Elders will go to these sects. You, the Martial Elders, go to all the sects with similar morals as us. Anyone who worships the Demon God, and his group, will most likely join the Demon Sect, so go for the ones that worship Death, Life and Nature, and the others in the God of Death''s realm. You¡¯re dismissed!¡± Garmond ordered. The last parts of his speech surprised me. I didn¡¯t actually know that much about the sect, and I certainly didn¡¯t expect them to be worshipers of the Dread Father. After all the Martial Elders left, only the five of us were left. I had a few questions to ask, as well as a little thing to say.

    ¡°Do any of you know where my wife, Amelia, went?¡± I asked first. The female of the Supreme Elders, Nana, said, ¡°I believe she went on sacrifice mission, in the name of our religion. I was surprised how fine she was with it. After all, it¡¯s basically murder.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s not weird, as we have always been followers of the God of Death, as he was the one that created me. Perhaps you have heard of the divine nature of my being?¡± I asked. Now everyone was even more surprised.

    ¡°We heard, but are you really a Demi God of Death? I was expecting you to be from some lesser god,¡± Garmond exclaimed. ¡°But this is good! Now that I think about it, you are still at the Saint level, right? That explains everything. That¡¯s why you could withstand the ¡®Chaos God¡¯ method. Good, very good indeed!¡± He continued.

    ¡°Alright, now we need to decide who goes to which sect. Isaac, you go to the Lin Sect, as you sparred with their Supreme Guardian, the Sect Master''s brother. Rumours say that he¡¯s even stronger than the Sect Leader, but preferred to let his brother rule. He acts as the guardian of their sect, as well as the executioner. A very strong man, but still inferior to you, Isaac. Now that you are here, you would be the equivalent of him. Therefore, I do not mind imparting my position, as first Supreme Elder, to you.¡± Garmond stated. I looked him in the eye.

    ¡°Elder Garmond, I do not wish to take your position away. I am a Demi God, and I was tasked to adventure the world, to get stronger, and more experience, by Dread Father, so I cannot stay here forever. I will at most stay here for a few hundred years, before I continue my journey. Therefore, I am satisfied with my position. After all, I have lived almost my entire life as the top figure, the strongest there is, so it is a refreshing change, to know that there are people above me. Now, at this moment, counting all the empires, Mage Schools, and organizations here, I don¡¯t even number in the top hundred. Amongst the cultivators, the ones with the strongest force, I only number as the third strongest. Refreshing indeed. But if there is no other matters to partake, I shall leave now, for the Lin Sect.¡± I said.

    ¡°Well, if that¡¯s your wish, fine then. We won¡¯t hold you any longer, Elder Isaac.¡± Garmond said, then I turned and left, wings sprouting from my back. When the Elders saw my wings, it reminded them that I wasn¡¯t human, nor elf, or any race they knew of. Nana, the third Supreme Elder, was in fact, an elf.

    The Sword Sect had several different races in it. Although the majority of the Sect was human, they were still only about seventy percent of the population. There were several different races, like Elves, Dwarves, Draconians, and a few avian bird races.

    As I flew through the skies, I realized, I had no idea where the Lin Sect was. Luckily for me, there was a caravan below me. I quickly flew down to them, first giving them dear, before they marvelled at the sight. They were more than happy, to point me in the direction of the Lin Sect, as well as the nearest city, that could teleport me there.

    Thus, I flew at full speed, towards said city. Like that, it only took me one hour, going to the city, and teleporting to the city nearest Lin Sect, then flying over to the Lin Sect. Quickly, I found the Sect Master, who was not happily surprised, as I interrupted him.

    ¡°Who are you?! How dare you bulge in like that!?¡± He said, as he released his heavy aura, but my response was to do the same. My aura had been altered, by the ¡®Chaos God Technique¡¯, so it was far heavier than his own. His aura quickly disappeared, and when it was gone, I willed my own away.

    ¡°Relax, I¡¯m Supreme Elder Isaac, from the Sword Sect. Your brother should have told you about me right?¡± I asked him. The Sect Master seemingly relaxed.

    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s you? You really scared me there, thought I was about to be assassinated as well. I heard about Assiel, how is he?¡± He asked.

    This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    ¡°He¡¯s fine now, but he¡¯ll probably be out for a few years, at the least. I managed to heal him, for the most part. But that is not the most pressing matter right now. A few hours ago, we were attacked by five sects, who we assume to be controlled by the Demon Sect. A massive war, between all sects, is about to break out. It will be between the Sword Sect, the Demon Sect, and all sects on either side. So I have hurried here, for the sake of your support.¡± I explained.

    ¡°A war is about to break out? This is bad. You can count on our support, as I have always been good friends with Assiel, but how do you think our odds are? There are more Sects that worship their Divine Sphere, than ours, and they have the Demon Sect,¡± he said.

    ¡°Well, as long as the Demon Master doesn¡¯t come back, we will have the other hand, as I¡¯m the third strongest between sects, and the other two are out of commission. My strength can compare to four peak Mythical Saints, and from my spar with Ley, he should be the fourth strongest, and compare to two Mythical Saints. I do not know of the situation on the other side, but the chances of them having someone comparable to Ley is low, and it¡¯s impossible for them to have someone like me, considering that Demi Gods on my level, are beyond rare.¡± I said. When the Sect Master heard me, he was clearly shocked.

    ¡°You¡¯re a Demi God?! What God do you belong to?!¡± He hurriedly asked me. I smiled at his eagerness.

    ¡°I¡¯m a Demi God of Death, belonging to Gebados, although I don¡¯t have any death related abilities, except maybe my ultimate technique, and defiance against death.¡± I said, causing the Sect Master to raise an eyebrow.

    ¡°Defiance against death? What does that mean?¡± He asked. Hearing of my abilities, you would think that it would hint at being a vampire, especially since I was the son of Gebados, but people didn¡¯t know whether vampires came from a god or not, or which one, as it had been several millions years since they were last seen, at the least. The people who could remember them, were very rare. All that was left were stories and legends.

    ¡°Well, I¡¯m very hard to kill. I regenerate extremely quickly, which is what allowed me to train in the ¡®Chaos God Technique¡¯, amongst others.¡± I said. He nodded, understanding that he shouldn¡¯t ask further. Cultivators and practitioners had many secrets, they didn¡¯t want others to know about.

    ¡°So I can count on your support? Good. Also, I never got your name. I spent the last ten years, training in seclusion, so I haven¡¯t learned about the important people of the continent yet,¡± I said.

    ¡°Oh, I am Walton Lin, Sect Master of the Lin Sect, nice to finally meet you,¡± he said. I nodded in return, and introduced myself,

    ¡°I am Isaac Coldblood, head of the Coldblood Clan, second Supreme Elder of the Sword Sect, son of Gebados; God of death; as well as Sylvia and Edward, and Demi God of the God of Death, Gebados.¡±

    Quite the lengthy introduction, but it felt weirdly satisfying to say. As I finished my introduction, Ley entered the room. He had seemingly heard the introductions.

    ¡°And I am Ley Lin, brother of Walton,¡± He said. ¡°There, that¡¯s enough for an introduction. You don¡¯t need a forty word speech.¡± He said, causing me to laugh at him.

    ¡°Good to meet you again, Lin. I come here today, because war is brewing, and we need as many sects as possible on our side,¡± I said, then proceeded to explain him, the happenings of the day.

    ¡°The Demon Sect is acting up? That¡¯s bad, now that Assiel is down, but hopefully, the Demon Master is still not recovered, or maybe he even died.¡± Ley said, but Walton cut in,

    ¡°No, I doubt he¡¯s dead. If he was, then the Demon Sect wouldn¡¯t be acting up. But, he might still be recovering, as this war might last decades, or even centuries. After all, they didn¡¯t think that Isaac would be here, or that he would be able to heal Assiel.¡±

    Walton had always been the smarter one, while Ley was always the stronger one, but don¡¯t mistake, they were both powerful peak Mythical Saints. Ley even thought that he might break through soon, which would make him the first Legendary Saint to be born in a long time, as well as the third in circle of Sects.

    The Sects were the most powerful force in the Sword Continent, to the point that it was even named after the Sword Sect, but that was only because of Assiel and the Demon Master, whose name was known by few. No one knew how they became so strong, as they were by far the oldest beings on the continent.

    An early Saint could live for a thousand years, but that lifespan grew wider, the stronger they got. An early Mythical Saint could live for ten thousand years, plus. Then you had the Legendary Saints. Legendary Saints had such long lifespans that the vast majority of them died in battle, instead of age. Also, you stopped aging completely after reaching the Saint level.

    But even a peak Legendary Saint wouldn¡¯t remember vampires, since it was just that long ago. It was completely forgotten, most facts about them corrupted by time.

    As I was talking, I suddenly remembered about one of my goals, so I decided to ask them about it.

    ¡°Have any of you ever heard of the Legendary Saint, Palazar? He was a necromancer, and was killed as he was about to transform into a Lich. I don¡¯t know how long ago it was, I received his legacy, and want to avenge him if possible,¡± I said. Ley suddenly looked at me with wide eyes.

    ¡°Palazar, the Necromancer? You received his legacy? Does that mean you¡¯re a necromancer?¡± He asked. I shook my head.

    ¡°No, I received the manual on Energy Manipulation Magic, which is a very powerful magic, but it isn¡¯t necromancy. My guess is that he used energy manipulation for battle, while he used necromancy to raise undead minions, and prolong his life. But have you heard of him?¡± I asked.

    ¡°I see. And yes, I have heard of him, but it was only in one of my conversations with Assiel, a few thousand years ago. Back then, it had already been a very long time since he disappeared, so I don¡¯t know much, except that he was very famous, and powerful. I would ask Assiel for more, when he wakes up. He might know more.¡± He said.

    I nodded my head, and thanked him, before turning around to leave, my wings springing out once more. A few hours later, and I was back at my residence at the Sect. Apparently, Amelia wouldn¡¯t return for another few days, so I sat down in a room, preparing to start on the second stage of the ¡®Chaos God Technique¡¯.

    This technique wouldn¡¯t cause as much chaos on my surrounding as before, but it was much harder.

    I began circulating my energy as before, I started absorbing it into my flesh and bones, then returning it to my core, and forming it into small spikes that pierced back inside, then rinse and repeat, until my body couldn¡¯t take it anymore. From there, I started circulating my energies differently. This time it was much calmer, surrounding my bones and flesh, healing them, then covering my core, where it started filling the holes where it expanded. First the core became bigger, by a tiny amount, then it started covering the round shaped core once more, but instead of entering it, it started compressing it, making it smaller and smaller. In the end, it was a tiny bit smaller than before, and more pure and potent.

    End of chapter 5.

    Hey there loyal readers. Tis'' I Lord Martin, Lord of the Dark Realm,  Master of rambling.

    Now that this chapter is finished, I have a small announcement to make. After a few conversations with RagNarok, we''ve decided to rewrite the first fourteen or so chapters, so I''ll be doing that over the next few weeks. Don''t worry though, I''ll still release chapters for both Hunters of the Night, as well as Rise of the Vampires.

    After the rewrite is finished, I plan on publishing the book on amazon. It will be in e-book format, as I don''t have the financial support for physical books.

    Anyways, thanks for reading and please rate and review, follow and favorite. It makes my day, and also helps bring this novel into the light.

 Chapter 6: Abyss

    Chapter 6: Abyss

    Time passed, and in the blink of an eye, three months flew by. These three months were spent training. Through the method of the Chaos God, I broke down my body, as well as the core which had formed inside me, then healed it, again and again, strengthening it further.

    This was the second stage of the ¡®Chaos God Technique¡¯. The ¡®Chaos God Technique¡¯ was divided into six stages. The first two stages, strengthened the body, first, by strengthening the Chaos Energy, which came from the ¡®Chaos God Technique¡¯. The Chaos Energy would naturally make my body much stronger. Then when the Chaos Energy had reached a high enough level, where my body could easily withstand it, the first stage was finished.

    The second stage, strengthens the body even further, by directly infusing it with Chaos Energy. In the first stage, you didn¡¯t infuse the body with Chaos Energy, you only increased it, but since the Chaos Energy is very chaotic, you needed a strong body, or it would be destroyed. By increasing the Chaos Energy, and letting your body handle it, it naturally gets stronger and stronger, until it can easily handle the Chaos Energy.

    Only, such a method is impossible for anyone to train in, except if you have an unnatural recovery ability, like I do, as the body would get ravaged to death.

    Then when that¡¯s done, you infuse the energy into the body, strengthening the body, as well as the Chaos Core further. The Chaos Core, was precisely that core in the body, which was being compressed by the Chaos Energy.

    Infusing the body with Chaos Energy, would rapidly make you stronger, but would destroy the body even more than before. Thus, it was a very painful procedure, only, because the energy is completely contained in the body, it won¡¯t cause as much chaos in the surroundings as before.

    After stage two was finished, my body would be so strong and tough that the recovery ability would almost be obsolete, since it would be very hard to harm me. At least, on my own level, it would be impossible for anyone to pierce my skin. But that was only when the second stage was completed.

    Like that, I spent three months, training in the ¡®Chaos God Technique¡¯, and waiting for Amelia to return. And the day had finally come, as Amelia was finished with her mission.

    ¡°Isaac, you¡¯re back!¡± She exclaimed, as she saw me, then quickly ran up to me and hugged me. I hugged her back,

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for being away for so long. I know that this was supposed to be the time where we could finally be alone together, but then I go into seclusion training for ten years,¡± I said, apologizing for not taking care of her. Amelia shook her head,

    ¡°No, no, you needn¡¯t worry. I also spent a lot in seclusion training, the past ten years. After all, we¡¯re already so old, yet we only now became cultivators. We had a lot of catching up to do,¡± Amelia said with a smile,

    ¡°Indeed you did do a lot of training. You¡¯ve already reached the late Saint level. I reckon you¡¯re the strongest in our clan by now, not including me,¡± I complemented. Amelia just chuckled at me,

    ¡°Indeed, I probably am, but if Erwin, Lilia and the others also got a cultivation technique that matches them, they would reach this level quickly. After all, we reached our current strength without cultivating, so it¡¯s only natural to gain strength quickly in the beginning. I reckon, it will be a lot slower, from now on,¡± she said.

    ¡°Yes, it won¡¯t be as easy all the time. I completed the first stage of the ¡®Chaos God Technique¡¯, but the second stage is far slower. Only the first part is so quick. But in the future, we do indeed need to bring the others here. Our clan can¡¯t keep staying in the outskirts forever after all,¡± I said. We continued to chat for a while, then went into our bedroom, to have some much needed ¡®fun¡¯.

    It had been over ten years, since we last had sex, so we thoroughly enjoyed ourselves for an entire night.

    The next day, a meeting was held, between all the Martial Elders, as well as the Supreme Elders. In the Sword Hall, several hundred people were gathered. In front of these several hundred people, were five more people, giving off a fierce aura. These, were exactly the Five Supreme Elders.

    The meeting was talking about the result of the previous three months of battle, between the sects. By now, most sects had joined one side or the other, and fighting was slowly starting.

    So far, there hadn¡¯t been many battles, or casualties, the two sides were set in stone. It had also been confirmed that the Demon Sect was behind the other side. All in all, forty percent of the sects were on our side, fifty percent on their side, and the last ten percent didn¡¯t join any sides, and were unrelated.

    These sects were all the most secretive sects, which barely ever showed themselves. They had all decided to stay out of the war.

    Garmond, the first Supreme Elder,

    ¡°As you all know, a great war is about to begin. His Majesty, the Sword Master, Assiel, has yet to wake from his slumber, so it falls unto us to win this war. Therefore, I hereby declare that for all disciples and elders alike, it is forbidden to exit Sect Grounds, without permission. The Elite Disciples will also go into seclusion training, for the next ten years! We will fully utilize the Sacred Ground, so that they can increase in strength as quickly as possible, and became Elder level figures. Quickly, go dispatch the orders, and ready yourselves for missions. All Elders will be required to partake in the battles,¡± he said, shocking all the elders.

    Usually, the Sacred Ground would only be used by the top ten disciples, and only once in a hundred years! But now, every single Elite Disciple would enter the Sacred Ground, and go into seclusion training for ten years!

    Normally, it was only ten disciples, but now it would be several thousand! It made me wonder if they would even fit, but what I didn¡¯t know was that even if a million disciples were to enter the Sacred Ground, it wouldn¡¯t matter. The Sacred ground was huge, and millions could fit in there, but if you put that many in, the benefits would be too small.

    The Sacred Ground was a place, which Assiel, himself, found back when he founded the Sword Sect, many thousand years ago. In this Sacred Ground, the energy, or mana, was at a much higher level, and you would cultivate much faster.

    After the war meeting, all the Elite Disciples were put into seclusion training, where they would train for ten years. Ten years in there, could equal over a hundred years of cultivation on the outside, or even more! Only, the energy in there wasn¡¯t infinite. After these ten years, it would most likely be useless for maybe even a thousand years, before the energy recharged.

    Meanwhile, I was going to the skill pavilion. Back then, I had only chosen myself a cultivation technique. Now I was going to find a sword technique. Sure, I had trained my sword for a few hundred years already, but I never had a real sword technique, which uses energy.

    Back then, when I did all those energy waves, with a swing of my sword, it was still only ¡®Energy Manipulation Magic¡¯, and the sword was truly only for show. But if I could find a good sword technique, then my might would grow even higher.

    In the Skill Pavilion, I directly went up to the top floor. Once more, I began looking through those several tens of scrolls and books, looking for a suitable skill. Many of them were cultivation skills, but there were also several sword techniques, spear techniques, knife techniques, etc.

    I looked through all of them.

    ¡®Heavenly Sword Art¡¯, ¡®Two Bladed Sword Style¡¯, ¡®Shadow Sword Technique¡¯ and many others.

    However, I still felt like something was lacking, while I walked from skill to skill. I even started looking and the knife and spear techniques, but I preferred the sword. It was much more versatile than a spear, or knife, as it had longer reach than a knife, and was easier to handle in close quarter combat, than a spear.

    Suddenly, I noticed something. One of the bookshelves, was actually inclined, by a tiny, unnoticeable amount. If it wasn¡¯t for my superior vision, I would have never noticed it. Curious, I went to the other side of the bookshelf. Indeed, the bookshelf wasn¡¯t touching the floor, by a tiny minuscule amount. I tried pushing the bookshelf to the side, and what I saw surprised me. There was a small compartment in the floor, which had caused the bookshelf to incline.

    I opened the compartment, and inside, there was an old, ragged book. The compartment was full of dust, and it looked like the compartment hadn¡¯t been opened in millennia. I grabbed the buck, and blew the dust off, making a large cloud of dust.

    There wasn¡¯t even a name on the front page, and it was bound in leather. I grabbed the book, and dusted it off, creating a large cloud of dust. I opened the book, and saw the name.

    ¡®Abyss Sword Style¡¯

    Just the name had a menacing ring to it. I decided to quickly read through it the book, and as I saw the contents, I had immediately decided. From what I could gather, the ¡®Abyss Sword Style¡¯ originated from the Abyss Sect, but I had never heard of it before. I was certain that it wasn¡¯t a sect in the Sword Continent, as knew just about all of them.

    I immediately stored it in a pocket, inside my jacket, and went back down again. As I was very curious about this Abyss Sect, and the ¡®Abyss Sword Style¡¯ I decided to go look for Garmond, as he was the oldest, and most knowledgeable of the Supreme Elders.

    If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.

    After looking around for a while, I finally found him.

    ¡°Elder Isaac, what brings you here?¡± He asked.

    ¡°I have come to ask you something. Have you ever heard of the Abyss Sect?¡± I asked. Garmond had a slightly surprised look on him.

    ¡°No, I have never heard of it. At least, it¡¯s not a sect here on the Sword Continent, that¡¯s for sure. Why do you ask?¡± He replied.

    ¡°No, it¡¯s nothing, I just came upon some text that mentioned it. I was just curious. I will take my leave now,¡± I said, as I turned around and left, before Garmond could ask any further. For now, I didn¡¯t want him to know about this ¡®Abyss Sword Style¡¯.

    I decided to wait for the day Assiel would wake up, and ask him then. I suspected that the only person who would know about this sword style, would be him. That compartment was so well hidden that I suspected Assiel himself, had put it there.

    Back at my residence, I immediately found myself an empty room, and started practising the ¡®Abyss Sword Style¡¯. I had to admit, even for me, it was a very complicated technique. I continuously swung my sword, in accordance with the manual, but I could never get it to look like the pictures shown in the ¡®Abyss Sword Style Manual¡¯. All I could do was persevere, and continue.

    Thus, ten years passed, where I trained the ¡®Abyss Sword Style¡¯ for half the day, and cultivated in accordance with the ¡®Chaos God Technique¡¯, before something finally changed. I felt something change in my body, as my core changed, and the energy in my body evolved. After I went into seclusion training, back then, to train the ¡®Chaos God Technique¡¯ I had reached the peak level rather quickly, only it took much longer to perfect the first stage. Thus, since I reached the peak stage of the Saint level, I had spent almost twenty years, in constant training, and now I had finally broken through! Only, the ¡®Chaos God Technique¡¯ was still only in the second stage.

    As for the ¡®Abyss Sword Style¡¯ I had just perfected the first stage as well, after practising for ten full years. In fact, it was that, which triggered my breakthrough, into the Mythical Saint level!

    Immediately, in a burst of excitement, I manipulated the energy in body, and started floating. I was standing in mid-air, without the use of my wings! It was truly a spectacular feeling.

    As for reaching the early Mythical Saint level, it meant I finally had the might of an early stage Legendary Saint! Only, I knew I was still no match for that Demon Master, as he was a peak stage Legendary Saint! At most, I would be able to handle a middle Legendary Saint, due to my body, but I wasn¡¯t confident in beating him, except if I used the ¡®Ruler of the Night¡¯ ability, to shed my corporeal body, or went into my true form.

    As for right now, it was time for yet another war meeting. We had decided that once every year, all the elders of the sect would gather for a war meeting, and this year was even more special, since the Elite Disciples were coming out of seclusion training.

    When I arrived at the Sword Hall, only the Supreme Elders were there, and they were all looking at me with astonished expressions.

    ¡°Elder Isaac, you had a breakthrough?!¡± Nana asked excitedly. Amelia behind me chuckled, as I nodded my head with a smirk.

    ¡°Now I reckon I could even fight against a mid-level Legendary Saint, without losing. If I were to use my ultimate technique, I could even win. Yet, the Demon Master is still too high above, and I reckon I would need several hundred years to reach that level. Reaching this level in almost twenty years, was only a nice after effect on starting to cultivate so late.¡± I said, as I walked up to the other Supreme Elders. Amelia stood below, where all the Martial Elders would be, as she wasn¡¯t permitted to stand with the Supreme Elders. Even then, she was still the Martial Elder with the most status, as she was my wife, and amongst Martial Elders, she was the strongest as well.

    In fact, she was even qualified to be a Supreme Elder, as her true strength was that of a mid-level Mythical Saint, due to transcending three stages, but she wanted to stay as a Martial Elder for a while longer.

    If she was to decide to become a Supreme Elder, she would immediately take the position of fifth elder, as she was stronger than the current fifth elder. All the others, were at the middle stage, or above.

    As the tenth annual war meeting was finished, the results from the last ten years of war had been decided.

    Amongst the various sects on our side, over a hundred thousand disciples had died. The precise number on the Demon Sect was unknown, but it should be slightly larger than our own side, but they still outnumbered us.

    As for elders, collectively, around 150 elders were dead on our side, and around two hundred on their side.

    As for the casualties on our side, about one thousand disciples died, and two elders. The elders would most of the time survive on both sides, as the elders went on missions in small squadrons, so the fights weren¡¯t as large scale, and they would often manage to escape, but they had to use many treasures.

    Suddenly, just as the meeting had ended, a disciple had rushed into the Sword Hall.

    ¡°Lords, I bring grave news!¡± the disciple said, as I kneeled. Garmond looked at the disciple with a slightly worried look.

    ¡°Speak!¡± He ordered. The disciple raised his head to speak,

    ¡°In this recent battle between two thousand disciples of the two sides, our side was completely destroyed! The few survivors who made it back, brought grave news. The Demon Sect has deployed Mythical Saint level experts, and three of them!¡± he reported. There was an astonished look on everyone¡¯s faces. In these ten years, not a single battle between mythical saint level experts had appeared, but now they used three of them, in a battle of disciples and Martial Elders, as well.

    ¡°Is this true?¡± Garmond asked with a grave expression.

    ¡°Yes, it was one of the surviving Martial Elders who reported the news,¡± he answered,

    Suddenly, as he said that, a blur flew into the Sword Hall. The person who appeared, was Ley, of the Lin Sect! He didn¡¯t even wait, before he started talking,

    ¡°You heard what the youngling said, but that is not all there is to it!¡± He immediately spoke. Garmond, the leader of the Supreme Elders, looked at him in confusion.

    ¡°Brother Ley, what do you mean?¡± he asked. Ley had a grave expression, as he spoke,

    ¡°My brother and I were the first to hear of it, so we rushed to the battlefield, to handle those Mythical Saints. Never would we have imagined they were peak Mythical Saints. Through using die or live methods, they managed to trap my brother in seal formation, but they didn¡¯t kill him. Instead they told me that if I were to bring Isaac to them, alone, then they would release him, but we can¡¯t bring Isaac into a trap! He¡¯s the biggest trump card we have!¡± Ley spoke in one breath.

    ¡°Its fine, I can go,¡± I said, making Ley, as well as all the Martial Elders, minus Amelia, shocked. Only the Supreme Elders had a calm smirk on their faces.

    ¡°Haven¡¯t you noticed? I have already broken through, and have become a Legendary Saint level expert. There are only that many peak level Mythical Saints, and with my strength and body, I reckon I could handle between fifty and a hundred peak Mythical Saints. After all, they don¡¯t expect me to be this strong,¡± I said. As Ley noticed, a huge smile appeared on his face.

    ¡°Congratulations, Brother Isaac! This is, this is truly spectacular! Indeed, like this, they surely won¡¯t be a match for you, and you can easily trick them, by suppressing your aura. Alright, like this, I don¡¯t mind letting you walk right into this trap, as it will be turned right against them!¡± Ley spoke with confidence.

    ¡°Indeed, this is actually a very good opportunity. To deal with Isaac, they are going to have most, if not all the peak Mythical Saints of their side present. This will give us a huge advantage,¡± Garmond said.

    ¡°Alright, it¡¯s decided! Brother Ley, bring me there!¡± I said. Ley excitedly nodded,

    ¡°Yes, let¡¯s go right away, it¡¯s a bit of a distance to fly,¡± Ley said, as he turned around. I immediately followed him out. A moment later, we were soaring through the skies, going to a clear as daylight trap, for the sake of using all the advantages it brings.

    End of chapter 6.

    Here''s chapter 6. I didn''t have time for writing the past few days, since it was the national day/s of our country, but it''s here now. The re-write is going super well, I''ve finished a whole chapter and a half!

    Anyways, please rate/review and follow and favorite!

    Thanks for reading!

 Chapter 7: Its a trap!

    Chapter 7: It¡¯s a trap!

    We flew through the air, for what seemed like a few minutes, before we arrived at a clearing. Inside the clearing there were around thirty people, and a small, dome shaped barrier, in the middle of them. Inside the barrier was, Walton Lin, Sect Master of the Lin Sect, as well as Ley¡¯s brother.

    ¡°Here we are. But there are thirty of them now. This is bad, they must have sent for reinforcements. But with your strength, you should be able to handle them, right?¡± Ley said, as he looked at me, with a slight nervous expression in his eyes.

    ¡°Yes, I believe I can handle them, but you better stay out of sight. In a battle with this many experts, you will only be a burden,¡± I said, in a serious tone. Ley nodded in understanding.

    ¡°Yeah, this is beyond my capabilities. Only a Legendary Saint would be able to handle this, I believe. Well then, I leave it to you!¡± Ley said one last time, before turning around, and leaving. He wouldn¡¯t be completely leaving, but he would go hide somewhere nearby, until it was all over.

    As for me, I went towards the menacing group of experts. As soon as I got close, they all noticed me, seemingly surprised that I actually came, and that I was so quick about it.

    I looked towards the group,

    ¡°Well, I¡¯m here! What are you waiting for, release Walton!¡± I shouted at them. My aura, which I suppressed to how it was, when I was a peak Mythical Saint, was quite intimidating. But not enough to scare them, when they were in such a big group.

    ¡°Sure, we¡¯ll release him, but not before we send you to the afterlife!¡± One of them shouted, as several lights began shining around me. Quickly, a barrier had formed around me. I tried poking my finger at it, only to find that it was completely solid. I gave it a punch, using the strength of a peak Mythical Saint, but nothing happened! It didn¡¯t even shiver or shake, it was completely intact.

    ¡°Hahaha!¡± They laughed, as I had been caught in their trap, ¡°You actually fell for it! We set up a formation before you arrived! No one in the Mythical Saint level is capable of getting out of it! Not even you! So, sit back, and prepare to die!¡± The one who seemed to be the leader of this bunch practically screamed at me. He seemed to be very delighted of his ¡®success¡¯.

    All I could do for now, was to give them an awkward smile. Quickly, all thirty of them surrounded me. They spread out all around the barrier making several rings, some standing on the ground, others floating in the air.

    The space inside the barrier was rather small, only allowing a few meters of breathing room. Suddenly, all the various experts started doing something, all sound coming from outside disappeared. I couldn¡¯t hear a single thing going on outside. It was so quiet, the only thing I could hear was my own voice, and the small critters that had been captured with me.

    I saw them preparing what looks like an attack, not at all worried that I would escape. They saw the punch I threw before, which they assumed to be my full strength, so why would they worry? It hadn¡¯t even shaken the barrier; no reaction at all. I made a worried expression, to act as if I was actually worried, but deep in my mind, I was still as calm as ever.

    The attack took a while to charge up, and after about five minutes had passed, I actually began to worry a bit. An attack that took this long to charge coming from thirty peak Mythical Saints, was bound to be strong. I was about to try and break the barrier once more, but it was too late.

    The attack was released.

    Bright lights began forming around the Mythical Saints, and all flew at me in a flash. There were hundreds, if not thousands of them, and there was no room to dodge.

    I felt a deep flash of pain, as a thousand burning spears of light pierced my body, in an instant. With the strength of my body, several of them couldn¡¯t even pierce my skin, but there were too many. It didn¡¯t take long, until my body had been skewered several thousand times, and I fell to my knees. I had been skewered all over, but I had barely managed to protect my heart and head. If both my heart and head, were to face such damage, it would be extremely hard to recover.

    All of them were looking at my damaged body with victorious smiles, as they thought my life had expired. Only Ley, and Walton were looking at me with extreme shock and despair plastered on their faces.

    I was the only trump card that they possessed, but now I had died!

    Or so they all thought, but as they all were either despairing, or celebrating, I let a maniacal laugh out,

    ¡°HAHAHAHAHAHAH, YOU FOOLS SERIOUSLY THINK THIS IS ENOUGH TO KILL ME!!!¡± I screamed from the top of my destroyed lungs, which should not be able to emit any air at all. Everyone instantly had a shocked expression on their faces, as they couldn¡¯t believe what was happening. I was in a state that not even a Legendary Saint could survive, yet I was laughing as if nothing happened.

    Suddenly, a pool of blood exploded around my body, and started to wrap around me, shaping my body. Everything about me changed, from my height, to my muscular structure, to my hair colour.

    I rose up from my knees, and stood over two meters tall. My hair reached down to my waist, and was a piercing silver colour. My skin became pale, almost silver in colour, it would shock any being with its beauty. My feet formed into claw like structures, and my hands had become claws as well. Out of me elbows, were two extremely sharp spikes, which emitted a brilliant luster, as if it could pierce through the hardest metal, as if it was butter.

    Everyone looked at me, some with shocked expression, others with despaired expression, as they realized, they had messed with a being far beyond what they could handle, something they had never seen before; never even heard of.

    Suddenly, another explosion of blood happened, and formed a rapidly expanded dome, which instantly destroyed the barrier, and trapped all of the Mythical Saints inside.

    Screams reverberated, as they began seeing several horrible illusions, and as they were attacked by the blood field. All the Mythical Saints felt that their blood was being controlled, as I used the ability of the Blood Tyrant.

    They blood acted in ways unwilling to them. Some immediately lost their lives, others were wounded, while some weren¡¯t affected.

    After what seemed like an eternity, but was only a short moment in reality, the huge dome of blood red, disappeared. Immediately several corpses fell to the ground, while spurts of blood sprayed from others. Only a few were relatively unaffected, as they had gotten lucky, and had escaped the Blood Tyrant.

    Using it on this many people at the same time, was tricky. In the end, only around ten people died, while another ten people were wounded. The rest were unaffected.

    Slowly, I flew up into the sky, to look down on the others; to instil an image into their minds. They could not match me.

    ¡°I came here for the sake of getting my friend, not meaning any harm. But then, you decided to trap me, and use an attack so powerful, it completely destroyed my body. You even forced me into my true form. Now that you have seen me like this, do not believe you will be able to live.¡± I said, in a weirdly calm voice, yet so unimaginably menacing voice, it caused all the various Mythical Saints around here to pale. Even Ley and Walton paled in fright.

    In a quick flash, my wings flickered, and my body disappeared, only to reappear in front of three of the wounded Mythical Saints. There was a quick flash from my hands, then all their heads detached from their body, and hung in my hand, from the hair.

    Another instant later, and I appeared in front of another small group, and kindly detached their heads, only to let them hang with the others.

    It only took a few instants, and a few swift motions, before my body had appeared in front of everyone, and quickly relieved them of their heads. As the last body hit the ground, before any of them had even managed to react properly, I swiftly zoomed through all the other dead bodies, and collected their heads.

    Most of the people here had long hair, as it was very popular among strong people to have long hair, for some reason.

    Then, as I was finished, I returned to my human form, and calmly walked towards Walton, with thirty peak Mythical Saint heads hanging from my hand. The ones that didn¡¯t have long hair, I had made their blood harden into a blood rope, using the same ability from before, but on a smaller scale.

    Walton was looking at me in fright, but quickly calmed down, as he remembered, I was on their side. As all the Mythical Saints had died, and all the formations had been ravaged in the blood dome, the barrier surrounding him had long disappeared.

    I had made sure that nothing would happen to him in the blood dome, even though I was extremely enraged. By now, my rage had mostly disappeared though, as I had managed to vent properly.

    Walton looked at me mind-numbingly for a few seconds, before he came to.

    ¡°A-ah, Lord Coldblood, you saved me! I am eternally grateful to you, for risking yourself to save me!¡± He said, and gave a very low bow. Usually, peak experts like this, would never bow like that, but when seeing such a scene, they wouldn¡¯t even hesitate to kowtow! In this world, strength ruled everything. Especially in continents like this, where all the major organizations were sects and magic academies and the like.

    This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    Only a few moments later, Ley made it to us. He had an expression of disbelief, as he looked at me.

    ¡°Lord Isaac, I must say, you surprise me. I never expected you to have a true form like that. I guess that means you really aren¡¯t human then. Would you mind telling us what race you are?¡± Ley asked, respectfully.

    ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter what race I am, as it was only created a few hundred years ago, at my birth. I was the first one, as my father Gebados, the God of Death, created me.¡± I said as an answer. They clearly realized that I didn¡¯t want to go further with this, so they didn¡¯t ask anymore.

    ¡°Well then, let¡¯s return. I¡¯m sure the others will marvel at this little gift I prepared,¡± I said, as I lifted the bundle of heads up. Ley and Walton looked a bit frightened at the sight. Something like a bundle of thirty peak Mythical Saint heads, was not something you would see often.

    The two only nodded, as they couldn¡¯t make themselves say anything. They were truly shocked at my brutality, but they understood that I had been thoroughly angered before.

    After a few moments, we made it back to the Sword Sect, all three of us. Walton and Ley had decided to come with me first, before going back to their own sect. They really wanted to see the reaction, as I brought back thirty Mythical Saint heads.

    All the Elders and Supreme Elders were anxiously waiting for our return as I returned, but as they saw the heads, they were clearly surprised. They weren¡¯t as shocked as Walton and Ley were, as they hadn¡¯t seen the horrible scene of me decapitating everyone, including the corpses.

    ¡°Elder Isaac, what is this you are carrying in your hand?¡± Asked Garmond, his voice cracking a bit, as he was a bit nervous at the sight.

    ¡°Well, it didn¡¯t go as smoothly as planned. They had prepared a powerful barrier to trap me, then they spent five minutes charging an attack. The attack was truly powerful, as it left me with thousands of gaping holes in my body, and completely destroyed my body. In my fury, I took on my true form, killed all of them, decapitating every single one of them. I decided to take their ugly heads with me, as a souvenir,¡± I said, as I threw the bundle of heads, which had been tied together using their own blood, to Garmond.

    Garmond Stumbled as he caught the heads,

    ¡°You can decide what to do with the heads,¡± I told him. Garmond nodded his head, as he looked at all the heads, with a surprised expression. He recognised many of them, but they were all enemies, so he didn¡¯t care. Amelia had been looking at everything with a smirk.

    A large smile crept unto Garmond¡¯s face, as he stared at all the heads, counting them,

    ¡°With this, at least two thirds of their peak Mythical Saints have perished! The tables have turned, and we now possess a massive advantage! This is great, truly great! We must celebrate! Immediately prepare for a sect wide festival!¡± He announced.

    The very next day, a three day long festival began, where the entire sect participated, and several others even joined in, for the festivities. It was truly a great time.

    The day after the festival, Amelia and I, were alone in our bedroom, passionately making out.

    ¡°I came a bit close to losing my life there,¡± I said, as I recalled the fight. Coming that close to death, had truly enraged me. Amelia looked at me with a worried look.

    ¡°Isaac, my love, you have to be more careful. If I lost you, I wouldn¡¯t be able to bare it. You should have been more careful. Didn¡¯t you get that one ability, after reaching the SS level, the ¡®Tyrant¡¯s Author¡¯ ability? If you used that ability, then you wouldn¡¯t have been hurt so severely. Its defence is supposed to be very strong right? If you used it, you wouldn¡¯t have been so hurt. You¡¯re not even fully recovered yet,¡± she said to him, complain apparent in her voice. I looked at her with a happy grin, as I knew how much she worried about me, and how much she loved me.

    ¡°I didn¡¯t react in time to use that ability, and I never used it before. I also didn¡¯t think that the attack would be that powerful. Next time, I promise to be more careful. This little event has made me realize, I¡¯m not completely invincible,¡± I said, just before giving her a passionate kiss, letting my tongue explore the inside of her mouth.

    I let my hand go under her blouse, as I fondled her breast. Amelia let a small moan out, at the pleasure. She immediately returned the deep kiss, and started letting her hand flow through my hair. Her other hand was exploring my back.

    As we were passionately making out, I pulled off her blouse, to reveal her exposed chest. Her breasts were so perfectly shaped, just the sight of them, could put any man in a deep trance.

    I fondly fondled one of her breasts, as I kissed down her neck, slowly making my way to her nipple. I started sucking on one of her nipples, making my tongue go in circles around it. Amelia immediately moaned in pleasure,

    ¡°You know, I really do enjoy having sex with the others, and I love them like sisters, but all of having sex together, will never beat when it¡¯s just the two of us. Isaac, I love you so much,¡± she said with a passionate voice, a few moans interrupting her in between sentence. I looked up to her face, while traveling down with my hands, go under her, already revealed, panties. She let out a loud moan, as my fingers slipped inside her.

    ¡°Amelia, you were the first person I met after I became a vampire, the first person I turned. You were the first person I fell in love with, and the one who the one whom I lost my virginity to. You will always be the number one to me, the one I love most. That is why I chose to have you come with me, as the others pale in comparison to you. I still love the others, just none compare to the spot you hold in my heart, my true love,¡± I told her, making her smile a large, fond smile.

    I couldn¡¯t hold myself, and gave her a deep, passionate kiss, as I ripped off her panties, tearing them in the process. In kiss, Amelia started to take my pants off, then my underwear, exposing my erection.

    I didn¡¯t dally, as I led it towards her, and finally entered her. She wrapped her legs around me, as I started moving, while still kissing.

    We kept going for a few moments, when Amelia pulled apart, and started pulling of my shirt.

    ¡°I can¡¯t be the only one naked here! Your chest is just as attractive to me, as mine is to you,¡± she said, as she pulled my shirt off. I gave her a grin, as I lifted my arms up, to make it easier for her to get it off.

    As soon as my shirt was off, she pulled me close, until my chest touched her breasts. I quickly resumed moving my hips, as she started moaning in pleasure. I myself, couldn¡¯t help but to let a few moans out, as it just felt too good.

    My penis was moving inside her very wet pussy, in quick motions, while she was passionately caressing my back, and whispering several cute sentences into my ear, about how much she loved me.

    I couldn¡¯t help, but let loose, into the passion, and returned several passionate lines to her, although many didn¡¯t make much sense,

    ¡°I love you¡­ You¡¯re the best¡­ It feels so good¡­ You mean so much to me,¡± several lines like those, were being exchanged between us, as our hips moved.

    After a while of passionate sex, our bodies were completely naked, not a single article of clothing on our body. Somehow, our position had changed. I was sitting up, while she was sitting in my lap, raising and lowering her hips in rhythm.

    ¡°Ah, I love you so much!¡± Amelia moaned, her voice radiating pleasure. I deeply kissed her, dampening her moans.

    ¡°After this war is over, let¡¯s go exploring the world, until, we find a nice and calm place to stay. When we¡¯re finally there, let¡¯s have a baby, and raise it there,¡± I said, after I released her from my kiss. Her eyes widened at my idea, and her smile radiated blinding happiness, making my heart melt. At that moment, I couldn¡¯t help to fall even deeper in love.

    ¡°Really?!¡± She almost screamed, ¡°I would love that! Please Isaac, let¡¯s do that, let¡¯s do that!¡± she shrieked in happiness, not even remotely able to stay calm. Ever since my other children were born, twenty seven years ago, she had always wanted a child. Now that I had promised her that we would settle down somewhere, for a while, and have a child, she was extremely happy and excited. Seeing her like this, made me just as happy.

    ¡°Yes, let¡¯s do that,¡± I said, somehow making her smile even wider, as she nodded excitedly.

    After that idea, she started riding me even more passionately. It didn¡¯t take long after that, for both of us to climax, but even then, we hadn¡¯t had enough.

    We continued having passionate sex for the entire night, not falling asleep until the sun had rose again, for at least two hours.

    End of chapter 7.

    And here it is. I''m so so so sorry that it took so long T_T I had a pretty bad writers block, and even though I had a few ideas about the fight, I just couldn''t write it. It was pretty weird, and frustrated me a lot.

    Anyways, thanks for being patient, and thanks for reading!

    Please rate/review and follow/favorite, it makes my day! Thanks!

 Announcement!

    Hey there! This announcement might be considered as bad news though, or it might not.

    Well, anyways, I''m not going to post any RotV chapters for a while. That doesn''t mean I won''t be writing though. I''m going to spend some time planning the next chapter, as a pretty big even is coming up, and I wan''t it to be pretty good. Also, if everything goes to plan, the next chapter will be really long, kinda like in chapter 12 or 13, I can''t really remember.

    This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.

    Anyways, I will still be releasing HotN chapters, so don''t worry about that.

 Chapter 8 (Un-edited)

    Hey there! So here it is, chapter 8. It took a while... way longer than expected, but I just got so freaking much homework the past month. I mean, it was completely unexpected. I didn''t get nearly as much last year, but oh well. I can''t really do anything about that.

    Anyways, here it is, and I''d say the wait was worth it. This thing''s a beast! It''s almost twice as long as chapter 12, being over 20000 words, and 62 pages long! So yeah, even though the wait was longer, you get like 6 chapters worth here!

    Also, this chapter is broken into parts, being numbered in roman numerals. I did that, so it would be a bit easier to read. 62 pages is a bit much to take in one sitting, but now you can just read the parts, which go from I to XII, being twelve parts, plus a prologue.

    Also, one more thing. I think RagNarok is a bit busy right now, since he''s not coming online much, so he hasn''t had the chance to edit this yet. I upload it now, since I don''t want to make you guys wait any longer. So yeah, unedited for now, but I''ll post the edit as soon as it is done.

    Anyways, without further ado,

    Chapter 8

    Prologue

    The festival had passed, and days had gone by. After the festival, we had held another urgent war meeting, as new variables had entered the hand of war. Originally, our side had been outnumbered, both in the numbers of common soldiers, as well as the elite masters.

    But now, it was difference. While we still might be outnumbered in the number of commons disciples, a factor such as that, meant nothing in the face of overwhelming strength. Our side now possessed far more elite masters. In the recent skirmish, the Demon Sect side had lost more than half of their Mythical Saints. Perhaps, even less than a third remained. And that number would quickly diminish in the coming battles.

    And to top it off, our side contained me, the sole able Legendary Saint, of the entire continent. But that is a factor, which is dependent on one single, unstable variable. The Demon Master. The state of the Demon Master was unknown to us. We did not know whether he was alive, wounded, healthy or sick.

    He was but a single unstable factor, but he was a factor that could completely turn the tide of battle to the enemy¡¯s side, and shatter all hope which we possessed. But for the side of the Demons, we also possessed such a factor. For they did not know the state of our Sect Master, Assiel the Master of the Sword.

    They did not know whether he was recovering, or whether his life was slowly dwindling away, but a sliver of the thread of life, hanging from his soul, connecting to the Realms of Nether.

    But at this very moment, the tides of battle swayed in our absolute favour. Therefore, there was but a single action, which we would take. Destroy the Demon Alliance. Advance our armies, destroy their Sects, kill their disciples, eliminate their Elders.

    It had been decided. The all-out war would finally begin. All the disciples and Elders of all our Sects were assembled. Divisions and companies were made, Elders were given ranks of General, Captain, Lieutenant, and so on. Every single disciple and Elder were put into the army, no exception. The Supreme Elders, and the Sect Leaders, were all given the rank of Grand General, in charge of all the forces, of our Sword Alliance.

    And thus, the war, which would be known by many names, throughout the continents, had begun. The Great War, the Crimson War, the Blood Wars, the Wars of Grim, the Demon Crusade, the Sin War. Known by many names, yet not a single one with good meaning. The war in which death was defined, the war, where mercy meant death, a war which coloured the continent in crimson red.

    The war, which showed the mortality, of even the greatest of beings, even the most beloved.

    The War of Sanguine.

    I

    The gates opened, and out marched the forces of the Sword Alliance. Division after division, company after company. In the head, were the commanders of the forces, riding on, headstrong, on the backs of their mighty Drake Steeds.

    Their steeds were the mighty Drakes, descendants of Dragons, but they were not like the Drake which a great battle had been fought against, hundreds of years ago, by the forces of Coldblood.

    These Drakes did not possess special bloodlines, and were of limited strength, but they were still mighty steeds, none the less.

    The mighty armies of the Sword Alliance marched forth, with one purpose in mind. Take the first stronghold from the enemy, annihilate the first Sect, and proclaim war.

    The numbers of disciples, numbered in the hundreds of thousands, the number of Saint and Mythical saint level Elders numbered in the thousands. The number of peak level Mythical Saints, numbered in the tens.

    This was truly the mightiest force, which the continent had seen in millennia, and even further back through time, such an army was rarely seen. For this was not just an army of large numbers, but every single soldier present, could shatter mountains, annihilate entire cities.

    This colossal force, which the world had never seen before, was for the purpose of sending a message. A bloody message.

    The army marched forwards, the Five Supreme Elders in front. Normally, the Supreme Elders wouldn¡¯t all participate in the battles, but this time, everyone was there. Many treasures had been taken out, both for the purpose of having even more power in the coming battle, as well as safe guarding them, while the sects were left close to unguarded. They were not completely unguarded though, but if the sects were raided now, they wouldn¡¯t find many treasures.

    Thus the army marched for many days and nights, before the horde of powerhouses arrived before their target. Of course, the army was huge, so there was no way that the enemy sect didn¡¯t notice them.

    Thus, the leader of the enemy, as well as a few cohorts, arrived in the sky.

    ¡°Why are you here?!¡± The old man shouted, demanding an answer, as to why such a huge army had arrived before his doorstep.

    ¡°Why are we here? You know very well that there can only be one answer, to that question. The conquest has begun, and wars shall rage. This is the end of you Demon worshippers! We shall kill all of you, and gift your souls to our Patron, the God of Death! And his very son, shall bear witness!¡± Garmond shouted, as he pointed towards me, with his open hand.

    I had not intended to reveal my Identity, to the knowledge of common folk, but I guess it would be fine. After all, we didn¡¯t intend to let even a single enemy live.

    The leader of the enemy side looked at me, both in horror and shock. He was a big shot on the Demon side, so of course he knew of the plan to kill me, and he would definitely be able to recognise me.

    ¡°He¡¯s alive. You¡¯re alive! Tell me, what happened to the others! TELL ME!¡± He shouted furiously. Most likely, someone dear to him had been present there. A smirk appeared on my face.

    ¡°You ask what happened to those fools?¡± I asked back, when my body disappeared, in a flash. Less than an instant later, I reappeared before the sect leader, and his cohorts.

    ¡°I killed them, of course,¡± I said, with the same smirk present on my expression. The old man¡¯s face paled, as his eyes widened. Even the cohorts were taken aback.

    ¡°But worry not, I brought something back with me. Garmond, the bag!¡± I shouted back to Garmond, as he threw me a big, heavy, leather bag, to me. I easily caught the bag.

    ¡°Here,¡± I said, as I threw the bag to the old sect leader. The man caught the bag, and slowly opened it, with foreboding sensation. As the bag was opened, and he looked into the leather bag, his face was devoid of blood, and it seemed as if a bit of his soul escaped.

    ¡°This, this,¡± he mumbled, ¡°you, you, you, you killed all of them. Not a single survivor, NOT A SINGLE SURVIVOR, ALL DEAD!¡± He screamed, as he dropped the bag.

    ¡°Worry not, your head is about to join them,¡± I said, as I, in a flash, decapitated both the sect leader, as well as his cohorts, and blood sprayed everywhere, in the immediate surrounding. Barely a minute had passed, and four heads had already entered the bag.

    ¡°Now, COMMENCE THE SLAUGHTER!¡± I shouted, raising my hand high. Immediately, every single disciple and Elder, charged into the sect, and commenced the slaughter, on the ill prepared enemy, who had already lost their leader, as well as the strongest elites.

    War cries, and shouts of battle commenced, as wave after wave, of brave fools charged into the sect, and slaughtered anyone in their way.  The poor fools in the enemy sect didn¡¯t stand a chance. They were vastly outnumbered, and they were but a single sect.

    Even if they were one of the larger sects, in the front of several tens of sects, hundreds of thousands of disciples, thousands of Elders, and several tens of Mythical Saints, they could do nothing, but die.

    They fought valiantly, but one, after the other, they all fell victim, to the fate of death. Even the Supreme Elders joined in the fun. The battle only lasted for a few moments, before the grounds were bathed in blood. Dismembered and bloody bodies adorned the ground; corpses of both sides.

    The few people who hadn¡¯t been killed already, had surrendered, and been captured.

    After the battle was over, all the captives were gathered. Garmond had come over to me,

    ¡°Well, that¡¯s it. The battle is over. It was a complete massacre, thousands upon thousands dead. But for now, what should we do with the captives?¡± He asked me, seeking guidance. I was quiet for a while, before an idea struck my mind.

    ¡°We¡¯ll kill them. But we¡¯ll also use them to send a message,¡± I said, cryptically, making Garmond look at me curiously.

    Without wasting a single moment, I started sending out orders. First, I had the disciples decapitate the heads of all the deceased enemy disciples. Then I had them build a huge gallows, out of the corpses of the fallen soldiers; big enough to hang every single surviving enemy.

    A few hours later, and it was ready. The survivors, who numbered a few hundred, were gathered in a line, along the huge gallows, formed out of countless corpses. Each and every one of their faces were pale; even several of our own, had pale faces. But my eyes didn¡¯t even as much as flinch at the sight. I had seen worse things. Like and entire village slaughtered by an uncontrollable beast, of infinite bloodlust, where not even children were spared.

    In this cruel world, you had to get used to things such as those. Especially in times as these; ravaged by war. Garmond looked at me in new light; he had no idea I could be so cruel.

    ¡°Isaac, I must say, I never expected you to do something like this. Never in my life, have I seen such a cruel sight,¡± he said. I didn¡¯t even look at him, as I replied,

    ¡°I am the son of Death. My very nature is revolved about death and killing. Doing something like this, is nothing, but my nature. And it¡¯s not the worst thing I¡¯ve done. They are soldiers, in times of war. More despicable have been done, in the name of war.

    Hear me, Garmond. These coming years are going to be nothing like before. You have to be cruel, merciless and if necessary, evil. Things such as pacifism is not going to win this battle,¡± I said. Garmond nodded silently,

    ¡°I understand all this. I have lived a long time; something like this won¡¯t face me,¡± he said.

    As our little construction was finished, and the several hundred survivors were hanged, we went to last part of my little plan. Using all the severed heads we had collected form the fallen disciples and elders, we constructed a message.

    ¡°This shall be the fate of all, who league themselves with the Demon Sect. There shall be no mercy, there shall be no exceptions. All will die!¡±

    Thus the message told, in large words, that used thousands upon thousands severed heads. And thus, as the first battle had finished, we returned home victorious.

    II

    A dark room; headquarters of the Demon Alliance.

    A group of powerful men and women, were gathered around a table, in a dark room. Although the room was dark, it was brightly lit. The sense of darkness in the room, was not in the sense of light, but atmosphere. Everyone was in a very dark and tense mood, as they had received some very bad news.

    ¡°It¡¯s been one month, yet we¡¯ve already lost three whole sects, and three more peak Mythical Saints. What shall we do,¡± a beautiful woman said. There was more silence.

    ¡°We need to fight back. We still possess the numerical advantage, so we should be able to deal some damage. The only problem is that they vastly outnumber us in peak Mythical Saints. But there are only so many of them, and they can¡¯t all be everywhere at the same time.

    We¡¯re a bit late on the uptake, but we need to start fighting back, now,¡± and old man said. Most of the people present nodded their heads, in agreement.

    ¡°You¡¯re right. We definitely need to fight back, and destroy as many of their sects as possible. But as it is now, we don¡¯t possess a single chance at winning this war. Our numbers, won¡¯t be able to do anything against their peak Mythical Saint. And to top it all off, there is that man.

    The man who sprang up out of nowhere, and made it to the Legendary Saint rank, in a measly ten or twenty years. He¡¯s an absolute monster. We were no match for him even as a peak Mythical Saint, but now, he could probably kill all of us at the same time. After all, he already killed almost two thirds of us, at the same time,¡± another man said.

    ¡°What you say is true, but we cannot lose hope! We¡¯re the ones that started this, so we have to deal with it. If we can only hold out for long enough¡­ We must hold out until the Lord recovers!¡± A young woman said. Again, most of the people present nodded their heads.

    ¡°Hmm, yes, if the Lord recovers soon, we could definitely win. But what about that Assiel? We all know that he didn¡¯t die from the poison. We don¡¯t even know his true state right now. He could very well be recovering, and he might recover before the Lord. Assiel and the Lord¡¯s strength are equal, so it¡¯s truly too uncertain,¡± the same man said,

    ¡°Yes, there is the problem of Assiel, but what do you propose we do? There is no chance we can get to him, and finish the job. That Isaac is there. And¡­ I have received some information about Isaac. Some terrible, terrible information,¡± the old man said. Everyone¡¯s interest had been piqued, and they looked at him, with worried expressions.

    ¡°Isaac, is no mere mortal. He is a Demi-God, the son of a God. And not just any God, but the God of Death!¡± He said, an almost panicked expression on his face. Everyone was shocked, at the indeed very dire news.

    ¡°He¡¯s a Demi-God?! Then we must hurry! All Demi-God¡¯s, will naturally become Immortals, and many reach the power level of a Demi-God as well! If he reaches that level of power, then we are truly doomed!¡± Someone exclaimed.

    ¡°Indeed. So we must fight, and we must fight now! We cannot sit idly and let them destroy us, but we also cannot wait, until that Coldblood reaches an invincible power level! Yet there is only one thing we can do. Fight this war, and hope that the Lord recovers soon.

    But at the very least, I can tell you that there should not be long left. We just have to hope that Assiel doesn¡¯t recover first,¡± the old man, who seemed to be the leader, said. Everyone nodded, and they then began to make plans for war.

    Sword Sect, Isaac¡¯s residence.

    Amelia and I were having our dinner, out of ornate, golden chalices. In the chalices, there was a delicious crimson liquid, with a taste so divine, yet most people would be disgusted by it.

    ¡°It¡¯s been one month now. The Demon Alliance is sure to start retaliating soon,¡± Amelia said. Amelia was very familiar with the aspects of war, as she had experienced many in those five hundred years. More than even some of these old experts, as all-out war, was very rare, in such a stable land.

    There were only small skirmishes, between the sects and organization, but very rarely and full blown wars, with eradication in mind.

    ¡°Yes, they should strike soon, but I expect they will be very cautious. It is likely that they have heard of my true identity, and they will likely want to wait for that Demon Master to recover. If he truly does recover, then it will be very bad. But we don¡¯t intend to wait that long.

    If we can find him while he is still recovering, we might be able to kill him. After all, he most likely has all his attention on recovering, so he wouldn¡¯t even notice us there. But his hiding place will probably be very hard to find, so it¡¯s a bit of a predicament.

    But as long as Assiel wakes up first, then we should be set,¡± I said. Amelia nodded in agreement.

    ¡°Indeed. We have already destroyed three of their sects in one month, so we are going at a good pace, although that speed is bound to lower drastically now. After all, we can¡¯t continue to send our entire army out, and leave everything unguarded,¡± Amelia spoke.

    We continued to chat, about various things, like the war, and home, as we had our dinner. We knew that there was a fifty percent chance that we could lose this war, but we were calm, none the less. If it came to it, we could slip out of this place, and go to some other continent. I had a slight suspicion that the other Supreme Elders might even suggest it, since I was the Son of Death, as they had taken to call me.

    The sects of the Sword Continent were very religious, and the Sword Sect worshipped the God of Death, and his sister, the God of Life, as well as various others.

    Since I was the son of the God of Death, it was very important to then that I didn¡¯t die, as I was an important religious figure.

    As we had expected, the Demon Alliance started to fight back shortly after that. They had already attacked and destroyed one sect, after one month, albeit it was only a small sect.

    And thus, the war truly started.

    Three years passed. After the first few months, the pace of the war had slowed down significantly, and only a few sects would be destroyed per year. This was due to the Demon Alliance being very defensive, and it was hard to push through. And sending all the peak Mythical Saints wasn¡¯t a good idea, as that would leave our side pretty much defenceless, and they could counter attack themselves.

    We would only send a few peak Mythical Saints in at a time, but we would always have more of them, than the Demon Alliance. On the other hand, the Demon Alliance still possessed superior numbers in the common soldier, but that number was quickly shrinking. In just another year or two, they might have even fewer disciples, than our side.

    But, I had a feeling that the war hadn¡¯t even fully blown out yet. It was still pretty calm, as there were only a few major battles every year. And so far, not a single peak Mythical Saints had died, except than the first one. Even more, only a few Mythical Saints had died at all.

    But then, it was as if the heavens had fallen down to earth, bringing calamity in it¡¯s wake.

    A youngling rushed into my residence, not caring a single bit for ritual or tradition, not even waiting for permission to enter.

    ¡°Second Supreme Elder, disaster had struck! The First Supreme Elder told me to get you in all due haste! You must hurry to the gathering of Elders!¡± The boy explained in a rush, seemingly very nervous and scared.

    To see someone as mighty as the First Supreme Elder almost panic, meant that something big had happened.

    ¡°Relax boy. I¡¯ll go immediately. Let¡¯s go Amelia,¡± I said, as I immediately readied myself to go. Amelia nodded, and an instant later, we had arrived inside the Sword Hall.

    ¡°Garmond, what¡¯s going on? Has something happened?¡± I asked. Garmond was silent, as the four other Supreme Elders, and all the other Elders looked at him.

    ¡°Calamity has struck. Four sects, four peak Mythical Saints; all destroyed. Just now, I received a report that a whole four sects have been destroyed, together with their four peak Mythical Saints! But that¡¯s all of it.

    The Demon Alliance, has allied itself with the Mages of Ember. The Mages have joined the battle,¡± he said, a very gloomy look on his expression. Everyone¡¯s expressions tensed, as they heard his last words.

    ¡°The Mages have joined the battle.¡±

    These words were indeed dire. The Sword continent, was largely dealt into two different groups. The Cultivating Warriors, and the Mages. These two sides were equally powerful, if not considering the Sword Master, and the Demon Master, however, their structure was vastly different.

    The cultivating world, was composed of thousands of smaller sects, and hundreds of stronger sects, but the Mages world was different.

    There were only three major powers in the Mages world. The Mages of Ember, the Order of Tarnish, and finally, the Kitserra. Among these groups, not much was known about Kitserra, except just its name. The Mages of Ember, and the Order of Tarnish were open schools of magic, and possessed numerous branch schools, and practically all the magic schools and academies of the continent belonged to them.

    However, Kitserra was not to be reckoned with. Nothing was known about them; their locations, what schools they had, what magic they practised; nothing was known. Except for just one fact. Neither the Mages of Ember, nor the Order of Tarnish would dare cross them.

    However, the Kitserra would never act, never interrupt in ongoing affairs, so the two groups didn¡¯t concern them too much about the Kitserra. After all, the Kitserra only concerned itself about the affairs of magic, and reaching perfection. Nothing else was known.

    However, much was known about the Mages of Ember, and Order of Tarnish. The Mages of Ember was a group of justice, and honour. They resent evil, and would go to great lengths to maintain the forces of good.

    The Order of Tarnish, however, was an evil group, which revered in chaos and destruction. Their very presence was illegal in many counties and provinces, although that didn¡¯t help much, as they still managed to find their way into every country.

    Naturally, the two groups were very antagonistic. But they were also very powerful, and if the Mages of Ember had lent their help to the Demon Alliance, then things were bad. Very bad. All our current advantage might just have disappeared into thin air.

    ¡°What are we going to do?¡± Someone asked.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know. The Order of Tarnish won¡¯t help us, after all, they love nothing more than chaos, and our God is one of the personifications of order. They would never help someone who worships the Gods that keep the world in order,¡± Garmond said,

    ¡°Then there is only one option left. The Mages of Ember have joined the enemy side, the Order of Tarnish are likely to stay on their own, and cause as much chaos as possible. Then there are only the Kitserra left,¡± Garmond continued. Everyone looked at him, as if he was a madman.

    ¡°Just how do you propose we do that?¡± One of the Supreme Elders asked. As a response, Garmond looked at me.

    ¡°Isaac, I think it¡¯s time we reveal your identity to the world. Make it official. This is the only thing I can think of, to make the Kitserra help us. In the very long time, I¡¯ve been here, I¡¯ve never heard of a Demi-God appearing. At the very least, it might spark the interest of the Kitserra,¡± Garmond said.

    I stood silent, thinking. I had originally not wanted everyone to know, but by now, several people already knew. It was likely that even the enemy side knew.

    ¡°Fine. We¡¯ll reveal it to the world. Hopefully, this will put the situation in our favour again. After all, time is running out,¡± I said.

    ¡°Good. Then, you will have to leave the Supreme Elders, and take on a new title. You are a Demi-God of Death, the son of the God of Death, Gebados. Therefore, from this day hence, you shall be known as the Apostle of Death! Let it be known, the Apostle of Death has appeared! Spread the word to anyone with ears!¡± Gebados yelled his orders out, and the Elders immediately went to order their disciples.

    ¡°Isaac, now that you¡¯re not a Supreme Elder anymore, maybe it¡¯s time I became one, in your stead?¡± Amelia said.

    ¡°Hmm, well, you are strong enough. It would be better for our forces too, so why not. Just don¡¯t think you have to do something rash, just because of your new position. We still have a family back home, to think of,¡± I responded, although a bit unwilling, but I didn¡¯t want to stop her. I couldn¡¯t make stay useless. She was a strong woman after all.

    ¡°Garmond, I think we should induct Amelia as a Supreme Elder. After all, her true strength has already reached the middle stage of a Mythical Saint,¡± I told him. He was somewhat surprised, but he knew she was related to me, so it wasn¡¯t weird for her to have strength beyond her rank.

    ¡°Of course, I should have known that she is stronger than she looks. If her strength is at the middle stage, then that would make her the new Third Supreme Elder, behind Supreme Elder Nana,¡± Garmond said. Then he turned to the Elders that were still present.

    ¡°Good! Then, let it be known that not only has the Apostle of Death appeared, but a new member has been inducted into the ranks of the Supreme Elders of the Sword Sect!¡± He roared, as if he was letting the entire heavens know.

    All the Elders present roared back, in applause. Such events were just what they needed, after suffering such big casualties.

    And thus, the news of the Apostle of the God of Death appearing in the Sword Sect, spread through the entire continent, and even further.

    III

    Far, far away, in a hidden place, shrouded in mists and mystery; in a valley, surrounded by trees and cliffs; there was a hidden civilization. The people of this secluded kingdom, were small in stature, and slender in form; possessing small wings on their backs; a peculiar glow, surrounding their body.

    The grasses and leaves of the land, were shaded cobalt and lush, with green and fresh colours, woven into its fabrics.

    The sky was like a sparkling lake, yet covered and undisclosed, hidden underground, yet still outside.

    The entire existence of this place was peculiar and mystical.

    But deep down, in the underground valley, there was a majestic palace, of such size that it seemed like a whole continent could fit in, yet when you got close, it seemed small and cozy. But then, inside, it yet again grew large, and august.

    Deep inside this palace, in the throne room, there sat a king, an emperor, the leader of an ancient civilization.

    The aura he permeated, was one of imminent death, and assured destruction, yet it emitted a feeling of utter peace, and tranquillity, like a spring in summer.

    This figure was tall, and beautiful; a one of a kind, amongst these short, petite people, where they wouldn¡¯t grow more than an arm¡¯s length, at most. But he was still slender delicate.

    On the majestic figures side, sat a beautiful woman, only a bit shorter than the king. Her aura was similar, almost identical, to the kind, yet dreadful king on her side.

    They both sat in complete tranquillity, until the mouth on the male, raised up, into a smirk.

    ¡°It seems, ¡®he¡¯ has finally appeared,¡± his voice sounded, permeating a sense of complete stillness, complete tranquillity; complete solitude; into the hearts of anyone who might have heard.

    IV

    In a hidden place, on the Sword Continent, there was a large amount of buildings, forming what seemed to be a city. Amongst these buildings, there were a lot of churches and chapels. Amongst these churches and chapels, there was an especially large cathedral.

    Inside said cathedral, there was an old man, wearing dark, black robes, kneeling in front of a statue. The statue was of a hooded, shrouded man, holding a cross in his hands.

    A man, dressed in red robes, quickly walked up to the elder man, kneeling behind him, a nervous expression on his face.

    ¡°This Bishop pays his respect to the Pope,¡± the Bishop said quickly.

    ¡°Speak, Bishop,¡± the apparent Pope said.

    ¡°This Bishop bears important news for the Pope,¡± the Bishop said, in a calm voice, only betrayed by his expression.

    ¡°The Information Bureau has been informed that an Apostle of Death, has appeared in the Sword Sect. After gathering more information, it has been confirmed that it is very likely to be true. At the moment, since the Sword Master, and the Demon Master, are both disabled, this Isaac Coldblood possesses the greatest strength in the entire continent, despite only just having reached the Mythical Saint level. His current strength is at least at the early Legendary Saint level,¡± the Bishop reported calmly and to the point.

    ¡°Hmm,¡± the Pope pondered, ¡°With that amount of power, at his stage, it is indeed very likely that he is Son of Death. Good. For now, observe him, and see how he will fare in this war, now that the Mages of Ember have joined the Demon Sect. Then, before too much damage is done, we will join the Sword Alliance. The Mages of Ember might be righteous, but we will always uphold order, and that cannot be gained through going against the Gods of Order,¡± the Pope Ordered,

    ¡°If the Apostle of Death dies, then order will be upheaved! Now go, deal with your orders, and make sure that Order remains,¡± the Pope continued, before giving his final orders.

    ¡°Yes, Most Holy Father,¡± the Bishop said, before turning around, to give out his own orders.

    Then, another two years passed. The advantage we once possessed had become nothing, but a memory lost in time. We didn¡¯t even have more Mythical Saints anymore, as over ten of them had died, and the Mages of Ember had brought quite a few peak level Mythical Saints with them.

    We had lost many sects, and our numbers were dwindling. Things were looking bleak. Many of the battles we fought, were lost, but from time to time, I or Garmond, or the other peak level Mythical Saints would intervene. When that happened, we would often win, as no peak level Mythical Saint would go intervene on their own.

    The peak level Mythical Saints that had died, had all been the ones belonging to the attacked sect. And naturally, when I fought a battle, all hope would be lost for the enemy, but it was rather rare for me to take effort, to go all the way to the attacked sect.

    When I had intervened, I had always happened to be close. In the past two years, I had spent quite a bit of time with Ley, from the Lin Sect. He was the one who was closest to me in strength, as he was the strongest Mythical Saint. He was also the first person I met after coming out of seclusion training, back then.

    Thus, our friendship had grown quite deep, and we now considered each other good friends. He also didn¡¯t treat so much like a holy symbol, but was more casual with me.

    This was the reason I grew quite nervous, when the message boy rushed into my residence, bearing news of the Lin Sect being sieged.

    It was no secret that Ley and I were good friends, so the message boy had spared no amount of time or effort, and rushed directly to my residence, not even awaiting permission.

    ¡°Holy Lord, the Lin Sect has been sieged. Currently, a great battle is being fought, against the forces of the Demon Sect, and the Mages of Ember. There are several peak level fighters there!¡± He said, with all due haste. When he finished, he started panting, as he had rushed a great distance, to make it here as quickly as possible.

    ¡°What?! This is bad. Boy, you¡¯ve done a great service coming here. I¡¯ll take off immediately, now go and report this the First Supreme Elder, and tell him that I took off!¡± I said.

    ¡°Yes, Your Holiness, I¡¯ll take care of it immediately!¡± The messenger said, and took off. Immediately after, I sprouted my wings, and took off at full speed. Even though I could fly without my wings, they would give me a great speed boost.

    Time was off the essence, since it was clear that the Lin Sect was greatly outnumbered. They Lin Sect, only possessed two peak level Mythical Saints, and it sounded like the Demon Sect and Mages of Ember had brought several peak fighters with them.

    Ley could handle two peak Mythical Saints, and Walton could handle one, so they equalled three peak Mythical Saints, but I had no idea how many the enemy possessed.

    Thus, my wings flapped, and created hurricanes in their wake. I flew as quickly as I could, and set my course for the Lin Sect grounds. It only took a few moments, before I managed to get there.

    It was in times like these, that I hated the fact that there were no teleporters in the Sects. All sects were against using teleporters to get into the sect, as being able to get to the sect grounds was like a test of might.

    As I saw the situation, my face paled. There were corpses everywhere, both disciples from the Lin Sect, as well as from the Demon Sect, and Mages of Ember.

    I quickly scanned the area, and both to my luck, and dismay, I found Ley and Walton. Ley was fighting against three opponents, and Walton was fighting against two.

    Walton had been injured, and was barely holding out, while Ley¡¯s situation was better. I didn¡¯t dally long, as I saw that another opponent was getting closer to Walton, seemingly to sneak up on him.

    I quickly found out that there were six peak level Mythical Saints present. A great number, as each side only possessed a few ten, counting the Demon Alliance and Mages of Ember separately.

    With a burst of power, I rushed up to Walton, interrupted the back stabber.

    ¡°Humph, quite courageous of you to sneak up on a wounded opponent like thus,¡± I said with a cold voice that sent shivers down the backs of the enemy, yet gave a warm sensation to Walton. A sensation known as hope.

    ¡°Isaac,¡± he spoke, his eyes widening, and mouth forming an open smile, as he saw me. The enemies however, paled, as they saw me.

    ¡°It¡¯s the Apostle!¡± One of them screamed.

    ¡°You have finally grown brave enough to attack one of the main sects, huh? And you really though I would sit idly, as one our most important assets, was being attacked? Not to mention that Ley is my good friend. Truly foolish,¡± I said, as I flapped my wings, creating hurricanes of wind, blowing everyone away.

    ¡°However, I feel quite good today, as I was able to save my good friends brother, in the nick of time. Then, if all you peak Mythical Saints sever your own heads, I shall let one millionth of your forces live! Truly, truly, I won¡¯t even hinder their departure, and let them do as they will. However, if you resist, I shall slaughter every single one you. The men will be burned and decapitated; drowned in the blood of their own brethren, and the women will be raped, and torn apart. Surely, there won¡¯t even be a single survivor,¡± I said, with a frighteningly kind and calm voice.

    The enemy commanders looked at me in horror, but their faces were still stern.

    ¡°Then, what will it be?¡± I asked, one final time.

    ¡°Go burn in hell, where you belong!¡± They responded.

    ¡°So be it.¡±

    My body disappeared, only to reappear a distance behind two of the peak Mythical saints, holding two red lumps of meat in my hand, as they fell to the ground. I smashed the hearts in my grasp, and quickly spun my body, in the direction of the sole woman in the group.

    I grabbed her neck, and started squeezing it, until it wasn¡¯t connected to her body anymore.

    The remaining three peak level Mythical Saints tried to run, but I gave them no mind, as I pursued the one, who went in the opposite direction of the other two. I quickly caught up, as my speed might be my greatest attribute, when I used my wings.

    Using my colossal wings, that seemed to cover the heavens, I smashed them into the Mythical Saint, and smashed him into a pulp.

    ¡°Truly, the difference between a Legendary Saint, and a Mythical Saint is colossal,¡± I said, before I turned my attention to the other two.

    Flying in a bow around them, I quickly made it in front of them, causing them to abruptly stop.

    ¡°Hum, I am truly in a good mood today, after getting such a relaxing stretch. Alright listen here. If you cut each other in half, vertically, I shall let one of you live,¡± I said.

    Of the remaining two Mythical Saints, one of them belonged to the Demon Sect, while the other was a Mage of Ember. The Mage of Ember looked at me in disgust, but the eyes of the Demon Elder flashed, as he in a swift motion, cut his ally in two, from head to bottom.

    He quickly looked at me, a glimmer of hope in his eyes. I slowly hovered over to him, then grabbed his neck, and then started to drain his life force, through my control over blood.

    He looked at me in horror, as he felt all the blood in his body leave him.

    ¡°You said you would let me live if I killed him! You said you would let me live!¡± He shouted, as he realized he was going to die.

    ¡°Are you stupid?¡± I responded.

    ¡°I said I would let one of you live, if you cut each other in two. Only you cut him in two, he didn¡¯t cut you in two. And when I said one of you, I mean one of your disciples down there, one of the soldiers belonging to your factions. But oh well, I feel merciful today, so I will let one of your men live,¡± I said, as I drained his body dry, until only a withered husk was left.

    Ley and Walton quickly made their way up to me.

    ¡°Thank the Gods, you made it here when you did. Had you only been a second late, I would have died,¡± Walton said.

    ¡°Indeed, we truly owe you a debt now. Not once have you saved my brother from death, but twice! Now you¡¯ve even saved me too. We can never fully pay you back, friend!¡± Ley said. I smiled to him, while all the minor soldiers on the ground were looking up.

    The disciples of the Lin Sect finally saw hope, while the disciples of the Demon Sect, and the Mages of Ember, knew true despair.

    In the past few years, when you heard the words, ¡°The Apostle is here,¡± it could only mean one thing. Absolute destruction.

    Not even once, when the Apostle of Death had come into the battlefield, had there been even as much as a single survivor. His arrival, had always left a wake of death and destruction.

    I was the only reason, why our side could still remain somewhat fearless. As long as I was there, our main stronghold would never be attacked. And now that this event had happened, it was likely that the major powers in the Sword Alliance would remain somewhat safe.

    ¡°Ley, my friend, you need not worry about such trivialities. You are my closest friends here in the Sword Continent, and we are part of the same alliance. If I didn¡¯t come save, I would be both heartless, as well as stupid. Not only are you my friend, you the second greatest asset we possess, as the strongest Mythical Saint. I simply cannot afford to let you die, neither do I want it. Now if you will excuse me, let me show everyone here a bit of my power,¡± I said, as I turned back to the forces below.

    I slowly pointed my hand towards the frozen battle below, as I drew some blood from my veins, as well from the corpses of the surroundings. Then, in an instant, the blood gathered on the battlegrounds, and formed a colossal crimson dome.

    Immediately, screams ensued, and the dome seemed like a still storm, as all sort of undisclosed horrors happened, in the boundary of the crimson dome.

    A few moments later, the dome faded away, to reveal massive amounts of desecrated corpses, and rivers of blood. Only the disciples of the Ley Sect remained.

    The Ley disciples had horrified looks on their faces, as they had seen the horrible monsters and illusion with ensued in the blood dome.

    ¡°Listen clearly! In the name of our God, the God of Death, Gebados, I the Apostle of Death, the Son of a God, order you! I order you to commence slaughter, and not let a single survivor remain!¡± I ordered.

    Following my orders, everyone roared in a huge war cry, while the enemy paled, and some even started screaming in horror.

    Then, a huge bloodbath occurred. The hordes of the Lin Sect, stormed unto the remains of the Demon Sect, and the Mages of Ember, who had now significantly lowered in number.

    Under the panic, and despair, they quickly fell, one before the other, until there were almost no survivors left. Every single place the eye could gaze upon, was littered by dismembered and desecrated corpses, showing just how cruel war could be, especially in a world, where a single soldier could shatter walls with their bare fist.

    Now, all that was left, was to execute the survivors, which the disciples went right to. But before they finished to kill everyone, I quickly grabbed a disciple of the Demon Sect.

    He looked at me in horror, not even daring to think what fate was waiting for him.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I told that guy up there that I would spare one of his disciples, for doing as I told him. So you will be free to go. Before that though, let me get some weight of your shoulders,¡± I said, I chopped of his arms, in a swift motion.

    The youngling screamed in pain, as he saw his arms fall to the ground.

    ¡°Well, maybe I should have said, take some weight off your body. Well, to correct my mistake, I shall now proceed to help you, by taking some weight off of your body,¡± I said, as I proceeded to sever off his legs.

    Another scream of pain echoed, as his legs fell to the ground. All that was left now, was a torso, with only a head left. Then I continued to burn the places where his legs and arms had once been, to seal the wounds. Once more, he screamed in anguish, as a foul stench began emit from him.

    ¡°Now, be grateful, as you will be the only survivor from this skirmish,¡± I said. The young boy, seeming to be a teen, could do nothing but moan in response. He lost the ability to speak, from the severe pain he had suffered.

    Then I yelled for one of the disciples to come over.

    ¡°Here, take this fellow. I made a promise to that guy I killed that I would let one of his disciple live. So take this fellow somewhere, where he can live in peace, like the dungeon or something,¡± I said, before throwing the lump to the disciple.

    The disciple bowed, then rushed away.

    Back up with Walton and Ley, we continued to oversee everything.

    ¡°Well, this was quite a lucky event. So far, we have barely managed to kill any peak level Mythical Saints, but now we got six in one go. Although, they have killed over ten of ours. We barely even reach half of what they killed, with this lucky victory,¡± Ley said.

    ¡°Indeed. Things are looking quite bleak. If something doesn¡¯t change soon, our numbers will only continue to diminish. We can¡¯t count on the Order, to get help, and we have no way of contacting the Kitserra. Right now, we at the very least won¡¯t be completely eliminated, but of that Demon Master recovers, then not even I will be able to stop them. I¡¯m afraid, this might be a losing battle, as of now,¡± I said. Walton and Ley were hesitant, but they nodded their heads in agreement.

    ¡°What you say is true, no matter how much we tell ourselves otherwise,¡± Ley said.

    As we were talking, suddenly a large group of people appeared out of nowhere. There were at least several thousand people there, and they were all strong. The weakest was of the A rank, and the rest were Saints, and even a lot of Mythical Saints.

    Immediately, I was alerted. I quickly found the strongest person there, who had a very confused expression for some reason. He raised his hand, for his people to wait. Then, he made his way over to us, with a few cohorts.

    ¡°I see that we were to slow,¡± the man said.

    ¡°Did you come as reinforcements for the Mages of Ember?¡± I asked him directly.

    ¡°Mages of Ember? No, no, we came to reinforce your Ley Sect,¡± the man responded, with a smile on his face.

    ¡°You came here to help us? Who are you,¡± Ley asked, still weary.

    ¡°Don¡¯t be so guarded, we are on your side. As for who we are, you know us as the Kitserra. For the past two years, we have been watching over the war, seeing how well you would fare, against both the Demon Alliance, and the Mages of Ember. We decided that we would interfere when you were about to have a major loss, thus we came here. But I see that the Lord Apostle also decided to interfere in this battle, and thus our help was needless.

    But then instead, let me make this announcement! Hereby, the Order of Kitserra, the Priests of Order, officially enter into the Sword Alliance! We will partake in the war, and take part in any battles needed, until this war has been won!¡± The man said, with a loud voice, thundering all over the heavens.

    It was so loud and overbearing, that half of the people on the ground fainted. It thundered all over the continent, for millions upon millions of miles, not missing a single ear. At that moment, there was not a single person, who understood speech, that didn¡¯t know of Kitserra joining the Sword Alliance.

    Every single Sect Head, every single commoner. Perhaps, the only two people who didn¡¯t know, were the unconscious Sword Master, and the recovering Demon Master.

    ¡°What? Why would you decide to join us? Aren¡¯t the Kitserra supposed to not partake in the affairs of the world?¡± I asked, just as confused as Ley and Walton.

    ¡°It¡¯s not that we aren¡¯t supposed to, but we choose not to. Tell me, do you know of the Gods of Order?¡± The man asked me. I looked at him confused.

    ¡°The Gods of Order?¡± I asked him. He smiled, as he responded,

    ¡°It isn¡¯t weird that you do not know, as it is not common knowledge. The Gods of Order, are the Gods that keep the Order of the Mortal World. Without them, chaos would ensue, and everything would be destroyed.

    At the top of the Gods of Order, the Chief Gods of Order, are the brother and sister Gods of Life and Death.

    The God of Death, Gebados, and his sister, the God of Life, Kiriel. Without these Gods, amongst others, existence would cease to be. Did you hear what I called our order before? The Order of Kitserra, the Priests of Order? Our real name is such, the Priests of Order, but our Order was created by Kitserra.

    Kitserra, was the son of Gebados, in an age long forgotten. He created the Priests of Order, by conferring his knowledge and power unto eighteen disciples; eighteen apostles, before his death.

    These eighteen disciples continued to teach the ways of Order, and made the Order into what it is today. You Isaac Coldblood, are the son of Gebados, the blood brother of Kitserra. The successor of Kitserra. The heir of Kitserra; the heir of the Priests of Order; the rightful ruler, of the Order of Kitserra,¡± the man said. When he was finished talking, he kneeled in front of me, followed by all of his followers.

    All this information had completely overwhelmed me. I was shocked, to be blunt. I had not expected to find out that I had a long lost brother, and that he left a whole Order of Priests for me. It made me wonder.

    Could he be the original vampire, the one who had been before me, but had ultimately fallen? But I knew it was most likely useless to ask, because if this was the case, it would have been millions, if not billions of years ago. And there wasn¡¯t even a drop of vampire blood in any of the people here.

    As I was the progenitor of vampires, I would definitely be able to sense it, no matter how miniscule of an amount it is.

    And thus, the Order of Kitserra; the Priests of Order, had joined the Sword Alliance. A fact that put no small amount of unease into the Demon Alliance, especially the Mages of Ember, and the Order of Tarnish.

    The heads of the Mages of Ember, and Order of Tarnish, had always known not to mess with the Kitserra, since times long forgotten, and now that they had directly joined their enemy, unending unease had been planted into their souls.

    It wasn¡¯t the kind of fear that comes with going against someone who you can¡¯t win against, no matter you do. No, it was the kind if fear and unease that comes from the unknown, because they didn¡¯t know a single thing about the Kitserra. Even their magic was a mystery.

    The kind of magic that could let easily teleport thousands of people, anywhere they could want, this was a kind of magic never before seen. Teleporting, had always been one of the most complicated magics, as it required complicated and intricate magic circles, and great skills.

    Constructing a teleportation array, was something that required a lot of time, so to be able to just appear out of nowhere, was a scary ability.

    Thus, the Demon Alliance, once more went on the defensive.

    V

    In a faraway country, in the backwater continent, of the Marestir Peninsula, on the edge of the world, in an old castle, far older than any human alive.

    In a small room, in said castle, there were three younglings, seemingly in their teens. The three younglings, two girls, one boy, were having a heated discussion. They were discussing a rather important topic, and the boy and girl, were apparently against whatever the other girl had proposed.

    ¡°Are you insane?! It¡¯s been over twenty years, I would barely even remember his face, if it wasn¡¯t for all those paintings! And this world is far bigger than any of us can imagine; finding him is absolutely impossible. We better just sit back and wait. He¡¯ll be back one of these days,¡± the boy said. The girl next to him, who looked quite a bit similar to him, in appearance, nodded his head in agreeance.

    ¡°Come on, don¡¯t be such bores. Just because it¡¯s been twenty or so years, doesn¡¯t mean we would forget him. I still remember his voice! Our kind doesn¡¯t forget easily, you know. I still think we should go out, and find him. It can¡¯t be that hard, after all, he¡¯s an amazing man. He would be sure to get famous, wherever he goes. And aunty is breathtakingly beautiful, so it¡¯s like looking for big bright light, in an immense darkness!¡± The girl, who also looked strikingly similar to the other two, said with a big, confident smile.

    ¡°Even if they are a big bright light, it¡¯s useless, if the immense darkness is endless! If we can¡¯t even get to where the light shines, we won¡¯t ever see it! This immense light of yours, is like looking for a particularly bright needle, in an endless pile of hay. It¡¯s hopeless,¡± the girl said.

    ¡°Well, Kima, Vepas, I don¡¯t mind if you two prefer to stay here, but I still intend to go. Even if I can¡¯t find father, I will at least get some fun out of it. I just ask you two, my dearest dear siblings, please don¡¯t tell mom! At least not before I¡¯m long gone!¡± The girl said, with a pleading expression.

    The boy and girl sighed, but still gave in,

    ¡°Fine, if you really want to go, then go. Just, please be careful out there. We don¡¯t know what kind of dangers await. But we really can¡¯t go with you. If all three of us disappear, they¡¯re certain to send someone after us. But we¡¯ll try to cover for you, right Vepas?¡± The girl, Kima, said. Vepas sighed once more, then nodded his head,

    ¡°Alright, we¡¯ll cover for you Sema. Just don¡¯t stay away for too long,¡± he said. A big smile crept unto Sema¡¯s face.

    ¡°Alright, thank you so much! I promise I¡¯ll be careful, and if my endeavours stay fruitless for too long, I¡¯ll come back, okay?¡± Sema said. The two siblings stared at their oldest sibling, with hopeless smiles.

    ¡°Alright then. Have a good journey, then,¡± the second oldest, Kima said. Sema nodded feverishly, then spun around, and jumped out the window, not even bothering to take any more than she was carrying, with her.

    In the dark of the night, she swiftly made her way out of Sanguine Regis, and Bloodmoon City, making sure, not to be discovered by anyone. She had to be very careful, as the place was full of extremely powerful experts, and very skilled assassins and spies.

    She was still very young, only about thirty years old, so she wasn¡¯t very powerful yet, compared to many others. But after her father left, she spent most of her time training, so she was still very powerful for her age, having reached the A rank. Under the tutelage of the Crimson Knight¡¯s leader, Erwin Barca, she had quickly rose in power.

    But the number of A rankers in the Coldblood Clan, already numbered many, and there were even several S rankers, not to mention the all-powerful Sage. Kato Coldblood, the sword brother of her father. Sema had always respected him a great deal, but sometimes, he just freaked her out.

    He seemed to be all knowing, and it was as if he could see into her very soul. Once, Sema had tried to sneak up on Kato. She had been very sneaky, making her utmost effort, not to be caught.

    Kato had been caught up in reading a book, so she had thought that she could succeed, but then she felt something touch her should. Of course, she turned around, to see what it was, but then she had all of a sudden found herself in a dark cave, covered in spider web, and surrounding be thousands of snakes and spiders.

    The experience had frightened the child her, so much that she couldn¡¯t sleep well for weeks. Luckily for her, it had only been an illusion, made by Kato to frighten her.

    Although, in the end, it came back to bite in the neck, as both Sema¡¯s mother, Serana, and Kato¡¯s wife, Lilia, gave him an earful. After that, he didn¡¯t do any frightening illusions anymore.

    After sneaking around for what seemed like an eternity, Sema had finally made her way out, into the forest, and was speeding through the woods. With her speed, it wouldn¡¯t take too long, to get to the nearest teleporter, and directly teleport to the edge of the continent.

    As Sema was running at full speed, she suddenly hit a wall. Of course, an A ranked vampire, wouldn¡¯t easily run into a wall, but the problem with this wall, was, that it was invisible. She had run into an invisible wall, at full speed, and the impact, of course, knocked her off her feet.

    ¡°OUCH!! What the hell?!?!¡± She screamed, as she looked around in confusion. Then, her complexion paled, and her eyes widened in fright, as she saw the most abominable horror; the being from the deepest pits of her nightmares; the sole being she wished never to meet in such circumstance.

    Kato, stood there, on a boulder, looking down on her.

    ¡°I noticed you went out for a bit, all sneaking around, so I decided to come and ask, where are you going?¡± Kato asked, in his calm voice.

    ¡°Eh, ehm, I, I was, um,¡± she mumbled, not able to make up an answer.

    ¡°I overheard your conversation, with your siblings. You want to go find your father, Isaac, but I¡¯m afraid that¡¯s easier said, than done. You truly do not know how vast this world is,¡± Kato said.

    ¡°Finding your father, it¡¯s simply impossible. At least at the level which you currently are. It¡¯s better if you just come back with me,¡± Kato continued. Suddenly tears started flowing, out of the eyes of Sema.

    ¡°I know that! But I can¡¯t wait anymore! I miss him, I miss him so much! I want him back!¡± she cried. Kato frowned, at the outburst. He had always understood how much it pained her, when her father left.

    Of the three siblings, she was the one closest to her father, and when he left, she had been left devastated.

    ¡°It¡¯s been twenty five years since he left, I just can¡¯t take it anymore! I¡¯m going to find him, and there¡¯s nothing you can do to stop me!¡± She screamed. Kato sighed, then gave her a small smile.

    ¡°If only you were born a few centuries earlier. I have lived for over seven hundred years now, yet, for over half of those years, your father has either been gone, or presumed dead. Once he disappeared for about a dozen years, without a word. No one knew what had happened to him, but he eventually came back, revealing he had been trapped. Then, decades later, he gets wounded, and says he has to go somewhere, to recover.

    But then, he didn¡¯t come back. For the longest time, we thought he had lied to us, and instead had gone and died. Your mother and aunts were all devastated, and were depressed for hundreds of years.

    But then, over four hundred years later, he once more, returned. Your aunt Amelia, started crying hysterically, the very moment she saw him. The only reason she¡¯s still alive, is because we forced her to live, with the bleak hope that Isaac would return. And surely, he did.

    What I mean to say with all this, is, that your father has left us several times, to disappear for a very long time, but each time, he still returned, and I believe he will definitely return once more.

    But, if you truly want to go, I won¡¯t stop you,¡± Kato said, one long breath. When she heard the last words, her eyes widened in surprise.

    ¡°You¡¯ll really let me go?¡± She asked in a small voice.

    ¡°Yes, you convinced me. Now be off,¡± he said, before turning around, and disappearing into thin air. Sema looked at the spot, which Kato had stood on, for a while, but eventually cleared her head, and left.

    VI

    After the Kitserra joined our forces, the Order of Tarnish decided to join the Demon Alliance, in favour of causing as much chaos as possible. But luckily for us, the Kitserra possessed much more might, than anyone imagined.

    They had at least as many Mythical Saints as the two other mage orders, combined. However, they possessed fewer minor forces, in contrast. With the three sides of the Demon Alliance, the Mages of Ember, and the Order of Tarnish, against our two sides, the Sword Alliance, and the Order of Kitserra, we were once more in a standstill.

    However, this standstill was much more stable, as there were no more forces left out, on the entire continent. As it was now, there would be no more major changes in allegiance.

    Thus, war raged on, for a whole twenty years. The battles fought, were bloody and chaotic, claiming not only the lives of mages and disciples, but killing farmers; laying waste to cities.

    Under the destructive battles, a million lives would often be lost. It was not rare, for an entire city to be annihilated, just under the after effects of the battles. After twenty five years of constant battle, hundreds of billions of lives had been lost.

    The Sword continent was a vast continent, having a population of around ten trillion, but as it was now, almost a tenth of the population had been lost.

    Rivers had been painted red, almost permanently. New mountains had been formed, not from debris and destruction, but from bones and flesh. Massive piles of corpses were burned, forming charred hills and plateaus.

    The war was truly bloody, engraving the seed of fear, not only into the hearts of any commoner, but every noble, every soldier, every disciple, every mage. Even the leaders were afraid.

    Any day now, everything they knew and owned could be laid waste to. Sect Masters were afraid that their sect would be next one, to be attacked. All they could do, was to set their forces out, in hope of getting a victory instead.

    After these twenty five years, almost half of the sects had been eliminated, albeit, they were smaller, minor sects. Most of the superpowers were still intact.

    Of course, this world wide war, did not only bring death, in the form of destruction, and warfare. Under the many battles, a very large amount of farms would be laid to waste, and food was becoming scarce, and water supplies were becoming contaminated.

    Each day, huge amounts of people would die from famish. Even the nobles had to be careful with their food supplies, as they never knew when their farms and fields would be rendered useless.

    In the past twenty years, I had fought several times, even Amelia had fought several battles. We needed to do everything we could do, in order to win. Thankfully, the Kitserra had joined us, or we might have been driven into a corner already.

    Speaking of the Kitserra, even though it had been twenty years, and I was supposed to be their founder¡¯s successor, I hadn¡¯t met their illustrious pope, even once. Although, this wasn¡¯t because he wouldn¡¯t meet me, but because never left their headquarters, and I simply had no time to visit.

    I spent all my time, either planning, holding war meetings, or fighting. There was a lot to manage, so I couldn¡¯t just dawdle. I spent a lot of time with Garmond, managing the forces, and planning attacks.

    We had created a huge spy net, in order to get as much information from our enemy, as possible, so that we could sabotage their supply routes, and know when and where they were going to attack.

    Of course, they most likely did the same to us, but at the very least, I was confident that there were no spies in our headquarters. They most likely wouldn¡¯t dare to send any to where I was, as they did that once before.

    The result, suffice to say, was not in their favour. I had managed to extract a lot of information out of that spy. For example, the identity of a few spies, who he happened to know of.

    You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.After that, I had never discovered any spies in the Sword Sect, but were most likely spies in the other sects and strongholds.

    While I was enjoying my own time, a servant boy entered the mansion, seeking audience with me. Of course, I had the guards let him in. When a servant boy sought audience, it was usually to report some news, or something similar.

    The boy entered my study, followed by two Disciple Guards.

    ¡°Your Holiness, I bring news from the Supreme Elders. They ask that you meet with them, for a meeting. Apparently some important news have been brought into play,¡± the servant boy reported, while bowing on his knees.

    ¡°I see. I shall depart immediately,¡± I said, as I waved the boy away.

    Only a few minutes later, and I had arrived with the others. Amelia was already there. This time it was only the Supreme Elders, and my, the Apostle. There were no ordinary Elders present, just the six of us.

    ¡°Why did you summon me?¡± I asked.

    ¡°Our spies have given us some bad news. Some extremely bad news,¡± Garmond said, a heavy look in his eyes.

    ¡°Word is spreading, that the Demon Master will awake soon. The spy told that he had heard from a discussion between two esteemed Elders, but he doesn¡¯t know the exact time limit,¡± he explained.

    My eyes widened, and my mouth gaped, as his words sank in, shocking me completely. I had not expected for him to heal yet; I had hoped for at least a hundred years. For it to be so sudden; it was truly too sudden.

    ¡°This is indeed very bad. We need to hasten our pace. All we can do now, is go all out!¡± I said.

    ¡°Yes, I don¡¯t see many other possibilities,¡± Garmond agreed. Then Nana, the former sole female, shot in,

    ¡°How about Lord Assiel? Do you have any idea about his status? Might he wake up soon?¡± She asked.

    ¡°Hmm, Assiel¡­ Well, we can at least go check up on him,¡± I said.

    Thus we proceeded to go to his chambers, to see him sleeping soundly, in his bed, like he had been for a very long time already. I proceed to examine him, looking for any signs of recovery.

    ¡°Well, he is recovering, but I just can¡¯t ascertain how much longer it will take. He might wake up tomorrow, or he might wake up in a thousand years. I truly have no idea,¡± I said.

    Everyone looked disappointed, but they hadn¡¯t expected much. They knew what the state of their leader was, but they just couldn¡¯t let go of that one hope.

    ¡°Well then, all we can do is go all out. From here on out, it will be constant battle, without rest. Some of us may die, but all we can do is fight! We have no idea how long it will take, until the Demon Master wakes up. It might be a matter of a few days, or it might be ten years, but we still have to fight! We are the Sword Sect, the most prestigious Sect in the entire continent! We cannot lose like losers, we can only lose in a fierce battle, leaving floods of corpses!¡± Garmond yelled, and everyone gave a war cry in return.

    And thus, the final stage of the Sanguine War, and the period of time, which gave it that name, began.

    VII

    Today, the armies of the Sword Alliance marched. There were many nervous faces around, for there had never been such a massive movement before. The entire landscape was dotted by the disciples, made soldiers. From far above, it seemed like a horde of ants.

    All of the Mythical Saints, all of the Saints, and the one Legendary Saint, were all present. The Sects were left almost empty, as we couldn¡¯t spare anyone. This was the last desperate attempt. We didn¡¯t plan on giving the enemy even as much as a chance to invade.

    We wanted to completely tie their hands, attacking from every corner, not leaving a single empty spot. It was a quest of complete annihilation! Nothing would be left in our wake, all lives would be forfeit! Any city under the control of the Demon Alliance, would be sacked. Any Sect of the Demon Alliance, would be destroyed. Any life, which pledged allegiance to the Demon Alliance, every life that settled on the territory of the Demon Alliance, was forfeit!

    The judgement of the Apostle of Death, had been passed! Anyone who worshipped the Demon Gods, had lost their right to life! As the Apostle of Death, the son of Death, I possessed the innate right, to precede over death.

    This was the judgement, which had been passed to every living soul. And no one dared question it. All they could do, was fight back.

    As the armies marched on the half of the continent, belonging to the Demon Alliance, chaos and death, was delivered. Thousands of cities and villages were laid waste. Rivers were coloured crimson, oceans of blood were formed.

    It was like a plague of death, poured over the continent, taking life after life, killing billions every day. Every day, battles were fought, lives were lost. All of the Mythical Saints engaged in battle, every single day, even the Supreme Elders. Not even I, got to rest.

    Sect after Sect fell, but our numbers weren¡¯t exempt either. We lost soldiers left and right, quickly dwindling our numbers quickly. We had already lost a fourth of our soldiers, after six months. But we had destroyed hundreds of sects, and with our number of Mythical Saints, we could keep as many as possible alive.

    Six months had passed, and the continent of the Sword, had been changed, permanently. A vast number of people had been killed, nearing half of the entire population. In the eyes of the people of the Sword Alliance, the people of the Demon Alliance had lost their right to live.

    Thus, all were slaughtered, without mercy. In total, for the entire duration of the war, about five trillion lives had been lost. It was an absolutely astonishing number, and wars as these were rarely seen, in the entire world.

    But this war, had evolved. It was no longer a simple war of power, but a battle of extinction! The goal of both sides, was the complete extinction of the enemy. The enemy no longer appeared as human, in the ¡®rightful¡¯ eyes. They were simply mindless beasts, or so they thought.

    But one things was absolutely true; it was a war of attrition! We slowly exterminated their forces; their population.

    And, all this was because of me.

    I had declared that they needed to die, and thus five trillion lives were lost. The entire half of the continent had been made unliveable. But I had deemed it necessary. And it made me cold. My eyes had lost their previous luster, had become even colder.

    Garmond and the others even seemed intimidated by me. After all they knew. I was the commander here, and I had ordered all the massacres. If it was Garmond, he wouldn¡¯t be able to do it.

    But on this day, six months later, the army under my direct control, had arrived at one of the major sects. The sect was simply called, the Horn Sect. The reason was simple; they practised a technique, which made them grow horns from their heads, giving them a demonic look.

    Because of this, they had taken to worship the Demon Gods. And thus, they had gained good standing in the Demon Sect.

    This was the reason I had targeted them.

    My armies stood outside their walls, silently waiting. Amelia stood beside me, holding my arm. She had never left my side, during this evil war. She knew that even I wouldn¡¯t be able to stay calm and composed, after sacrificing so many innocent lives. She knew, that even I would be affected. So she stayed by my side, helping me stay sane.

    But even with her present, I had still changed; I had become cold, and ruthless. I might have been cold and ruthless before, but it was entirely different now. I would do anything to gain victory, with the best results.

    I knew that keeping our forces in high number was important, so I used several means to kill. Once, I had slaughtered a large number of villages, and sprayed their bodies into cities, in huge numbers.

    This would cause the cities to be covered in a huge, incontrollable number of corpses. Naturally, a plague started, killing everyone. Using this means, I had destroyed an entire country, barely losing any men. However, I refrained from using such methods, since it took a long time. But it was good, to spread a plague in one country, while exterminating another by force.

    As I stood in front of my armies, I raised my hand, signalling them to wait, while my pale face, faced the sect. On my own, I started walking towards the sect.

    After slowly walking for a while, I stood a good two hundred meters from the wall. The disciples of the Horn Sect looked at me nervously. They didn¡¯t dare do anything yet, since they didn¡¯t know what I was planning, and acting foolishly would result in death.

    Slowly, I raised my arm, and pointed towards the gate, with a single finger. A small, black orb formed, and started floating towards the gate. Everyone stared at the orb, nervously, but they still didn¡¯t act. They didn¡¯t think the orb would contain any considerable power, as it was barely a centimetre in diameter.

    However, as the orb finally touched the gate, it was already too late, to express regret. The orb exploded, and annihilated everything around it. Everything around an entire kilometre in radius, was purged. Even I was covered in the colossal explosion. As the clouds and smoke faded, my still body appeared, floating in the air.

    A huge number of people had been killed, but there were still a lot of people alive. While this explosion was huge, and could easily destroy the walls and grounds, the stronger disciples would be able to survive it.

    After all, it was only a weak attack, belonging to the Abyss Sword. The Abyss Sword Technique, was capable of using several void attacks, and abyss attacks, and it didn¡¯t even require a sword. Attacks like the one from before, were better used with a finger.

    However, the more devastatingly powerful attacks, were better used with a sword, or even two. It also possessed techniques that could use several swords.

    As the smoke clouds faded, everyone realized what had happened. Quickly, they collected themselves, and then, with a war cry, everyone charged towards me. They had maniacal expression, as the rushed at me, seemingly not caring about whether they live, or die.

    All that was in their mind, was to get rid of the threat, so that the Horn Sect could live on.

    However, deep in their minds, they knew that there was no hope. Of course, they knew who this man who appeared with his army was, and of course, they knew what happened to the ones he decided to invade.

    Never had there been anyone that came even close to surviving a battle, in which he preceded. The Apostle of Death, was the personification of Death.

    This was the reputation I had garnered, be it for good or for worse, everyone feared me.

    As the hordes of disciple and elders charged at me, suddenly, black winds started spinning around me, going in quick circles. Whenever someone got close to me, they would find themselves torn to shreds, and his comrades would be covered in his blood.

    Thus, with the Winds of the Abyss surrounding me, I started calmly walking towards them. Everyone that came within ten meters of me, became piles of bloodied body parts, and the ground became covered in death, and mutilation.

    I turned my head, as I sensed a slightly strong presence, then calmly sung my sword in his general direction. A huge wave of blackness appeared from my sword tip, and destroyed everything in its path. On the ground, there appeared a narrow ravine, seemingly leading into the abyss, as deep as it was.

    The lucky ones who survived, looked into the abyss, getting a cold sweat. Others fell down, never to be seen again. Everyone decided to stay clear of the ravine, from hence on.

    Once more, I slashed my sword, this time horizontally, cleaving everyone on my path, in half. In a single instant, several thousands had died.

    Then, I pointed my hand towards one of the stronger people present, and he suddenly found himself pulled towards me. There was nothing he could do to resist, as he rapidly flew towards my hand.

    Only a few seconds later, he found that my hand had entered his chest. I let go of my grip on him, and pulled his heart out, causing him to fall lifelessly.

    With the heart in hand, I crushed it, causing huge amounts of blood to spray out of it, surrounding everyone in a several kilometre radius, forming a blood dome.

    The hurricanes and storms of blood surged, within the several kilometres. Within the field of blood, formed sharp blood winds and blades, tearing everything apart. To topple it all off, crimson beasts and horrors started appearing, burying tear claws into the hearts of the enemies.

    One after the other, the disciples fell, whether it was to the wind, or to the horrors. After a few short moments, which had seemed like a never ending line of eternities, the blood dome began to fade away. But even if the blood dome disappeared, there was still an ocean of blood left, in its wake. The ground was littered with desecrated corpses, and mutilated body parts, limbs strewn across.

    Only a few stragglers were left standing, but they all had faded eyes, full of apparent insanity. The horrors inside the field, and the sight of everyone around them, being torn apart, made them go insane.

    I raised my hand to the skies, then let it fall down, signalling my forces to charge. All the soldiers under my command, stormed at the sect, killing any stragglers left outside, before finally clashing with the panicking forces, left inside.

    Although, the vast majority of the enemy forces, had already been extinguished. I flew back up into the open skies, crossed my arms, and waited for the enemy commanders to appear. I waited a while, before I saw a few lines rushing away.

    It seemed they would rather leave all their disciples to die, just so that they wouldn¡¯t have to fight me, and die. I grumped, and started chasing them, relaxingly. I didn¡¯t bother to go full speed, I only chased them at a slightly faster speed, than their top speed. While this was going down, I had an annoyed and bored expression on, causing those cowards to be quite scared. My arms didn¡¯t leave their crossed state, as I gave chase.

    After chasing for a whole hour, I finally lost my patience, and sped up to the top, catching up to them in an instant.

    ¡°Why do you always choose to run away? You used to be so rowdy and energetic,¡± I said, with the same empty expression. The three guys who had tried to make a run for it, all looked terrified and hopeless. They knew that no one had ever managed to escape me. All they could do now, was curse the heavens for sending me, and not someone else.

    As long as it wasn¡¯t me, they would still have hope, but as soon as you came up against me, you knew, all hope was lost. In the past months, tens of Mythical Saints had died by my hand. By now, there were only a few left, and the strongest ones, were all holed up in the Demon Sect.

    Amongst these three men, only one of them was a peak Mythical Saint, and even that was rare. The only reason he was here, was because he refused to leave his sect. But now, he had directly abandoned his whole sect, with the hope that I wouldn¡¯t chase. But alas, here I was.

    ¡°Please, Your Holiness, please let us live! If you let us live, we will serve you for all of eternity, so please, don¡¯t kill us! Even if it¡¯s only me, it¡¯s still fine, please let me live!¡± The Horned Demon, the leader of the Horn Sect, begged. He was even willing to abandon his friends, just to live.

    ¡°Delusional. You have prayed to the Demon Gods, so how can you be allowed to live? Don¡¯t you know that everyone that prays to the Demon Gods, is destined to die?¡± I asked him. His face paled, as he realized he definitely wouldn¡¯t live.

    ¡°But,¡± he tried to say, but before he could speak, I had severed his head from his body. My sword flashed once more, and then two more heads joined him.

    Having finally killed the three heretics, I turned around, and went back to the Horn Sect. On my own, it only took a few minutes to get back.

    They had already finished killing everyone. Not even the prisoners were alive. They knew that everyone was to be killed, so didn¡¯t even wait for my orders, on how to handle the prisoners.

    The sight of the once prosperous, Horn Sect, was a sore one. It had been laid to waste; buildings destroyed, and the grounds burned.

    ¡°Good job,¡± Amelia said, and grabbed my arm. I nodded my head, and headed to the resting grounds, which had been constructed for me. Inside, I sat down, on a chair, and rested my head on my hand.

    ¡°Why do you work so hard? You don¡¯t owe anything to these people, you don¡¯t need to this. It¡¯s killing you on the inside; I can feel it,¡± Amelia said, worry apparent in her eyes. I sighed. I was no longer in a position where I could just leave. My pride wouldn¡¯t allow it.

    ¡°You don¡¯t understand, Amelia. I can¡¯t just leave, not anymore. I¡¯m a Demi God, and these people all worship my Father. They all worship me. I¡¯m a sign of hope, for them. If I leave, they will all die, and they will all feel betrayed. They worship the God of Death, and they worship me. And I¡¯ve already come this far. I can¡¯t stop now, even if I can easily escape. I just can¡¯t abandon them now.¡± I explained. Amelia sighed back at me.

    ¡°I understand that. I just don¡¯t wish to see this happen to you. You like to act hard and tough, but I now that it¡¯s getting to you. No one can remain calm after killing so many people; not even immortals. I¡¯ve been watching you rapidly change, these last six months, I¡¯ve witnessed you order the deaths of trillions. You managed to keep a calm and collected expression through it all, but even that small glint in your eyes won¡¯t escape mine. I just wish you would stop! Seeing you hurting like this, hurts me too,¡± she said, before turning around, and leaving.

    ¡°Sigh. I now Amelia, I know. Just keep bearing with it, for a bit longer. It¡¯s almost over now, only a bit more,¡± I said, even though she already left. I picked up a glass, of crimson wine, and started sipping on it, waiting for time to pass, until we moved on to the next location.

    VIII

    At the headquarters of the Demon Alliance, the last remnants of the peak Mythical Saints, had gathered. They all looked weary and tired, and several were battle wounded, but there was still a small glimpse hope left in their eyes.

    The past year, had been extremely chaotic. There had been constant, nonstop wars and battles. The Sword Alliance, had set out with all their troops, and battled like a huge wave, sweeping over the entire half-continent, belonging to the Demon Alliance.

    Currently, only a few, hidden sects, which had not been located yet, were left. Even the outer Demon Sect had been laid waste to. Luckily, the Demon Sect possessed two domains. The Outer Sect, and the Inner Sect. The Outer Sect was only a font, while the Inner Sect was the real deal.

    The location of the Inner Sect was kept extremely hidden, and it had payed them well. Since they didn¡¯t know the location of the Inner Sect, they naturally couldn¡¯t invade it.

    As for the half of the continent that belonged to the Demon Alliance, it had become desolated. Deserts that hadn¡¯t existed before, were now there. Mountains which reached the skies, were no longer there. Cities with populations of millions, were laid to waste, villages with a few dozen villagers, were extinguished.

    There was no longer a single city or village in the entire half-continent. They had all been killed, and executed. This was the degree, which befell those that questioned, the sword in my hand.

    With the sword in my hand, I conquered the land. I decimated, and decapitated those who questioned the sword in my hand. I held the truth to all of eternity; it happened to include my own superiority. Mischief of their past had to come to seal their destiny. Whether you knelt before me now, or bore a sword of your own, I would have your head for your head for your own fallacy!

    This is how I stood; this was the veracity I had professed!

    IX

    It had been two years, since we set out with our armies. The first year, we had rushed like thunderous waves, sweeping the entire land, cleaning it of any life. But after the first year, things had slowed tremendously. There were still a few sects left, but we didn¡¯t rush to destroy them. This was because, after destroying the Demon Sect, we found the Demon Master wasn¡¯t there. Even more, there were several strong figures missing.

    This led us to believe that it wasn¡¯t their actual headquarters, but only a fa?ade. So we halted our efforts to kill everyone, with the hope that they would lead us to the Demon Sect, but no luck. We still hadn¡¯t found any signs of them. They were just too deeply hidden. These five sects, which were left, were also the strongest of them all.

    But we had found that the Sect Masters of these sects, weren¡¯t even present there. Of course, we had expected this, as it had been like that in many of the sects, during the last days.

    But if we couldn¡¯t get our hands on the Sect Masters, we would possess little chance of getting our hands on the Demon Master, and his sect. But there wasn¡¯t much we could do, except scouring the lands, hoping to stumble on their sect.

    However, no matter how much we searched, we never even found a single clue, of their location. It was like looking for a needle in a haystack, except the needle was but a speck, and the haystack, was a vast ocean.

    The Sword Continent was extremely huge, several thousand times bigger than the Marestir Peninsula. No matter how many people we used, no matter where we looked, we never found them.

    Like that we had spent a whole year, slowly getting more and more anxious. After we came upon the first Demon Sect, we had all been extremely happy, and relieved, but when we found out that it was a fake, everyone got extremely anxious and mad.

    The after result, was that the entire area around the place, had been turned to dust. Where the outer Demon Sect once lay, was now a huge crater.

    ¡°Lord Apostle,¡± Garmond said, as he walked into my current residence.

    ¡°Hm?¡± I responded. Garmond walked towards me, and took a seat next to me.

    ¡°I bring some hopefully good news. A group has been spotted, walking the area, a few thousand miles away from here. We already sent out a few squads to surround them, and bring them in. There have been no reports of anyone leaving the five sects, so they might be from the Demon Sect,¡± Garmond reported with an excited look.

    ¡°What, really? Great! Finally! Finally. If they are really from the Demon Sect, then this will finally end. Let¡¯s set out and meet them,¡± I said, with the most excited expression I ever had, in years.

    Immediately, we set out, to meet the squads that had been tasked, with retrieving the enemy group. It only took a short while, to travel those few thousand miles, before we found our groups battling.

    There were several corpses from our side, and none from theirs. This was natural of course, as they had been told to retrieve them, at all costs. Subduing, was a lot harder than killing, so a few deaths were unavoidable. But we were willing to sacrifice a few lives, for the greater good.

    The battle lasted a short while, but our guys severely outnumbered their small group, so they never stood a chance.

    A few days later, they had finally gotten back to base. For us, it only took a short while to travel a few thousand meters, but for the common soldiers, to travel such a distance while transporting prisoners, took a lot longer. Especially since all the teleportation arrays had been destroyed.

    I entered the dungeon where the prisoners were at.

    ¡°Lord Apostle!¡± The guards reported.

    ¡°Hmm, so you are the new prisoners. Tell me, are you from the Demon Sect?¡± I asked them, with an almighty pressure, causing sweat to pearl from their heads.

    ¡°Hmph, and so what if we are? We won¡¯t tell you anything!¡± One of them shouted in my face.

    ¡°Oh, you will. Prepare to torture them, until they reveal the location of the Demon Sect. Meanwhile, also prepare the armies to set for the final five sects. The final showdown is about to arrive,¡± I ordered the guards and Elders.

    Thus, seven days of extreme torture passed, until the prisoners finally revealed the location. It had taken a lot, they truly were sturdy, but after seven days of constant torture, one of them finally cracked.

    Meanwhile, the armies had been fielded, and were prepared to set out. Thus, we finally set out, to destroy the final five sects, excluding the Demon Sect. We wanted to destroy all the other sects first, so that they couldn¡¯t come and flank us. Even though they probably wouldn¡¯t play a big role in the final battle, it would still cause large casualties. If possible, I would like to keep our casualties at a minimum.

    However, just before we were about to set out, some amazing news came into camp. A disciple from the Sect, had arrived with a special teleportation array, from the main sect.

    ¡°He¡¯s awoke! The Sword Master woke up!¡± He came screaming through the portal. His words caused great upheaval, and all the Supreme Elders, and normal Elders that heard, rushed to the Array.

    ¡°What did you say?! He¡¯s recovered?!¡± Garmond almost shouted at him, his face red.

    ¡°Yes, yes! He woke up, he finally woke up! But he¡¯s still weak, he¡¯s still recovering,¡± the disciple said, still in a shock from the revelation.

    ¡°What do mean?¡± I asked him.

    ¡°The Sword Master woke up, but he¡¯s still in a weak state. He says he will need a few days to completely recover,¡± the disciple reported.

    ¡°I see. That¡¯s great, he finally recovered. Well then, go tell him about everything that¡¯s happened in the last twenty years. Also tell him that we are about to attack the last five final sects, then in a few days, we set towards the Demon Sect. If he¡¯s recovered, I hope that he will come join us! Now go, quickly!¡± I said. My face seemed to have gained some colour, which had been missing for two years now.

    With this, things were finally going in our favour! Even if the Demon Master recovered, now we would at least possess a chance.

    With that out of the way, we finally set out. My army marched for a few days, then we finally arrived at the sect I was in charge of. These battles shouldn¡¯t be too hard, since all the strongest experts were located at the Demon Sect.

    Therefore, the real battle would be at the Demon Sect. We might even lose several Mythical Saints, since I couldn¡¯t be everywhere at the same time. If their Mythical Saints were to scatter in all directions to fight, I would only be able to hold down a few, at most.

    But in the end, we still possessed the biggest advantage, since I was there.

    As we finally arrived, my armies spread out, into their positions. This sect, possessed really big walls, going several hundred meters into the sky. It really seemed to possess a great defence, and they were made out of a really sturdy material.

    But, there was no such thing, as an invincible defence. I simply raised my sword, and let the abyss energy gather around the blade. In a flowing motion, I let it fall down, causing a thundering wave, to flux towards the walls.

    The wave hit, and caused a thundering earthquake, which made the walls crumble to dust. Immediately, I heard a loud horn blow, and shouts.

    ¡°Attack!¡±

    ¡°The enemy is attacking!¡±

    They shouted, as if the very heavens had to hear; with utmost urgency. They immediately took battle positions.

    ¡°Kill, and leave no survivors!¡± I shouted. The infantry charged towards the crumbled walls, while the mages stood in the back, and started casting large war scale spells, causing devastation to fall upon the enemy.

    I, too, charged into the enemy lines, to relieve a bit of stress. I let my sword flow in a mad frenzy, killing hundreds, if not thousands, with every blow, causing surging morale on my side, and terrifying the enemy.

    The battle was a short lived one, as we possessed the superior strength, both in infantry, as well as powerful experts. The year of constant battle, had caused many of the soldiers to find sudden insight and revelation, in the eye of death, causing them to power up. The constant battles also made the hardened and fearless soldiers. Many experts had been born from this war, but even more had died, however.

    After only about two weeks, all of the five sects, had fallen. The Demon Alliance, had now almost fallen extinct.

    And thus, the final battle neared.

    X

    It had been two years, since Sema left her home. She had managed to get out of the Marestir Peninsula, with relative ease, and had now made it several continents away. However, as she had come out into the world, she found she no longer possessed the power, which came with her name.

    She had no money, and no longer possessed absolute strength, being into A ranks, in a continent with several S ranks, and even a handful of SS ranks. She had used all the gold, which she had taken with her, and no longer could afford the teleportation fee, nor the information broker¡¯s fee.

    Frankly, she was not sure what she should do. After all, she had lived like a princess, and had never worked a day in her life. But to her luck, A rankers were still a powerful existence, even if there were hundreds of S ranks, and a handful of SS ranks.

    Thus, she had managed to gain favour with a local mercenary company, called the Silver Daggers. They were a relatively powerful bunch, having five A rankers, and a hundred fifty mercenaries, under their band.

    A young, handsome fellow, walked into a tavern, and proceeded to walk towards a table with four people. Three men, and single female.

    ¡°Oi, guys, I finally found us a job! We gotta escort some guys to some city, somewhere. A caravan, I think. They said it was too large for the teleportation arrays, which doesn¡¯t take much, anyway. They¡¯re paying us pretty well, too,¡± the handsome young man, said, with a charismatic smile on his face.

    ¡°How much we talkin¡¯ about, Capn¡ä?¡± A burly man asked, a curios expression on his face.

    ¡°Ten thousand gold coins!¡± The captain said, chin high, and a proud an aloof expression on his face.

    ¡°Ten thousand?! That¡¯s a fortune!¡± The burly man exclaimed. The other three were also surprised, including Sema.

    ¡°Yup! With this, we¡¯ll be set for a while! Naturally, we¡¯ll share it like normal, one tenth for each of us, and the rest for troop wages, and maintenance! Haha, with this, we can take the next month off! How about it, Sema? With this, we could probably get a nice house, and settle down for a bit.¡± The charismatic captain said. Sema chuckled at him.

    ¡°Oh, Harcey, you know I can¡¯t settle down,¡± Sema replied.

    ¡°Yes, yes, I know, I know. Couldn¡¯t hurt to ask though. But seriously, didn¡¯t he leave you when you were just a kid? I know you¡¯re a bit older than you look, so you basically haven¡¯t seen him in ages. Is it really so important for you to find him?¡± Harcey asked, a slightly sad and unwilling.

    ¡°Of course I have to find him!¡± Sema said with a stubborn look.

    ¡°Alright then. Well, I¡¯ve got some good news for you. While I was out, I heard about some guy who¡¯s been to a lot of continents, and knows a lot. He might know something, but it won¡¯t be cheap. I¡¯ll take you to him after this mission, how¡¯s that?¡± Harcey said with a small smile. Sema¡¯s eyes widened, a big smile leapt unto her face.

    ¡°What, really? That¡¯s great, Harcey! Hopefully he will know something useful,¡± Sema exclaimed. She hoped he would know something of use, but she severely doubted he would know something ground breaking. The best she could hope for, was some rumours or something like that.

    ¡°Well then, tell the guys to get ready, we depart tomorrow. Now, I¡¯m gonna get some shuteye,¡± Harcey said, before going to his room.

    Sema looked at his back, with a smile, as he walked away. It had been a bit over a year, since she joined their ranks, and she had grown quite close with their leader, Captain Harcey. The reason she had stayed so long was partly because she hadn¡¯t heard anything about her father yet, and partly because of Harcey.

    Their relationship was a bit finicky. They had never gotten into a real relationship, but everyone knew their feelings for each other, and just wanted them to get together, but they wouldn¡¯t say that, of course.

    Harcey, was also the only one who knew her reason for leaving home, so whenever they talked about it in front of the others, they would always stare in confusion. However, they had eventually pieced it together, bit by bit, so now they knew the general idea.

    The next day, they were all gathered outside the city walls, together with their one hundred fifty comrades. They were waiting for the caravan to arrive.

    A few minutes later, a bunch of wagons, as well both armed, and unarmed men arrived.

    ¡°Ah, Captain Harcey, you¡¯re already here,¡± a fat man, wearing expensive clothing, and a small goatee, said. Behind him, were two armed guards. They seemed to be A rank.

    ¡°Sir Motley, you¡¯ve arrived. These are my lieutenants, and those are all my soldiers, as you can see,¡± Harcey, said in a professional voice.

    ¡°Yes, I can see that. Quite the bunch you have here, they all seem very capable. That¡¯s good, very good. Well, you can tell them that we leave in thirty minutes. I have to deal with some papers first,¡± The fat Motley, said, before leaving to deal with his paperwork.

    Harcey proceeded to tell his men to prepare themselves, and half an hour later, they all departed.

    The four A rankers, all rode their horses, as well as some of the higher ranked mercenaries.

    Sema rode up to Harcey, to ask him a few questions.

    ¡°So Harcey, tell me a bit about this information broker?¡± She asked, wearing an expectant grin.

    ¡°Sigh, you¡¯re really excited, huh?¡± He replied.

    ¡°Of course I am! He¡¯s my father, you know?¡± Sema shot back.

    ¡°Yeah, I know, I know. Well, this information broker, is actually an SS ranker, so he¡¯s really knowledgeable. Super old, as well. That¡¯s the reason why it will cost so much, as well. Your pay from this mission might not even be enough. But if that¡¯s the case, I don¡¯t mind lending you a bit,¡± Harcey said, looking at her compassionately.

    ¡°Oh, get a room, you two!¡± The burly, Tommy, said.

    ¡°Shut it, Tommy!¡± Harcey spat back. Tommy just laughed, rode a bit forwards.

    ¡°Harcey, I can¡¯t have you giving me you money!¡± Sema replied.

    ¡°No, I¡¯m serious, Semmy. Listen, I¡¯ve been thinking about this for a while, and when you leave this continent, I¡¯ll come with you! The Silver Daggers will! Of course, many of the men won¡¯t want to leave, but the ones who are willing, will follow you!¡± Harcey said, with a stubborn confidence.

    Sema stared at him, eyes wide, mouth gaping. She couldn¡¯t believe his words.

    ¡°Harcey, you shouldn¡¯t joke about that kind of thing,¡± Sema said, looking a bit hurt.

    ¡°I¡¯m not joking!¡± Harcey yelled, getting the attention of his men.

    ¡°Listen, Sema, I¡¯m serious, but let¡¯s talk about this later, when there aren¡¯t so many eyes,¡± Harcey said, getting a nod from Sema in return.

    And thus, Night arrived. Harcey was talking with Motley, and the mercenaries were sitting around the bonfires. A while late, Harcey walked over to the bonfire, where Sema was sitting. The other A rankers were there, including the guards of Motley. One of those guards was a female, and she was having a chat with Sema.

    ¡°Hey, Semmy, will you come to tent for a bit? We need to have a talk,¡± Harcey said. Sema nodded her head, and walked away with him, garnering the looks of the others.

    They were pretty sure what this was about, remembering the previous scene. Well they didn¡¯t know what that had been about, though. Inside the tent, Harcey took two glasses, and a bottle of wine, then sat on a chair. Sema sat opposite him. Harcey proceeded to fill the glasses, and gave one to Sema.

    ¡°I was serious about what I said, you know. Even of none of the men want to come with me, I¡¯ll give leadership to Tommy, and leave with you,¡± Harcey said, completely serious. Sema looked at him, when a single tear left her eye.

    ¡°Why do you want to come with me? You think you might understand the situation, but there so, so many things you don¡¯t know. This isn¡¯t as simple as you think, I don¡¯t just come from a normal noble family or something like that. It goes far, far beyond that,¡± Sema said. Harcey was a bit surprised, but he still didn¡¯t waver.

    ¡°So I don¡¯t understand? What, are you a princess or something? Listen, no matter what it is, I won¡¯t care! All I care about, is you!¡± He shouted, getting slightly agitated.

    ¡°So you won¡¯t care!? Even if I¡¯m not a human!?¡± Sema screamed back at him, before holding her mouth, realizing what she said.

    ¡°What do you mean you¡¯re not human?¡± Harcey asked. He could clearly tell that she didn¡¯t possess the features of any elves, and he never heard of any races that looked exactly like human, but weren¡¯t actually humans.

    ¡°Ah, I didn¡¯t mean to say that,¡± Sema sighed.

    ¡°But, well, if it¡¯s you, I can tell you. Just promise that you won¡¯t tell anyone about it, okay?¡± Sema asked. Harcey gulped, and nodded his head. He had finally noticed something was off.

    ¡°Well, as I said, I¡¯m not human. No one from my family is, and our family is the only one of our kind. Well, it¡¯s a very big family though, possessing thousands of different lines and branches, but I¡¯m, Pure, from the main branch. My father, he¡¯s the patriarch of our clan, as well as the progenitor. He was the very first of our kind,¡± Sema explained. Harcey remained silent, for a bit, taking in what he heard.

    ¡°Then, what are you?¡± He asked, almost nervous of the answer.

    ¡°Well, I guess, Immortals,¡± Sema said, with a very small voice. Harcey couldn¡¯t get a word out, he just stared at her.

    ¡°What?¡± He finally asked.

    ¡°Well, we never age, except in our childhood, and that¡¯s only of your born into our race, like I was. My father, for example, and all my seniors, they weren¡¯t born like this. My father made all of them into this. And we also don¡¯t like the sun very much, but that¡¯s mostly for the non-pure ones. You¡¯re only Pureblooded if my father turns you, or if you¡¯re born from two pure ones, like I was. Well, if father was to, ehm, do it, with a non-pure one, I think it would result in a Pureblood. Oh, I¡¯m rambling now.

    Well, the Purebloods don¡¯t really mind the sun, as you can probably guess after all this time. Oh, and one last thing, one thing I¡¯ve been working very hard to keep secret; that I never wanted you are anyone else to know¡­ We drink blood,¡± Sema explained, her expression becoming very serious, at her last words.

    Harcey stared at her, silently, letting the words sing in. After what seemed like an eternity, he finally spoke up,

    ¡°Are you a vampire?¡± He asked, weirdly calm and composed, as if he had realized something; something profound.

    ¡°What, you guessed it? Then why are you so calm!? Why aren¡¯t you running away, or trying to kill me?!¡± Sema screamed, finding it seemingly impossible to believe. She had always though that any mortal, would find vampires evil, and demonic. Of course, she herself didn¡¯t believe that, after all, it was completely natural to her. She was born as a vampire, she knew nothing else.

    Being a human, however would be weird to her.

    ¡°Why? Because I love you,¡± Harcey answered, still calm and composed, from the revelation he had previously realized. Sema was caught completely off guard. She stared at with wide eyes. Then, she started crying. Tears were flowing like a river.

    ¡°So? Will you return my feelings, and let me follow you to your father?¡± Harcey asked. Sema looked up to him, with a smile, then nodded her head.

    ¡°Great! This way, I will be able to seek you father¡¯s permission!¡± Harcey said proudly.

    ¡°Permission?¡± Sema asked, confused.

    ¡°To marry you, of course!¡± Harcey, confidently stated.

    XI

    Our entire armies had finally gathered outside the Demon Sect. Even though our numbers had significantly diminished over the constant flow of battles, it was still a considerable force, and we still outnumbered the nearly extinct Demon Alliance.

    After the Kitserra joined us, we had gained a lot of men, as well. Rows upon rows of mages and warriors lined outside the sect walls, seemingly going as far back as the eye could see.

    Inside the walls, the nerves of the common soldiers were weakening, under the sight of huge force. We outnumbered them quite significantly, as more than ninety nine percent of their forces had been extinguished already, but they still didn¡¯t waver. They knew they had to stand headstrong, or they would surely die.

    They held unto all the small slivers of hope they could find, with all their strength. But all those soldiers knew that this might be the last sundown they ever see, as they watched the sun fall below the mountains.

    Even though there were more people than you could count, there was an unnerving silence, as the two forces stared each other down. The strongest mages, had gathered on the walls, raising their strongest barriers, with the hope that the walls wouldn¡¯t fall.

    The soldiers were in their battle positions; archers stood on the battlements, bows ready, warriors, stood behind the gate, ready to meet the enemy. Healers were spread around, ready to heal any comrades in need. The commanders, safe in the palace, or together with their warriors, ready to fight for their lives.

    The commanders of the huge army, of the Sword Alliance, finally raised their war horns, and blew, causing a loud, reverberating bellowing, to thunder.

    The warriors all screamed their war cries, and stormed towards the walls, and the warriors of the Demon Sect, stormed out the gates, to meet them. I however, didn¡¯t move. Instead, I raised my sword that claimed more lives, than many countries possessed.

    The black rays of the abyss, gathered around the blade, and consumed the light in the surrounding. In a moment, a huge pillar of darkness, raised into the sky, darkening the surroundings. All the warriors stopped in their tracks. The Sword Alliance soldiers all marvelled at the sight, while the nerves of the Demon Sect were shattered.

    In a thunderous, apocalyptic movement, the pillar shattered, and fell to the walls and battlements, completely shattering them, killing all the mages, and archers, and eliminating half of the warriors, which stood outside.

    The apocalyptic even that just happened, was followed by a deep silence, as everyone processed what just happened. However, before everyone could fathom what happened, a deep loud laughter bellowed through the heavens.

    ¡°HAHAHAHAHAHA!¡± It thundered out. Everyone looked around in confusion, including me. It was not I, who had laughed, but someone else. Someone powerful.

    ¡°The Abyss Sword Technique! Truly marvellous! No one on this world, knows this style as deeply as me, yet you have already mastered it such an extent. And if that wasn¡¯t enough, you, the Son of Gebados, practise the Way of the Chaos God! Truly ironic, truly ironic!¡± A voice seeping with madness and insanity said.

    Suddenly in the sky, a man wearing peculiar clothing, and shoulder length, white hair, appeared.

    ¡°Hahaha, truly amazing! If you hadn¡¯t done all which you had done, I wouldn¡¯t even kill you! I might even take you as an apprentice or ally! How FUN!¡± The insane man said.

    ¡°However, you are the Son of Gebados, and you have almost destroyed my entire sect. You can never be my ally, and must die,¡± he suddenly said, in a calm and composed manner.

    ¡°Ah, silly me! I haven¡¯t even introduced Myself!¡± He said, again with an apparent madness.

    ¡°I am, Allpos Skyseeker. You may also know me by the title of, Demon Master,¡± he announced. As soon as he introduced his title, a wave of despair showered upon every single warrior and mage, of the Sword Alliance.

    He had appeared! He was already healed, and came out at the very beginning!

    ¡°I see my plan worked pretty well, in my favour. Sending out that patrol, so that you could catch them, and torture our location out of them. Sure, it would result in the destruction of all the five remaining sects, but now I have all of you gathered together! Much easier! I¡¯m sure they didn¡¯t mind. Now, how do you say it? Let¡¯s, commence¡­ The slaughter!¡± He yelled out loud.

    In a swift motion, he waved his hand, causing huge waves of blackness to roll upon our forces, immediately killing a ridiculously huge number of people. But that wasn¡¯t what shocked me. It was the method! There was no doubt about it. That was the Abyss Sword Style, without a doubt!

    He actually possessed the same method as I did. And to be completely honest, I was scared. I possessed the strength of an early Legendary Saint, but he was at the peak! He was only a single step from becoming an immortal. He was far, far stronger than me!

    I looked behind me, with the hope of somehow seeing Assiel rushing in our direction, but alas, there was no Sword Master. Immediately, I rushed to the nearest Mythical Saint I could find.

    ¡°Quickly, rush back to the teleporter, and get Assiel here! Waste no time, I will use everything in my power to stall him, but even if I use all my power, I can only hold out so long! HURRY!¡± I screamed at him, almost in a desperate panic. The Mythical Saint quickly nodded his head, and immediately rushed away.

    As he made his escape, I looked up to the sky. It was quickly darkening, as the sun set, but it was still not dark enough. I couldn¡¯t use my Ruler of the Night ability. However, I could transform, which would make close to as strong as a middle stage Legendary Saint.

    Without wasting time, I transformer, into my true form, garnering the attention of Allpos, the Demon Master. He looked at me with curious eyes.

    ¡°Well, isn¡¯t this peculiar. I guess you really are a Demi God!¡± He said, as he walked the invisible steps in the sky, slowly getting closer to me. The fighting on the ground had completely stopped, as Allpos had already killed most of our forces. Only the strongest were still alive, and that was only because he hadn¡¯t come that far yet.

    He was seemingly taking it quite easy. That was the only advantage I possessed! The hope that he wouldn¡¯t kill us all right away, and that the sun could set. After the sun would set, I would be able to enter an ethereal form, and then I could keep him at bay for a bit longer.

    As he walked towards me, suddenly, I felt a huge pressure, like a thousand mountains pressing on my shoulders, weighing me down. I couldn¡¯t help, but to fall down a bit.

    ¡°Hah, what are you so surprised by? Well, I guess you wouldn¡¯t know about this, as you haven¡¯t truly reached the Legendary Saint stage quite yet. This is the Domain. When you reach the Legendary Saint stage, you will get a Domain, although it¡¯s still very weak at the early stage. Also, it isn¡¯t a true Domain, you don¡¯t get that until reaching the Immortal Stage. Oh, but why am I telling this to you, who is about to die?¡± He said, as he casually waved his hand, causing me to fly back, like a meteor.

    Such power! I didn¡¯t stand a chance, I could only let myself become a punching bag. But he seemed to be quite angry, as his eyes were constantly flinching, and it seemed like he was fighting himself, to keep calm. He was truly mad by everything I had done to his Sect. He didn¡¯t want to end this in an instant. He wanted to torture me, and that fact, was my only hope.

    He proceeded to punch me around, throwing me all around the battlefield. Everyone below, looked on in fright, and shock. This almighty being, they had followed for so long, was being beaten to a pulp. He didn¡¯t stand a chance. It shocked them, but there was nothing they could do. They could only hope that I could last long enough for Assiel to arrive.

    After he had enough, of throwing me around, he grabbed me by the throat, and started pommelling me, over and over again. I could only gasp in pain, and accept it. There was truly nothing I could do. However, as I opened my eyes, I was met with darkness. The sun had set, and the moon was rising. A relieved smile, crept unto my face.

    ¡°Huh? What are you smiling at? You want more?¡± He asked.

    ¡°Why don¡¯t you see for yourself?¡± I asked back, as his hand slipped through my body, and my body became opaque.

    ¡°Huh?¡± he said, as I quickly rushed a bit back.

    ¡°You can become ethereal? Damn it, you really are a Demi God. All these abilities, it isn¡¯t fair! We normal people actually have to make an effort to reach this kind of strength!¡± He said, as he charged at me, and launched a punch at my face, but his fist only slipped through.

    ¡°Hmph, troublesome! But I still have my ways,¡± he said, as he covered his fist in a black veil. Once more, he launched his fist at me, and this time it connected, sending me flying, however, it was weaker than before.

    Going ethereal like this, made it so that physical attacks had no effect, and magical attacks only had half effect. However, in contrast, I couldn¡¯t attack myself, without switching through corporeal and ethereal forms.

    ¡°Hah, this I can handle,¡± I said, as I spit out some see through blood. But I didn¡¯t waste time, and started flying around at full speed, with the hope of keeping him at bay. My ethereal form also increased my speed by a bit, so I was quite fast. However, it was only foolish hope, as he was still far faster than me. It only took a moment for him to catch up to me, and grab me again, using that black veil around his body. Then, he threw me to the ground, creating a large crater around me.

    ¡°Ah, well I guess this is enough. Time to die,¡± he said, however, before he could go down to me,

    ¡°STOOPP!¡± A loud shout bellowed. In the distance, Assiel was flying towards us at full speed. That Mythical Saint had succeeded at leading Assiel here! Finally, hope was on our side!

    ¡°Hah, you¡¯ve finally arrived! Finally! I¡¯ve waited so, so long for this moment, so long! Finally, finally! FINALLY! I can finally have my revenge,¡± Allpos said, with a creepy voice at the end. I looked up to him in confusion, not understanding what he meant by revenge.

    ¡°How many thousands of years has it been? Hah, I¡¯ve waited so long, and finally, I can kill you for what you did to us!¡± Allpos shouted, as his body suddenly disappeared, and in only an instant later, he stood before Assiel, who looked shocked, and afraid.

    ¡°This, this! This is impossible! How can this be! HOW! You can¡¯t have, you CAN¡¯T! It¡¯s not possible!¡± Assiel shouted and screamed, not wanting to believe what he had seen. Allpos grabbed Assiel by the throat and lifted him up. Assiel was seemingly unable to resist.

    ¡°Oh, but my dear brother, it is as you see. I, have reached the level of an Immortal!¡± he loudly announced, so that everyone could hear. I looked at him in shock. He was an Immortal! He was an Immortal the entire time! No wonder he was so strong.

    ¡°Oh dear Lord, help us,¡± I said, as I realized what was going on. Assiel tried to open his mouth to speak, but before he could speak a word, black flames surrounded his body, and burned him to nothingness. Slowly, I stood back up from my crater, and flew up from the ground.

    ¡°So, Demi God, I forgot to ask, but what was your name?¡± He asked me. I stood silent for a while, but still decided to answer.

    ¡°My name is Isaac Coldblood,¡± I told him. Allpos nodded his head in approval.

    ¡°I see. That¡¯s a good name. You haven¡¯t offended me as much as Assiel did, so I will leave your body intact. Count it as me paying respect to your lineage,¡± he said.

    Amelia, and the other Supreme Elders, weren¡¯t very far away from me, and quickly rushed over to me.

    ¡°No, you guys need to escape! Get as far away from this God forsaken continent as you can! I will hold him for as long as I can,¡± I said.

    ¡°No, I won¡¯t leave you!¡± Amelia said.

    ¡°I will also stay by your side,¡± Ley said.

    ¡°Me as well,¡± Garmond spoke.

    ¡°No you don¡¯t understand. It makes no difference, he far too powerful! He¡¯s an Immortal! At least some of us should survive this day!¡± I shouted at them, frantically.

    ¡°Hah, it¡¯s you who don¡¯t understand, Isaac. We¡¯ve been with our sects for thousands upon thousands of years. We can¡¯t watch them fall, without doing anything at all. If we were to fall in the process, then so be it,¡± Garmond said. Ley nodded in approval, as did the other Supreme Elders and Sect Masters.

    ¡°Hah, then so be it. We will fight together,¡± I said.

    ¡°You don¡¯t talking yet?¡± Allpos said, as he was looking at his nails. Then, without a word, everyone attacked. I stood behind for just a moment, to speak with Amelia.

    ¡°Amelia, leave! Go back home, to the others! You don¡¯t have to die!¡± I said. Amelia shook her head feverishly.

    ¡°I won¡¯t! I can¡¯t live without you!¡± She screamed. I only sighed at her answer.

    ¡°Amelia, I love you. So I wish you will forgive me for this,¡± I said. She looked at me in confusion, not knowing what I meant.

    ¡°Amelia, go home,¡± I said again, however this time, there was a strange light in my eyes. Amelia opened her mouth in surprise, as she finally realized.

    ¡°No, no, Isaac, please don¡¯t!¡± She said, as she suddenly started leaving unwillingly.

    ¡°Amelia, I love you, and I love all the others as well! So please, Amelia, go home, and live!¡± I ordered her in a loud thunderous shout, using the power of my blood, to order her to go home and live! As long as I used the power of our Blood Bond, she could never refuse me. This way, I could be assured that she would go home, and that she would live.

    Thus, I finally turned around, to face Allpos Skyseeker.

    XII

    The various Mythical Saints of the Sects and Kitserra all surrounded Allpos. There were several tens of us, and in the lead stood I. Amelia was rushing away, with tears in her eyes.

    ¡°You managed to convince her to leave?¡± Ley asked with a relieved smile. He also wished for someone to survive this endeavour, and Amelia had become like sister to him, as Isaac had become his brother.

    ¡°I used a cruel way to make her leave, against her will, but I will do anything for her to live, even if I have to die,¡± I said. Ley closed his eyes, and nodded in approval.

    ¡°Alright ladies, let¡¯s do this!¡± I shouted, as I charged at Allpos, closely followed by everyone else. For the first five minutes, no one, died, as he was only fighting half assed. But then, he started getting bored. In a swift motion, he waved his arm like a sword, and six people were severed, and died on the spot.

    Then I noticed him swinging again, but this time towards Ley. Luckily for me, he wasn¡¯t using a lot of power, so I managed to quickly jump in the way, and push Ley away. However, it I lost my entire arm, from the shoulder. Ley looked at me with worry, but as he saw my arm quickly regenerate, his worry faded.

    Allpos also looked at me, with high curiosity.

    ¡°Ah, so this is how you managed to reach such a high level in the Way of the Chaos God. You truly have too many abilities! You can regenerate an entire arm in seconds! Not fair!¡± He shouted, as he charged at me, and cut both my arms of, and kicked me away.

    However, he marvelled, as my arms quickly grew out again.

    ¡°Truly amazing!¡± He said, as he grabbed the arm of a person, who happened to be nearby, then spun around, to throw him at someone else. However, as he spun around, he noticed something in the distance. He saw Amelia rushing away, already a large distance away.

    The reason he didn¡¯t notice her before, is because he was too busy marvelling at his nails.

    ¡°Oho, what¡¯s this?¡± He said, as he looked into the distance, and started charging towards Amelia. I immediately noticed.

    ¡°NOOO! Let her go!¡± I screamed as I immediately took chase. I was going as fast as I could, using my wings combined with normal flying, as well as the added speed from the ethereal form. But it was still far too slow. He made it to her, in an instant, and as I arrived, chased by the others, he already had her by the throat.

    ¡°LET HER GO!!¡± I screamed at him. A small smile crept on his face, as Amelia looked at me, with tears in her eyes, not able to speak.

    ¡°Aha, might this be your wife?¡± He said in a mischievous voice. I couldn¡¯t hold myself back, and immediately charged at him, however, I suddenly found my self frozen in place, a hundred meters away from him.

    ¡°This is the True Domain of an Immortal. Much stronger than the one I used before, isn¡¯t it?¡± He said.

    ¡°Let¡¯ her go!¡± I answered, however his smile only grew wider, and then time seemed to slow down, as his hand moved up, and went towards her chest. Time slowed, almost to a halt, as I could see his hand penetrate her chest, slowly, getting closer and closer to her heart.

    ¡°NOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!!! STOP!!!¡± I screamed my lungs out, but to no avail.

    ¡°ARGH!¡± Amelia screamed, as she vomited blood, before the light left her eyes, and her heart had been shattered. Her body fell lifeless to the ground, as I felt the weights leave my body.

    In a thunderous movement, I charged to her, breaking my own leg from the impact. I grabbed her on the shoulders and started shaking her, but no response. There was no life in her; her heart had been completely destroyed. She had been killed.

    ¡°AAAAAAAAAARGHHHH!!!¡± I screamed, letting all my sorrow and rage seep into the word. Suddenly I felt a familiar presence near me, a powerful presence, and void darkness started surrounding me, a darkness seeping with death. It slowly surrounded me, causing everyone to look at us in shock.

    I moved my bloodshot eyes, to look at Allpos. He even flinched, at he saw the rage in my eyes.

    ¡°Allpos! I swear to the Heavens and the Deepest Pits of Hell, to the Gods and Demons, to everything Holy and Unholy, I WILL KILL YOU!! I¡¯LL SHATTER YOUR SOUL, AND TURN YOUR BODY TO NOTHINGNESS!!! I WILL NEVER FORGET THIS, I WON¡¯T REST, I WON¡¯T STOP, I WON¡¯T STOP UNTIL YOU ARE DEAD!!!!!!!¡± I roared from the top of my lungs, letting every ounce of my rage seep into his bones, as the darkness surrounded me, and took us away from here, to an unknown place, in an unknown realm.

    End of chapter 8.

    And that''s that. A bit of a cliffhanger for ya, cause I''m evil like that. And you have no idea how long this took to space. Every time I upload, I have to manually add the spacing between the paragraphs, so it takes ages.

    Anyways, look forward to the next chapter, and please follow and favorite, and rate, if you haven''t already. I really appreciate it.

    Also, a few side notes. If I keep getting this much homework, which I never expected, I will have to put HotN on hold, however it will only be temporary. I was thinking I could finish book 2 of RotV, then finish book 1 of HotN. That way, I also get a bit of time to plan book 3 of RotV.

    Please tell me what you think.

    Also, I''m progressing with the rewrite, and when I''m finished I''m going to publish it as a book. And before I said that I would post the rewrite on here, but I have decided on something else instead. I think I might upload it as new "story", which will still be called Rise of the Vampires, but maybe an added rewrite add the end.

    The reason for this is, because I have quite a few bad reviews on here, but I don''t feel like those will be valid for the rewrite. I''m fleshing the characters out more, and there are also new story points, and changes in plot, so yeah. Btw, some changes have already been incorporated in the last few chapters, since I don''t want to rewrite book 2 as well :P Like, Isaac is the actual real son of Gebados, God of Death, and his wife. This will be explained in the first chapter, so don''t worry.

    Also, I might make a list of changes, so that you won''t have to reread if you don''t want to.

    Now, one last thing.

    On monday, I''ll be going to Scotland, and I won''t be back until Friday, so I won''t be writing next week. Sorry about that.

    Now, bye!

 Chapter 9: Death, Nature, and Life

    Chapter 9: Death, Nature, and life

    Complete darkness surrounded our bodies, as I screamed my voice slowly became hoarse. I held her in my arms her body was now a corpse. I could feel the warmth leaving her body slowly, her heartbeat, had disappeared. Suddenly I felt something wet trickling down my cheeks, tears.I was crying, for the first time in who knows how many years?

    I hadn¡¯t expected it. I never expected to lose someone so dear to me, I never expected the Demon Master to not only be healed, but to be an immortal. I don¡¯t know why, but I somehow always expected everything to go my way. It always has, I¡¯ve never been met with any real setbacks. Never lost anyone.

    Rag here: What about his sister?

    Back when I fought the Drake, I was always confident I would win. We were never in any true danger. But, this was different. This time we met someone far, far more powerful than us, and we even knew he existed. But still, I didn¡¯t expect him to be here.

    Was he ever even wounded?, but how long ago was that? Who said he hadn¡¯t recovered a long time ago, and was training, in seclusion. He was an immortal. It¡¯s impossible for him to achieve such power out of nothing.

    But I never expected him, none the less, and now? Amelia! I can¡¯t believe it, I can¡¯t!

    The tears continued flowing down my cheeks, when a sound escaped my mouth,

    ¡°AAAAAAAAAAAAHHHH!!¡± I screamed, in sorrow, in mourning, in rage. The sight before me, the reality before, tore me apart. Then suddenly,

    ¡°Sigh,¡±

    I heard a sigh from behind me. I turned around, and there was a middle aged man, wearing completely black robes, which seemed to form into smoke, as it waved off of his body.

    ¡°Isaac, my son, this sight pains me. Your wife, Amelia, the first person you ever made a vampire, your first wife, and your first friend, has died,¡± he said. His words, somehow made me truly realize what had happened, and I couldn¡¯t stop myself from crying.

    ¡°Father, you have to do something!¡± I cried, my voice hoarse,

    ¡°Anything, please, I beg you! You¡¯re the God of Death, you govern death, there must be something you can do,¡± I cried, begging him to help me, to help Amelia. However, he could only sigh further.

    ¡°Isaac, my dear son, Amelia has died. There isn¡¯t much I can do. However, her soul is still intact, so she hasn¡¯t truly died. When one¡¯s body dies, the soul usually survives, allowing it to go into the cycle of reincarnation. If the soul is intact, it¡¯s also technically possible for me to revive the deceased, however it¡¯s not allowed, by the Council of Gods. Since I, myself, am a part of the Council, I can¡¯t break the rule.

    But there is still a small sliver of hope,¡± he said. The further he explained, the more despaired I became, however, as those last few words flowed through my mind, a spark lit. The spark of hope, and I would make sure to do everything I could, to keep it alive.

    ¡°There¡¯s hope? Tell me, tell me quick!¡± I urged him, causing a small smile to appear on his face.

    ¡°Hehe, this is a more slightly expression. Well, yes, there is hope. As you know, I am the God of Death, so I govern Death. But my sister, your aunt, she governs life. When a God has a child, that child will possess the energy of their parents, for example, you have a large portion of Death Energy in you, and a smaller portion of Nature Energy,¡± he explained. I was deeply invested in his explanations, however, I couldn¡¯t help but be confused at his last words.

    ¡°Nature Energy?¡± I asked him with a confused expression. My question only caused him to laugh, as if he had forgot to tell me something, which I should definitely have known.

    ¡°That¡¯s right, I never told you. Well, the Nature Energy comes from your mother of course, the Goddess of Nature! You see, your mother, is the Goddess of Nature, Delia, and she is also my wife. One day, you will surely get to meet her, but it will have to wait for now. I¡¯m the only one capable to see you, by taking you to this realm. I¡¯m the only one capable of coming in, and this realm was created solely for us to commune. Every God with a child has one of these. But Delia can¡¯t come here, since you didn¡¯t inherit her Godhood, but mine. So yeah, you can¡¯t see her, until you come to the Divine Realm, and trust me, it bugs her. After all, she¡¯s your mother. But look at me, I¡¯m babbling.A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.

    Back to the matter at hand. You have inherited my Death Energy, and your mothers Nature Energy, however you don¡¯t have as much Nature Energy as Death Energy. But other than this, you also possess a small portion of Life Energy. You see, even though I¡¯m the God of Death, I also have a small portion of Life energy, like my sister also has a small portion of Death Energy. This is because of our parents, who also were Death and Life Gods.

    And thus, you also have some Life Energy. And this Life energy, can be used to revive people, if you have the right tools. However, you have far too little Life energy. Only someone born from my Sister, whether that person would inherit her Godhood, or the father¡¯s, would be able to revive someone.

    However, my sister has no children,¡± he said.

    ¡°Then how am I supposed to revive Amelia?¡± I asked desperately.

    ¡°Well, you see, you have a brother. Your brother, who inherited your mother''s Godhood,¡± he said, causing me to freeze a moment. I had a brother? When did that happen?

    ¡°Hehe, I see your surprise. However, your brother is far, far older than you. He was around even before the last vampire progenitor was around. He¡¯s also very strong. He would have been able to kill Allpos with only a stare. However, as he is your brother, he is naturally my son, therefore, he also has a bit of Life Energy. However, I¡¯m not completely sure where he is.

    He lives in a domain hidden from a God''s sight. Not even your mother can see through it, but that¡¯s only because we made it. He said he didn¡¯t like us being able to see everything he does. By the way, we can see everything you do, both me and your mother. She can see you, she just can¡¯t talk to you, or come near you.

    Rag here: Kind of creepy that they can always see you.

    But yeah, we don¡¯t know where the domain is, only the general location. I¡¯ll send you to the general location, but be warned! It¡¯s composed of a hundred continents, and they¡¯re all close to the center!¡± He said, once more shocking me. I didn¡¯t know a lot of our world, but I knew it was a big circle, and it tended to get stronger and stronger the farther inn you went.

    ¡°Yes, this means you won¡¯t even be considered a super expert there. However, as you know, people get stronger and stronger the farther into the world you get, but that doesn¡¯t mean everyone is super strong. There are countless normal mortals there, but there are also countless Legendary Saints. I guess I should explain to you, how the power ranking works.

    As you know, there are Saints, Mythical Saints, and Legendary Saints, and then the illustrious Immortals. However, it doesn¡¯t stop here. After all, we gods aren¡¯t just simple Immortals. After the normal Immortal, there is the Mystic Immortal, and then the Exalted Immortal.

    These are the three stages of an Immortal, but it still doesn¡¯t stop there. After becoming an Exalted Immortal, you can become an Eternal Soul. An Eternal Soul, is someone who sheds their mortal body, and became an Eternal Soul. They are able to freely create new bodies, but it isn¡¯t all powerful. They¡¯re still a bit stronger than Exalted Immortals, but all the Eternal Soul is, is a prerequisite.

    You see, becoming an Eternal Soul, is necessary, if you want to become a Demi God. And when I say Demi God, I don¡¯t mean the kind like you, who are born from Gods, but the stage of power, just before full Godhood. A Demigod is extremely powerful, and is the peak of this world. A single Demi God can easily kill all the Exalted Immortals of this world.

    But there are very few of them, and the reason for this is, most Demigods go to the Divine Realm, after ascending. However, there are still a few that stay for various reasons.

    And where you are going, there is one Demi God, however you shouldn¡¯t worry about him. Just make sure to be careful about whom you offend, since you aren¡¯t all that powerful there yet. However, before I send you away, I have a small gift for you, my son. You see that technique you train in, isn¡¯t very suited for you. Sure, it might give good results now, but in the future it will bite you in the back. Not that it is a bad technique, it¡¯s actually a very good one. But it was made by one of my sworn enemies, so it¡¯s not very good for Death or Nature energy. It is however good for Life Energy, for a particular reason, which is also why it worked so well for you.

    However, it will only hurt you in the future. Therefore, you shall train in my technique, the ¡®Death Lord Art¡¯. It will train your body to extreme extents, even more than the ¡®Way of the Chaos God¡¯ and it will train you to use your Death Energy. Other than that, I also have a gift from your mother.

    It¡¯s the ¡®Fairy Art¡¯, the same one your brother mainly trains in. It focuses on speed, and will teach you to use your Nature Energy. As for your Sword Technique, it¡¯s a very good, one of my worshippers created it, so it fits you perfectly. I would give you a sword technique of my own, but that¡¯s not allowed by the Council, as it would make you too strong.

    Well then, I¡¯ll send you off now. Oh, and I¡¯ll take care of Amelia¡¯s body and soul, so don¡¯t worry about that. Now, off with you, my son!¡± Gebados said, as he waved his hand, and suddenly, the scenery around me changed.

    End of chapter 9.

 Chapter 10: Targhas

    Chapter 10

    The darkness around me, faded away, and in its stead, came lush forests on one side, deep valleys on the other side, and an old road, in the middle. I looked around me, my eyes still bloodshot, but I didn¡¯t recognise my surroundings at all. The forest was really dense, it seemed as if the trees could touch the skies. The valleys were gorgeous, filled with beautiful, green grass.

    The landscape here, was truly something I had never seen before. In the distance, I could even see the edge of a desert. It was so varied, and so excessive. It was on a whole other level, compared to what I had seen in the Sword Continent, and the Marestir Peninsula. It was very varied. A lush forest, a deep valley, and a dry desert, all in the same line of sight.

    Where ever it was I was at, I still sat on my knees. Slowly, I stood back up, when I saw people coming towards me, on the road. It seemed to be a small group, and there were several guards. They all seemed ready to attack, but they didn¡¯t attack as soon as they saw me.

    The small caravan stopped in front of me, and one of the men, walked up to me. He opened his mouth, and out came a series of sounds. However, I didn¡¯t understand them.

    ¡°What are you saying?¡± I asked him, much to his surprise, as his forehead furrowed, and he looked at me weirdly and tried to speak again, but I didn¡¯t understand, much like he didn¡¯t understand me. He tried to speak again, but when I still didn¡¯t understand him, he shook his head. He look up, thinking for a bit, then he spoke again, but this time the tone of his voice sounded completely different; probably a different language, but I still couldn¡¯t understand. I just shook my head.

    He started walking in circles, trying to think. He seemed to be adamant on not abandoning me, at least.

    ¡°Aha!¡± He said, the only think I could understand, as he had an idea. He turned back around, and called for a few people, who all came running up to us. He spoke a few words to them, then, one by one, the tried to speak to me. They all had different accents, and tones of voice, as they spoke, probably all different languages, but I still couldn¡¯t understand a single one of them.

    The caravan had frozen, as the one who seemed to be the leader, was thinking about what to do with me. I truly felt helpless. I had no idea where I was, and I didn¡¯t speak their language. The languages of the Sword Continent and Marestir Peninsula, as well as all the continents in between, had all been the same, or at least, they had some languages in common.

    But now he had come up with a dozen different languages, and I didn¡¯t understand any of them, even though I spoke a lot of languages. Then I decided that I should try and list all of my languages off, one after the other, to see if someone here could understand it.

    I spoke a few sentences in different languages, and they seemed to understand what I was doing, so I continued. In the end, they were both shocked and surprised. Shocked at how many languages I spoke, and surprised that not one single person here, understood a single one of them.

    The leader guy, looked at me with pity in his eyes. It was clear to him that something bad had happened to me. My clothes were torn, there were signs of wounds and blood on me, and my eyes were bloodshot. He could also probably sense that I was rather powerful, however he had no way of knowing how strong I was, since I was suppressing my power.

    He however, was at the A rank. He was also the most powerful one here. There were all kinds of people here, all the way down to D rank, however curiously, there was no on weaker. In the Marestir Peninsula, and also the Sword Continent, the normal mortals, were basically G rank, even weaker than F rank. Maybe there just weren¡¯t any weaker ones present here, but this was a caravan, not a war party. There should be some normal mortals. I would just have to wait and see, until I got into a city.

    While I was thinking, the leader of the caravan was thinking too. Then he seemed to decide, as he pointed to himself, and said,

    ¡°Targhas,¡± and then he pointed to me, with a questioning look. I immediately understood, and said,

    ¡°Isaac.¡±

    Targhas smiled, and nodded his head,

    ¡°Isaac, Isaac,¡± he said, as well as some other words, I couldn¡¯t understand. Then he pointed to me, then himself, and made a walking sign, with his hand, all while wearing a questioning expression. He seemed to be asking me if I wanted to follow him.

    I was a bit doubtful, if that was what he was asking, or not, but in the end, I nodded my head, with a bit of hesitation. The man made a big smile, and cupped his fist, as he laughed, seemingly happy. Then he waved me to follow, as the caravan started travelling once more.

    As we were travelling, he would point to things, and say a word, trying to teach me his language. He knew that I definitely would have to learn the language, since the only way I couldn¡¯t know it was either if I had come from the past, or something, or if I had somehow been sent here, from somewhere, far, far away.

    Often, he would point to things he had already taught me, trying to question me about them. He was quite surprised that I always remembered the word, and never forgot.

    Eventually, after a few weeks of travel, I could already speak his language. From what I had learned, we were in a country from the continent of Servana. The country, was a fairly big one, named Luxum. Right now, I was with a merchant caravan. It truly showed me the difference between my home continent and this one.

    An A rank warrior, in the Marestir Peninsula, could originally be considered the top of a country, and even amongst the top of the entire continent, yet here he was only a small time merchant, with some wealth.

    Targhas was indeed the owner of this caravan, and they were currently on their way back to the town, in which he lived. He had apparently made a good sale, so he was in a good mood when he came upon me. That¡¯s why he decided to help me.

    He still didn¡¯t know how powerful I was, he thought I was only about A rank. And I preferred it that way. This man showed me kindness in my darkest times, so I valued him. I had come to consider him as a friend, and he had helped me. If he found out just how powerful I was, even though there were countless more powerful experts than me, he would still become very respectful around me. After all, it meant I could kill everyone around him, in the blink of an eye.

    The nights since I came here, had also been sleepless. I hadn¡¯t slept a single night in the past weeks, not that I needed it. Whenever I would shut my eyes, visions would flash past me. Visions of my dear Amelia. And whenever it did, I would get angry, so I stopped trying. I had become something of a permanent night watch, as I had nothing better to do, while everyone else slept.

    And like thus, we kept travelling. Targhas told me that it would be at least a few months until we reached our destination. He told me he sometimes spent years on the road, but people here have long life expectancies. As an A ranker, he could even live up to five hundred years. And he might break through, and become a Saint, at any moment. Basically, he still had a long life ahead of him, and had enough time to make long trips.

    One thing I found peculiar, was that teleporters weren¡¯t commonplace here. They had been banned because of bad side effects, from using them. A long time ago, it had been discovered that using a teleporter, had the potential to lower your life span, and make you weaker, although only by a little bit.

    This was because using them, took some energy out of the user, forcefully, to fuel it. A way to counteract this, without it being ridiculously expensive, had not been discovered. Therefore, teleportation arrays, were only available to the stinking rich and powerful.

    One thing worthy to note, is that using Energy Manipulation Magic, would not have this side effect, but it falls under the category of crazy expensive teleporters, because of its rarity.

    As we travelled, I revelled at the sight of the landscape. It was completely exaggerated, compared to what I was used to. The mountains were huge, and reached far beyond anything I had ever seen before. There were oceans with sparkling blue water that seemed like it could house a leviathan; Forests, so lush and green that it seemed like a painting.

    The others, however, just looked at me weirdly, not understanding why I thought it was so interesting. I just couldn¡¯t fathom it. I had seen many beautiful sights in my life, but nothing could come even close to the normal landscapes of this place. It was truly breathtaking.If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.

    However, all these beautiful sights, were suddenly taken away, as a wall of fire suddenly surrounded us. From out of nowhere, a heavily armed group appeared. The wall of fire opened, and they marched in, and surrounded us. Our guards, immediately readied themselves for a fight, as the bandits rushed around us.

    ¡°Shit! A bandit attack, and it¡¯s not a weak one this time! Everyone, to their battle positions! Ready yourselves for a fight!¡± Targhas shouted, while drawing his sword. In an instant, all hell broke loose, and the fighting commenced. The guards of the caravan rushed at the bandits, but Targhas was quickly surrounded by several bandits. Three of them, to be exact. And they were all A rankers.

    I didn¡¯t act immediately, but instead choose to look around. One of our guards, was fighting, while he was snuck upon, and ended up getting a spear through his side. However, he didn¡¯t give up, before he managed to slash his sword through the face of at least one enemy. We were outnumbered, but everyone fought valiantly.

    Targhas almost managed to give a life threatening blow to one of the A rankers, but he managed to dodge. Suddenly he looked toward me, not understanding why I wasn¡¯t doing anything. However, doing this, caused him to get distracted, and he got a sword through his side.

    ¡°Glargh!¡± He bellowed, as he spit a mouthful of blood. However, I still didn¡¯t act. However, Targhas took advantage of the fact that his enemies got distracted at their momentary victory, and slashed at an opening. The enemy A ranker was completely open, and the sword was going directly towards him. It was impossible for him to dodge.

    ¡°Ah, there he is,¡± I said, as someone suddenly appeared to block the sword. Targhas looked at him with despaired eyes.

    ¡°It¡¯s a saint!¡± He bellowed, as he realized; they were fucked. If there were three A rankers, he might still be able to escape, but he didn¡¯t feel very confident at all, against a Saint.

    ¡°Did you just try to kill my brother?¡± The saint asked. The saint who had appeared was a tall, slender man, with hawk like eyes. His hair was lean, and slicked back.

    ¡°Surely you don¡¯t expect to live, then?¡± He continued, and raised his sword, to strike Targhas down. Targhas just accepted his fate, and closed his eyes. He knew his day had come. He was going to die, and there was nothing he could do about it. If only he could have slept with a couple more women.

    However, the sword he was waiting for, never arrived. In confusion, he slowly opened his eyes, only to see a single finger blocking the Saint sword. In shock, he let his eyes trail up the arm, only to see me, using a single finger to block a Saints Sword, as if it was nothing.

    The Saint however, was even more shocked. He was terrified! He doubted that even the average early Mythical Saint could block his sword so easily. At least not without a special technique.

    ¡°You speak of him trying to kill your brother, so he can¡¯t live. Then tell me, did I not just now see you, trying to kill my dear friend? Surely, that would mean you have to die, don¡¯t you agree?¡± I said with an accent, as I grabbed his sword with two fingers. He tried to pull his sword away, but no matter how hard he tried, it wouldn¡¯t budge.

    Targhas, however, couldn¡¯t make himself say a word. He only stared at me.

    ¡°No, don¡¯t kill me! I¡¯m warning you, I¡¯m from the Afflicted Prince¡¯s gang! If you hurt me, the boss will be sure to kill you! I¡¯m warning you!¡± The Saint said, as he let go off his sword, and took a step back. I looked down the frozen Targhas,

    ¡°The Afflicted Prince? You know about him?¡± I asked. As I asked him, Targhas seemed to be shaken out of his stupor. He shook his head, as if to clear it of useless thoughts.

    ¡°Ah, yes the Afflicted Prince¡­ This is bad. The Afflicted Prince is an infamous gang leader. He¡¯s very strong, being at the peak the Mythical Saint level. Isaac, we should just let them go with a warning, we can¡¯t afford to anger him,¡± Targhas said, urging me to consider mercy.

    ¡°Hahahaha, peak Mythical Saint? He¡¯s only a Mythical Saint, and you say I should let you go? For such a weakling? Let me tell you, I do not show mercy. I once destroyed half a continent, just because they didn¡¯t agree with me, so tell me, should I let you go, just because you work for a measly Mythical Saint?¡± I asked the little Saint, with a menacing voice, releasing my devastating aura, crushing his weak body.

    As my energy blew unto the Saint, he fell to his knees. After everything that had happened, my aura gave a very heavy feeling of despair and sadness, as well as dread and terror. Despair and sadness, from the death of Amelia, dread and terror for taking several trillions of lives.

    The Saint found himself completely unable to neither move, nor talk. Targhas looked at me in terror, as he too felt the aura.

    ¡°Amongst the ones whom I have killed, there are countless Saints and Mythical Saints, many of whom lived far greater lives than you! Yet you want mercy? Dream on!¡± I shouted at him, and let some of my pent up anger out, and completely crushed him, with just my energy. From the after waves of my energy, most of the bandits perished as well. I looked to the rest of the bandits, who only numbered a few.

    ¡°The rest of you are the lucky ones. Go to that Afflicted Prince, and tell him to come if he dares. Just remember, not even a peak Mythical Saint is above the lives of five trillion people,¡± I said, as they scurried off.

    Targhas, however, continued to look at me, seemingly wondering if he should speak or not.

    ¡°What is it?¡± I asked him. As I directly asked him, he seemed to decide to just speak.

    ¡°Is it true, what you said? About destroying half a continent?¡± He asked, slightly nervous I would get angry at him.

    ¡°Well, yes. However, it is much more complicated than that. It was a war, where either we die, or they die. It was a war of religion, we were under the Gods of Order, and they were under the Gods of Chaos, or the Demon Gods. Through many events, I found myself becoming the leader, of the forces of the Gods of Order. It was under my orders that all those lives were lost, and a great deal of them, were lost to my own hand,¡± I said, trailing off at the end. Targhas didn¡¯t speak for a while, before he decided to take it further.

    ¡°Who won?¡± He asked. From how I spoke before, it would sound as we won, but he still wondered, since if we won, why would I be here?

    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t know for sure. I think neither side won. In the end, we completely and utterly destroyed all of their forces, and their entire population, but as we were about to fight the final battle, it turned out that their leader, the Demon Master, was actually an Immortal. Not even I could stand up to him. In the end, even¡­ well, let¡¯s just say, I don¡¯t know the fate of the others, and I am here. However, I will never forget!¡± I said, with a hint of rage at the end. Targhas even got the chills, from my last words.

    He understood that I had left some details out. He felt my aura before. It was one of complete despair. It was not something you would only get from losing a battle, but he didn¡¯t ask further. He realized that touching my soft spots, was not the best of ideas.

    And thus, we continued travelling, after taking care of the wounded, and deceased.

    ¡°So, Isaac, do you think you can take this Afflicted Prince? He¡¯s a peak level Mythical Saint, and he¡¯ll likely want revenge. He¡¯s supposed to have a lot of pride. I¡¯m certain that there¡¯s probably someone tailing us, as we speak,¡± he said. He was still worried about this Afflicted Prince guy, but I was quite confident.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, a peak Mythical Saint is small game. And yes, there is in fact, someone tailing us as we speak. But don¡¯t worry, there¡¯s no danger. And if he brings a Legendary Saint, I¡¯ll figure something out. But I doubt that¡¯d happen. In fact, it¡¯s likely he¡¯ll give up, when he arrives. After all, three A rankers, and a Saint, are not worth risking your life over. In the end, he¡¯ll value his own life over that of his already dead subordinates,¡± I said, reassuring him.

    ¡°Hmm, well if you say so. From the sounds of it, you¡¯re a legendary saint, so you¡¯ve lived far longer than me, and are much wiser, I bet,¡± Targhas said, rubbing his chin.

    ¡°Hmm, yes I¡¯m basically a Legendary Saint, but I¡¯m not that old. I¡¯m only about seven hundred years old. Still a lot older than you, though,¡± I said, rubbing my chin in turn. Targhas, however, stopped rubbing his chin, and looked at me in disbelief.

    ¡°What?! You¡¯re that young. How in the hell, did you reach your level of power, in such a short time?¡± He asked, not willing to believe me, just like that.

    ¡°Hahaha, the reactions always amuse me! But well, I¡¯m a little special. While I am in fact, as strong as an early Legendary Saint, I¡¯m only an early Mythical Saint. But I have a bit of a special bloodline, if you will,¡± I said.

    ¡°Special bloodline? What kind of bloodline lets you become that strong, that quickly? It defies logic, and quite honestly, you¡¯re making me feel bad!¡± Targhas said, again making me laugh at him.

    ¡°Well, we¡¯ve known each other for how many months now? I suppose I could tell, I intend to leech on you for a bit longer anyway. Just promise you¡¯ll keep your mouth shut, or I suppose I¡¯ll have to kill you. Alright?¡±

    ¡°Huh? Yeah, I promise! I won¡¯t tell a soul!¡± He said, immediately. He was quite curious to hear about me.

    ¡°Well then, maybe I can even give you my blessing, when we get to the city. But let¡¯s get started, on my life¡¯s story! Apparently, I¡¯m the son of Gebados, the God of Death. Gebados, the God of Death, decided that he wanted a new race of vampires, since all the other incarnations failed, so he had me, with his wife, Delia, he said she¡¯s called. I¡¯ve never met her, but I¡¯m quite curious. Apparently she¡¯s the Goddess of Nature. Quite the peculiar combination.

    Well, after I was born, he dumped me here to this world, to the people I¡¯ve always known as my parents. They proceeded to raise me, as a normal farm boy, and I eventually became the hunter of the family. This was in a continent, at the edge of the world mind you, so there were no Saints there, The strongest ones, were A rankers, like you.

    Skip forwards nineteen years, and I¡¯m reintroduced to my father, the God of Death. He awakens the power which was hidden inside me since I was born, and I became the Vampire Progenitor.

    So, to answer your question about my so called special bloodline, I¡¯m a Demigod Vampire Progenitor. As a Demi God Vampire Progenitor, I¡¯m naturally gifted with the potential to reach the actual Demigod stage, as well as eternal life. So, I grow in power rather quickly,¡± I explained to him, in one big breath.

    Targhas, found himself unable to speak, once more, as the truck load of information overflowed his little brain.

    ¡°What?¡± Was all he said.

    End of chapter 10.

 Chapter 11: Valadriath

    Chapter 11: Valadriath

    After I had told Targhas the truth about my nature, our merry band continued on our travels. Targhas did treat me with a certain amount of respect, after he found out how strong I was, and about my true nature, but I had expected nothing less. After all, when being shown a being so powerful that he could easily kill you, without anyone noticing, wouldn¡¯t you treat him with respect? My power was far above what he could fathom, and as not so talented man, he could only hope to reach my level.

    However, I had also told him that I would turn him into my kind, when we got to the city, and he knew what that meant. Therefore, he treated me with even more respect, as I was a saviour that would grant him the way to eternal life, and limitless power. Such an offer was beyond rare, and even more so when it came from me. There was a big difference between being turned by me, or a normal vampire. Or even a Pureblood Vampire. A Pureblooded Vampire, could never make another Pureblood, except through breeding. That ability was mine alone.

    After being turned by me, his potential would naturally skyrocket. With his current ability, he could only hope to become a Saint, but never a Mythical Saint, or even Legendary Saint. Such ideas were only fantasy to him, even though he lived here, close to the center. But even if this was close to the center, there was still a limit to how strong people could become. It was still only the talented that could become Saints and above. A lot of people never even became A rankers. However, there was also a lot of people that did manage it. An A ranker was a normal sight.

    However, there was still something special about this place. Targhas had told me that every person born here, would naturally reach the D rank, after becoming an adult. Thus, there were still many people capable of reaching A rank, or becoming a Saint. In fact, number of A rankers, and even Saints, far outnumbered the population of the entire Marestir Peninsula. However, this could be attributed to the fact that every continent here, was countless times bigger than the Marestir Peninsula.

    Thus, the population far outnumbered the Marestir Peninsula and the surrounding continents, and they were also far more numerous. This world was indeed huge. People said that no one person could ever know just how big it was. It was so huge that no one ever dared even name it. It was only referred to, as the World. Not just the continents, there was also, the Wilderness. The great wilderness of the center of the World. It was so unfathomably huge that no one had ever made it to the center, or if they had, they hadn¡¯t made it back out yet! The Wilderness made up a large portion of the World, and it was filled with countless beasts and monsters, many of unfathomable strength.

    And this very Wilderness, was to our side at this very moment. I could see it, and its huge, sky reaching trees. The trees were so high that we couldn¡¯t even see the top. They were shrouded in clouds. And in between this trees, was a large amount of people, all armed. They were all of varying strength. Some, who weren¡¯t wearing armour or weapons, were D ranked, while others were Saints and Mythical Saints. In the front of all these brave warriors, was a single man. A single, peak ranked, Mythical Saint.

    He wore long, red hair that reached his waist. On his cheek, was a crimson tattoo, showing a crimson eye, with a single streak going through it. This crimson line, went all the way up to his eye lid, making it look like a tear of blood. He also wore a crimson coat, crimson boots. Everything was adorned in crimson, making him look almost like a flame, as his hair swept with the wind.

    Targhas looked almost as if he had seen a ghost, or as if some great calamity was upon us.

    ¡°The Afflicted Prince!¡± He yelled, for all of us to hear. So this was the Afflicted Prince? He sure did have quite an image. He looked rather intimidating. He looked through all of us, focusing on me for just a while, before he continued to the others.

    ¡°Who amongst you is the great warrior who killed my men?¡± He asked, with a thundering voice that still seemed calm like water. I calmly stepped forwards.

    ¡°That would be me,¡± I said, however, just as soon as I finished, he charged straight at me, with all of his power. In a flash of power, his fist hit my head, and my body torpedoed away, and made a large crater at impact.

    ¡°Humph, is that supposed to be the great warrior that killed five trillion people? What a disappointment,¡± the Afflicted Prince said, as he turned to leave.

    ¡°Indeed, your punch is a little bit strong,¡± I said, as I calmly rose from the crater, without as much as a speck of dust on me.

    ¡°However, if you wish to injure me, you will need just a bit more. Perhaps I should give you an example, so that you learn for next time,¡± I said. Then in another flash of power, I charged at him. In an instant, my fist connected to his face, before he even managed to react, and he was sent flying. He flew through the trees, causing several of them to shatter and fall, until finally he connected to the ground, creating a huge crater. Suddenly, in the dense forest, a clearing had appeared.

    Out of the newly appeared clearing, rose the bloodied Afflicted Prince. His back was hunched, and he rested his arm on his knee. He was shivering. Several cuts and bruises had appeared all over his body. Even though he was a powerful Mythical Saint, he had been cut. It wasn¡¯t from a sword or blade, but a punch! He had been blasted away with such ferocity that he had been continuously cut, by the weak trees and branches, and stones and rocks. He couldn¡¯t understand it. He had never fought with a Legendary Saint before; he couldn¡¯t understand it! Even though the branches were far weaker than his skin, they still cut him! This was the force with which, he had been blown away.

    It was absolute power.

    However, the truth was much more simple. It was not the trees and rocks, which cut him. I had just sneakily used my energy to cut him, as he was blasted away, giving an illusion of being cut by the trees and rocks. No matter what, a tree branch, would never be able to cut a Mythical Saint, or even just an A ranker, without some sort of strengthening, like covering it with energy.

    He slowly rose, straightening his back. He jumped out of the pit, and looked around him. He was trying to find me; whether or not I had followed him. However, as he turned around once more, he was clearly surprised, as I appeared right in front of his face.

    ¡°There you go. Or do you want another demonstration?¡± I asked him. He was visibly appalled, as his face contorted, and he stepped a few steps back. He had clearly lost all will to fight me. He was no moron. He already knew that he stood no chance.

    ¡°No, no, I¡¯m quite alright,¡± he quickly said. Even though he was a Mythical Saint, who had lived for thousands of years; met all kinds of troubles, he was nervous. An invincible Mythical Saint, in front of a Legendary Saint, would still feel fear. After all, only the stupid would needlessly fight someone above them.This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    However, being the experienced fighter he was, he would naturally want to turn this situation around. If he could win my favour, he would try to. He quickly composed himself, and bowed to me.

    ¡°I would like to apologize for my previous rudeness, as well as the previous rudeness of my subordinates. In this world, you can never know when someone is bluffing, and the story which I was told, sounded rather exaggerated, so I had doubt of your strength. Now, however, I hold no such doubt. I hope you can find it in your heart, and forgive my foolishness,¡± he said magnanimously. He truly spared no effort in both sounding apologetic, while still keeping face.

    ¡°Hahaha, no worries, no worries. I didn¡¯t ever intend to kill you, just teach you a lesson. The truth is, I¡¯m not quite from these parts. I came here through some weird magic, and know very little about this place. As of now, I am heading to the home city of my friend over there, but I could always use more allies in these lands. You are quite strong, and will be able to reach the Legendary Saint level soon, so I find some worth in you,¡± I said. The Prince, was a bit taken aback, but quickly gave a genuine smile. He had been saved!

    ¡°Aha, so it was only that? Then, let¡¯s exchange signatures,¡± he said.

    ¡°Signatures? What do you mean?¡± I asked him, being quite confused by his little idea.

    ¡°Oh, you don¡¯t know? You must truly have come from far away then,¡± he said, as an object appeared in his hand.

    ¡°You see this? This is a Communication Orb. It allows us to contact each other, even when we¡¯re far away from each other. Although, there is a limit. If you leave the continent, it will probably not be able to reach. At least, not this model. There are models with further reach, but they¡¯re extremely expensive. For now, I shall gift one to you,¡± he said, and gave me the little orb.

    ¡°Huh, this is quite interesting. And useful. I¡¯ll have to thank you for this, but I don¡¯t have many items with me. They were all left back home. I wasn¡¯t quite prepared for this journey, you see,¡± I told him.

    ¡°Oh, no worries. This isn¡¯t too much for me. You can just pay me back at your leisure,¡± he said.

    ¡°If you say so. Well then, we will take our leave now, and we¡¯ll meet again in the future. Also, don¡¯t tell anyone about me. Someone getting teleported here from a great distance would bring some attention, which I don¡¯t want,¡± I said. At the last words, my tone was especially threatening. The Afflicted Prince silently nodded his head, in response.

    Thus, without another word, I turned around and got back to the caravan. Targhas looked at me with a worried expression, as I walked towards him. The men of the Afflicted Prince looked even more worried, but as they saw their leader coming out of the forest, they calmed down, somewhat. The Afflicted Prince looked towards me, and said,

    ¡°We¡¯ll meet again!¡±

    3<sup>rd</sup> person perspective.

    As he watched him leave, he could only think a single though.

    ¡®Holy fucking shit! I really dodged an arrow there!¡± He said, with a composed, calm expression that showed utmost confidence and valour. However, inside he was still panicking, and celebrating for not getting his head blown off.

    1<sup>st</sup> person perspective, Isaac.

    Thus, we got back on our journey. However, after we had travelled a bit, I realized, I never actually got his real name, and neither did he get mine. However, I decided that it didn¡¯t matter too much, we could have our introductions the next time we meet, as long as he doesn¡¯t betray my trust.

    The last days of our journey were uneventful, as nothing really happened. A few months passed, and we finally arrived at a large city. And I mean large. The walls were absolutely towering, going at least a few hundred meters into the sky, and there was no end to their reach. They just continued into the horizon. I was quite flabbergasted, as I took in the sight. I had seen large cities before, but nothing compared to this. This could be identified as a whole country! It was just too huge. Targhas noticed my look.

    ¡°What, have you never seen a city before?¡± He asked, with a confused expression. He didn¡¯t expect me, a legendary Legendary Saint, to be this surprised from the mere sight of a city.

    ¡°I have seen cities before, but this can¡¯t be called a city! It¡¯s huge! Where I¡¯m from cities are less than a thousandth the size of this!¡± I exclaimed.

    And indeed it was so. From what I learned, this city could compare to an entire country in the Marestir Peninsula. Just the population numbered in at least several hundred million, for the average city. A big city could even have several billion citizens. This city, for example, had over two billion people in it! This size was breathtaking.

    Naturally, this kind of population wasn¡¯t easy to uphold. But what kind of place was this? This was a place, where an A ranker, could barely become a merchant, with some luck. You would find family that uses A rankers as servants, or low rank bodyguards. They could even become normal workers. The weakest people were no lower than D rank, and the vast majority were stronger. And this wasn¡¯t like the Marestir Peninsula, or the Sword Continent. The average D ranker could live for over two hundred years, no problem. An A ranker, could even live for up to a thousand years. The reason for this, was of course the Natural Energy. This amount of Natural Energy even allowed for Immortals, and increased the base strength of everyone. Even a young child would be an E ranker.

    Your average child from this continent could kill a hundred of your average adults, front the Marestir Peninsula. It was absolutely insane. Naturally the number of A rankers was immeasurable. If I could ever bring this kind of power to my home continent, I would consider it quite a success. However, I had no idea how such a thing could even be possible. However, I didn¡¯t rule it out as a possibility.

    After Targhas explained me the cities of this ¡®world¡¯, we continued towards the city. Which took a week. The city was so large that you could see it an extreme distance away. However, we were travelling with a caravan, so our speed was limited. If I went alone, I could make it there very quickly. I was in no hurry, though.

    We leisurely made our way there, and eventually arrived at a huge gate, where we lined up. There was one line for people, and another for merchants and caravans, as there were different procedures for it. There was also another line, which was empty, except for a single person, who got in without trouble. We lined up at the merchant line, and got to the checkpoint after about an hour or two. Targhas was in the lead, as I stood next to him.

    ¡°What goods are you carrying?¡± The guard asked in a monotone tone. Targhas quickly took a list out,

    ¡°I¡¯m carrying thirty kilos silver, three kilos gems, fifty kilos linen¡­¡± he listed of several items, and quantities, which the guard listed down. Then he asked,

    ¡°Do you have all the sales documents, and proof of purchase?¡± with the same monotone voice. Targhas quickly got even more documents, and gave them. In the end, the process took a good hour, as they had to check for illegal items, and check licences, and several other things. It was a very strict procedure, and you needed documents for all the items which you purchased; proof of ownership. They all carried a special mark, too, so they were very hard to fake.

    If you tried to live as a bandit, you would find it very hard to sell your loot, at least in a city. Smuggling was a near impossible feat, as well. The security was really amazing. There was no shortage of guards either, and the weakest of them were A rankers, and there were several Saints, and even a few Mythical Saints. However, this also caused them to pay us more respect, as they could clearly see me, and realize that I was no weak figure. So the procedures went pretty quickly and smoothly.

    It didn¡¯t take long, before we found ourselves walking on the roads of the city. There were countless people walking around the roads, going about their business. However, it was still a spectacular sight. There were countless humanoids. Not humans, but humanoids. There were beings of all kinds of nature, and colour. Green people, blue skinned, any colour you could think off. Some had horns, some had four arms. There were elves and orcs, goblins and gnomes, any race you could think of; it was here. There were even beings that reached several meters in height.

    ¡°Well, here we are; the City of Xarxes! It is one of the great cities of our country; the capital of the Dominion of Valadriath!¡±

    End of chapter 11.

 Chapter 12: Ashes

    Chapter 12

    Ashes

    Death. Death is inevitable; it is the only result of life.

    Yet, we fear it; it plagues our minds, as we look for all means to defer it.

    We spend our entire lives; be it short or long; with the purpose of prolonging it.

    Yet, as we reach the end, what do we achieve?

    Will we only find ourselves to have wasted our life;

    or will purpose have born out of the ashes of obstinance?

    Perhaps, through the passage of time; through the trials of perseverance,

    you will have found something.

    Be it purpose, fault, or love.

    But if that purpose gets taken away, from the clutches of your grasp?

    What then?

    X

    A gray field, covered in corpses. There were corpses I¡¯d never seen, and corpses of people I called comrades. I the distance, buried in a mound of death, I saw a face. It belonged to Ley. In a soundless scream, I tried to rush over to him, but I couldn¡¯t move. My arms and legs were covered in black mass, holding me back. As I turned around, I met with a horrid sight.

    Limbs were scattered around. Legs, arms, the torso¡­ The head. These limbs, they all belonged to a single person. Amelia. I felt my heart shatter, as the invisible tears escaped my eyes. I tried to scream, yet not a sound escaped. In front of her, was a shadow. I tried to reach out, but that I saw, as my arms reached out, was black mass. My arms were black, as the void. As I looked at my body, I found that I was all black. Just like the shadow person.

    Then I found myself standing above the pile, which once was Amelia. And I woke up.

    As I found myself in bed, I was covered in cold sweat. This was the first time I went for a rest in months, but it was no good. Still surrounded by nightmares. As I rose up, a clutched at my head. It hurt. My heart hurt. I felt an anger welling up. Rage! A rage complete focused on that Immortal. I wanted to shout out, to let all my anger out, at my surroundings. But I still had to calm down. If I went mad in this city, it could only result in my death. There were countless people here, capable of killing me.

    I could only settle down, and go wash myself. After all, I was covered in sweat, which wasn¡¯t something you would often see, in a Legendary Saint. But this sweat didn¡¯t come from physical exertion, but stress, anger, sadness, and despair. It only took a moment, until I was clean again.

    With my mind settled, I left the room, and went to find Targhas. My goal was still to find that older brother of mine, but I was completely lost. All I knew was the name of this city, as well as the name of the country. The City of Xarxes; the Dominion of Valadriath. I knew that Valadriath was the ruler and founder of the state, and that Xarxes was the capital. Somewhere within this city, you would find Valadriath. What I knew about Valadriath himself, was not much. I knew he was old; older than anyone could remember, and that he was Immortal. However, I didn¡¯t know what Immortal rank he held. However, he was no doubt, powerful.

    To find my brother, I would need more information about this place, and for that, I needed Targhas. And I already considered him a friend. After all, he gave me a helping hand, when I was despaired. However, to be completely honest, my ¡®eyes¡¯ might have helped a bit. After all, from what I had learned about Targhas, he valued himself greatly. He was a merchant, and loved riches. He would never seek trouble, which he couldn¡¯t handle. Like when I taunted that Afflicted Prince. However, when he learned of my true power and nature, he became even friendlier. He wouldn¡¯t betray his friends, and even less so, a powerful friend.

    He was a figure I could agree with. Merciless when provoked; merciful when appeased. He could be trusted, so I would make him my ally. The same with the Afflicted Prince, as long as he would prove trustworthy. From the short time I met him, I was left with a positive impression. He seemed proud, but calm. He made the decision to befriend me, after he saw my true power. As long as he didn¡¯t turn out to be someone to betray my trust, it should turn out nicely.

    It didn¡¯t take me long to find Targhas. He was eating a meal. We were inside his residence, in Xerxes. He had a pretty big house, and would have cost a small fortune. Especially for a small figure like him, who didn¡¯t have much talent in art of magic or cultivation. But he was still a brilliant trader. Through his centuries of life, he had made himself a small fortune, which allowed to have some form of luxury. But he still couldn¡¯t be considered very rich. He was somewhere between upper middle class, and lower upper class.

    He was eating a relatively lavish meal, in his dining room. The dining room was decorated with all sorts of trinkets and artefacts. He considered himself a bit of a collector. He had many interesting and old items.

    ¡°Ah, Isaac you¡¯re up. Do you want some breakfast?¡± He asked. As a mortal A ranker, he still needed to take care of his bodily needs, like food and sleep, but I was different. I hadn¡¯t needed to eat or sleep for about seven hundred years already. Naturally, as a vampire, I didn¡¯t need to eat food, nor sleep, much less as a Mythical Saint, with the strength of a Legendary Saint. I could also go without blood for very long periods of time now.

    ¡°No need. I¡¯m no mood for food,¡± I said, with a slightly annoyed look. However, Targhas took it the wrong way.

    ¡°Oh, I¡¯m sorry, I¡¯m sorry, please don¡¯t take hurt with my attitude,¡± he said with very apparent worry. I made a small smirk at his antics.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, it¡¯s not you. It¡¯s just,¡± I said, pausing a bit, as my smirk vanished, ¡°Bad dreams.¡±

    Targhas took notice at my drop in mood, but he didn¡¯t ask further. I walked over to a window, overlooking the busy streets. We were on the eighth floor, so it was a bit high. Because of both size, and populations, moth buildings reached high into the sky, and acted as apartment complexes. Targhas¡¯ house, was at the top floor, in the eight floor building. It wasn¡¯t the largest, but it was pretty exquisite.

    ¡°Do you remember what I told you, back then?¡± I asked him. Targhas adorned a serious look, as he turned his head towards me.

    ¡°You mean about you being a vampire?¡± He asked back. I nodded my head, confirming it. I looked at the people down below. They looked quite small from here. They were all going about their lives, either trying to live to their fullest, before they die, or trying to prevent their death. However, everyone dies. Even those powerful Immortals, would one day die. You could prolong your life, to the point of eternal life, but sooner or later, as the sands of time flowed, they would somehow die. This was an unshakable fact.

    ¡°Do you want immortality? The chance to live forever; the ability to increase your strength indefinitely?¡± I asked him, as I still stared at the city dwellers. There was a pause, as Targhas searched for words. Eventually, though, he answered with a simple word,

    ¡°Yes,¡± he said. I turned around, and faced him. My long hair fluttered, and there was a certain darkness in my eyes.

    ¡°Then you seek the unattainable. But I can still give you the means, so that you can seek your own power. With my gift, you will never age, never grow old. You will find your bottleneck to disappear, and your limits lifted. Then you can live, for as long as you can. But death still finds everyone,¡± I said, as I walked towards Targhas. Targhas neither moved, nor spoke. He couldn¡¯t. He was sturdily locked in place, not able to move a single muscle. I moved close to him, until I stood only a breath away.If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.

    I moved my face close, until it was only a breath under his ear.

    ¡°Today, you will die, and live again,¡± I said, as I bit into his neck. The seconds passed, as I drained him dry, until there was barely a drop left. Then, that black venom flowed into the wound, going into his veins, spreading all over his body; in every single vein, every single artery, until it finally found his heart. And he collapsed.

    As if he was dead, he lied on the floor, not breathing, without a heartbeat. In a swift motion, I disappeared from the room, out into the city. Faster than anyone could see, I sped towards the poorer parts of the city, until I arrived at the slums.

    There were many ruined and aged buildings around here. There were several beggars on the streets, and everyone was dressed poorly. The only thing that didn¡¯t look poor, was the city walls. The would be maintained at peak condition, at every single corner of this country sized city.

    I quickly looked around for the prettiest girls around. There were several pretty girls, even here in the slums. Many of them worked in nightly activities, like prostitution, so naturally they lived in the slums. However, amongst all of them, there was one that interested me. It was a breathtakingly beautiful girl, but she wasn¡¯t quite normal. She had two horns going out of her forehead, and had very sharp and pointy ears. I stood on a clear rooftop, and observed the several girls, yet no one noticed me.

    In the end, I decided against taking the horned girl, and instead noted where her residence was. Then, I grabbed three pretty girls, and before they even knew what had happened, they appeared inside the home of Targhas. They were quite shocked at the sudden development, as well as the seemingly dead Targhas. Naturally, they screamed.

    ¡°Quiet,¡± I said, and suddenly stopped. They didn¡¯t even open their mouths. They didn¡¯t dare to. This was because I was showering them with tiny miniscule amount of my aura, which naturally made the weak girls quiver in fear. I pointed towards two of the girls, and said,

    ¡°You two, sit down, and enjoy your last moments,¡± with a calm voice. As for the other one, I walked towards her, and quickly stripped her naked. Then I proceeded to violently fuck her, while drinking her blood, while the other two girls stared in horror. They were afraid that they would suffer the same fate soon, but they still didn¡¯t dare to make a sound. They knew that they had encountered someone far above them.

    After a few moments, the girl started to enjoy the mix of pain and pleasure. This was of course of the aphrodisiac effect of the vampire¡¯s bite. However, it didn¡¯t take long, before she died from a mix of severe injuries, and blood loss. As I was having my way with her, several of her bones broke, including her neck and spine, as well as her limbs. But she still died with an erotic smile on her face.

    The other two girls quivered in fear, as I looked towards them. They were horrified beyond their wits. They truly didn¡¯t want to end up like the other girl.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you two are for him,¡± I said, as I pointed towards Targhas. ¡°He should wake up soon enough,¡± I said. However, as I looked at Targhas, I suddenly had an idea. Targhas didn¡¯t have any servants; after all they were pretty expensive around here, and he wasn¡¯t even around most of the time. So why not just use these girls. The ritual of killing your first victims as a vampire wasn¡¯t really that important for people like Targhas anyway. He had already killed several people. No A ranker hadn¡¯t. In such a big city, murder was extremely common, and many quarrels were solved with it. Most people with some power, had killed someone. The government didn¡¯t really care too much, as it helped keep population down. Overpopulation could become a trouble in such a place.

    I looked towards the two girls with a smile this time.

    ¡°Actually, I just had an idea. Usually when I create my kind, I have them kill their first victims, as a ritual, but I think I can make an exception. You see I don¡¯t have any servants or maids here, so if two of you agree in your own will to serve me, then I will let you live. What do you say?¡± I asked them.

    The two girls widened their eyes in shock, and stared at me for a while, trying to process what I just said. However, they were quick to agree.

    ¡°Yes, yes! Definitely Yes! We¡¯ll do anything Master asks of us, no matter what it is!¡± The two girls said.

    ¡°Good. But you will have to drink some of my blood, to bind you to my will. This way you will never be able to betray me. And as long as you continue to drink it from time to time, it will even extend your lifetime, as well as make you a bit stronger.¡±

    The girls were a bit hesitant to drink my blood, but they still did it quickly. They would do anything to live, and this had even turned into a good situation. They knew that serving this Master, also meant living with him. They would finally be out of poverty.

    As they drank my blood, I noticed that a crimson tattoo appeared on their wrists. This was new. It kinda looked like a slave tattoo, but had a much more beautiful design. The girls looked at their new tattoos with awe, and quite liked it, so I didn¡¯t question it for now. The girls also felt even stronger than before.

    ¡°Well then, what are your names?¡± I asked the two girls. These girls, by the way, also weren¡¯t human. They were elves! This was actually the main reason I had taken them as maids. I had never even seen a full elf before, so I had decided to take them in.

    ¡°My name is Phyrra, and her name is Aila,¡± the slightly taller elf said. The smaller one had red cheeks, and was looked at my shyly, while lightly holding her friend¡¯s arm.

    ¡°Alright, Aila and Phyrra, from today onwards you are my maids, and will take care of all my needs. And I mean all of them. If you do well, then perhaps I will reward you in the future. However, Targhas here will still need to drink your blood, and he¡¯ll need most of it. But I¡¯ll stop him before he kills you, so don¡¯t worry. However, you will be very weak for a few weeks. Also, since you can¡¯t betray me anymore, I¡¯ll take the time until Targhas wakes up, to explain what I am, what he¡¯s about to become,¡± I said.

    Then I spent nearly an hour, explaining my true nature to the girls. It would be inconvenient if they didn¡¯t even know, and they were already bound by the Blood Bond, so they couldn¡¯t possibly betray me. And they didn¡¯t feel any hatred from the death of the third girl, or for me kidnapping them. If anything, they only felt thankful. After all, they had lived in poverty before, but now they knew a life of riches was waiting, even though they would have to serve me. They also knew that the chance of immortality lay before them, and they wouldn¡¯t even mind serving me for eternity they said.

    As for the third girl, she wasn¡¯t actually their friend. In fact, they had quite bad relations, as she had been a rival of theirs. By the way, all three of the girls had been prostitutes, and the two girls, Aila and Phyrra were partners. This meant that they would often do threesomes together. They had even lived together, in a small place.

    So, as for watching the third girl die, while they were horrified, they still didn¡¯t care too much. She had caused them too many troubles throughout the years.

    Aila was a very cute girl, and didn¡¯t look like a former prostitute at all. She looked very innocent, while still having a good body. Her breasts were a good size, and she had nice curves.

    As for Phyrra, she was more confident, and also didn¡¯t look much like a former prostitute. Her breasts were a bit bigger than Aila¡¯s and she was curvier overall. To sum it up, I quite liked them. I felt like they would make for a good distraction. I also knew none of my wives would mind, after all, I had several concubines, and four wives.

    Finally, after about an hour had passed Targhas woke up. As Targhas rose back up, he looked groggily around him, and noticed the two new girls, as well as the deformed corpse.

    ¡°What happened here?¡± He asked, clearly confused.

    ¡°These two girls are my new maids, as well as your lunch. As for the dead naked girl, I had my way with her. You don¡¯t need to worry, just drink,¡± I said. Targhas hesitantly nodded his head, and walked towards the two girls, who willingly showed their necks. They weren¡¯t too afraid anymore, since they knew their lives weren¡¯t in danger.

    Targhas was a bit hesitant, but he was an experienced man. He quickly gave in to the hunger, and since he had asked for this himself, he had already prepared himself. He quickly drained the girls, and just before they were about to die, I pulled him away. After it was all finished up, I gave the two girls a bit of my blood, to help them recover. They were very pale, but they looked a bit more energized. Since they couldn¡¯t actually walk, I carried them up to the bed, which I had woken up in prior. They quickly fell asleep, and I had Targhas go hire a doctor, since I couldn¡¯t be bothered to constantly look after them. We used the excuse of severe anaemia, which the doctor took with a grain of salt, but still accepted, since he got paid.

    End of chapter 12.

 Chapter 13: The Tower

    Chapter 13: The Tower

    Several days passed in the city of Xarxes. In these past days, several people had gone missing, to unknown causes, but no one seemed to care, as murder and death was all too commonplace in this world, which in they lived. Of course, these small people that had gone missing, were all courtesy of my friend, Targhas, and some even from me. After all, we needed our food.

    I didn¡¯t spend these days doing much, except planning ahead; I needed a plan, for what was to come. My number one goal, was to revive my wife, Amelia. But there were many things that had to be accomplished for that, and I didn¡¯t even dare to think of what prices had to be paid.

    For now, however, I needed to find my brother. From what I was told, he should be strong; extremely strong. There simply wasn¡¯t much I could do to find him, as I doubted that even the kings and Immortals would know much of him, if even anything. Therefore, there were only a few things I could do; read through old, forgotten records, describing battles of the most powerful beings, or just encounters with them.

    Thus, I had asked Targhas for libraries in the city. However, being the normal person he was, he could only lead me to the normal, public libraries, which wouldn¡¯t contain such secret information. However, I still had one informant that I could ask; the Afflicted Prince.

    Luckily, I had means of contacting him, as he had giving me the communications device. And indeed, he did know of places, which normal people wouldn¡¯t know of. It was still a bit weird for a bandit to know of them, no matter how strong he is, though. I suspected he might be from quite higher origins, which might be where his nickname came from.

    Thus, I went out. I said my farewells to Targhas, and the two girls, and told them I might be gone for a few days, or weeks; however, I didn¡¯t give them a clue to where I was going. This place was apparently a well-kept secret, and apparently, not even Saints and Mythical Saints were allowed in, without permission. Luckily for me, I possessed the same strength as that of a Legendary Saint, and would be given permission to enter freely.

    The Prince had assured me of this, as they had methods to test the true strength of a person. It wasn¡¯t too uncommon for someone to possess a special lineage, or something, giving them strength above their rank. It was still less than one in a trillion Saints, but there were a few.

    Thus, I left the city. This place wasn¡¯t in the city, but quite a distance away, and would take even me a few days to reach there. So, I travelled for three days, to the place which he told me about, until I finally reached there.

    And man, if it wasn¡¯t a sight. This ¡®library¡¯ consisted of a tower, but it wasn¡¯t just any tower. It was so tall that I couldn¡¯t even see the top! It pierced several dozen kilometres into the sky, and the top; at least as far as I could see, was covered in clouds.

    At the bottom of the tower, there was a giant pantheon, acting as the entrance. Outside said pantheon, there was an entire army of guards, and even the weakest amongst them was a Saint!

    Stricken by awe, I flew down to the entrance, to try and enter. However, before I could even take a step on the pantheon,

    ¡°Halt!¡± Someone shouted at me, and pointed a large, golden spear at me. This man was truly huge, towering at nine feet tall, but that wasn¡¯t all; his skin was silver, deeply contrasting with his bright, golden spear.

    ¡°Only those of the Legendary Saint rank are allowed entry, without special permission, and supervision,¡± the silver guard said, without emotion; without even a change in expression.

    ¡°I am aware of this rule, however I possess the strength of a Legendary Saint, so I believe I should be permitted entry, no?¡± I shouted back at him, a bit loudly. The silver guard looked at me with a slightly surprised expression, as he lowered his spear, then took out a small, familiar item.

    In his hand, was a hand sized orb, of a black and golden colour. These two colours seemed like mist, trapped inside the orb.

    ¡°Then put your hand on this orb, and we shall see,¡± the silver guard said. I complied, and put my flat hand on the orb, and let it test my strength. Suddenly, it started to glow brightly, and the black colour started to overtake the golden colour. Then, all of a sudden, the expression of the silver guard changed greatly, several times, before settling down.

    ¡°Alright, it seems everything is fine. You can go on in,¡± the silver guard said, as he stood to the side, to give me entry. I was a bit puzzled by his behaviour, but I paid it no mind, and went on ahead in. I could feel the eyes of the silver guard on my neck, but when I turned around, he was gone. The weirdest thing of all, was that he had no aura or energy. He didn¡¯t feel like a living being.

    Inside the gargantuan tower, I arrived in a huge hall. There was a lot of people here; both customers and guards. It surprised me how many people came here, and not a single one of them was below the Legendary Saint rank. But it had to be understood, this tower wasn¡¯t just something that belonged to the Dominion of Valadriath. From what I knew, the tower was located in a neutral ground, between the borders of several countries. As for the rulers of the countries directly surrounding it, they were the Tower Guardians. Neither of them owned, nor ruled it, but they guarded it.

    As for the one who had created the Tower, was unknown. It was age old, and had records of things from the beginning of time, or so it was rumoured. Some thought it was created by the Gods, at the same time that the world itself was created, others thought that it was created by and ancient assembly of Immortals, and others, thought it was created by Demi God.

    However, no one knew for sure. Maybe not even the Guardians knew. However, it was still a complete treasure hoard. Be it history, ancient skills and techniques, or just old stories and myths, it was all here. However, there was a limit to what you would be allowed to see.

    Just like the world itself, the Tower, too, was ruled by strength. Only with power, would you be allowed to transcend higher up the tower. As for me, with the strength of a first stage Legendary Saint, I would only be allowed on the first floor.

    However, that was all I needed. Even the first floor held countless records of history, and was bountiful with secrets. Even on the first floor held unread records, and undiscovered secrets. That was just how bountiful it was. Every floor was extremely huge, much beyond what I had expected. Just to read everything on a single floor, would take me millions of years. But that was how the Tower functioned. Access to the Tower, wouldn¡¯t instantly give you access to a nigh infinite amount of powerful skills and techniques. First, you would need to find them.The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation.

    And the tower; it operated in mysterious ways. No same record would ever be found at the same place. They would shift around, and sometimes, they would even disappear. Other times, they simply floated in the air, or flew to a new location, at extreme speeds, even for an Immortal.

    Thus, the Tower, was truly un-exploitable.

    Thus, with my goal set in mind, and with a will so powerful it could shake the heavens, I turned around and left the Tower.

    You see, the tower was far bigger than what I anticipated, and I would need a lot more time than expected, so first, I would go back to the city, to let them know that I would be gone for a while. I even wondered whether the two maids would still be alive by then.

    Thus, I quickly journeyed back home, and in another three days, I was back.

    ¡°Targhas, there has been a change in plans. I will need a lot more time than expected, and I might be gone for a few years, or a few dozen years, or even a few centuries. I will be doing research into the Demi Gods, and trying if I can find any clues. I will leave it to you to tell the girls, and you can do with them as you like. After all, they¡¯ll likely die of old age, before I get back,¡± I said quickly, not letting him get a single word in, until I was finished.

    ¡°A few centuries? Just where are you going, for you to need this long?¡± Targhas asked.

    ¡°Well, I¡¯m going to a library, to be frank. Quite a place it is, I just got back from there. But you have to be a Legendary Saint to be allowed on just the first floor. Also, while I¡¯m gone, you can continue your business, just don¡¯t change your base of operations from here. Even though, I¡¯ll still be able to find you, no matter where you go. Well then, I¡¯ll be off now,¡± I said, then disappeared in a flash, before he could even ask a single question.

    It wasn¡¯t really that I didn¡¯t want to talk with him, I was just anxious. I wanted to find that brother of mine as quickly as possible, and I wouldn¡¯t let anything get in my way.

    Thus, with an even quicker speed, I got back to the Tower, in only two and a half days. This time, no one stopped me from entering, for some reason. They probably had some method to know who has already been checked.

    Inside the hall, I quickly got to the center of the hall. In the center, there was a large mechanism, reminiscent of a portal, just much, much larger, and far more complicated that anything I had ever seen. As soon as I entered the large circle, which was the portal, the scenery around me immediately changed, and I found myself in what looked like a very normal library, except for the fact that there were rows upon rows of bookshelves everywhere, and I couldn¡¯t even see the end.

    In the air, there were streaks of light, composed of various shades of black, white and brown, and occasionally the odd colour, like blue or red. These ought to be the books in transit, but seriously, they were extremely fast. So fast, that all I could see, were streaks of light. If it was a mortal, he wouldn¡¯t even see them, and in fact, he would die as soon as he stepped foot in here.

    I finally understood why only Legendary Saints could be allowed inside here. It wasn¡¯t only the extremely heavy energy, which made it feel like a thousand mountains of titanium were on my back, but the winds from the speeding books were cutting my clothes, and even causing light wounds.

    I immediately had to make an energy barrier around me, to stop the wind blades. This was quite the scary place, if I was to be frank. I didn¡¯t want wait any longer, so I immediately stepped of the teleportation circle, and went for the bookshelf closest to me. It was truly a puzzle to navigate around all these books. You could only see the name of the books on the cover, and some even had completely blank covers. And to top it all off, there was no coordination, at all. One book could be about the history about an ancient country, while the book on its side, could be a collection of poems.

    You just had to pick and choose, and hope you find something good.

    And thus, I began my research. I grabbed book after book; read one, tossed the others, choosing only the ones that seemed like they could be of some help. I didn¡¯t stop for a single second, and I checked every single book, on every single bookshelf I came upon. And oh, there were many, many bookshelves. I spent year after years, and before I knew it, I had spent almost fifty years, reading. I had already read thousands, if not millions of books, yet I hadn¡¯t found a single book or record, worth me a damn.

    My mind could already be considered a treasure hoard, when it came to information, yet I didn¡¯t know a single thing about Demi Gods, except what Father had told me. Thankfully, even though I was only a Legendary Saint, in terms of strength, my mind processed information much faster, and I was able read at very quick speeds.

    But even though I didn¡¯t find anything worth all my efforts, I still continued. Another fifty years passed, and another, and another, and before I knew it, I had spent four hundred years inside this library. And you guessed, I had still found nothing worth my efforts.

    However, after all these years, I finally saw something, which was able to interest me, after spending countless years, looking at the same bland bookshelves and books, without any variety. Something happened, which I never thought I¡¯d ever see. One of the transiting books, slowed down to a halt, then simply floated in the air, a good fifty meters up in the air.

    The even immediately interested me, and I jumped up to grab it. Yet, I only managed to jump about ten meters. It was because of the heaviness of the place. All these energies made the unable to use my full strength, and I could only jump barely ten meters into the air. Flying was simply an impossibility.

    However, even though I couldn¡¯t reach it, I didn¡¯t dare give up. So I tried, again and again, to reach the book. But, time after time, I still wasn¡¯t able to jump even an inch closer.

    Thus, I made up my mind, and set down, in a meditation position. I started training, praying to whatever I could think of that the book didn¡¯t leave.

    And let me tell you, training in here, was truly miraculous, if not extremely hard. The heavy energy made it hard concentrate, for one. But with my iron will, I tried my best to ignore it, and finally began training in the ¡®Death Lord Art¡¯, gifted to me by Father.

    Thus, yet another one hundred years passed, totalling to five hundred years spent in the library, and miraculously enough, the book was still there, as if it was waiting for me. Waiting, for me to become worthy of taking it.

    And, for the past one hundred years, I had trained without rest, until I could barely even feel the power of this place. And finally, I had truly broken through, to the Legendary Saint stage. However, this was truly different from any other stage, I had ever been in. For one, was I had rapidly progressed through the stages of an Mythical Saint, my true strength never went above that of an early stage Legendary Saint. This truly puzzled me.

    However, now that I truly entered that mysterious stage, a true change happened in me. I felt a new power, sprouting up from the pits of my soul. A power that I could expand, out of my body, covering a large area, in the heavy aura of Death. I had awakened my Domain.

    The Domain was truly a mystical power. As I expanded it, I could feel everything in its area; even control everything. I could alter gravity, or inhibit the movement of anything in it. However, inside this library, I was only able to expand it to a quarter of a meter around me. The energy of this Tower, was truly tyrannical. However, I was now able to move much more freely; almost as freely as I could before I entered, which showed just how powerful the energy was.

    After all, I could feel that my power now reached that of a middle stage Legendary Saint, so I was still quite a bit away from full power. However, it was far more than enough, to jump fifty meters up into the air.

    And thus, I jumped up into the air, fifty meters, and let my hand grasp at the brown, leather bound book. However, what I had expected to happen next was that I would grab the book, then fall back down, and read. Instead, however, what happened was that as soon I grabbed the book, and energy covered my body, and froze it in place, making unable to even let go.

    And then, the book started flying, at speeds faster than even an Immortal, with me in tow.

    End of chapter 13.

 Chapter 14: A Trial

    Chapter 14: A Trial

    In a boundless area, comprised of what seemed to be a library, there was a nigh unsurmountable tranquillity. There was close to no signs of life; only the occasional reader, here and there. Other than that, there were only books, be it floating in the air, streaking across the skies, or resting, silently on the age old, and weathered bookshelves. A perpetual tranquillity; except for that one screaming man, being dragged across the boundless gray skies, by a small, leather book.

    This one man, being dragged across the boundless grey skies, by a small, leather bound book, was indeed me, Isaac Coldblood, ruler of the vampiric race, conqueror of the Peninsula, slaughterer of continents, dominated by a small, leather bound book. But, truth be told, I had long stopped screaming already. It sort of, just grew old after the first few hours. And days. And years.

    Indeed, I had been dragged around, by this small book for years already. I couldn¡¯t even move a single muscle, as it forcefully moved me, to wherever it was it was going. All I knew was that it had already at least a few years, and that it somehow protected me, or the fierce wind would cut me to pieces.

    But, it was truly a mystery. The time it had travelled, and the speed it had travelled at, would already have been enough to circle the tower a million times, so, just where was it going? I could only wait and see.

    And, oh, did I wait. Time passed, ever so slowly, and before I knew it, I had lost all track of time. I hadn¡¯t the faintest idea, of how long it had been, I just knew one thing; it was dreadfully boring. I couldn¡¯t move a single muscle, nor take a single breath. Luckily for me, I had long surpassed the necessity of oxygen, or I would have long suffocated.

    The only thing I had to entertain me, was the boundless gray skies, above. Nothing else; I couldn¡¯t even do as much, as to move my eyes. I only saw the gray skies; I could never gaze below, and before I knew it, my mind started deteriorating. I started to see machinations of the mind; figures of Amelia, and my old friends; voices of the ones I used to know. Childhood friends from the nearby villages of my childhood; people long taken away, by the passage of time.

    Time passed and passed, and after a very, very long time, it felt as if I had already been there for thousands of years. No, I was certain. It had been so long that I felt like I nations would have come, and passed. I started questioning. I forgot; why was I here? What was I doing; what was I? Was my purpose in existence only to look at the never changing gray skies?

    However, as everything eventually does, it changed. One day, after what had felt like eons, I finally started to see something. The top of an old, weathered, perhaps wooden object started to fade into sight, from the bottom of my sight. However, I couldn¡¯t see what it was. My vision was a constantly locked state, so I could only wait, and wait, while the old wooden object grew taller, and taller, ever so slowly.

    Eventually, after many days, I started to see more objects, within this old, wooden object. They were small items, made of paper and leather; books. However, I had long forgotten what they were; where I was. Once more, I could only wait, however, this time, there was that small glimmer of excitement, in my bored, empty mind.

    With expectation, I watched and watched, as they passed by me with unsurmountable speed, while still growing taller and taller. Before I knew, another shelf sprang up, with yet another set of books. Then, as the days and week passed, there came more and more shelves; more and more books, until a change, like never before happened. I felt contact, upon my foot.

    Then, as if a new world opened up to me, I lost contact to the old book, and it fell to the ground, finally finished with its age old journey; finally, it had arrived at its mark. And just like that, my body collapse, and fell to the ground. There was a weird sensation; I could move my eyes, feel the motion of the wind, upon my pale skin, and feel my long, dark hair flutter in the breeze.

    Suddenly, I felt a power in my body; something I hadn¡¯t felt in a long time, and with a decisive motion, I stood up, and rose. It was completely as if a new world had opened up to me. It felt familiar, yet completely new, to stand up, and finally move.

    Like that, I stood still for hours, enjoying the sensation of the cold wind against my skin, until finally, I let my eyes wonder to that small, leather bound book, which had dragged me onwards for as long as I could remember. With slow steps, I walked over to it with slow steps.

    The book was weirdly centred on the floor, perfectly placed between the two opposite bookshelves. For a while, I hesitated, before I finally decided to pick it up. At first sight, there was nothing spectacular with it. Even after having it centered in the middle my line of sight, for an vast amount of time, there was still nothing special about it.

    However, even after all these years, I had still not glanced inside it. Thus, it was with both fear and excitement that I finally opened the book, to glance inside it. However, what I saw was nothing like I would have ever expected. It was¡­ blank. The pages inside the book, all of them, were completely blank!

    However, I didn¡¯t feel a single thing. Not despair, not surprise, I wasn¡¯t even annoyed. After all, I had a bit of amnesia at the moment. I wasn¡¯t even able to speak a language, as everything was simply blocked. However, even though the pages were completely blank, I am not to say that nothing at all happened. As a matter of fact, after I had gloated at the book for a while, it started glowing so brightly that it blinded me.

    Then, when it finally toned down, to my surprise, I found that my surroundings had completely changed! I was no longer surrounded by bookshelves and books, but I was inside a chamber. Inside the chamber, there was gray. Gray walls, gray floors, gray roof. And in the middle, was a gray pedestal, with a gray book.

    The first thought I had when I saw my surroundings, was: Lonely. A word. This sad word popped into my mind, the moment I saw this room, yet I had no idea what it meant. I just knew that this place, was lonely.

    Then, as I had taken my surroundings in, I slowly walked towards the lonely pedestal, neither careful, not excited. I simply walked over there, with an empty mind, except for one word: Lonely. Then, after several slow steps, I arrived in front of the gray pedestal, and placed my hand on the book.

    With a slow, unmotivated motion, I opened the first page of the book. And what I saw, I truly did not expect, and this time I mean it. On this first page, were words! Three words, written in black letters, on white paper, were on this first page, of the gray book. And I knew what they said. ¡°An Immortal¡¯s Trial¡± was the title to the book. And, as I read those words, and overflow of information started seeping into my brain. Everything from words, to memories were coming back to me. After this very, very long time, I finally remembered who I was; what had happened.

    And the very first though that came to my mind, after I finally remembered everything, from who I was, to why I was here, was,

    ¡°Why the fuck didn¡¯t it just teleport me here right away!¡±

    Indeed, I was pissed. I had spent such a long time, in a brainless state, devoid of will. It had been agonising; worse than any torture you could ever undergo. But, there was no one here that I could went on, so I could only bite it in me, and read the damned book. So, I opened the next page, and was met with a few words,

    ¡°Enter the Trial, and you shall find the path to that which you most desire,¡± it read. Nothing else. I turned another page, and was met with a map. And weirdly, as I gazed upon this map, it was as if I instantly knew where it was, even though I had never been there before, in my life. It was truly weird, but I wasn¡¯t surprised. After all, storing information in objects was a possibility, although, it would usually require me to do some sort of probing into the object.You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.

    Then, as I closed the book, in front of me, at the other end of the chamber, appeared a doorway, in same monotone, gray hue. I tried to take the book, but to my surprise, it couldn¡¯t even leave the pedestal. It was as if it was glued to the surface. Thus, I simply dropped it, and walked over to the doorway. And, as I entered the mysterious doorway, the scenery around me, once more, changed completely, however, this time I met a more familiar scene. It was that great hall, where I first entered the Tower.

    ¡°Ah, he¡¯s out,¡± I heard someone say, the moment I exited the tower. As I turned my head, I found it to be a silver guard, and beside him was another man. However, this man, he seeped with incredible power. I had no way of telling how powerful he was, but just from his aura, I could tell he was at least an Immortal. Of course, this puzzled me. Why would an Immortal wait for me here?

    ¡°Impressive,¡± the Immortal said with a shocked expression, ¡°You¡¯ve been inside the library for five hundred years, yet you¡¯ve already reached this stage of power. Going from early Mythical Saint, to early Legendary Saint, with a power of a middle Legendary Saint, in only five hundred years? This is truly divine! And to even do it inside the Tower! It must truly be as I was told,¡± the Immortal said, as he walked towards me, with an amiable smile.

    ¡°What do you mean five hundred years? I¡¯m sure it¡¯s been much longer than that. And how do you know me?¡± I asked him, making sure not to seem to disrespectful.

    ¡°No, it¡¯s only been a bit over five hundred years. I¡¯ve been waiting for you, since the day you first entered the Tower. And I was notified of your existence, the moment you were tested. However, it¡¯s best we don¡¯t speak about it here. How about you come with me, for a while?¡± The Immortal asked.

    I didn¡¯t dare deny his wish, so I complied, and followed him. The Immortal didn¡¯t take me out of the Tower, but instead took me to another hallway, and up a few stairs, until we found ourselves inside a comfy little room.

    ¡°Alright, here we can speak in peace. Let¡¯s just get straight to the point. I know you¡¯re a Demi God,¡± the Immortal said.

    ¡°What?! How?¡± I asked back, with a shocked expression, and mouth agape.

    ¡°It¡¯s all in that power test you took. The only people that are able to be as powerful as you were at the time, at only that stage, are Demi Gods, and the testing ball itself, has a function that can tell if there is something special about the tested. Of course, there are limits to it,¡± the Immortal explained.

    ¡°Then, do you also know who my parents are?¡± I asked, slightly worried about the whole situation.

    ¡°No, I don¡¯t. I only know that you¡¯re probably a Demi God of Death, or at least mostly. However, I¡¯m inclined to believe you have two God parents, considering you said ¡®parents¡¯, in plural. Demi Gods born from two Gods are even rarer. They usually have a mortal mother, at least from my experience. Not that I have met many Demi Gods. It¡¯s extraordinarily rare for them to be sent down here,¡± the Immortal said.

    ¡°Then, tell me, why have you taken me here?¡± I finally asked.

    ¡°Well, there¡¯s no big reason, I just wanted to meet you, and perhaps take you under my wing. So, what say you, interested in working for me?¡± The Immortal said with a smug smirk. I, however, remained silent for a few moments. I needed to think this through. Indeed, there could be quite a few advantages if I did join him, but I knew nothing of him. At least, I was fairly certain he would treat me well. After all, I was a Demi God.

    ¡°Perhaps, but I don¡¯t even know who you are. Can you tell me a bit about you, and what you represent?¡± I finally asked. The Immortal, however, laughed.

    ¡°Of course, of course, I haven¡¯t even told you who I am. Well, I hope you won¡¯t spread this information around, but I¡¯ll begin with my power level. I won¡¯t specify my exact power level, but I¡¯ll tell you that I¡¯m an Exalted Immortal, the third and last stage of an Immortal,¡± he began. I was quite surprised; I had expected him to be powerful, but that I¡¯d suddenly meet and Exalted Immortal, that was beyond my expectations.

    ¡°As for my name, it¡¯s Valadriath, ruler of the Dominion of Valadriath, one of the Tower Guardians,¡± he announced with a mighty valour, which made it seem like he could topple the heavens themselves.

    ¡°You¡¯re the ruler of the Dominion? That¡¯s convenient, since I make my home in your capital,¡± I said slowly, as I was still thinking about taking him up on his offer.

    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s convenient indeed. Now, what say you?¡± He asked, starting to get a bit inpatient.

    ¡°Can I think about it for a while? Right now I can¡¯t, as I have a very important task to take care of. How about I give you an answer later, when I¡¯m ready?¡±

    ¡°Hmm, that¡¯s fine too. Since you have an important task, I won¡¯t hold you. When you¡¯re ready, just come to my Palace in the city, or the Tower. But first, you never told me your name,¡± the Immortal Valadriath said.

    ¡°Oh right, my name is Isaac Coldblood,¡± I told him.

    ¡°Alright then, Isaac Coldblood, well met. I will take my leave now, and hopefully, we¡¯ll meet again at a later time,¡± he said, then, he suddenly disappeared without a trace.

    Truly powerful. However, I had more important things to take care of now. First, I needed to get back to the city, and tell Targhas my plans, and also check on his progress. It¡¯s been five hundred years, so he should be far more powerful now. Might even have reached the Mythical Saint stage, if he¡¯s lucky. Never know what kind of techniques one could train around here.

    But, there was something about what he said, which really puzzled me. He said that I had spent only five hundred years in the Tower, but I was certain that it ought to have been much, much longer than that. Sure, being frozen still, not able to move a single muscle was dreadfully boring, which might make it seem longer, but not to that extent. It had felt like thousands of years, if not several hundred thousand years, or even a million years. But apparently, it was only a short moment, as I had already spent about five hundred years inside there, when I grabbed the book. However, for now, that was an unanswerable question.

    Thus, I finally left the Tower, after five hundred years, and made my way back to the city of Xarxes. It was at this time that I could truly feel how much more powerful I was. There was quite a bit of power difference between the early and middle stage, of a Legendary Saint. I only spent a little bit over a day, to get back, but I could have managed it in under a day, if I flew at full speed.

    And thus, I was finally back in the city, after five hundred years, only to notice that barely anything had changed. As I made my way back to the building, in which Targhas¡¯ home was in, it, too, hadn¡¯t changed a bit. Thus I entered the building, and went up a few stairs, until I stood outside his apartment.

    The door was unlocked, so I easily opened it, and took a step inside. The sight I met, when I opened the door, was a maid, cleaning the room, but it wasn¡¯t one of the girls I took off the street. They were probably long dead.

    ¡°Can I help you, sir?¡± The old maid asked. Indeed, she was quite old, and had a head full of gray hair.

    ¡°No need,¡± I said, as I stepped past the maid, however, the maid took my arm, to stop me, as I passed her.

    ¡°Excuse me, sir, but strangers around allowed to just enter the house,¡± the old maid fearlessly said.

    ¡°Haha, don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m on stranger. In fact, I do believe I live here, if Targhas hasn¡¯t moved homes without telling me,¡± I said, much to the old maid¡¯s surprise.

    ¡°This is indeed Lord Targhas¡¯ home, but I¡¯m certain you don¡¯t live here! I haven¡¯t even ever seen you, in my entire life, and I¡¯ve worked here for over fifty years!¡± The old maid said, ever confident.

    ¡°Well, that¡¯s because I left on a small trip, about five hundred years ago,¡± I said, however, before the maid could even reply, Targhas burst into the room.

    ¡°By the Gods, you¡¯re back! That was a lot longer than just a few dozen years! Those maids you got even died quite a while ago!¡± Targhas exclaimed. Well, at least this confirmed that it ought not be much over five hundred years since I left.

    ¡°Well, I do believe I said it might take a few centuries¡­ Anyways, you¡¯ve sure progressed nicely! You¡¯re already an early stage Mythical Saint! That¡¯s the same stage I was at, when I left. Now however, I¡¯ve already become a true Legendary Saint,¡± said, much to the old maid¡¯s surprise. She even stepped a few steps back, when she heard of my true power.

    The reason she didn¡¯t feel any fear before, is because I was supressing my aura, as to not scare her. She was an old woman, so she might get heart troubles. Targhas quickly walked over to the maid, to introduce,

    ¡°This here, is Isaac. You could say he¡¯s my master, so you better treat him well,¡± Targhas introduced, and the old maid just looked on in awe, unable to introduce herself back.

    ¡°Let¡¯s go Targhas, we need to speak,¡± I said, as I walked past the maid, this time without getting my arm grabbed. Inside another room, I told Targhas about my discovery, and that I¡¯d have to leave again.

    ¡°You¡¯re going to have to go again? How long this time?¡± He asked.

    ¡°No idea. I don¡¯t know what to expect from that place, or what kind of trial it is. I¡¯m pretty sure that not many people have ever been there, as the way I got there was far too coincidental. Just be prepared, as it might be a very long time again, or it might be very short,¡± I told him.

    ¡°Alright then. When are you going to leave?¡±

    ¡°In a few days, maybe a week,¡± I finally answered, after pondering for a while. Then after we were finished discussing matters of the Tower, and the mysterious Trial, Targhas explained the events of the past five hundred years that he had experienced.

    It turned out that he had just recently reached the Mythical Saint stage, and had become a normal Saint just a few days after I left. As for his business, it had grown exponentially the past half millennia. In fact, he could easily have moved to much larger home.

    He owned several caravans, travelled across trade routes, and he had a few stores in several cities and towns. All in all, he had his own little trade empire, and could definitely be considered a ¡®rich¡¯ man.

    End of chapter 14.

 Chapter 15: Perpetual Agony

    Chapter 15: Perpetual Agony

    Days had passed, since I made my return to the city, and to Targhas. In the one week I had spent there, we had moved homes, to a larger house, or should I say mansion. It was nothing too extravagant, but it was a single house, with only us as inhabitants; meaning that it was not a rented apartment. The house had cost a fortune, since housing was limited in this colossal city, with a colossal population.

    I had spent several days, chatting with my friend, Targhas, and I had even sent a message to that Prince, to let him know that I hadn¡¯t died, and was back from the library. However, he knew nothing more than that; not what my plans were, or where I was going to go.

    Thus, a full week had already passed by, and I decided to leave once more. Targhas wasn¡¯t too happy that I had go again, since I was the only one who knew about his ¡®condition¡¯, and also, the only one who shared it. He had been strictly forbidden to ever tell anyone about his Vampirism, or to ever spread it. It was too early to spread the Vampire race in these parts.

    Thus, I left the city of Xarxes once more, and made for the location, which had been passed unto me, from the mysterious book. This place wasn¡¯t located in this country; in fact, it was several borders away, and wouldn¡¯t be a short journey. I speculated that if I went in full speed, I could make it in a few months, but to travel at full speed for several months was a tad bit tough.

    None the less, I eventually managed to make my way to the foretold location, to be met with the magnificent sight of nothing. All that there was to be seen, was a large field of emerald green grass, as far as the eye could see. Just a large plain, no forest in sight, no mountain ranges to be seen.

    Still, there were mystical things in this world, beyond what the eye could see. I quickly made my way to the exact location from the book, which was just an empty spot, in the middle of the plains. There was still nothing there. I suspected I might have to do some digging, but before I could even start, there was a mild change. And when I say mild, I mean more like a thundering voice, which resounded through my head, saying,

    ¡°You, who have been touched by the heavens, do you wish to undertake the Immortal¡¯s Trial?¡±

    Before I could even answer the question, however, the scenery around my changed, into what seemed a lot like a dungeon. Walls made of stone bricks, many of which were cracked, and some even filled with moss, or missing, and a smooth stone floor. However, there was no ceiling, as far as I could see. Raising my head, all I could see was ceiling-less abyss, above my head. I decided to try and fly up there, but to my disfavour, I found that I couldn¡¯t fly, and my jump only got me a few meters up. I found that I couldn¡¯t use my energy at all, and my physical strength was greatly diminished by what seemed like a far heavier gravity.

    I could only walk through the straightforward path, which was ahead of me. However, the pathway was no short one, and it seemed like the end was nowhere near. As I walked through the narrow hallway, I couldn¡¯t help but let my mind wander to the Tower. I wondered what connection this place and the Tower had. Why did the flying book even bring me here?

    As far as I knew, this place might be the key to finding my brother, as it promised me the path to that which I desired the most. However, how did I find it? It was far too convenient for that book to just randomly choose me. Was there a greater power in place here? Was it my brother showing me the path, or was it something else? It wouldn¡¯t be the Tower Guardians, or that Valadriath would have known something.

    But alas, there was no answer to be found, for a very, very long time. For now, I could only look ahead, and do what had to be done. And at this moment, that would be to walk through this increasingly narrow hallway. Indeed, as I walked, the walls seemed to creep closer and closer to me, which was the only sign I had that showed that I actually progressed.

    Then finally, after walking and running for several days, I seemed to finally have made it to the end. And at the end, I was met with a seemingly normal door, only slightly taller than myself. Above the door, however was a sign.

    ¡° The First Immortal¡¯s Trial,¡± were the first three, title words.

    ¡°To achieve greatness, one must know tolerance, and have a will of steel,¡± it then continued to say. Nothing more, nothing less. It had no information on what I would need to do, when I walked through the door, except that it had to do with tolerance, and willpower.

    However, I wouldn¡¯t waver, and without hesitation, I opened the door, and walked in. As soon as I had stepped foot into the next room, the door shut closed, locked tightly. No matter how hard I pulled, the door didn¡¯t even as much as budge. But that wasn¡¯t a big deal, but what happened next, most certainly was.

    I suddenly felt almost all the power in my body fade away. Something which I hadn¡¯t felt in over a thousand years, suddenly happened. I felt the clock of time tick, as my body slowly aged, as if I was nothing but a mortal man. Even most of my physical strength disappeared. At this moment, it would only take a few thousand, or tens of thousands of mortal men to defeat me, which, believe me, was a great diminishing in my physical power.

    However, even though I aged, it didn¡¯t mean my humanity returned. I still felt the normal lust for blood, but it hadn¡¯t increased. It seemed to be the only thing that hadn¡¯t changed. In my current state, I could probably go for a rather long time without blood. I would only be slightly troubled after several decades, or even centuries. It rather puzzled me, but I paid it no mind. I reckoned that the tolerance for hunger wasn¡¯t directly involved with my power, but perhaps, rather my age.

    As I walked further into the room, I had never felt so weak before. But there were seemingly no threats to be found. But it most certainly wasn¡¯t the same as before, when I walked through the hallway, for this was only a single room, with a single, locked door. It wasn¡¯t very large either; it almost seemed like a cell.

    However, just as I was about to sit down to think, suddenly a sharp pain hit me. It was like a million small needles pierced every fiber of my being. The pain was excruciating, yet not completely unbearable. I simply fell to my knee for a moment, then slowly stood back up, in a low growl.

    ¡°What is this!¡± I growled, but no answer returned to me. I slowly limped to a corner in the room, and sat down.

    ¡°This must be what it meant by tolerance and will. Even though this is more like endurance,¡± I slowly said aloud, to no one in particular, considering the fact that I was completely alone, in a dark room.

    So, there was not much I could do, except wait for the pain to be subside. Yet, it didn¡¯t; it just stayed, without rest. In fact, the pain never subsided, but instead it slowly increased in intensity. Days passed, then weeks, until the pain was so excruciating to the point, where my mind couldn¡¯t function. It increased and increased further yet, faster than I could adapt, and it wasn¡¯t too long before I could do nothing, but scream in harrowing pain.

    The pain caused my muscles to tense to unnatural proportions, and my skin to rupture, in earth-like cracks. The only thing that kept me going, was the fact that I would do anything to get Amelia back. Thinking about Amelia helped me keep whatever calmness I could muster.

    And just like that, in excruciating, mind twisting pain, five years had passed, before anything changed. However, even though something did indeed change, it didn¡¯t mean that the pain stopped. It just sopped increasing constantly, which was, in itself, refreshing.

    I finally had the opportunity to get used to the pain, to adapt, as long as it didn¡¯t start increasing again. And it didn¡¯t seem like it would. Several months passed, and I had finally gotten to a point where I could sort of function. I was able to walk around, even run slowly, and I could think calmly once more.

    But then, as I though this test was finally going to end soon, the pain suddenly took a huge jump in magnitude, and I screamed, once more, in agonizing pain. However, I didn¡¯t faint. Not once, since I entered this cursed room, had I fainted. It was like it didn¡¯t allow me to faint. It wanted me awake for every moment, of this soul racking agony. It was yet another thing that puzzled my mind.

    As the pain had taken a large jump in intensity, it started slowly increasing again, making it hard to get used to. Thus, another five years passed, before it stopped again for a few months, then took another jump. Then another five years, and so on.

    It kept going like that, until a total of twenty years had passed. It had long since passed the point where I felt like I shouldn¡¯t even be alive, but somehow, I didn¡¯t die. My appearance, though, changed drastically. My skin was somewhat aged and wrinkled; not from not drinking any blood, but from normal mortality.

    My hair had long since grown completely white, from the intense stress, caused by the pain, and it had grown much longer than before. It reached all the way to the floor, and then some. In the past, I had somehow managed to stop it from growing, using my powers, but now that they were seemingly gone, it grew uninhibited, just like my body aged.

    There was also a large beard on my face, reaching long beneath my chest. Like my hair, it was unkempt and messy; tangled in several places, but there was nothing I could do about it.

    However, it was after these twenty years, that the pain suddenly stopped. This time, it didn¡¯t simply stop increasing, but completely vanished. It felt like entering a new world, or even a new state of being. It felt like my body was lightened from a great burden, and most importantly, it felt relaxing. I hadn¡¯t had a single second of relaxation in the past twenty years, so it was overwhelming, especially considering how taxing those years were. I doubted that even my wives would recognise me anymore.

    I looked nothing like my past, seemingly twenty-year-old self. My current appearance, was more in accordance with my actual age. If you took away my beard and hair, I looked around forty, or maybe fifty years old, but with my white hair and beard, I looked ancient; mostly because the beard covered a large part of my face, and because both the hair and beard were extremely unkempt. However, that was not to say that I looked unimpressive. In fact, if I was to be frank, I looked intimidating; far more than before.

    My youthful appearance of the past, had somehow made me seem more innocent, and perhaps na?ve, not that I was na?ve. But I didn¡¯t look like a weathered warrior.

    Then, as the pain disappeared, I simply fell to the ground, as that old, thundering voice appeared again,

    ¡°Congratulations, you have passed the first session, and may continue onwards,¡± it said, in an emotionally void voice, as a door appeared in the opposite end of the room, almost mirroring the door I came through.

    After I dozed off for a few hours, I finally rose up once more, and walked over to the newly appeared door, and opened it, without further ceremony. As I entered the new room, the door shut closed, just like before.

    This new room, was almost identical to the first hallway I entered. It, too, didn¡¯t have a ceiling, and seemed incredibly long. However, the most important thing was, that as I entered the room, I finally felt my power return to me, or at least what power hadn¡¯t already been restricted since entering this Trial. However, my appearance didn¡¯t change. Changing my appearance was not a power I possessed.

    Thus, once more, I started walking forwards, trying to find the end of this narrowing hallway. Just as before, I was surrounded by olden brick walls, many cracked, some adorned with moss, as I traversed the murky hallways of this age old dungeon.

    Unlike in the beginning, I felt neither need, nor demand to make haste. I simply walked, at my own pace, in my tiresome and weary heedlessness. My motivation was nearly non-existent; the only though that made me want to see the end, was the thought of reviving my love.The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement.

    Thus, I walked for days, pulling my long, white hair behind me, like the royal cape of a forsaken king. My clothes were ripped, and soaked in dried blood, making me look like quite the weathered traveller. But my mind paid no attention to it, or I would have long cut my hair, with my old sword, sheathed on the side of my waist.

    Day after day passed, until they became months, the changed to years. When I finally saw that old, familiar door, it had already been several years, of constant walking, without rest.

    Above the, about two meter, door, there was once again a sign, made of rotten oak. On the old wooden sign, which had somehow managed to last the currents of time, there were several words written, in a conformity to the previous sign, at the previous door. The words, spoke as such,

    ¡°The Second Immortal¡¯s Trial,¡± was the title.

    ¡°To achieve magnificence, one must have the power to win against all odds, but one must always possess foresight and superior judgement, to that which is hidden in plain sight,¡± the next few words read. I, however, didn¡¯t pay the word too much mind. From prior experience, I knew that the words wouldn¡¯t tell me much about the next trial; I only knew that it would surely be a big one.

    Thus, I opened the door, and stepped through. Once more, the door shut tight, but this time, I didn¡¯t find myself in a small, damp room, but rather in a colossal cave, fully adorned with collapsed buildings, and ruined towers. The cave was dark, but not completely so, as there were large crystals on the rocky ceilings, giving off a faint light, somewhat illuminating the surrounding areas.

    In front of me, and the normal looking wooden door, which was placed on a normal looking stone wall, was a road, leading to whatever lied ahead. As I stepped out of the door way, and unto the road, I, once more, felt my powers fade. My physical strength was once more greatly reduced, leaving me gasping for breath, and suddenly exhausted.

    I immediately fell to my knees; it was as if the strength was directly siphoned out of my body, leaving me greatly weakened. It was a great deal different than before, but I quickly recovered. As quickly as I was up on my feet once more, I started walking the stone road, towards wherever it would lead me.

    As I walked, I absorbed the scenery around me; it had been a while since I last saw anything other than damp dungeons and hallways, so it was a refreshing change. And, to tell, the scenery was no bland one. I had not often seen anything to be compared, to the greatness of this cave. The crystals were absolutely beautiful, and the light they showered on the old ruined buildings was magnificent and awe inspiring.

    This place looked like it could have housed a great civilization, once, a long, long time ago. As I walked, and hour passed, before I arrived at what almost seemed like some sort of plaza. However, this plaza, which was in almost pristine condition, was not what caught my attention.

    No, it was what was to be found, standing in this bright plaza, with a crystal fountain, spewing sparkling water. In front of crystal fountain, was a being; a man. A man, adorned in black, crystal armour, from head to toe, not revealing a single piece of skin that would reveal if this was a real, living person, or not.

    As I came around the corner, revealing the plaza, the fountain, and the man, the Crystal Warrior immediately turned around, and immediately noticed my presence. Thus, he didn¡¯t waste a single second, as he raised his arm and opened his hand, where a crystal sword suddenly grew out of.

    The crystal man immediately made a step with his foot, as he instantly rushed towards me. With a swing of his sword, he cleaved the building next to me in half, and the shockwave sent me flying, dozens of meters away.

    As the dust settled, the Crystal Warrior once more turned to me, and started walking,

    ¡°Losing is the only option,¡± the gravelly, raspy voice resounded, in an echo that repeated several times, throughout the cave. As the Crystal Warrior said the words, he didn¡¯t stop walking, and continuously neared closer and closer to my location.

    I quickly got up, and unsheathed my sword, from the sheath on my side, ready to take on the Crystal Warrior. However, I made sure that I was always aware of my surroundings; I couldn¡¯t risk an ambush, in case there were others. However, I didn¡¯t fear too much. The power of his attacks were not all that great, and before, I had been taken unaware.

    Thus, I stood there, holding my sword in a guard, as the Crystal warrior drew ever closer, until, finally, it stood only a few meters away from me. The Crystal Warrior raised his sword, then his free hand, grabbing the sword into a two handed hold. Then, with the speed of lighting, the sword descended, and he stepped forwards.

    However, I, with nearly equal speed, raised my sword, clashing directly unto the crystal sword of my enemy. As the two swords clashed, I expected my sword to directly shatter the fragile crystal, however, it was not so. The crystal sword directly cleaved through my sword, with far too great ease, then lodged into my shoulder, cutting several inches deep.

    However, before it could go too deep, I reacted and jumped away, then without hesitation, I turned tails and ran away, as quickly as I could. That went drastically different from what I had expected; I guess I overestimated my weakened strength, and thus, got defeated.

    As I ran, I turned as many corners as I could, between the closely packed ruined buildings, of the ruined town. I kept running for half an hour, until I reached an old tower that hadn¡¯t collapsed, and seemed to be in a relatively good condition. It was also pretty well hidden, a not too small distance from the town, and hidden in-between several hills and cliffs.

    Carefully, I drew closer to the tower, with my broken sword in one hand, while the other held the wound on my shoulder tight. Slowly, I walked towards the tower, in a near crouch, until I finally reached the main door, which was collapsed, and lay on the floor. I calmed my mind, and decided to enter; it wasn¡¯t very likely for anyone to be there anyway. And indeed, after thirty minutes of careful searching, I confirmed the tower to be empty.

    Thus, I climbed to the top, of the five story tower, into the dim and dusty attic, and sat down in a corner. My first matter of business, was my wound. It had mostly stopped bleeding, but it was still wide open. It seemed like my healing factor had been taken away, as well. Since it didn¡¯t seem to heal quickly, I tore off the arm of my blouse, and tied it around my shoulder.

    Then, I grabbed my hair, and let my hand flow through it,

    ¡°I guess I should cut this,¡± I said, with my deeper, older, and most definitely weathered voice, as I grabbed the broken sword, which I had dropped on the floor, with my right hand, and let my eyes move around the sword, as I gave it an examining look. This sword had been with me for a long time already.

    It was there when I fought the Immortal Demon Master; it was there when I lost Amelia, and now I was here, as it lay broken in my hand; the other shard on an old road, somewhere far away from here.

    Without a thought, I let it move to my throat, as it cut through the white beard, then the long, white hair, until both the hair, and the beard were shortened greatly, once more. Now, my beard didn¡¯t go below the chin, as I wasn¡¯t able to completely cut it away, and my hair went just below the shoulders.

    It was a much more comfortable style. Before, when I ran through the ruined streets, I stepped on my overgrown hair several times. As my new hairdo was finally finished, I stepped away from the bundle of hair, lying on the floor, and stepped to small crevice of a window. The window was so small that I could just barely look through it, with one eye.

    Through the small window, I scanned all of the area outside that I could see, trying to find the Crystal Warrior. I knew that I had to be careful from now on; that Crystal Warrior could easily kill me. If it wasn¡¯t for my steel mind, and almost complete insensitivity to pain, I would have died before. In fact, it was a miracle that I could escape so easily. I had no idea how he didn¡¯t catch up to me, but I also didn¡¯t keep an eye on him as I ran, so I suppose it was possible for him to not be very quick at running.

    As I had spent near an hour, looking through the small window, I decided to take a rest. Even though the pain didn¡¯t even bother me slightly, it was still a wound; a disability. I needed to get it healed, but I wasn¡¯t able to use any magic, and I didn¡¯t have much knowledge on medicine. Even if I did, there was not much to use. So, my only alternative, was to rest.

    Thus, I sat down in the middle of the room, crossed my legs, and let my eyes rest, as the comforting darkness took over.

    Thus, three days passed. And in only three days, the wound had completely healed, and closed up; however, not without leaving a harrowing scar, going all the way around my shoulder, and down towards my chest and back.

    As I had healed up, I once more stood up, on the floor, and let my hand rest on my chin, touching the rough beard on my cheeks. I had never before had a beard; never possessed the ability. After all, I was barely past eighteen, when I first became a Vampire, so I could never grow one. However, the one I had now was both ragged, and rough around the edges.

    But I didn¡¯t put mind to it; didn¡¯t care. I had other troubles on my mind; at this moment, I only wanted to get out of here, so I could finish my task. Thus, I ventured down the stairs of the tower, down to the ground floor, then left the tower.

    Outside the tower, I still didn¡¯t see a single sign of any Crystal Warrior. It made me wonder, whether he was alone here, or there truly were other of his kin. I hoped for the former.

    After leaving the tower, I left in a random direction, although not towards the ruined city, and scoured the humongous cave. Calling it a cave was an understatement; it was like a whole word in itself. It made think that either I was extremely far below ground, or I was somewhere else entirely, compared to where the map showed me.

    After looking around the giant cave for an entire day, I still hadn¡¯t found anything interesting, except for the occasional ruined building or farm, or seven some villages. However, there were still no Crystal Warriors. But, there was something unexpected; I felt tired. After walking for more than an entire day, I felt a bit tired. It seemed like even my need for sleep was back, although, with my physical condition, I should be able to stay for several days straight easily.

    But I still ventured back, to the prior tower. I went back up to the attic, sat down cross legged, and rested for six hours, before waking up again. As my eyes opened, I already had a new goal in mind; the Ruined City. I reckoned that I would find the Crystal Warrior there, if anywhere. It was where I met him first, and most likely where I would meet him next.

    Thus, I once more left the hidden tower, but this time in the direction of the city, which I had dubbed the Ruined City. If I walked, it would take a few hours, to a day to get there, but by running, I could make it much faster. Thus, I ran to the Ruined City, and in less than twenty minutes, I stood a short mile away from it.

    This time, I would be careful. I knew what lurked behind those walls, and there might even be more than just one of them. However, I had a theory; they couldn¡¯t leave the city. That was the only reasonable explanation for why it didn¡¯t follow me.

    After lying flat on my stomach, scouting the city, I finally rose to a crouch, and ventured forwards, ever so carefully, until I was just outside the city, and before I knew it, I had my entrance.

    As I crept along the shadowy pathways, I constantly kept close to the walls, and kept my head low, making me as small and invisible, as was possible. However, as I searched the city, I still didn¡¯t find anything of interest. At least, not until I somehow made it back to the crystal fountain. And, just like before, the moment the crystal fountain appeared in my eyesight, that same Crystal Warrior turned around rapidly, and stared me dead in the eye,

    ¡°Losing is the only option,¡± it said again, before a sword materialized out of his hand, and he leapt towards me, in a heave slash. However, I never let my guard down, since I entered this city, so I managed to jump out of the way this time, only to see his sword lay waste to yet another building.

    I immediately unsheathed my broken sword, as it was the only weapon I had, just before the Crystal Warrior charged at me again, with an even greater speed. This time, I stepped to the side, but he already managed to get to my side, as his sword grew ever closer to my abdomen.

    However, in the nick of time, I managed to move my broken sword to deflect, and I managed to lead his sword to the side, but without putting a crack in the sword, as well as pushing it into my side, causing me to roll to the side.

    The sword of the Crystal Warrior, however, didn¡¯t touch, and lodged itself into the ground, giving me the opportunity to roll away, and get it together. As the crystal machination got its sword free, it turned around towards me, and seemingly stared me down. However, I couldn¡¯t see any eyes; there was a full helmet, covering its entire face.

    The Crystal Warrior readied its sword, once more, but before it could attack, I decided to be to one to charge. I needed to see its defence capabilities, so I decided to chance it. Thus, I burst at it, keeping both my eyes on it at all times, watching as it raised its sword, ready to attack. However, as the sword descended towards me, I quickly took a step back, causing the sword lodge itself in the ground, once more.

    As the sword was stuck, I grabbed the opportunity, and jumped on the sword, getting a higher reach on the tall crystal. Then, using my sword, I stabbed at the neck. However, instead of piercing into the neck, and killing it, my broken sword, which was now more like a knife, only made a small nick into its crystal skin.

    And before I could do anything else, the crystal fist of the Crystal Warrior lodged itself into my stomach, sending me flying into a nearby wall, and collapsing a building atop of me. As the rubble fell on me, I spewed out a large mouthful of blood, however, the rubble didn¡¯t cause any damage, and I easily threw it aside.

    Once more, I faced the giant Crystal Warrior, standing about three meters tall. Now, my back was slightly hunched from the previous attack, but my eyes didn¡¯t waver in the slightest. Instead, they observed; observed everything, from the Crystal Warrior, to the surrounding around us, trying to find any weakness or opportunity.

    However, there were none to be found. The Crystal Warrior was completely monotone. For a while, he didn¡¯t even move; he just stared me down, as if we had entered a staring competition, from the prior fight to the death. However, as soon as I moved my foot just slightly, it attacked once more. This time, its speed seemed even faster, but somehow I managed to roll out of the way, just in the nick of time, as the sword breezed past me. However, it still managed to send me flying, from the winds caused by the attack. However, this time, it didn¡¯t hurt me, and I was on guard after only a single instant.

    Continuously, I kept my eyes on the Crystal Warrior, as he readied yet another attack. Once more, the attack was just slightly faster, yet, this time I managed to dodge it completely.

    From the few scuffled I had with the Crystal Warrior, I had noticed something. Its attacks were predictable. It always attacked in the same way; the same motion. It almost seemed robotic. Thus, on the last attempt, I managed to dodge in time. However, I wasn¡¯t sure if I could keep up, as it seemed to attack faster and faster every time.

    Thus, once more, I turned tails and ran for my life, leaving the city in an instant. As soon as I had gotten a good distance away from the city, I turned around and looked back. Indeed, the Crystal Warrior was nowhere to be found.

    End of chapter 15.